JP2018015400A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine having features in displays by image display means.SOLUTION: A pachinko machine 100 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 capable of displaying image displays. The decorative symbol display device 208 can display a super ready-to-win presentation display. After a display suggesting a failure has been displayed in the super ready-to-win presentation display, a first wipe presentation display is to be displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be a case in which, when the first wipe presentation display is ending, a first read-ahead notice presentation display is to be started.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a spinning cylinder game machine (slot machine), or an enclosed game machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming table provided with image display means is known.

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, there is room for improvement in the display by the image display means in the conventional game machine.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a feature in display by image display means.

The above purpose is
A gaming machine comprising first image display means capable of displaying an image display,
The first image display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a first reach effect display,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a first look-ahead notice effect display,
In the first reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift is displayed, the first wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means,
At the end of the first wipe effect display, the first prefetch notice effect display may be started,
This is achieved by a game stand characterized by that.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in display by the image display means.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 according to a first embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part of pachinko machine 100 by a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows the stop display symbol of special figure 2 (C) is an example of a decorative symbol, and (d) is a diagram illustrating an example of a normal stop display symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. (A) is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the special figure prefetch process in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. (B)-(e) is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for special figures 1 and the special figure 2 with which the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention was equipped. is there. It is a figure which shows the determination table for common use in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, and the example of symbol distribution and the operation at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of the determination table for the special figure in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol distribution table for the special figure 1 in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, and operation | movement at the time of big hit. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol distribution table for the special figure 2 in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, and the operation | movement at the time of big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) Shows the flow of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, (c) shows the flow of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) shows the flow of the image control process. It is a figure explaining the electric long opening effect performed by the effect control process of the main process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. (A) shows the flow of the electric long opening effect, and (b) shows an example of the electric long opening effect on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 2nd sub control part main process, (b) Shows the flow of the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, and (c) shows the flow of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process. It is a figure which shows the example of the lottery table of the prefetching advance notice used by the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, and the lottery table of the notice at the time of change disclosure (after big hit judgment). It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of the 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of the 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of the 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of the 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 7 of the 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of the 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 9 of the 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a figure explaining the movable body 1002 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (1) explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (2) explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 7 of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the connection unit of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the connection unit of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 9 of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 13 of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 14 of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 15 of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 16 of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 17 of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 18 of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 19 of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 20 of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 21 of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 22 of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 23 of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 24 of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the production pattern of the game production in the pachinko machine 100 of the 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the connection unit of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-1 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the connection unit of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-2 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-2 of the 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-3 of the 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-4 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-5 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-6 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-7 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-1 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-1 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-2 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-2 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-1 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-2 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-3 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-4 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-5 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-6 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-7 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4-1 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4-2 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5-1 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5-2 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5-3 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5-4 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6-1 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6-2 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6-3 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 4th mode of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of the 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of the 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of the 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of the 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 7 of the 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of the 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 9 of the 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 3-5 of the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 6 and 7 of the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 and 9 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the holding | maintenance icon in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 in the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 13 of the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 14 of the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 15 of the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 16 of the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 17 of the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 18 of the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 19 of the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 20 of the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 21 and 22 of the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 23 and 24 of the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 25 of the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 26 of the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 27 of the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 28 of the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 29 of the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 30 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 31 of the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 32 of the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 33 of the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 34 of the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 35-37 of the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 38 and 39 of the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 40 and 41 of the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 42 of the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 43 and 44 of the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 45 and 46 of the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 47 of the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 48-50 of the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 51 of the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 52 and 53 of the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 54 and 55 of the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 56,57 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 58 and 59 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 60 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 61,62 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 63 and 64 of the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 65,66 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 67 and 68 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 69 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 70 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 71,72 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the kind of holding | maintenance effect in the pachinko machine 100 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1, 2 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 3-7 of the 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 8 and 9 of the 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 10 and 11 of the 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 12 and 13 of the 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 14 and 15 of the 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 16 of the 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by the modification of Example 16 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 17 of the 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by the modification of Example 17 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 18 of the 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 19 of the 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 20 of the 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 21 of the 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 22 of the 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 23 of the 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 24 of the 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 25 of the 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 26 of the 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 27 of the 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 28 of the 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 29 of the 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 30 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 31 of the 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 32 and 33 of the 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 34 and 35 of the 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of the 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of the 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of the 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of the 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 7 of the 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of the 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is the schematic front view which looked at the slot machine 2000 as a game stand by the modification of this invention from the front. It is a figure which shows the game stand by the modification of this invention, (a) shows the casino machine 3000, (b) shows the mobile telephone 4000 provided with the memory | storage part which memorize | stores the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention, (C) shows a portable game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) shows a home television set having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. A game machine 6000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 7000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so as to be inside thereof. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The front frame door 106 can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “balls”) in a portion below the opening 116 and guide the game balls to the launching device 110. The upper plate 126 is provided, the lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 by the player's operation are discharged to the lower plate 128. A ball release button 130, a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 128 by a player's operation to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box), and a player's operation to the launcher 110. The ball launching handle 134 that launches the guided game ball to the game area 124 of the game board 200, and the chance to change the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (not shown in FIG. 1) by the player's operation. To the button 136, a chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light, a setting operation unit 137 that can be set by a setting person (for example, a player or a game clerk), and a card unit (CR unit) A ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending, a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance, and a ball lending display section for displaying the player's balance and card unit status ( (Not shown). In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The setting operation unit 137 is a push button type switch that can be pressed by the setter, and a confirm (OK) button, an upper button positioned above the confirm button, a lower button positioned below the confirm button, and confirm A right button positioned to the right of the button, a left button positioned to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button positioned further to the right of the right button. The setting operation unit 137 includes an operation unit sensor that detects the pressing of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of this example has a unit structure in which buttons and operation unit sensors are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 functions as a chance button that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the player's operation when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It may be.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding a ball that has passed through the communicating hole and dropped to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is provided.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is displayed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout controller 600 (see FIG. 4). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, the main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and the production based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs the control process and the first sub-board 160 that houses the first sub-board 160 that includes the rotary volume control switch 161 that adjusts the volume output from the pachinko machine 100 by the operation of the game shop clerk. A second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 that performs a control process related to the production based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400; An error release switch that constitutes a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls and that releases an error by the operation of a game store clerk 68, a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170, a launch board case 176 for housing a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 for performing control processing relating to the launch of a game ball, and a power source for various electric gaming machines. And a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. A power board case 184 that houses the power board 182, a CR interface unit 186 that transmits and receives signals between the dispensing control unit 600 and the card unit, and a main board for outputting information of the pachinko machine 100 to an external hall computer or the like 156, the first sub-board 160, etc. and the hall computer, etc. It is provided with a relay substrate 188, the to relay.

  The main board 156, the first sub board 160, the second sub board 164 and the like are provided on the back surface of the game board 200 because they need to be changed for each model, and the payout board 170, the launch board 174, the power board 182 and the like are provided. Since it is used in common by a plurality of models, the outer frame 102 is provided.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 at substantially the center. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The game board 200 in this example is a game board for a so-called right-handed machine. In the right-handed machine, by changing the launch strength of the game ball by operating the ball launching handle 134, the falling path of the game ball is divided into a right path on the right side from the effect device 206 and a left path on the left side from the effect device 206. be able to. In this example, to a normal symbol starting port 228, a normal symbol starting port 229, a first special symbol starting port 230, a second special symbol starting port 232 (open state), variable winning ports 234, 235 (open state), etc., which will be described later. The ease of entering the ball differs between a game ball that falls on the right path and a game ball that falls on the left path.

  For each of the normal symbol start port 229, the second special symbol start port 232 and the variable winning port 235, the normal symbol start port 229, the second special symbol start port 232 and the variable winning port 235 are arranged on the right path. Therefore, it is relatively easy to enter a game ball falling on the right path, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter a game ball falling on the left path. On the other hand, for each of the normal symbol starting port 228, the first special symbol starting port 230, and the variable winning port 234, a game that falls on the left path due to the influence of the arrangement pattern of the game nails 238, the warp device 242, and the like. It is relatively easy to enter a ball, and it is relatively difficult to enter a game ball that falls on the right path. In the present embodiment, a right-handed machine is taken as an example, but a right-handed machine may be used.

  The decorative design display device 208 is a display device for displaying decorative images and various images (moving images or still images) used for production. In the present embodiment, the decorative design display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  Below the gaming area 124, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, and a second special symbol hold lamp 220 A normal symbol holding lamp 216 and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, the special symbol as “special symbol”, the first special symbol as “special symbol 1”, and the second special symbol as “special symbol 2”.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in the present embodiment.

  The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of universal figure floating games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In the present embodiment, up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of universal figure floating games. It is possible to hold. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games that are held (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, the special figure variable games are predetermined. It is possible to hold up to a number (for example, 4). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a normal start port 228, 229, a special view 1 start port 230, and a special view 2 start port 232, are variable around the rendering device 206. Winning ports 234 and 235 are arranged.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are provided on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the present embodiment, the game balls are paid out to the player as a consideration for winning (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “prize balls”) and balls lent to the player (hereinafter referred to as “rental balls”). May be included).

  The general map start port 228 and the general map start port 229 are configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the embodiment, one general-purpose start port 228 is disposed on the left path of the game board 200, and one general-purpose start port 229 is disposed on the right path. Unlike the ball that entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the ordinary drawing starting port 228 or the universal drawing starting port 229 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map start port 228 or the general map start port 229, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one special figure 1 starting port 230 is provided at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 1 starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. Then, the special figure variable game (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “special figure 1 variable game”) by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. Note that the ball that has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The special figure 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electrical chew), and in this embodiment, only one is provided on the right path. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is provided with a pair of blade members 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the blade members 232a are closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 2 232, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. Then, a special figure variable game (hereinafter, also referred to as “special figure 2 variable game”) by the special figure 2 display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are called a large winning opening or an attacker. In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is provided below the center of the game board 200, and the variable winning opening 235 is on the right path. Only one is provided. The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are each provided with a door member that can be freely opened and closed, and a ball cannot be entered while the door member is closed. If the special figure display device stops and displays the jackpot symbol after winning the special figure variation game, for example, one door member of the variable prize opening 234, 235 is closed at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time) It opens and closes at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a winning ball. The balls that have entered the variable winning openings 234 and 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are made to pass through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the 146 and the launcher 148, and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the direction of travel by the batting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning port (general winning port 226, variable winning ports 234, 235) or Wins at the starting port (Special Figure 1 starting port 230, Special Figure 2 starting port 232), or wins without winning any of the winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal starting ports 228, 229 Reach mouth 240.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the stage device 206, a warp device 242 (242a, 242b) and a front stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is placed in the area where the game ball cannot roll. It is arranged. Further, a fourth symbol display device 248 for displaying the fourth symbol is disposed on the upper right side of the effect movable body 224. The 4th symbol display device 248 includes two square lamps. The two lamps are arranged side by side. For example, LEDs are used as the light sources of these two lamps. The upper lamp corresponds to FIG. 1 and the lower lamp corresponds to FIG. The fourth symbol display device 248 may include only one common lamp corresponding to both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Further, the fourth symbol may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Moreover, the 4th symbol display apparatus may be provided in the production | presentation apparatus 206 (center accessory) like this example. In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door or a shutter) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the front stage 244, and the effect movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the front stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The front stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball carried by a nail of the game board 200, and the passed ball is in the center of the front stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry to 230.

  The effect movable body 224 of this example includes a horizontally long flat panel on which the model name of the pachinko machine 100 and the like are displayed. The effect movable body 224 is movable by a stepping motor (not shown) so that the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be moved in the vertical direction within a plane substantially parallel to the display screen.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good. The shielding device 246 of this example is configured to expose the lower end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 even when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 performs the game ball launch control, and the power supply control unit 660 controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. .

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a time And a counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 has a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (a counter circuit) 318 (used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit includes two counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, or opening the front frame door A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device such as the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214, and a predetermined figure A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the display device, for example, the general map display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, the general map hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high Driving circuit 330 for performing display control of the center lamp 222 and the like, and various movable members such as a blade member 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and door members of the variable winning ports 234 and 235 are opened and closed. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332 is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the 1 sub control part 400 and the payout control part 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300. However, information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 may be performed by bidirectional communication.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138). A driving circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 for detecting the pressing of the chance button 136, and an output from the speaker 120. A volume adjustment switch 161 (not shown in FIG. 4) for adjusting the volume to be operated, an operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting depression of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and detection signals from these sensors An image stored in the ROM 406 based on a sensor circuit 428 output to the basic circuit 402 and a signal from the CPU 404 Are connected to the VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 which generates display image using a work area of VRAM436 reads over data or the like to display an image on the decorative pattern display unit 208, a.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and wins or rents a ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to the unit 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  Next, using FIG. 5A to FIG. 5D, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of figures and ordinary drawings will be described. FIG. 5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of FIG. 1, and FIG. 5 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of FIG. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 indicates that the ball has entered 2 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the start sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs “variable display of special figure 2” by repeating all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. . These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display in the present embodiment. When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 and the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation starts in the special figure 2. After the elapse, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display referred to in the present embodiment, the stop symbol mode of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after the "fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2" is started. A series of displays until this is done is referred to as symbol variation stop display. The symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 5 (a) shows seven types of special charts, "Special Figure A" to "Special Figure G", as the stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of Special Figure 1. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is turned off, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are turned on. "Special Figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, "Special Figure B" is a 7R special jackpot symbol, and "Special Figure C" is a 7R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not a special big hit is determined and the number of rounds are determined by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is a special figure variation game after the jackpot game ends, and the difference in probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot). Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends, after the 7R special jackpot game ends and after the 7R jackpot game ends, the state shifts to the time-saving state (electric support state). Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “normal figure probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a normal figure low probability state. “Special Figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B”, which is a 7R special jackpot symbol, are symbols that become a special figure high probability common figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends, and are 7R jackpot symbols. “Special figure C” is a symbol that becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game. These “special drawing A”, “special drawing B”, and “special drawing C” are symbols that have a relatively large advantage over the player.

  "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a symbol that becomes a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R and “Special Figure B” which is 7R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation. As will be described later, when “Special Figure E” is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state (so-called “open” time 100 ms × 2R) ends. If the special figure E is stopped and displayed in a state other than the low probability state, the special figure high probability will be displayed after the big hit game (opening time 29000 ms × 2R). Transition to the high probability state shown in FIG. 11 (see FIGS. 11A and 11B). In other words, the “special figure E” indicates that the action during the big hit game and the game state to be shifted thereafter are determined according to the game state when the stop display is made (in this example, whether or not the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). It is a different design.

  “Special figure F” is a small hit symbol, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. Further, the “special chart G” is an off-line symbol, and is a symbol that is relatively less advantageous to the player.

  FIG. 5 (b) shows four types of special figures “Special figure a” to “Special figure d” as stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of Special figure 2. “Special figure a” is a 15R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure b” is a 7R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure c” is a 7R jackpot symbol, and “Special figure d” is a missed symbol. In the present embodiment, seven types of special maps (of which five types are big hits) are used as the special symbol 2 as the special symbols 1 to 7 as shown in FIG. As the stop symbol pattern, four types of special maps (three of which are big hits) are used. By configuring in this way, there is a case where it is possible to provide a difference between the advantages of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 without changing the probability of being a big hit and the probability of being probable among the big wins. In this example, the big hit of Special Figure 1 includes sudden probability changes and latent probability changes that hardly give out balls, whereas the big hit of Special Figure 2 does not include sudden probability changes and latent probability changes. The advantage of special figure 2 is higher than that of special figure 1.

  FIG. 5 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 9” and “Decoration 10” represent the numbers “1” to “9” and “0”, respectively. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... → “decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”.

  And then, "Special Figure A" 15R special jackpot, "Special Figure B" 7R special jackpot, "Special Figure C" 7R big jackpot, "Special Figure a" 15R special jackpot, "Special Figure b" 7R special jackpot When the 7R jackpot of “special drawing c” is notified, a combination of symbols in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration 1” or “decoration 2— Display “decoration 2—decoration 2”). When the 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure A” and the 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure a” are explicitly notified, a combination of three symbols with the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “Decoration 3-Decoration 3- “Decoration 3”, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when notifying 2R big hit called “special drawing E” latent probability change (hidden probability change) or “special drawing F” small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. To do. When a 2R jackpot called “sudden change” of “special drawing D” is notified, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying of the difference between “special drawing G” and “special drawing d”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 5C are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG.5 (d) shows an example of the usual stop display symbol. In this embodiment, there are three types of stop-display modes for normal maps: “general map A” and “general map B” which are hit symbols, and “general map C” which is a misplaced symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the general map start port 228 and the general map start port 229, the general map display device 210 turns on all seven segments and displays one in the center. Repeatedly turn on the segment of “Usual change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” or “special figure B” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure C” is stopped and displayed. To do. Also in FIG. 5D, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is extinguished, and the black portions indicate the location of the segments where the light is illuminated.

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  First, in step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Enable operation, set initial values, etc. In this embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 subsequent to step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. When it is less than (9 V in this example), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a second output port, etc.) 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S109 subsequent to step S107, it is determined whether or not the state before power interruption (before power interruption) is restored. If the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is changed). In the case of initializing), the process proceeds to initialization processing (step S113). Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when an RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 is operated by a store clerk or the like is on (indicating that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 is added to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0. Thus, the checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later, the first sub control unit 400. Sent to.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, the command setting transmission process (in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300) ( In step S233), the data is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115 subsequent to step S113, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value update process, the initial values of the four random number counters for generating the normal winning random number, the normal random number, the special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 2 random value are generated. The four initial value generation random number counters and the two random number counters for generating each of the normal figure variation time determination random value and the special figure variation time determination random value are updated. For example, if the numerical value range that can be taken as the random number value for determining the normal time variation is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random value for determining the normal time variation time provided in the RAM 308 and acquired. Then, 1 is added to the obtained value and stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in a basic random number initial value update process (step S207) described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this example, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt processing is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. At a predetermined cycle.

  First, in step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT 314 is periodically updated so that the WDT 314 count value exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this example) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). Therefore (in this example, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt).

  In step S205 subsequent to step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed in step S205. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the sphere detection sensor, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal.

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is pre-determined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal present, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning opening 226, the variable winning openings 234, 235, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 2 starting opening 232, or the ordinary drawing starting opening 228. 229, it is determined that there was a passage. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been received at these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and the starting ports 230, 232, 228, 229. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before, no previous detection signal, no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 subsequent to step S205, a basic random number initial value update process is performed, and in the next step S209, a basic random number update process is performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the initial value generation random number counter updated in step S115 is updated, and then used in the main control unit 300. Four random number counters for generating the random value, the special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made a round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the random number counter storage area Set to.

  For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating a normal winning random value has made one round next, in addition to setting the random number counter for generating a winning random value Keep it. In addition to the above initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, the random number counter for generating the random number value for the normal value, generating the random number value for the special figure 1 The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for use and the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random number value have made one round each. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the special figure 1 random value and the counter for acquiring the special figure 2 random value are provided separately, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 and the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer, Special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the special figure 2 display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined time Various timers including a timer for counting the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215 subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when the winning holes 226, 234, 235 and the starting holes 230, 232, 228, 229 have been won, a prize ball provided in the RAM 308 for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value in the number storage area is read out, and 1 is added to set the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a prize at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting ports 228 and 229, and the variable winning ports 234 and 235. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  When the special figure 1 starting port 230 is won and the corresponding special figure 1 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 starting port 230 of the random number generation circuit (hard random number circuit) 318 A special figure 1 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on a value stored in a corresponding built-in counter value storage register is acquired, and a special figure is generated from a special figure 1 random number generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. One random value is acquired and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 1 winning random number values and the special figure 1 random number values in the special figure 1 random value storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 1 reservation number stored in the special figure 1 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, each time the special figure 1 holding number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number and the special figure 1 random value having the highest holding order (first) is deleted. At the same time, processing is performed so that the data holding order of the remaining special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random value group is incremented by one. Also, each time the special figure 1 holding number increases, a new special figure 1 is added to the next holding order of the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value having the lowest (last) holding order. The data of a set of winning random numbers and special figure 1 random values is written.

  When the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won and the corresponding special figure 2 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a built-in counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 of the random number generation circuit 318 The special figure 2 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 2 random number value is acquired from the special figure 2 random value generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. Then, they are stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 2 winning random number values and the special figure 2 random number values in the special figure 2 random number storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 2 reservation number stored in the special figure 2 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, each time the special figure 2 hold number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value with the highest holding order is deleted, and the remainder The special ranking 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value set data are processed so that the holding order is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 hold number increases by one, a special special figure 2 winning random number value is added to the next holding rank of the data of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value group having the lowest holding order. And special figure 2 random value set data is written.

  Also, special figure 1 starting information (a combination of special figure 1 winning random value and special figure 1 random value) or special figure 2 starting information (a pair of special figure 2 winning random value and special figure 2 random value) has been newly acquired. In this case, the special figure prefetching process is executed using the start information. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later.

  If there is a winning at the general chart start port 228 or the general map start slot 229, and the corresponding general map hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is automatically displayed from the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal chart. Obtained as a winning random number value, obtains a regular random number value from a random number counter for generating a regular random number value provided in the RAM 308, and stores it in a regular random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The number of combinations of the random numbers and the common random numbers in the random number value storage area is stored in the same number as the number of reserved general numbers stored in the general number hold number storage area. In the standard random number storage area, each time the number of pending charts decreases by one, the data of the combination of the random number value and the random number value with the highest ranking (first) in the ranking is deleted and the remaining Is processed so that the holding order of the data of the pair of the common figure winning random number and the common figure random number is incremented by one. In addition, each time the number of pending orders increases by one, a new winning figure random number value and a new standing figure winning random number value in the next holding rank of the data of the combination of the random number value and the random number value with the lowest ranking (last) Data of a set of regular random numbers is written. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening 234. When a winning is made at the variable winning opening 235, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 235 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening 235.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221 following step S219, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the normal map change display (the value of the above-described general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 210 performs normal variable display (normal map variable game).

  Also, in the general state update process at the timing when the normal map change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general map display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), When the 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is turned on / off to control the display mode, and the normal-map hit flag is off, the general-purpose display is displayed so that the display mode of the off symbol is displayed. The 7 segment LED constituting the device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the general-purpose display device 210 is either one of the winning symbols (the common diagram A or B shown in FIG. 5D) and the off symbol (the common diagram C shown in FIG. 5D). The final symbol is displayed. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), A normal operation is set in the setting area, and a predetermined open period (for example, 2 seconds), a solenoid for driving to open / close the blade member 232a of the special opening 2 232 (a part of various solenoids 332), A signal for holding 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing driving, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out of place, the usual figure flag is turned off. In the case where the usual figure hit flag is off, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the special map 2 start port 232 is not performed (the state of the normal map is not in operation), and the number of the general map variable games that are on hold Is set to 1 or more as a start condition, and is executed using a pair of the first common winning random number value and the common random number value in the common random number value storage area.

  The main control unit 300 obtains the normal start information (a combination of the normal winning random number and the normal random number) from the earliest (most recently stored) holding position in the normal random number storage area. On the basis of the obtained normal figure winning random number value in the obtained ordinary figure starting information, the value of the ordinary figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, etc., the determination table for the success / failure stored in the ROM 306 (FIGS. 9A and 9B described later). (Ref.) Is used to determine whether or not to win or not (determination of success / failure). Next, the main control unit 300, based on the general random number value in the acquired general map start information and the determined success / failure determination result, etc., the general map determination table stored in the ROM 306 (the hit shown in FIG. 9C). The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the normal variation display is determined using the hour action table). Next, the main control unit 300, for example, selects various tables (for example, timer number selection (not shown)) stored in the ROM 306 based on the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the acquired random number for determining the normal time change time, and the like. The normal fluctuation display time (timer number) is determined using a table, and the fluctuation display time is stored in the normal figure fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal figure fluctuation display time.

  The main control unit 300 extracts the earliest general chart start information from the normal random number value storage area, erases the earliest general chart start information from the normal random number value storage area, and Decrease the number of reserved maps in the area by 1. At this time, the general chart start information taken out from the standard random number storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is made based on the general chart start information stored in the temporary area. Also good.

  The main control unit 300 sets the common figure flag provided in the RAM 308 to ON when the determination result is successful (winning), and sets the common figure flag to OFF when not successful.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 7R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. . These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the stop symbol determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on 5 (b) shows that the special figure a, the 7R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure b, the 7R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off. When the special flag c and the off flag are turned on, the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure d is displayed. 2 is set to indicate that the stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs fixed display of any one of the special figures a to d.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time flag. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Also, if the probability variation number stored in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the probability variation number, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability variation flag. Turn off.

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. In order to set a special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning holes 234, 235) solenoids for opening / closing the door members of the variable winning holes 234, 235 (part of various solenoids 332) In addition, a signal for holding the door member in the opened state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member of the variable prize opening 234, 235 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is used. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 15 rounds or 7 rounds in the case of Special Figure 2, 15 rounds, 7 rounds or 2 rounds in the case of Special Figure 1), and the control is finished. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period in which an image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the effect standby period is set in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Also, if the normal probability change flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the hour / hour number (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the short time flag. Note that if the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, the normal figure high probability state (normal figure certain change) is established. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electrical chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning holes 234 and 235 will be placed in the special figure 2 start opening 232 during the big hit game until a game ball enters. There is a problem that game balls enter and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  If the special figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the probability variation number (for example, 10,000 times) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-game flag is turned on. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. However, in this example, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is different from the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2, so the timing at which the special figure 1 variable display time has elapsed (the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer becomes 1 to 0) The special figure 1 state update process starting at the same time) is different from the special figure 2 state update process. In the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on and the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure A shown in FIG. When the figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure B, the 7R big hit flag is on, when the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure C, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, When the figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure E, the small hit flag is on The special segment F is controlled to turn on / off the 7-segment LED constituting the special diagram 1 display device 212 so that the special flag F is turned on and the special flag G is turned on. Special figure 1 stop table To set indicating that it is in. By performing this control in the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs a fixed display of any one of the special figures A to G. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. The game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area, starting from the fact that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. The game is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the special symbol variable game success / failure determination by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 is notified. Priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present embodiment, a special figure variable game with a high advantage (in this example, special figure 2 variable game) is given priority over a low special figure variable game (in this example, special figure 1 variable game). . For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. 2), and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like. Is used as a big hit or a small hit (in this example, the small hit can be selected only in FIG. 1) using the determination table (see FIGS. 10 (a) to 10 (d) described later). Or whether it is determined to be out of place (judgment determination). Next, the main control unit 300, based on the special figure 2 random value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined success / failure determination result, etc., the special figure determination table (FIG. 11 (a), Using the symbol distribution table shown in FIG. 12A, the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the variation display of the special diagram 2 is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the determination, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables (for example, a timer number selection table not shown).

  The main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, erases the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 is subtracted from the special figure 2 hold number in the hold number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. In addition, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game and special figure 1 variable game, and the start opening prize is started in the order in which the special figure variable games related to the holding of each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are held at the start opening. It may be a forward variation. In the starting order winning order variation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the substantial upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of the special figure, but the invention is not limited to this, and the special figure state update described above is not performed. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and the lottery results may be displayed separately, or the lottery results of a plurality of special drawings may be displayed in one area. In addition, when fluctuations related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command Information that can specify the type of command, etc.), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type). Further, in the present embodiment, a symbol variation start command and a symbol variation stop command related to a common symbol are also included as command types.

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. In addition, if the command type is a special symbol design change start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability fluctuation flags, and special drawing related lottery processing. In the case of the symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command, including information indicating the timer number selected in, including the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. In the case of a start command and an end production start command, information including the value of a special figure probability variation flag, etc., and in the case of a jackpot round number designation command, information indicating the value of a special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. Is included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232, winning in the variable winning ports 234 and 235 Contains information indicating presence or absence. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information indicating the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the prefetch number stored in the prefetch number storage area described later, the stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit, etc. Included.

  In addition, if the command type is a normal symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes values such as a universal symbol per unit flag, a general symbol deviation flag, a general symbol probability variation flag, etc. Information that includes information about the determined stop symbol and variation time, and in the case of a regular symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command, information indicating the value of the universal symbol per unit flag, the usual symbol deviation flag, the common symbol probability variation flag, etc. Is included.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data includes values such as various big hit flags, small hit flags, off-set flags, and special figure probability variation flags stored in the RAM 308, special figure 1 related lottery processes, and special figures. Information indicating the timer number selected in the FIG. 2 related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates.

  In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a bottom pan full error is monitored. . When a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize winning ports 234 and 235, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special figure 1 display via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  FIG. 8A is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetching process executed in the winning acceptance process (step S217). In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the increased start information (newly acquired start information) in each of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and pre-stops the stop symbol before the success / failure determination process. The predetermination result (special drawing prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit (see FIGS. 8B to 8E) in the RAM 308.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch result and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially displayed. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are stored in the special figure 2 prefetch. A special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area for storing numbers is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is made, for example, by referring to the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. The comparison is made with the number of pre-reads in FIG. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is equal to the special figure 2 prefetch number. It is determined that the starting information in Fig. 2 has not increased. When it is determined that the start information of FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and when it is determined that the start information of FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a special figure 2 winning random value and a set of special figure 2 random values) is processed before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination 2 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S 305 subsequent to step S 303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained in the pre-determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of FIG. 1 has increased. The determination as to whether or not the start information of FIG. 1 has increased is made, for example, in the same way as in FIG. 2, the special figure 1 hold number stored in the special figure 1 hold number storage area and the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area This is done by comparing the special figure 1 pre-reading number stored in. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. Return to the winning acceptance process (step S217).

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is in progress. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined in step S309 whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a special figure 1 winning random value and a pair of special figure 1 random value) is processed before the success determination process in the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected as the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetching process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In step S315, the pre-read result for pre-Fig. 1 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information, instead of pre-reading the start-up information without pre-reading the increased special Fig. 1 start information. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetching process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  In the present embodiment, pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of Special Figure 2, and pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of Special Figure 1 except during the electric support. Further, it may be determined by lottery whether to pre-read the starting information of the increased special figure 1 and special figure 2. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may determine whether or not to execute the lottery and effect using the pre-read result.

  FIGS. 8B to 8E illustrate a state in which the prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 8B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 8B, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 1 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 8B, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special chart G” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “hold 2” stores “special chart G” as stop symbol information. "(Out of line)" is stored, "Special Figure F" (small hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 3", and "Special Figure A" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 4". (15R special jackpot) is stored.

  FIG. 8C shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 8C, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 2 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 8C, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing d” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” have stop symbols. Information is not stored. In FIG. 8C, the state where the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 8 (d) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 8D, “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  As shown in FIG. 8E, in each storage area of the special chart 1 prefetch result storage section, “timer number” indicating the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game is not the stop symbol information but the prefetch result. May be stored. In the example shown in FIG. 8E, the storage area “pending 1” stores “timer 3” as timer number information, the storage area “pending 2” stores “timer 5” as timer number information, No timer number information is stored in the storage areas “hold 3” and “hold 4”. In FIG. 8E, a state in which the timer number information is not stored is expressed as “none”. In addition, when timer number information is stored in each storage area of the special chart 1 prefetch result storage unit, the timer number may be set so as to correspond to the success / failure result.

  In the above description, an example is given in which stop symbols and timer numbers are pre-determined, and stop symbol information and timer number information are stored in the prefetch result storage unit. While being stored in the result storage unit, it may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as prefetching result information.

  Next, various tables used in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. Various tables shown in FIGS. 9 to 12 are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example.

  FIGS. 9A and 9B show an example of the success / failure determination table used when the success / failure determination is performed in the common drawing related lottery process (step S223). The success / failure determination table shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B includes items of “normal probability”, “random number range”, and “correction result”. The item “normal figure probability” indicates the normal figure probability (ordinary figure low probability or common figure high probability) at the time of determination of success or failure. The item “Random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired normal winning random number value. Here, the possible range of the normal winning random number in this example is 0 to 99 (the range of the numerical range is 100).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 9A is a normal / failure determination table used when the probability of normalization at the time of determination of success / failure is low. As shown in FIG. 9A, when this success / failure determination table is used, the winning probability is 1/100 (that is, 1%), and the probability of losing is 99/100.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 9B is a normal / failure determination table used in the case where the normal probability at the time of determination is high. As shown in FIG. 9B, when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of winning is about 100/100 (that is, 100%), and the probability of loss is 0%. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 9A, the winning probability is 100 times. In this way, it is possible to design so that only the hit is selected in the usual high probability state (during short-time operation). Further, the probability of deviation may be higher than 0% at the time of short-time operation, but the probability of hit selection being higher at the time of short-time operation than at the time of short-time operation (ordinary low probability state).

  FIG. 9C shows a table for symbol allocation and hit operation for ordinary use. The numerical value in the “distribution” column in the table is the random number range distribution rate for each symbol (that is, the symbol of each symbol, which is compared with the general random number value when the stop symbol is determined in the general symbol related lottery process (step S223)). Equal to selection probability). As shown in FIG. 9 (c), in the case where the result of determining whether or not the normal-game variable game is successful, the allocation ratio of each winning symbol is 50% for the normal-game A and 50% for the normal-game B. Normal maps A and B are symbols in which the electric chew release operation is executed after the normal variable game. It should be noted that when the determination result is out of order, only one out of the ordinary figure C is selected as the out of order symbol, so in the case of out of place, the ordinary figure C is selected with a probability of 100%. When the general figure C is selected, the electric chew release operation is not executed after the general figure variable game.

  As shown in FIG. 9C, after the general map A is stopped and displayed, the opening operation of the special figure 2 starting port (electrical chew) 232 is executed. When the game state at the time of the stop display of FIG. A is not operating for a short time, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is first opened for 100 ms, then closed for 5000 to 10000 ms, and then opened for 5400 ms. To do. When the game state at the time of the stop display in FIG. A is short-time operation, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is first opened for 1800 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, then opened again for 1800 ms, It closes for about 2000 ms and opens again for 1800 ms.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9C, after the general map B is stopped and displayed, the opening operation of the special figure 2 starting port (electrical chew) 232 is executed. When the game state at the time of the stop display in FIG. B is not operating for a short time, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is opened only once for 100 ms. When the game state at the time of the stop display in FIG. B is short-time operation, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is first opened for 2400 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, then opened for about 1450 ms, and again It closes for about 2000 ms and opens again for 1450 ms.

  FIGS. 10A to 10D show an example of the determination table used when determining whether or not the lottery process is related to the special figure 2 lottery process (step S229) or the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). Yes. The success / failure determination table shown in FIGS. 10A to 10D includes items of “special figure probability”, “random number range”, and “correction determination result”. The item “special figure probability” indicates a special figure probability (special figure low probability or special figure high probability) at the time of determination of success or failure. The item “random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 winning random value or the special figure 1 winning random value. Here, the possible range of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 1 winning random value of this example is 0 to 65535 (the range of the numerical value range is 65536).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (a) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 1 used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is low. As shown in FIG. 10A, when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/299 (= 219/65536), and the small hit probability is about 1/399 (= 165 / 65536).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (b) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 1 used when the special figure probability at the time of the validity determination is high. As shown in FIG. 10B, when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536), and the small hit probability is about 1/399. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (a), the big hit probability is about 10 times and the small hit probability is the same.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (c) is the success / failure determination table for special figure 2 used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is low. As shown in FIG. 10C, when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/299 and the small hit probability is zero.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (d) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 2 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is high. As shown in FIG. 10D, when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/30 and the small hit probability is zero. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (c), the probability of jackpot is about 10 times.

  Fig.11 (a) has shown the symbol distribution table for the special figure 1. FIG. The numerical value in the “distribution” column in the table is a distribution ratio of random numbers for each symbol (that is, each symbol) compared with the special symbol 1 random value when determining the stop symbol in the special symbol 1 related lottery process (step S231). It is equal to the symbol selection probability). As shown in FIG. 11 (a), when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is the big hit, the special symbol A (15R special big hit) is 30%, and the special figure B (7R special big hit) is 25%, special figure C (7R big hit) is 25%, special figure D (sudden probability big hit) is 10%, special figure E (latent probability big hit) is 10% is there. Special drawings A, B, D, and E, excluding special drawing C, are symbols for which the probability change is activated after the big hit game ends. The ratio of probability variation jackpots (special drawings A, B, D, E) in the jackpot of the special figure 1 variable game, that is, the probability variation probability is 75%.

  Special illustrations A, B, and D are the gaming state (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, normal figure high probability (during short-time operation), normal figure low probability (due to short-time inactive) at the time of determination of success / failure (during symbol stop display) Regardless of the time)), the time is shortened (no time reduction is set) after the big hit game ends. The special figure C is a symbol in which the time is shortened (the number of time reductions is 100 times) after the big hit game is finished, regardless of the game state at the time of the determination of success or failure. The special figure E is a symbol in which the short time is activated after the big hit game is completed only when the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure high probability state or a normal figure high probability state. That is, when special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the time reduction does not operate after the big hit game ends. For example, when special figure E is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol continuously several times from a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the time reduction does not operate after the first stop display (special figure high probability normal figure) However, after the second and subsequent stops, the short time is activated (the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state is entered). In the special figure 1 variable game jackpot, the probability of time reduction is 90% in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state and 100% in the other game states.

  In this example, there is only one kind of small hits symbol and off symbol in the special figure 1 variable game. Therefore, when the result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined to be a small hit, the special figure F is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random value, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined. If it is out of place, the special figure G is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random value. However, a plurality of types of small hit symbols and outlier symbols may be provided in the same manner as the big hit symbols, and may be determined by lottery using special figure 1 random numbers.

  FIG.11 (b) has shown the example of the operation | movement at the time of the big hit in each symbol of the special figure 1. FIG. As shown in FIG. 11B, in the jackpot game after the special figure A is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 15R at 29000 ms per 1R. Similarly, in the jackpot game after special figure B or special figure C is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 7R at 29000 ms per 1R, and in the jackpot game after special figure D is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released. Is performed 2R at 29000 ms per 1R.

  As for special figure E, the operation of the big hit game differs depending on the game state at the time of the symbol stop display. In the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the attacker is released 2R at 100 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, it is difficult to enter a game ball because the opening time is short. On the other hand, in the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in a game state other than the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, 2R is played at 29000 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, it is easy to enter a game ball because the opening time is relatively long.

  In the small hit game after the special figure F is stopped and displayed, the 100 ms attacker release is performed twice in one release opportunity. That is, the attacker operates in the same manner in the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state and the small hit game after the special figure F is stopped and displayed.

  Fig.12 (a) has shown the symbol distribution table for the special figure 2. FIG. The numerical value in the “distribution” column in the table is the distribution ratio of the random number range for each symbol (that is, each symbol) that is compared with the special symbol 2 random value when determining the stop symbol in the special symbol 2 related lottery process (step S229). It is equal to the symbol selection probability). As shown in FIG. 12 (a), in the case where the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the distribution ratio of each big hit symbol is 70% for the special figure a (15R special big hit), and the special figure b (7R special big hit) is 5%, special figure c (7R big hit) is 25%. Special figures a and b are symbols for which the probability change is activated after the big hit game ends. The ratio of probability variation jackpots (special figures a and b) in the special figure 2 variable game jackpot, that is, the probability variation probability is 75%, which is the same as the probability variation probability of the special figure 1 variable game.

  Special illustrations a and b indicate the game state at the time of the success / failure determination (design stop display) (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, normal figure high probability (during short-time operation), normal figure low probability (during short-time inactive) Regardless of the), the time is shortened (no time reduction setting is set) after the big hit game ends. The special figure c is a symbol in which the time is shortened (the number of time reductions is 100 times) after the big hit game is finished, regardless of the game state at the time of determination of success / failure. The probability that the time is given in the big hit of the special figure 2 variable game is 100% regardless of the game state.

  In this example, there is only one type of outlier symbol in the special figure 2 variable game. Accordingly, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct is out of order, the special figure d is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 2 random value. However, a plurality of types of missing symbols may be provided in the same manner as the jackpot symbol, and may be determined by lottery using special figure 2 random values.

  FIG.12 (b) has shown the example of the operation | movement at the time of the big hit in each symbol of the special figure 2. FIG. As shown in FIG. 12B, in the jackpot game after the special figure a is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 15R at 29000 ms per 1R, and after the special figure b or the special figure c is stopped and displayed. In the big hit game, the attacker is released 7R at 29000ms per 1R.

  As shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, the special figure 2 has a higher probability of being given a shorter time than the special figure 1 and has a longer open time of the attacker (or a larger R number). Therefore, it can be considered that the special figure 2 is more advantageous than the special figure 1.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. FIG. 13A is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated. Among the various processes executed in the effect control process, the electric long open effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S411 following step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the pressing of the chance button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 136.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 13C is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Run in cycles. In step S601 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 subsequent to step S601, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other processing random number update processing Etc.

  FIG. 13D is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process (step S413) of the first sub-control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705. Wait for the input signal to be input.

  In step S705, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 following step S705, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S711. Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  FIG. 14A shows the flow of the electric long opening effect process executed in the effect control process of the main process in the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 14 (b) shows an example of an electric long open effect on the decorative symbol display device 208. The electric-chu-long opening effect is an effect that can be executed during a normal-game variable game, and the special-image 2 start opening (electric-chu) 232 is opened for a long time and / or multiple times (hereinafter referred to as a multi-game variable game). This may be referred to as long open). It should be noted that, even after the normal fluctuation stop, the electric-chu-long opening effect (for example, a notification effect such as “electric-chu-opening!”) May be continued based on the normal signal stop symbol.

  The electric long-long opening effect process shown in FIG. 14 (a) is a normal symbol change start from the main control unit 300 in the command process (step S407) of the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 in FIG. 13 (a). This is executed when a (start rotation) command is received.

  First, sub-control unit 400 first determines whether or not the electric long opening effect execution restriction flag for restricting the execution of electric long opening effect is off (step S801). The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the electric long open effect execution restriction flag stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 408 and determines whether or not the execution of the electric long open effect is restricted. For example, even when the electric tulong release effect is executed during display darkness in which the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is black, the player cannot visually recognize the effect and the effect of the electric chew long release effect cannot be obtained. . Therefore, in such a case, the electric long-long opening effect execution restriction flag is turned on based on the effect based on the determination result of the special figure fluctuation game during display darkening. In addition, when the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not dark-displayed and the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation game is long enough to execute the electric-chu-long opening effect, It is possible to perform an electric Chulong opening effect that can entertain the user. Therefore, in such a case, the electric long-long opening effect execution restriction flag is turned off based on the effect or demonstration effect based on the determination result of the special figure fluctuation game.

  If the electric-chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is on in step S801, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the electric-chu-long opening effect is restricted, and controls the electric-chu-long opening effect. Other control processes are executed, this process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process effect control process (step S409).

  If the electric-chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is off in step S801, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the electric-chu long opening effect can be executed, and proceeds to step S803 to start the usual symbol variation (start rotation). It is determined whether or not the result of determining whether or not the normal-game variable game is successful by referring to information about the normal-game hit flag and the normal-use flag from the command data of the command.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the result of determining whether or not the normal figure variation game is successful, the process proceeds to step S805, where the first sub-control unit 400 determines the normal figure from the command data of the normal symbol change start (rotation start) command. With reference to the information regarding the stop symbol, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the normal figure variable game is the normal symbol A.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the stop symbol of the usual figure variable game is the usual figure A, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S807, selects the effect whose effect type is “success pattern”, and opens the electric tulong. Set as production. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric long open effect based on the “success pattern”, ends this processing, and effects control of the main processing The process returns to the process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the usual variable game is not the usual figure A, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S811, selects an effect whose effect type is “failure pattern A”, and releases the electric tulong. Set as production. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric-chu-long opening effect based on “failure pattern A”, ends this processing, and produces the main processing effect. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the result of determining whether or not the normal game is a winning game is not successful, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S815 and executes an electric tulong opening false (gasse) effect execution lottery process. In the electric long open false effect execution lottery process, a random value is extracted from the random counter for electric long open false effect execution lottery provided in the RAM 408, and the electric long open false effect execution lottery table stored in the ROM 406 is stored. Is used to determine whether or not the random number value is a hit.

  The first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not to execute the electric long open false effect based on the result of the determination in step S815 (step S817).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 that the electric-chu-long opening false effect is to be executed, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S821, selects an effect whose effect type is “failed pattern B”, and sets it as the electric-chu-long opening effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric-chu-long opening effect based on “failure pattern B”, ends this processing, and produces the main processing effect. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 that the electric-chu-long opening false effect is not executed, the first sub-control unit 400 executes another control process for not executing the electric-chu-long opening effect, ends this processing, and performs the main processing. The process returns to the effect control process (step S409).

  In the process of the electric-chu-long opening effect shown in FIG. 14, when the electric-chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is off, the electric-chu-long opening effect is always performed if it is a win. The lottery may be performed in the same manner as when the game is off, and the presentation may be performed only when the lottery is won. Also, in this example, when the electric chew is open for a short time (short open) (general figure B), the production of “failure pattern A” is set, and when the electric chew is not released (general figure C), “failure pattern A” is set. The effect “B” is set, but the same effect may be performed with a deviation (common figure B) from the hit (normal figure B).

  FIG. 14B shows an example of the electric tulong opening effect. FIG. 14B shows a display effect being executed in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire surface of the image display area becomes the effect display area 208d, and for example, a background effect named “Land Stage” is executed. In the front of the background effect, the decoration display of the decoration pattern in which “decoration 1” to “decoration 10” sequentially move from top to bottom in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). Is running. A change icon display area a is arranged on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d, and a change icon of a pattern imitating a car is displayed. On the right side of the fluctuation icon display area a, a special figure hold display area c for displaying special figure hold is arranged, and a hold icon b having a pattern imitating an automobile is displayed. On the lower right side in the effect display area 208d, an electric long open effect area d is arranged. An ordinary figure display device 210 (not shown) starts the ordinary figure variation game, the execution of the electric-chu-long opening effect is not restricted, and the electric-chu-long opening effect area d is executed. As an electric Chu-long opening effect, an image of a samurai character operating the lottery machine is displayed along with a display of “help chance drawing”, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 is won by winning the ordinary figure variable game. There is a roaring effect that makes the player expect that it may be released long. As shown in FIG. 14 (b), a part of the right symbol display area 208c is hidden by the electric tulong opening effect. In addition, a part of the right side area of the special figure hold display area c is also hidden. As described above, when the electric-chu-long opening effect may make it difficult to confirm at least part of the decorative symbol variation display, or when the decorative symbol variation display makes it difficult to confirm at least part of the electric-chu long opening effect. There may be.

  Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S901 in FIG. 15A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S901. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S903 following step S901, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S905. . In step S905, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S907 following step S905, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S909 following step S907, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S907, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S911 following step S909, lamp control processing is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S913 following step S911, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S903.

  FIG. 15B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S1001 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 15C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). Run in cycles. In step S1101 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S903 of the second sub-control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S903, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1103 following step S1101, an effect random number update process or the like is performed.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 16A shows an example of the pre-reading notice lottery table used when the prefetching notice lottery is performed in the effect control process (step S409) of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. The prefetch lottery is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 receives a prefetch result information command including prefetch result information from the main control unit 300, and a display mode of a hold icon indicating a hold corresponding to the prefetch result by the prefetch notice lottery Is determined. The lottery table for the pre-reading notice shown in FIG. 16A includes items of “pre-fetching notice mode”, “big hit”, and “out”.

  The “prefetching notice mode” in the left column of the figure indicates the display mode of the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. “White” indicates that the display mode of the hold icon is a white circle, “Black” indicates that the display mode of the hold icon is a black circle, and “Heat” indicates that the display mode of the hold icon is in a circle. “Heat” indicates that the character is drawn. “White → Black” indicates that a change animation (details will be described later) is executed in which the display state of the hold icon changes from a white circle to a black circle. “Black → Heat” indicates that a change animation is executed in which the display mode of the hold icon changes from a black circle to a mode in which “Heat” is drawn in a circle. In the present embodiment, the default display mode of the hold icon is a white circle. When the prefetch result includes undetermined information, the hold icon indicating the hold corresponding to the prefetch result may be displayed in the default display mode without executing the prefetch notice lottery.

  The “big hit” in the middle row in the figure indicates a prefetch lottery random number acquired from a prefetch lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408 when the prefetch notice mode is determined in the effect control process (step S409) when the prefetch result is a big hit. The distribution ratio of the random number range of the prefetching notice mode (that is, equal to the selection probability of each prefetching notice mode) to be compared is shown. As shown in FIG. 16A, when the prefetching notice result is a big hit, the distribution ratio of each prefetching notice mode is 80% for “white”, 2% for “black”, and “heat”. 7%, “white → black” is 3%, and “black → heat” is 8%.

  “Last” in the right column in the figure indicates a prefetch lottery random number acquired from a prefetch lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408 when the prefetch notice mode is determined in the effect control process (step S409) when the prefetch result is out of order. The distribution ratio of the random number range of the prefetching notice mode (that is, equal to the selection probability of each prefetching notice mode) to be compared is shown. As shown in FIG. 16 (a), when the prefetching notice result is out of order, the distribution ratio of each prefetching notice mode is 94% for “white”, 2% for “black”, and “heat”. 1%, “white → black” is 2%, and “black → heat” is 1%.

  FIG. 16B is an example of a lottery table for notice at the start of change (after the big hit determination) used when the notice lottery is performed in the effect control process (step S409) of the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is shown. The notice lottery is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 receives a symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, and the notice effect type for the special figure variation game being executed is determined by the notice lottery. The notice lottery table at the start of fluctuation shown in FIG. 16B includes items of “notice mode”, “big hit”, and “out”. The “notice mode” in the left column in the figure indicates a mode of a notice that is executed using the decorative symbol display device 208 or the effect movable body 990. “Logo drop” indicates that the announcement movable body 990 moves downward, and “Rotation” indicates that the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 rotates. "Logo drop + rotation" indicates that the presentation movable body 990 moves downward, and a notice is executed in a manner that the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 rotates. This indicates that the notice effect is not executed.

  The “big hit” in the middle row in the figure indicates the notice lottery random number acquired from the notice lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408 when the notice mode is determined in the effect control process (step S409) when the result of the determination is a big hit. The distribution ratio of the random number range of the notice mode to be compared (that is, equal to the selection probability of each notice mode) is shown. As shown in FIG. 16 (b), when the notice result is a big hit, the distribution ratio of each notice mode is 4% for “logo drop”, 7% for “rotation”, and “logo drop + rotation”. "Is 14% and" None "is 75%.

  In the right column of the figure, “missing” indicates the notice lottery random number obtained from the notice lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408 when the notice mode is determined in the effect control process (step S409) when the result of the determination is wrong. The distribution ratio of the random number range of the notice mode to be compared (that is, equal to the selection probability of each notice mode) is shown. As shown in FIG. 16 (b), when the result of the notice is out of place, the distribution ratio of each notice form is 3% for "logo drop", 2% for "rotation", and "logo drop + rotation" "Is 1% and" None "is 94%.

  In addition, the notice mode of “logo drop” may be different depending on whether it is a big hit or not. For example, the distance that the effect movable body 990 moves downward may be different depending on whether it is a big hit or the speed that the effect movable body 990 moves may be different. In addition, the notice mode of “rotation” may be different depending on whether it is a big hit or not. For example, in the case of a big hit, the image is rotated once, and in the case of a loss, the image is not rotated once and the rotation display is terminated and the normal display is restored. It should be noted that the image may be rotated once even in the case of detachment. In addition, for example, the rotation angle of the image may be different, the angular velocity of the image rotation may be different, the rotation direction of the image may be different, The image to be rotated may be different. In addition, the notice mode of “logo drop + rotation” may be different as described above depending on whether it is a big hit or not.

Example 1
An effect example of Example 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Moreover, in FIG. 17 and each figure mentioned later, the example of special figure 1 variable game in each Example is shown in time series. In addition, fluctuations in the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 are represented by white thick arrows.

  First, with reference to FIG. 17A, common points of FIG. As shown in FIG. 17A, a decoration frame f <b> 1 having a shape obtained by vertically inverting the “L” character is displayed in the upper left part of the display area of the decoration symbol display device 208. A square-shaped special figure 1 reservation number display area 931 is provided in the upper left part of the decoration frame f1, and a square special figure 2 reservation number display area 932 is provided on the right side of the decoration frame f1. Below FIG. 931, a special figure 1 4th symbol display area 933 is provided, and below that, a special figure 2 4th symbol display area 934 is provided. In the special figure 1 holding number display area 931, the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is displayed as a number. For example, when there is no holding in the special figure 1, "0" is displayed. In the special figure 2 holding number display area 932, the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is displayed as a number. For example, when there is no holding in the special figure 2, "0" is displayed. Further, in the special figure 1 4 symbol display area 933, when the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, the fact that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed is notified as a change display of the 4 symbol "/". , “\” Images are displayed alternately, and when the special figure 1 variable game is not being executed (when special figure 1 is stopped), the fourth symbol display is “-” or “◯”. An image is displayed. “-” Is the fourth symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place, and “◯” is the fourth graphic displayed when the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. is there. Note that “-” may be displayed as the fourth symbol during the non-execution of the special figure 1 variable game regardless of the result of the special figure 1 variable game. Further, in the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 934, when the special figure 2 variable game is being executed, the fact that the special figure 2 variable game is being executed is notified as a variable display of the fourth symbol "/". , “\” Images are displayed alternately, and when the special figure 2 variable game is not being executed (when special figure 2 is stopped), the fourth symbol display is “-” or “○”. An image is displayed. “-” Is the fourth symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place, and “◯” is the fourth graphic displayed when the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. is there. Note that “−” may be displayed as the fourth symbol during the non-execution of the special figure 2 variable game regardless of the result of the special figure 2 variable game.

  Below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a horizontally long rectangular decorative frame f2 is displayed. In the center of the decorative frame f2, a square-shaped variable icon display area 940 in which a part of the left and right frames is opened is provided. Note that the variation icon may be displayed in a display size (for example, a display size larger than the hold icon) different from the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 930 described later. This may facilitate identification of the fluctuation icon and the hold icon.

  A special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 is provided on the left side of the fluctuation icon display area 940, and a special figure 2 hold icon display area 960 is provided on the right side of the fluctuation icon display area 940. The special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 is roughly divided into four areas of a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area from left to right. Each of the first to fourth areas corresponds to the first to fourth reserved orders in FIG. That is, a special figure 1 hold icon corresponding to the hold of special figure 1 that is the earliest (most recently stored) can be displayed in the first area, and similarly, 2 in the second to fourth areas. A special figure 1 hold icon corresponding to the fourth special figure 1 hold can be displayed. Similarly, the special figure 2 reserved icon display area 960 is roughly divided into four areas, ie, a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, from left to right. The first to fourth areas correspond to the first to fourth special figure 2 holding ranks, respectively. That is, a special figure 2 hold icon corresponding to the hold of the first special figure 2 stored in the first area can be displayed in the first area, and similarly, 2 in the second to fourth areas. A special figure 2 hold icon corresponding to the fourth special figure 2 hold can be displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 and the special figure 2 hold icon display area 960, various animations representing movement of the hold icon are executed.

  A square-shaped navigation character display area 970 is provided to the left of the special figure 1 hold display area 950. In the navigation character display area 970, a merchant character image h1 is displayed. The merchant character image h1 is used for an explanation effect such as a tutorial effect or a notice (notice of the change or a pre-read notice) effect.

  A square effect custom state display area 980 is provided on the right side of the special figure 2 hold display area 960. In the effect custom state display area 980, “level 1 to 99” are displayed according to the effect custom state of the pachinko machine 100. The level of the effect custom state is set so as to increase, for example, when an effect with a low appearance rate is performed. The level of the effect custom state may be set so as to increase even when a predetermined number of game balls are hit, when a predetermined effect is executed, or when a big win is won.

  FIG. 17A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4” indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is wrong has been stopped. Has been. In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the fourth symbol in a display form of “-” for notifying the discontinuity is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 934, the fourth symbol of the display mode of “-” that notifies that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out of place is stopped and displayed. In addition, the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 displays “1” indicating that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1, and the special figure 2 hold number display area 932 indicates that the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. “0” is displayed indicating that In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950, a default special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in a white circle is displayed.

  FIG. 17 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 suspension has been completed and the special figure 1 variable game has started. In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, “0” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 has decreased by 1 and the reserved number of the special figure 1 has become zero.

  When the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the hold / variation icon is displayed in the variable icon display area 940 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 of the decorative symbol display device 208. A moving animation between them is executed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 becomes the change icon 941 and moves to the change icon display area 940. . A right-pointing arrow shown at the upper left of the variation icon 941 in FIG. 17B represents the moving direction of the variation icon 941.

  In FIG. 17C, “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation between the hold and change icons is finished, and the change icon 941 is displayed in the change icon display area 940. Is displayed. Further, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 is white. The default special figure 1 hold icon 952 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon has increased due to an increase animation. An upward arrow shown to the left of the special figure 1 hold icon 952 in FIG. 17B represents the moving direction of the special figure 1 hold icon 952. In FIG. 17C, a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image h1 displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is started to be displayed in the lower left portion of the effect display area 208d. . The balloon image is an image used for the advance notice by the merchant character image h1.

  FIG. 17D shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a and the right symbol display area 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start port 230, and the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 is black. The special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon has increased due to an increase animation. The upward arrow shown to the left of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 in FIG. 17D represents the moving direction of the special figure 1 hold icon 953. In addition, an image of a character string of “chance?” Is displayed in a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image h1, and an effect that is expected to develop into a reach effect is executed. In addition, a substantially square-shaped hold change image h2 including an image of the character string “hold change” is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbols displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c. . The hold change image h <b> 2 is an image that is displayed to notify that a pre-reading notice for changing the display mode of the currently displayed hold icon or the change icon or an effect of the change notice is executed. In this example, it is notified that the change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon being displayed is changed is executed by the hold change image h2. The hold change image h2 may be a display that is displayed only when the hold icon in FIG. 1 is changed, or a display that is displayed only when the hold icon in FIG. 2 is changed. Alternatively, it may be a display that is displayed only when the variable icon is changed, or may be a display that is displayed only when the hold icon of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is changed, The display may appear only when the hold icon and the variation icon of the special figure 2 are changed, or only when the hold icon of the special figure 1, the hold icon of the special figure 2 and the fluctuation icon are changed. It may be a display.

  FIG. 17E shows that “decoration 2—decoration 4—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornament symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. Indicates a state of being notified. In addition, an erasing animation in which the fluctuation icon 941 displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 940 moves downward is displayed, and the fluctuation icon 941 is gradually deleted. FIG. 17E shows a state in which a change animation in which the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon 952 changes from “white to black” is executed. In the change animation, a lightning strike image is displayed on the special figure 1 hold icon 952 from the hold change image h2, and the effect image is displayed overlapping the special figure 1 hold icon 951. The effect image is displayed in front of the special figure 1 hold icons 952 and 953, and the whole special figure 1 hold icon 952 and a part of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 are hidden by the effect image.

  FIG. 17 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4” indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is wrong has been stopped. Has been. Also, in FIG. 17 (f), the change animation ends, the on-hold change image h2 and the effect image shown in FIG. It has changed.

  FIG. 17 (g) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is completed and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. Also, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold count display area 931, the special figure 1 hold icon 952 becomes a change icon, and a movement animation between the hold and change icons and a movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 are started. ing. In FIG. 17G, a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image h1 displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is started to be displayed in the lower left portion of the effect display area 208d. .

  FIG. 17H shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 are finished. In FIG. 17 (h), an image of a character string “dono-” is displayed in a speech balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image h1, and it is suggested that a character image h3 of the manuscript described later appears. Production is being performed. The character image h3 of Tono is a character image used for the “rotation” notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “rotation display notice effect”) shown in FIG.

  FIG. 17 (i) shows a state where “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the character image h3 of Tono is displayed in the upper right part of the effect display area 208d, and a character string image of “Call me?” Is displayed in a balloon image representing a line of the character image h3 of the Tono. In addition, an image of a character string “Tono!” Is displayed in a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image h1.

  FIG. 17J shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reach effect is started. In addition, a character string image of “chance?” Is displayed in the speech balloon image representing the line of the merchant character image h1, and then “chance!” Is displayed in the speech balloon image representing the line of the character image h3. An image of the character string is displayed. By displaying an image of the character string “chance!” Representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of Tono, it is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed.

  FIG. 17K shows that all images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “rotation target images” in this embodiment) are displayed on the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 1, the rotation center is 45 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the player. In FIG. 17K, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed and displayed. Here, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image rotated 45 ° counterclockwise is taken in the direction rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal direction, and taken in the direction orthogonal to the horizontal axis. The aspect ratio of the case. Similarly, the aspect ratio of the rotated image after rotation is the aspect ratio when the horizontal axis is taken in the direction rotated counterclockwise from the horizontal direction and the vertical axis is taken in the direction perpendicular to the horizontal axis. . For example, when the rotation target image is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the player, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is the rotation target image in a state of being rotated 90 ° clockwise as viewed from the player. This indicates the ratio of the vertical length to the horizontal length. Further, the variation display of the 4th symbol displayed in the 4th symbol display area 933 and the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b is also executed during the execution of the rotation display notice effect.

  The rotation target image before rotation shown in FIG. 17 (j) is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches the aspect ratio 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208). The rotation target image shown in 17 (k) is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches a screen with an aspect ratio of 7: 5. In addition, a part of the character image h3, a part of “decoration 3” displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and a part of the navigation character display area 970 are displayed so that they can be seen from the decoration symbol display device 208. The Further, the variation display of the 4th symbol displayed in the 4th symbol display area 933 and the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b is also executed during the execution of the rotation display notice effect.

  FIG. 17L shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 17K with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Show. The rotation target image is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches a screen with an aspect ratio of 1: 1. In FIG. 17L, the entire image to be rotated is displayed without being completely viewed.

  FIG. 17 (m) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise (a total rotation of 180 °) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center from the state of FIG. 17 (l). Show. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before the rotation.

  FIG. 17 (n) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 225 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 17 (m) around the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Show. The rotation target image is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches a screen having an aspect ratio of 7: 5. Further, in FIG. 17 (n), the hold change image h2 is displayed as the rotation target image during the execution of the rotation display notice effect, and the decorative symbols displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, and the character of the lord. It is displayed overlapping with the image h3. The on-hold change image h2 displayed in FIG. 17 (n) is an image used for producing the notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon. In addition, a part of the character image h3, a part of “decoration 3” displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and a part of the navigation character display area 970 are displayed so that they can be seen from the decoration symbol display device 208. The

  FIG. 17 (o) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 270 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 17 (n) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Show. The rotation target image is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches a screen with an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Further, in FIG. 17 (o), the rotation target image is not completely seen. FIG. 17 (o) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon is executed. In the effect, an animation is performed in which lightning is generated from the hold change image h2 and lightning strikes the fluctuation icon displayed in a black circle. The variation icon that has been struck by lightning overlaps with the effect image, so that the entire variation icon is hidden by the effect image. In FIG. 17 (o), “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start port 230, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area. A special figure 1 hold icon 954 displayed in a black circle in the second area 950 shows a state in which an increase animation of the hold icon appears.

  FIG. 17 (p) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 315 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. Show. The rotation target image is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches a screen having an aspect ratio of 7: 5. In addition, the pending change image h2 shown in FIG. 17 (o) and the effect image displayed so as to overlap the entire variation icon 941 are erased, and a character of “heat” is drawn in a circle. The fluctuation icon is displayed. Next, in FIG. 17 (q), the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 17 (p) around the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 5 shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated once and returned to the original display state. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is returned to the original aspect ratio before the rotation. Next, in FIG. 17 (r), “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is off. The state where it was notified is shown. In addition, when the variation icon displayed in the variation icon display area 940 moves downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variation icon is executed. A downward arrow shown at the upper left of the variation icon in FIG. 17 (r) represents the moving direction of the variation icon.

  As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, when the rotation target image is rotated, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change. A character image may be used as the rotation target image, and the presence of the character image may be enhanced by changing the aspect ratio of the character image, and a strong impression may be given to the player. Further, in the rotation display notice effect in the present embodiment, the rotation target image is rotated once (360 ° rotation), but the rotation target image may be rotated one rotation or more. For example, the larger the number of rotations of the rotation target image, the higher the big hit reliability may be set.

  The aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change in relation to the rotation angle of the rotation target image. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit determines the aspect ratio of the rotation target image using a predetermined function with the rotation angle of the rotation target image as a variable, and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio In some cases, the display image may be generated using the work area of the VRAM 436. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change randomly. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit determines the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated using a random number, and generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio. There may be cases. In addition, the display area of the rotation target image may be enlarged or reduced depending on the change in the aspect ratio of the rotation target image, or the rotation target image may be displayed so that the display area of the rotation target image is constant. The aspect ratio may change.

  In this embodiment, the rotation target image has the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation, but there are cases where an arbitrary position in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the center of rotation. Also good. Further, the rotation target image may be rotated with a straight line passing through the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as a rotation axis, or a straight line passing through an arbitrary position in the image display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be rotated as an axis. In this embodiment, the rotational angular velocity of each image in the rotation target image is constant, but the rotational angular velocity of each image may be varied according to the distance from the rotation center. For example, the angular velocity of rotation of each image may be decreased as the distance from the center of rotation increases. In this case, the player may be given an impression that the rotation target image is rotating faster than it looks. Further, in this embodiment, an effect of changing the change icon is performed during the rotation display notice effect as a notice of the symbol change display being executed. For this reason, it may be possible to synergistically increase expectations for the special figure variation game being executed by performing these effects simultaneously.

(Example 2)
An effect example of Example 2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 18 (a) to 18 (r) display effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series. FIG. 18A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, and shows the same state as that shown in FIG. Next, FIG. 18 (b) shows a state in which the special FIG. 1 suspension is digested and the special FIG. 1 variable game is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 17 (b). Next, in FIG. 18C, “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 951 is ended, and the variable icon display area 940 is displayed. The change icon 941 is displayed. Further, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 is black. The special figure 1 hold icon 952 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon has increased due to an increase animation. FIG. 18C shows a balloon image immediately after the balloon image representing the merchant character image h1 displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the lower left portion of the effect display area 208d. Indicates the state.

  FIG. 18D shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a and the right symbol display area 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start port 230, and the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 is black. The special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon has increased due to an increase animation. In addition, an image of a character string “chance?” Is displayed in a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image h1.

  FIG. 18E shows that “decoration 2—decoration 4—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornament symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. Indicates a state of being notified. Next, FIG. 18 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished, and shows the same state as FIG. 17 (f). Next, FIG. 18 (g) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started, showing the same state as FIG. 17 (g). Next, FIG. 18 (h) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 have been completed, and shows the same state as FIG. 17 (h). Next, FIG. 18 (i) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and the character image h3 of the shrine is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, which is the same as FIG. 17 (i). Indicates the state.

  FIG. 18J illustrates a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reach effect is started. In addition, a character string image of “chance?” Is displayed in the speech balloon image representing the line of the merchant character image h1, and then “chance!” Is displayed in the speech balloon image representing the line of the character image h3. An image of the character string is displayed. By displaying an image of the character string “chance!” Representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of Tono, it is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed.

  FIG. 18 (k) shows the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold-change image h2, the character image h3 of the lord, a balloon image representing the lines of the character image h3 of the lord, a decorative frame f2, and a decorative frame f2. Images (holding icons, change icons, merchant character images h1, etc.) displayed in the inside, and balloon images representing the lines of the merchant character images h1 (hereinafter referred to as “rotation target images” in this embodiment). Shows a state in which the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the player. Also, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, unlike the rotation display notice effect shown in Example 1 of the present embodiment, the decoration frame f1 and the image displayed in the decoration frame f1 (reserved number display, second display) Rotation display of 4 symbol images (hereinafter, these images may be referred to as “non-rotation target images” in this embodiment) is not executed, and the aspect ratio of the non-rotation target image does not change. The non-rotation target image is displayed with priority over the rotation target image. The rotation target image may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image, or only some of the rotation target images may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image. There may be a case where only some of the non-rotation target images are displayed with priority over the rotation target image.

  The rotation target image before the rotation is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches the aspect ratio of 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208), whereas the rotation shown in FIG. The target image is displayed with an aspect ratio adapted to a screen with an aspect ratio of 7: 5. In addition, a part of the character image h3, a part of “decoration 3” displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and a part of the navigation character display area 970 are displayed so that they can be seen from the decoration symbol display device 208. The Further, the variation display of the 4th symbol displayed in the 4th symbol display area 933 and the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b is also executed during the execution of the rotation display notice effect.

  FIG. 18 (l) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 18 (k) around the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Show. The rotation target image is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches a screen with an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Further, in FIG. 18L, the entire rotation target image is displayed without being completely viewed.

  FIG. 18 (m) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise (a total rotation of 180 °) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center from the state of FIG. 18 (l). Show. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before the rotation. In addition, the decorative frame f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative frame f2. The decorative frame f1 is displayed on the front side of the decorative frame f2, and the decorative frame f1 is displayed with priority over the decorative frame f2.

  FIG. 18 (n) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 225 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 18 (m) about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Show. The rotation target image is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches a screen having an aspect ratio of 7: 5. Further, in FIG. 18 (n), the hold change image h2 is displayed as the rotation target image during the execution of the rotation display notice effect, and the decorative symbols displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, and the character of the lord. It is displayed overlapping with the image h3. The on-hold change image h2 displayed in FIG. 18 (n) is an image used for producing the notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon. In addition, a part of the character image h3, a part of “decoration 3” displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and a part of the navigation character display area 970 are displayed so that they can be seen from the decoration symbol display device 208. The

  FIG. 18 (o) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 270 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 18 (n) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Show. The rotation target image is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches a screen with an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Further, in FIG. 18 (o), the rotation target image is not completely seen. FIG. 18 (o) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon is executed. In the effect, an animation is performed in which lightning is generated from the hold change image h2 and lightning strikes the fluctuation icon displayed in a black circle. The variation icon that has been struck by lightning overlaps with the effect image, so that the entire variation icon is hidden by the effect image. In FIG. 18 (o), “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area. A special figure 1 hold icon 954 displayed in a black circle in the second area 950 shows a state in which an increase animation of the hold icon appears.

  FIG. 18 (p) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 315 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 18 (o) about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Show. The rotation target image is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches a screen having an aspect ratio of 7: 5. In addition, the pending change image h2 shown in FIG. 18 (o) and the effect image displayed so as to overlap with the entire change icon are deleted, and the change of the aspect in which the characters “heat” are drawn in the circle An icon is displayed. Next, in FIG. 18 (q), the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 18 (p) around the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. FIG. 5 shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated once and returned to the original display state. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is returned to the original aspect ratio before the rotation. Next, in FIG. 18 (r), “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is off. The state where it was notified is shown. In addition, an erasing animation for erasing the variation icon 941 is executed by moving the variation icon displayed in the variation icon display area 940 downward.

  As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the non-rotation target image is not rotated when the rotation target image is rotated. For the non-rotation target image, the 4th symbol displayed in the 4th symbol display area and the hold number display displayed in the hold number display area are used. For this reason, an image for notifying information important to the player is not rotated.

(Example 3)
An effect example of Example 3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 19A to 19R display effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series. FIGS. 19A to 19H show the same state as FIGS. 18A to 18H. Next, in FIG. 19 (i), a character image h3 is displayed at the lower right of the effect display area 208d. The character image h3 of the lord and the decorative frame f2 are displayed in an overlapping manner, and a part (chin portion) of the character image h3 of the lord is hidden by the decorative frame f2. FIG. 19 (i) shows the same state as FIG. 18 (i) except that the display position of the balloon image representing the lines of the character image h3 and the character image h3 is different. Next, FIG. 19 (j) shows the same state as FIG. 18 (j) except that the display position of the balloon image representing the lines of the character image h3 and the character image h3 is different.

  FIG. 19 (k) shows a balloon image representing the decoration symbol displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208, the character image h3 of the lord, and the character image h3 of the lord (hereinafter, these images are referred to as “ ”May be referred to as a“ rotation target image ”)), showing a state in which the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the player. Also, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, unlike the rotation display notice effect shown in the first embodiment, the image displayed in the decoration frame f1, the decoration frame f1, the decoration frame f2, and the decoration frame f2 are displayed. The rotated image and the speech balloon image representing the speech of the character (hereinafter, these images may be referred to as “non-rotation target images” in this example) are not executed, and the non-rotation target image is not executed. The aspect ratio of does not change. The non-rotation target image is displayed with priority over the rotation target image. The rotation target image may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image, or only some of the rotation target images may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image. There may be a case where only some of the non-rotation target images are displayed with priority over the rotation target image.

  In FIG. 19 (k), the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed and displayed. The rotation target image before the rotation is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches the aspect ratio of 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208), whereas the rotation shown in FIG. The aspect ratio of the target image is changed to an aspect ratio that matches a screen with an aspect ratio of 3: 4. In addition, the character image h3 of Tono displays the hidden chin portion. In addition, a part of “decoration 3” displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a is out of view in the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, FIG. 19 (l) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 19 (k) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to an aspect ratio adapted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Next, FIG. 19 (m) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 19 (l) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before the rotation. Next, FIG. 19 (n) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 19 (m) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to an aspect ratio adapted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 3: 4. FIG. 19 (n) shows a decorative change image displayed on the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c as the image to be rotated as the rotation target image during execution of the rotation display notice effect. It is displayed overlapping with the image h3. The on-hold change image h2 displayed in FIG. 19 (n) is an image that is used to produce a notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon.

  FIG. 19 (o) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 19 (n) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to an aspect ratio adapted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 1: 1. FIG. 19 (o) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon (change animation of the fluctuation icon) is executed. In the effect in the present embodiment, the lightning generated from the hold change image h2 is displayed so as to fall at a position different from the change icon to be changed. In addition, the fluctuation icon of the non-rotation target image changes from a black circle to a mode in which “heat” is drawn in a circle at the timing when a lightning occurs from the hold change image h2 and the effect image is displayed. ing. In the present embodiment, since the changing variation icon is not hidden by the effect image, the changed variation icon can be visually recognized earlier than when the changing variation icon is hidden by the effect image.

  FIG. 19 (p) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 19 (o) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to an aspect ratio adapted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 3: 4. The pending change image h2, the lightning image, and the effect image are deleted. Next, FIG. 19 (q) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 19 (p) around the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Show. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is restored to the original aspect ratio. Next, in FIG. 19 (r), “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is off. The state where it was notified is shown. In addition, when the variation icon displayed in the variation icon display area 940 moves downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variation icon is executed.

  As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the non-rotation target image is not rotated when the rotation target image is rotated. For the non-rotation target image, images such as the fourth symbol displayed in the fourth symbol display area, the hold number display displayed in the hold number display area, the hold icon, and the variation icon are used. For this reason, an image for notifying information important to the player is not rotated.

Example 4
An effect example of Example 4 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 20 (a) to 20 (r) display the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series. FIGS. 20A to 20I show the same state as FIGS. 19A to 19I.

  FIG. 20J shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reach effect is started. In addition, a character string image of “chance?” Is displayed in the speech balloon image representing the line of the merchant character image h1, and then “chance!” Is displayed in the speech balloon image representing the line of the character image h3. An image of the character string is displayed. By displaying an image of the character string “chance!” Representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of Tono, it is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed. FIG. 20J shows a decoration frame f2, an image displayed in the decoration frame f2 (pending icon, change icon, merchant character image h1, etc.), and a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image h1. It has been erased.

  FIG. 20 (k) is a balloon image (hereinafter, in the present embodiment) representing the lines of the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold change image h2, the lord character image h3, and the lord character image h3. "It may be referred to as a" rotation target image ") shows a state in which the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the player. Also, in the rotation display notice effect of the present example, unlike the rotation display notice effect shown in Example 1 of the present embodiment, an image displayed in the decoration frame f1 and the decoration frame f1 (hereinafter, in this example, These images are sometimes referred to as “non-rotation target images”), and the rotation display of the non-rotation target images does not change. The non-rotation target image is displayed with priority over the rotation target image. The rotation target image may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image, or only some of the rotation target images may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image. There may be a case where only some of the non-rotation target images are displayed with priority over the rotation target image. In FIG. 20 (k), the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed and displayed. The rotation target image before rotation is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches the aspect ratio of 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208), whereas the rotation shown in FIG. The aspect ratio of the target image changes in accordance with the aspect ratio of the screen having an aspect ratio of 3: 4.

  FIG. 20L shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 20K with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Show. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to an aspect ratio adapted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Next, in FIG. 20 (m), the image to be rotated is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise (a total rotation of 180 °) around the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 20 (l). Indicates the state. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before the rotation. The decorative frame f1 is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol, and the decorative frame f1 is displayed with priority over the decorative symbol. Next, in FIG. 20 (n), the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 225 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 20 (m) around the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Indicates the state. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to an aspect ratio adapted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 3: 4. In FIG. 20 (n), the hold change image h2 is displayed as the rotation target image during the execution of the rotation display notice effect, and the hold change image h2g is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c. It is displayed overlapping the symbol and the character image h3 of the shrine. The on-hold change image h2 displayed in FIG. 20 (n) is an image used for producing the notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon.

  FIG. 20 (o) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 270 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 20 (n) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Show. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to an aspect ratio adapted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 1: 1. FIG. 20 (o) shows a state in which the effect of changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon is executed. The effect is different from the effect of changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon during the rotation display notice effect in the example 1 and the example 2 of the present embodiment, and the thunder generated from the hold change image h2 is changed. It is displayed so as not to fall on the target fluctuation icon. In addition, the fluctuation icon of the non-rotation target image is displayed in a circle at the position of the fluctuation icon display area 940 before the execution of the rotation display announcement effect at the timing when the effect image is displayed due to the occurrence of lightning from the hold change image h2. The variation icon 942 in the form of “heat” is temporarily overlapped with the hold change image h2 and “decoration 3”, and is placed on the near side in preference to the hold change image h2 and “decoration 3”. It is displayed. Therefore, the player can temporarily confirm that the change icon has changed.

  FIG. 20 (p) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 315 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 20 (o) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Show. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to an aspect ratio adapted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 3: 4. In addition, the pending change image h2, the lightning image, the effect image, and the variation icon 941 are deleted. Next, in FIG. 20 (q), the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 19 (p) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center (360 ° in total). It shows the state of returning to the original. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is restored to the original aspect ratio. The erased decoration frame f2, the image displayed in the decoration frame f2 (holding icon, change icon, merchant character image h1, etc.), and the speech balloon image representing the line of the merchant character image h1 are displayed. Yes. Next, in FIG. 20 (r), “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is off. The state where it was notified is shown. In addition, when the variation icon displayed in the variation icon display area 940 moves downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variation icon is executed.

  As described above, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, when the rotation target image is rotated, images such as the hold icon and the fluctuation icon which are important information for the player are not displayed. In some cases, the player can be focused on the rotation display of the rotation target image. Moreover, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, an effect of changing the variation icon is performed even though the variation icon is not displayed. For this reason, an unexpected surprise may be given to the player. In addition, there may be a case where the player's expectation can be satisfied by displaying only the variation icon that has temporarily changed during the effect of changing the variation icon. Further, the variation icon may be temporarily not displayed until the rotation display of the rotation target image is completed. In this case, since a predetermined time is required until the change icon is displayed after the change icon change animation is completed, the player's expectation may be amplified. Moreover, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, there may be an effect that the hold icon is changed even though the hold icon is not displayed.

(Example 5)
An effect example of Example 5 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 21 (a) to 21 (l) display the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 used in the present embodiment and later-described embodiments 6 to 9 includes a sub display device 209 mounted on the effect movable body 225. The effect movable body 225 can be moved up and down and rotated two-dimensionally in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by a drive system (not shown). . The production movable body 225 may be configured to be able to operate three-dimensionally. In addition, the sub display device 209 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the sub display device 209, what is necessary is just the structure which can display various productions and various game information, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device, Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted. The sub display device 209 is controlled by the first sub control unit 400 in the same manner as the decorative symbol display device 208. The sub display device 209 may be controlled by the second sub control unit 500.

  FIG. 21A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4” indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is wrong has been stopped. Has been. In the special figure 1 4th symbol display area 933 and the special figure 2 4th symbol display area 934, the 4th symbol of the display mode for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed. In addition, the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 displays “1” indicating that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1, and the special figure 2 hold number display area 932 indicates that the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. “0” is displayed indicating that In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950, a default special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in a white circle is displayed. FIG. 21A shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is located at a position in front of the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state shown in FIG. 21A, the sub display device 209 (the effect movable body 225) is located at the initial position.

  FIG. 21 (b) shows a state in which the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, “0” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 has decreased by 1 and the reserved number of the special figure 1 has become zero. When the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the hold / variation icon is displayed in the variable icon display area 940 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 of the decorative symbol display device 208. A moving animation between them is executed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 becomes the change icon 941 and moves to the change icon display area 940. . In this way, in FIG. 21B, the moving animation between the hold / change icons is executed.

  FIG. 21C shows a state in which the moving animation between the hold / change icon is finished and the change icon 941 is displayed in the change icon display area 940. FIG. 21C shows a state where the character image h3 is displayed in the effect display area 209a of the sub display device 209. In this example, the character image h3 of Tono is a character image used for the “rotation” notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “rotation display notice effect”) shown in FIG.

  FIG. 21 (d) shows a state in which a rotation display notice effect as a reach effect is executed. In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 209 performs rotation display of the character image h3. FIG. 21D shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a and the right symbol display area 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the character image h3 displayed on the sub display device 209 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “rotation target image” in this example) has the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation. A state rotated 45 ° counterclockwise is shown. In FIG. 21D, the rotation target image is displayed with the aspect ratio of the image changed. The rotation target image before rotation is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches the aspect ratio of 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the sub display device 209), whereas the rotation target image shown in FIG. The aspect ratio of the image changes to an aspect ratio that matches the screen having an aspect ratio of 7: 5. Next, FIG. 21 (e) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 21 (d) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center. Is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to an aspect ratio adapted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Next, FIG. 21 (f) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is the state shown in FIG. 21 (e) or 45 ° rotated counterclockwise about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 (a total rotation of 135 °). Is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to an aspect ratio adapted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 7: 5.

  FIG. 21G shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 180 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 21F with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center. ing. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before the rotation. Next, FIG. 21 (h) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 225 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 21 (g) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center. Is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to an aspect ratio adapted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 7: 5. Next, FIG. 21 (i) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 270 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 21 (h) around the center of the image display area of the sub-sub display device 209. Is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to an aspect ratio adapted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Next, FIG. 21 (j) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 315 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 21 (e) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center. Is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to an aspect ratio adapted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 7: 5. Next, FIG. 21 (k) shows that the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 21 (j) around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209. The state has returned to. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is returned to the original aspect ratio before the rotation. Next, in FIG. 21 (l), “decoration 2—decoration 4—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the sub display device 209, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is off. This indicates a state in which this is notified. Further, when the variation icon 941 displayed in the variation icon display area 940 moves downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variation icon 941 is executed.

  As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, when the rotation target image displayed on the sub display device 209 is rotated, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change. A character image is used as the rotation target image. In some cases, the presence of the character image is enhanced by changing the aspect ratio of the character image, and the player can be impacted. Further, in the rotation display notice effect in the present embodiment, the rotation target image is rotated once (360 °), but may be configured to rotate one rotation or more. For example, the larger the number of rotations of the rotation target image, the higher the big hit reliability.

  Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change in relation to the rotation angle of the rotation target image. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines the aspect ratio of the rotation target image using a predetermined function with the rotation angle of the rotation target image as a variable, and the image stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio. A display image may be generated from the data using the work area of the VRAM 436. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change randomly. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines the aspect ratio of the rotation target image using a random number, and uses the work area of the VRAM 436 to display the display image from the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio. It may be generated. In addition, the display area of the rotation target image may be enlarged or reduced depending on the change in the aspect ratio of the rotation target image, or the rotation target image may be displayed so that the display area of the rotation target image is constant. The aspect ratio may change.

  In the present embodiment, the rotation target image has the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation, but there are cases where an arbitrary position in the image display area of the sub display device 209 is the center of rotation. Also good. The rotation target image may be rotated about a straight line passing through the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as a rotation axis, or a straight line passing through an arbitrary position in the image display area of the sub display device 209. It may be rotated as a rotation axis.

  In this embodiment, the rotational angular velocity of the rotation target image is constant. However, the rotation angular velocity of the rotation target image may be varied according to the distance from the rotation center. For example, the angular velocity of the rotation of the rotation target image may be decreased as the distance from the rotation center increases. In this case, the player may be given the illusion that the image to be rotated is rotating faster than it looks.

(Example 6)
An effect example of Example 6 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 22 (a) to 22 (l) display the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series.

  FIG. 22A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4” indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is wrong has been stopped. Has been. In the special figure 1 4th symbol display area 933 and the special figure 2 4th symbol display area 934, the 4th symbol of the display mode for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed. In addition, the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 displays “1” indicating that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1, and the special figure 2 hold number display area 932 indicates that the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. “0” is displayed indicating that In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950, a default special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in a white circle is displayed. FIG. 22A shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is located at a position in front of the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the sub display device 209 has a holding display area 209b for displaying a holding number display image in the lower left part. In FIG. 22A, “1” indicating that the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1 is displayed in the hold display area 209 b of the sub display device 209 as the hold number display image.

  FIG. 22 (b) shows a state in which the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, “0” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 has decreased by 1 and the reserved number of the special figure 1 has become zero. When the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the hold / variation icon is displayed in the variable icon display area 940 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 of the decorative symbol display device 208. A moving animation between them is executed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 becomes the change icon 941 and moves to the change icon display area 940. . In this way, the moving animation between the hold / change icons is executed. In the hold display area 209b in the lower left part of the sub display device 209, “0” indicating that the hold number in FIG. 1 is 0 is displayed as the hold number display image.

  FIG. 22C shows a state in which the moving animation between the hold / change icon is finished and the change icon 941 is displayed in the change icon display area 940. FIG. 22C shows a state where the character image h3 is displayed in the effect display area 209a of the sub display device 209. The character image h3 of Tono is a character image used for the “rotation” notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “rotation display notice effect”) shown in FIG.

  FIG. 22D shows a state in which a rotation display notice effect as a reach effect is executed. In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 209 rotates 360 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the player in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thus, the character image h3 of Tono is rotated 360 ° counterclockwise. FIG. 22D shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a and the right symbol display area 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the sub display device 209 moves from the front position at the center upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower position and rotates 45 ° counterclockwise about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center. Shows the state. In addition, the hold display area 209 b in the lower left portion of the sub display device 209 has moved to the upper left portion of the sub display device 209. In addition, the “0” image as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209 b is 45 clockwise around the center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. ° Rotated and displayed.

  FIG. 22E shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 22D around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209. Is shown. In addition, the “0” image as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209 b is 45 clockwise around the center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. It is displayed with a rotation of 90 ° (a total rotation of 90 °). Next, in FIG. 22F, the sub display device 209 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 22E around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 (a total rotation of 135 °). Shows the state. In addition, the hold display area 209b in the upper left part of the sub display device 209 has moved to the upper right part of the sub display device 209. Further, the “0” image as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209 b is 45 ° clockwise around the center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. Rotated (total 135 ° rotation) is displayed. Next, FIG. 22G shows that the sub display device 209 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 22F with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center (total 180 ° rotation). Shows the state. Further, the “0” image as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209 b is 45 ° clockwise around the center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. Rotation (total 180 ° rotation) is displayed.

  FIG. 22H shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 225 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 22G with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation. Is shown. In addition, the hold display area 209 b in the upper right part of the sub display device 209 has moved to the lower right part of the sub display device 209. Further, the “0” image of the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209 b is rotated by 45 ° clockwise around the center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. (Total 225 ° rotation) is displayed. Next, in FIG. 22 (i), the sub display device 209 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 22 (h) about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center (total 270 ° rotation). Shows the state. Further, the “0” image of the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209 b is rotated by 45 ° clockwise around the center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. (Total 270 ° rotation) is displayed.

  FIG. 22J shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 315 ° rotation) around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state of FIG. Is shown. In addition, the hold display area 209 b in the lower right portion of the sub display device 209 has moved to the original position in the lower left portion of the sub display device 209. Further, the “0” image as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209 b is 45 ° clockwise around the center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. Rotated (total 315 ° rotation) is displayed. Next, in FIG. 22 (k), the sub display device 209 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 22 (j) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center (360 ° total rotation). Shows the state. Further, the “0” image as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209 b is 45 ° clockwise around the center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. Rotated (total 360 ° rotation) is displayed. Next, in FIG. 22 (l), “decoration 2—decoration 4—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is off. The state where it was notified is shown. Further, the sub-display device 209 deletes the character image h3, and the decorative symbol display device 208 deletes the variation icon 941 by moving the variation icon 941 displayed in the variation icon display area 940 downward. Animation is running.

  As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the rotation display of the rotation target image is performed by rotating the sub display device 209. Further, when the sub display device 209 is rotated, the hold number display image displayed on the sub display device 209 is displayed in a manner that does not rotate when viewed from the player. In addition, the hold display area 209b of the sub display device 209 is moved so as to be displayed at the left corner of the sub display device 209 when viewed from the player in accordance with the rotation of the sub display device 209. For this reason, during the rotation of the sub display device 209, the hold number display image, which is important information for the player, is displayed at a position where the player can easily see. Further, in place of the rotation of the sub display device 209, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be rotated to produce an effect of rotating the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. By rotating the display device 208 and the sub display device 209 simultaneously or continuously, there may be a case where an effect of rotating the images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 209 is performed. The decorative symbol display device 208 may be rotatable, and the sub display device 209 may be fixed to the game board 200 so as not to move.

(Example 7)
An effect example of Example 7 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 23 (a) to (l) display effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series.

  FIG. 23 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, and shows the same state as FIG. 21 (a). Next, FIG. 23 (b) shows a state in which the special FIG. 1 suspension is digested and the special FIG. 1 variable game is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 21 (b). Next, FIG. 23 (c) shows that the decorative symbols change display is executed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold and change icons ends, and the change icon display area A change icon 941 is displayed at 940. FIG. 23C shows a state in which the sub display device 209 moves downward, and the character image h3 is displayed in the effect display area 209a of the sub display device 209. The character image h3 of Tono is a character image used for the “rotation” notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “rotation display notice effect”) shown in FIG.

  FIG. 23 (d) shows a state in which a rotation display notice effect as a reach effect is executed. FIG. 23D shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center. In addition, the character image h3 displayed at the center of the effect display area 209a of the sub display device 209 is centered on the image display area of the sub display device 209 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 209. Is rotated 45 ° clockwise around the center of rotation. For this reason, the player's character image h3 is visually recognized by the player so as not to rotate. Next, FIGS. 23E to 23K show a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated by 45 °. Further, in FIGS. 23E to 23K, the character image h3 is displayed by rotating clockwise at the same rotational speed as that of the sub display device 209. For this reason, while the sub display device 209 is rotating, the player's character image h3 is always viewed as not rotating. Next, in FIG. 23 (l), “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornament symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. The state where it was notified is shown. Further, the sub-display device 209 deletes the character image h3, and the decorative symbol display device 208 deletes the variation icon 941 by moving the variation icon 941 displayed in the variation icon display area 940 downward. Animation is running.

  As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the character image displayed on the sub display device 209 is rotated in the opposite direction to the sub display device 209 at the same speed while the sub display device 209 is rotated. The character image is displayed in such a manner that it is not rotated as viewed from the player. For this reason, since the image displayed on the sub display device does not rotate although the sub display device 209 is rotating, it may be possible to give the player a surprise. In this embodiment, the character image is rotated in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the sub display device 209 at the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 209. However, the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the sub display device 209 is used. The character image may be rotated at a speed different from the rotation speed of the sub display device 209, or in the same direction as the rotation direction of the sub display device 209, or the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 209 or The character image may be rotated at different speeds.

(Example 8)
An effect example of Example 8 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 24A to 24F show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series.

  FIG. 24A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, and shows the same state as FIG. Next, FIG. 24B shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved downward and the character image h3 is displayed on the sub display device 209, and shows the same state as FIG. 23C. . The character image h3 of Tono is a character image used for the “rotation” notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “rotation display notice effect”) shown in FIG. FIG. 24B-1 shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. . The image data shown in FIG. 24 (b-1) has a princess character image h3 and a princess character image h4 at the lower left of the lord character image h3. It is the image data of the aspect which is not rotating. Further, in this example, the princess character image h4 is an image used for the advance notice with high hit reliability. FIG. 24B-2 uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 24B-1 to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 24B. The generated display data is shown. A predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 is cut out from the image data shown in FIG. 24B-1 around the center of the image data as display data. FIG. 24B-3 shows a state in which an image is displayed on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG.

  FIGS. 24C to 24E show a state in which the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect is executed. In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 209 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and then clockwise. Rotated by 45 °. Moreover, the rectangle shown with the dashed-two dotted line in the figure of FIG.24 (c)-(e) has shown the position of the sub display apparatus 209 before rotation. In addition, arrows shown in FIGS. 24C to 24E indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 209.

  FIG. 24C shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 24B with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation. . Further, the character image h3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. In the sub display device 209, a part of the character image h4 of the princess that was out of view from the sub display device 209 is displayed in the lower left part in a manner that is not rotated as viewed from the player. FIG. 24C-1 shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. The image data shown in FIG. 24C-1 is image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 24B-1 clockwise by 30 ° with the center of the image data as the rotation center. 24C-2 uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 24C-1 to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 24C. The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting out a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the image data shown in FIG. 24 (c-3) displays an image on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 24 (c-2), and rotates the sub display device 209 counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 24 (b). FIG. 24 shows a state rotated by 30 °, and shows a state of the sub display device 209 in FIG.

  FIG. 24D shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has rotated 15 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 24C with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation. . Further, the character image h3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 209, the entire princess character image h4 is displayed in the lower left portion in a manner that is not rotated when viewed from the player. FIG. 24D-1 shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. The image data shown in (d-1) of FIG. 24 is image data in a form in which the image data shown in (c-1) of FIG. 24 is rotated by 15 ° clockwise around the center of the image data. FIG. 24D-2 uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 24D-1 to display the image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting out a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the image data shown in FIG. 24D-1 as the center. FIG. 24D-3 shows an image on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 24D-2, and the sub display device 209 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. FIG. 24 shows a state rotated by 15 °, and shows a state of the sub display device 209 in FIG.

  FIG. 24E shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated 15 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 24D with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation. Further, the character image h3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. In the sub display device 209, a part of the princess character image h <b> 4 is displayed in the lower left portion in a manner not rotated when viewed from the player, and the other part is out of view from the sub display device 209. FIG. 24E shows a state immediately before the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect ends. FIG. 24 (e-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 24 (e). The image data shown in FIG. 24 (e-1) is image data in a form obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 24 (d-1) by 15 ° counterclockwise around the center of the image data. This is the same as the image data shown in (c-1). FIG. 24 (e-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 24 (e-1) to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 24 (e). The generated display data is shown. The display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 24 (e-3) displays an image on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 24 (c-2), and the sub display device 209 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 24 (d). This shows a state rotated by 15 °, and shows a state of the sub display device 209 in FIG. FIG. 24 (e-3) shows the same state as FIG. 24 (c-3).

  FIG. 24F shows that “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Indicates a state of being notified. In the special symbol 1 and 4 symbol display area 933 of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of “◯” is displayed to notify that the result of the special symbol 1 variable game is a big hit. FIG. 24F shows that the sub display device 209 is rotated 30 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 24E around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation. Shows the state. Further, the character image h3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 209, the princess character image h4 is not displayed. FIG. 24F-1 shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. The image data shown in FIG. 24 (f-1) is image data in a form in which the image data shown in FIG. 24 (e-1) is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image data as the rotation center. This is the same as the image data shown in (b-1). FIG. 24 (f-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 24 (f-1) to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 24 (f). The generated display data is shown. The display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 24 (f-3) displays an image on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 24 (f-2), and the sub display device 209 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 24 (e). This shows a state rotated by 30 °, and shows a state of the sub display device 209 in FIG. FIG. 24 (f-3) shows the same state as FIG. 24 (b-3).

  As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the image displayed on the sub display device 209 is rotated at the same speed in the opposite direction to the sub display device 209 while rotating the sub display device 209. The character image h3 of Tono is displayed in a mode that does not rotate when viewed from the player. Further, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the princess character image h4 that has been overlooked on the sub display device 209 before the rotation display notice effect is executed, is a rotation display of an image displayed on the sub display device 209. Is displayed on the sub display device 209. Also, the princess character image h4 is displayed on the sub display device 209 when the sub display device 209 rotates more than a predetermined angle. For this reason, the player pays attention to the rotation angle of the sub display device 209, and may be able to improve the interest of the game. Further, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the princess character image h4 is displayed by the rotation of the sub display device 209, but a character is displayed in accordance with the jackpot reliability of the symbol variation display being executed. You may make it do. For example, when the big hit reliability is relatively low, the enemy character may be displayed. Further, the princess character image h4 is displayed by rotating the sub display device 209 counterclockwise by a predetermined angle, whereas the sub display device 209 rotates by a predetermined angle clockwise to display the enemy. A character may be displayed. Further, the aspect ratio of the character image h3 and the princess character image h4 used for the rotation display notice effect in this embodiment may change during the rotation display notice effect.

Example 9
An effect example of Example 9 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 25 (a) to 25 (f) display effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series.

  FIG. 25 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, and shows the same state as FIG. 21 (a). Next, FIG. 25 (b) shows that the decorative symbols change display is executed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / change icons ends, and the change icon display area A change icon 941 is displayed at 940. Also, in FIG. 25B, the sub display device 209 moves downward, and the character image h3 of the lord is displayed in the center of the sub display device 209, and the merchant character image h1 ′ is displayed in the lower left portion of the sub display device 209. It shows the state that was done. The character image h3 of Tono is a character image used for the “rotation” notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “rotation display notice effect”) shown in FIG. The merchant character image h <b> 1 ′ is the same character image as the merchant character image h <b> 1 displayed in the navigation character display area 970. FIG. 25 (b-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 25 (b). . The image data shown in FIG. 25 (b-1) has a princess character image h3 and a princess character image h4 at the lower left of the lord character image h3. It is the image data of the aspect which is not rotating. Further, in this example, the princess character image h4 is an image used for the advance notice with high hit reliability. FIG. 25B-2 uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 25B-1 to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. The generated display data is shown. A predetermined rectangular area with an aspect ratio of 9:16 is cut out from the image data shown in FIG. 25B-1 around the center of the image data as display data. Also, the display data shown in FIG. 25 (b-2) is displayed at a predetermined position (lower left of the display data) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 25 (b-1). This is display data in which the merchant character image h1 ′ read from the ROM 406 is superimposed. FIG. 25 (b-3) shows a state in which an image is displayed on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 25 (b-2). Further, the merchant character image h1 ′ is displayed with priority over the image data shown in FIG. 25 (b-1), but the image data shown in FIG. 25 (b-1) is changed from the merchant character image h1 ′. It may be displayed with priority.

  FIGS. 25C to 25E show a state in which a rotation display notice effect as a reach effect is executed. In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 209 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and then clockwise. Rotated by 45 °. In addition, a rectangle indicated by a two-dot chain line in the diagrams of FIGS. 25C to 25E indicates the position of the sub display device 209 before rotation. In addition, the arrows shown in FIGS. 25C to 25E indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 209.

  FIG. 25C shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 25B with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation. . Further, the character image h3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image h1 ′ displayed in the lower left portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state shown in FIG. It is displayed in such a manner that it is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise with the center as the center of rotation. Further, in the sub display device 209, a part of the princess character image h4 that has been seen out of the sub display device 209 is displayed in the lower right part of the character image h1 'in a manner that is not rotated when viewed from the player. FIG. 25C-1 shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. The image data shown in FIG. 25C-1 is image data in a mode in which the image data shown in FIG. 25B-1 is rotated 30 ° clockwise around the center of the image data. 25 (c-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 25 (c-1) to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 25 (c). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the image data shown in FIG. 25C-1 with the center of the image data as the center. The display data shown in FIG. 25 (c-2) is first displayed at a predetermined position (position shown in FIG. 25 (b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 25 (c-1). This is display data in which merchant character images h1 ′ read from the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400 are superimposed. FIG. 25 (c-3) displays an image on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 25 (c-2), and turns the sub display device 209 counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 25 (b). FIG. 25 shows a state rotated by 30 °, and shows a state of the sub display device 209 in FIG.

  FIG. 25D shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has rotated 15 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 25C with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation. . Further, the character image h3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image h1 ′ displayed in the lower left portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state shown in FIG. 25C by the rotation of the sub display device 209. It is displayed in such a manner that it is rotated 15 ° counterclockwise with the center as the center of rotation. Further, in the sub display device 209, the entire princess character image h4 is displayed on the right side of the merchant character image h1 'in a manner that is not rotated when viewed from the player. FIG. 25D-1 illustrates image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. The image data shown in FIG. 25 (d-1) is image data in a mode in which the image data shown in FIG. 25 (c-1) is rotated 15 ° clockwise around the center of the image data. FIG. 25D-2 uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 25D-1 to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 around the center of the image data from the image data shown in FIG. The display data shown in FIG. 25 (d-2) is first displayed at a predetermined position (position shown in FIG. 25 (b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 25 (d-1). This is display data in which merchant character images h1 ′ read from the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400 are superimposed. 25 (d-3) displays an image on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 25 (d-2), and rotates the sub display device 209 counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 25 (c). FIG. 25 shows a state rotated by 15 °, and shows a state of the sub display device 209 in FIG.

  FIG. 25E shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated 15 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 25D with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation. Further, the character image h3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image h1 ′ displayed in the lower left portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state shown in FIG. It is displayed in such a manner that it is rotated 15 ° clockwise around the center. Further, in the sub display device 209, a part of the princess character image h4 is displayed in the lower right side of the character image h1 ′ as viewed from the player, and the other part is displayed from the sub display device 209. I'm out of sight. FIG. 25 (e) shows a state immediately before the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect ends. FIG. 25E-1 shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. The image data shown in FIG. 25 (e-1) is image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 25 (d-1) by 15 ° counterclockwise around the center of the image data. 25 (e-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 25 (e-1) in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 25 (e). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 around the center of the image data from the image data shown in FIG. Also, the display data shown in FIG. 25 (e-2) is first displayed at a predetermined position (position shown in FIG. 25 (b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 25 (e-1). This is display data in which merchant character images h1 ′ read from the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400 are superimposed. 25 (e-3) displays an image on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 25 (e-2), and moves the sub display device 209 clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 25 (d). This shows a state rotated by 15 °, and shows a state of the sub display device 209 in FIG.

  FIG. 25 (f) shows that “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornament symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Indicates a state of being notified. In the special symbol 1 and 4 symbol display area 933 of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of “◯” is displayed to notify that the result of the special symbol 1 variable game is a big hit. FIG. 25F shows that the sub display device 209 is rotated 30 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 25E around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation. Shows the state. Further, the character image h3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image h1 ′ displayed in the lower left portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state shown in FIG. 25E as the sub display device 209 rotates. It is displayed in such a manner that it rotates 30 ° clockwise around the center as the center of rotation and returns to its original position. Further, in the sub display device 209, the princess character image h4 is not displayed. FIG. 25 (f-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 25 (f). The image data shown in FIG. 25 (f-1) is image data in a mode in which the image data shown in FIG. 25 (e-1) is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image data as the rotation center. This is the same as the image data shown in (b-1). 25 (f-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 25 (f-1) to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 25 (f). The generated display data is shown. Also, the display data shown in FIG. 25 (f-2) is displayed at a predetermined position (lower left of the display data) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 25 (b-1). This is display data in which the merchant character image h1 ′ read from the ROM 406 is superimposed, and the display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 25 (f-3) displays an image on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 25 (f-2), and the sub display device 209 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 25 (e). This shows a state rotated by 30 °, and shows a state of the sub display device 209 in FIG. FIG. 25 (f-3) shows the same state as FIG. 25 (b-3).

  As described above, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, the character image (donor character image h3 displayed on the sub display device 209 in a manner not rotated when viewed from the player while the sub display device 209 is rotated). And a princess character image h4) and a character image (merchant character image h1 ′) displayed in a rotating manner as viewed from the player. On the rotating sub display device 209, a character image displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player and a character image displayed in a rotating manner as viewed from the player are displayed simultaneously. There are cases where unexpected surprises can be given to the player.

(Example 10)
An effect example of Example 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 26A to 26F show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series.

  FIG. 26 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, and shows the same state as FIG. 24 (a). Next, FIG. 26 (b) shows a state in which the special FIG. 1 suspension is digested and the special FIG. 1 variable game is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 24 (b). FIG. 26B shows a state in which the sub display device 209 moves downward and a character image h3 is displayed on the sub display device 209. The character image h3 of Tono is an image used for a lateral movement display notice effect as a reach effect.

  FIGS. 26C to 26E show a state in which a lateral movement display notice effect as a reach effect is executed. In the lateral movement display notice effect of this embodiment, the sub display device 209 moves in the left-right direction in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a rectangle indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIGS. 26C to 26E indicates the position of the sub display device 209 before moving in the left-right direction.

  FIG. 26C shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved leftward from the state shown in FIG. In addition, the character image h3 displayed at the center of the effect display area 209a of the sub display device 209 is displayed in such a manner that it moves to the right by the same distance as the movement distance of the sub display device 209 in the left direction. Yes. For this reason, the character image h3 of Tono is displayed so as not to move as viewed from the player. In the sub display device 209, a part of the princess character image h <b> 4 that has been overlooked in the sub display device 209 is displayed in the upper left part. Further, in this example, the princess character image h4 is an image used for the advance notice with high hit reliability.

  FIG. 26D shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved in the left lateral direction from the state shown in FIG. Further, the character image h3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in such a manner that it moves to the right by the same distance as the movement distance of the sub display device 209 in the left direction. For this reason, the character image h3 of Tono is displayed so that it may be visually recognized so that it may not move, seeing from a player. In the sub display device 209, the entire princess character image h4 is displayed at the upper left.

  FIG. 26E shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. Further, the character image h3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in such a manner as to move to the left by the same distance as the right movement distance of the sub display device 209. For this reason, the character image h3 of Tono is displayed so as not to move as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 209, a part of the princess character image h4 is displayed in the upper left part, and a part of the princess character image h4 is completely cut out. FIG. 26E shows a state immediately before the lateral movement display notice effect as the reach effect ends.

  FIG. 26 (f) shows that “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornament symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Indicates a state of being notified. In the special symbol 1 and 4 symbol display area 933 of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of “◯” is displayed to notify that the result of the special symbol 1 variable game is a big hit. FIG. 26F shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved rightward from the state shown in FIG. Further, the character image h3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in such a manner as to move to the left by the same distance as the right movement distance of the sub display device 209. For this reason, the character image h3 of Tono is displayed in a mode in which it does not move as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 209, the princess character image h4 is not displayed.

  Thus, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment, the image displayed on the sub display device 209 is moved in the opposite direction to the sub display device 209 at the same speed while the sub display device 209 is moved laterally. The character image h3 of Tono is displayed in such a manner that the character image h3 does not move as viewed from the player. Further, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment, the princess character image h4 that has been overlooked on the sub display device 209 before the lateral movement display notice effect is executed is displayed on the sub display device 209. Displayed on the sub display device 209 by the horizontal movement display. The princess character image h4 is displayed on the sub display device 209 when the sub display device 209 moves beyond a predetermined distance. For this reason, the player pays attention to the distance moved by the sub display device 209, and may be able to improve the interest of the game. Further, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment, a character combined with the jackpot reliability of the symbol variation display being executed may be displayed. For example, when the big hit reliability is relatively low, the enemy character may be displayed. In addition, the princess character image h4 is displayed by moving the sub display device 209 to the left by a predetermined distance, whereas the enemy character of the lord is moved by moving the sub display device 209 to the right by a predetermined distance. May be displayed. In addition, the character ratio h3 and the princess character image h4 used for the lateral movement display notice effect in the present embodiment may change in aspect ratio during the lateral movement display notice effect.

(Example 11)
An effect example of Example 11 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 27 (a) to 27 (n) display effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 used in the present embodiment and in an embodiment 11 described later has an effect movable body 990. The effect movable body 990 can be moved and rotated two-dimensionally in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by a drive system (not shown). . The effect movable body 990 may be configured to be able to move and rotate three-dimensionally. The effect movable body 990 has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and a character string image of “CR Daito Machine” is displayed on the surface.

  FIG. 27A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4” indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is wrong has been stopped. Has been. In the special figure 1 4th symbol display area 933 and the special figure 2 4th symbol display area 934, the 4th symbol of the display mode for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed. In addition, the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 displays “1” indicating that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1, and the special figure 2 hold number display area 932 indicates that the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. “0” is displayed indicating that In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950, a default special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in a white circle is displayed. FIG. 27A shows a state where the effect movable body 990 is located at the center upper position of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state shown in FIG. 27A, the effect movable body 990 is located at the initial position.

  FIG. 27 (b) shows a state in which the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, “0” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 has decreased by 1 and the reserved number of the special figure 1 has become zero. In addition, when the special figure 1 hold is decreased by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 951 is being executed. Further, in the hold display area 209b in the lower left part of the sub display device 209, “0” indicating that the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 0 is displayed.

  In FIG. 27C, “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation between the hold and change icons is finished, and the change icon 941 is displayed in the change icon display area 940. Is displayed. Further, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 is white. The default special figure 1 hold icon 952 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon has increased due to an increase animation. FIG. 27C shows a balloon image immediately after the balloon image representing the merchant character image h1 displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the lower left portion of the effect display area 208d. Indicates the state.

  FIG. 27D shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a and the right symbol display area 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start port 230, and the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 is black. The special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon has increased due to an increase animation. In addition, an image of a character string “chance?” Is displayed in a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image h1.

  FIG. 27 (e) shows a state in which an effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “logo drop effect”) in which the effect movable body 990 moves downward is executed. The logo drop effect is an effect used for a notice of “logo drop” shown in FIG. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect image h5 is displayed across the position behind the effect movable body 990 and the position behind the effect movable body 990. The effect image h5 is an image used for a logo drop effect. In FIG. 27E, after the effect image h5 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. FIG. 1 shows a state in which it is notified that the result of the variable game is out of place. Further, when the variation icon 941 displayed in the variation icon display area 940 moves downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variation icon 941 is executed. FIG. 27E shows a state in which a change animation is executed in which the display mode of the hold icon 952 changes from a white circle to a black circle. Note that the logo drop effect shown in FIG. 27E may be used as an effect in combination with a change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon 952 changes from a white circle to a black circle, or is displayed in a black circle. The special figure 1 hold icon 953 may be used as an effect in combination with the display, or may be used alone as an effect of a pre-reading notice. Next, FIG. 27 (f) shows a state in which the effect movable body 990 has moved upward from the position shown in FIG. 27 (e) and returned to the original position shown in FIG. 27 (a). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image h5 is erased as the effect movable body 990 moves upward.

  FIG. 27 (g) shows a state in which the hold of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and shows a state immediately after the movement animation between the hold and change icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 952 are started. FIG. 27 (g) shows a balloon image immediately after the balloon image representing the merchant character image h1 displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the lower left portion of the effect display area 208d. Indicates the state.

  FIG. 27H shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 are finished. Further, in FIG. 27 (h), an image of a character string “Tono” is displayed in a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image h1, and it is suggested that a character image h3 of Tono later appears. Production is being performed. The character image h3 of Tono is a character image used for the “rotation” notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “rotation display notice effect”) shown in FIG.

  FIG. 27 (i) shows a state where “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a character image h3 of Tono is displayed in the lower right part of the effect display area 208d, and a character string image of “Call me?” Is displayed in a balloon image representing a line of the character image h3 of the Tono. In addition, an image of a character string “Tono!” Is displayed in a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image h1.

  FIG. 27J shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reach effect is started. In addition, a character string image of “chance?” Is displayed in the speech balloon image representing the line of the merchant character image h1, and then “chance!” Is displayed in the speech balloon image representing the line of the character image h3. An image of the character string is displayed. By displaying an image of the character string “chance!” Representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of Tono, it is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed.

  FIG. 27 (k) shows a state where a rotation display notice effect as a reach effect has been executed. In FIG. 27 (k), all the images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter may be referred to as “rotation target images” in this example) are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which the center of the region is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the player with the center of rotation as the center of rotation. In FIG. 27K, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed and displayed. The image to be rotated before the rotation is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches the aspect ratio of 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208), whereas the rotation shown in FIG. The aspect ratio of the target image is changed to an aspect ratio that matches a screen with an aspect ratio of 4: 5. In addition, a part of “decoration 3” and a part of the navigation character display area 970 displayed in the right symbol display area 208 c are out of the decoration symbol display device 208. In FIG. 27 (k), in order to make the rotation display notice effect stand out, the effect movable body 990 moves to a position that cannot be visually recognized by the player above the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 27 (l) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 27 (k) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Show. The rotation target image is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches a screen with an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 209, the image to be rotated is not completely visible. FIG. 27 (l) shows a state in which a logo drop effect is performed in which the effect movable body 990 moves downward from the position (not shown) in FIG. 27 (k) during the rotation display notice effect. . In addition, on the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect image h5 is displayed as a rotation target image. Also, in FIG. 27 (l), the effect image h5 is displayed in a mode rotated 90 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the player, unlike the state shown in FIG. 27 (e), on the left side of the effect display area 208d. ing. The size of the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device in the state of FIG. 27 (l) is smaller than the size of the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device in the state of FIG. 27 (e). It is a size. The same applies to the hold icon, the change icon, the merchant character image h1, and the effect image h5.

  FIG. 27 (m) shows that the image to be rotated is rotated 270 ° counterclockwise (a total rotation of 360 °) around the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 27 (j). It shows the returned state. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is restored to the original aspect ratio and the original size. In FIG. 27 (m), the effect movable body 990 moves upward from the position of FIG. 27 (l) and is located at the original position (position shown in FIG. 27 (a)). . In the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image h5 is deleted. Next, in FIG. 27 (n), “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is off. The state where it was notified is shown. Further, when the variation icon 941 displayed in the variation icon display area 940 moves downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variation icon 941 is executed.

  As described above, in the logo drop effect of the present embodiment, when the effect movable body 990 is operated in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image is displayed at the position behind the effect movable member 990 in the decorative symbol display device 208. When the effect movable body 990 is operated in front of the decoration symbol display device 208, the effect image is displayed at a position different from the position behind the effect movable body 990 in the decoration symbol display device 208. There is an effect to be displayed. The effect image displayed at the position behind the effect movable body 2990 may cause the player to emphasize the operation of the effect movable body 990, and is displayed at a position different from the position behind the effect movable body 990. Since the effect image is displayed at an unexpected position, the player may be surprised unexpectedly. Further, the big hit reliability may be different depending on the size, display color and display position of the effect image.

Example 12
An effect example of Example 12 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 28A to 28F show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series.

  FIG. 28 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, and shows the same state as FIG. 27 (a). Next, FIG. 28 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 27 (b). Next, FIG. 28C shows the same state as FIG. 27C, in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 28D shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a and the right symbol display area 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 28D shows a state in which an effect that the effect movable body 990 moves downward from the position shown in FIG. 28C (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “logo drop effect”) is executed. Show. The logo drop effect is an effect used for a notice of “logo drop” shown in FIG. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect image h5 is displayed across the position behind the effect movable body 990 and the position behind the effect movable body 990. The effect image h5 is an image used for a logo drop effect.

  FIG. 28E shows a state in which the island simultaneous production is started during the execution of the logo drop production. The island simultaneous effect is an effect in which pachinko machines of the same model installed on the same island facility execute the same effect at the same timing. In the island simultaneous production of the present embodiment, a display in which the princess character image h6 sings a song is displayed on the left part of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed. The displayed decorative symbol is reduced and displayed at the lower right portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a character string image of “Island Simultaneous Start!” Is displayed on the right side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 28E shows the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the effect image h5 displayed in FIG. 28D is at a position different from the position displayed in FIG. The state is displayed in a reduced size in the lower right. FIG. 28E shows a state in which a change animation is executed in which the display mode of the hold icon 952 changes from a white circle to a black circle. Further, “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start port 230, and the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 is black. A special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle is displayed. Note that the logo drop effect of the present embodiment may be used as an effect suggesting that a change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon 952 changes from a white circle to a black circle is performed. It may be used alone as an effect.

  In FIG. 28 (f), during the island simultaneous production, the effect movable body 990 moves upward from the position shown in FIG. 28 (d) and returns to the original position (position shown in FIG. 28 (a)). Is shown. In addition, a character string image of “Island Performance” is displayed to the right of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify that the island performance is in progress. In addition, the effect image h5 reduced and displayed at the lower right portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 is deleted, and the left middle right symbol display regions 208a to 208c reduced at the lower right portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed as “decoration 2”. “Decoration 4-Decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. Further, when the variation icon 941 displayed in the variation icon display area 940 moves downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variation icon 941 is executed.

  Thus, in the logo drop effect of the present embodiment, when the effect movable body 990 is operated in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect image is displayed at a position behind the effect movable member 990 in the decorative symbol display device 208. When the effect movable body 990 is operated in front of the displayed state and the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image is displayed at a position different from the back of the effect movable member 990 on the decorative symbol display device 208. There is a state. The state in which the effect image is displayed at a position different from the position behind the effect movable body 990 in the decorative symbol display device 208 may give the player an unexpectedness. It may be possible to provide a topic. Further, the big hit reliability may be different depending on the size, display color and display position of the effect image.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 28 again.

(A1)
A game machine having image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or a sub display device 209),
The image display means may perform a rotation display of a first image (for example, Tono character image h3),
When the rotation display is performed, the aspect ratio of the first image may change (see, for example, FIGS. 17 (j) to (q) or FIGS. 21 (c) to 21 (k)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the first image is rotated and displayed, the aspect ratio of the first image may change, so the presence of the first image is amplified. In some cases, a strong impression may be given to the player. In addition, any one of the images such as the character image, the decorative design, the hold icon, the variation icon, and the background design, or all of them may be used as the first image, or other than these images. May be the first image.

(A2)
A gaming machine as set forth in (A1) above,
When the rotation display is performed, the second image (for example, the hold icon or the hold number display) may not be rotated (for example, FIGS. 19 (j) to (q) or FIGS. 22 (c) to (c)). k)),
A game stand characterized by that.
(A3)
A gaming machine as set forth in (A2) above,
When the rotation display is performed, the second image (for example, the fourth pattern) does not rotate (for example, see FIGS. 18 (j) to (q)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, when the rotation display of the first image is performed, the rotation display of the first image is emphasized because the rotation display of the second image may not be performed. Meanwhile, the player can make the second image visible to the player. In addition, there may be a case where any one of the images such as the character image, the decorative design, the hold icon, the variation icon, and the background design, or all of these images are used as the second image. May have a different image as the second image.

(A4)
The game stand according to any one of (A1) to (A3) above,
When the rotation display is performed, an image (for example, the princess character image h4) that has been cut off by the image display unit before the rotation display is performed is displayed on the image display unit by performing the rotation display. (See, for example, FIGS. 24B to 24D),
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, an image that has been disregarded in the image display unit before the first image is rotated and displayed is displayed on the image display unit by the first rotation display. In some cases, it may be possible to give an unexpected surprise to the player.

(A5)
The game stand according to any one of (A1) to (A4) above,
When the rotation display is performed, an image (for example, a decorative pattern) displayed on the image display unit before the rotation display is performed may be cut off by the image display unit by performing the rotation display. (See, for example, FIGS. 17 (i) to (k))
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the image displayed on the image display unit before the first image is rotated and displayed is cut off on the image display unit when the first rotation is displayed. Because of this, it may be possible to give an unexpected surprise to the player.

(A6)
The game stand according to any one of (A1) to (A5) above,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A7)
The game stand according to any one of (A1) to (A5) above,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000).
A game stand characterized by that.

(B1)
Production movable body (for example, production movable body 990),
Image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
A game machine equipped with
When the effect movable body is operated in front of the image display means, the first state (for example, the effect image h5) is displayed in the first position (for example, in FIG. 27E). The display state of the effect image h5 shown in FIG. 28 or the display state of the effect image h5 shown in FIG.
The first position is a position behind the effect movable body in the image display means (see, for example, FIG. 27 (e) or FIG. 28 (d)),
The first image is an effect image,
When the effect movable body is operated in front of the image display means, the second state in which the first image is displayed at the second position (for example, the display of the effect image h5 shown in FIG. 27 (l)). Or the display state of the effect image h5 shown in FIG.
The second position is a position different from the back of the effect movable body in the image display means (see, for example, FIG. 27 (l) or FIG. 28 (e)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having the configuration, when the production movable body is operated in front of the image display means, the first image is located at a second position different from the position behind the production movable body. The effect image of the first image will be displayed at a position unexpected to the player, giving the player an unexpectedness. May be possible.

(B2)
A gaming machine as set forth in (B1) above,
In the first state, the first image may be displayed across the first position and the third position,
The third position is a position different from the back of the effect movable body in the image display means (see, for example, FIG. 27 (e) or FIG. 28 (d)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B3)
The game stand according to (B1) or (B2) above,
The size of the first image in the first state is a first size,
The size of the first image in the second state is a third size,
The third size is smaller than the first size (for example, see FIGS. 27 (e) and (f) or FIGS. 28 (d) and (e)),
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the first image in the first state is different from the first image in the second state, so that the player can enjoy variations of the first image. There are cases where you can not.

(B4)
The game stand according to any one of (B1) to (B3) above,
In the first state, a second image (for example, a decorative pattern) may be displayed in a first direction (for example, see FIG. 27 (e)),
In the second state, the second image may be displayed in a second direction (a direction rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the first direction) (see, for example, FIG. 27 (l)).
The first image is an image different from the second image,
The second direction is a direction different from the first direction.
A game stand characterized by that.
(B5)
The game stand according to (B4) above,
The size of the second image in the first state is a second size,
The size of the second image in the second state is a fourth size,
The fourth size is smaller than the second size (for example, see FIGS. 27E and 27).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the size of the second image in the first state is different from the size of the second image in the second state, so that the player can enjoy variations of the second image. There are cases where you can not. In addition, there may be a case where any one of the images such as the character image, the decorative design, the hold icon, the variation icon, and the background design, or all of these images are used as the second image. May have a different image as the second image.

(B6)
The game stand according to any one of (B1) to (B5) above,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B7)
The game stand according to any one of (B1) to (B5) above,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000).
A game stand characterized by that.

(C1)
An image display unit (for example, a sub display device 209) capable of displaying an effect image for producing a game;
Driving means for driving the image display unit (for example, the movable body for production 225);
A game machine equipped with
The image display unit may move by driving the driving means,
In a period (hereinafter referred to as “first period”) in which the image display unit is moving in a first direction (a rotation direction around the rotation axis of the image display unit or a linear direction). The unit may display a first video (for example, a video of the character image h3 of Tono and a video of the character image h4 of the princess)
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which a first image (for example, Tono character image h3 or Princess character image h4) moves in the first direction.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having the configuration, an impact is given by the movement of the image display unit, and the display angle and the display position of the image displayed on the image display unit are changed during the movement period. May be able to perform operations that are not seen on a non-daily basis, allowing the player to forget the daily routine and concentrate more on the game. Further, the entire period during which the image display unit is moving in the first direction may be set as the first period, or a part of the period during which the image display unit is moving in the first direction. May be the first period. In addition, with an effect as a trigger, the entire period of the period from when the image display unit starts to move in the first direction until it stops may be set as the first period, or with an effect different from a certain effect as a trigger, A part of the period from when the image display unit starts to move in the first direction until it stops may be set as the first period.

(C2)
The game stand according to (C1) above,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode using the first image.

  In the example according to the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the expression, outer shape, and the like of the first image (dono character image h3 and princess character image h4) are fixedly displayed. The outer shape or the like may be displayed in a deformed manner. For example, referring to FIG. 24, the face of the palace that was not displayed in FIG. 24 (a) is displayed as a true face in FIG. 24 (b), and a little smile is shown in FIG. 24 (c). An animation may be performed in which a full smile is shown in 24 (d), a little smile is returned in FIG. 24 (e), and a true face is returned in FIG. 24 (f). Further, the aspect in which the first image (for example, the character image h3 of the lord) moves in the first direction may indicate that the display position of the animation including the character image h3 of the lord moves. The animation is not limited to the variable display of the character display, but changes in the outer shape of the character, etc., variable display of the lines (change display from partial character strings indicating lines to the entire character strings, etc.), characters and icons Color change, character / icon movement display, etc., or a combination of these may be included.

(C3)
The game stand according to (C1) or (C2) above,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in a first direction;
In the first period, the first image is configured to move in a second direction;
The first direction and the second direction are opposite directions.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In a gaming machine having such a configuration, the first orientation when the image display unit operates is triggered by a certain effect (for example, arrival of the timing for starting the image display unit operation effect during super reach). (For example, the left-facing direction) and other effects (for example, the timing of starting the effect by the operation of the image display unit to inform the player whether or not the probability change at the end of the jackpot starts) The first direction when the display unit operates may be a different direction (for example, right direction). In addition, the first direction and the second direction may be the same direction instead of the opposite directions. In this case, the first image is moved or rotated faster than the image display unit is moved or rotated. Is visible. For this reason, it is possible to give a player an extraordinary feeling that cannot be obtained in a mode in which an image rotates in a fixed image display unit. Rotating and moving in the game may cause you to forget your everyday sensations and concentrate on the game.

(C4)
The game stand according to (C3) above,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move at a first speed in the first direction;
In the first period, the first image is configured to move at a second speed in the second direction;
The first speed and the second speed are the same speed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the image display unit appears to move to the player, but the display position / display angle of the first image does not seem to move, so that it is unusual for the notification means. When it is possible to perform a normal operation, the notification itself by the image display unit display can play the same role as when it is not moving, and it is possible to achieve both the impactful operation and the notification There is. Further, the first direction and the second direction may be opposite directions, and the first speed and the second speed may be different. In this case, the first direction and the second direction may be different from the movement or rotation of the image display unit. One image is visually recognized by the player so as to move or rotate slowly. For this reason, it is possible to give the player an extraordinary feeling that cannot be obtained in a mode in which the image rotates in the fixed image display unit, and the first image in the image display unit is the image display unit. Since the movement and rotation are performed so as to slowly follow the movement and rotation of the game, it may be possible to forget a more everyday feeling and concentrate on the game. In addition, when the image display unit moves and rotates quickly with an emphasis on impact, by moving and rotating the first image gently, the notification itself by the image display unit display is close to when it is not moving, It may be possible to fulfill the role of notification.

(C5)
The game stand according to any one of (C1) to (C4) above,
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which a second image (for example, a merchant character image h1 ′) is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(C6)
The game stand according to (C5) above,
In the first period, the second image is configured not to move in the first direction.
A game stand characterized by that.

  The gaming machine having this configuration may be configured not to display a second image that does not move in the first direction during the first period. That is, in the first period, since all the images displayed on the image display unit are configured to move in the first direction, the movement of the image display unit and the image is given a unified feeling and more impactful. There are cases where the production operation can be executed.

(C7)
The game stand according to (C5) or (C6) above,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode by the second image.

  In the example according to the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the expression, outer shape, and the like of the second image (merchant character image h1 ′) are fixedly displayed. The expression, outer shape, etc. of the second image may be displayed in a deformed manner. For example, referring to FIG. 25, the merchant's face that was not displayed on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 25 (a) is displayed as a true face in FIG. 25 (b), and a little in FIG. 25 (c). The animation may be such that the face becomes steep, the face becomes steep in FIG. 25D, the face returns to a steep face in FIG. 25E, and returns to the true face in FIG. The aspect in which the second image does not move in the first direction may indicate that the animation display position does not move. The animation is not limited to the variable display of the character display, but changes in the outer shape of the character, etc., variable display of the lines (change display from partial character strings indicating lines to the entire character strings, etc.), characters and icons Color change, character / icon movement display, etc., or a combination of these may be included.

(C8)
The game stand according to (C3) or (C4) above,
“Moving by driving of the driving means” described in (C1) above means “rotating by driving of the driving means”
The “first image moves in the first direction” described in (C1) above means that “the first image rotates in the first direction”.
The first direction is a rotation direction (for example, a circumferential direction) around the rotation axis of the image display unit.
A game stand characterized by that.
(C9)
The gaming machine according to (C8) above,
The first orientation is one of clockwise and counterclockwise.
A game stand characterized by that.

(C10)
The game stand according to any one of (C1) to (C7) above,
“Moving by driving the driving unit” described in (C1) above means “moving linearly by driving the driving unit”.
“The first image moves in the first direction” described in (C1) above means that “the first image linearly moves in the first direction”.
A game stand characterized by that.

  The above-mentioned “the first image linearly moves in the first direction” may be “the first image linearly moves in the vertical direction”. In this case, the first direction is one of upward and downward. Further, the above-mentioned “first image linearly moves in the first direction” may mean “first image linearly moves in the left-right direction”. In this case, the first direction is one of the left direction and the right direction. The above-mentioned “first image linearly moves in the first direction” may mean “first image linearly moves in an oblique direction”. In this case, the first direction is one of the upper left direction, the lower right direction, the upper right direction, and the lower left direction.

  A modification of the configuration described in the example according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. For example, the driving means (production movable body 225) shown in FIGS. 21 to 26 moves in a combination of rotational movement and linear movement (vertical direction, horizontal direction, diagonal direction, forward and backward direction as viewed from the player). There may be. Further, the pachinko machine 100 may be configured to be equipped with a plurality of image display units. Further, a plurality of image display devices may be mounted on one image display unit. An LED may be mounted on the image display unit, or a movable body for production may be mounted. Further, before the image display unit is rotated or moved, the production movable body is moved from the initial state to the movable state, and after the image display unit in which the production movable body is in the movable state performs the rotation operation or the movement operation. It may be configured to stop and then move the effect movable body to an initial state. In addition, during the symbol variation display, the symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display is more effective when the effect operation illustrated in FIG. 23 is performed than when the effect operation illustrated in FIG. 22 is performed. The mode may be configured to easily become a big hit mode, and when the effect operation of FIG. 22 is performed during the symbol variation display, the effect operation of FIG. 22 is performed. It may be configured such that the symbol mode that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display tends to be a big hit mode. Further, when the effect operation of FIG. 22 is performed during the symbol variation display, the symbol mode that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display may be configured to be a big hit mode. When the effect operation of FIG. 23 is performed during the symbol variation display, the symbol mode that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display may be configured to be the big hit mode. 22 and 23 both show examples in which the same effect display is performed. However, when the sub display device shown in FIG. 22 rotates, the image displayed on the sub display device also rotates together. The effects visually recognized by the player and the effects visually recognized by the player so that the image displayed on the sub display device when the sub display device shown in FIG. You may comprise so that it may become. For example, “One of the other effects” is an effect in which Tono fights the composer, and “The other effect in another effect” is an effect in which the princess dances. Also good. “One of the other effects” may be installed, one or more may be installed, or one of the “other effects” may be installed. Multiple types may be installed. In addition, when the sub display device rotates as shown in FIG. 22, the figure is more than the number of types of effects in which at least a part (or all of the images) displayed on the sub display device rotate together. When the sub display device rotates as shown in FIG. 23, the player visually recognizes that at least a part (or all) of the image displayed on the sub display device is not rotated together. You may be comprised so that the number of types may increase. Conversely, when the sub display device rotates as shown in FIG. 23, at least a part (or all of the images) displayed on the sub display device is visually recognized by the player so that they are not rotated together. When the sub display device rotates as shown in FIG. 22, at least a part (or all) of the images displayed on the sub display device rotate together rather than the number of types of effects to be produced. You may be comprised so that the number of types may increase.

  Further, the example of the effect shown in FIG. 22 and the example of the effect shown in FIG. 23 may be combined. For example, in a period (period A) when the sub display device starts to rotate, the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed A (for example, 20 rpm) and displayed on the sub display device. The image is displayed so that the image displayed on the sub display device is not rotated so as to be viewed by the player so as to rotate together with the sub display device. In the next period (period B), the sub display device is rotated at a speed B (for example, 40 rpm) in one direction (for example, counterclockwise), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than the sub display device. At least a part or the whole of the image is rotated in another direction (for example, clockwise) at a speed B ′ (for example, 20 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize it as rotating slowly. In the next period (period C), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed C (for example, 50 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than the sub display device. At least a part or all of the image is rotated in another direction (for example, clockwise) at a speed C ′ (for example, 40 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize the image as rotating slowly. In the next period (period D), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed D (for example, 60 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is not rotated. At least part or all of the image is rotated in the other direction (for example, clockwise) at the speed D (for example, 60 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize that only the sub display device is rotating. Let In the next period (period E), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed E (for example, 50 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than the sub display device. At least a part or all of the image is rotated in another direction (for example, clockwise) at a speed E ′ (for example, 40 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize the image as rotating slowly. In the next period (period F), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed F (for example, 40 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than the sub display device. At least a part or all of the image is rotated in another direction (for example, clockwise) at a speed F ′ (for example, 20 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize the image as rotating slowly. During the period (period G) before the sub display device finishes rotating in the next period, the sub display device is rotated at a speed G (for example, 20 rpm) in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) and displayed on the sub display device. The image to be displayed may not be rotated so as to be visually recognized by the player so as to rotate together with the sub display device. Thus, as illustrated in the period A to the period D, as the sub display device rotates, the rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device gradually shifts from the rotation of the sub display device. The sub display device is rotated, and a part of or all of the display of the sub display device is shifted to a state where the player can visually recognize it. It may be possible to perform certain effects. Further, as illustrated in the period D to the period G, the rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device gradually rotates together with the sub display device as the sub display device rotates. By causing the player to visually recognize the change as described above, it may be possible to provide a new sense of unity with the sub display device and the image. In these examples, the difference between the rotation speed of the sub display device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually reduced during the periods A to D, and the sub display is performed during the periods D to G. Although the difference between the rotation speed of the device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually increased, conversely, during the period A to D, the rotation speed of the sub display device is increased. The difference between the speed and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually increased. During the periods D to G, the rotation speed of the sub display device and the rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device are increased. You may comprise so that the difference in speed may be made small gradually. Also, here, the rotating sub display device and the image displayed on the rotating sub display device are illustrated, but the present invention is also applicable to the sub display device that moves linearly and the image that is displayed on the sub display device that moves linearly. Is also possible.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the same configuration and control system as the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment. The same components as those of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted. In the following description excluding FIG. 39 and FIG. 40, the side closer to the player with the pachinko machine 100 installed in the island facility of the game store is referred to as “front” (front, front side, front side, front end, etc.). In addition, the reverse is "rear" (back, rear, rear side, rear end, etc.), and the vertical upper direction as viewed from the player is "up" (upper, upper, upper end, etc.), and vice versa. ”(Downward, lower, lower end, etc.), the horizontal left when viewed from the player is“ left ”(left, left, left end, etc.), and vice versa (right, right, right, right end, etc.) ).

  FIG. 29 is a schematic front view of the gaming board 1000 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as seen from the front. A main liquid crystal unit 1001 is disposed in the center case at the approximate center of the game area 124 defined by the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204. A decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed at substantially the center of the main liquid crystal unit 1001. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 performs effects by driving the decorative symbol display device 208 and the lamp, and details will be described later.

  The game board 1000 of this example is a game board for a so-called right-handed machine. About the general figure starting port 228 and the special figure 2 starting port 232, since these general figure starting port 228 and the special figure 2 starting port 232 are arrange | positioned on the right side path | route, the entrance of the game ball which falls on the right side path | route Is relatively easy, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter a game ball falling on the left path. With respect to the variable winning opening 234, it is relatively easy to enter a game ball that falls on the right path, and it is relatively difficult to enter a game ball that falls on the left path, depending on the arrangement pattern of the game nails. In FIG. 29, the game nails are not shown. On the other hand, with regard to Special Figure 1 starting port 230, it is relatively easy to enter a game ball falling on the left path due to the influence of the arrangement pattern of game nails, the presence of warp device 242, and the like. It is relatively difficult to enter a falling game ball. In the present embodiment, a right-handed machine is taken as an example, but a right-handed machine may be used. In addition, general winning ports (not shown) are provided on the right route and the left route.

  On the front side of the main liquid crystal unit 1001, a warp device 242 (242a, 242b) and a front stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and a plurality of movable bodies are arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. Has been. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has six movable bodies: a movable body 1002, a movable body 1004, a movable body 1006, a movable body 1008, a movable body 1010, and a movable body 1012. These movable bodies are arranged in order of the movable body 1010, the movable body 1004, the movable body 1002, the movable bodies 1006 and 1008, and the movable body 1012 from the front side. The movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 are arranged so that the positions in the front-rear direction are the same. The movable body 1004 is disposed on the front side of the movable body 1002. The second sub-control unit 500 executes drive control of the movable body 1002, the movable body 1004, the movable body 1006, the movable body 1008, the movable body 1010, and the movable body 1012. The drive control may be executed by the first sub control unit 400.

  The movable body 1002 has a laterally long rectangular external shape when viewed from the front side. The movable body 1002 can move up and down behind the front stage 244. In the state shown in FIG. 29, the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position. The movable body 1002 has a sub display device 1030 on the front side.

  A liquid crystal display device is used for the sub display device 1030. The sub display device 1030 has a horizontally long rectangular display area smaller than the decorative symbol display device 208, and produces an effect by displaying one or more images. In this example, the sub display device 1030 displays an image of the seascape where the yacht floats. Although the sub display device 1030 employs a liquid crystal display device, the sub display device 1030 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, but may be configured to display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted. Further, the display control of the sub display device 1030 is executed by the first sub control unit 400. Note that the display control of the sub display device 1030 may be executed by the second sub control unit 500, or a display control unit for executing the display control may be newly provided. Note that the display control unit may execute display control of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The movable body 1002 includes an elongated illuminating unit 1014a, an illuminating unit 1014b, an illuminating unit 1014c, and an illuminating unit 1014d arranged so as to surround the sub display device 1030. The illumination unit 1014a is disposed on the left side of the sub display device 1030 so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1014b is disposed below the sub display device 1030 so that the horizontal direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1014c is disposed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1014d is disposed above the sub display device 1030 so that the horizontal direction is the longitudinal direction. A plurality of color LEDs are used as the light sources of the illumination units 1014a to 1014d, and the illumination units 1014a to 1014d can emit light in a plurality of colors.

  A movable body 1004 is disposed on the upper left portion of the movable body 1002. The movable body 1004 has an external shape simulating lightning. The movable body 1004 is fixed at one point in the upper left portion of the movable body 1002 outside the display area of the sub display device 1030. The movable body 1004 is driven by a stepping motor (not shown) so that the front of the sub display device 1030 can be rotated in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen with the one point as a rotation center. In the state shown in FIG. 29, the movable body 1004 is located at the operation completion position. The movable body 1004 overlaps the display area of the sub display device 1030 in a state where the movable body 1004 is located at the operation completion position. Thereby, a part of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is hidden by the movable body 1004. The initial position of the movable body 1004 is a position in a state where the movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. The movable body 1004 does not overlap the display area of the sub display device 1030 when positioned at the initial position.

  A movable body 1006 is arranged on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The movable body 1006 is disposed between the movable body 1002 and the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and is movable in the left-right direction. The movable body 1002 has a plate-like shape, and a transmission part 1006a is provided at the upper part and a transmission part 1006b is provided at the lower part. The transmission parts 1006a and 1006b have a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the rear side of the movable body 1006 is visible through the transmission parts 1006a and 1006b. Note that the transmissive portions 1006a and 1006b only have to be visible on the rear side, a transparent plate such as an acrylic plate may be disposed on the transmissive portions 1006a and 1006b, and the transmissive portions 1006a and 1006b are openings. May be. In addition, an elongated illumination unit 1016 is disposed on the right end of the front surface side of the movable body 1006. The illumination unit 1016 is arranged so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. A plurality of colors of LEDs are used as the light source of the illumination unit 1016, and the illumination unit 1016 can emit light in a plurality of colors.

  A belt wound around two pulleys (not shown) is fixed to the upper part of the movable body 1006. The movable body 1006 moves to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. The operation range of the movable body 1006 is from the position where the right end portion of the movable body 1006 is located to the left of the left end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the position located at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. . The movable body 1006 becomes invisible to the player in a state where it is located at the left end of the operation range. In the state shown in FIG. 29, the movable body 1006 is located at the initial position. The movable body 1006 overlaps a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 when it is located at the initial position. Thereby, a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006. In addition, a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible through the transmission parts 1006a and 1006b of the movable body 1006.

  A movable body 1008 is arranged on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The movable body 1008 is disposed between the movable body 1002 and the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and is movable in the left-right direction. The movable body 1008 has a plate shape, and is provided with a transmission part 1008a at the upper part and a transmission part 1008b at the lower part. The transmission parts 1008a and 1008b have a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the rear side of the movable body 1008 is visible through the transmission parts 1008a and 1008b. Note that the transmissive portions 1008a and 1008b only have to be visible on the rear side, a transparent plate such as an acrylic plate may be disposed on the transmissive portions 1008a and 1008b, and the transmissive portions 1008a and 1008b are openings. May be. In addition, an elongated illuminating unit 1018 is disposed at the left end of the front surface of the movable body 1008. The illumination unit 1018 is arranged so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. A plurality of colors of LEDs are used as the light source of the illumination unit 1018, and the illumination unit 1016 can emit light in a plurality of colors.

  A belt wound around two pulleys (not shown) is fixed to the upper part of the movable body 1008. The movable body 1008 moves to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. The range of movement of the movable body 1008 is from the position where the left end of the movable body 1008 is positioned to the right of the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the position positioned at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. . The movable body 1008 becomes invisible to the player in a state where it is located at the right end of the operation range. In the state shown in FIG. 29, the movable body 1008 is located at the initial position. The movable body 1008 overlaps with a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 when positioned at the initial position. Thereby, a part of the image displayed on the decorative design display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1008. In addition, a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible through the transmission parts 1008a and 1008b of the movable body 1008.

  The movable body 1006 functions as a left shutter, and the movable body 1008 functions as a right shutter. When the movable body 1006 moves to the right end of the moving range and the movable body 1008 moves to the left end of the moving range, the right end portion of the movable body 1006 and the left end portion of the movable body 1008 are in contact with each other. An effect that the shutter is opened and closed by the movable bodies 1006 and 1008 is executed.

  A movable body 1010 is disposed above the decorative symbol display device 208. The movable body 1010 has a horizontally long flat plate shape, and a character string “chance” is attached to the front side. Further, the movable body 1010 is driven by a stepping motor (not shown) so that the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be moved in the vertical direction within a plane substantially parallel to the display screen. When the movable bodies 1006 and 1008 are closed, the movable body 1010 can move in front of the movable bodies 1006 and 1008 in the vertical direction. In the state shown in FIG. 29, the movable body 1010 is located at the initial position.

  The movable body 1012 is disposed in the upper left part of the main liquid crystal unit 1001. The movable body 1012 has an external shape imitating the lightning bolt similar to the movable body 1004. Further, the movable body 1012 is fixed outside the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and at the upper left of the main liquid crystal unit 1001. When the movable body 1012 is driven by a stepping motor (not shown), the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be rotated in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen around the one point. The movable body 1012 can rotate 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. Note that the movable body 1012 may be capable of rotating 360 ° or more.

  In the game board 1000, one sensor for detecting whether or not the movable bodies 1002 to 1012 are located at the initial position is arranged for each movable body. The said sensor is contained in the production movable body sensor 424 shown in FIG. For example, a photo sensor is used as the sensor.

  A main liquid crystal unit 1001 is disposed behind the movable bodies 1006 and 1008. A decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged in the center of the main liquid crystal unit 1001. In the state shown in FIG. 29, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208. In the effect display area 208d below the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a white circular change icon a1, a white circular hold icon b1, a white circular hold icon b2, and a character “heat” in the white circle A hold icon b3 in which is drawn and a black circular hold icon b4 are displayed in this order from the left. The hold icon b1 indicates the hold of the first special figure 1 variable game with the hold order, the hold icon b2 indicates the hold of the second special figure 1 variable game with the hold order, and the hold icon b3 has the third hold order. The special figure 1 variable game is on hold, and the hold icon b4 indicates the hold of the special figure 1 variable game having the fourth hold order. In the effect display area 208d, a background image including images of the sun, clouds, and balloons is displayed. A part of the sun image is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the sun image is visible to the player through the transmission part 1006a of the movable body 1006. In addition, a part of the cloud image is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible to the player through the transmission portion 1006b of the movable body 1006. A part of the cloud image is hidden by the movable body 1002.

  The main liquid crystal unit 1001 includes an elongated illumination unit 1020, an illumination unit 1022, an illumination unit 1024, and an illumination unit 1026 disposed so as to surround the decorative symbol display device 208. The illumination unit 1020 is arranged on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1022 is disposed on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1024 is disposed below the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the horizontal direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1026 is disposed above the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the horizontal direction is the longitudinal direction. A plurality of colors of LEDs are used as the light sources of the illumination units 1020 to 1026, and the illumination units 1020 to 1026 can emit light in a plurality of colors. In the state shown in FIG. 29, the entire lighting units 1024 and 1026 are visible to the player, and only a part of the lighting unit 1020 is visible from the player via the transmission unit 1006a. Only a part of the upper part is visible to the player through the transmission part 1008a.

  Next, the movable body 1002 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 30A shows a state in which the movable body 1002 is viewed from the front. Below the movable body 1002, a motor 1040 as a drive source of the movable body 1002 is disposed. The motor 1040 is fixed to the center case of the game board 1000 so that the rotation axis is in the vertical direction. One end of a screw shaft 1042 is fixed to the rotating shaft of the motor 1040 so that the extending direction is the vertical direction.

  A lower base 1044 is disposed between the movable body 1002 and the motor 1040. The lower base 1044 is fixed to the game board 1000. The motor 1040 and the lower base 1044 are disposed below the rear side of the front stage 244 and are not visible to the player. The lower base 1044 has a receiving portion 1044a having a flat surface for receiving the movable body 1002 on the right side, and a shaft fixing portion 1044b to which the guide shaft 1046 is fixed on the left side. The receiving portion 1044a and the shaft fixing portion 1044b are different from each other, and the receiving portion 1044a is positioned higher than the shaft fixing portion 1044b. For this reason, when the movable body 1002 moves to the lowermost part of the movement range, the movable body 1002 contacts the receiving portion 1044a but does not contact the shaft fixing portion 1044b.

  Further, the receiving portion 1044a is provided with a through hole that penetrates the lower base 1044 in the vertical direction, and a sliding bearing is disposed in the through hole. The screw shaft 1042 passes through the sliding bearing and is supported by the sliding bearing.

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 30A, the movable body 1004 is located at the initial position. The movable body 1004 can rotate about 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. Note that the movable body 1004 may be rotatable by 60 ° or more (eg, 360 °).

  FIGS. 30B and 30C show a state in which the movable body 1002 is viewed from the rear right side. In the state shown in FIG. 30B, the movable body 1002 is located at the uppermost position in the movement range. In the state shown in FIG. 30 (c), the movable body 1002 is located at the lowermost part of the movement range. As shown in FIGS. 30B and 30C, the movable body 1002 includes a sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and a moving unit 1036. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape, is disposed on the front side of the movable body 1002, and includes a movable body 1004, illumination units 1014a to 1014d, and a sub display device 1030 as shown in FIG.

  The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 includes a driver for the sub display device 1030, LEDs of the illumination units 1014a to 1014d, an LED driver, a motor for driving the movable body 1004, and a gear. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 includes a rectangular window portion 1034a, a window portion 1034b, a window portion 1034c, a window portion 1034d (not shown in FIG. 30B), and a window portion 1034e on the rear side. The window portion 1034a is disposed behind the illumination portion 1014a, the window portion 1034b is disposed behind the illumination portion 1014b, the window portion 1034c is disposed behind the illumination portion 1014c, and the window portion 1034d is disposed behind the illumination portion 1014d. Has been. A transparent plate is disposed in the window portions 1034a to 1034e, and the front side of the window portions 1034a to 1034e is visible. On the front side of the windows 1034a to 1034d, an LED, an LED driver mounting board, a decorative lens, and the like are arranged. The windows 1034a to 1034d are used for checking the illumination unit. Further, the window portion 1034e is disposed behind the movable body 1004. A motor for driving the movable body 1004 and a gear for transmitting power to the movable body 1004 are disposed on the front side of the window portion 1034e. The window portion 1034e is used for checking the drive mechanism of the movable body 1004.

  The moving unit 1036 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape smaller than that of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, and is arranged on the rear surface side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The moving unit 1036 includes a motor that rotates the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and a gear that is fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor and transmits the power of the motor to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the moving unit 1036 are connected via a harness. In addition, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is installed in the moving unit 1036 so as to be rotatable about the display area of the sub display device 1030 in the same plane including the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 when in the initial posture. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can rotate 180 ° clockwise from the initial posture shown in FIG. 30B, and can rotate 180 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. Thus, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 also functions as a movable body.

  When the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable unit 1036 are connected using a connection unit (slip ring or the like) shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 described later, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has a clockwise direction and a counterclockwise direction. May be rotatable up to a predetermined angle exceeding 180 degrees, may be rotatable up to a predetermined angle exceeding 360 degrees, or there may be no limitation on the rotation angle.

  Further, the moving unit 1036 is provided with two through holes penetrating in the vertical direction. A nut is fixed to the right through hole, and a screw shaft 1042 is fitted to the nut. By rotating the screw shaft 1042, the nut can be moved up and down, and the movable body 1002 can be moved up and down. A guide shaft 1046 passes through the left through hole. The movable body 1004 is guided by the guide shaft 1046 and can move up and down stably.

  An upper base 1048 is disposed above the moving unit 1036. The upper base 1048 is fixed to a transparent plate (not shown) disposed at a position where the position in the front-rear direction is between the movable body 1002 and the movable bodies 1006 and 1008, and is disposed at a position where it is difficult for the player to see. The upper base 1048 has a receiving portion 1048a having a flat surface for receiving the moving unit 1036 on the right side, and a shaft fixing portion 1048b to which the guide shaft 1046 is fixed on the left side. A sliding bearing is disposed on the receiving portion 1048b, and the other end of the screw shaft 1042 is supported by the sliding bearing. Further, the receiving portion 1048a and the shaft fixing portion 1048b are stepped, and the receiving portion 1048a is located at a position lower than the shaft fixing portion 1048b. The moving unit 1036 has an upper surface portion 1036a having a flat surface that comes into contact with the receiving portion 1048a when moved to the uppermost position. As shown in FIG. 30B, when the movable body 1002 is positioned at the uppermost position, the upper surface portion 1036a of the moving unit 1036 contacts the receiving portion 1048a but does not contact the shaft fixing portion 1048b.

  Further, the moving unit 1036 has a lower surface portion 1036b having a flat surface that comes into contact with the receiving portion 1044a of the lower base 1044 when moved to the lowermost position. As shown in FIG. 30C, when the movable body 1002 is positioned at the lowermost position, the lower surface portion 1036b of the moving unit 1036 contacts the receiving portion 1048a, but does not contact the shaft fixing portion 1048b.

  The moving unit 1036 includes control means for controlling the moving operation of the movable body 1002 and the rotating operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 inside. Examples of movement control means arranged in the movement unit 1036 include a microprocessor, a programmable IC, an ASIC, a DSP, a ROM, a RAM, an LSI, a communication control circuit, and the like. The movement unit 1036 may include only one of these movement control means or a plurality of movement control means. In addition, a harness (not shown) having one end connected to the sub display device 1030 extends from the rear side of the moving unit 1036, and the other end of the harness is disposed on the back side of the game board 1000 (for example, Connected to the first sub-board 160). The other end of the harness may be connected to the relay board, and the sub display device 1030 and the control board may be connected via the harness and the relay board.

  Next, the operation of the movable body 1002 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 30B shows a state where the movable body 1002 is located at the uppermost position in the movement range. The upper surface portion 1036 a of the moving unit 1036 is in contact with the receiving portion 1048 a of the upper base 1048. The receiving portion 1048a functions as a mechanical end of the movable body 1002.

  When the motor 1040 is driven from the state shown in FIG. 30B to rotate the screw shaft 1042 clockwise when viewed from below, the nut fixed to the moving unit 1036 and fitted to the screw shaft 1042 is screwed. It moves below the shaft 1042. Thereby, the movable body 1002 moves downward.

  FIG. 30C shows a state in which the movable body 1002 is located at the lowest position in the movement range. The lower surface portion 1036b of the moving unit 1036 is in contact with the receiving portion 1044a of the lower base 1044. The receiving portion 1044a functions as a mechanical end of the movable body 1002. Further, from the state shown in FIG. 30C, when the screw shaft 1042 is rotated counterclockwise by the motor 1040 when viewed from below, the nut fixed to the moving unit 1036 and fitted to the screw shaft 1042 is screwed. Move above the shaft 1042. Thereby, the movable body 1002 moves upward.

  Further, when the movable body 1002 is stationary at a position higher than the lowest position, a load is applied to the screw shaft 1042 due to the weight of the movable body 1002, so that a torque having a magnitude that matches the load is applied to the screw shaft 1042 by the motor 1040. . Thereby, it is possible to prevent the screw shaft 1042 from rotating due to the load of the weight of the movable body 1002 and to make the movable body 1002 stationary.

  Further, when the power source of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off for some reason while the movable body 1002 is stationary at a position higher than the lowermost position, electric power for driving the motor 1040 cannot be obtained. For this reason, the screw shaft 1042 rotates clockwise when viewed from above by the load of the movable body 1002 due to its own weight, and moves until the movable body 1002 contacts the receiving portion 1044b of the lower base 1044. Even when the movable body 1002 moves downward under its own weight, the movable body 1002 can be received by the receiving portion 1044b, so that the movable body 1002 can be prevented from being damaged.

Example 1
FIG. 31 and FIG. 32 show an effect example in Example 1 of the present embodiment. 31 and 32 show the effect state in time series. 31 (a) to (q), (t), (u), (x) to (z), (b) to (d), and FIG. 32 are the games of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 31 (b) and 31 (s) show only the main liquid crystal unit 1001, and FIGS. 31 (v) and 31 (w) show only the movable body 1002. FIG. In FIG. 31 and subsequent figures, the illustration of the general-purpose display device 210, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and the high accuracy medium lamp 222 are omitted. In addition, illustration of the game ball is also omitted.

  FIG. 31A shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is off. ing. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 31A, the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 31A, the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions. The initial position of the movable body 1002 is a position higher than the lowermost position shown in FIG. 30C, and is closer to the lowermost position than the uppermost position shown in FIG. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the sun image displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the sun image is visible through the transmission part 1006a. It has become. In addition, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission unit 1006b.

  FIG. 31 (b) continued from FIG. 31 (a) shows a state in which the number of holds in FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special FIG. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular hold icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1. Moreover, the black circular hold icon is a hold icon in a prefetch notice mode as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 31 (c) continued from FIG. 31 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a change icon and a moving animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left is displayed.

  FIG. 31 (d) continued from FIG. 31 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is started. In FIG. 31 and the subsequent figures, the decorative symbol variation display is indicated by a downward white bold arrow. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol variation display is started after the movement animation of the hold / variation icon is started.

  FIG. 31E continuing from FIG. 31D shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG.

  FIG. 31 (f) continued from FIG. 31 (e) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has moved from the initial position to the lowest position within the operating range. The movable body 1010 is stopped at a position on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, the movable body 1010 and a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 overlap, and a part of the image cannot be visually recognized by the player. The pachinko machine 100 is in a case where at least a part of a decorative pattern or a preview image (for example, an image of the sun, a cloud, a balloon, a hold icon, a change icon, etc.) overlaps with a movable body and cannot be seen by a player. Compared to the case where at least a part of the decorative symbol or the preview image does not overlap with the movable body, there is a higher possibility that it will be a big hit in the running special figure floating game or the pending special figure floating game It may be configured as follows.

  FIG. 31G continued from FIG. 31F shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has moved upward and returned to the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 1010 is the uppermost position in the movement range of the movable body 1010. When the movable body 1010 returns to the initial position, the effect operation of the movable body 1010 in the reach effect ends.

  FIG. 31 (h) subsequent to FIG. 31 (g) shows a state where the movable body 1006 has moved to the right from the initial position. A part of the sun image and a part of “Decoration 2” are visually recognized through the transmissive part 1006a, and a part of the cloud image is visually recognized through the transmissive part 1006b. When the movable body 1006 is located at the initial position as shown in FIG. 31G and when the movable body 1006 is moved rightward from the initial position as shown in FIG. The part where the image of the cloud is visible is different. When a sun image or a cloud image is displayed as a preview image, the visible portion of the preview image differs before and after the movable body moves. The symbol variation display where the visible part of the preview image may be different before and after the movement of the movable body is easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol form than the symbol variation display where the visible part of the preview image may not be different It may be configured.

  FIG. 31 (i) continued from FIG. 31 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has moved leftward and returned to the initial position. Thereby, the rendering operation of the movable body 1006 in the reach rendering is finished.

  FIG. 31 (j) continued from FIG. 31 (i) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved leftward from the initial position. A part of the cloud image and a part of “Decoration 2” are visually recognized through the transmission part 1008a, and a part of the cloud image is visually recognized through the transmission part 1008b. As a result, when the movable body 1008 is located at the initial position as shown in FIG. 31 (i) and when the movable body 1008 is moved leftward from the initial position as shown in FIG. The portions where the image and the cloud image can be visually recognized are different. The symbol variation display where the visible part of the preview image may be different before and after the movement of the movable body is easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol form than the symbol variation display where the visible part of the preview image may not be different It may be configured. When the pre-reading notice may be different before and after the movable body moves, the pre-reading notice is executed when the visible part of the notice image may not be different before and after the movable body moves. It may be configured such that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display to be prefetched than in the case where it is performed.

  FIG. 31 (k) subsequent to FIG. 31 (j) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right and returned to the initial position. Thereby, the rendering operation of the movable body 1008 in the reach rendering is finished.

  FIG. 31 (l) subsequent to FIG. 31 (k) shows a state where the movable body 1002 is located at the uppermost position from the initial position. In this example, the movable body 1002 moves upward from the initial position and starts the effect operation.

  FIG. 31 (m) following FIG. 31 (l) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 starts rotating. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can be rotated 180 ° clockwise and counterclockwise from the initial posture shown in FIG. 31L in which the upper and lower ends are parallel to the horizontal direction and the left and right ends are parallel to the vertical direction. It is. In FIG. 31 (m), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise.

  FIG. 31 (n) following FIG. 31 (m) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 31 (m). As shown in FIGS. 31 (l) to (n), before and after the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, the portions where the balloon image and the cloud image are visible are different. When a balloon image or a cloud image is displayed as a preview image, the visible portion of the preview image is different before and after the operation of the movable body. The symbol variation display where the visible part of the preview image may be different before and after the movement of the movable body is easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol form than the symbol variation display where the visible part of the preview image may not be different It may be configured. When the pre-reading notice may be different before and after the movable body moves, the pre-reading notice is executed when the visible part of the notice image may not be different before and after the movable body moves. It may be configured such that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display to be prefetched than in the case where it is performed.

  FIG. 31 (o) following FIG. 31 (n) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 31 (n) and returned to the initial posture.

  FIG. 31 (p) continuing from FIG. 31 (o) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has moved downward and returned to the initial position. Thereby, the rendering operation of the movable body 1002 in the reach rendering ends.

  FIG. 31 (q) subsequent to FIG. 31 (p) shows a state in which the movable body 1012 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. FIG. 31 (r) shows only the main liquid crystal unit 1001 extracted at the same timing as FIG. 31 (q), and shows a state in which the movable body 1012 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. Due to the rotation of the movable body 1012, the movable body 1012 and the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 overlap. For this reason, the movable body 1012 makes it impossible for the player to visually recognize the sun image and part of the “decoration 2”. The symbol variation display where the visible part of the preview image may be different before and after the movement of the movable body is easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol form than the symbol variation display where the visible part of the preview image may not be different It may be configured. When the pre-reading notice may be different before and after the movable body moves, the pre-reading notice is executed when the visible part of the notice image may not be different before and after the movable body moves. It may be configured such that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display to be prefetched than in the case where it is performed.

  FIG. 31 (s) following FIGS. 31 (q) and (r) shows only the main liquid crystal unit 1001 extracted, and the movable body 1012 rotates counterclockwise from the state shown in FIGS. 31 (q) and (r). It shows a state where it has rotated 90 ° and has returned to its initial position. FIG.31 (t) has shown the game board 1000 of the same timing as FIG.31 (s). When the movable body 1012 returns to the initial position, the effect operation of the movable body 1012 in the reach effect ends.

  FIG. 31 (u) subsequent to FIGS. 31 (s) and (t) shows a state where the movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. FIG. 31 (v) shows only the movable body 1002 extracted at the same timing as that in FIG. 31 (u), and shows a state in which the movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. Due to the rotation of the movable body 1004, the movable body 1004 and the image of the seascape displayed on the sub display device 1030 overlap. For this reason, the movable body 1004 makes it impossible for the player to see part of the image of the seascape. An image of the sea view may be displayed as a preview image. The symbol variation display where the visible part of the preview image may be different before and after the movement of the movable body is easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol form than the symbol variation display where the visible part of the preview image may not be different It may be configured. When the pre-reading notice may be different before and after the movable body moves, the pre-reading notice is executed when the visible part of the notice image may not be different before and after the movable body moves. It may be configured such that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display to be prefetched than in the case where it is performed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 31 (u), based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 increases from 0 to 1, and the effect display area 208d is displayed. A white circular hold icon is displayed.

  FIG. 31 (w) following FIGS. 31 (u) and 31 (v) shows only the movable body 1002 extracted, and the movable body 1004 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIGS. 31 (u) and 31 (v). This shows the state where it has rotated and returned to its initial position. FIG.31 (x) has shown the game board 1000 of the same timing as FIG.31 (w). When the movable body 1004 returns to the initial position, the rendering operation of the movable body 1004 in the reach production ends.

  FIG. 31 (y) subsequent to FIGS. 31 (w) and (x) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is out of place.

  FIG. 31 (z) subsequent to FIG. 31 (y) shows a state in which the fluctuation icon erasing animation is executed while the special figure fluctuation game is not executed. In the effect display area 208d, the black circular variation icon corresponding to the completed special figure 1 variation game is deleted.

  FIG. 31 (a) following FIG. 31 (z) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, a movement animation between the hold and change icons is displayed in which the hold icon becomes a change icon and moves to the left.

  In FIG. 31 (b) following FIG. 31 (a), the decorative symbol variation display is started based on the fact that the first sub-control unit 400 has received the symbol variation start command transmitted from the main control unit 300. Indicates the state. The symbol variation start command includes variation time information. The variation time of this example is determined to be, for example, 30 seconds in the special drawing 1 related lottery process (step S231) of the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  FIG. 31 (c) continued from FIG. 31 (b) shows a state in which a power interruption occurs when 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, and the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off. The display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is erased, and all the lamps are turned off. Further, in this example, all the movable bodies other than the movable body 1002 are stopped at the position where the power interruption occurs.

  FIG. 31 (d) continuing from FIG. 31 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has moved from the initial position to the lowest position. As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off, the movable body 1002 moves to the lowest position in the moving range by its own weight. The movable body 1002 is located at the lowest position when the pachinko machine 100 is in a non-operating state with the power off. The lowermost position of the movable body 1002 is a non-operating position of the movable body 1002. When the movable body 1002 is located at the non-operating position, only the upper end portion of the display area of the sub display device 1030 is visible from the player.

  FIG. 32A continued from FIG. 31D shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is off.

  FIG. 32B continued from FIG. 32A shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. The pachinko machine 100 is activated in the order of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 when the power is turned on from off. In FIG. 32B, the activation of the main control unit 300 is completed, the special figure 1 variable game in the special figure 1 display device 212 is resumed, the first sub control unit 400 is being activated, and the first sub control unit 400 is activated. The decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the control unit 400 displays a character string image “Starting.”.

  FIG. 32C continuing from FIG. 32B shows a state in which the second sub-control unit 500 is activated. After the second sub-control unit 500 is activated, an initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub-control unit 500 is executed. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character string image of “Initial operation” to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is executed.

  FIG. 32 (d) continuing from FIG. 32 (c) shows a state where the initial operation of the movable body has been started. In this example, first, the initial operation of the movable body 1002 is executed. As shown in FIG. 32 (d), the movable body 1002 has moved to the uppermost position. In addition, the sub display device 1030 provided in the movable body 1002 displays a character string image “in initial operation” in the same manner as the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 32E continuing from FIG. 32D shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. FIG. 32 (f) continued from FIG. 32 (e) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 32 (e). FIG. 32 (g) continued from FIG. 32 (f) shows that after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. The moved state is shown. In the initial operation of the movable body 1002 of this example, first, the movable body 1002 moves from the lowermost position to the uppermost position, and then the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, and then The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 90 ° clockwise, then the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial posture, and finally the movable body 1002 moves to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1002 is completed. The initial position of movable body 1002 is the start position of the rendering operation of movable body 1002.

  FIG. 32 (h) following FIG. 32 (g) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1010 has moved from the initial position to the lowest position in the movement range. FIG. 32 (i) continued from FIG. 32 (h) shows a state where the movable body 1010 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1010 moves upward and returns to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1010 of this example, first, the movable body 1010 moves from the initial position (uppermost position) to the lowermost position, and then the movable body 1010 returns from the lowermost position to the initial position. . When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1010 is completed.

  FIG. 32 (j) continued from FIG. 32 (i) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1006 has moved from the initial position to the rightmost end of the movement range. FIG. 32 (k) subsequent to FIG. 32 (j) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1006 has moved to the left and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1006 of this example, first, the movable body 1006 moves from the initial position to the rightmost position, and then the movable body 1006 returns from the rightmost position to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1006 is completed.

  FIG. 32 (l) subsequent to FIG. 32 (k) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has started an initial operation. The movable body 1008 has moved from the initial position to the leftmost end of the movement range. FIG. 32 (m) continuing from FIG. 32 (l) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1008 moves to the right and returns to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1008 of this example, first, the movable body 1008 moves from the initial position to the leftmost position, and then the movable body 1008 returns from the leftmost position to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1008 is completed.

  FIG. 32 (n) subsequent to FIG. 32 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 1012 has started an initial operation. The movable body 1012 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. FIG. 32 (o) following FIG. 32 (n) shows a state in which the movable body 1012 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1012 returns to the initial position by rotating 60 ° counterclockwise. In the initial operation of the movable body 1012 of this example, first, the movable body 1012 rotates 60 ° clockwise from the initial position, and then the movable body 1012 rotates 60 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1012 is completed.

  FIG. 32 (p) following FIG. 32 (o) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. FIG. 32 (q) continued from FIG. 32 (p) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1004 is rotated counterclockwise by 60 ° and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1004 of this example, first, the movable body 1004 rotates 60 ° clockwise from the initial position, and then the movable body 1004 rotates 60 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1004 is completed. In this example, when the initial operation of the movable body 1004 is completed, the initial operations of all the movable bodies are completed.

  In this example, the initial operation of the movable body is executed in the order of the movable body 1002, the movable body 1010, the movable body 1006, the movable body 1008, the movable body 1012, and the movable body 1004. The execution order of the initial operation of the movable body can be arbitrarily set.

  FIG. 32 (r) subsequent to FIG. 32 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed on the special figure 1 display device 212. FIG. If a power interruption occurs during the execution of the special figure variable game, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the decoration until the symbol variation stop command is received from the main control unit 300 after the initial operation of the movable body is completed. Control is performed so that the symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 become the preparation screen. As a result, the character string image “in preparation” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. In addition, one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (r), but the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a hold icon indicating an increased hold because of the preparation screen. Not done. It should be noted that the leftmost LED of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is lit and the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 notifies that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is one.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable game being executed is stored in the RAM 308 by the power interruption process (step S243) executed at the time of power interruption, the stop symbol, the variable time, and the special figure 1. A display symbol update timer or the like is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data. The main control unit 300 returns to the gaming state before the power interruption based on the return data by the power recovery process after power-on (step S111). As a result, the main control unit 300 executes control to end the special figure 1 variable game when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game executed at the time of the power interruption has elapsed for 30 seconds.

  FIG. 32 (s) continuing from FIG. 32 (r) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. The result of the special figure 1 variable game in this example is out of place. Based on the fact that the first sub-control unit 400 has received the symbol variation stop command including information indicating that the result of the determination is wrong from the main control unit 300, the effect display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub-display device 1030 is displayed. To resume. In the left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 3”, which is an outlier combination, is stopped and displayed, and in the effect display area 208d, images of the sun and clouds are displayed. The background image including the image of the balloon and the image of the balloon is displayed. In addition, since the hold in FIG. 1 is 1, one white circular hold icon is displayed in the effect display area 208d. In addition, the variation icon corresponding to the special figure variation game executed before the power interruption is not displayed in the effect display of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the power recovery. The sub display device 1030 displays an image of the seascape.

  FIG. 32 (t) subsequent to FIG. 32 (s) shows a state in which one reservation of special figure 1 is consumed and special figure 1 variable game is started. After the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon becomes a change icon, a moving animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left is displayed, and then the decorative symbol change display is started. In addition, the movable body 1002 stands by at the initial position until the second sub control unit 500 receives the rendering operation start command. Moreover, the movable body 1008 has moved from the initial position to the rightmost position. When the movable body 1008 moves to the rightmost position, the right end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes visible. For this reason, when the movable body 1008 moves to the rightmost position, the preview image that overlaps the movable body 1008 may be visible when the movable body 1008 is located at the initial position. The symbol variation display in which the notice image may be visible may be configured such that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily displayed than the symbol variation display in which the notice image remains invisible.

  FIG. 32 (u) continuing from FIG. 32 (t) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has started the rendering operation. The second sub control unit 500 starts driving control of the movable body 1002 based on the reception of the command including the start command for the rendering operation of the movable body 1002 from the first sub control unit 400. The movable body 1002 has moved from the initial position to the uppermost position.

  FIG. 32 (v) continuing from FIG. 32 (u) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has returned to the initial position. The movable body 1002 stands by at the initial position until the second sub-control unit 500 receives the rendering operation start command. Further, based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, the number of special figures in FIG. 1 increases from 0 to 1, and a black circular hold icon is displayed in the effect display area 208d. .

  FIG. 32 (w) following FIG. 32 (v) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is out of place. Moreover, the movable body 1008 has returned to the initial position. In addition, during the stop display of the decorative design, a variation icon erasing animation is executed to erase the white circular variation icon.

  FIG. 32 (x), which continues from FIG. 32 (w), shows a state in which one hold in FIG. 1 has been consumed and the special figure 1 variable game has started. After the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon becomes a change icon, a moving animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left is displayed, and then the decorative symbol change display is started. In addition, the movable body 1002 waits to receive a start instruction for the rendering operation at the initial position.

  FIG. 32 (y) continuing from FIG. 32 (x) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has started the rendering operation. The second sub control unit 500 starts driving control of the movable body 1002 based on the reception of the command including the start command for the rendering operation of the movable body 1002 from the first sub control unit 400. In this example, after the movable body 1002 moves from the initial position to the uppermost position, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 60 ° counterclockwise.

  FIG. 32 (z) continuing from FIG. 32 (y) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has returned to the initial position. After the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture, the movable body 1002 moves downward to return to the initial position. Note that the movable body 1002 may move downward during the execution of the rotation operation in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture.

  FIG. 32 (a) following FIG. 32 (z) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is out of place.

  FIG. 32 (b) following FIG. 32 (a) shows a state in which the animation for deleting the variable icon is executed during the stop display of the decorative symbol. As a result, the black circular variation icon is deleted.

In the present embodiment, the movable body 1002 starts the effect operation from the initial position and ends the effect operation at the initial position. The movable body 1002 may start the effect operation from a position other than the initial position and the lowest position. The movable body 1002 may start the rendering operation from the lowest position. The movable body 1002 may end the effect operation at the lowest position. The movable body 1002 may end the rendering operation at a position other than the initial position and the lowest position. The movable body 1002 may start the rendering operation at a position other than the initial position and the lowermost position, and end the rendering operation at a position other than the initial position and the lowermost position. The start position of the rendering operation of the movable body 1002 and the end position of the rendering operation may be the same or different.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Further, when the power source is turned off in a state where the movable body 1002 is at a position other than the initial position and the lowermost position (for example, the fourth position), the movable body 1002 is positioned at the lowermost position from the fourth position. It may be configured to move to.

  Further, when the power source is turned off in a state where the movable body 1002 is at a third position other than the fourth position, the initial position, and the lowest position, the movable body 1002 is moved from the third position. It is configured to move to the lowest position.

  Further, a fourth control unit (for example, the second sub-control unit 500) that controls the movable body 1002 and a drive unit that drives the movable body 1002 are provided.

  In addition, a sensor is provided for detecting whether or not the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, and when the sensor detects that the movable body 1002 is not located at the initial position when the power is turned off. The movable body 1002 is configured to move to the lowest position. A sensor is provided for detecting whether or not the movable body is in the initial posture. When the sensor detects that the movable body is not in the initial posture when the power is turned off, the movable body is placed in the initial posture. You may be comprised so that it may return to. Note that the drive control of the movable body 1002 in this embodiment may be applied to another movable body.

(Example 2)
FIG. 33 shows an example of effects in Example 2 of the present embodiment. FIG. 33 shows the effect state in time series. Each figure of FIG. 33 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 33A shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is off. ing. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 33A, the number of holds in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero. In the state shown in FIG. 33A, the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions.

  In FIG. 33 (b), which continues from FIG. 33 (a), the number of holdings in FIG. 1 increased from 0 to 1 and increased based on the fact that one game ball entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. This shows a state where the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is executed, and in the effect display region 208d, a black circular variation icon is displayed.

  FIG. 33C continuing from FIG. 33B shows a state in which the movable body 1002 and the movable body 1010 have started to perform the rendering operation. The movable body 1002 has moved from the initial position to the uppermost position, and the movable body 1010 has moved from the initial position to the lowermost position. The movement start timing of the movable body 1002 and the movable body 1010 may be the same, or one of them may be the first. The symbol variation display with a large number of movable bodies moving in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 at substantially the same timing as the symbol variation display with a small number of movable bodies moving in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the same timing. The jackpot symbol pattern may be configured to be easily displayed.

  FIG. 33 (d) continued from FIG. 33 (c) shows a state where the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable body 1010 of the movable body 1002 perform the rotation operation, and the movable body 1006 performs the rendering operation. In this embodiment, the movable body 1010 can rotate 180 ° clockwise from the initial posture shown in FIG. 33C, and can rotate 180 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. The initial posture of the movable body 1010 is a posture in which the upper and lower ends of the movable body 1010 are parallel to the horizontal direction. In addition, a drive mechanism that rotates the movable body 1010 can be the same as the drive mechanism that rotates the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. In the state shown in FIG. 33D, the movable body 1010 rotates 30 ° clockwise, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 30 ° clockwise, and the movable body 1006 moves to the right from the initial position. The operation start timings of the movable body 1010, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable body 1006 may be the same, the operation start timings of the two movable bodies may be the same, or the operations start of the three movable bodies. The timing may be different. The symbol variation display with a large number of movable bodies rotating in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 at substantially the same timing is a symbol variation with a small number of movable bodies rotating in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the same timing. You may be comprised so that a big hit symbol aspect may be easy to carry out a fixed display rather than a display.

  FIG. 33 (e) continued from FIG. 33 (d) shows a state in which the power interruption of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game. The display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is erased, and all the lamps are turned off.

  FIG. 33 (f) subsequent to FIG. 33 (e) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has returned to the initial posture while the pachinko machine 100 is powered off. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a power storage control unit 660 that includes a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power for returning the movable body to the initial position or the initial posture even after the power from the outside is cut off. In preparation. When the power interruption occurs, the second sub control unit 500 drives the movable body with the power supplied from the power storage circuit to return to the initial position or the initial posture. In this embodiment, when power interruption occurs, control for returning the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable body 1010 to the initial posture is executed, and control for returning the movable body 1006 to the initial position is not executed. The movable body 1006 remains stationary at the position when the power interruption occurs. Note that when the movable body 1006 is capable of rotating, and power interruption occurs after the movable body 1006 performs the rotational operation, the movable body 1006 remains stationary while rotating from the initial posture.

  FIG. 33 (g) continued from FIG. 33 (f) shows a state where the movable body 1002 has moved to the lowest position. The second sub control unit 500 ends the drive control of the movable body 1002 after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture. For this reason, in the power-off state of the pachinko machine 100, the movable body 1002 moves by its own weight to the lowest position below the initial position. Note that the second sub-control unit 500 continues the drive control of the movable body 1002 even after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture, and executes the drive control to move the movable body 1002 to the lowest position. Good.

  FIG. 33 (h) subsequent to FIG. 33 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has returned to the initial posture. FIG. 33 (i) continued from FIG. 33 (h) shows a state where the movable body 1010 has returned to the initial position.

  FIG. 33 (j) following FIG. 33 (i) shows a state where the power of the pachinko machine 100 remains off. The pachinko machine 100 is in a state waiting for power-on.

  FIG. 33 (k) subsequent to FIG. 33 (j) shows a state where the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. In FIG. 33 (k), the activation of the main control unit 300 is completed, the special figure 1 variable game in the special figure 1 display device 212 is resumed, the first sub control unit 400 is being activated, The decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the control unit 400 displays a character string image “Starting.”. In addition, the character image “start” of the character string image is hidden by the movable body 1006.

  FIG. 33 (l) subsequent to FIG. 33 (k) shows a state where the second sub-control unit 500 is activated. After the second sub-control unit 500 is activated, an initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub-control unit 500 is executed. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character string image of “Initial operation” to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is executed.

  FIG. 33 (m) subsequent to FIG. 33 (l) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body is started. In this example, first, the initial operation of the movable body 1002 is executed. As shown in FIG. 33 (m), the movable body 1002 has moved from the lowermost position to the uppermost position. In addition, the sub display device 1030 provided in the movable body 1002 displays a character string image “in initial operation” in the same manner as the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 33 (n) subsequent to FIG. 33 (m) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. FIG. 33 (o) following FIG. 33 (n) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 33 (n). In FIG. 33 (p) following FIG. 33 (o), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. The moved state is shown. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1002 is completed.

  FIG. 33 (q) subsequent to FIG. 33 (p) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has started an initial operation. In the initial operation of the movable body 1010 of this example, first, the movable body 1010 moves from the initial position to the lowest position. FIG. 33 (r) subsequent to FIG. 33 (q) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 is rotated 45 ° clockwise from the initial posture. FIG. 33 (s) subsequent to FIG. 33 (r) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 33 (r) and returned to the initial position. FIG. 33 (t) following FIG. 33 (s) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has moved upward and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1010 of this example, first, the movable body 1010 moves from the initial position to the lowest position, then the movable body 1010 rotates 45 ° clockwise from the initial posture, and then the movable body 1010. Rotates 45 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial posture, and finally, the movable body 1010 moves to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1010 is completed.

  FIG. 33 (u) following FIG. 33 (t) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has started the initial operation. If the movable body 1006 is stopped at a position other than the initial position at the start of the initial operation, the movable body 1006 first returns to the initial position. FIG. 33 (v) following FIG. 33 (u) shows a state where the movable body 1006 has moved from the initial position to the rightmost end in the movement range. FIG. 33 (w) subsequent to FIG. 33 (v) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1006 has moved to the left and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1006 of this example, first, the movable body 1006 returns to the initial position, then the movable body 1006 moves from the initial position to the rightmost position, and then the movable body 1006 moves to the rightmost position. To return to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1006 is completed.

  FIG. 33 (x) subsequent to FIG. 33 (w) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has started an initial operation. The movable body 1008 has moved from the initial position to the leftmost end of the movement range. FIG. 33 (y) subsequent to FIG. 33 (x) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1008 moves to the right and returns to the initial position.

  FIG. 33 (z) subsequent to FIG. 33 (y) shows a state in which the movable body 1012 has started an initial operation. The movable body 1012 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. FIG. 33 (a) following FIG. 33 (z) shows a state in which the movable body 1012 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1012 returns to the initial position by rotating 60 ° counterclockwise.

  In FIG. 33A, the movable body 1004 starts an initial operation. The movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. FIG. 33 (b) continued from FIG. 33 (a) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 has rotated 60 ° counterclockwise and returned to the initial position. FIG. 33C, which continues from FIG. 33B, shows a state in which the movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° clockwise. FIG. 33B, which continues from FIG. 33C, shows a state in which the movable body 1004 has rotated 60 ° clockwise and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1004 of this example, first, the movable body 1004 rotates 60 ° clockwise from the initial position, and then the movable body 1004 rotates 60 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial position, The movable body 1004 rotates 60 ° clockwise from the initial position, and then the movable body 1004 rotates 60 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1004 is completed. As described above, the same operation may be executed a plurality of times in the initial operation of the movable body. In this example, when the initial operation of the movable body 1004 is completed, the initial operations of all the movable bodies are completed.

(Example 3)
FIG. 34 shows an effect example in Example 3 of the present embodiment. FIG. 33 shows the effect state in time series. Each drawing of FIG. 34 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 34A shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is off. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 34 (a), the number of holds in the special figures 1 and 2 is zero. In the state shown in FIG. 34A, the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions.

  In FIG. 34 (b) following FIG. 34 (a), the number of holdings in FIG. 1 increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, and increased. This shows a state where the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is executed, and in the effect display region 208d, a black circular variation icon is displayed.

  FIG. 34 (c) continuing from FIG. 34 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 and the movable body 1010 have started executing the rendering operation. The movable body 1002 has moved from the initial position to the uppermost position, and the movable body 1010 has moved from the initial position to the lowermost position.

  FIG. 34 (d) continued from FIG. 34 (c) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, the movable body 1004, and the movable body 1010 of the movable body 1002 perform the rotation operation, and the movable body 1006 performs the rendering operation. Yes. In this embodiment, the movable body 1010 can rotate 180 ° clockwise from the initial posture shown in FIG. 34C, and can rotate 180 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. In the state shown in FIG. 34D, the movable body 1010 rotates 30 ° clockwise, the movable body 1004 rotates 60 ° clockwise, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 30 ° clockwise, and the movable body 1006 Is moving to the right from the initial position. The operation start timings of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable body 1004 may be the same or different.

  FIG. 34 (e) continued from FIG. 34 (d) shows a state in which a power interruption occurs during execution of the special figure 1 variable game and the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off. The display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is erased, and all the lamps are turned off.

  FIG. 34 (f) continued from FIG. 34 (e) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has returned to the initial posture while the pachinko machine 100 is powered off. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a power storage control unit 660 that includes a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power for returning the movable body to the initial position or the initial posture even after the power from the outside is cut off. In preparation. When the power interruption occurs, the second sub control unit 500 drives the movable body with the power supplied from the power storage circuit to return to the initial position or the initial posture. In this embodiment, when power interruption occurs, control for returning the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable body 1010 to the initial posture is executed, and control for returning the movable bodies 1004 and 1006 to the initial position is not executed. The movable bodies 1004 and 1006 remain stationary at the position when the power interruption occurs. Note that when the movable body 1006 is capable of rotating, and power interruption occurs after the movable body 1006 performs the rotational operation, the movable body 1006 remains stationary while rotating from the initial posture. Further, control for returning the movable bodies 1004 and 1006 to the initial positions may be executed.

  FIG. 34 (g) continued from FIG. 34 (f) shows a state where the movable body 1002 has moved to the lowest position. The second sub control unit 500 ends the drive control of the movable body 1002 after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture. For this reason, in the power-off state of the pachinko machine 100, the movable body 1002 moves by its own weight to the lowest position below the initial position. Note that the second sub-control unit 500 continues the drive control of the movable body 1002 even after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture, and executes the drive control to move the movable body 1002 to the lowest position. Good.

  FIG. 34 (h) following FIG. 34 (g) shows a state where the movable body 1010 has returned to the initial posture. FIG. 34 (i) following FIG. 34 (h) shows a state where the movable body 1010 has returned to the initial position.

  FIG. 34 (j) following FIG. 34 (i) shows a state where the power of the pachinko machine 100 remains off. The pachinko machine 100 is in a state waiting for power-on.

  FIG. 34 (k) subsequent to FIG. 34 (j) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. In FIG. 34 (k), the activation of the main control unit 300 is completed, the special figure 1 variable game in the special figure 1 display device 212 is resumed, the first sub control unit 400 is being activated, and the first sub control unit 400 is activated. The decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the control unit 400 displays a character string image “Starting.”. In addition, the character image “start” of the character string image is hidden by the movable body 1006.

  FIG. 34 (l) subsequent to FIG. 34 (k) shows a state in which the second sub-control unit 500 is activated. After the second sub-control unit 500 is activated, an initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub-control unit 500 is executed. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character string image of “Initial operation” to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is executed.

  FIG. 34 (m) subsequent to FIG. 34 (l) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body has been started. In this example, when there is a movable body that is stopped at a position different from the initial position at the start of the initial operation of the movable body, control for returning the movable body to the initial position is executed. In FIG. 34 (m), first, the movable body 1006 has returned to the initial position.

  FIG. 34 (n) subsequent to FIG. 34 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 has returned to the initial position. The movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise and returned to the initial position.

  FIG. 34 (o) following FIG. 34 (n) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has returned to the initial value from the lowest position. FIG. 34 (p) following FIG. 34 (o) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has started the initial operation and moved to the uppermost position. The movable body 1002 starts an initial operation after returning to the initial position.

Example 4
FIG. 35 shows an example of effects in Example 4 of the present embodiment. FIG. 35 shows the effect state in time series. Each figure of Fig.35 (a)-(n) has shown the schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 35A shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is off. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 35 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero. In the state shown in FIG. 35A, the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions.

  In FIG. 35 (b) following FIG. 35 (a), the number of holdings in FIG. 1 increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, and increased. This shows a state where the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is executed, and in the effect display region 208d, a black circular variation icon is displayed.

  FIG. 35C, which continues from FIG. 35B, shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has started to perform the rendering operation. The movable body 1002 has moved from the initial position to the uppermost position.

  FIG. 35D subsequent to FIG. 35C shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 performs the rotation operation. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 180 ° counterclockwise.

  FIG. 35 (e) continued from FIG. 35 (d) shows a state where the power interruption of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game. The display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is erased, and all the lamps are turned off.

  FIG. 35 (f) following FIG. 35 (e) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has moved to its lowest position with its own weight without returning the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 to the initial posture. In this example, the control for returning the movable body to the initial posture or the initial position at the time of power interruption is not executed.

  FIG. 35 (g) continued from FIG. 35 (g) shows a state where the power of the pachinko machine 100 remains off. The pachinko machine 100 is in a state waiting for power-on.

  FIG. 35 (h) continued from FIG. 35 (g) shows a state where the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. In FIG. 35 (h), the activation of the main control unit 300 is completed, the special figure 1 variable game in the special figure 1 display device 212 is resumed, the first sub control unit 400 is being activated, and the first sub control unit 400 is activated. The decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the control unit 400 displays a character string image “active”. The sub display device 1030 displays a character string image “active”.

  FIG. 35 (i) continuing from FIG. 35 (h) shows a state in which the second sub-control unit 500 is activated. After the second sub-control unit 500 is activated, an initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub-control unit 500 is executed. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character string image of “Initial operation” to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is executed.

  FIG. 35 (j) continued from FIG. 35 (i) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body 1002 has been started. After the movable body 1002 moves to the uppermost position, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates clockwise. In the initial operation, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 performs an operation of rotating 180 degrees clockwise from the initial posture. In this example, since the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is stationary while rotating 180 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture at the start of the initial operation, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 360 ° clockwise after the start of the initial operation.

  FIG. 35 (k) following FIG. 35 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 180 ° clockwise from the initial posture and is stationary. FIG. 35 (l) subsequent to FIG. 35 (k) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotating counterclockwise. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 360 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 35 (k), and then rotates clockwise 180 ° to return to the initial posture. FIG. 35 (m) subsequent to FIG. 35 (l) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has returned to the initial posture. FIG. 35 (n) following FIG. 35 (m) shows a state where the movable body 1002 has moved to the initial position. The movable body 1002 ends the initial operation when it moves to the initial position.

  FIG. 35 (o) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 in the state shown in FIGS. 35 (f) to 35 (i) is viewed from the rear right side. In this example, the movable body 1002 moves to the lowermost position while the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 180 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. As shown in FIG. 35 (o), a lower escape portion 1050 having a space for allowing the movable body 1002 to escape is provided below the front side of the lower base 1044. The lower escape portion 1050 is provided in the center case of the game board 1000 at the lower rear side of the front stage 244 of the game board 1000. A receiving portion 1052 having a flat surface for receiving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is disposed at the lowermost end of the lower relief portion 1050. A buffer portion 1054 is provided on the upper surface of the receiving portion 1052. A sheet-like buffer member is used for the buffer unit 1054.

  When the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off with the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotated by 45 ° or more from the initial posture, for example, the moving unit 1036 of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 cannot be received by the lower base 1044, but the lower escape portion 1050 It can be received by the receiving unit 1052. Thereby, even if the movable body 1002 having a posture different from the initial posture moves to the lower limit position, the movable body 1002 can be prevented from colliding with the peripheral device or the peripheral member.

  Although illustration is omitted, when the movable body 1002 can move upward from the initial position of the movable body 1010, an upper clearance portion may be provided. Similar to the lower escape portion 1050, the upper escape portion is provided to prevent the movable body 1002 from colliding with a peripheral device or a peripheral member. The upper relief portion only needs to be provided with a receiving portion having a flat surface for receiving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and a buffer portion on the lower surface of the receiving portion.

(Example 5)
FIG. 36 shows an example of effects in Example 5 of the present embodiment. FIG. 36 shows the effect state in time series. Each drawing of FIG. 36 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 36A shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is off. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 36 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero. In the state shown in FIG. 36A, the movable bodies 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1012 are located at the initial positions.

  FIG. 36 (b) continued from FIG. 36 (a) shows a state in which the number of holds in FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular hold icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1.

  FIG. 36C continuing from FIG. 36B shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a change icon and a moving animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left is displayed.

  FIG. 36 (d) following FIG. 36 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  FIG. 36E continuing from FIG. 36D shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 can rotate. The drive mechanism that executes the rotation operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is the same as the drive mechanism that executes the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in the above embodiment. Thus, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 also functions as a movable body. In addition, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 rotates 45 degrees clockwise and counterclockwise around the center of the display area from the initial posture in which the upper and lower sides of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 are parallel to the horizontal direction. Is possible. When the main liquid crystal unit 1001 can rotate, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may not be able to rotate, or both units may be able to rotate. In this embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is fixed to the game board 1000 and cannot rotate. Further, when the main liquid crystal unit 1001 cannot be rotated as in the above embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may be rotatable or may not be rotated.

  FIG. 36 (f) continuing from FIG. 36 (e) shows a state in which the effect in the previous stage of the rotation operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has been started. In this example, before the main liquid crystal unit 1001 starts the rotation operation, the change icon, the hold icon, and the decorative design are displayed on the sub display device 1030, and then these displays are erased from the decorative design display device 208. . In this example, first, a black circular variation icon is displayed on the sub display device 1030, and then the variation icon is deleted from the decorative symbol display device 208. If a hold icon is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon is displayed on the sub display device 1030, and then the hold icon is deleted from the decorative symbol display device 208. The display mode of the variation icon and the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 is the same as the display mode of the change icon and the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 36 (g) continued from FIG. 36 (f) shows a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed on the sub display device 1030. After the sub display device 1030 temporarily stops and displays “decoration 2” as the left and right symbols, and the middle symbol is variably displayed, the decoration symbol display is deleted from the ornament symbol display device 208.

  When the display of the variation icon, the hold icon, the decoration symbol, and the like is deleted on the decorative symbol display device 208, another display that overlaps the display may be visible to the player. The other display may be displayed as a preview image. The symbol variation display in which the other display may be visible to the player so that the big hit symbol mode is more easily displayed than the symbol variation display in which the other display remains invisible to the player. It may be configured.

  FIG. 36 (h) continuing from FIG. 36 (g) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has started the rendering operation. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture.

  FIG. 36 (i) continued from FIG. 36 (h) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 36 (h). Further, based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, the number of special figures in FIG. 1 increases from 0 to 1, and a white circular hold icon is displayed on the sub display device 1030. .

  FIG. 36 (j) continued from FIG. 36 (i) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 36 (i) and returned to the initial posture. In addition, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed as a middle symbol on the sub display device 1030, and the first sub control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command transmitted from the main control unit 300. On the device 1030, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed as a confirmed symbol.

  FIG. 36 (k) subsequent to FIG. 36 (j) shows a state where the animation for deleting the variation icon is executed. In the sub display device 1030, the fluctuation icon deletion animation is executed, and the black circular fluctuation icon is deleted.

  FIG. 36 (l) subsequent to FIG. 36 (k) shows a non-execution state of the special figure variable game. The special figure 1 of the off symbol is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown), and “decoration 2 -decoration 3 -decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the sub display device 1030.

  FIG. 36 (m) following FIG. 36 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). As shown in FIG. 1, after the start of the variable game, the sub-display device 1030 displays a moving animation between the hold icon and the change icon that moves to the left. In addition, after the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the movable body 1006 has moved to the leftmost end. For this reason, the movable body 1006 cannot be visually recognized by the player.

  FIG. 36 (n) subsequent to FIG. 36 (m) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is started on the sub display device 1030. FIG.

  FIG. 36 (o) following FIG. 36 (n) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is resumed in the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the decorative symbol display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is resumed during execution of the special symbol variable game after the special graphic variable game in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has executed the rotation effect operation. After the decorative symbol variation display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub-display device 1030 erases the decorative symbol variation display.

  FIG. 36 (n) subsequent to FIG. 36 (o) shows a state in which the display of the variation icon is resumed in the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the display of the variation icon and the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is resumed during execution of the special figure variable game following the special figure variable game in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has executed the rotation effect operation. After the display of the variation icon is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation icon is deleted on the sub display device 1030. When the hold icon is displayed on the sub display device 1030, the hold icon is deleted on the sub display device 1030 after the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is started.

  FIG. 36 (q) continued from FIG. 36 (p) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is out of place. Note that the movable body 1006 may return to the initial position after the end of the special figure 1 variable game.

  FIG. 36 (r) subsequent to FIG. 36 (q) shows a state in which the fluctuation icon erasing animation is executed while the special figure fluctuation game is not executed. In the effect display area 208d, the white circular variation icon corresponding to the completed special figure 1 variation game is deleted.

(Example 6)
FIG. 37 shows an effect example in Example 6 of the present embodiment. FIG. 37 shows the effect state in time series. Each drawing of FIG. 37 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 37A shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is off. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 37 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero. Further, in this embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is fixed to the game board 1000 and cannot be moved and rotated, and the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is moved in the vertical direction by a driving mechanism similar to the movable body 1002 shown in FIG. It is possible. Further, as in the fifth embodiment, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 can rotate. In the state shown in FIG. 37A, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is in the initial position in the initial posture. Note that both the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may be movable up and down.

  FIG. 37 (b) continuing from FIG. 37 (a) shows a state in which power interruption occurs during the non-execution of the special figure variable game and the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off. The display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is erased, and all the lamps are turned off.

  FIG. 37C continuing from FIG. 37B shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has moved from the initial position to the lowest position. Similar to the movable body 1002, when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 moves to the lowest position in the moving range by its own weight. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 is located at the lowest position when the pachinko machine 100 is in a non-operating state with the power off. In addition, the second sub control unit 500 may execute drive control for moving the main liquid crystal unit 1001 to the lowest position with the power supplied from the power storage circuit provided in the power control unit 660.

  FIG. 37 (d) continued from FIG. 37 (c) shows a state where the power of the pachinko machine 100 is off.

  FIG. 37 (e) continuing from FIG. 37 (d) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. In FIG. 37 (e), the first sub-control unit 400 is being activated, and a character string image of “being activated” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. Has been.

  FIG. 37 (f) continued from FIG. 37 (e) shows a state in which the second sub control unit 500 is activated. After the second sub-control unit 500 is activated, an initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub-control unit 500 is executed. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character string image of “Initial operation” to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is executed. Note that the character string image “Active” is continuously displayed on the sub display device 1030.

  FIG. 37 (g) following FIG. 37 (f) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body has been started. In this example, only the initial operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is executed. As shown in FIG. 37 (g), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 moves upward and is positioned at the initial position.

  FIG. 37 (h) following FIG. 37 (g) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. FIG. 37 (i) following FIG. 37 (h) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has been rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 37 (h). FIG. 37 (j) following FIG. 37 (i) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 37 (i) and returned to the initial posture. In the initial operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 of this example, first, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 moves from the lowest position (non-operating operation position) to the initial position, and then the main liquid crystal unit 1001 rotates counterclockwise from the initial posture. Then, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 rotates 90 ° clockwise, and then the main liquid crystal unit 1001 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial posture. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is completed.

  FIG. 37 (k) following FIG. 37 (j) shows a state where the initial operation of the movable body is completed and the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is resumed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4” is stopped and displayed. The stop symbol “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is a default stop symbol. Also, in the state shown in FIG. 37 (k), the number of holds in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero.

  Movement of the movable body 1002 from the initial position to the lowest position in FIGS. 31 (c) and 31 (d), and the main liquid crystal unit 1001 in FIGS. 37 (b) and 37 (c) from the initial position to the lowest position. The movement of the first movable body to the first position when the power source is turned off, such as movement, may be performed not only when the power source is turned off, but also as a big hit notice. The symbol variation display with the jackpot notice may be configured to make it easier for the jackpot symbol form to be stopped and displayed in the end than the symbol variation display without the jackpot notice. The symbol variation display that has been performed may always be finally stopped and displayed. On the contrary, even if it is the symbol variation display for which the jackpot notice is made, the symbol pattern may be finally removed and the symbol pattern may be stopped and displayed. Of course, there may be a case where the big hit symbol mode is finally stopped even if the symbol variation display in which the big hit announcement is not performed.

(Example 7)
FIG. 38 shows an effect example in Example 7 of the present embodiment. FIG. 38 shows the effect state in time series. Each drawing of FIG. 38 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 38A shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is off. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 38 (a), the number of holds in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero. Further, in this embodiment, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 can execute vertical movement and rotation, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can execute vertical movement and rotation. In the state shown in FIG. 38A, the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1012 are positioned at the initial position, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is positioned at the initial position in the initial posture, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is initially positioned. Still in posture.

  FIG. 38 (b), which continues from FIG. 38 (a), shows a state in which the number of holdings in FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular hold icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1.

  FIG.38 (c) continuing from FIG.38 (b) has shown the state by which the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display apparatus 212 not shown was started. Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a change icon and a moving animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left is displayed.

  FIG.38 (d) continuing from FIG.38 (c) has shown the state from which the display change of the decoration symbol was started.

  FIG. 38 (e) following FIG. 38 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG.

  FIG. 38 (f) continued from FIG. 38 (e) shows a state in which the rendering operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is started. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture.

  FIG. 38 (g) following FIG. 38 (f) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 38 (g).

  FIG. 38 (h) continued from FIG. 38 (g) shows a state in which the effect operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is started. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 30 ° clockwise from the initial posture.

  FIG. 38 (i) following FIG. 38 (h) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 are rotated 60 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 38 (h). The rotation start timing of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may be the same, or one of them may be the first. In the rotation operation, the rotation speeds of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 are the same.

  FIG. 38 (j) following FIG. 38 (i) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 are rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 38 (h). In the rotation operation, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has a rotation speed higher than that of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. At the time shown in FIG. 38 (j), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 rotates clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 38 (i). The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated by 30 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 38 (k) following FIG. 38 (j), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated by 60 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 38 (j), and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is in the state shown in FIG. 38 (j). It shows the state rotated 30 ° clockwise. In the rotation operation, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has a higher rotation speed than the sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

  In FIG. 38 (l) following FIG. 38 (k), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 rotates 30 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 38 (k), and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 starts from the state shown in FIG. 38 (k). A state rotated 30 ° counterclockwise is shown. As a result, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 return to the initial posture.

  FIG. 38 (m) subsequent to FIG. 38 (l) shows a state in which an effect operation is performed in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the movable body 1002 including the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 move in the vertical direction. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 moves downward, and the movable body 1002 including the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves upward. Thus, in the effect operation of this example, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 move in opposite directions.

  FIG. 38 (n) following FIG. 38 (m) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Prior to the end of the special figure 1 variable game, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the movable body 1002 are returned to the initial positions. Moreover, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 4—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is out of place.

  FIG. 38 (o) subsequent to FIG. 38 (n) shows a state in which the fluctuation icon deletion animation is executed while the special figure fluctuation game is not executed. In the effect display area 208d, the white circular variation icon corresponding to the completed special figure 1 variation game is deleted.

(Example 8)
Next, the connection unit 1060 of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the moving unit 1036 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. A slip ring is used for the connection unit 1060 of the present embodiment.

  FIGS. 39A to 39D are external perspective views of the connection unit 1060 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the front. First, the external configuration of the connection unit 1060 will be described with reference to FIG. The connection unit 1060 includes an upper case 1062 and a lower case 1064. The upper case 1062 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper and lower surfaces are square when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the front. Further, the upper case 1062 has a shape that is longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the front. Note that in FIGS. 39A to 39D and FIG. 39F, the upper case 1062 is cross-hatched in order to easily distinguish the configurations.

  A lower case 1064 is disposed below the upper case 1062. The lower case 1064 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper and lower surfaces are square when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the front. The entire upper surface of the lower case 1064 is opened. Further, the entire lower surface of the upper case 1062 is opened. The upper and lower surfaces of the lower case 1064 and the upper and lower surfaces of the upper case 1062 have the same size, and the lower case 1064 is disposed so that the upper surface matches the lower surface of the upper case 1062. The lower case 1064 is shorter in the vertical direction than the upper case 1062 when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the front. In FIGS. 39A to 39E, the lower case 1064 is hatched to the right in order to easily distinguish the configurations. Further, the upper case 1062 and the lower case 1064 are disposed on the moving unit 1036 side.

  A fixed-side connector 1066 is provided at the lower center of the side surface on the front side of the upper case 1062. In the present embodiment, the other end of the harness whose one end is connected to the fixed connector 1066 is connected to the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400. Note that the harness and the first sub-board 160 may be connected via a relay board.

  A circular opening 1068 is provided at the center of the upper surface of the upper case 1062. A circular rotation side case 1070 is disposed in the opening 1068. The rotation side case 1070 is disposed on the side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. A rotation shaft fixing hole 1072 is provided at the center of the rotation side case 1070. The rotation shaft fixing hole 1072 has one end fixed to the rotation shaft of a motor disposed in the moving unit 1036 and the other end fixed to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in a direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the rotation side case 1070. It arrange | positions so that it may extend | stretch. The rotation side case 1070 is provided with a rotation side connector 1074. In this embodiment, the other end of the harness whose one end is connected to the rotation side connector 1074 is connected to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

  The rotation side case 1070 rotates with the shaft. FIGS. 39B to 39D show a state in which the rotation side case 1070 is rotated. FIG. 39B shows a state in which the rotation side case 1070 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 39A when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from above. FIG. 39C shows a state in which the rotation side case 1070 is rotated 180 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 39A when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from above. FIG. 39 (d) shows a state where the rotation side case 1070 is rotated 270 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 39 (a) when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from above.

  FIG. 39E shows a state where the inside of the lower case 1064 of the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the upper case 1062 side. A circular rotation shaft hole 1076 is provided at the center of the lower case 1064. A shaft for rotating the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 passes through the rotation shaft hole 1076.

  The fixed connector 1066 is provided with 6 pins, and the lower case 1064 is provided with conductive portions 1078, 1080, 1082, 1084, 1086, 1088 connected to the pins of the fixed connector 1066, respectively. Yes. Taking the conductive portion 1078 as an example, the conductive portion 1078 has an elongated conductive plate 1078a and a fixture 1078b for fixing one end of the conductive plate 1078a to the lower case 1064. The fixture 1078b fixes the conductive plate 1078a to the lower case 1064 so that the conductive plate 1078b does not rotate. An insulator is used for the fixing portion 1078b. The conductive portions 1080 to 1088 have the same configuration as the conductive portion 1078.

  FIG. 39 (f) shows a state where the lower surface side of the rotation side case 1070 of the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the lower case 1064 side. A rotation side substrate 1090 is disposed on the lower surface side of the rotation side case 1070. The rotation side substrate 1090 is a slip ring. The rotation-side substrate 1090 has a circular shape and has a circumferential insulating portion 1092. In addition, circumferential wirings 1094, 1096, 1098, 1100, 1102, and 1104 are provided on the inner peripheral side of the insulating portion 1092 of the rotation side substrate 1090. The wirings 1094, 1096, 1098, 1100, 1102, and 1104 are arranged concentrically from the outer peripheral side in this order. The insulating portion 1092 and the wirings 1094 to 1104 are concentrically arranged, and a rotation shaft fixing hole 1072 is provided at the center of the concentric circle. In FIG. 39 (f), the insulating portion 1092 and the wiring portions 1094 to 1104 are hatched to the right in order to easily distinguish the configurations.

  The rotation side connector 1074 of the rotation side case 1070 is provided with 6 pins, and each pin is connected to the wirings 1094 to 1104. The wiring 1094 is connected to the conductive portion 1078 shown in FIG. 39E, the wiring 1096 is connected to the conductive portion 1080 shown in FIG. 39E, and the wiring 1098 is connected to the conductive portion 1082 shown in FIG. The wiring 1100 is connected to the conductive portion 1084 shown in FIG. 39E, the wiring 1102 is connected to the conductive portion 1086 shown in FIG. 39E, and the wiring 1104 is connected to the conductive portion 1088 shown in FIG. Connected.

  Next, the connection state between each conductive portion and each wiring will be described with reference to FIGS. 39G and 39H taking the connection state between the conductive portion 1078 and the wiring 1094 as an example. FIGS. 39 (g) and (h) show the conductive portion 1078 extracted along the line AA in FIG. 39 (e). The conductive plate 1078a has a shape extending obliquely upward from the lower case 1064. When the lower case 1064 is placed on the upper case 1062 with the upper surface of the lower case 1064 and the lower surface of the upper case 1062 aligned, as shown in FIG. 39 (h), the wiring 1094 has the other end of the conductive plate 1078a downward. It contacts the conductive plate 1078a so as to be pushed in. In this way, the conductive portion 1078 and the wiring 1094 are connected. The connection state between the conductive portions 1080 to 1088 and the wirings 1096 to 1104 is the same.

  The conductive portion 1078 and the wiring 1094 are used for supplying power to a circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1080 and the wiring 1096 are used for supplying power to a circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1082 and the wiring 1098 are used to connect the GND of the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the GND of the first sub board 160. The conductive portion 1084 and the wiring 1100 are used to connect the GND of the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the GND of the first sub-board 160. The conductive portion 1086 and the wiring 1102 are used for transmitting various signals from the first sub-substrate 160 to a circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1088 and the wiring 1104 are used for transmitting various signals from the first sub-board 160 to a circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

As an example of various signals, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is equipped with a microcomputer for controlling the image control means (for example, VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.), the first sub-control unit 400 applies to the microcomputer. Examples include a production command (a command for designating production, progression of production, still image, moving image, progression of image display scenario, and the like).
Further, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may be provided with image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.) mounted on the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. In this case, image control provided on the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 from the microcomputer. Image commands (commands that specify the progress of a still image, a moving image, an image display scenario, etc.) for the means.
Further, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is not equipped with a microcomputer or image control means for controlling image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.), but is mounted on the first sub board 160 or the moving unit 1036 to The image drive control means (liquid crystal drive means or the like) may be mounted on 1032. In this case, the image drive control means (from the image control means provided in the first sub-control unit 400 or the moving unit 1036) Image data (for example, image data transmitted for a predetermined number of times such as 30 times or 60 times per second, RGB information of each dot, etc.).

Example 9
Next, a connection unit of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the moving unit 1036 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, a connection unit 1110 is used as the connection unit.

  FIG. 40A is an external perspective view of the connection unit 1110 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the front. The connection unit 1110 is disposed in the moving unit 1036 shown in FIG. 30 and is electrically connected to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

  First, the external configuration of the connection unit 1110 will be described with reference to FIG. The connection unit 1110 includes an upper case 1112 and a lower case 1114. The upper case 1112 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper and lower surfaces are square when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the front. Further, the upper case 1112 has a shape that is longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the front. In FIGS. 40A and 40C, the upper case 1062 is cross-hatched in order to easily distinguish the configurations.

  A lower case 1114 is disposed below the upper case 1112. The lower case 1114 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper and lower surfaces are square when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the front. The entire upper surface of the lower case 1114 is opened. Further, the entire lower surface of the upper case 1112 is opened. The upper and lower surfaces of the lower case 1114 and the upper and lower surfaces of the upper case 1112 have the same size, and the lower case 1114 is arranged such that the upper surface coincides with the lower surface of the upper case 1112. Further, the lower case 1114 is shorter in the vertical direction than the upper case 1112 when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the front. In FIGS. 40A and 40B, the lower case 1114 is hatched to the right in order to easily distinguish the configurations. Further, the upper case 1112 and the lower case 1114 are disposed on the moving unit 1036 side.

  A fixed-side connector 1116 is provided at the lower center of the side surface on the front side of the upper case 1112. In the present embodiment, the other end of the harness whose one end is connected to the fixed connector 1116 is connected to the first sub-board 160 constituting the first sub-control unit 400. Note that the harness and the first sub-board 160 may be connected via a relay board.

  A circular opening 1118 is provided at the center of the upper bottom surface of the upper case 1112. A circular rotation side case 1120 is disposed in the opening 1118. The rotation side case 1120 is disposed on the side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The rotation side case 1120 is provided with a rotation side connector 1022. In the present embodiment, the other end of the harness whose one end is connected to the rotation side connector 1122 is connected to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

  Fixed to the upper surface of the rotation-side case 1112 are columnar rotor connecting shafts 1124, 1126, and 1128 that extend perpendicularly to the upper surface and extend upward. The rotating body connecting shafts 1124, 1126, and 1128 have the same length. Further, the rotating body connecting shafts 1124 to 1128 are arranged at equal intervals on the rotating side case 1112. Bearings are attached to the tips of the rotating body connecting shafts 1124 to 1128, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is attached to the bearings. Further, when the tips of the rotating body connecting shafts 1124 to 1128 are connected, an equilateral triangle is formed, and data transmission / reception units 1138 and 1144 described later are arranged at the center of gravity of the equilateral triangle.

  FIG. 40B shows a state in which the inside of the lower case 1114 of the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the upper case 1112 side. The fixed connector 1116 is provided with 6 pins, and the lower case 1164 is provided with conductive portions 1130, 1132, 1134, 1136 respectively connected to 4 of the 6 pins of the fixed connector 1164. . Taking the conductive portion 1130 as an example, the conductive portion 1130 includes an elongated conductive plate 1130a and a fixture 1130b that fixes one end of the conductive plate 1130a to the lower case 1114. The fixture 1130b fixes the conductive plate 1130a to the lower case 1114 so that the conductive plate 1130b does not rotate. An insulator is used for the fixing portion 1130b. The conductive portions 1132 to 1136 have the same configuration as the conductive portion 1130.

  In the present embodiment, the conductive portions 1130 to 1136 are used for power supply and GND connection, and signal communication is performed by optical communication (wireless communication). In the center of the lower case 1114, a data transmission / reception unit 1138 for optical communication is arranged. The data transmission / reception unit 1138 is connected to two of the six pins of the fixed connector 1114. In this embodiment, the data transmission / reception unit 1138 is used for signal transmission, but signal reception is also possible.

  FIG. 40C shows a state in which the lower surface side of the rotation side case 1120 of the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the lower case 1114 side. A rotation side substrate 1140 is disposed on the lower surface side of the rotation side case 1120. The rotation side substrate 1140 is a slip ring. The rotation-side substrate 1140 has a circular shape and has a circumferential insulating portion 1142. A data transmission / reception unit 1144 is arranged at the center of the rotation side substrate 1140. The data transmission / reception unit 1144 is disposed to face the data transmission / reception unit 1138 so as to overlap the data transmission / reception unit 1138 when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from above. Signal transmission / reception is performed between the data transmission / reception unit 1138 and the data transmission / reception unit 1144 by optical communication. The data transmission / reception unit 1144 is connected to two of the six pins of the rotation-side connector 1122. In this embodiment, the data transmission / reception unit 1144 is used for signal reception, but signal transmission is also possible.

  In addition, circumferential wirings 1146, 1148, 1150, and 1522 are provided on the inner peripheral side of the insulating portion 1142 of the rotation side substrate 1140. The wirings 1146, 1148, 1150 and 1152 are arranged concentrically from the outer peripheral side in this order. Further, the insulating portion 1142 and the wirings 1148 to 1152 are concentrically arranged, and the data transmitting / receiving portion 1144 is provided at the center of the concentric circle. In FIG. 40C, the insulating portion 1142 and the wiring portions 1146 to 1152 are hatched to the right in order to easily distinguish the configurations.

  Four of the six pins and wirings 1146 to 1152 are connected to the rotation-side connector 1122 of the rotation-side case 1120, respectively. Further, the wiring 1146 is connected to the conductive portion 1130 shown in FIG. 40B, the wiring 1148 is connected to the conductive portion 1132 shown in FIG. 40B, and the wiring 1150 is connected to the conductive portion 1134 shown in FIG. The wiring 1152 is connected to the conductive portion 1136 shown in FIG.

  40D and 40E show a connection state between the conductive portion 1130 and the wiring 1146. FIG. FIGS. 40D and 40E show the conductive portion 1130 extracted along the line AA in FIG. 40B. The connection state between the conductive portion 1130 and the wiring 1146 is similar to the connection state between the conductive portion 1078 and the wiring 1094 shown in FIGS. The connection state between the conductive portions 1132 to 1136 and the wirings 1148 to 1152 is the same.

  The conductive portion 1130 and the wiring 1146 are used for supplying power to a circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1132 and the wiring 1148 are used for supplying power to a circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1134 and the wiring 1150 are used to connect the GND of the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the GND of the first sub board 160. The conductive portion 1136 and the wiring 1152 are used to connect the GND of the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the GND of the first sub-substrate 160.

As an example of various signals transmitted / received between the data transmitting / receiving units 1138 and 1144, when a sub-liquid crystal unit 1032 is equipped with a microcomputer for controlling image control means (for example, VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.). Includes an effect command (command for specifying the effect, the progress of the effect, the still image, the moving image, the progress of the image display scenario, etc.) from the first sub-control unit 400 to the microcomputer.
Further, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may be provided with image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.) mounted on the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. In this case, image control provided on the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 from the microcomputer. Image commands (commands that specify the progress of a still image, a moving image, an image display scenario, etc.) for the means.
Further, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is not equipped with a microcomputer or image control means for controlling image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.), but is mounted on the first sub board 160 or the moving unit 1036 to The image drive control means (liquid crystal drive means or the like) may be mounted on 1032. In this case, the image drive control means (from the image control means provided in the first sub-control unit 400 or the moving unit 1036) Image data (for example, image data transmitted for a predetermined number of times such as 30 times or 60 times per second, RGB information of each dot, etc.).

In the present embodiment, the data communication between the data transmission / reception units 1138 and 1144 is optical wireless communication. Laser light is used for optical wireless communication. Note that data communication between the data transmission / reception units 1138 and 1144 may be radio wave communication instead of optical wireless communication. In addition, in the optical wireless communication, LED light may be used instead of laser light.
When both the data transmission / reception unit 1138 and the data transmission / reception unit 1144 are used for signal transmission / reception, the data transmitted from the data transmission / reception unit 1138 to the data transmission / reception unit 1144 is as described above. For the unit 138, an ACK signal and a status signal from a control means provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 (for example, an image control means, a microcomputer for controlling the image control means, an image drive means (liquid crystal drive means)) Information indicating the rotation angle of the rotating body (for example, a detection signal output when a sensor provided on the rotation side detects a detection piece provided on the fixed side, an output signal of an encoder provided on the rotation side, etc. ) May be transmitted.

  FIG. 40F is an external perspective view of the connection unit 1110 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the first modification of the present embodiment as viewed from the front. The connection unit 1110 of this modification has only the rotating body connecting shaft 1124 as the rotating body connecting shaft. The rotating body connection shaft 1124 is disposed at the center (rotation center) of the rotation side case 1120.

  FIG. 40G is an external perspective view of the connection unit 1110 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the second modification of the present embodiment as viewed from the front. The connection unit 1110 of this modification has rotating body connecting shafts 1124 and 1126 as rotating body connecting shafts. A straight line connecting the rotating body connecting shaft 1124 and the tip of the rotating body connecting shaft 1126 passes through the center (rotation center) of the rotating case 1120. Further, the rotating body connecting shaft 1124 and the rotating body connecting shaft 1126 are arranged at an equal distance from the center.

(Example 10)
FIG. 41 shows Production Example 1 in Example 10 of the present embodiment. FIG. 41 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 41 shows a schematic front view or a movable body 1002 of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. Also, the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 of the pachinko machine 100 of the tenth embodiment of the present embodiment and Examples 11 to 16 described later are different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. And is movable in the left-right direction on the front side of the movable body 1002.

  FIG. 41A shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is off. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 41 (a), the number of holds in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero. In the state shown in FIG. 41A, the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the sun image displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the sun image is visible through the transmission part 1006a. It has become. In addition, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission unit 1006b.

  FIG. 41 (b) continued from FIG. 41 (a) shows a state in which the number of holds in FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular hold icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1. Moreover, the black circular hold icon is a hold icon in a prefetch notice mode as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 41 (c) continued from FIG. 41 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a change icon and a moving animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left is displayed.

  FIG. 41 (d) following FIG. 41 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is started. In FIG. 41 and subsequent figures, the decorative symbol variation display is indicated by a thin white arrow pointing downward. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol variation display is started after the movement animation of the hold / variation icon is started.

  FIG. 41E continuing from FIG. 41D shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 41 (d).

  In FIG. 41 (f) following FIG. 41 (e), the movable body 1008 starts an effect operation from the initial position, and the left end of the movable body 1008 has moved to a position located in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates the state. FIG. 41 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 shields the player so that it is difficult to visually recognize the right half area of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. A cloud image displayed on the screen of the decorative design display device 208 and a part of the decorative design 208c are visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008a. In addition, a partial region on the right side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is visually recognized through the transmission portion 1008b. Note that the yacht image or cloud image displayed in the left half area of the screen of the sub display device 1030 may be shielded by the movable body 1008. The symbol variation display in which the yacht image and the cloud image may be shielded by the movable body 1008 is determined in comparison with the symbol variation display in which these images are not shielded by the movable body 1008. You may be comprised so that it may be displayed easily.

  FIG. 41G shows the movable body 1002, the part of the movable body 1008, and the transmission portion 1008b extracted at the same timing as FIG. 41F. The movable body 1008 makes it easy to distinguish from other structures. It is hatched for this purpose. 41 (h) to 41 (k), the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmission part 1008b are extracted and shown. The movable body 1008 is the same as the movable body 1008. It is hatched to make it easier to distinguish from the configuration of. In FIG. 41 (g), an image of the seascape displayed on the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008b. Note that although a cloud image is displayed at a position behind the movable body 1008 below the transmission portion 1008b, the cloud image is not visually recognized by overlapping the movable body 1008. In this embodiment, the cloud image is an image displayed as a preview image.

  FIG. 41 (h) following FIGS. 41 (f) and 41 (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 starts rotating. In FIG. 41 (h), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated approximately 10 ° counterclockwise.

  FIG. 41 (i) following FIG. 41 (h) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 20 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 41 (h). Also, FIG. 41 (i) shows a cloud image that cannot be seen by overlapping the movable body 1008 in the states of FIGS. 41 (g) and (h). The state which became visible via 1008b is shown. The symbol fluctuation display in which the cloud image may be visually recognized through 1008b as the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates is the case where the cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b as the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 does not rotate. It may be configured such that the big hit symbol pattern is easily displayed in comparison with the symbol variation display that is not present. In this embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated approximately 20 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 41 (h), so that the entire cloud image is visible through 1008b. Only a part of the cloud image may be visible through 1008b.

  FIG. 41 (j) following FIG. 41 (i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 20 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 41 (i). In FIG. 41J, a part of the cloud image is visually recognized via 1008b. The rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in FIG. 41 (j) and the rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in FIG. 41 (h) are the same. However, in the state shown in FIG. Since the display of moving the image of the cloud that did not exist upward with the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 was performed, a part of the image of the cloud is visually recognized through 1008b in FIG. 41 (j). In the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 41 (j), a part of the cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b, but the cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b. There may be a case where the moving display of the image is performed.

  FIG. 41 (k) subsequent to FIG. 41 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 10 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 41 (j) and returned to the initial posture. Yes. In FIG. 41 (k), in the state shown in FIG. 41 (g), a cloud image that was not visually recognized via 1008b is visually recognized via 1008b. The rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in FIG. 41 (k) and the rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in FIG. 41 (g) are the same, but after the state shown in FIG. Since the display is moved upward in accordance with the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, it is visually recognized through 1008 b in FIG. 41 (k). Further, the display of moving the cloud image upward is performed, so that the cloud image region visible through 1008b in FIG. 41 (k) is visually recognized through 1008b in FIG. 41 (j). It is wider than possible cloud image area. In the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 41 (k), a part of the cloud image is visually recognized via 1008b, but the entire cloud image is visually recognized via 1008b. There may be a case where a moving image of a cloud image is displayed.

  In FIG. 41 (l) following FIG. 41 (k), after the movable body 1008 moves to the initial position, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. , Special Figure 1 shows a state in which it is notified that the result of variable display is a big hit.

  FIG. 42 shows Production Example 2 in Example 10 of the present embodiment. FIG. 42 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 42 shows a schematic front view or a movable body 1002 of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIGS. 42A to 42F show the same state as FIGS. 41A to 41F. FIG. 42 (g) shows the movable body 1002, the part of the movable body 1008, and the transmission portion 1008b extracted at the same timing as that in FIG. 42 (f). The movable body 1008 can be easily distinguished from other structures. It is hatched for this purpose. Further, in FIGS. 42H to 42K continuing from FIG. 42G, the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmission part 1008b are extracted and shown. It is hatched to make it easier to distinguish from the configuration of. FIG. 42 (g) shows the same state as FIG. 41 (g). FIG. 42 (h) following FIGS. 42 (f) and (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 starts rotating, and shows the same state as FIG. 41 (h).

  FIG. 42 (i) subsequent to FIG. 42 (h) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 20 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 42 (i). In FIG. 42 (i), unlike the state shown in FIG. 41 (i), the cloud image displayed behind the movable body 1008 is moved and displayed to the left as the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates. , 1008b, a state that is not visually recognized. In addition, the cloud image may be erased as the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates, or may not be displayed from the beginning.

  FIG. 42 (j) following FIG. 42 (i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 20 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 42 (i). In FIG. 42 (j), unlike the state shown in FIG. 41 (j), a cloud image is not visually recognized.

  FIG. 42 (k) following FIG. 42 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 10 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 42 (j) and returned to the initial posture. Yes. In FIG. 42 (k), unlike the state shown in FIG. 41 (k), the cloud image is not visually recognized.

  In FIG. 42 (l) following FIG. 42 (k), after the movable body 1008 moves to the initial position, “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The special figure 1 shows a state in which it is notified that the result of the variable display is out of sync.

  As described above, in the production of the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 may execute a rotation operation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In addition, the player may be able to visually recognize the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 via the movable body 1006 and the transmission portion of the movable body 1008. is there. In this embodiment, the cloud image displayed on the sub display device 1030 that cannot be visually recognized by the movable body 1008 when the movable body 1008 moves to the left is displayed as a preview image. In the present embodiment, the movement of the movable body 1008 causes the player to visually recognize at least a part of the notice image via the transmission part 1008b, and at least the notice image via the transmission part 1008b. There is an effect when not letting the player visually recognize some images. In addition, when a part of the notice image is visually recognized by the player through the transmission part 1008b of the movable body 1008 due to the moving operation of the movable body 1008, the notice image is displayed via the transmission part 1008b of the movable body 1008. As compared with a case where at least a part of the image is not visually recognized by the player, the big hit symbol pattern is more easily displayed as a final result of the symbol variation display.

  The cloud, balloon, and sun images displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be able to be moved and displayed as the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 move. For example, the cloud image displayed at the upper center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 206 moves so that the movable body 1008 cannot be visually recognized through the transmission part 1008a when the movable body 1008 moves leftward from the initial position. The balloon or the sun image may be displayed so that when the movable body 1008 moves to the left from the initial position, it can be visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008a and the transmissive portion 1008b. Display may be performed. When the movable body 1008 moves to the left from the initial position, the symbol variation display in which images of clouds, balloons, and the sun can be visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008a and the transmission unit 1008b is transmitted through the transmission unit 1008a and the transmission unit 1008b. The big hit symbol mode may be configured to be displayed more easily than the symbol variation display in which images of clouds, balloons, and the sun are not visible. When the movable body 1008 moves to the left from the initial position, the images of clouds, balloons, and sun are displayed so that the images of the clouds, balloons, and sun are not visible through the transmission parts 1008a and 1008b. When the movable body 1008 moves to the left from the initial position, the movement of the cloud 100, the balloon, or the sun image is not displayed when the movable body 1008 moves to the left. Compared with the symbol variation display in which the balloon or the sun image remains visible, the big hit symbol mode may be configured to be easily displayed. Further, when the movable body 1008 moves to the left from the initial position, images of clouds, balloons, and the sun when viewed through the transmissive portion 1008a and the transmissive portion 1008b are displayed in a color different from the normal time. There may be cases. For example, when the cloud image is normally displayed in white, and is visible through the transmissive part 1008a or the transmissive part 1008b when the movable body 1008 moves to the left from the initial position, blue, green, or It may be displayed in red. The symbol variation display in which the cloud image may be displayed in a different color from the normal time is more likely to display the big hit symbol form in comparison with the symbol variation display in which the cloud image is displayed in the normal color. It may be configured. Further, there may be a case where the main liquid crystal unit 1001 performs a rotating operation behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008. In this case, the effects shown in FIGS. 41 (g) to 41 (k) or 42 (g) to (k) of this embodiment may be executed by the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the sub display device 1030. There may be.

(Example 11)
FIG. 43 shows Production Example 1 in Example 11 of the present embodiment. FIG. 43 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 43 shows a schematic front view or a movable body 1002 of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 43A shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is off. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 43 (a), the number of holdings in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero. In the state shown in FIG. 43A, the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the sun image displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the sun image is visible through the transmission part 1006a. It has become. In addition, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission unit 1006b.

  FIG. 43 (b) continued from FIG. 43 (a) shows a state in which the number of holds in FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular hold icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1. Moreover, the black circular hold icon is a hold icon in a prefetch notice mode as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 43 (c) continued from FIG. 43 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a change icon and a moving animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left is displayed.

  FIG. 43 (d) following FIG. 43 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is started. In FIG. 41 and subsequent figures, the decorative symbol variation display is indicated by a thin white arrow pointing downward. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol variation display is started after the movement animation of the hold / variation icon is started.

  FIG. 43 (e) following FIG. 43 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG.

  In FIG. 43 (f) continued from FIG. 43 (e), the movable body 1008 starts the rendering operation from the initial position, and the left end of the movable body 1008 has moved to a position located in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates the state. FIG. 43 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 shields the player so that it is difficult to visually recognize the right half area of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. A cloud image displayed on the screen of the decorative design display device 208 and a part of the decorative design 208c are visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008a. In addition, a partial region on the right side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is visually recognized through the transmission portion 1008b. Note that the yacht image or cloud image displayed in the left half area of the screen of the sub display device 1030 may be shielded by the movable body 1008. The symbol variation display in which the image of the yacht or the cloud may be shielded by the movable body 1008 is determined in comparison with the symbol variation display in which these images are not shielded by the movable body 1008. You may be comprised so that it may be displayed easily.

  FIG. 43 (g) shows the movable body 1002, the part of the movable body 1008, and the transmission portion 1008b extracted at the same timing as FIG. 43 (f). The movable body 1008 makes it easy to distinguish from other structures. It is hatched for this purpose. 43 (h) to 43 (k), the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmission portion 1008b are extracted and shown. The movable body 1008 is the same as the movable body 1008. It is hatched to make it easier to distinguish from the configuration of. In FIG. 43 (g), the movable body 1008 shields a part excluding the right part of the illumination part 1014b, the lower end part of the illumination part 1014c, and the right end part of the illumination part 1014d, and illuminates via the transmission part 1008b. The portion excluding the shielded portion of the portion 1014c and the right end portion of the illumination portion 1014d are visually recognized. FIG. 43 (g) shows a state where the portions of the illumination units 1014a to 1014d that are visible to the player emit light in blue. In FIG. 43G, an image of the seascape displayed on the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b.

  FIG. 43 (h) following FIGS. 43 (f) and 43 (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has started rotating. In FIG. 43 (h), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated about 10 ° counterclockwise. In addition, in FIG. 43 (h), the area of the visible portion of the illumination unit 1014d is reduced through the transmission unit 1008b as compared to the state shown in FIG. 43 (g). Further, in a region that is not shielded by the movable body 1008, the area of the visible portion of the illumination unit 1014d is increased.

  FIG. 43 (i) following FIG. 43 (h) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has been rotated about 35 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 43 (h). In FIG. 43 (i), a black portion of the illumination unit 1014d indicates a portion that emits blue light, and a white portion indicates a portion that emits red light. In FIG. 43 (i), in a region that is not shielded by the movable body 1008, a portion of the illumination unit 1014d that is not visually recognized by the player by overlapping with the movable body 1008 can be visually recognized by the player. This shows the state. The symbol variation display in which the red light emission portion may be visible due to the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is the symbol variation display in which the red light emission portion may not be visible because the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 does not rotate. Compared with, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol mode is easier to be confirmed and displayed.

  FIG. 43 (j) following FIG. 43 (i) shows a state where the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 35 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 43 (i). FIG. 43 (j) shows a state in which the area of the portion that emits red light in the illumination unit 1014d is large and the area of the portion that emits blue light is small. In FIG. 43 (j), a part of the cloud image as the preview image is visually recognized via 1008b. In the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 41 (j), a part of the cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b, but the cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b. In some cases, the image may be displayed. When the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated, at least a part of the cloud image as the preview image may be visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b. Compared with the symbol variation display in which at least a part of the symbol is not visually recognized, the big hit symbol mode may be configured to be easily displayed.

  FIG. 43 (k) subsequent to FIG. 43 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 10 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 43 (j) and returned to the initial posture. Yes. FIG. 43 (k) shows a state in which the area of the illuminating unit 1014d that emits red light is further increased, and the illuminating unit 1014d emits all red light. In FIG. 43 (k), a part of the cloud image as the preview image is visually recognized via 1008b. Further, the display of moving the cloud image upward is performed, so that the cloud image region visible through 1008b in FIG. 43 (k) is visually recognized through 1008b in FIG. 43 (j). It is wider than possible cloud image area. In this embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 43 (k), a part of the cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b, but the entire cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b. There may be a case where a moving image of a cloud image is displayed.

  In FIG. 43 (l) following FIG. 43 (k), after the movable body 1008 moves to the initial position, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. , Special Figure 1 shows a state in which it is notified that the result of variable display is a big hit.

  FIG. 44 shows Production Example 2 in Example 11 of the present embodiment. FIG. 44 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 44 shows a schematic front view or a movable body 1002 of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  44A to 44F show the same state as FIGS. 43A to 43F. FIG. 44 (g) shows the movable body 1002, the part of the movable body 1008, and the transmission part 1008b extracted at the same timing as FIG. 44 (f). The movable body 1008 is easily distinguishable from other structures. It is hatched for this purpose. 44 (h) to 44 (k), the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmissive portion 1008b are extracted and shown. It is hatched to make it easier to distinguish from the configuration of. FIG. 44 (g) shows the same state as FIG. 43 (g). 44 (h) following FIGS. 44 (f) and 44 (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has started rotating, and shows the same state as FIG. 43 (h).

  44 (i) subsequent to FIG. 44 (h) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 20 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 44 (i). FIG. 44 (i) is different from the state shown in FIG. 43 (i) in that the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is small, so that the illumination unit 1014d is not visible to the player by overlapping with the movable body 1008. The state which the light emission part is not visually recognized is shown.

  FIG. 44 (j) following FIG. 44 (i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 20 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 44 (i). Also, in FIG. 44 (j), unlike the state shown in FIG. 43 (j), the area of the illuminating portion 1014d that emits red light is not large, so the portion of the illuminating portion 1014d that emits red light is visible. Indicates a state that is not. In FIG. 44 (j), unlike the state shown in FIG. 43 (j), a cloud image as a notice image is not visually recognized via 1008b.

  FIG. 44 (k) following FIG. 44 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 10 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 44 (j) and returned to the initial posture. Yes. In FIG. 44 (k), unlike the state shown in FIG. 43 (j), the area of the illuminating portion 1014d that emits red light is not large, and therefore the portion of the illuminating portion 1014d that emits red light is not visually recognized. Indicates the state. Also, in FIG. 44 (k), unlike the state shown in FIG. 43 (j), a state where a cloud image as a preview image is not visually recognized via 1008b is shown.

  44 (l) following FIG. 44 (k), after the movable body 1008 returns to the initial position, “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The special figure 1 shows a state in which it is notified that the result of the variable display is out of sync.

  As described above, in the production of the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 may perform a rotation operation behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008. The light emission mode of 1014d may change. In this embodiment, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated by a maximum of 45 ° in the clockwise direction behind the movable body 1008, an effect of changing the light emission mode of the illumination unit 1014d is performed, and the sub liquid crystal is behind the movable body 1008. When the unit 1032 is rotated clockwise by a maximum of 30 °, an effect that the light emission mode of the illumination unit 1014d does not change is performed. The symbol variation display in which the light emission mode of the illumination unit 1014d may change due to the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 behind the movable body 1008 is compared with the symbol variation display in which the light emission mode of the illumination unit 1014d does not change. The jackpot symbol may be configured so as to be easily confirmed and displayed.

Example 12
FIG. 45 shows an effect example in Example 12 of the present embodiment. FIG. 45 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 45 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 45A shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is off. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 45 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 45A, the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the sun image displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the sun image is visible through the transmission part 1006a. It has become. In addition, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission unit 1006b.

  FIG. 45 (b) continued from FIG. 45 (a) shows a state where the number of holdings in FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular hold icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1. Moreover, the black circular hold icon is a hold icon in a prefetch notice mode as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 45C continuing from FIG. 45B shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a change icon and a moving animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left is displayed.

  FIG. 45 (d) following FIG. 45 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  FIG. 45E continuing from FIG. 45D shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 45 (d).

  In FIG. 45 (f) continued from FIG. 45 (e), the movable body 1008 starts an effect operation from the state shown in FIG. 45 (e). The state which moved to the position located in the left end is shown. FIG. 45 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 is shielded so that the player can hardly see the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a cloud image displayed on the screen of the decorative design display device 208 and a part of the decorative design 208b are visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008a. In addition, the display area of the sub display device 1030 and the illumination unit 1014d are visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b. In addition, the yacht image and the cloud image displayed in the left half area of the screen of the sub display device 1030 are visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b.

  FIG. 45G subsequent to FIG. 45F shows a state where the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves upward from the initial position behind the movable body 1008 and is hidden by the movable body 1008. Yes. In FIG. 45G, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 behind the movable body 1008 displays a cloud image as a preview image. The symbol variation display in which a part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is hidden behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is a symbol variation display in which the effect hidden behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is not performed. In comparison, the jackpot symbol may be configured so as to be easily confirmed and displayed.

  In FIG. 45 (h) following FIG. 45 (g), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves downward from the state of FIG. The screen of the sub display device 1030 is shown visually. FIG. 45H shows a state where a cloud image as a preview image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008b.

  45 (i) following FIG. 45 (h) shows a state where the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state of FIG. 45 (h). FIG. 45 (i) shows a state where a cloud image as a preview image displayed on the right side of the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b.

  FIG. 45 (j) continued from FIG. 45 (i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has moved upward from the state of FIG. 45 (i) behind the movable body 1008. FIG. 45 (j) shows a state in which the cloud image as the preview image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 that has been viewed through the transmission unit 1008b cannot be viewed.

  FIG. 45 (k) following FIG. 45 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 45 ° clockwise from the initial posture behind the movable body 1008. FIG. 45 (k) shows a state where a cloud image as a preview image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b. In FIG. 45 (k), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated through the transmission portion 1008b while the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is hidden behind the movable body 1008. The amount of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 that is visually recognized changes. Further, the cloud image is moved and displayed upward from the state shown in FIG.

  FIG. 45 (l) following FIG. 45 (k) shows that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 rotates 45 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 45 (k) (total 90 °) behind the movable body 1008. Rotated) is shown. FIG. 45 (l) shows a state in which a cloud image as a preview image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008b. In FIG. 45L, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 rotates with the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 hidden behind the movable body 1008, so that the image is transmitted through the transmission portion 1008b. The amount of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 that is visually recognized changes.

  FIG. 45 (m) following FIG. 45 (l) shows that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 rotates clockwise by 110 ° from the state shown in FIG. 45 (l) behind the movable body 1008 (total 200 °). Rotated) is shown. FIG. 45 (m) shows a state in which a cloud image as a preview image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 cannot be visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b.

  FIG. 45 (n) following FIG. 45 (m) shows that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 rotates 160 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 45 (l) behind the movable body 1008 (total 360 °). Rotation) and the initial posture is returned. FIG. 45 (m) shows a state in which a cloud image as a preview image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 cannot be visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b.

  45 (o) following FIG. 45 (n), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves downward from the state shown in FIG. 45 (o) and returns to the initial position behind the movable body 1008. Shows the state. FIG. 45 (o) shows a state where a cloud image as a preview image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008b.

  45 (p) following FIG. 45 (o) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 45 (o) and returned to the initial position. FIG. 45 (p) shows a state where the rendering operation of each movable body (movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1012) has been completed.

  FIG. 45 (q) continued from FIG. 45 (p) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is a big hit.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured so that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates behind the movable body 1008, so that the player can visually recognize the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 through the transmission portion 1008 b of the movable body 1008. In some cases, the area of an image (for example, a cloud image as a preview image) is configured to change. The symbol variation display in which the area may change may be configured such that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily displayed than the symbol variation display in which the area does not change. Further, there may be a case where the main liquid crystal unit 1001 performs a moving and rotating operation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the decoration design display device 208 may execute the effect in the sub display device 1030 of the present embodiment.

(Example 13)
FIG. 46 shows an effect example in Example 13 of the present embodiment. FIG. 46 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 46 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 46A shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is off. ing. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 46A, the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010 and 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the sun image displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the sun image is visible through the transmission part 1006a. It has become. In addition, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission unit 1006b. In addition, a part of the balloon image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1002, and the other part of the balloon image is visible. The sub display device 1030 displays a yacht image, a cloud image, and a seascape image.

  46 (b), which continues from FIG. 46 (a), shows a state in which the number of holds in FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular hold icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1. Moreover, the black circular hold icon is a hold icon in a prefetch notice mode as shown in FIG. The sub display device 1030 displays the same image as the balloon image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The symbol variation display in which the same character image may be simultaneously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is a symbol in which the same character image is not simultaneously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. Compared with the variable display, the big hit symbol mode may be configured to be easily displayed.

  FIG. 46 (c) continued from FIG. 46 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a change icon and a moving animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left is displayed.

  FIG. 46 (d) following FIG. 46 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  FIG. 46E continuing from FIG. 46D shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG.

  In FIG. 46 (f) continued from FIG. 46 (e), the movable body 1008 starts the rendering operation from the initial position, and the left part of the movable body 1008 has moved to a position that hides the left part of the screen of the sub display device 1030. Is shown. FIG. 46 (f) shows a state where the movable body 1008 shields the player so that the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is difficult to see. In addition, a cloud image displayed on the screen of the decorative design display device 208 and a part of the decorative design 208b are visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008a. Further, the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b. FIG. 46 (f) shows a state where the balloon image displayed on the left side of the screen of the sub display device 1030 is hidden by the movable body 1008 and cannot be viewed. In addition, an image of the yacht displayed on the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via 1008b.

  In FIG. 46 (g) continued from FIG. 46 (f), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves upward from the initial position behind the movable body 1008 and is hidden by the movable body 1008. The balloon image and the yacht image displayed on are shown in a state where they cannot be visually recognized. The symbol variation display in which a part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is hidden behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is a symbol variation display in which the effect hidden behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is not performed. In comparison, the jackpot symbol may be configured so as to be easily confirmed and displayed.

  46 (h) following FIG. 46 (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 46 (g) behind the movable body 1008. Yes. In FIG. 46 (h), an image of a balloon displayed on the sub display device 1030 can be visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008b, and the image of the yacht is in a state where it cannot be visually recognized by overlapping with the movable body 1008.

  46 (i) subsequent to FIG. 46 (h) shows a state where the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state of FIG. 46 (h). FIG. 46 (i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 240 ° counterclockwise (total 300 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 46 (h) behind the movable body 1008. ing. In FIG. 46I, a partial image of the balloon displayed on the sub display device 1030 can be visually recognized in an area that is not shielded by the movable body 1008, and the yacht image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is displayed. Indicates a state where it cannot be visually recognized by overlapping with the movable body 1008.

  46 (j) subsequent to FIG. 46 (i) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved leftward from the state of FIG. 46 (i). FIG. 46 (j) shows an operation in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 rotates counterclockwise by 60 ° (total 360 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 46 (g) behind the movable body 1008. Both of the movements to the lower initial position are performed in parallel, and the initial posture and the state returned to the initial position are shown. FIG. 46J shows a state where both the balloon image and the yacht image displayed on the sub display device 1030 are erased.

  46 (k) subsequent to FIG. 46 (j) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 46 (j) and returned to the initial position.

  FIG. 46 (l) continuing from FIG. 46 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is out of place.

  Thus, in the effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a plurality of character images may be displayed on the sub display device 1030. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can move and rotate in the vertical direction at positions behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment moves all the characters of the plurality of character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 by moving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 to a position behind the movable body 1008. Among the plurality of character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is moved to a position behind the movable body 1008 when the image is configured not to be visible to the player. In some cases, only one character image is configured to be visible to the player. In addition, when the one character image that is visible at that time is a specific character image (for example, a preview image), the symbol variation display is performed by specifying the one character image that is visible at that time. Compared to the symbol variation display when the character image is not, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is easily displayed. Further, one of the character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 at the position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 indicates that both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 move. In some cases, it may be visible. One of the character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 at the position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 can be visually recognized when both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 move. The symbol variation display in this case is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is easily displayed in comparison with the symbol variation display in the case where both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 are not visible even if the movable body performs the moving operation. May be. In addition, one of the character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is moved by both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 being moved. The symbol variation display in the case where it can be visually recognized is easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol mode than the symbol variation display in the case where both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 cannot be visually recognized because they do not move. It may be configured. In addition, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may perform a vertical movement and rotation operation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the decoration design display device 208 may execute the effect in the sub display device 1030 of the present embodiment.

(Example 14)
FIG. 47 shows an effect example in Example 14 of the present embodiment. FIG. 47 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 47 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. Unlike the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourteenth embodiment of the present embodiment and the later-described examples 15 and 16 has a variation icon and a hold icon displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 1030. .

  FIG. 47A shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is off. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 47 (a), the number of holdings in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero. In the state shown in FIG. 47A, the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010 and 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the sun image displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the sun image is visible through the transmission part 1006a. It has become. In addition, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission unit 1006b. In addition, a part of the balloon image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1002, and the other part of the balloon image is visible. The sub display device 1030 displays a yacht image, a cloud image, and a seascape image.

  FIG. 47 (b) continued from FIG. 47 (a) shows a state in which the number of holds in FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. ing. On the sub display device 1030, a white circular normal mode hold icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of hold in FIG. The sub display device 1030 displays the same image as the balloon image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The symbol variation display in which the same character image may be simultaneously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is a symbol in which the same character image is not simultaneously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. Compared with the variable display, the big hit symbol mode may be configured to be easily displayed.

  FIG. 47 (c) continued from FIG. 47 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). In addition, in the sub display device 1030, after the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a movement animation between the hold / change icons in which the hold icon becomes a change icon and moves to the left is started. Further, in the sub display device 1030, the balloon image is erased.

  FIG. 47 (d) following FIG. 47 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 47 (d) shows a state where the sub-display device 1030 has finished the moving animation between the hold and change icons in which the hold icon becomes a change icon and moves to the left after the start of the special figure 1 variable game. ing.

  47 (e) following FIG. 47 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 47 (d).

  In FIG. 47 (f) continued from FIG. 47 (e), the movable body 1008 starts the rendering operation from the initial position, and the left part of the movable body 1008 is in a position to hide the fluctuation icon on the left part of the screen of the sub display device 1030. The moved state is shown. FIG. 47 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 is shielded so that the player can hardly see the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a cloud image displayed on the screen of the decorative design display device 208 and a part of the decorative design 208b are visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008a. Further, the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b. FIG. 47 (f) shows a state where the fluctuation icon cannot be visually recognized because the fluctuation icon displayed on the left part of the screen of the sub display device 1030 overlaps the movable body 1008. In addition, an image of the yacht displayed on the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via 1008b.

  FIG. 47 (g) continuing from FIG. 47 (f) shows a state where the movable body 1008 has moved leftward from the state of FIG. 47 (f). 47G, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves upward from the initial position behind the movable body 1008, is hidden by the movable body 1008, and is displayed on the sub display device 1030. The change icon and the yacht image are not visible. The symbol variation display in which a part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is hidden behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is a symbol variation display in which the effect hidden behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is not performed. In comparison, the jackpot symbol may be configured so as to be easily confirmed and displayed.

  47 (h) following FIG. 47 (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 47 (g) behind the movable body 1008. Yes. FIG. 47H shows a state in which an image of a balloon is displayed on the sub display device 1030 and the image of the balloon is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b. Further, the yacht image displayed on the sub display device 1030 cannot be visually recognized by overlapping the movable body 1008. In FIG. 47 (h), the rotating operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is performed, so that the change icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 changes from the normal mode (white circle) to the notice mode (white rhombus). , The state where the change icon of the notice mode is visually recognized through the transmission part 1008b. In the effect of the present embodiment, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated, the player may visually recognize that the variation icon of the normal mode changes to the notification mode via the transmission unit 1008b. In some cases, the player may visually recognize the change icon of the normal mode after the change icon has changed to the notification mode.

  47 (i) following FIG. 47 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has rotated 200 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 47 (h) and returned to the initial posture. Yes. FIG. 47 (i) shows a state where the balloon image, the yacht image, and the notice mode change icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 overlap with the movable body 1008 and cannot be visually recognized.

  47 (j) following FIG. 47 (i) shows a state where the movable body 1008 has moved downward from the state of FIG. 47 (i) and returned to the initial position. FIG. 47 (j) shows a state in which the notice mode variation icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b. FIG. 47J shows a state in which the yacht image and the balloon image cannot be visually recognized in the sub display device 1030.

  47 (k) subsequent to FIG. 47 (j) shows a state where the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 47 (j) and returned to the initial position.

  FIG. 47 (l) following FIG. 47 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game has been completed. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is a big hit.

  Thus, in the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a plurality of character images, variation icons, and hold icons may be displayed on the sub display device 1030. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can move and rotate in the vertical direction at positions behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment moves all the characters of the plurality of character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 by moving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 to a position behind the movable body 1008. When the image, the change icon, and the hold icon are configured not to be visible to the player, and when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is located at a position behind the movable body 1008, the sub display device 1030 displays the image. In some cases, only one character image of the plurality of character images and the variation icon are configured to be visible to the player. In addition, the symbol variation display in which the one character image that can be visually recognized at that time is a specific character image (for example, a preview image) or the variation icon is in a notification mode. In this case, it is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the symbol variation display when the variation icon is not a notice mode, rather than a specific character image that is visible at that time. It may be. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment moves all of the character images, the change icons, and the like among the plurality of character images by moving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 to a position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. And the hold icon may be configured to be visible to the player, or only the variable icon and the hold icon may be configured to be visible to the player. May be configured so that the player can visually recognize only the hold icon, or may be configured so that only the hold icon can be viewed by the player.

  In addition, one of the character images and the change icons displayed on the sub display device 1030 in the position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is moved by both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. It may be possible to visually recognize by performing. One of the character image and the change icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 in the position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is that both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 move. The symbol variation display when it can be visually recognized is easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol pattern as compared to the symbol variation display when both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 are not visible even if they move. It may be configured as follows. In addition, one of the character images and the change icons displayed on the sub display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is moved by both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. The symbol variation display that may be visually recognized by performing is determined by the big hit symbol form as compared to the symbol variation display when both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 are not visually recognized by not performing the moving operation. You may be comprised so that it may be displayed easily. In addition, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may perform a vertical movement and rotation operation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the decoration design display device 208 may execute the effect in the sub display device 1030 of the present embodiment.

(Example 15)
FIG. 48 shows an effect example in Example 15 of the present embodiment. FIG. 48 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 48 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 48A shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is off. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 48 (a), the number of holdings in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero. In the state shown in FIG. 48A, the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the sun image displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the sun image is visible through the transmission part 1006a. It has become. In addition, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission unit 1006b. In addition, a part of the balloon image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1002, and the other part of the balloon image is visible. The sub display device 1030 displays a yacht image, a cloud image, and a seascape image.

  FIG. 48 (b) continued from FIG. 48 (a) shows a state in which the number of holds in FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. ing. On the sub display device 1030, a white circular normal mode hold icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of hold in FIG. The sub display device 1030 displays the same image as the balloon image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The symbol variation display in which the same character image may be simultaneously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is a symbol in which the same character image is not simultaneously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. Compared with the variable display, the big hit symbol mode may be configured to be easily displayed.

  FIG. 48C continuing from FIG. 48B shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). In addition, in the sub display device 1030, after the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a movement animation between the hold / change icons in which the hold icon becomes a change icon and moves to the left is started. Further, in the sub display device 1030, the balloon image is erased.

  FIG. 48 (d) following FIG. 48 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is started. Further, FIG. 48D shows a state in the sub display device 1030 where the moving animation between the hold and change icons in which the hold icon becomes a change icon and moves to the left after the start of the special figure 1 variable game has ended. ing. FIG. 48 (d) shows a state in which the number of holdings in the special figure 1 increases from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. On the sub display device 1030, a white circular normal mode hold icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of hold in FIG.

  FIG. 48E continuing from FIG. 48D shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG.

  In FIG. 48 (f) following FIG. 48 (e), the movable body 1008 starts the rendering operation from the initial position, and the left part of the movable body 1008 moves to a position where the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 is hidden. Shows the state. FIG. 48F shows a state where the movable body 1008 shields the player so that the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is difficult to see. In addition, a cloud image displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a part of the decorative symbols 208b and 208c are visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008a. Further, the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b. FIG. 48F shows a state in which the hold icon cannot be visually recognized because the hold icon displayed on the left part of the screen of the sub display device 1030 and the movable body 1008 overlap. In addition, the fluctuation icon displayed on the sub display device is visually recognized in an area that is not shielded by the movable body 1008.

  FIG. 48 (g) continuing from FIG. 48 (f) shows a state where the movable body 1008 has moved leftward from the state of FIG. 48 (f). FIG. 48G shows that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves upward from the initial position behind the movable body 1008 and is hidden by the movable body 1008 and displayed on the sub display device 1030. The change icon, the hold icon, and the yacht image are not visible. The symbol variation display in which a part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is hidden behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is compared with the symbol variation display in which the effect hidden behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is not performed. Then, the jackpot symbol may be configured so that it is easy to be confirmed and displayed.

  FIG. 48 (h) continued from FIG. 48 (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 47 (g) behind the movable body 1008. Yes. In FIG. 48 (h), the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 changes from the normal mode (white circle) to the pre-reading notice mode (white rhombus) by rotating the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. In addition, the state where the fluctuation icon of the normal mode and the hold icon of the pre-reading notice mode are visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008b is shown. In the production of the present embodiment, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated, the player may visually recognize that the hold icon in the normal mode changes to the pre-reading notice mode through the transmission unit 1008b. In some cases, the player may visually recognize the hold icon in the normal mode after the pre-read notice mode is changed.

  FIG. 48 (i) continued from FIG. 48 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has rotated 300 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 48 (h) and returned to the initial posture. Yes. Further, in FIG. 48 (i), the balloon image, the yacht image, the variation icon in the normal mode, and the hold icon in the pre-reading notice mode displayed on the sub display device 1030 are visually recognized by overlapping with the movable body 1008. Indicates a state that cannot be performed.

  FIG. 48 (j) continued from FIG. 48 (i) shows a state where the movable body 1008 has moved downward from the state of FIG. 48 (i) and returned to the initial position. FIG. 48J shows a state in which the variation icon in the normal mode and the variation icon in the notice mode displayed on the sub display device 1030 are visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b. In FIG. 48J, the yacht image is not visible on the sub display device 1030.

  FIG. 48 (k) following FIG. 48 (j) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 48 (j) and returned to the initial position.

  FIG. 48 (l) continuing from FIG. 48 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is out of place.

  FIG. 48 (m) subsequent to FIG. 48 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). In addition, in the sub display device 1030, after the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a movement animation between the hold / change icons in which the hold icon becomes a change icon and moves to the left is started.

  FIG. 48 (n) following FIG. 48 (m) shows a movement animation between the hold / fluctuation icons in which the hold icon becomes a change icon after the start of the special figure 1 variable game on the sub display device 1030 and moves to the left. The completed state is shown. FIG. 48 (n) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. A predetermined reach effect is started after FIG.

  FIG. 48 (o) following FIG. 48 (n) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished after the predetermined reach effect is finished. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is a big hit. As described above, the symbol variation started after digestion of the hold corresponding to the hold icon having the pre-reading notice mode is finally performed more than the symbol variation started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon having the normal mode. You may be comprised so that a big hit symbol aspect may be confirmed and displayed easily.

  Thus, in the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a plurality of character images, variation icons, and hold icons may be displayed on the sub display device 1030. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can move and rotate in the vertical direction at positions behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment moves all the characters of the plurality of character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 by moving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 to a position behind the movable body 1008. When the image, the change icon, and the hold icon are configured not to be visible to the player, and when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is located at a position behind the movable body 1008, the sub display device 1030 displays the image. In some cases, only the variation icon and the hold icon are configured to be visible to the player. Moreover, when the hold icon which became visible at that time is a prefetch notice mode, compared with the case where the hold icon which became visible at that time is not a prefetch notice mode, there is a hold corresponding to the hold icon. In a special figure variable game that is started after being digested, there may be a case where the jackpot symbol pattern is likely to be confirmed and displayed. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment moves all of the character images, the change icons, and the like among the plurality of character images by moving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 to a position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. And the hold icon may be configured to be visible to the player, or only the variable icon and the hold icon may be configured to be visible to the player. May be configured so that the player can visually recognize only the hold icon, or may be configured so that only the hold icon can be viewed by the player.

  Further, the movable icon 1006 and the variable icon and the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 in the position behind the movable body 1008 are used to move both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. Thus, it may be visible. Among the movable body 1006 and the sub-display device 1030 in the position behind the movable body 1008, the fluctuation icon and the hold icon are visually recognized when both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 move. The symbol variation display that can be performed is likely to be a definite display of the big hit symbol pattern as compared to the symbol variation display that is not visible even when both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 move. It may be configured as follows. When the pre-reading notice is executed, the visible part of the variable icon or the hold icon may be different before and after the movement of the movable body. It may be configured such that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily determined and displayed in the symbol variation display to be prefetched than when the prefetching notice without the symbol is executed. Further, the movable icon 1006 and the variable icon and the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 in the position behind the movable body 1008 are used to move both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. Thus, the symbol variation display that may be visually recognized is determined by the big hit symbol pattern as compared to the symbol variation display when both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 are not visible because the movable body does not move. You may be comprised so that it may be displayed easily. In addition, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may perform a vertical movement and rotation operation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the decoration design display device 208 may execute the effect in the sub display device 1030 of the present embodiment.

(Example 16)
FIG. 49 shows an effect example in Example 16 of the present embodiment. FIG. 49 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 49 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 49A shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is off. ing. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 49A, the number of holds in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero. In the state shown in FIG. 49A, the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the sun image displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the sun image is visible through the transmission part 1006a. It has become. In addition, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission unit 1006b. In addition, a part of the balloon image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1002, and the other part of the balloon image is visible. The sub display device 1030 displays a yacht image, a cloud image, and a seascape image.

  FIG. 49 (b) continued from FIG. 49 (a) shows a state in which the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. ing. On the sub display device 1030, a white circular normal mode hold icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of hold in FIG. The sub display device 1030 displays the same image as the balloon image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The symbol variation display in which the same character image may be simultaneously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is the symbol variation display in the case where the same character image is not simultaneously displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. Compared with, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol mode is easier to be confirmed and displayed.

  FIG. 49 (c) continuing from FIG. 49 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). In addition, in the sub display device 1030, after the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a movement animation between the hold / change icons in which the hold icon becomes a change icon and moves to the left is started. Further, in the sub display device 1030, the balloon image is erased.

  FIG. 49 (d) following FIG. 49 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 49 (d) shows a state in the sub-display device 1030 where the animation for moving between the hold / change icon, in which the hold icon becomes a change icon and moves to the left after the start of the special figure 1 variable game, has ended. ing.

  FIG. 49 (e) following FIG. 49 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 49 (d).

  FIG. 49 (f) continued from FIG. 49 (e) shows a state in which the number of holdings in FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. ing. On the sub display device 1030, a white circular normal mode hold icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of hold in FIG. Further, in FIG. 49F, the movable body 1008 starts the production operation from the initial position, and the change icon and the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 can be visually recognized through the transmission part 1008b of the movable body 1008. It shows a state where it has moved to a position. FIG. 49 (f) shows a state where the movable body 1008 is shielded so that the player can hardly see the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a cloud image displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a part of the decorative symbols 208b and 208c are visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008a. Further, the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b.

  In FIG. 49G continued from FIG. 49F, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves upward from the initial position behind the movable body 1008 and is hidden by the movable body 1008. The state where the fluctuation icon, the hold icon, and the yacht image displayed on are not visible. The symbol variation display in which a part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is hidden behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is a symbol variation display in which the effect hidden behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is not performed. In comparison, the jackpot symbol may be configured so as to be easily confirmed and displayed.

  FIG. 49 (h) continued from FIG. 49 (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 47 (g) behind the movable body 1008. Yes. In FIG. 48 (h), the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 changes from the normal mode (white circle) to the pre-reading notice mode (white rhombus) by rotating the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. In addition, the state where the fluctuation icon of the normal mode and the hold icon of the pre-reading notice mode are visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008b is shown. In the production of the present embodiment, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated, the player may visually recognize that the hold icon in the normal mode changes to the pre-reading notice mode through the transmission unit 1008b. In some cases, the player may visually recognize the hold icon in the normal mode after the pre-read notice mode is changed.

  FIG. 49 (i) continued from FIG. 49 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has rotated 300 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 49 (h) and returned to the initial posture. Yes. FIG. 49 (i) shows a state where the image of the yacht displayed on the sub display device 1030, the variation icon in the normal mode, and the hold icon in the look-ahead notification mode cannot be visually recognized by overlapping the movable body 1008. ing.

  FIG. 49 (j) continued from FIG. 49 (i) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved downward from the state of FIG. 49 (i) and returned to the initial position. In addition, on the sub display device 1030, an image simulating a button, a character string image of “push” above it, and a meter image displaying the effective period of pressing the button are displayed overlapping the hold icon. Yes. In addition, the hold icon in the pre-read notice mode may be changed to an image imitating a button. FIG. 49J shows a state in which an image imitating a variation icon and a button and a character string image “push” above it are visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008b. The meter image is a movable body 1008. The state which cannot be visually recognized by being hidden by is shown. In FIG. 49 (j), the yacht image is not visible in the sub display device 1030.

  In FIG. 49 (k) continued from FIG. 49 (j), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves upward from the state of FIG. 49 (j), and the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmission portion 1008a. The possible states are shown. FIG. 49K illustrates a state in which the “push” character string image displayed on the sub display device 1030 can be visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008a. In addition, the fluctuation icon, the image imitating the button, and the meter image displayed on the sub display device 1030 are in a state where they cannot be visually recognized by being hidden by the movable body 1008. The symbol variation display in which the screen of the sub display device 1030 may be visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008a has a jackpot symbol aspect as compared to the symbol variation display in which the screen of the sub display device 1030 is not visually recognized. You may be comprised so that a fixed display may be easy.

  49 (l) following FIG. 49 (k) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 during the operation effective period of the chance button 136. FIG. In the sub display device 1030, when the player presses the chance button 136, the character string image of “push” is erased, and an image imitating the button and an effect image are displayed around it. FIG. 49 (l) shows a state in which the effect image is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b.

  FIG. 49 (m) following FIG. 49 (l) shows that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is shown in FIG. The state which moved to the uppermost position from the state of is shown. FIG. 49 (m) shows a state in which a part of the button image and the effect image displayed on the sub display device 1030 are visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008a.

  FIG. 49 (n) subsequent to FIG. 49 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state of FIG. 49 (m) and returned to the initial position. The sub display device 1030 displays a variation icon, a button image, and an effect image.

  In FIG. 49 (o) following FIG. 49 (n), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated in response to the player pressing the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Shows the state. FIG. 49 (o) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has been rotated 60 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 49 (n).

  49 (p) following FIG. 49 (o), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 rotates counterclockwise by 300 ° (total 360 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 49 (o) and returns to the initial posture. After that, a state in which the lower initial position is restored is shown. In addition, the operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 that is executed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136 includes both the operation of rotating counterclockwise and the operation of moving to the initial position below in parallel. In some cases, the initial posture and the initial position may be returned.

  FIG. 49 (q) subsequent to FIG. 49 (p) shows a state in which the button image and the effect image are erased in the sub display device 1030, and the change icon of the normal state is changed to the change icon of the notice mode. FIG. 49 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is a big hit. The symbol variation display in which the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 based on the pressing of the chance button 136 is performed is a big hit symbol mode than the symbol variation display in which the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is not performed based on the pressing of the chance button 136. May be configured to be easily displayed.

  As described above, in the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 may display a plurality of character images, a variation icon, a hold icon, and an image prompting the user to press the chance button 136. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can move and rotate in the vertical direction at positions behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment moves all of the character images among the plurality of character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 by moving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 to a position behind the movable body 1008. When the image that prompts the player to press the change icon, the hold icon, and the chance button 136 is configured to be invisible to the player, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is positioned at a position behind the movable body 1008, There may be a case where only a variation icon displayed on the display device 1030 and an image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 are both visible to the player. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment moves all of the character images, the change icons, and the like among the plurality of character images by moving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 to a position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. The player may be able to visually recognize the hold icon and the image prompting the user to press the chance button 136, or the player can visually recognize only the hold icon and the image prompting the user to press the chance button 136. May be configured so that the player can view only the variable icon, or may be configured so that the player can view only the hold icon Or the player may be able to see only the image that prompts the user to press the chance button 136. .

  In addition, the movable body 1006 and the image that prompts the user to press the hold icon 136 or the chance button 136 displayed on the sub display device 1030 at the position behind the movable body 1008 are displayed on the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. It may be possible to visually recognize both movable bodies by performing a moving operation. Of the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008, the image that prompts the user to press the change icon, the hold icon, or the chance button 136 displayed on the sub display device 1030 at the position behind the movable body 1008 is displayed on both The symbol variation display that may be visible when the movable body performs the moving operation is compared with the symbol variation display that is not visible even when both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 perform the movement operation. The jackpot symbol may be configured so as to be easily confirmed and displayed. When a pre-reading notice is executed in which the visible portion of the image that prompts the user to press the change icon, the hold icon, or the chance button 136 is different before and after the movement of the movable body, the change icon or the hold before and after the movement of the movable body is executed. It is configured such that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily determined and displayed in the symbol variation display to be prefetched than when the prefetching notice is executed in which the visible portion of the image that prompts the user to press the icon or the chance button 136 is not different. It may be. Of the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008, the image that prompts the user to press the change icon, the hold icon, or the chance button 136 displayed on the sub display device 1030 at the position behind the movable body 1008 is displayed on both When the movable body can be visually recognized by performing the moving operation, the symbol variation display to be read ahead is compared with the case where both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 are not visually recognized by not performing the moving operation. You may be comprised so that a big hit symbol aspect may be confirmed and displayed easily. In addition, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may perform a vertical movement and rotation operation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the decoration design display device 208 may execute the effect in the sub display device 1030 of the present embodiment.

(Example 17)
An effect example in sub display device 1030 of Example 17 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Further, in FIG. 50 and each figure described later, examples of special figure 1 variable game effects in each example are shown in time series. In addition, the variation of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030 is represented by white thick arrows. In the period during which the effect of the sub display device 1030 shown in FIG. 50 and FIG. 51 described later is displayed, the decoration symbol display device 208 displays an effect different from the effect of the sub display device 1030. As another effect, for example, an effect of displaying a predetermined background or character without displaying a decorative design, or an effect of displaying a predetermined background or character by displaying a decorative design may be used. Good. 50 and 51, the decorative design display device 208 may execute the same effect as the effect of the sub display device 1030 during the period in which the effect of the sub display device 1030 is executed.

  First, common points of FIG. 50 and FIG. 51 described later will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 50A, a decoration frame F <b> 1 having a shape obtained by vertically inverting the “L” character is displayed at the upper left in the display area of the sub display device 1030. A square-shaped special figure 1 reservation number display area 1931 is provided in the upper left part of the decorative frame F1, and a square special figure 2 reservation number display area 1932 is provided on the right side thereof. Below 1931, a special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 1933 is provided, and below that, a special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 1934 is provided. In the special figure 1 holding number display area 1931, the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is displayed as a number. For example, when there is no holding in the special figure 1, "0" is displayed. In the special figure 2 holding number display area 1932, the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is displayed as a number. For example, when there is no special figure 2 holding, "0" is displayed. Further, in the special figure 1 4 symbol display area 1933, when the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, the fact that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed is notified as a variable display of the 4 symbol “/”. , “\” Images are displayed alternately, and when the special figure 1 variable game is not being executed (when special figure 1 is stopped), the fourth symbol display is “-” or “◯”. An image is displayed. “-” Is the fourth symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place, and “◯” is the fourth graphic displayed when the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. is there. Note that “-” may be displayed as the fourth symbol during the non-execution of the special figure 1 variable game regardless of the result of the special figure 1 variable game. Further, in the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 1934, when the special figure 2 variable game is being executed, the fact that the special figure 2 variable game is being executed is notified as a variable display of the fourth symbol "/". , “\” Images are displayed alternately, and when the special figure 2 variable game is not being executed (when special figure 2 is stopped), the fourth symbol display is “-” or “○”. An image is displayed. “-” Is the fourth symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place, and “◯” is the fourth graphic displayed when the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. is there. Note that “−” may be displayed as the fourth symbol during the non-execution of the special figure 2 variable game regardless of the result of the special figure 2 variable game.

  A horizontally-long rectangular decorative frame F2 is displayed below the display area of the sub display device 1030. In the center of the decorative frame F2, a square-shaped variable icon display area 1940 in which a part of the left and right frames is opened is provided. Note that the variation icon may be displayed in a display size (for example, a display size larger than the hold icon) different from the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 1930 described later. This may facilitate identification of the fluctuation icon and the hold icon.

  A special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 is provided on the left side of the fluctuation icon display area 1940, and a special figure 2 hold icon display area 1960 is provided on the right side of the fluctuation icon display area 1940. The special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 is roughly divided into four areas of a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area from left to right. Each of the first to fourth areas corresponds to the first to fourth reserved orders in FIG. That is, a special figure 1 hold icon corresponding to the hold of special figure 1 that is the earliest (most recently stored) can be displayed in the first area, and similarly, 2 in the second to fourth areas. A special figure 1 hold icon corresponding to the fourth special figure 1 hold can be displayed. Similarly, the special figure 2 reserved icon display area 1960 is roughly divided into four areas, ie, a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, from left to right. The first to fourth areas correspond to the first to fourth special figure 2 holding ranks, respectively. That is, a special figure 2 hold icon corresponding to the hold of the first special figure 2 stored in the first area can be displayed in the first area, and similarly, 2 in the second to fourth areas. A special figure 2 hold icon corresponding to the fourth special figure 2 hold can be displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 and the special figure 2 hold icon display area 1960, various animations representing movement of the hold icon are executed.

  A square-shaped navigation character display area 1970 is provided to the left of the special figure 1 hold display area 1950. In the navigation character display area 1970, a merchant character image H1 is displayed. The merchant character image H1 is used for an explanation effect such as a tutorial effect or a notice (notice of the change or a pre-read notice) effect.

  A square-shaped effect custom state display area 1980 is provided to the right of the special figure 2 hold display area 1960. In the effect custom state display area 1980, “level 1 to 99” are displayed according to the effect custom state of the pachinko machine 1000. The level of the effect custom state is set so as to increase, for example, when an effect with a low appearance rate is performed. The level of the effect custom state may be set so as to increase even when a predetermined number of game balls are hit, when a predetermined effect is executed, or when a big win is won.

  FIG. 50A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, the symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4” indicating that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place is stopped and displayed. ing. In the 4th symbol display area 1933 of the special figure 1, the 4th symbol of the display mode of “−” for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed. In the special figure 2 4th symbol display area 1934, the 4th symbol of the display form of “-” for notifying that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out of place is stopped and displayed. In addition, the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931 displays “1” indicating that the special figure 1 hold number is 1, and the special figure 2 hold number display area 1932 indicates that the special figure 2 hold number is 0. “0” is displayed indicating that In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950, a default special figure 1 hold icon 1951 displayed in a white circle is displayed.

  FIG. 50 (b) shows a state in which the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, the decorative symbol variation display is executed. In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 1933, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, “0” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931, and it is informed that the hold number in the special figure 1 has decreased by 1 and the hold number in the special figure 1 has become zero.

  When the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the variable icon display area 1940 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 of the sub-display device 1030 display the interval between the hold and change icons. The moving animation is executed. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 1951 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 becomes the change icon 1941 and moves to the change icon display area 1940. . A right-pointing arrow shown at the upper left of the variation icon 1941 in FIG. 50B represents the moving direction of the variation icon 1941.

  In FIG. 50C, “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030 a of the sub display device 1030, the moving animation between the hold and change icons is finished, and the change icon 1941 is displayed in the change icon display area 1940. The displayed state is shown. Further, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 holding number display area 1931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the first area of the special figure 1 holding icon display area 1950 is white. The default special figure 1 hold icon 1952 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon has increased due to an increase animation. An upward arrow shown to the left of the special figure 1 hold icon 1952 in FIG. 50B represents the moving direction of the special figure 1 hold icon 1952. In FIG. 50C, a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image H1 displayed in the navigation character display area 1970 of the sub display device 1030 is displayed on the lower left portion of the effect display area 1030d. The balloon image is an image used for the advance notice by the merchant character image H1.

  FIG. 50D shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a and the right symbol display area 1030c of the sub display device 1030. Further, “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 holding number display area 1931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the second area of the special figure 1 holding icon display area 1950 is black. The special figure 1 hold icon 1953 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon has increased due to an increase animation. The upward arrow shown to the left of the special figure 1 hold icon 1953 in FIG. 50D represents the moving direction of the special figure 1 hold icon 1953. In addition, an image of a character string of “chance?” Is displayed in a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image H1, and an effect that expects to develop into a reach effect is executed. In addition, a substantially square-shaped retained change image H2 including an image of a character string “suspended change” is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbols displayed in the middle symbol display area 1030b and the right symbol display area 1030c. . The hold change image H2 is an image that is displayed to notify that a pre-reading advance notice for changing the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon being displayed or an effect of the change notice is executed. In this example, it is notified that the change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon being displayed is changed is executed by the hold change image H2. The hold change image H2 may be a display that is displayed only when the hold icon in FIG. 1 is changed, or a display that is displayed only when the hold icon in FIG. 2 is changed. Alternatively, it may be a display that is displayed only when the variable icon is changed, or may be a display that is displayed only when the hold icon of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is changed, The display may appear only when the hold icon and the variation icon of the special figure 2 are changed, or only when the hold icon of the special figure 1, the hold icon of the special figure 2 and the fluctuation icon are changed. It may be a display.

  FIG. 50E shows that “decoration 2—decoration 4—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of date. The informed state is shown. Further, an erasing animation in which the fluctuation icon 1941 displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 1940 moves downward is displayed, and the fluctuation icon 1941 is gradually deleted. FIG. 50E shows a state in which a change animation is executed in which the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon 1952 changes from “white to black”. In the change animation, an image of lightning strike is displayed on the special figure 1 hold icon 1952 from the hold change image H2, and the effect image is displayed overlapping the special figure 1 hold icon 1951. The effect image is displayed on the front side of the special figure 1 hold icons 1952 and 1953, and the whole special figure 1 hold icon 1952 and a part of the special figure 1 hold icon 1953 are hidden by the effect image.

  FIG. 50 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, the symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2” indicating that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place is stopped and displayed. ing. In FIG. 50 (f), the change animation is finished, the hold change image H2 and the effect image shown in FIG. 50 (e) are deleted, and the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon 1952 is changed from a white circle to a black circle. It has changed.

  FIG. 50 (g) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is completed and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, the decorative symbol variation display is executed. In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 1933, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. Also, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931, the special figure 1 hold icon 1952 becomes a change icon, and a movement animation between the hold and change icons and a movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 1953 are started. ing. In FIG. 50 (g), a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image H1 displayed in the navigation character display area 1970 of the sub display device 1030 is started to be displayed in the lower left portion of the effect display area 1030d.

  FIG. 50H shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / variation icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 1953 are finished. Further, in FIG. 50 (h), an image of a character string “Tono” is displayed in a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image H1, suggesting that a Tono character image H3 described later appears. Production is being performed. The character image H3 of Tono is a character image used for the “rotation” notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “rotation display notice effect”) shown in FIG.

  FIG. 50 (i) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030 a of the sub display device 1030. In addition, the character image H3 of Tono is displayed in the upper right part of the effect display area 1030d, and a character string image of “Call me?” Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image H3 of the Tono. In addition, an image of a character string “Tono!” Is displayed in a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image H1.

  FIG. 50J shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a and the right symbol display area 1030c of the sub display device 1030, and the reach effect is started. In addition, an image of a character string “chance?” Is displayed in the speech balloon image representing the line of the merchant character image H1, and then “chance!” Is displayed in the speech balloon image representing the line of the character image H3. An image of the character string is displayed. By displaying an image of a character string “chance!” Representing the dialogue of the character image H3 of Tono, it is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed.

  FIG. 50K shows a screen of the sub display device 1030 in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the player with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation. Further, the variation display of the decorative symbols in the fourth symbol and the middle symbol display region 1030b displayed in the fourth symbol display region 1933 of the special symbol 1 is executed even during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. Further, the variation display of the decorative symbols in the fourth symbol and the middle symbol display region 1030b displayed in the fourth symbol display region 1933 of the special symbol 1 is executed even during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. Note that FIG. 50K illustrates the screen of the sub display device 1030 compressed in the longitudinal direction due to space problems.

  FIG. 50 (l) shows the sub display device 1030 rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) as viewed from the player around the center of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 50 (k). The screen of the display device 1030 is shown. 50 (j) and 50 (k), the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 before the rotation of the sub display device 1030 has an aspect ratio of 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208). ) Is displayed at an aspect ratio that matches the screen of FIG. 50 (l), the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 shown in FIG. 50 (l) has an aspect ratio that matches the screen at an aspect ratio of 1: 1. It is displayed. Here, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 rotated 90 ° counterclockwise is taken in the direction rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal direction, and is orthogonal to the horizontal axis. It is an aspect ratio when the vertical axis is taken in the direction. Similarly, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 after rotation takes the horizontal axis in the direction rotated counterclockwise from the horizontal direction, and the vertical axis in the direction orthogonal to the horizontal axis. The aspect ratio is

  FIG. 50 (m) shows the sub display device 1030 rotated 90 ° counterclockwise (total 180 ° rotation) as viewed from the player around the center of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 50 (k). The screen of the display device 1030 is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is changed to the aspect ratio before rotation.

  FIG. 50 (n) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 225 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 50 (m) around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030. Show. In FIG. 50 (n), the pending change image H2 overlaps the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 1030b, the right symbol display area 1030c, and the character image H3 of the palace during the rotation display notice effect. Is displayed. The on-hold change image H2 displayed in FIG. 50 (n) is an image used for producing a notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon. In FIG. 50 (n), the screen of the sub display device 1030 is shown compressed due to space problems, but the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 does not change.

  FIG. 50 (o) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 270 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 50 (n) with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. FIG. 50 (o) shows a state in which the effect of changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon is executed. In the effect, a display indicating that lightning is generated from the on-hold change image H2 is performed, and an animation of lightning strike on the fluctuation icon displayed in a black circle is executed. The variation icon that has been struck by lightning overlaps with the effect image, so that the entire variation icon is hidden by the effect image. Further, FIG. 50 (o) shows that “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 holding number display area 1931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special figure 1 holding icon display area. A special figure 1 hold icon 954 displayed in a black circle in the second area 1950 appears as a result of an increase animation of the hold icon. Further, the special figure 1 hold icon 954 is displayed in an enlarged manner as compared with other hold icons. For this reason, it may be possible to draw attention to the hold icon displayed in an enlarged manner to the player during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. In FIG. 50 (n), the screen of the sub display device 1030 is shown compressed due to space problems, but the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 does not change.

  FIG. 50 (p) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 315 ° rotation) with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center from the state of FIG. 50 (o). In addition, the pending change image H2 shown in FIG. 50 (o) and the effect image displayed so as to overlap with the entire variation icon 1941 are deleted, and a character of “heat” is drawn in a circle. The fluctuation icon is enlarged. For this reason, it may be possible to draw attention to the variable icon displayed in an enlarged manner to the player during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. In FIG. 50 (n), the screen of the sub display device 1030 is shown compressed due to space problems, but the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 does not change. Next, in FIG. 50 (q), the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the center of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 50 (p) (360 ° total rotation). 1030 shows a state in which it has made one revolution and returned to its original state. Further, the hold icon and the fluctuation icon that have been displayed in an enlarged manner have returned to their normal sizes. Next, in FIG. 50 (r), “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. This indicates a state in which this is notified. Further, when the variation icon displayed in the variation icon display area 1940 moves downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variation icon is executed. The downward arrow shown at the upper left of the variation icon in FIG. 50 (r) represents the moving direction of the variation icon.

  As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, when the sub display device 1030 is rotated, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 may change. A character image or a decorative pattern may be used for the image displayed on the sub display device 1030, and the presence of the character image or the decorative pattern is enhanced by changing the aspect ratio of the character image or the decorative pattern. There are cases where a strong impression can be given to the player. Further, in the rotation display notice effect in the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 rotates once (360 ° rotation), but the sub display device 1030 is configured to rotate more than one rotation by using the slip ring described above. May be. For example, the larger the number of rotations of the sub display device 1030, the higher the big hit reliability may be set.

  The aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 may change in relation to the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit determines the aspect ratio of the image using a predetermined function with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030 as a variable, and based on the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio. A display image may be generated using the work area of the VRAM 436. Further, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 may change randomly. For example, when the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit determines the aspect ratio of the image using a random number, and generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio There may be. Further, the display area of the image may be enlarged or reduced depending on the change in the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030, or the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 may be reduced. The aspect ratio of the image may change so that the display area is constant.

  In addition, the symbol variation display in which the rotation display announcement effect is performed according to the present embodiment may be configured such that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the rotation display announcement effect is not performed. . Further, the symbol variation display in which the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 may change is compared with the symbol variation display in which the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 does not change. The jackpot symbol may be configured so as to be easily confirmed and displayed. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on the frequency and the degree of change in the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030. For example, the greater the frequency with which the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 changes, the higher the reliability of the jackpot, or the image displayed on the sub display device 1030. The greater the degree to which the aspect ratio changes, the higher the jackpot reliability may be.

  Further, in this embodiment, an effect of enlarging and displaying the hold icon and the change icon during the rotation display notice effect is performed. When an effect to enlarge and display the hold icon and the variation icon is performed, the big hit symbol pattern is finally stopped and displayed, compared to a case where the effect to enlarge and display the hold icon and the variation icon is not performed. You may be comprised so that it may be easy. In addition, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, an effect in which the sub display device 1030 rotates is performed. There may be an effect that the image displayed on 208 is rotated, or the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 are rotated simultaneously or separately to thereby rotate the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display. There may be a case where an effect of rotating the image displayed on the device 1030 is performed. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be rotated, and the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that the sub display device 1030 cannot be rotated and moved.

(Example 18)
An example of the effect of the sub display device 1030 according to Example 18 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 51 (a) to 51 (r) display effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series. FIG. 51 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, and shows the same state as that shown in FIG. 50 (a). Next, FIG. 51 (b) shows a state in which the special FIG. 1 suspension is digested and the special FIG. 1 variable game is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 50 (b). Next, in FIG. 51C, “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 1951 is ended, and the variable icon display area 1940 is displayed. A change icon 1941 is displayed. Further, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 is black. The special figure 1 hold icon 952 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon has increased due to an increase animation. FIG. 51 (c) shows a state immediately after the speech balloon image representing the merchant character image H1 displayed in the navigation character display area 1970 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the lower left portion of the effect display area 1030d. Indicates the state.

  FIG. 51 (d) shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030 a and the right symbol display area 1030 c of the sub display device 1030. Further, “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 holding number display area 1931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the second area of the special figure 1 holding icon display area 1950 is black. The special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon has increased due to an increase animation. In addition, a character string image of “chance?” Is displayed in the balloon image representing the words of the merchant character image H1.

  FIG. 51E shows that “decoration 2—decoration 4—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of date. The informed state is shown. Next, FIG. 51 (f) shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game is finished, and shows the same state as FIG. 50 (f). Next, FIG. 51 (g) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started, showing the same state as FIG. 50 (g). Next, FIG. 51 (h) shows a state where the movement animation between the hold / variation icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 are completed, and shows the same state as FIG. 50 (h). Next, FIG. 51 (i) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and the character image h3 of the shrine is displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a of the decorative symbol display device 208, which is the same as FIG. 50 (i). Indicates the state.

  FIG. 51 (j) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030 a and the right symbol display area 1030 c of the sub display device 1030, and the reach effect is started. In addition, a character string image of “chance?” Is displayed in the speech balloon image representing the speech of the merchant character image H1, and then “chance!” Is displayed in the speech balloon image representing the speech of the character image h3. An image of the character string is displayed. By displaying an image of the character string “chance!” Representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of Tono, it is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed.

  FIG. 51 (k) shows a screen of the sub display device 1030 in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the player around the center of the sub display device 1030. The decoration frame F1 displayed on the sub display device 1030, and the images displayed in the decoration frame F1 (reserved number display, fourth pattern image) (hereinafter, these images are referred to as “non-rotation target images”) Is prioritized over images other than the non-rotation target image (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “rotation target image”) in a non-rotation manner as viewed from the player. It is displayed in the upper left. Further, the variation display of the decorative symbols in the fourth symbol and the middle symbol display region 1030b displayed in the fourth symbol display region 1933 of the special symbol 1 is executed even during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. The rotation target image may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image, or only a part of the rotation target image may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image. There may be a case where only some of the non-rotation target images are displayed with priority over the rotation target image. FIG. 51 (k) shows a compressed screen of the sub display device 1030 due to space problems.

  FIG. 51 (l) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 51 (k) with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. In addition, the non-rotation target image has priority over a part of the character image H3 of Yoshimune and a part of “decoration 3” displayed in the right symbol display area in the upper right part of the sub display device 1030. The movement is displayed in such a manner that it does not rotate when viewed from above. FIG. 51 (l) shows a compressed screen of the sub display device 1030 due to space problems.

  FIG. 51 (m) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise (a total rotation of 180 °) around the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 51 (l). . Further, the non-rotation target image is moved and displayed in the lower right portion of the sub display device 1030 in a manner not rotated when viewed from the player, in preference to the decoration frame F2.

  FIG. 51 (n) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 225 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 51 (m) around the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 as a rotation center. . In FIG. 51 (n), the pending change image H2 overlaps the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 1030b, the right symbol display area 1030c, and the character image H3 of the palace during the rotation display notice effect. Is displayed. The on-hold change image H2 displayed in FIG. 51 (n) is an image that is used to produce a notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon. In addition, the non-rotation target image is rotated in the lower left portion of the sub display device 1030 as viewed from the player in preference to a part of the decoration frame F2 and a part of the balloon image representing the merchant character image H1. It is displayed in a moving manner. FIG. 51 (n) shows a compressed screen of the sub display device 1030 due to space problems.

  FIG. 51 (o) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 270 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 51 (n) with the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. . FIG. 51 (o) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon is executed. In the effect, an animation is performed in which lightning is generated from the hold change image H2 and lightning strikes the fluctuation icon displayed in a black circle. The variation icon that has been struck by lightning overlaps with the effect image, so that the entire variation icon is hidden by the effect image. Further, FIG. 51 (o) shows that “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 holding number display area 1931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special figure 1 holding icon display area. A special figure 1 hold icon 1954 displayed in a black circle in the second area 1950 appears as a result of an increase animation of the hold icon. In addition, the non-rotation target image is given priority over a part of “decoration 3” displayed in the left symbol display area and a part of a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image H1. In addition, the movement is displayed in a manner that does not rotate when viewed from the player. FIG. 51 (o) shows a compressed screen of the sub display device 1030 due to space problems.

  FIG. 51 (p) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 315 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 51 (o) with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. In addition, the pending change image H2 shown in FIG. 51 (o) and the effect image displayed so as to overlap with the entire change icon are erased, and the change of the aspect in which the characters “heat” are drawn in the circle An icon is displayed. Further, the special figure 1 hold icon 1954 is displayed smaller than the other hold icons. In addition, the non-rotation target image is moved and displayed on the upper left portion of the sub display device 1030 in a manner not rotated when viewed from the player, in preference to a part of “decoration 3” displayed in the left symbol display area. Has been. FIG. 51 (p) shows a compressed screen of the sub display device 1030 due to space problems. Next, in FIG. 51 (q), the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 51 (p) with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center (360 ° total rotation). 1030 shows a state in which it has made one revolution and returned to its original state. In addition, the non-rotation target image is displayed on the upper left portion of the sub display device 1030 in a state where the non-rotation target image is not rotated as viewed from the player, and has returned to the state before the rotation display notice effect is executed. The special figure 1 hold icon 1954 is displayed in the same size as other hold icons. Next, in FIG. 51 (r), “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. This indicates a state in which this is notified. In addition, when the variation icon displayed in the variation icon display area 1940 moves downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variation icon 1941 is executed.

  As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the rotation target image is rotated and displayed by rotating the sub display device 1030. Further, when the sub display device 1030 is rotated, the decoration frame F1 displayed on the sub display device 1030 and the non-rotation target of the image (holding number display, fourth pattern image) displayed in the decoration frame F1 The image is displayed in a manner that does not rotate when viewed from the player. The symbol variation display in which the rotation display announcement effect is performed according to the present embodiment may be configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is easily displayed in comparison with the symbol variation display in which the rotation display announcement effect is not performed. Further, the non-rotation target image of the sub display device 1030 is moved and displayed so as to be displayed at a conspicuous position of the sub display device 1030 when viewed from the player, in conjunction with the rotation of the sub display device 1030. Further, any one of the decorative pattern, the character image H3 of Yoshimune, the character image H1 of the spear, the hold icon, the change icon, the decoration frame F2, or the like, or all the images displayed on the sub display device 1030 are not rotated. There may be a case where the image is displayed in an unrotated manner as viewed from the player. Further, in this case, the larger the number of non-rotation target images, the higher the big hit reliability. Further, in place of the rotation of the sub display device 1030, there may be an effect that the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is rotated by rotating the decorative symbol display device 208, or the decorative symbol may be performed. The display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 may be rotated simultaneously or separately to produce an effect of rotating the images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be rotatable, and the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated and moved.

(Example 19)
An effect example of the sub display device 1030 of Example 19 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 52 (a) to (l) show the special figure 1 variable game in time series. Note that, during the period in which the effects of the sub display device 1030 shown in FIG. 52 and FIGS. 53 to 57 described later are displayed, the decoration symbol display device 208 displays an effect different from the effects of the sub display device 1030. ing. The other effect may be, for example, an effect of displaying a decorative pattern and displaying a predetermined background or character.

  FIG. 52A shows a state in which “1” indicating that the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1 is displayed as a hold number display image in the hold display area 1030e in the lower left part of the sub display device 1030. Yes. Next, FIG. 52 (b) shows that the hold in FIG. 1 is digested, and the hold number in FIG. In this state, “0” is displayed.

  FIG. 52C shows a state in which the character image H3 is displayed in the effect display area 1030d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of Tono is a character image used for the “rotation” notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “rotation display notice effect”) shown in FIG.

  FIG. 52 (d) shows a state in which a rotation display notice effect as a reach effect is executed. The sub display device 1030 shows a state in which the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise around the center of rotation. In addition, the hold display area 1030e in the lower left portion of the sub display device 1030 has moved to the upper left portion of the sub display device 1030. The “0” image as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is 45 clockwise around the center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. ° Rotated and displayed.

  FIG. 52E shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 52D with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. Is shown. The “0” image as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is 45 clockwise around the center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed with a rotation of 90 ° (a total rotation of 90 °). Next, in FIG. 52 (f), the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 52 (e) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center (total 135 ° rotation). Shows the state. In addition, the hold display area 1030e in the upper left part of the sub display device 1030 has moved to the upper right part of the sub display device 1030. Further, the “0” image as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is 45 ° clockwise around the rotation center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. Rotated (total 135 ° rotation) is displayed. Next, FIG. 52 (g) shows that the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 52 (f) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center (180 ° total rotation). Shows the state. Further, the “0” image as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is 45 ° clockwise around the rotation center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. Rotation (total 180 ° rotation) is displayed.

  FIG. 52H shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 225 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 52G with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. Is shown. In addition, the hold display area 1030e in the upper right portion of the sub display device 1030 has moved to the lower right portion of the sub display device 1030. Further, the “0” image of the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is rotated 45 ° clockwise around the center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. (Total 225 ° rotation) is displayed. Next, in FIG. 52 (i), the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 52 (H) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center (total 270 ° rotation). Shows the state. Further, the “0” image of the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is rotated 45 ° clockwise around the center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. (Total 270 ° rotation) is displayed. Next, in FIG. 52 (j), the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 52 (i) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center (total 315 ° rotation). Shows the state. In addition, the hold display area 1030e in the lower right portion of the sub display device 1030 has moved to the original position in the lower left portion of the sub display device 1030. Further, the “0” image as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is 45 ° clockwise around the rotation center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. Rotated (total 315 ° rotation) is displayed. Next, in FIG. 52 (k), the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 52 (j) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center (total 360 ° rotation). Shows the state. Further, the “0” image as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is 45 ° clockwise around the rotation center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. Rotated (total 360 ° rotation) is displayed. Next, FIG. 52 (l) shows a state in which the rotation display notice effect has been completed, and the character image H3 of the lord is deleted on the sub display device 1030.

  As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the character image of the lord is rotated by rotating the sub display device 1030. Further, when the sub display device 1030 is rotated, the hold number display image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a manner that does not rotate when viewed from the player. In addition, the hold display area 1030e of the sub display device 1030 is moved so as to be displayed at the left corner of the sub display device 1030 when viewed from the player in accordance with the rotation of the sub display device 1030. For this reason, during the rotation of the sub display device 1030, the hold number display image, which is important information for the player, is displayed at a position where the player can easily see. The symbol variation display in which the rotation display announcement effect is performed according to the present embodiment may be configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is easily displayed in comparison with the symbol variation display in which the rotation display announcement effect is not performed. Further, in the rotation display notice effect in the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 is configured to rotate once (360 ° rotation), but by using the slip ring described above for the sub display device 1030, the sub display device 1030 rotates more than one rotation. It may be configured to. For example, the larger the number of rotations of the sub display device 1030, the higher the big hit reliability may be set. Further, instead of the sub display device 1030, there may be a case where the effect of the present embodiment is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, or the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 are rotated simultaneously or separately. Thus, the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. In addition, when performing the effect of the present embodiment on the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated and moved.

(Example 20)
An effect example of Example 20 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 53A to 53K show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series.

  FIG. 53A shows a state of the sub liquid crystal display device in which the special figure 1 variable game is started. A state in which nothing is displayed on the sub display device 1030 is shown. Next, FIG. 53B shows a state in which the character image H3 is displayed in the effect display area 1030d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of Tono is a character image used for the “rotation” notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “rotation display notice effect”) shown in FIG.

  FIG. 53 (c) shows a state in which a rotation display notice effect as a reach effect is executed. FIG. 53C shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. In addition, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is centered on the image display area of the sub display device 1030 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 1030. Is rotated 45 ° clockwise around the center of rotation. For this reason, the player's character image H3 is visually recognized as not rotating. Next, FIGS. 53D to 53J show a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 45 °. Further, in FIGS. 53D to 53J, the character image H3 is displayed by rotating clockwise at the same rotational speed as that of the sub display device 1030. For this reason, while the sub display device 1030 is rotating, the player's character image H3 is always viewed as not rotating. Next, FIG. 53 (k) shows a state in which the rotation display notice effect has ended, and the character image H3 of the lord is erased in the sub display device 1030.

  As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the character image H3 displayed on the sub display device 1030 is rotated at the same speed in the opposite direction to the sub display device 1030 while rotating the sub display device 1030. By displaying, the character image is displayed in a manner that is not rotated when viewed from the player. For this reason, since the character image displayed on the sub display device 1030 does not rotate even though the sub display device 1030 is rotating, there are cases where the player can be surprised. The symbol variation display in which the rotation display announcement effect is performed according to the present embodiment may be configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is easily displayed in comparison with the symbol variation display in which the rotation display announcement effect is not performed. In this embodiment, the character image is rotated and displayed in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030 at the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030. The character image may be rotated and displayed in a direction different from the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030, or in the same direction as the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030, the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030. Alternatively, the character image may be rotated and displayed at a different speed. Further, instead of rotating the sub display device 1030, there may be an effect that the decorative symbol display device 208 is rotated, or the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 are rotated simultaneously or separately. An effect may be performed.

(Example 21)
An effect example of Example 21 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 54A to 54L show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series.

  FIG. 54A shows a state of the sub liquid crystal display device in which the special figure 1 variable game is started. A state in which nothing is displayed on the sub display device 1030 is shown. Next, FIG. 54B shows a state in which the character image H3 is displayed in the effect display area 1030d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of Tono is a character image used for the “rotation” notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “rotation display notice effect”) shown in FIG.

  FIG. 54C shows a state in which a rotation display notice effect as a reach effect is executed. FIG. 54C shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. In addition, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is centered on the image display area of the sub display device 1030 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 1030. Is rotated 45 ° clockwise around the center of rotation. For this reason, the player's character image H3 is visually recognized as not rotating. Further, the character image H3 of Tono is displayed in a slightly compressed state in the horizontal direction and enlarged in the vertical direction from the state displayed in FIG. 54 (b). Next, in FIG. 54D, the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 54C with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center (total 90 ° rotation). Shows the state. In addition, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is centered on the image display area of the sub display device 1030 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 1030. Is rotated 45 ° clockwise around the center of rotation. For this reason, the player's character image H3 is visually recognized as not rotating. Further, the character image H3 of Tono is slightly compressed in the horizontal direction and enlarged and displayed in the vertical direction from the state displayed in FIG. 54 (c). Next, in FIG. 54E, the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 54D with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center (a total rotation of 135 °). Shows the state. In addition, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is centered on the image display area of the sub display device 1030 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 1030. Is rotated 45 ° clockwise around the center of rotation. For this reason, the player's character image H3 is visually recognized as not rotating. Further, the character image H3 of Tono is slightly expanded in the horizontal direction and compressed and displayed in the vertical direction from the state displayed in FIG. 54 (d). Next, FIG. 54 (f) shows that the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 54 (e) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation (180 ° total rotation). Shows the state. In addition, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is centered on the image display area of the sub display device 1030 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 1030. Is rotated 45 ° clockwise around the center of rotation. For this reason, the player's character image H3 is visually recognized as not rotating. Further, the character image H3 of Tono is slightly compressed in the horizontal direction and enlarged in the vertical direction from the state displayed in FIG. 54E, and the aspect ratio of the character image H3 of the Tono is shown in FIG. It has returned to the state of (b). Next, FIGS. 54G to 54J show a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 45 °. In FIGS. 54G to 54J, the character image H3 is displayed by rotating clockwise at the same rotational speed as that of the sub display device 1030. For this reason, while the sub display device 1030 is rotating, the player's character image H3 is always viewed as not rotating. In FIGS. 54 (g) to (j), the aspect ratio of the character image H3 is not changed. Next, FIG. 53 (l) shows a state in which the rotation display notice effect has been completed, and the character image H3 of the lord is erased in the sub display device 1030.

  As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the character image H3 displayed on the sub display device 1030 is rotated at the same speed in the opposite direction to the sub display device 1030 while rotating the sub display device 1030. By displaying, the character image is displayed in a manner that is not rotated when viewed from the player. Further, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the aspect ratio of the character image H3 displayed on the sub display device 1030 changes. For this reason, since the character image displayed on the sub display device 1030 does not rotate even though the sub display device 1030 is rotating, the player may be surprised and the character image By changing the aspect ratio, the presence of the character image is enhanced, and a strong impression may be given to the player. The symbol variation display in which the rotation display announcement effect is performed according to the present embodiment may be configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is easily displayed in comparison with the symbol variation display in which the rotation display announcement effect is not performed. In this embodiment, the character image is rotated and displayed in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030 at the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030. The character image may be rotated and displayed in a direction different from the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030, or in the same direction as the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030, the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030. Alternatively, the character image may be rotated and displayed at a different speed. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on the frequency and the degree of change in the aspect ratio of the character image displayed on the sub display device 1030. For example, it may be configured such that the greater the frequency with which the aspect ratio of the character image displayed on the sub display device 1030 changes, the higher the reliability of the jackpot, or the sub image is displayed on the sub display device 1030. The greater the degree of change in the aspect ratio of the character image, the higher the reliability of the big hit may be. Further, instead of the sub display device 1030, the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, or the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. May be performed. In addition, when performing the effect of the present embodiment on the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated and moved.

(Example 22)
An effect example of Example 22 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 55A to 55F show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series.

  FIG. 55A shows a state of the sub liquid crystal display device in which the special figure 1 variable game is started. A state in which nothing is displayed on the sub display device 1030 is shown. Next, FIG. 55B shows a state in which the character image H3 is displayed in the effect display area 1030d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of Tono is an image used for a lateral movement display notice effect as a reach effect.

  FIGS. 55C to 55E show a state in which a lateral movement display notice effect as a reach effect is executed. In the lateral movement display announcement effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 moves in the left-right direction in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Moreover, the rectangle shown with the dashed-two dotted line in the figure of FIG.55 (c)-(e) has shown the position of the sub display apparatus 1030 before the movement to the left-right direction.

  FIG. 55 (c) shows a state where the sub display device 1030 has moved leftward from the state shown in FIG. 55 (b). In addition, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a manner that it moves to the right by the same distance as the left movement distance of the sub display device 1030. Yes. For this reason, the character image H3 of Tono is displayed so as not to move as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4 that has been overlooked in the sub display device 1030 is displayed in the upper left part. Further, in this example, the princess character image H4 is an image used for the advance notice with a high hit reliability.

  FIG. 55 (d) shows a state where the sub display device 1030 has moved leftward from the state shown in FIG. 55 (c). In addition, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a manner of moving to the right by the same distance as the left movement distance of the sub display device 1030. For this reason, the character image H3 of Tono is displayed so that it may be visually recognized so that it may not move, seeing from a player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, the entire princess character image H4 is displayed at the upper left.

  FIG. 55E shows a state where the sub display device 1030 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. Further, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in such a manner that it moves to the left by the same distance as the right movement distance of the sub display device 1030. For this reason, the character image H3 of Tono is displayed so as not to move as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4 is displayed in the upper left part, and a part of the princess character image H4 is out of view.

  FIG. 55 (f) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has moved rightward from the state shown in FIG. 55 (e) and the lateral movement display notice effect as a reach effect has been completed. The character image H3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in such a manner that it moves to the left by the same distance as the movement distance of the sub display device 1030 in the right direction. For this reason, the character image H3 of Tono is displayed in a mode in which it does not move as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, the princess character image H4 is not displayed.

  As described above, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment, the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is moved and displayed in the opposite direction to the sub display device 1030 while moving the sub display device 1030 horizontally. Therefore, the character image H3 of Tono is displayed in a mode in which the character image H3 does not move as viewed from the player. Further, in the lateral movement display preview effect of the present embodiment, the princess character image H4 that has been overlooked in the sub display device 1030 before the lateral movement display preview effect is executed is displayed next to the image displayed on the sub display device 1030. When the moving display is performed, the display is displayed on the sub display device 1030. The princess character image H4 is displayed on the sub display device 1030 as the sub display device 1030 moves a predetermined distance. For this reason, the player pays attention to the distance traveled by the sub display device 1030, and may be able to improve the interest of the game. In addition, in the effect during the symbol variation, when the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment is performed, the symbol variation display is finally the jackpot symbol aspect as compared to the case where the lateral movement display notice effect is not performed. May be configured so that the fixed stop is easily displayed. Further, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment, a character combined with the jackpot reliability of the symbol variation display being executed may be displayed. For example, when the big hit reliability is relatively low, the enemy character may be displayed. The princess character image H4 is displayed when the sub display device 1030 moves a predetermined distance in the left direction, whereas the enemy character of the lord is displayed when the sub display device 1030 moves a predetermined distance in the right direction. May be displayed. In addition, the character ratio H3 and the princess character image H4 used for the horizontal movement display notice effect in the present embodiment may change in aspect ratio during the horizontal movement display notice effect. Further, instead of the sub display device 1030, the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, or the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. May be performed. In addition, when performing the effect of the present embodiment on the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated and moved.

(Example 23)
An effect example of Example 23 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 56A to 56F show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series.

  FIG. 56A shows a state of the sub liquid crystal display device in which the special figure 1 variable game is started. A state in which nothing is displayed on the sub display device 1030 is shown. Next, FIG. 56B shows a state in which the character image H3 is displayed in the effect display area 1030d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of Tono is a character image used for the “rotation” notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “rotation display notice effect”) shown in FIG. FIG. 56 (b-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 56 (b). . The image data shown in FIG. 56 (b-1) has a princess character image H3 and a princess character image H4 at the lower left of the lord character image H3. It is the image data of the aspect which is not rotating. Further, in this example, the princess character image H4 is an image used for the advance notice with a high hit reliability. 56B-2 uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 56B-1 to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 56B. The generated display data is shown. A predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 is cut out from the image data shown in FIG. 56 (b-1) as the display data. FIG. 56B-3 shows a state where an image is displayed on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 56B-2.

  FIGS. 56C to 56E show a state in which a rotation display notice effect as a reach effect is executed. In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and then clockwise. Rotated by 45 °. Moreover, the rectangle shown with the dashed-two dotted line in the figure of FIG.56 (c)-(e) has shown the position of the sub display apparatus 1030 before rotation. Also, the arrows shown in FIGS. 56C to 56E indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030.

  FIG. 56C shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 56B with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. . Further, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4 that has been seen from the sub display device 1030 is displayed in the lower left part in a manner that is not rotated when viewed from the player. FIG. 56C-1 shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 56C. The image data shown in FIG. 56 (c-1) is image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 56 (b-1) 30 ° clockwise around the center of the image data. 56C-2 uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 56C-1 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 56C. The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area with an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the image data shown in FIG. 56C-1 as the center. 56 (c-3) displays an image on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 56 (c-2), and rotates the sub display device 1030 counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 56 (b). Fig. 5 shows a state rotated by 30 °, and shows a state of the sub display device 1030 in Fig. 56C.

  FIG. 56D shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 15 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 56C with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. . Further, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, the entire princess character image H4 is displayed in the lower left part in a manner that is not rotated when viewed from the player. FIG. 56 (d-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 56 (d). The image data shown in FIG. 56 (d-1) is image data in a mode in which the image data shown in FIG. 56 (c-1) is rotated by 15 ° clockwise around the center of the image data. 56 (d-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 56 (d-1) to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 56 (d). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area with an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the image data shown in FIG. 56 (d-1) with the center of the image data as the center. 56 (d-3) displays an image on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 56 (d-2), and rotates the sub display device 1030 counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 56 (e). Shows a state rotated by 15 °, and shows a state of the sub display device 1030 in FIG. 56 (d).

  FIG. 56E shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 15 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 56D with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. Further, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4 is displayed in the lower left portion in a manner not rotated when viewed from the player, and the other part is out of view from the sub display device 1030. FIG. 56 (e) shows a state immediately before the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect ends. FIG. 56 (e-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 56 (e). The image data shown in FIG. 56 (e-1) is image data in a form in which the image data shown in FIG. 56 (d-1) is rotated by 15 ° counterclockwise around the center of the image data. This is the same as the image data shown in (c-1). 56 (e-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 56 (e-1) in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 56 (e). The generated display data is shown. The display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 56 (c-2). 56 (e-3) displays an image on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 56 (c-2), and the sub display device 1030 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 56 (d). The state rotated 15 ° is shown, and the state of the sub display device 1030 in FIG. 56 (d) is shown. FIG. 56 (e-3) shows the same state as FIG. 56 (c-3).

  FIG. 56F shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 56E by 30 ° clockwise with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. Is shown. Further, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, the princess character image H4 is not displayed. FIG. 56 (f-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 56 (f). The image data shown in FIG. 56 (f-1) is image data in a form in which the image data shown in FIG. 56 (e-1) is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise around the center of the image data. This is the same as the image data shown in (b-1). 56 (f-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 56 (f-1) to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 56 (f). The generated display data is shown. The display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 56 (b-2). 56 (f-3) displays an image on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 56 (f-2), and the sub display device 1030 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 56 (e). A state rotated by 30 ° is shown, and the state of the sub display device 1030 in FIG. 56 (f) is shown. FIG. 56 (f-3) shows the same state as FIG. 56 (b-3).

  As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is rotated and displayed at the same speed in the opposite direction to the sub display device 1030 while rotating the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of Tono is displayed in such a manner that it is not rotated when viewed from the player. In addition, in the rotation display announcement effect of the present embodiment, the princess character image H4 that has been overlooked on the sub display device 1030 before the rotation display announcement effect is executed is rotated and displayed on the sub display device 1030. Is displayed on the sub display device 1030. Also, the princess character image H4 is displayed on the sub display device 1030 when the sub display device 1030 rotates more than a predetermined angle. For this reason, the player pays attention to the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030, and may be able to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the princess character image H4 may be displayed at the upper left of the character image. In this case, the princess character image H4 displayed before the rotation is not visible on the sub display device 1030 as the sub display device 1030 rotates counterclockwise. Further, by adjusting the display position of the princess character image H4, the sub display device 1030 can be seen from the sub display device 1030 by rotating more than a predetermined angle. For this reason, the player pays attention to the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030, and may be able to improve the interest of the game.

  In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the princess character image H4 is displayed by the rotation of the sub display device 1030. However, the character is displayed in accordance with the jackpot reliability of the symbol variation display being executed. It may be. For example, when the big hit reliability is relatively low, the enemy character may be displayed. In addition, the princess character image H4 is displayed by rotating the sub display device 1030 counterclockwise by a predetermined angle, whereas the sub display device 1030 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle to display the enemy of the lord. A character may be displayed. Moreover, the aspect ratio of the character image H3 and the princess character image H4 used for the rotation display notice effect in this embodiment may change during the rotation display notice effect. In addition, when the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment is performed in the effect during the pattern change, the symbol change display finally determines the jackpot symbol form as compared to the case where the rotation display advance notice effect is not performed. You may be comprised so that a stop display may be easy. Further, instead of the sub display device 1030, the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, or the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. May be performed. In addition, when performing the effect of the present embodiment on the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated and moved.

(Example 24)
An effect example of Example 24 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 57A to 57F show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series.

  FIG. 57A shows a state of the sub liquid crystal display device in which the special figure 1 variable game is started. A state in which nothing is displayed on the sub display device 1030 is shown. Next, in FIG. 57B, the sub display device 1030 moves downward, and the character image H <b> 3 is displayed at the center of the sub display device 1030 and the merchant character image H <b> 1 is displayed at the lower left of the sub display device 1030. Shows the state. The character image H3 of Tono is a character image used for the “rotation” notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “rotation display notice effect”) shown in FIG. FIG. 57 (b-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 57 (b). The image data shown in FIG. 57 (b-1) has a princess character image H3 and a princess character image H4 at the lower left of the lord character image H3. This is image data in a mode that is not rotated. Further, in this example, the princess character image H4 is an image used for the advance notice with a high hit reliability. 57B-2 uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 57B-1 to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 57B. The generated display data is shown. A predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 is cut out from the image data shown in FIG. 57 (b-1) as the display data. Also, the display data shown in FIG. 57 (b-2) is displayed at the predetermined position (lower left of the display data) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 57 (b-1). This is display data in which the merchant character image H1 read from the ROM 406 is superimposed. FIG. 57 (b-3) shows a state in which an image is displayed on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 57 (b-2). The merchant character image H1 is displayed with priority over the image data shown in FIG. 57 (b-1), but the image data shown in FIG. 57 (b-1) is given priority over the merchant character image H1. May be displayed.

  FIGS. 57C to 57E show a state in which a rotation display notice effect as a reach effect is executed. In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and then clockwise. Rotated by 45 °. Moreover, the rectangle shown with the dashed-two dotted line in the figure of FIG.57 (c)-(e) has shown the position of the sub display apparatus 1030 before rotation. In addition, arrows shown in FIGS. 57C to 57E indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030.

  FIG. 57C shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 57B with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation. . Further, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image H1 displayed in the lower left portion of the sub display device 1030 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. Is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise around the center of rotation. Further, in the sub display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4 that has been seen from the sub display device 1030 is displayed in the lower right side of the character image H1 in a manner that is not rotated when viewed from the player. FIG. 57C-1 shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 57C. The image data shown in FIG. 57 (c-1) is image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 57 (b-1) by 30 ° clockwise around the center of the image data. FIG. 57 (c-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 57 (c-1) to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 57 (c). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 around the center of the image data from the image data shown in FIG. 57 (c-1). The display data shown in FIG. 57 (c-2) is first displayed at a predetermined position (position shown in FIG. 57 (b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 57 (c-1). This is display data in which merchant character images H1 read from the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400 are superimposed. 57 (c-3) displays an image on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 57 (c-2), and rotates the sub display device 1030 counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 57 (b). Shows a state rotated by 30 °, and shows a state of the sub display device 1030 in FIG.

  FIG. 57D shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated counterclockwise by 15 ° from the state shown in FIG. 57C with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. . Further, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image H1 displayed in the lower left portion of the sub display device 1030 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 57C by the rotation of the sub display device 1030. Is rotated 15 ° counterclockwise around the center of rotation. Further, in the sub display device 1030, the entire princess character image H4 is displayed on the right side of the merchant character image H1 in an unrotated manner as viewed from the player. FIG. 57D-1 shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. The image data shown in FIG. 57 (d-1) is image data in a mode in which the image data shown in FIG. 57 (c-1) is rotated clockwise by 15 ° with the center of the image data as the rotation center. 57D-2 uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 57D-1 to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 57D. The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the image data shown in FIG. 57 (d-1) with the center of the image data as the center. The display data shown in FIG. 57 (d-2) is first displayed at a predetermined position (position shown in FIG. 57 (b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 57 (d-1). This is display data in which merchant character images H1 read from the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400 are superimposed. 57 (d-3) displays an image on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 57 (d-2), and turns the sub display device 1030 counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 57 (c). 5 shows a state rotated by 15 °, and shows a state of the sub display device 1030 in FIG.

  FIG. 57E shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 15 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 57D with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. Further, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image H1 displayed in the lower left portion of the sub display device 1030 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 57D by the rotation of the sub display device 1030, so that the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 is displayed. Is displayed in a manner that it is rotated 15 ° clockwise around the rotation center. Further, in the sub display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4 is displayed in the lower right side of the character image H1 in a manner not rotated when viewed from the player, and the other part is out of view from the sub display device 1030. ing. FIG. 57 (e) shows a state immediately before the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect ends. FIG. 57 (e-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 57 (e). The image data shown in FIG. 57 (e-1) is image data in a form in which the image data shown in FIG. 57 (d-1) is rotated by 15 ° counterclockwise around the center of the image data. FIG. 57 (e-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 57 (e-1) in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 57 (e). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the image data shown in FIG. 57 (e-1) with the center of the image data as the center. The display data shown in FIG. 57 (e-2) is first displayed at a predetermined position (position shown in FIG. 57 (b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 57 (e-1). This is display data in which merchant character images H1 read from the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400 are superimposed. 57 (e-3) displays an image on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 57 (e-2), and the sub display device 1030 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 57 (d). This shows a state rotated by 15 °, and shows a state of the sub display device 1030 in FIG.

  FIG. 57 (f) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 57 (e) by 30 ° clockwise with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. Is shown. Further, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image H1 displayed in the lower left portion of the sub display device 1030 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 57E by the rotation of the sub display device 1030. Is rotated 30 ° clockwise around the center of rotation and returned to its original state. Further, in the sub display device 1030, the princess character image H4 is not displayed. FIG. 57 (f-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 57 (f). The image data shown in FIG. 57 (f-1) is image data in a form in which the image data shown in FIG. 57 (e-1) is rotated by 30 ° counterclockwise around the center of the image data. This is the same as the image data shown in (b-1). 57 (f-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 57 (f-1) to display the image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 57 (f). The generated display data is shown. Also, the display data shown in FIG. 57 (f-2) is displayed at the predetermined position (lower left of the display data) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 57 (b-1). This is display data in which the merchant character image H1 read from the ROM 406 is superimposed, and the display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 57 (b-2). 57 (f-3) displays an image on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 57 (f-2), and the sub display device 1030 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 57 (e). This shows a state rotated by 30 °, and shows a state of the sub display device 1030 in FIG. FIG. 57 (f-3) shows the same state as FIG. 57 (b-3).

  As described above, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, the character image (donor character image H3) displayed on the sub display device 1030 while rotating the sub display device 1030 in a manner that does not rotate when viewed from the player. And a princess character image H4) and a character image (merchant character image H1) displayed in a rotating manner as viewed from the player. In the rotating sub display device 1030, a character image displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player and a character image displayed in a rotating manner as viewed from the player are displayed at the same time. There are cases where unexpected surprises can be given to the player. In addition, when the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment is performed in the effect during the pattern change, the symbol change display finally determines the jackpot symbol form as compared to the case where the rotation display advance notice effect is not performed. You may be comprised so that a stop display may be easy. Further, instead of the sub display device 1030, the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, or the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. May be performed. In addition, when performing the effect of the present embodiment on the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated and moved.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 57 again.

(D1)
A gaming machine including a first movable body (for example, a movable body 1002) capable of performing a production operation that produces a game,
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100) or a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 2000),
When the power is turned off, the first movable body is configured to move from a second position (for example, an initial position) to a first position (for example, a lowermost position),
When the power is turned on, the first movable body is configured to move from the first position (for example, the lowest position) to the second position (for example, the initial position). ,
The second position and the first position are different positions,
The production operation is configured to start from the second position (for example, an initial position) and end at the second position.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the durability of the driving means for driving the first movable body may be improved.

(D2)
The game stand according to (D1) above,
When the first movable body (for example, the movable body 1002) is located at a position different from the second position (for example, the initial position) and the power is turned off, Configured to move to the first position,
A game stand characterized by that.

(D3)
The game stand according to (D1) or (D2) above,
The production operation includes an operation of moving to a third position (for example, the uppermost position),
The third position and the first position are different positions;
The third position and the second position are different positions.
A game stand characterized by that.

(D4)
The game table according to (D3) above,
Image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The first movable body (for example, the movable body 1002) is a movable body provided in front of the image display means,
The third position is a position in front of the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(D5)
The game stand according to (D4) above,
A big hit action (for example, directing a big hit game) can be executed,
The first movable body (for example, the movable body 1002) is a movable body provided in front of the image display means (for example, the decorative design display device 208),
When the first movable body is located at the third position (for example, the uppermost position), at least a preview image (for example, a cloud image or a balloon image) displayed on the image display means In some cases, the first movable body may overlap,
The preview image is the jackpot notification image.
A game stand characterized by that.

(D6)
The game stand according to any one of (D1) to (D5) above,
The first movable body (for example, the movable body 1002) can execute an initial operation on condition that the power is turned on,
“The first movable body moves from the first position to the second position” described in (D1) above means that “the first movable body moves from the first position to the initial operation. , And move to the second position at the end of the initial operation ”(see, for example, FIGS. 32C to 32G).
A game stand characterized by that.

(D7)
The game stand according to any one of (D1) to (D5) above,
The first movable body (for example, the movable body 1002) can execute an initial operation on condition that the power is turned on,
“The first movable body moves from the first position to the second position” described in (D1) above means that “the first movable body moves from the first position to the second position. After moving to the position, start the initial operation and move to the second position again at the end of the initial operation ”(see, for example, FIGS. 34 (n) to (p)).
A game stand characterized by that.

(D8)
The game stand according to any one of (D1) to (D7) above,
“When the power is turned off” described in (D1) above is “when the main power of the game machine is turned off”
“When the power is turned on” as described in (D1) above is “when the main power of the game machine is turned on”.
A game stand characterized by that.

(D9)
The game stand according to any one of (D1) to (D8) above,
The first movable body (for example, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002) is a movable body whose posture can be changed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(D10)
The game stand according to any one of (D1) to (D9) above,
A second movable body (for example, a movable body 1006) capable of performing a production operation for producing a game;
The second movable body is a movable body that starts operation from a position when the power is turned off when the power is turned on.
A game stand characterized by that.

(D11)
The game stand according to any one of (D1) to (D10) above,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.

(D12)
The game stand according to any one of (D1) to (D10) above,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000).
A game stand characterized by that.

  All the rendering operations of the first rendering movable body are configured to start from the second position and end at the second position.

(D13)
The game stand according to any one of (D1) to (12) above,
The production operation may start from the second position and end at the fourth position,
The production operation may start from the fourth position and end at the second position,
The fourth position is a position different from the first position;
The fourth position is a position different from the second position;
The fourth position is a position different from the third position.
A game stand characterized by that.

(D14)
The game table according to (D13) above,
The production operation may start from the fourth position and end at the fourth position.
A game stand characterized by that.

(D15)
The game stand according to (D13) or (14) above,
The first movable body is configured to move from the fourth position to the first position even when the power is turned off while the first movable body is in the fourth position. ing,
A game stand characterized by that.

(D16)
The game stand according to any one of (D1) to (D15) above,
The first movable body is configured to move from the third position to the first position even when the power is turned off while the first movable body is in the third position. ing,
A game stand characterized by that.

(D17)
The game stand according to any one of (D1) to (D16) above,
Fourth control means for controlling the movable body;
And a driving means for driving the movable body.

  The first control means is the main control unit 300 that performs a lottery (for example, a big hit lottery or the like) advantageous to the player. The first control means may be composed of one or a plurality of control circuits, or may be composed of one or a plurality of control boards.

  The second control means is an effect means (for example, an illumination unit (LED, etc.), a sound output means (speaker, etc.), an image display means (liquid crystal display) that produces a game in response to a command signal from the first control means. Sub-control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) for effect control of the apparatus, dot matrix, etc. The second control means may be composed of one or a plurality of control circuits. Alternatively, the second control means may, for example, draw lots of effects to be performed by the effect means according to the drive control of the effect means and the command signal from the first control means. Make a selection.

  The third control unit is an effect control unit that communicates with the second control unit and performs effect control (for example, drive control) of the effect means. The effect control means may be composed of one or a plurality of control circuits, or may be composed of one or a plurality of control boards. The third control means may control the effect means according to the effect command from the second control means, determine the effect to be executed according to the effect command from the second control means, Information based on the determined result may be returned to the second control means, or the rendering means may be driven.

  The fourth control means is an effect control means that performs communication with the third control means and performs effect control of one or more or all of the sub liquid crystal unit 1030 and the movable bodies 1002 to 1012. The fourth control means may be composed of one or a plurality of control circuits, or may be composed of one or a plurality of control boards, and the fourth control means is supplied from the third control means. You may make it control an effect means according to an effect command, determine the effect performed according to the effect command from a 3rd control means, and return the information based on the determined result to a 3rd control means. The fourth control means may be mounted on the moving unit 1036. The fourth control means may be mounted on the moving unit 1036.

(D18)
The game stand according to (D17) above,
The fourth control means is mounted on a drive unit (for example, the moving unit 1036),
The drive unit performs the same operation during at least one operation (for example, up and down movement) of a plurality of operations by the movable body.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the above embodiment, since the moving unit 1036 is provided on the movable body 1002, when the movable body 1002 moves up and down, the moving unit 1036 also operates together with the movable body 1002, but the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates. In this case, the moving unit 1036 is configured not to rotate. Note that the moving unit 1036 may be arranged separately from the movable body 1002 so that the moving unit 1036 does not operate together when the movable body 1002 is moved up and down, and also when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated, The moving unit 1036 may be configured to operate together, or the moving unit 1036 may be configured to operate together during all operations of the movable body 1002.

  Although the movable body 1002 has shown an example capable of executing an up / down operation (position change, movement) and a rotation operation (posture change), it is also possible to execute an operation other than up / down (for example, position change / movement in the left-right direction). Tilt operation (for example, an operation in which the left and right sides of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 are tilted forward and rearward with respect to the vertical rotation axis, and an upper side and a lower side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 are forward and backward with respect to the horizontal rotation axis. It may be possible to execute an operation of tilting backward.

(D19)
The game stand according to any one of (D1) to (D18) above,
Fourth control means for controlling the movable body;
Driving means for driving the movable body;
Detecting means for detecting the position of the first movable body,
When the confirmation condition is satisfied, the position of the first movable body is confirmed,
When the position of the first movable body is not the first position, the first movable body is configured to move to the first position;
The confirmation condition is a condition that is satisfied when the power is turned off.
A game table characterized by

(E1)
An image display unit (for example, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 or the sub liquid crystal unit 1032) capable of displaying an effect image for producing a game;
Drive means (for example, a motor) for driving the image display unit;
A game machine equipped with
The image display unit may move by driving the driving means,
In a period (hereinafter referred to as “first period”) in which the image display unit is moving in a first direction (a rotation direction around the rotation axis of the image display unit or a linear direction). The unit may display a first moving image (for example, a moving image of Tono character image H3 or Princess character image H4),
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which the first image moves in the first direction (see, for example, FIGS. 57B to 57D).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having the configuration, an impact is given by the movement of the image display unit, and the display angle and the display position of the image displayed on the image display unit are changed during the movement period. May be able to perform operations that are not seen on a daily basis, and may allow the player to forget the daily life and concentrate more on the game. Further, the entire period during which the image display unit is moving in the first direction may be set as the first period, or a part of the period during which the image display unit is moving in the first direction. May be the first period. In addition, with an effect as a trigger, the entire period of the period from when the image display unit starts to move in the first direction until it stops may be set as the first period, or with an effect different from a certain effect as a trigger, A part of the period from when the image display unit starts to move in the first direction until it stops may be set as the first period.

(E2)
The game stand according to (E1) above,
The first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode using the first image (see, for example, FIGS. 57B to 57D).
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the example according to the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the expression, outer shape, and the like of the first image (dono character image H3 and princess character image H4) are fixedly displayed. The outer shape or the like may be displayed in a deformed manner. For example, referring to FIG. 57, the face of the palace that was not displayed in FIG. 57 (a) is displayed as a true face in FIG. An animation may be performed such that a full smile is obtained at 57 (d), a slight smile is returned at FIG. 57 (e), and a true face is returned at FIG. 57 (f). Further, the aspect in which the first image (for example, the character image H3 of the lord) moves in the first direction may indicate that the display position of the animation including the character image H3 of the lord moves. The animation is not limited to the variable display of the character display, but changes in the outer shape of the character, etc., variable display of the lines (change display from partial character strings indicating lines to the entire character strings, etc.), characters and icons Color change, character / icon movement display, etc., or a combination of these may be included.

(E3)
The game stand according to (E1) or (E2) above,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in a first direction (for example, a counterclockwise direction) (see, for example, FIGS. 57B to 57D),
In the first period, the first image is configured to move in a second direction (for example, a clockwise direction) (for example, FIGS. 57 (b-1) and (c-1), (See (d-1))
The first direction and the second direction are opposite directions.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In a gaming machine having such a configuration, the first orientation when the image display unit operates is triggered by a certain effect (for example, arrival of the timing for starting the image display unit operation effect during super reach). (For example, the left-facing direction) and other effects (for example, the timing of starting the effect by the operation of the image display unit to inform the player whether or not the probability change at the end of the jackpot starts) The first direction when the display unit operates may be a different direction (for example, right direction). In addition, the first direction and the second direction may be the same direction instead of the opposite directions. In this case, the first image is moved or rotated faster than the image display unit is moved or rotated. Is visible. For this reason, it is possible to give a player an extraordinary feeling that cannot be obtained in a mode in which an image rotates in a fixed image display unit. Rotating and moving in the game may cause you to forget your everyday sensations and concentrate on the game.

(E4)
The game stand according to (E3) above,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move at a first speed in the first direction;
In the first period, the first image is configured to move at a second speed in the second direction;
The first speed and the second speed are the same (for example, FIGS. 57 (b) to (d) and FIGS. 57 (b-1), (c-1), (d-1 )reference),
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the image display unit appears to move to the player, but the display position / display angle of the first image does not seem to move, so that it is unusual for the notification means. When it is possible to perform a normal operation, the notification itself by the image display unit display can play the same role as when it is not moving, and it is possible to achieve both the impactful operation and the notification There is. Further, the first direction and the second direction may be opposite directions, and the first speed and the second speed may be different. In this case, the first direction and the second direction may be different from the movement or rotation of the image display unit. One image is visually recognized by the player so as to move or rotate slowly. For this reason, a mode in which an image rotates in a fixed image display unit is routinely seen on a TV, a network, or the like. However, since the image display unit rotates, it is unusual that cannot be obtained with a fixed image display unit. The first image in the image display unit is moved and rotated so as to slowly follow the movement and rotation of the image display unit. You may be able to forget and concentrate on the game. In addition, when the image display unit moves and rotates quickly with an emphasis on impact, by moving and rotating the first image gently, the notification itself by the image display unit display is close to when it is not moving, It may be possible to fulfill the role of notification.

(E5)
The game stand according to any one of (E1) to (E4) above,
The first moving image is a moving image including an aspect in which a second image (for example, a merchant character image H1) is displayed (for example, see FIG. 57).
A game stand characterized by that.
(E6)
The game stand according to (E5) above,
In the first period, the second image is configured not to move in the first direction (for example, see FIGS. 57B-2, C-2, and D-2). ),
A game stand characterized by that.

  The gaming machine having this configuration may be configured not to display a second image that does not move in the first direction during the first period. That is, in the first period, since all the images displayed on the image display unit are configured to move in the first direction, the movement of the image display unit and the image is given a unified feeling and more impactful. There are cases where the production operation can be executed.

(E7)
The game stand according to (E5) or (E6) above,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode by the second image.

  In the example according to the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the expression, outer shape, and the like of the second image (merchant character image h1 ′) are fixedly displayed. The expression, outer shape, etc. of the second image may be displayed in a deformed manner. For example, referring to FIG. 25, the merchant's face that was not displayed on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 25 (a) is displayed as a true face in FIG. 25 (b), and a little in FIG. 25 (c). The animation may be such that the face becomes steep, the face becomes steep in FIG. 25D, the face returns to a steep face in FIG. 25E, and returns to the true face in FIG. The aspect in which the second image does not move in the first direction may indicate that the animation display position does not move. The animation is not limited to the variable display of the character display, but changes in the outer shape of the character, etc., variable display of the lines (change display from partial character strings indicating lines to the entire character strings, etc.), characters and icons Color change, character / icon movement display, etc., or a combination of these may be included.

(E8)
The game stand according to any one of (E1) to (E7) above,
“Moving by driving of the driving means” described in (E1) means “rotating by driving of the driving means”
“The first image moves in the first direction” described in (E1) above means “the first image rotates in the first direction”.
The first direction is a rotation direction around the rotation axis of the image display unit (see, for example, FIG. 57).
A game stand characterized by that.
(E9)
The game stand according to (E3) or (E4) above,
The first direction is one of clockwise and counterclockwise (for example, see FIG. 57),
A game stand characterized by that.
(E10)
The game stand according to any one of (E1) to (E7) above,
“Moving by driving the driving means” described in (E1) means “moving linearly by driving the driving means”
“The first image moves in the first direction” described in (E1) above means “the first image linearly moves in the first direction” (for example, see FIG. 55). ),
A game stand characterized by that.

  The above-mentioned “the first image linearly moves in the first direction” may be “the first image linearly moves in the vertical direction”. In this case, the first direction is one of upward and downward. Further, the above-mentioned “first image linearly moves in the first direction” may mean “first image linearly moves in the left-right direction”. In this case, the first direction is one of the left direction and the right direction. The above-mentioned “first image linearly moves in the first direction” may mean “first image linearly moves in an oblique direction”. In this case, the first direction is one of the upper left direction, the lower right direction, the upper right direction, and the lower left direction.

  A modification of the configuration described in the example according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. For example, the movement of the driving means may be a combination of rotational movement and linear movement (vertical direction, horizontal direction, diagonal direction, front-rear direction as viewed from the player). Further, the pachinko machine 100 may be configured to be equipped with a plurality of image display units. Further, a plurality of image display devices may be mounted on one image display unit. An LED may be mounted on the image display unit, or a movable body for production may be mounted. Further, before the image display unit is rotated or moved, the production movable body is moved from the initial state to the movable state, and after the image display unit in which the production movable body is in the movable state performs the rotation operation or the movement operation. It may be configured to stop and then move the effect movable body to an initial state. In addition, during the symbol variation display, the symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display is more effective when the effect operation illustrated in FIG. 53 is performed than when the effect operation illustrated in FIG. 52 is performed. The mode may be configured to easily become a big hit mode, and when the effect operation of FIG. 52 is performed during the design variation display, the effect operation of FIG. 52 is performed. It may be configured such that the symbol mode that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display tends to be a big hit mode. In addition, when the effect operation of FIG. 52 is performed during the symbol variation display, the symbol mode that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display may be configured to be a big hit mode. When the effect operation of FIG. 53 is performed during the symbol variation display, the symbol mode that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display may be configured to be the big hit mode. 52 and 53 both show an example in which the same effect display is performed. However, when the sub display device shown in FIG. 52 rotates, the image displayed on the sub display device also rotates together. The effect visually recognized by the player and the effect visually recognized by the player so that the image displayed on the sub display device is not rotated together when the sub display device shown in FIG. You may comprise so that it may become. For example, “One of the other effects” is an effect in which Tono fights the composer, and “The other effect in another effect” is an effect in which the princess dances. Also good. “One of the other effects” may be installed, one or more may be installed, or one of the “other effects” may be installed. Multiple types may be installed. In addition, when the sub display device rotates as shown in FIG. 22, the figure is more than the number of types of effects in which at least a part (or all of the images) displayed on the sub display device rotate together. When the sub display device rotates as shown at 53, the player visually recognizes that at least a part (or all) of the image displayed on the sub display device is not rotated together. You may be comprised so that the number of types may increase. Conversely, when the sub display device rotates as shown in FIG. 53, the player visually recognizes that at least a part (or all of the image) displayed on the sub display device is not rotated together. 52, when the sub display device rotates as shown in FIG. 52, at least a part (or all) of the images displayed on the sub display device rotate together. You may be comprised so that the number of types may increase.

  Also, the effect example shown in FIG. 52 and the effect example shown in FIG. 53 may be combined. For example, in a period (period A) when the sub display device starts to rotate, the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed A (for example, 20 rpm) and displayed on the sub display device. The image is displayed so that the image displayed on the sub display device is not rotated so as to be viewed by the player so as to rotate together with the sub display device. In the next period (period B), the sub display device is rotated at a speed B (for example, 40 rpm) in one direction (for example, counterclockwise), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than the sub display device. At least a part or the whole of the image is rotated in another direction (for example, clockwise) at a speed B ′ (for example, 20 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize it as rotating slowly. In the next period (period C), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed C (for example, 50 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than the sub display device. At least a part or all of the image is rotated in another direction (for example, clockwise) at a speed C ′ (for example, 40 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize the image as rotating slowly. In the next period (period D), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed D (for example, 60 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is not rotated. At least part or all of the image is rotated in the other direction (for example, clockwise) at the speed D (for example, 60 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize that only the sub display device is rotating. Let In the next period (period E), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed E (for example, 50 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than the sub display device. At least a part or all of the image is rotated in another direction (for example, clockwise) at a speed E ′ (for example, 40 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize the image as rotating slowly. In the next period (period F), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed F (for example, 40 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than the sub display device. At least a part or all of the image is rotated in another direction (for example, clockwise) at a speed F ′ (for example, 20 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize the image as rotating slowly. During the period (period G) before the sub display device finishes rotating in the next period, the sub display device is rotated at a speed G (for example, 20 rpm) in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) and displayed on the sub display device. The image to be displayed may not be rotated so as to be visually recognized by the player so as to rotate together with the sub display device. Thus, as illustrated in the period A to the period D, as the sub display device rotates, the rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device gradually shifts from the rotation of the sub display device. The sub display device is rotated, and a part of or all of the display of the sub display device is shifted to a state where the player can visually recognize it. It may be possible to perform certain effects. Further, as illustrated in the period D to the period G, the rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device gradually rotates together with the sub display device as the sub display device rotates. By causing the player to visually recognize the change as described above, it may be possible to provide a new sense of unity with the sub display device and the image. In these examples, the difference between the rotation speed of the sub display device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually reduced during the periods A to D, and the sub display is performed during the periods D to G. Although the difference between the rotation speed of the device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually increased, conversely, during the period A to D, the rotation speed of the sub display device is increased. The difference between the speed and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually increased. During the periods D to G, the rotation speed of the sub display device and the rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device are increased. You may comprise so that the difference in speed may be made small gradually. Also, here, the rotating sub display device and the image displayed on the rotating sub display device are illustrated, but the present invention is also applicable to the sub display device that moves linearly and the image that is displayed on the sub display device that moves linearly. Is also possible.

(F1)
A production movable body (for example, the movable body 1001 or the movable body 1002) capable of performing a movable operation for producing a game;
A decorative body (movable body 1008) provided with window parts (for example, transmission parts 1008a and 1008b);
A game machine equipped with
In some cases, the effect movable body performs an operation behind the decorative body (see, for example, FIGS. 41 (f) to (k)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having the configuration, the effect movable body hidden by the decorative body can make the player visually recognize the operation of the effect movable body through the window portion of the decorative body. It is possible to perform an operation that is not seen on a daily basis, and sometimes the player can forget the daily life and concentrate more on the game.

(F2)
The game stand according to (F1) above,
The production movable body is a movable body capable of displaying an image,
It is configured to allow the player to visually recognize the image of the effect movable body through the window (see, for example, FIGS. 41 (f) to (k)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the effect movable body hidden by the decorative body is configured to be able to display an image, and therefore the operation and image of the effect movable body are displayed to the player through the window portion of the decorative body. As a notification means, it is possible to perform an operation that cannot be seen on a daily basis, and the player may forget the daily life and concentrate more on the game. Further, a plurality of effect movable bodies that can display an image may be provided, or only one may be provided. In addition, the effect movable body capable of displaying an image that can be operated behind the decorative body may have a main liquid crystal unit or a sub liquid crystal unit. In addition, the effect movable body capable of displaying an image that can be operated behind the decorative body may include both the main liquid crystal unit and the sub liquid crystal unit, or may include two or more sub liquid crystal units. There may be.

(F3)
The game stand according to (F2) above,
Depending on the operation of the effect movable body, the image of the effect movable body visually recognized by the player through the window portion may change (for example, see FIGS. 41 (f) to (k)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, since the image displayed on the effect movable body visually recognized through the window portion of the decorative body changes by performing the operation behind the decorative body, There are cases where it can give you unbelievable surprises. In addition, the above-mentioned “the image of the effect movable body changes” means a case where an image displayed on the effect movable body is changed (for example, the shape or display color of a cloud image is changed). And the case where the appearance of the image displayed on the production movable body changes.

(F4)
The game stand according to any one of (F1) to (F3) above,
The decorative body is operable (see, for example, FIGS. 41 (e) and (f)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, the decorative body can be operated, so that it may be possible to perform an effect that links the operation of the decorative body and the operation of the effect movable body.

(F5)
The game stand according to any one of (F1) to (F4) above,
Provided with symbol display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214) capable of executing variable display of symbols;
A game stand characterized by that.
(F6)
The game stand according to (F5) above,
In the variation display of the symbol by the symbol display means, the player visually recognizes a part of the image (for example, a cloud image) on the effect movable body through the window portion of the ornament by the operation of the ornament. If it is possible, the final result of the variable display of the symbol is larger than the case where the player cannot visually see a part of the image on the effect movable body through the window of the decorative body. It is configured to make it easy for the symbol pattern to be confirmed and displayed (for example, see FIGS. 41 and 42),
A part of the image in the effect movable body is an image of at least a part of the preview image.
A game stand characterized by that.
(F7)
The game stand according to (F5) or (F6) above,
Playing a part of an image of a reserved icon in a pre-reading mode (for example, a white rhombus mode) in the effect movable body through the window (for example, the transmission part 1008b) of the decorative body by the operation of the decorative body When the player becomes visible, than when the player does not become able to visually recognize a part of the image of the hold icon that has been pre-read in the effect movable body through the window of the decorative body, As a final result of the variation display of the symbol that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon is digested, the jackpot symbol pattern is configured to be easily displayed (see, for example, FIG. 48).
A game stand characterized by that.
(F8)
The game stand according to any one of F1 to F7,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.

(G1)
A game machine with image display means,
The image display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the sub display device 1030) can perform a rotation operation (for example, see FIG. 50),
The image display means on which the rotation operation is performed may display a first image (for example, a character image H1, a decorative pattern, a hold icon, a change icon, etc.)
When the rotation operation is performed, the aspect ratio of the first image may change (see, for example, FIG. 50 (l)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, when the rotation operation of the image display means is performed, the aspect ratio of the first image may change, so the presence of the first image is amplified. There is a case where a strong impression can be given to the player. In addition, there may be a case where any one of the images such as the character image, the decorative design, the hold icon, the variation icon, and the background pattern, or all of these images is used as the first image. May have a different image as the first image. Further, the image display means capable of executing the rotation operation may be a main liquid crystal unit or a sub liquid crystal unit. In both cases, the aspect ratio of the first image may be displayed so as to change. For example, when the first image is displayed on the main liquid crystal unit and the sub liquid crystal unit, the main liquid crystal unit and the sub liquid crystal unit are rotated simultaneously or separately, and the aspect ratio of the first image is changed simultaneously or separately. There may be. Further, the first image may be displayed by two sub liquid crystal units by arranging two sub liquid crystal units. In this case, the aspect ratio of the first image may be changed by rotating the two sub liquid crystal units in a line.

(G2)
The gaming machine according to (G1) above,
The image display means on which the rotation operation is performed may display a second image (for example, a decorative frame F1, a hold number display, an image of a fourth pattern),
When the rotation operation is performed, the second image may not rotate (see, for example, FIGS. 51 (k) to (p)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(G3)
The gaming machine described in (G2) above,
When the rotation operation is performed, the second image is not rotated (see, for example, FIGS. 51 (k) to (p)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, when the first image rotates, the second image may not rotate. Therefore, the second image is firmly fixed while emphasizing the rotation of the first image. It can be made visible to the player. In addition, there may be a case where any one of the images such as the character image, the decorative design, the hold icon, the variation icon, and the background design, or all of these images are used as the second image. May have a different image as the second image.

(G4)
The game stand according to any one of (G1) to (G3) above,
When the rotation operation is performed, an image (for example, the princess character image H4) that has been cut off by the image display unit before the rotation operation is performed is displayed on the image display unit by performing the rotation operation. (See, for example, FIGS. 56 (b) and (c)),
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, an image that has been disregarded in the image display unit before the image display unit is rotated is displayed on the image display unit by the rotation operation of the image display unit. In some cases, it may be possible to give an unexpected surprise to the player.

(G5)
The gaming machine according to any one of (G1) to (G4) above,
When the rotation operation is performed, the image (for example, the princess character image H4) displayed on the image display unit before the rotation operation is performed is performed on the image display unit by performing the rotation operation. May be closed,
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having the configuration, the image displayed on the image display unit before the image display unit is rotated can be cut off on the image display unit by the rotation of the image display unit. Because of this, it may be possible to give an unexpected surprise to the player.

(G6)
The game stand according to any one of (G1) to (G5) above,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.
(G7)
The game stand according to any one of (G1) to (G5) above,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000).
A game stand characterized by that.

(H1)
An effect movable body (for example, a sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002) capable of executing an effect operation for producing a game,
A base body (for example, a moving unit 1036) capable of supporting the effect movable body;
A game machine equipped with
The effect movable body (for example, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002) is capable of executing a rotation operation,
One of the effect movable body and the base body is provided with a slip ring (for example, rotation side substrates 1090 and 1140),
Conductive parts (for example, conductive parts 1078 to 1088, 1130 to 1136) are provided on the other of the effect movable body and the base body,
When the slip ring and the conductive portion are in contact with each other, power is supplied from the base body side to the rendering movable body side.
A game stand characterized by that.
(H2)
The gaming machine according to (H1) above,
The base body is provided with a first communication means (for example, a data transmission / reception unit 1138),
The effect movable body is provided with a second communication means (for example, a data transmission / reception unit 1144),
The second communication means is means capable of receiving a signal transmitted from the first communication means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(H3)
The game stand according to (H1) or (H2) above,
Both the first communication means and the second communication means are means capable of optical wireless communication.
A game stand characterized by that.
(H4)
The game stand according to any one of (H1) to (H3) above,
Both the first communication means and the second communication means are means capable of laser communication.
A game stand characterized by that.
(H5)
The game stand according to any one of (H1) to (H4) above,
The slip ring (for example, the rotation side substrates 1090 and 1140) is provided on the effect movable body,
The conductive portions (for example, conductive portions 1078 to 1088, 1130 to 1136) are provided on the base body.
A game stand characterized by that.
(H6)
The game stand according to any one of (H1) to (H5) above,
The effect movable body is provided with image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208).
The second communication means is means capable of receiving an image information signal transmitted from the first communication means.
A game stand characterized by that.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the same configuration and control system as the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment. The same components as those of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, an opportunity button 139 is arranged alongside the chance button 136 in addition to the chance button 136. The opportunity button 139 has the same function as the chance button 136.

  FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an outline of the effect pattern shown in each example of the present embodiment. FIG. 58 shows an effect pattern in which effects relating to the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are executed in each example of the present embodiment. The effects related to these buttons can be roughly classified into five effect patterns (effect patterns 1 to 5). The effect related to the button is an effect related to the operation of the chance button 136 and / or the opportunity button 139. In FIGS. 58A to 58D, time elapses from left to right.

<Direction pattern 1>
The production pattern 1 will be described with reference to FIG. The effect pattern 1 is an effect related to the chance button 136 and is an effect that does not use the opportunity button 139. The effect pattern 1 is an effect pattern starting from the button operation waiting display 1 displayed when waiting for the chance button 136 to be pressed, and a chance during the button operation waiting display 1 being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the player operates the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the button 136, the button response display 1 of the display performed in accordance with the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button response display 1 is a display that does not include a display that is performed when the opportunity button 139 is waiting to be pressed. Thus, the button response display displayed when the player is prompted by the button operation wait display 1 and operates the button does not include the opportunity button press wait display.

<Direction pattern 2>
The effect pattern 2 is demonstrated using the upper stage of FIG.58 (b). The effect pattern 2 is an effect related to the chance button 136. The effect pattern 2 starts from the button operation waiting display 3 displayed when waiting for the chance button 136 to be pressed, and the operation of the chance button 136 during the button operation waiting display 3 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. When the player operates the chance button 136 during the valid period, the button response display 3 of the display performed in response to the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button response display 3 is a display that does not include a part of the display performed when waiting for the opportunity button 139 to be pressed.

<Direction pattern 3>
The effect pattern 3 is demonstrated using the lower stage of FIG.58 (b). The effect pattern 3 is an effect related to the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139. The effect pattern 3 is an effect pattern starting from the button operation waiting display 3 displayed when waiting for the chance button 136 to be pressed, and the chance during the button operation waiting display 3 being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. When the player operates the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the button 136, the display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the operation of the chance button 136, and is performed when the opportunity button 139 is waited to be pressed. When the button response display 4 including the display is displayed and then the player operates the opportunity button 139 during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 displayed on the button response display 4, the opportunity button 139 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A button response display 5 that is performed in response to the pressing is displayed.

  When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed and the player is prompted by the button operation waiting display 3 and operates the chance button 136, the effect pattern 2 (effect relating to the chance button) or the effect pattern 3 (chance button and opportunity) One of the production patterns of the production of buttons) is determined. Before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the effect pattern may be determined in advance, or the effect pattern is determined by the timing at which the player presses the chance button 136, the number of times the button is pressed, and the like. There may be cases. As described above, the button response display displayed when the player is prompted by the button operation waiting display 3 and operates the button includes the opportunity button pressing waiting display (or a part of the opportunity button pressing waiting display). May or may not be included.

<Direction pattern 4>
The effect pattern 4 is demonstrated using FIG.58 (c). The effect pattern 4 is an effect related to the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139. The effect pattern 4 starts from the button operation waiting display 4 displayed when waiting for the chance button 136 to be pressed, and the operation of the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 4 is being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the player operates the chance button 136 during the effective period, the button is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in response to the operation of the chance button 136, and includes a display that is displayed when waiting for the opportunity button 139 to be pressed. When the response display 4 is displayed, and then the player operates the opportunity button 139 during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 in the middle of displaying the button response display 4 on the decoration symbol display device 208, the decoration symbol display device A button response display 5 is displayed in 208 in response to pressing of the opportunity button 139. As described above, the button response display displayed when the player is prompted by the button operation waiting display 4 and operates the button includes the opportunity button pressing wait display.

<Direction pattern 5>
The effect pattern 5 is demonstrated using FIG.58 (d). The effect pattern 5 is an effect related to the opportunity button 139. The effect pattern 5 starts from the button operation waiting display 5 displayed when waiting for the opportunity button 139 to be pressed, and the operation of the opportunity button 139 in the middle of displaying the button operation waiting display 5 on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the player operates the opportunity button 139 during the effective period, the button response display 2 of the display performed according to the operation of the opportunity button 139 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Thus, in the effect pattern 5, the button operation waiting display 5 prompting the operation of the opportunity button 139 is displayed when the effect related to the button is started.

  In the present embodiment, in the effect patterns 1 to 5 performed during the symbol variation display, the easiness of the decisive display of the big hit symbol pattern is varied depending on the effect pattern. In the present embodiment, among the effect patterns 1 to 5, the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 4 is performed is configured so that the jackpot symbol pattern is most easily displayed, whereas only the effect pattern 2 is performed. The broken symbol variation display is configured such that the jackpot symbol pattern is hard to be confirmed and displayed. The symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 3 is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily determined and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 3 is performed without the effect pattern 3 being performed. The symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 3 is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily determined and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 5 is performed without the effect pattern 3 being performed. When the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 5 is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol is more easily confirmed than the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 1 is performed without the effect pattern 5 being performed, or the effect pattern 5 is In the case where the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 1 is performed without being performed and the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 1 is performed without the effect pattern 1 are configured to display the big hit symbol mode with the same probability. There is also. In the production pattern 4 that is most likely to stop and display the big hit mode, the chance button 136 must be pressed in order to press the opportunity button 139. The motivation to operate the button 136 can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved in some cases. In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 in the present embodiment, other than the examples given above can be adopted. In the present embodiment, in the effect patterns 1 to 5 performed during the symbol variation display, there may be a case where the easiness of the decisive display of the big hit symbol pattern is made the same depending on the effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 58, in the production patterns 1 to 5, it is determined that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button 136 is pressed. It may be determined that it has been done. For example, when the chance button 136 is configured to be rotatable, it is determined that the chance button 136 has been operated when the player rotates the chance button 136 at a predetermined angle or more from the normal state. It may be configured.

  As shown in FIG. 58, in the production patterns 1 to 5, it is determined that the opportunity button 139 has been operated when the opportunity button 139 is pressed. It may be determined that it has been done. For example, when the opportunity button 139 is configured to be rotatable, it is determined that the opportunity button 139 has been operated when the player rotates the opportunity button 139 beyond a normal angle from a normal state. It may be configured. The predetermined angle at the chance button 136 and the predetermined angle at the opportunity button 139 may be the same or different.

  As shown in FIG. 58, in the production patterns 1 to 5, the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are used, but other operation means may be used. For example, instead of the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139, an operation unit using the setting operation unit 137 or the transparent member 118 as a button may be used, or a handle operation unit may be used. The start and end times of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the production patterns 1 to 5 are determined before the button operation waiting display 1 or the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed. The start time and end time of the period are determined before the button operation waiting display 2 or the button response display 4 is displayed. 58 may be executed by the sub display device 1030 instead of the decorative symbol display device 208, or the decorative pattern display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 may have the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. It may be executed by both.

(Example 1-1)
An effect example of Example 1-1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 shows an effect example in the effect pattern 1 shown in FIG. 58 (a), and shows the effect states in time series. FIG. 59A shows a simplified front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 29, and FIGS. 59B to 59F show the main liquid crystal unit from the game board 1000. 1001 and the movable body 1002 are extracted and shown. 59 to 86, the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are schematically shown. A character string “push” is written on the pressing surface of the chance button 136, and a character string “pressing” is written on the pressing surface of the opportunity button 139. In FIG. 59 and subsequent figures, the movable bodies 1006, 1008, and 1012 are not shown.

  FIG. 59A shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is off. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 59 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero.

  FIG. 59 (b) continued from FIG. 59 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In FIG. 59 and the subsequent figures, the decorative symbol variation display is indicated by a thin white arrow pointing downward. FIG. 59B shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state. The chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 uses an LED as a light source. The opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 uses an LED as a light source. When the chance button 136 is in the normal state, the chance button lamp 138 may not be emitting light, or the chance button lamp 138 may be emitting light in a predetermined manner. When the opportunity button 139 is in the normal state, the opportunity button lamp 141 may not be emitting light, or the opportunity button lamp 141 may be emitting light in a predetermined manner. Note that light sources other than LEDs may be used as the light sources of the chance button lamp 138 and the opportunity button lamp 141.

  FIG. 59 (c) following FIG. 59 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. An effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started after FIG.

  FIG. 59 (d) following FIG. 59 (c) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 1 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button operation waiting display 1 in this example may be an image (hereinafter referred to as a “chance button image”) displayed with the chance button 136 displayed in the approximate center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter, “chance button image”). ) Corresponds to an image in which three inverted triangles overlap (hereinafter may be referred to as a “button press instruction image”). When the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b and 208 c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, before the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 59D, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Represents a state. A plurality of lines shown above the chance button 136 indicate a state in which the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). Represents. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. The chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a moving manner (for example, movement that repeats moving display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. There may be a case where the display is stopped outside the operation valid period.

  59 (e) following FIG. 59 (d) is performed in response to the button response display 1 (pressing the chance button 136) when the player presses the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. As a display), a character string image of “chance” is displayed at a substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button response display 1 of this example may not be displayed, or the operation of the chance button 136 may be performed. Even when the chance button 136 is not operated during the effective period, the button response display 1 of this example may be displayed.

  FIG. 59 (f) continued from FIG. 59 (e) shows a state in which the definite symbol form is displayed with the end of the effect by the notice animation. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol mode is confirmed.

(Example 1-2)
An effect example of Example 1-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 shows an effect example in the effect pattern 1 shown in FIG. 58, and shows the effect state in time series.

  FIG. 60A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 60A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 60B continued from FIG. 60A shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started after FIG. 60 (b).

  FIG. 60 (c) following FIG. 60 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 1 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button operation waiting display 1 of the present example corresponds to the button pressing instruction image having the same form as the button operation waiting display 1 shown in the embodiment 1-1, in which three inverted triangles overlap with the chance button image. In FIG. 60C, the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Represents. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. It should be noted that the color of the chance button image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the emission color of the chance button 136 may be configured to be the same, or may be configured to be different. May be. The chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a moving manner (for example, movement that repeats moving display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. There may be a case where the display is stopped outside the operation valid period.

  FIG. 60 (d) continued from FIG. 60 (c) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 60 (c) is displayed, so that the button response display 1 ( (Display performed in response to pressing of the chance button 136) is displayed in a substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The button response display 1 of this example corresponds to a character string image of “chance !!” that is different from the button response display 1 shown in the example 1-1. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button response display 1 of this example may not be displayed, and the operation of the chance button 136 may be effective. Even when the chance button 136 is not operated during the period, the button response display 1 of this example may be displayed.

  FIG. 60 (e) continuing from FIG. 60 (d) shows a state in which the final symbol pattern is confirmed and displayed with the end of the effect by the notice animation. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place.

  An effect example of Example 1-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 shows an example in which the special figure variation game for executing the effect example shown in FIG. 60 is a big hit, and the effect states are shown in time series. 61 (a) to 61 (d) show the same effects as in FIGS. 60 (a) to 60 (d).

  FIG. 61 (e) following FIG. 61 (d) shows a state in which the big hit symbol pattern is confirmed and displayed with the end of the effect by the notice animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

  As described above, FIGS. 59 to 61 show an example of the effect pattern 1 shown in FIG. In the effect shown in Example 1-1, the character string image of “chance” is displayed as the button response display 1, and in the effect shown in Example 1-2, the character string image of “chance!” Is displayed as the button response display 1. Is displayed. In the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 1 is performed, the button response display is more than the symbol variation display in which the “chance!” Character string image is displayed as the button response display 1 and the “chance” character string image is displayed. The symbol variation display in which the character string image of “chance !!” is displayed as 1 may be configured such that the decisive display of the big hit symbol pattern is easier to perform. Even in the case of the same type of effect pattern 1, the player's interest may be improved by changing the ease with which the big hit symbol pattern is determined and displayed depending on the display of the button response display 1. . It should be noted that in the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 1 is performed, the button response display 1 does not display the “chance” character string image but displays the “chance!” Character string image, rather than the symbol variation display. The symbol variation display in which the character string image of “chance” is displayed as the response display 1 may be configured so that the decisive display of the big hit symbol mode is easier, or the “chance” is displayed as the button response display 1. The symbol variation display in which the character string image of “chance !!” is displayed without displaying the character string image, and the symbol variation display in which the character string image of “chance !!” is displayed as the button response display 1 is a big hit. You may comprise so that the fixed display of a pattern aspect may become the same.

(Example 1-3)
An effect example of Example 1-3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 shows a modification of the effect pattern 1 shown in FIG. 58 (a) and shows the effect states in time series.

  FIG. 62 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 62A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 62B continued from FIG. 62A shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 62 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started.

  FIG. 62C continuing from FIG. 62B shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 1 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed. The button operation waiting display 1 in this example corresponds to a button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles overlap with a chance button image that is the same display as the button operation waiting display 1 shown in the embodiment 1-1. In FIG. 62C, in relation to the display of the button operation waiting display 1, the chance button 136 is in a state different from the normal state, and the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined manner (or different from the normal state). This represents a state where light is emitted in a manner. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. The chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a moving manner (for example, movement that repeats moving display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. There may be a case where the display is stopped outside the operation valid period.

  FIG. 62 (d) continued from FIG. 62 (c) shows that the operation of the chance button 136 is effective without the player pressing the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 62 (c) is displayed. The period ends, and after that, the button response display is not displayed and the effect by the notice animation is ended, and the confirmed symbol mode is displayed. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In addition, the symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is performed may be a confirmation display of the jackpot symbol mode.

(Example 1-4)
An effect example of Example 1-4 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 shows an effect example in the effect pattern 1, and shows the effect state in time series.

  FIG. 63 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 63A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 63B continued from FIG. 63A shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After (b) of FIG. 63, the effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started.

  FIG. 63 (c) continued from FIG. 63 (b) shows a state where the button operation waiting display 1 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button operation waiting display 1 of this example is a button press instruction image displayed in a substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, in which the chance button image and three inverted triangles are overlapped, and “Press!” Corresponds to the character string image. When the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b and 208 c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, before the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. FIG. 63C shows a state in which the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. The chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a moving manner (for example, movement that repeats moving display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. There may be a case where the display is stopped outside the operation valid period.

  FIG. 63 (d) continued from FIG. 63 (c) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 63 (c) is displayed, so that the button response display 1 ( A character string image of “Large Chance” is displayed in a substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as a display) performed in response to pressing of the chance button 136. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button response display 1 of this example may not be displayed, or the operation of the chance button 136 may be performed. Even when the chance button 136 is not operated during the effective period, the button response display 1 of this example may be displayed. Instead of displaying the character image of “chance” or “chance!” Without displaying the character image of “great chance” as the button response display 1, the character of “great chance” as the button response display 1 is displayed. There may be a case where the symbol variation display for displaying the row image is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily displayed.

  FIG. 63 (e) following FIG. 63 (d) shows a state in which the final symbol pattern has been confirmed and displayed with the end of the effect by the notice animation. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place.

(Example 1-5)
An effect example of Example 1-5 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 shows an effect example in the effect pattern 1 and shows the effect state in time series.

  FIG. 64 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 64A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 64B continued from FIG. 64A shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After (b) of FIG. 64, the effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started.

  FIG. 64C continuing from FIG. 64B shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 1 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed. The button operation waiting display 1 of this example is the same as the button operation waiting display 1 shown in the embodiment 1-4. A character string image corresponds. When the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b and 208 c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, before the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. FIG. 64C illustrates a state in which the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. The chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a moving manner (for example, movement that repeats moving display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. There may be a case where the display is stopped outside the operation valid period.

  FIG. 64D, which continues from FIG. 64C, shows a button response display 1 () when the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 64C is displayed. A character string image of “Large chance!” Different from the button response display 1 shown in Example 1-4 is displayed at a substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The state displayed in is shown. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button response display 1 of this example may not be displayed, or the operation of the chance button 136 may be performed. Even when the chance button 136 is not operated during the effective period, the button response display 1 of this example may be displayed. The button response display 1 does not display the character string image of “Great Chance!”, But displays the character image of “Great Chance!” As the button response display 1, rather than the symbol variation display that displays the character image of “Great Chance!”. The symbol variation display to be displayed may be configured so that the big hit symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed, or vice versa.

  FIG. 64 (e) continuing from FIG. 64 (d) shows a state in which the final symbol pattern is confirmed and displayed with the end of the effect by the notice animation. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol mode is confirmed.

(Example 1-6)
An effect example of Example 1-6 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 shows a modification of the effect pattern 1 shown in FIG. 58 (a) and shows the effect states in time series.

  FIG. 65A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 65A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 65B continued from FIG. 65A shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started after FIG. 65 (b).

  FIG. 65 (c) continued from FIG. 65 (b) shows a state where the button operation waiting display 1 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button operation waiting display 1 in this example is the same as the button operation waiting display 1 shown in the embodiment 1-3, and the button pressing instruction image in a form in which three inverted triangles are overlapped with the chance button image and “Press!” Corresponds to the character string image. FIG. 65C illustrates a state in which the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. The chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a moving manner (for example, movement that repeats moving display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. There may be a case where the display is stopped outside the operation valid period.

  FIG. 65 (d) following FIG. 65 (c) shows that the operation of the chance button 136 is effective without the player pressing the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 65 (c) is displayed. The state immediately before the period ends is shown.

  FIG. 65 (e) following FIG. 65 (d) shows that the operation of the chance button 136 is effective without the player pressing the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 65 (c) is displayed. Even when the period is over, as the button response display 1 (display performed in response to pressing of the chance button 136), the same “large chance” character string image as the button response display 1 shown in the embodiment 1-3 is decorated. The state displayed in the approximate center of the display area of the symbol display device 208 is shown. In the example 1-3 in which the character string image of “large chance” is displayed by pressing the chance button 136 even in the effect of displaying the character string image of “large chance” same as the button response display 1. The symbol variation display in which the effect of this example has been executed may be configured to make it easier to confirm and display the jackpot symbol aspect than the symbol variation display in which the effect shown has been performed. There may be the opposite case. By doing so, the player's interest may be improved. On the other hand, in the case where the symbol variation display in which the effect shown in Example 1-3 is executed and the symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is executed are configured to be the same in the probability that the big hit symbol mode is determined and displayed. There may be. By doing so, the player's interest may be improved.

  FIG. 65 (f) continued from FIG. 65 (e) shows a state where the definite symbol mode is displayed with the end of the effect by the notice animation. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol mode is confirmed.

(Example 1-7)
An effect example of Example 1-7 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 shows a modification of the effect pattern 1 shown in FIG. 58 (a) and shows the effect states in time series.

  FIG. 66 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 66A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button are in the normal state.

  66 (b) following FIG. 66 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started after FIG. 65 (b).

  FIG. 66 (c) continued from FIG. 66 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 1 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button operation waiting display 1 in this example is the same as the button operation waiting display 1 shown in the embodiment 1-3, and the button pressing instruction image in a form in which three inverted triangles are overlapped with the chance button image and “Press!” Corresponds to the character string image. FIG. 66C shows a state in which the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. The chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a moving manner (for example, movement that repeats moving display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. There may be a case where the display is stopped outside the operation valid period.

  FIG. 66 (d) continued from FIG. 66 (c) shows that the operation of the chance button 136 is effective without the player pressing the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 66 (c) is displayed. The state immediately before the period ends is shown.

  66 (e) following FIG. 66 (d) shows that the operation of the chance button 136 is effective without the player pressing the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 66 (c) is displayed. Even when the period is over, as a button response display 1 (display performed in response to pressing of the chance button 136), a character string image of “Large chance?” Is displayed in the approximate center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows the state that was done. The button response display 1 of the character string image of “Large chance?” Shown in this example is a button response display that is not displayed when the player operates the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed. When the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, if the player does not operate the chance button 136, a character string image of “Great chance” is displayed. Instead, the symbol variation display in which the effect of the present example is executed may be configured so that the big hit symbol mode is more easily confirmed and vice versa. By doing so, the player's interest may be improved. On the other hand, in the case where the symbol variation display in which the effect shown in Example 1-6 is executed and the symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is executed are configured so that the jackpot symbol pattern is easily displayed in the same manner. There may be. By doing so, the player's interest may be improved.

  FIG. 66 (f) continuing from FIG. 66 (e) shows a state in which the definite symbol mode is displayed with the end of the effect by the notice animation. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol mode is confirmed.

  Thus, in the production examples shown in Examples 1-1 to 1-7, when the chance button 136 is operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the middle of the button operation waiting display 1. The button response display 1 displayed on the screen and the button response display 1 displayed even when the chance button 136 is not operated. The button response display 1 that is displayed when the chance button 136 is operated and the button response display 1 that is displayed even when the chance button 136 is not operated may perform the same display or different displays. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the middle of the button operation waiting display 1, the button response display 1 may not be displayed.

  In the production examples shown in Examples 1-1 to 1-7, the button response display 1 depends on the timing when the player presses the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed and whether or not the button is pressed. , May be configured differently. Even the effects of the same effect pattern 1 may be configured so that the jackpot reliability differs depending on the display of the button response display 1. By doing so, the interest of the player may be improved. On the other hand, it may be configured such that the jackpot reliability is the same as long as it is an effect of the same effect pattern 1 regardless of which button response display 1 is displayed. By doing so, the interest of the player may be improved.

(Example 2-1)
An effect example of Example 2-1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 shows an effect example in the effect pattern 2 shown in FIG. 58B, and shows the effect states in time series.

  FIG. 67 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 67A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  67 (b) following FIG. 67 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 67 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started.

  FIG. 67 (c) continued from FIG. 67 (b) shows a state where the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, an image (hereinafter referred to as “chance button light emission image”) that is displayed in a substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and in which the chance button 136 emits light is displayed. And a button press instruction image in which three inverted triangles overlap each other. The chance button emission image is an image that is not displayed in the production pattern 1. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, and 208 c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 67 (c), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Represents a state. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. The chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a moving manner (for example, movement that repeats moving display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. There may be a case where the display is stopped outside the operation valid period.

  The display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the emission color of the chance button 136 may be configured to be the same color, or may be configured to be different colors. May be. The display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the chance button 136 are displayed rather than the symbol variation display in which the display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the emission color of the chance button 136 are the same. The symbol variation display with different emission colors may be configured to make it easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol, and vice versa. By doing so, the interest of the player may be improved. On the other hand, the display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the chance button 136 are the same. The symbol variation display with different emission colors may have the same ease of decisive display of the big hit symbol mode. By doing so, the interest of the player may be improved.

  FIG. 67 (d) following FIG. 67 (c) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the middle of the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 67 (c). By pressing the button, the beginning of the button response display 3 (display performed in response to pressing of the chance button 136) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The display of the button response display 3 in this example corresponds to a character string image of “further chance” and an image deceiving an opportunity button 139 for moving display (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “opportunity button image”). When the button response display 3 starts to be displayed, the opportunity button image is displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  67 (e) continuing from FIG. 67 (d) shows a state in which the middle of the button response display 3 is displayed. In FIG. 67 (e), the opportunity button image displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 passes through the center of the display area, moves to the left end, and is displayed out of the frame. It will be erased by displaying on the screen. The arrow shown in FIG. 67 (e) represents the direction and locus of movement of the opportunity button image, but it may be actually displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button response display 3. .

  FIG. 67 (f) continued from FIG. 67 (e) shows a state in which the final stage of the button response display 3 is displayed. The button response display 3 shows a state in which a character string image of “sorry” is displayed in the approximate center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 67 (g) continued from FIG. 67 (f) shows a state in which the display of the button response display 3 is terminated and the final symbol pattern display is displayed. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place.

  As described above, the button response display 3 of this example is configured not to be displayed when waiting for the operation of the opportunity button 139.

  An effect example of Example 2-1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 shows an example in which the special figure variable game that executes the example of the effect shown in FIG. 67 is a big hit, and shows the effect state in time series. 68 (a) to 68 (f) show the same effects as in FIGS. 67 (a) to 67 (f).

  In FIG. 68 (g) following FIG. 68 (f), the display of the button response display 3 is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are shifted in the “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” pattern form. The temporarily stopped display state is shown.

  68 (h) subsequent to FIG. 68 (g) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is again performed and the jackpot symbol pattern confirmation display is performed. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In addition, it may be configured such that the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner after the revival effect is performed in FIG.

(Example 2-2)
An effect example of Example 2-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 shows a modification of the effect pattern 2 shown in FIG. 58 (a) and shows the effect states in time series. The effect of this example is a modification of the effect shown in Example 2-1.

  FIG. 69 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 69A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button are in the normal state.

  FIG. 69B continued from FIG. 69A shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started after FIG. 69 (b).

  FIG. 69 (c) continued from FIG. 69 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button operation waiting display 3 in this example corresponds to a button press instruction image in a form in which three inverted triangles overlap the chance button emission image displayed in the approximate center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. An image in which the chance button 136 emits light is an image that is not displayed in the effect pattern 1. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, and 208 c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 69C, the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Represents a state. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. The chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a moving manner (for example, movement that repeats moving display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. There may be a case where the display is stopped outside the operation valid period.

  The display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the emission color of the chance button 136 may be configured to be the same color, or may be configured to be different colors. May be. The display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the chance button 136 are displayed rather than the symbol variation display in which the display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the emission color of the chance button 136 are the same. The symbol variation display with different emission colors may be configured to make it easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol, and vice versa. By doing so, the interest of the player may be improved. On the other hand, the display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the chance button 136 are the same. The symbol variation display with different emission colors may have the same ease of decisive display of the big hit symbol mode. By doing so, the interest of the player may be improved.

  FIG. 69 (d) continued from FIG. 69 (c) shows a state where the button operation waiting display 3 is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 69 (e) continued from FIG. 69 (d) shows a state immediately before the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends without the player pressing the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed. Shows the state.

  In FIG. 69 (f) following FIG. 69 (e), the button operation waiting display 3 is erased when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends, and a character string image of “sorry” is displayed as the button response display 3. Shows the state. In this example, compared with Example 2-1, since it took time until the button response display 3 was displayed after the symbol variation display was started, the beginning of the button response display 3 shown in Example 2-2 and It is configured not to display the character string image of “more chance” and the opportunity button image in the middle display. In addition, when the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button response display 3 of the character string image of “sorry” may not be displayed.

  FIG. 69 (g) subsequent to FIG. 69 (f) shows a state in which the display of the button response display 3 is terminated and the definite symbol form is displayed. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place.

  An effect example of Example 2-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 shows an example in which the special figure variable game that executes the example of the effect shown in FIG. 70 (a) to 70 (f) show the same effects as in FIGS. 69 (a) to 69 (f).

  In FIG. 70 (g) following FIG. 70 (f), the display of the button response display 3 is ended, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are shifted to “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. The temporarily stopped display state is shown.

  FIG. 70 (h), which continues from FIG. 70 (g), shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is performed again, and the big hit symbol pattern is confirmed. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In addition, after the revival effect is performed in FIG. 70 (g) and after, the decorative symbol may be displayed in a variable manner.

  In the effects shown in Examples 2-1 and 2-2, the button response display 3 depends on the timing when the player presses the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, and whether or not the button is pressed. May be configured differently. Even the effects of the same effect pattern 2 may be configured so that the jackpot reliability differs depending on the display of the button response display 3. By doing so, the interest of the player may be improved. On the other hand, it may be configured such that the jackpot reliability is the same as long as it is an effect of the same effect pattern 2 regardless of which button response display 3 is displayed. By doing so, the interest of the player may be improved.

(Example 3-1)
An effect example of Example 3-1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 shows an effect example in the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 58B, and shows the effect states in time series.

  FIG. 71 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 71A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 71 (b) following FIG. 71 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started after FIG. 71 (b).

  FIG. 71 (c) continuing from FIG. 71 (b) shows a state where the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles are overlapped with the chance button emission image displayed in the approximate center portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, in which the chance button 136 emits light. This mode corresponds to the button press instruction image. The chance button emission image is an image that is not displayed in the production pattern 1. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, and 208 c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 71 (c), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Represents a state. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. The chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a moving manner (for example, movement that repeats moving display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. There may be a case where the display is stopped outside the operation valid period.

  The display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the emission color of the chance button 136 may be configured to be the same color, or may be configured to be different colors. May be. The display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the chance button 136 are displayed rather than the symbol variation display in which the display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the emission color of the chance button 136 are the same. The symbol variation display with different emission colors may be configured to make it easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol, and vice versa. By doing so, the interest of the player may be improved. On the other hand, the display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the chance button 136 are the same. The symbol variation display with different emission colors may have the same ease of decisive display of the big hit symbol mode. By doing so, the interest of the player may be improved.

  FIG. 71 (d) continued from FIG. 71 (c) shows a button response display 4 (chance button 136 when the player presses the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 71 (c). The initial stage of the display performed in response to the pressing of is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The button response display 4 in this example corresponds to a character string image of “More chances !!”. The character string image “Further chance !!” is an image that is not displayed in the button response display 3 displayed in the effect pattern 2. In this example, the player presses the chance button 136 immediately after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started.

  FIG. 71 (e) following FIG. 71 (d) shows a state where the middle panel of the button response display 4 is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button response display 4 of this example, after displaying the character string image of “More chances !!”, the opportunity button image with the opportunity button 139 deceived is framed in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The state is displayed as follows.

  FIG. 71 (f) continuing from FIG. 71 (e) shows a state in which the final stage of the button response display 4 is displayed. In FIG. 71 (f), the opportunity button image displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped at the center of the display area, and the image of “More chances !!” is deleted. Thus, a state in which a button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped is displayed is shown. The button press instruction image is an image that is not displayed in the button response display 3 displayed in the effect pattern 2. The opportunity button image is stopped and displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button press instruction image is displayed to notify that the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 is started. The stop display of the opportunity button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed when waiting for the opportunity button 139 to be pressed. In FIG. 71 (f), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined manner (or emitting light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. Note that the opportunity button image and the button press instruction image are displayed during the operation effective period of the opportunity button 139 (for example, movement that repeats moving display in the up and down direction and the left and right direction), and the operation effective period of the opportunity button 139 is displayed. The display may be stopped outside.

  The display color of the opportunity button image as the button response display 4 and the emission color of the opportunity button 139 may be configured to be the same color, or may be configured to be different colors. Good. The display color of the opportunity button image as the button and the response display 4 and the emission color of the opportunity button 139 are different from the symbol variation display in which the display color of the opportunity button image as the button response display 4 and the emission color of the opportunity button 139 are the same. The different symbol variation display may be configured to make it easier to confirm and display the jackpot symbol, and vice versa.

  FIG. 71 (g) following FIG. 71 (f) shows a button response display 5 (opportunity) when the player presses the opportunity button 139 while the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 71 (f) is displayed. As a display displayed in response to pressing of the button 139, a character string image of “sorry” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 71 (h), which continues from FIG. 71 (g), shows a state in which a definite symbol form is displayed with the end of the effect by the notice animation. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. Note that, as the button response display 5, even if a character string image of “sorry” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the big hit symbol mode may be confirmed.

(Example 3-2)
An effect example of Example 3-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 shows an example in which the special figure variation game for executing the example of the effect shown in FIG. 71 is a big hit, and shows the effect state in time series. 72 (a) to 72 (f) show the same effects as in FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (f).

  FIG. 72 (g) following FIG. 72 (f) shows a button response display 5 (opportunity) when the player presses the opportunity button 139 while the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 72 (f) is displayed. As a display performed in response to pressing of the button 139, a character string image of “big hit !?” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 72 (h), which continues from FIG. 72 (g), shows a state in which the big hit symbol pattern is confirmed and displayed together with the end of the effect by the notice animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. It should be noted that, as the button response display 5, even when the character string image of “big hit !?” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the final symbol pattern display may be displayed.

  In the symbol variation display in which the effect of the present embodiment is performed, the button response display 5 has a button rather than the symbol variation display in which the character image of “sorry” is displayed without displaying the character string image of “big hit !?”. The symbol variation display in which the character string image of “big hit !?” is displayed as the response display 5 is configured so that the big hit symbol mode is more easily confirmed. As the button response display 5, when the character string image of “unfortunate” is displayed and when the character string image of “big hit !?” is displayed, the ease of confirming display of the big hit symbol pattern is the same. It may be configured to be.

(Example 3-3)
An effect example of Example 3-3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 shows an effect example in the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 58 (b), and shows the effect states in time series. The effect of this example is a modification of the effect shown in Example 3-1.

  FIG. 73 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 73A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 73 (b) following FIG. 73 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started after FIG. 73 (b).

  FIG. 73 (c) continued from FIG. 73 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles are overlapped with the chance button emission image displayed in the approximate center portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, in which the chance button 136 emits light. This mode corresponds to the button press instruction image. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, and 208 c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 73 (c), in relation to the display of the button operation waiting display 3, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). Represents the state. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case.

  FIG. 73 (d) following FIG. 73 (c) shows a state where the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 73 (c) is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 73 (e) continued from FIG. 73 (d) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIGS. 73 (c) and 73 (d) is displayed. The button response display 4 shown in 71 (e) is displayed. In this example, since it takes more time for the player to press the chance button 136 after the button operation waiting display 3 starts to be displayed than in the case of Example 3-1, FIG. 71 (d) shows. The middle part of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 71 (e) is displayed without displaying the initial stage of the button response display 4 shown. It should be noted that all the buttons from the beginning to the end of the button response display 4 shown in the embodiment 3-1 according to the time required from the start of the button operation waiting display 3 to the display of the button response display 4 are displayed. The display may be displayed so as to be played back at double speed.

  FIG. 73 (f) following FIG. 73 (e) shows a state in which the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 71 (f) is displayed. In FIG. 73 (f), the opportunity button image displayed so as to be framed in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped at the center of the display area, and the image of “More chances !!” is deleted. Thus, a state in which a button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped is displayed is shown. The opportunity button image is stopped and displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button press instruction image is displayed, so that it is notified that the opportunity button 139 is valid for operation. The stop display of the opportunity button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed when waiting for the opportunity button 139 to be pressed. In FIG. 73 (f), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined manner (or emitting light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case.

  FIG. 73 (g) following FIG. 73 (f) shows a button response display 5 (opportunity) when the player presses the opportunity button 139 while the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 73 (f) is displayed. As a display displayed in response to pressing of the button 139, a character string image of “sorry” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 73 (h), which continues from FIG. 73 (g), shows a state in which the final symbol pattern is confirmed and displayed when the effect by the notice animation is finished. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. Note that, as the button response display 5, even if a character string image of “sorry” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the big hit symbol mode may be confirmed.

(Example 3-4)
An effect example of Example 3-4 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 shows an effect example in the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 58B, and shows the effect states in time series. The effect of this example is a modification of the effect shown in Example 3-1.

  FIG. 74 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 74A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 74 (b) following FIG. 74 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started after FIG. 74 (b).

  FIG. 74 (c) following FIG. 74 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles are overlapped with the chance button emission image displayed in the approximate center portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, in which the chance button 136 emits light. This mode corresponds to the button press instruction image. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, and 208 c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 74C, in relation to the display of the button operation waiting display 3, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). Represents the state. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case.

  FIG. 74D, which is continued from FIG. 74C, shows a state where the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 74C is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 74 (e) continued from FIG. 74 (d) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIGS. 74 (c) and 74 (d) is displayed. A state in which the early stage of the button response display 4 shown in 71 (d) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. In this example, the player presses the chance button 136 immediately before the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends.

  FIG. 74 (f) subsequent to FIG. 74 (e) shows a state in which the end of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 71 (f) is displayed and the opportunity button 139 is informed that the operation is valid. Yes. In this example, since it takes more time for the player to press the chance button 136 after the button operation waiting display 3 starts to be displayed than in the case of Example 3-1, FIG. 71 (e) shows. The end of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 71 (f) is displayed without displaying the middle of the button response display 4 shown. It should be noted that all the buttons from the beginning to the end of the button response display 4 shown in the embodiment 3-1 according to the time required from the start of the button operation waiting display 3 to the display of the button response display 4 are displayed. The display may be displayed so as to be played back at double speed. In FIG. 74 (f), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined manner (or emitting light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case.

  FIG. 74 (g) following FIG. 74 (f) shows a button response display 5 (opportunity) when the player presses the opportunity button 139 while the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 74 (f) is displayed. As a display performed in response to pressing of the button 139, a character string image of “big hit !?” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 74 (h), which continues from FIG. 74 (g), shows a state in which the big hit symbol pattern is confirmed and displayed at the end of the effect by the notice animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. It should be noted that, as the button response display 5, even when the character string image of “big hit !?” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the final symbol pattern display may be displayed.

(Example 3-5)
An effect example of Example 3-5 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 shows a modification of the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 58 (b) and shows the effect states in time series. The effect of this example is a modification of the effect shown in Example 3-1.

  FIG. 75A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 75A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 75 (b) following FIG. 75 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started after FIG. 71 (b).

  FIG. 75 (c) continuing from FIG. 75 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles are overlapped with the chance button emission image displayed in the approximate center portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, in which the chance button 136 emits light. This mode corresponds to the button press instruction image. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, and 208 c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 75 (c), in relation to the display of the button operation waiting display 3, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). Represents the state. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case.

  FIG. 75 (d) following FIG. 75 (c) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 75 (c) is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 75 (e) following FIG. 75 (d) shows the operation of the chance button 136 without the player pressing the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 75 (f) is displayed. The state immediately before the validity period ends is shown.

  FIG. 75 (f) following FIG. 75 (e) shows the end of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 71 (f) by deleting the button operation waiting display 3 when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends. Is displayed. In this example, since the chance button 136 was not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the early stage of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 71 (d) shown in Example 3-1 and FIG. 71 (e). The end of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 71 (f) is displayed without displaying the middle of the button response display 4 shown. By displaying the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 71 (f), it is notified that the opportunity button 139 is in the operation valid period. In FIG. 75 (f), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined manner (or emitting light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. When the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, all the button response displays 5 shown in FIGS. 71 (d) to (f) may not be displayed.

  FIG. 75 (g) following FIG. 75 (f) shows a button response display 5 (opportunity) when the player presses the opportunity button 139 while the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 75 (f) is displayed. As a display performed in response to pressing of the button 139, a character string image of “big hit !?” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 75 (h), which continues from FIG. 75 (g), shows a state in which the decisive display of the big hit symbol pattern is performed at the end of the effect by the notice animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. It should be noted that, as the button response display 5, even when the character string image of “big hit !?” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the final symbol pattern display may be displayed.

(Example 3-6)
An effect example of Example 3-6 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 shows an effect example of the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 58B, and shows the effect states in time series.

  FIG. 76 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 76A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 76 (b) following FIG. 76 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started after FIG. 71 (b).

  FIG. 76 (c) continuing from FIG. 76 (b) shows a state where the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles are overlapped with the chance button emission image displayed in the approximate center portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, in which the chance button 136 emits light. This mode corresponds to the button press instruction image. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, and 208 c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 76 (c), in relation to the display of the button operation waiting display 3, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). Represents the state. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case.

  In FIG. 76 (d) continued from FIG. 76 (c), when the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 76 (c) is displayed, the button response display 4 ( As an early stage of display performed in response to pressing of the chance button 136, a character string image of “More chances !!” is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 76 (e) continued from FIG. 76 (d) shows a state in which the final stage of the button response display 4 is displayed, and shows a state in which it is notified that the opportunity button 139 is in an effective operation period. In FIG. 76 (e), the “further chance!” Image displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is deleted, and a button press instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped is displayed. An image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and showing the state where the opportunity button 139 protrudes (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “opportunity button protruding image”) is displayed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. it's shown. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an upper image from the middle part of the opportunity button protruding image, and the sub display device 1030 displays an image lower than the middle part of the opportunity button protruding image, so that the entire opportunity button protruding image is displayed. it's shown. In FIG. 76 (e), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation effective period of the opportunity button 139, and the normal state. It represents a more prominent state. The player operates the opportunity button 139 by causing the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 to emit light in a predetermined manner (or to emit light in a manner different from the normal state) and protrude from the normal state. You may be able to know that. Note that the symbol variation display in which the opportunity button 139 protrudes during the display of the button response display 4 is more likely to stop and display the big hit symbol form than the symbol variation display in which the opportunity button 139 does not protrude during the display of the button response display 4. May be configured, and vice versa. By doing so, the player's interest may be improved. On the other hand, the symbol change display in which the opportunity button 139 does not protrude during the display of the button response display 4 and the symbol change display in which the opportunity button 139 protrudes during the display of the button response display 4 facilitates the stop display of the big hit symbol form. May be configured to be the same. By doing so, the player's interest may be improved.

  FIG. 76 (f), which continues from FIG. 76 (e), shows a button response display 5 (opportunity) when the player presses the opportunity button 139 while the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 76 (f) is displayed. As a display displayed in response to pressing of the button 139, a character string image of “Super Extreme !!!!” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, as the button response display 5, rather than the symbol variation display in which the character string image of “Sorry! The symbol variation display in which the character string image “Gekiatsu !!!” is displayed is configured such that the jackpot symbol pattern is more easily stopped and displayed. By doing so, the interest of the player may be improved.

  FIG. 76 (g) continued from FIG. 76 (f) shows a state in which the big hit symbol pattern is stopped and displayed together with the end of the effect by the notice animation. “Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that it is a big hit as a result of the special figure 1 variable game. Note that, as the button response display 5, even if a character string image of “Super Extreme !!!!” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the off symbol pattern may be stopped and displayed. Good.

(Example 3-7)
An effect example of Example 3-7 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 shows a modification of the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 58 (b), and shows the effect states in time series.

  FIG. 77 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 77A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 77 (b) continuing from FIG. 77 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started after FIG. 71 (b).

  FIG. 77 (c) continued from FIG. 77 (b) shows a state where the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles are overlapped with the chance button emission image displayed in the approximate center portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, in which the chance button 136 emits light. This mode corresponds to the button press instruction image. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, and 208 c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 77 (c), in relation to the display of the button operation waiting display 3, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). Represents the state. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case.

  FIG. 77 (d) following FIG. 77 (c) shows a button response display 4 () when the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 77 (c) is displayed. As an early stage of display performed in response to pressing of the chance button 136, a character string image of “More chances !!” is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 77 (e) following FIG. 77 (d) shows a state where the middle of the button response display 4 is displayed. In FIG. 77 (e), the image of “More chances !!” displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is deleted, and a button press instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped is displayed. Both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 display the opportunity button protruding image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and showing the state where the opportunity button 139 protrudes. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an upper image from the middle part of the opportunity button protruding image, and the sub display device 1030 displays an image lower than the middle part of the opportunity button protruding image, so that the entire opportunity button protruding image is displayed. it's shown. In FIG. 77 (e), the opportunity button 139 is protruded from the normal state, but the opportunity button lamp 141 is in the normal state.

  FIG. 77 (f) continuing from FIG. 77 (e) shows a state in which the final stage of the button response display 4 is displayed. In FIG. 77 (f), an opportunity button image that looks like the opportunity button 139 that has returned to the normal state is displayed at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the opportunity button 139 has returned from the protruding state to the normal state. .

  In FIG. 77 (g) following FIG. 77 (f), the button response display 4 is erased without starting the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139, and a character string image of “sorry” is displayed as the button response display 5. Shows the state.

  FIG. 77 (h) following FIG. 77 (g) shows a state in which the off symbol pattern is stopped and displayed with the end of the effect by the notice animation. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. As the button response display 5, even when a character string image of “sorry” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the big hit symbol mode may be stopped.

  In the production examples shown in Examples 3-1 to 3-7, the button response display 4 depends on the timing when the player presses the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, and whether or not the button is pressed. The button response display 5 may be configured differently depending on the timing when the player presses the opportunity button 139 when the button response display 4 is displayed and whether or not the button is pressed. There is a case. Even with the same effect pattern 3, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the display of the button response display 4 or the button response display 5. By doing so, the interest of the player may be improved. On the other hand, it may be configured such that the jackpot reliability is the same as long as it is an effect of the same effect pattern 3 regardless of which button response display 4 or button response display 5 is displayed. By doing so, the interest of the player may be improved.

(Example 4-1)
An effect example of Example 4-1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 shows an effect example of the effect pattern 4 shown in FIG. 58 (c), and shows the effect states in time series.

  FIG. 78 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 78A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  78 (b) following FIG. 78 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 78 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started.

  FIG. 78 (c) following FIG. 78 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 4 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed, it is notified that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is in effect. In the button operation waiting display 4 of this example, an image (hereinafter referred to as “chance button special”) in which a chance button 136 that emits light in a special manner displayed in the approximate center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. And an image in which three inverted triangles displayed in a special color overlap each other (hereinafter may be referred to as a “button press special instruction image”). . The chance button special light emitting image and the button pressing special instruction image are images that are not displayed in the button operation waiting displays 1 to 3, and these images are displayed, so that the button response display is always displayed after the button operation waiting display 4. 4 is displayed. When the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, and 208 c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, before the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 78 (c), in relation to the display of the button operation waiting display 4, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). Represents the state. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. The emission color of the chance button 136 may be the same as or different from the chance button special emission image displayed on the button operation waiting display 4.

  FIG. 78 (d) continued from FIG. 78 (c) shows that the button response display 4 is displayed when the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 4 shown in FIG. 78 (c) is displayed. As an early stage (display performed in response to pressing of the chance button 136), a character string image of “More chance !!” is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 78 (e) following FIG. 78 (d), the middle button of the button response display 4 is displayed such that the opportunity button image with the opportunity button 139 turned on is framed in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows the state that was done.

  FIG. 78 (f) continued from FIG. 78 (e) shows a state in which the final stage of the button response display 4 is displayed. In FIG. 78 (f), the opportunity button image displayed so as to be framed in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped at the center of the display area, and the image of “More chances !!” is deleted. Thus, a state in which a button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped is displayed is shown. The opportunity button image is stopped and displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button press instruction image is displayed, so that it is notified that the opportunity button 139 is valid for operation. In FIG. 78 (f), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined manner (or emitting light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. It should be noted that as the button response display 4, an image showing the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a special manner (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “opportunity button special light emission image”) and the button press shown in FIG. 78 (c). A special instruction image may be displayed.

FIG. 78 (g) continued from FIG. 78 (f) shows a button response display 5 (opportunity) when the player presses the opportunity button 139 while the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 78 (f) is displayed. As a display displayed in response to pressing of the button 139, a character string image of “sorry” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.
In FIG. 78 (h) following FIG. 78 (g), the display of the button response display 4 is finished, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c have the “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” in the shifted symbol form. The temporarily stopped display state is shown.

  FIG. 78 (u) following FIG. 78 (h) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is performed again and the jackpot symbol mode is stopped. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In addition, after the revival effect is performed in FIG. 78 (h) and after, the decorative symbol may be displayed in a variable manner.

(Example 4-2)
An effect example of Example 4-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 shows an effect example of the effect pattern 4 shown in FIG. 58 (c), and shows the effect states in time series. The effect of this example is a modification of the effect shown in Example 4-1.

  FIG. 79 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 79A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 79 (b) following FIG. 79 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 79 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started.

  FIG. 79 (c) following FIG. 79 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 4 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed, it is notified that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is in effect. The button operation waiting display 4 in this example includes a chance button special light-emitting image and a special light-emitting image in which a chance button 136 that emits light in a special manner displayed in the approximate center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. A button pressing special instruction image in which three inverted triangles displayed in color overlap each other corresponds. When the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, and 208 c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, before the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 78 (c), in relation to the display of the button operation waiting display 3, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). Represents the state. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 may be the same as or different from the light emission mode of the chance button special light image displayed on the button operation waiting display 4.

  FIG. 79D, which is subsequent to FIG. 79C, shows a button response display 4 () when the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 4 shown in FIG. 79C is displayed. As a display performed in response to pressing of the chance button 136, a character string image of “More chances !!” is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, as compared with Example 4-1, the time from when the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed until the player presses the chance button 136 is longer.

  In FIG. 79 (e) following FIG. 79 (d), after the character string image of “More chances !!” in the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 79 (d) is displayed, a new button response display 4 is displayed. An opportunity button image in which an opportunity button 139 to be moved is displayed is displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 79 (f) following FIG. 79 (e) shows a state in which the button response display 4 is continuously displayed. In FIG. 79 (f), the opportunity button image displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped at the center of the display area, and the image of “More chances !!” is deleted. Thus, a state in which a button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped is displayed is shown. The button press instruction image is an image that is not displayed in the button response display 3 displayed in the effect pattern 2. The opportunity button image is stopped and displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button pressing instruction image is displayed to notify that the opportunity button 139 is in an effective operation period. The stop display of the opportunity button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed when waiting for the opportunity button 139 to be pressed. In FIG. 79 (f), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined manner (or emitting light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. It should be noted that as the button response display 4, an image showing the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a special manner (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “opportunity button special light emission image”) and the button press shown in FIG. 78 (c). A special instruction image may be displayed.

  FIG. 79 (g) continued from FIG. 79 (f) shows that the player presses the opportunity button 139 when the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 79 (f) is displayed, so that the button response display 5 (opportunity As a display performed in response to pressing of the button 139, a character string image of “big hit !?” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, compared with Example 4-1, since it takes a long time for the player to press the opportunity button 139 after the button response display 4 is displayed, the button response is displayed after the symbol variation display is started. The time until the display 5 is displayed is longer.

  FIG. 79 (h) following FIG. 79 (g) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is performed again and the jackpot symbol pattern stop display is performed. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

  In this example, since the time from displaying the button response display 5 to ending the symbol variation display is shorter than in Example 4-1, an effect of temporarily stopping the off symbol shown in FIG. 78 (h) is performed. Is configured to not. When the player presses the chance button 136 immediately after the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed and immediately before the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is finished, the beginning or middle display of the button response display 4 is displayed. It is also possible to perform an effect of temporarily stopping the off symbol shown in FIG.

  In the production examples shown in Examples 4-1 and 4-2, the button response display 4 depends on the timing when the player presses the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed, and whether or not the button is pressed. When configured differently, the button response display 5 is configured differently depending on the timing when the player presses the opportunity button 139 when the button response display 4 is displayed and whether or not the button is pressed. There is a case. Even with the same effect pattern 4, depending on the display of the button response display 4 or the button response display 5, the jackpot reliability may be different. By doing so, the interest of the player may be improved. On the other hand, when the same effect pattern 4 is displayed regardless of which button response display 4 or button response display 5 is displayed, the jackpot reliability may be configured to be the same. By doing so, the interest of the player may be improved.

(Example 5-1)
An effect example of Example 5-1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 shows an effect example of the effect pattern 5 shown in FIG. 58 (d) and shows the effect states in time series.

  FIG. 80 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 80A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 80 (b) following FIG. 80 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started after FIG.

  FIG. 80 (c), which continues from FIG. 80 (b), shows the chance button emission displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button operation waiting display 3 shown in Example 3-1 or the like as the beginning of the button operation waiting display 2. A state in which a button press instruction image in a form in which the image and three inverted triangles are overlapped is displayed. In this example, since it is not the operation effective period of the chance button 136, the button press instruction image in which the inverted triangle is overlapped with the chance button emission image is a false display that does not indicate that the chance button 136 is the operation effective period. Yes, the chance button 136 remains in the normal state.

  FIG. 80 (d) subsequent to FIG. 80 (c) shows the middle screen of the button operation waiting display 2, the button pressing instruction image is erased in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance button emission image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The state is shown in which the opportunity button image is displayed so as to be framed in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in parallel with moving and displaying at the left end of the area and erasing the frame out. Note that the left arrow in the figure represents the direction and locus of the movement of the chance button emission image, and the arrow on the right side of the figure represents the movement direction and locus of the chance button emission image. However, it may be actually displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button wait display 2.

  FIG. 80 (e), which continues from FIG. 80 (d), shows the end of the button operation waiting display 2, and the button press in the form in which the opportunity button image and three inverted triangles overlap in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which the instruction image is displayed is shown. The opportunity button image is displayed at a position where a part of the opportunity button image and the movable body 1002 overlap. In FIG. 80 (e), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined manner (or emitting light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. It should be noted that as the button operation waiting display 2, an image showing the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a special manner (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “opportunity button special emission image”) and the button shown in FIG. 78 (c). A special press instruction image may be displayed.

  In FIG. 80 (f) following FIG. 80 (e), the button press instruction image in which the opportunity button image and three inverted triangles are overlapped and displayed from the position displayed in FIG. 80 (e). Shows the state. The opportunity button image is moved and displayed at a more conspicuous position to further encourage the operation of the opportunity button.

  FIG. 80 (g) following FIG. 80 (f) shows a button response display 2 () when the player presses the opportunity button 139 while the button operation waiting display 2 shown in FIG. 80 (f) is displayed. As a display performed in response to the press of the opportunity button 139, a character string image of “sorry” is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 80 (g) following FIG. 80 (f) shows a state in which the off symbol pattern is stopped and displayed with the end of the effect by the notice animation. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. Note that, as the button response display 2, even when a character string image of “sorry” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the big hit symbol pattern may be stopped.

(Example 5-2)
An effect example of Example 5-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 shows an effect example of the effect pattern 5 shown in FIG. 58 (d), and shows the effect states in time series.

  FIG. 81 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 81A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 81 (b) following FIG. 81 (a) shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started after FIG.

  FIG. 81 (c) continuing from FIG. 81 (b) shows a chance button emission displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button operation waiting display 3 shown in Example 3-1 or the like as the beginning of the button operation waiting display 2. A state in which a button press instruction image in a form in which the image and three inverted triangles are overlapped is displayed. In this example, since it is not the operation effective period of the chance button 136, the button press instruction image in which the inverted triangle is overlapped with the chance button emission image is a false display that does not indicate that the chance button 136 is the operation effective period. Yes, the chance button 136 remains in the normal state.

  FIG. 81 (d) continued from FIG. 81 (c), as a middle panel of the button operation waiting display 2, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button press instruction image is erased and the chance button emission image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The state is shown in which the opportunity button image is displayed so as to be framed in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in parallel with moving and displaying at the left end of the area and erasing the frame out. Note that the left arrow in the figure represents the direction and locus of the movement of the chance button emission image, and the arrow on the right side of the figure represents the movement direction and locus of the chance button emission image. However, it may be actually displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button operation waiting display 2.

  FIG. 81 (e), which continues from FIG. 81 (d), shows an end of the button operation waiting display 2, and the button press in a mode in which the opportunity button image and three inverted triangles overlap in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which the instruction image is displayed is shown. The opportunity button image is displayed at a position where a part of the opportunity button image and the movable body 1002 overlap. In FIG. 81 (e), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined manner (or emitting light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. It should be noted that as the button operation waiting display 2, there is a case where an opportunity button special light emission image in which the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a special manner is deceived and a button press special instruction image shown in FIG. 78 (c) may be displayed. Good.

  In FIG. 81 (f) following FIG. 81 (e), the button press instruction image in which the opportunity button image and three inverted triangles are overlapped and displayed upward from the position displayed in FIG. 81 (e). Shows the state. The opportunity button image is moved and displayed at a more conspicuous position to further encourage the operation of the opportunity button.

  FIG. 81 (g) continuing from FIG. 81 (f) shows a button response display 2 () when the player presses the opportunity button 139 when the button operation waiting display 2 shown in FIG. 81 (f) is displayed. A character string image of “big hit?” Is displayed at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as an early stage of display) performed in response to pressing of the opportunity button 139.

  FIG. 81 (h) following FIG. 81 (g) shows “big hit ?!” at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the middle of the button response display 2 (display performed in response to pressing of the opportunity button 139). "Is displayed.

  FIG. 81 (i) following FIG. 81 (h) shows “big hit ?!” at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the final stage of the button response display 2 (display performed in response to pressing of the opportunity button 139). ! "Is displayed. It should be noted that the character images of “big hit ?!” and “big hit ?!” displayed in the middle and end of the button response display 2 are displayed when the opportunity button 139 is pressed for a predetermined time or longer, or for a predetermined time. It may be configured to be displayed when the button is pressed a predetermined number of times.

  FIG. 81 (j) following FIG. 81 (i) shows a state in which the jackpot symbol pattern is stopped and displayed with the end of the effect by the notice animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Even when a character string image such as “big hit?”, “Big hit ?!”, or “big hit ?!” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button response display 2, the off symbol mode is stopped. It may be displayed.

  In this example, the button response display 2 displays “big hit?”, “Big hit ?!”, and “big hit ?!” in this order to increase the player's expectation of jackpot in stages. There are cases where it is possible. Note that the jackpot reliability may be displayed as a number of “!”. For example, when the button response display 2 displays “big hit?” And “big hit ?!” in this order (“big hit ?!” is not displayed), “big hit?”, “Big hit ?!”, “ "Big hits !!" and "Big hits !!!!" may be displayed in this order.

(Example 5-3)
An effect example of Example 5-3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 shows a modification of the effect pattern 5 shown in FIG. 58 (d), and shows the effect states in time series. The effect of this example is a modification of the effect shown in Example 5-2.

  FIG. 82 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 82A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 82 (b) continuing from FIG. 82 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started after FIG.

  FIG. 82 (c) following FIG. 82 (b) shows a chance button emission displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button operation waiting display 3 shown in Example 3-1 or the like, as an early stage of the button operation waiting display 2. FIG. A state in which a button press instruction image in a form in which the image and three inverted triangles are overlapped is displayed. In this example, since it is not the operation effective period of the chance button 136, the button press instruction image in which the inverted triangle is overlapped with the chance button emission image is a false display that does not indicate that the chance button 136 is the operation effective period. Yes, the chance button 136 remains in the normal state.

  FIG. 82 (d) continued from FIG. 82 (c) shows that the button pressing instruction image is erased and the chance button emission image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the decorative symbol display device 208 as the middle panel of the button operation waiting display 2. The state is shown in which the opportunity button image is displayed so as to be framed in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in parallel with moving and displaying at the left end of the area and erasing the frame out. Note that the left arrow in the figure represents the direction and locus of the movement of the chance button emission image, and the arrow on the right side of the figure represents the movement direction and locus of the chance button emission image. However, it may be actually displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button operation waiting display 2.

  FIG. 82 (e), which continues from FIG. 82 (d), shows an end of the button operation waiting display 2, and a button press in a mode in which the opportunity button image and three inverted triangles overlap in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which the instruction image is displayed is shown. The opportunity button image is displayed at a position where a part of the opportunity button image and the movable body 1002 overlap. In FIG. 82 (e), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined manner (or emitting light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. It should be noted that as the button operation waiting display 2, there is a case where an opportunity button special light emission image in which the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a special manner is deceived and a button press special instruction image shown in FIG. 78 (c) may be displayed. Good.

  FIG. 82 (f) following FIG. 82 (e) shows a button press instruction image in which the opportunity button image and three inverted triangles are overlapped and displayed upward from the position displayed in FIG. 82 (e). Shows the state. The opportunity button image is moved and displayed at a more conspicuous position to further encourage the operation of the opportunity button.

  FIG. 82 (g) continuing from FIG. 82 (f) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 2 shown in FIG. 82 (f) is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 82 (h) following FIG. 82 (g) shows a state immediately before the button operation waiting display 2 shown in FIG. 82 (f) is continuously displayed and the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 ends. Yes.

  FIG. 82 (i) continued from FIG. 82 (h) shows Example 5-1 as button response display 2 (display performed in response to pressing of the opportunity button 139) as the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 ends. The character string image of “big hit ?!” at the end of the button response display 2 shown is displayed at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, since it took more time from the start of the symbol variation display to the display of the button response display 2 than in the case of Example 5-1, the early stage of the button response display 2 shown in Example 5-2 It is configured not to display the midfield.

  FIG. 81 (j) continued from FIG. 82 (i) shows a state in which the jackpot symbol pattern is stopped and displayed together with the end of the effect by the notice animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. It should be noted that even when a character string image of “big hit?”, “Big hit ?!”, or “big hit ?!” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button response display 2, A stop display may be displayed.

(Example 5-4)
An effect example of Example 5-4 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 shows a modification of the effect pattern 5 shown in FIG. 58 (d), and shows the effect states in time series. The effect of this example is a modification of the effect shown in Example 5-2.

  FIG. 83 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 83A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 83 (b) continuing from FIG. 83 (a) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The effect (reach effect) by the notice animation is started after FIG.

  FIG. 83 (c) continued from FIG. 83 (b) is a chance button emission displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button operation waiting display 3 shown in Example 3-1 or the like as an initial stage of the button operation waiting display 2. A state in which a button press instruction image in a form in which the image and three inverted triangles are overlapped is displayed. In this example, since it is not the operation effective period of the chance button 136, the button press instruction image in which the inverted triangle is overlapped with the chance button emission image is a false display that does not indicate that the chance button 136 is the operation effective period. Yes, the chance button 136 remains in the normal state.

  FIG. 83 (d) continuing from FIG. 83 (c) is a middle panel of the button operation waiting display 2, the button pressing instruction image is erased in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance button emission image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The state is shown in which the opportunity button image is displayed so as to be framed in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in parallel with moving and displaying at the left end of the area and erasing the frame out. Note that the left arrow in the figure represents the direction and locus of the movement of the chance button emission image, and the arrow on the right side of the figure represents the movement direction and locus of the chance button emission image. However, it may be actually displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button operation waiting display 2.

  FIG. 83 (e), which continues from FIG. 83 (d), shows an end of the button operation waiting display 2, and the button press in a mode in which the opportunity button image and three inverted triangles overlap in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which the instruction image is displayed is shown. The opportunity button image is displayed at a position where a part of the opportunity button image and the movable body 1002 overlap. In FIG. 83 (e), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined manner (or emitting light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. It should be noted that as the button operation waiting display 2, there is a case where an opportunity button special light emission image in which the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a special manner is deceived and a button press special instruction image shown in FIG. 78 (c) may be displayed. Good.

  In FIG. 83 (f) following FIG. 83 (e), the button press instruction image in which the opportunity button image and three inverted triangles are overlapped and displayed from the position displayed in FIG. 83 (e). Shows the state. The opportunity button image is moved and displayed at a more conspicuous position to further encourage the operation of the opportunity button.

  FIG. 83 (g) continuing from FIG. 83 (f) shows a state immediately before the button operation waiting display 2 shown in FIG. 83 (f) is continuously displayed and the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 ends. Yes.

  FIG. 83 (h) following FIG. 83 (g) shows a button response display 2 (display performed in response to pressing of the opportunity button 139) at the end of the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 in Example 5-1. The character string image of “big hit ?!” at the beginning of the button response display 2 shown is displayed at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 83 (i) following FIG. 83 (h) shows a button response display 2 (display performed in response to pressing of the opportunity button 139) at the end of the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 in Example 5-1. The character string image of “big hit ?!” at the end of the button response display 2 shown is displayed at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, since it took more time from the start of the symbol variation display to the display of the button response display 2 than in the case of Example 5-1, the middle of the button response display 2 shown in Example 5-2 is displayed. Thinning out so as not to display. In addition, according to the time required from the start of the symbol variation display until the button response display 2 is displayed, all the displays from the beginning to the end of the button response display 2 shown in the embodiment 5-1 are doubled. There may be a case where it is displayed to be reproduced.

  FIG. 83 (j) following FIG. 83 (i) shows a state in which the jackpot symbol pattern is stopped and displayed together with the end of the effect by the notice animation. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Even when a character string image such as “big hit?”, “Big hit ?!”, or “big hit ?!” is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button response display 2, the off symbol mode is stopped. It may be displayed.

  In the production examples shown in Examples 5-1 to 5-4, the button response display 2 depends on the timing when the player presses the opportunity button 139 when the button operation waiting display 2 is displayed and whether or not the button is pressed. , May be configured differently. Even the effects of the same effect pattern 2 may be configured so that the jackpot reliability differs depending on the display of the button response display 2. By doing so, the interest of the player may be improved. On the other hand, it may be configured such that the jackpot reliability is the same as long as it is an effect of the same effect pattern 2 regardless of which button response display 2 is displayed. By doing so, the interest of the player may be improved.

(Example 6-1)
An effect example of Example 6-1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 shows a modification of the effect pattern 2 shown in FIG. 58 (b) and shows the effect states in time series. This example is an effect example in which the button operation waiting display 3 and the button response display 3 shown in FIG. In FIG. 84 and subsequent figures, the movable body 1002 is positioned so as not to overlap with the main liquid crystal unit 1001 when viewed from the player.

  FIG. 84 (a) shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is off. ing. A white circular hold icon b1 and a white circular hold icon b2 are displayed in the effect display area 208d below the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. FIG. 84A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 84 (b), which continues from FIG. 84 (a), shows a state in which one hold in FIG. 1 has been consumed and symbol variation display has started. When the hold icon b1 becomes the change icon a1 and the movement animation between the hold / change icon that moves to the left and the hold icon b2 that moves the hold icon b2 to the left are displayed, the decorative symbols change display. Be started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  FIG. 84 (c) continuing from FIG. 84 (b) shows a default white circular hold icon b3 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 during execution of the symbol variation display. An increased display state is shown. The “decoration 2” temporarily stops in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the “decoration 3” temporarily stops in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 84 (d) continued from FIG. 84 (c) shows a state where the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 84 (c) is being executed.

  FIG. 84 (e) following FIG. 84 (d) shows that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 while the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 84 (d) is being executed. Based on this, the state where the hold icon b4 is displayed in an increased manner is shown. In this example, the button operation waiting display 3 corresponds to a hold icon of an image in which the chance button 136 is put on (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “chance button hold icon”). In FIG. 84 (e), since it is not the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the chance button 136 remains in the normal state.

  FIG. 84 (f) following FIG. 84 (e) shows a state in which the off symbol pattern is stopped and the variation icon a 1 is deleted. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In FIG. 84 (f), the chance button hold icon is continuously displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, but the chance button 136 remains in the normal state because it is not the operation valid period of the chance button 136.

  In FIG. 84 (g) following FIG. 84 (f), one hold of special figure 1 is digested and the next symbol variation display is started, and then a chance button hold icon is displayed as button operation waiting display 3. It shows the state. The hold icon b2 becomes the change icon a2 and the move animation between the hold and change icons that move to the left and the hold icon b3 and b4 move to the left are displayed. The operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. FIG. 84 (g) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is in a state different from the normal state, and the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). . The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case.

  84 (h) following FIG. 84 (g), while the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 84 (g) is being continuously displayed, the player can play during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The hold icon b4 displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the button response display 3 by pressing the chance button 136. The button response display 3 in this example corresponds to a hold icon (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “chance button emission hold icon”) of an image in which the chance button 136 emitting light in a mode different from the normal state is displayed. ing.

  In FIG. 84 (i) following FIG. 84 (h), “decoration 2” temporarily stops in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 3” temporarily stops in the right symbol display area 208c. Is shown. FIG. 84 (i) shows a state in which the chance button emission hold icon b4 is displayed as the button response display 3 shown in FIG. 84 (h).

  FIG. 84 (j) following FIG. 84 (i) shows a state in which the off symbol pattern is stopped and the variation icon a1 is deleted. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In FIG. 84 (j), the chance button light emission suspension icon b4 is continuously displayed as the button response display 3.

  In FIG. 84 (k) continuing from FIG. 84 (j), one hold of the special figure 1 is digested and the next symbol variation display is started, and then the chance button light emission hold icon b4 is displayed as the button response display 3. It shows the state. The hold icon b3 becomes the change icon a3 and the move animation between the hold and change icons that move to the left and the hold icon move animation that the hold icon b4 moves to the left are displayed, and the decorative symbol change display and the chance button The operation effective period 136 is started. FIG. 84 (k) shows a state where the chance button 136 is in a state different from the normal state, and the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). . The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. Thus, in this example, the button response display 3 is a display including a display performed when waiting for the chance button 136 to be pressed.

  84 (l) subsequent to FIG. 84 (k), while the button response display 3 shown in FIG. 84 (k) is being continuously displayed, the player is in a valid operation period of the chance button 136. By pressing the chance button 136, the chance button emission hold icon b4 displayed as the button response display 3 is changed to the black circular hold icon b4 of the pre-reading notice mode. In this example, the symbol variation display that starts after the hold corresponding to the black circular hold icon is digested is larger than the symbol change display that starts after the hold corresponding to the white circular hold icon is consumed. The pattern mode is configured to be easily stopped and displayed. Note that the chance button emission hold icon b4 displayed as the button response display 3 may be changed to a white circle hold icon, a white diamond hold icon, or a hold icon other than these.

  84 (m) following FIG. 84 (l) is a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Is shown.

  FIG. 84 (n) following FIG. 84 (m) shows a state in which the off symbol pattern is stopped and the variation icon a1 is deleted. "Decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place.

  In FIG. 84 (o) following FIG. 84 (n), one hold of special figure 1 is digested, the next symbol variation display is started, the decorative symbol variation display is started, and a black circular hold icon b4 is displayed. It shows a state in which the moving animation between the hold / variation icons moving to the left becomes the black circular variation icon a4.

  FIG. 84 (p) following FIG. 84 (o) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After (p) in FIG. 84, an effect (reach effect) by a predetermined notice animation is started.

  FIG. 84 (q) continued from FIG. 84 (p) shows a state where the temporary stop display of the off symbol pattern is displayed. "Decoration 3-Decoration 4-Decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 84 (r) continuing from FIG. 84 (q) shows a state in which the off symbol pattern is stopped. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 4—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place.

  In this example, the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the hold icon displayed as the button response display 3 when the player operates the chance button 136, and then the player presses the chunk button. By operating 136, it is changed to a black circular hold icon that is a pre-reading notice mode. As described above, the button operation waiting display 3 and the button response display 3 of the present example are configured to include a display that is performed when the chance button 136 is waited for because the hold icon corresponds to the hold icon.

  In this example, when displaying the hold icon as the button operation waiting display 3, the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is started after displaying the hold icon moving animation in which the hold icon moves to the left. Although configured, there may be other cases. For example, the chance button 136 is determined based on the hold order when the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is increased and the time required to start the symbol variation display that starts after the hold of the hold icon is digested. The operation effective period start timing and the operation effective period of the chance button 136 may be determined.

  In this example, when the hold icon is increased, the hold icon is displayed as the button operation waiting display 3. However, when the hold icon is reduced, the specific hold icon is waited for the button operation. It may be configured to change to a hold icon as the display 3, or a specific hold icon as a button operation waiting display 3 at a timing other than the hold increase display and the hold decrease display. May be configured to change to

  In this example, one of the plurality of held icons is displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, but one or more of the plurality of held icons are simultaneously displayed as the button operation waiting display 3. There may be cases.

  In this example, one hold icon of a plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation response display 3, but one or more hold icons of the plurality of hold icons are displayed simultaneously as the button response display 3. There may be.

  In this example, the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 and the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 3 are composed of the same hold icon, but the hold icon and button response corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 are configured. The hold icon corresponding to the display 3 may be composed of different hold icons. In this case, the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the default white circle hold icon at the timing when the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 3 is displayed, or a pre-reading notice other than the white circle is displayed. It may be changed to the hold icon having the form.

(Example 6-2)
An effect example of Example 6-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 shows a modification of the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 58 (b) and shows the effect states in time series. This example is an effect example in which the button operation waiting display 3, the button response display 4, and the button response display 5 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 85A shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is off. ing. A white circular hold icon b1 and a white circular hold icon b2 are displayed in the effect display area 208d below the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. FIG. 85A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 85 (b), which continues from FIG. 85 (a), shows a state in which one hold in FIG. 1 has been consumed and symbol variation display has started. When the hold icon b1 becomes the change icon a1 and the movement animation between the hold / change icon that moves to the left and the hold icon b2 that moves the hold icon b2 to the left are displayed, the decorative symbols change display. Be started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  FIG. 85 (c), which continues from FIG. 85 (b), shows a default white circular hold icon b3 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 during execution of the symbol variation display. An increased display state is shown. The “decoration 2” temporarily stops in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the “decoration 3” temporarily stops in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 85 (d) continued from FIG. 85 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 85 (c) is being executed.

  FIG. 85 (e) following FIG. 85 (d) shows that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 while the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 85 (d) is being executed. Based on this, the state where the hold icon b4 is displayed in an increased manner is shown. In this example, the button for waiting for button operation 3 corresponds to a chance button hold icon of an image in which the chance button 136 is displayed. In FIG. 85 (e), since it is not the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the chance button 136 remains in the normal state.

  FIG. 85 (f) following FIG. 85 (e) shows a state in which the off symbol pattern is stopped and the variation icon a 1 is deleted. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In FIG. 85 (f), the chance button hold icon is continuously displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, but the chance button 136 remains in the normal state because it is not the operation valid period of the chance button 136.

  In FIG. 85 (g) following FIG. 85 (f), one hold of special figure 1 is digested and the next symbol variation display is started. Then, a chance button hold icon is displayed as button operation waiting display 3. It shows the state. The hold icon b2 becomes the change icon a2 and the move animation between the hold and change icons that move to the left and the hold icon b3 and b4 move to the left are displayed. The operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. FIG. 85 (g) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is in a state different from the normal state, and the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). . The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. In this example, the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is started after displaying the movement animation of the hold icon in which the hold icon moves to the left.

  In FIG. 85 (h) following FIG. 85 (g), the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 85 (g) is being continuously displayed. The hold icon b4 displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the button response display 4 by pressing the chance button 136. The button response display 4 of this example corresponds to a hold icon (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as an “opportunity button hold icon”) of an image in which the opportunity button 139 is tricked.

  FIG. 85 (i) following FIG. 85 (h) shows a state in which “decoration 2” temporarily stops in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and “decoration 3” temporarily stops in the right symbol display area 208c. Is shown. FIG. 85 (i) shows a state where the opportunity button hold icon b4 is displayed as the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 85 (h).

  FIG. 85 (j) following FIG. 85 (i) shows a state in which the off symbol pattern is stopped and the variation icon a1 is deleted. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In FIG. 85 (j), the opportunity button hold icon b4 is continuously displayed as the button response display 4.

  In FIG. 85 (k) continuing from FIG. 85 (j), one hold of special figure 1 is digested and the next symbol variation display is started. Then, an opportunity button hold icon b4 is displayed as button response display 4. It shows the state. The hold icon b3 is changed to the change icon a3 and the movement animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left and the hold icon b4 is moved to the left are displayed. The decorative icon change display and the opportunity button are displayed. The operation valid period of 139 is started. FIG. 85 (k) shows a state where the opportunity button 139 is in a state different from the normal state, and the opportunity button lamp 141 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). . The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined manner (or emitting light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. Thus, in this example, the button response display 4 is a display including a display that is performed when the opportunity button 139 is waiting to be pressed.

  FIG. 85 (l), which continues from FIG. 85 (k), continues to display the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 85 (k), and the player plays during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. By pressing the opportunity button 139, the opportunity button hold icon b4 displayed as the button response display 4 is changed to the white diamond-shaped hold icon b4 as the button response display 5. In this example, the symbol variation display that starts when the hold corresponding to the white diamond hold icon is digested is larger than the symbol variation display that starts after the hold corresponding to the white circle hold icon is digested. The pattern mode is configured to be easily stopped and displayed. The symbol variation display that starts when the hold corresponding to the white diamond-shaped hold icon is digested is stopped more than the symbol change display that starts when the hold corresponding to the black circular hold icon is consumed. It is configured to be easily displayed. In addition, as the button response display 5, a white circular hold icon, a black circular hold icon, or a hold icon other than these may be displayed.

  FIG. 85 (m) following FIG. 85 (l) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Is shown.

  FIG. 85 (n) following FIG. 85 (m) shows a state in which the off symbol pattern is stopped and the variation icon a1 is deleted. "Decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place.

  In FIG. 85 (o) following FIG. 85 (n), one hold of the special figure 1 is digested, the next symbol variation display is started, the decorative symbol variation display is started, and the black circular hold icon b4 is displayed. It shows a state in which the moving animation between the hold / variation icons moving to the left becomes the black circular variation icon a4.

  FIG. 85 (p) following FIG. 85 (o) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. An effect (reach effect) by a predetermined notice animation is started after FIG. 85 (p).

  FIG. 85 (q) subsequent to FIG. 85 (p) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of the off-symbol pattern is displayed. "Decoration 3-Decoration 4-Decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 85 (r), which continues from FIG. 85 (q), shows a state in which the off symbol pattern is stopped. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 4—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place.

  In this example, the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the hold icon displayed as the button response display 4 when the player operates the chance button 136, and then the player presses the opportunity button By operating 139, the button response display 5 is changed to a black circular hold icon which is a pre-reading notice mode displayed as the button response display 5. Thus, in this example, the hold icon corresponds to the button operation waiting display 3, the button response display 4, and the button response display 5. The button operation waiting display 3 includes a display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136, and the button response display 4 includes a display performed when waiting for the operation of the opportunity button 139.

  In this example, when displaying the hold icon as the button operation waiting display 3, the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is started after displaying the hold icon moving animation in which the hold icon moves to the left. Although configured, there may be other cases. For example, the operation of the chance button 136 is determined based on the hold order when the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 is increased and the time required to start the symbol variation display that starts after the hold of the hold icon is digested. The start timing of the effective period and the operation effective period of the chance button 136 may be determined.

  In this example, after the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 displays a moving animation of the hold icon that moves to the left, the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 is started. There may be other cases. For example, when the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is increased, the hold order, the time required to start the symbol variation display that is started after the hold of the hold icon is consumed, and the player selects the chance button The start timing of the operation effective period of the opportunity button 139 and the operation effective period of the opportunity button 139 may be determined from the timing of operating the 136.

  In this example, when the hold icon is increased, the hold icon is displayed as the button operation waiting display 3. However, when the hold icon is reduced, the specific hold icon is waited for the button operation. It may be configured to change to a hold icon as the display 3, or a specific hold icon as a button operation waiting display 3 at a timing other than the hold increase display and the hold decrease display. May be configured to change to

  In this example, one hold icon of the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, but two or more hold icons of the plurality of hold icons are simultaneously displayed as the button operation wait display 3. There may be cases.

  In this example, one hold icon of the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation response display 4, but two or more hold icons of the plurality of hold icons are displayed simultaneously as the button response display 4. There may be.

  In this example, one hold icon of the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation response display 5, but two or more hold icons of the plurality of hold icons are displayed simultaneously as the button response display 5. There may be.

  In this example, the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 and the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 4 are composed of the same hold icon, but the hold icon and button response corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 are configured. The hold icon corresponding to the display 4 may be composed of different hold icons. In this case, the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the default white circle hold icon at the timing when the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 4 is displayed, or a pre-reading notice other than the white circle is displayed. It may be changed to the hold icon having the form.

  In this example, the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 4 and the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 5 are configured with the same hold icon, but the hold icon and the button response display 5 corresponding to the button response display 4 are configured. The hold icon corresponding to may be composed of different hold icons.

(Example 6-3)
An effect example of Example 6-3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 shows a modification of the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 58 (b) and shows the effect states in time series. This example is an effect example in which the button operation waiting display 3, the button response display 4, and the button response display 5 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 86 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is off. ing. A white circular hold icon b1 and a white circular hold icon b2 are displayed in the effect display area 208d below the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. FIG. 86A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

  FIG. 86 (b) continuing from FIG. 86 (a) shows a state in which one hold in FIG. 1 has been consumed and symbol variation display has been started. When the hold icon b1 becomes the change icon a1 and the movement animation between the hold / change icon that moves to the left and the hold icon b2 that moves the hold icon b2 to the left are displayed, the decorative symbols change display. Be started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  FIG. 86 (c) following FIG. 86 (b) shows a default white circular hold icon b3 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 during execution of the symbol variation display. An increased display state is shown. The “decoration 2” temporarily stops in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the “decoration 3” temporarily stops in the right symbol display area 208c.

  86 (d) following FIG. 86 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 86 (c) is being executed.

  FIG. 86 (e) following FIG. 86 (d) shows that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230 while the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 86 (d) is being executed. Based on this, the state where the hold icon b4 is displayed in an increased manner is shown. In this example, the button for waiting for button operation 3 corresponds to a chance button hold icon of an image in which the chance button 136 is displayed. In FIG. 86 (e), since it is not the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the chance button 136 remains in the normal state.

  FIG. 86 (f) following FIG. 86 (e) shows a state in which the off symbol pattern is stopped and the variation icon a 1 is deleted. "Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In FIG. 86 (f), the chance button hold icon is continuously displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, but the chance button 136 remains in the normal state because it is not the operation valid period of the chance button 136.

  In FIG. 86 (g) following FIG. 86 (f), one hold of special figure 1 is digested and the next symbol variation display is started. Then, a chance button hold icon is displayed as button operation waiting display 3. It shows the state. The hold icon b2 becomes the change icon a2 and the move animation between the hold and change icons that move to the left and the hold icon b3 and b4 move to the left are displayed. The operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. FIG. 86G shows a state in which the chance button 136 is in a state different from the normal state, and the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). . The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated when the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. In this example, the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is started after displaying the movement animation of the hold icon in which the hold icon moves to the left.

  86 (h) following FIG. 86 (g), while the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 86 (g) is being continuously displayed, the player plays during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The hold icon b4 displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the button response display 4 by pressing the chance button 136. The button response display 4 in this example corresponds to an opportunity button hold icon of an image in which the opportunity button 139 is deceived.

  86 (i) following FIG. 86 (h) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Is shown. FIG. 86 (i) shows a state in which the opportunity button hold icon b4 is displayed as the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 86 (h).

  FIG. 86 (j) following FIG. 86 (i) shows a state in which the off symbol pattern is stopped and the variation icon a1 is deleted. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In FIG. 86 (j), the opportunity button hold icon b4 is continuously displayed as the button response display 4.

  In FIG. 86 (k) continuing from FIG. 86 (j), one hold of special figure 1 is digested and the next symbol variation display is started, and then an opportunity button hold icon b4 is displayed as button response display 4. It shows the state. The hold icon b3 is changed to the change icon a3 and the movement animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left and the hold icon b4 is moved to the left are displayed. The decorative icon change display and the opportunity button are displayed. The operation valid period of 139 is started. FIG. 86 (k) shows a state where the opportunity button 139 is in a state different from the normal state and the opportunity button lamp 141 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). . The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined manner (or emitting light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. Thus, in this example, the button response display 4 is a display including a display that is performed when the opportunity button 139 is waiting to be pressed.

  FIG. 86 (l) following FIG. 86 (k) continues to display the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 86 (k), and the player plays during the operation effective period of the opportunity button 139. By depressing the opportunity button 139, an animation representing the state in which the opportunity button hold icon b4 is changing in the area where the opportunity button hold icon b4 is displayed (hereinafter referred to as “pending icon changing animation”). In this case, the state is displayed.

  In FIG. 86 (m) following FIG. 86 (l), “decoration 3” temporarily stops in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2” temporarily stops in the right symbol display area 208c. At the end of the display of the on-hold icon changing animation, an on-hold icon (hereinafter referred to as “opportunity button protrusion hold”) is displayed with the opportunity button 139 in a state of protruding the opportunity button hold icon b4 displayed as the button response display 4 being displayed. It may be referred to as an “icon”.) The changed state is shown in b5. In FIG. 86 (m), the opportunity button 139 protrudes in relation to displaying the button response display 5. However, since the opportunity button 139 is not in the valid operation period, the opportunity button 139 is not emitting light. Or it remains a normal light emission state. In this example, the symbol variation display that starts after the hold corresponding to the opportunity button protruding hold icon is digested is larger than the symbol variation display that starts after the hold corresponding to the white circular hold icon is digested. The symbol mode is configured to be easily stopped and displayed, and the hold corresponding to the opportunity button protruding hold icon is digested and started rather than the symbol variation display starting after the hold corresponding to the black circular hold icon is digested. The symbol variation display is configured so that the jackpot symbol pattern is more likely to stop display, and the hold corresponding to the opportunity button protruding hold icon than the symbol variation display that starts after the hold corresponding to the white diamond hold icon is digested The symbol variation display which is started after the digestion is digested is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is easily displayed.

  FIG. 86 (n) following FIG. 86 (m) shows a state in which the off symbol pattern is confirmed and the variation icon a1 is deleted. "Decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place.

  In FIG. 86 (o) following FIG. 86 (n), one hold in FIG. 1 is digested and the next symbol variation display is started, and then the opportunity button protruding hold icon b4 is an extended opportunity button. The movement icon between the hold / change icons that move to the left is displayed as a change icon (hereinafter, also referred to as “opportunity button protrusion change icon”) a4 in the image of 139, and the decoration pattern changes. The display and the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 are started. FIG. 86 (o) shows a state where the projecting opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state).

  FIG. 86 (p) following FIG. 86 (o) shows that the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 86 (o) is being continuously displayed. By pressing the opportunity button 139 in a protruding state, the “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” in the big hit symbol form is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. If the player does not press down the opportunity button 139 in a state in which the player protrudes during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are hit big at the end of the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. The symbol “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed.

  86 (r) subsequent to FIG. 86 (q) shows a state in which the big hit symbol mode is stopped. "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

  In this example, the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the hold icon displayed as the button response display 4 when the player operates the chance button 136, and then the player presses the opportunity button By operating 139, it is changed to the opportunity button protruding hold icon that is the pre-reading notice mode displayed as the button response display 5, and then the player operates the opportunity button 139 in a state protruding from the normal state, A temporary stop display of the decorative design is performed. Thus, in this example, the hold icon corresponds to the button operation waiting display 3, the button response display 4, and the button response display 5. The button operation waiting display 3 includes a display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136, and the button response display 4 and the button response display 5 are configured including a display performed when waiting for the operation of the opportunity button 139. The

  In this example, when displaying the hold icon as the button operation waiting display 3, the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is started after displaying the hold icon moving animation in which the hold icon moves to the left. Although configured, there may be other cases. For example, the operation of the chance button 136 is determined based on the hold order when the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 is increased and the time required to start the symbol variation display that starts after the hold of the hold icon is digested. The start timing of the effective period and the operation effective period of the chance button 136 may be determined.

  In this example, after the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 displays a moving animation of the hold icon that moves to the left, the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 is started. There may be other cases. For example, when the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is increased, the hold order, the time required to start the symbol variation display that is started after the hold of the hold icon is consumed, and the player selects the chance button The start timing of the operation effective period of the opportunity button 139 and the operation effective period of the opportunity button 139 may be determined from the timing of operating the 136.

  In this example, when the hold icon is increased, the hold icon is displayed as the button operation waiting display 3. However, when the hold icon is reduced, the specific hold icon is waited for the button operation. It may be configured to change to a hold icon as the display 3, or a specific hold icon as a button operation waiting display 3 at a timing other than the hold increase display and the hold decrease display. May be configured to change to

  In this example, one hold icon of the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, but two or more hold icons of the plurality of hold icons are simultaneously displayed as the button operation wait display 3. There may be cases.

  In this example, one hold icon of the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation response display 4, but two or more hold icons of the plurality of hold icons are displayed simultaneously as the button response display 4. There may be.

  In this example, one hold icon of the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation response display 5, but two or more hold icons of the plurality of hold icons are displayed simultaneously as the button response display 5. There may be.

  In this example, the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 and the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 4 are composed of the same hold icon, but the hold icon and button response corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 are configured. The hold icon corresponding to the display 4 may be composed of different hold icons.

  In this example, the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 4 and the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 5 are configured with the same hold icon, but the hold icon and the button response display 5 corresponding to the button response display 4 are configured. The hold icon corresponding to may be composed of different hold icons.

  As described above, in Examples 6-1 to 6-3, there is shown an effect example in which the hold icon is associated with the operation waiting display and the operation response display displayed in the effect pattern 2 and the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. However, the hold icon may correspond to the operation waiting display and the operation response display displayed in the production pattern 1, the production pattern 4, and the production pattern 5 shown in FIG.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 86 again.

(I1)
A symbol display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214) capable of executing a symbol variation display;
Image display means capable of displaying an image (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a sub display device 209);
A first operating means (for example, a chance button 136) provided at a position operable by the player;
A second operating means (for example, an opportunity button 139) provided at a position operable by the player;
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a third type of operation waiting display (for example, button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 58B),
The third type of operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for the operation of the first operation means (for example, FIGS. 67 (c) to (d), FIGS. 71 (c) to (d)). Etc.),
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a third type of operation response display (for example, button response display 3 shown in FIG. 58B),
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a fourth type of operation response display (for example, button response display 4 shown in FIG. 58B),
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a fifth type of operation response display (for example, button response display 5 shown in FIG. 58 (c)),
The third type of operation response display is a display performed in response to the operation of the first operation means (for example, see FIGS. 58B and 67C to 67F). ),
The third type of operation response display does not include a part of a display (for example, a button press instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped) that is displayed when waiting for an operation of the second operation means. A configured display (see, for example, FIGS. 58 (b) and 67 (c)-(f)),
The fourth type of operation response display is a display performed in response to the operation of the first operation means (see, for example, FIGS. 58 (c) and 71 (c) to (f)). ),
The fourth type of operation response display is a display configured to include the part of the display performed when waiting for the operation of the second operation means (for example, FIG. 58 (c), FIG. 71). (See (f)),
The fifth type of operation response display is a display performed in response to the operation of the second operation means (see, for example, FIG. 58 (d) and FIG. 71 (g)),
The symbol variation display in which the fifth type of operation response display is performed rather than the symbol variation display in which the third type of operation response display is performed without performing the fifth type of operation response display. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the fifth type of operation response display that is displayed by causing the player to operate the first operation unit and the second operation unit step by step is performed. The display is not the fifth type of operation response display, but rather the symbol variation display in which the third type of operation response display is performed by causing the player to operate only the first operation means. Since the big hit symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed, the player's expectation for the big hit can be increased step by step, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(I2)
The game stand according to (I1) above,
The third type operation response display and the fourth type operation in response to the operation of the first operation means during the display of the third operation waiting display (for example, the chance button emission image). Which type of response display is displayed is determined before the third operation waiting display is displayed on the image display means,
The third operation waiting display is an operation waiting display of the third type of operation waiting display (see, for example, FIGS. 67 (c) and 71 (c)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(I3)
The game stand according to (I1) or (I2) above,
The image display means can display a fourth type of operation waiting display (for example, button operation waiting display 4 shown in FIG. 58C),
The fourth type of operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for an operation of the first operation means (see, for example, FIGS. 58 (c) and 78 (c) to (d)),
The fourth type operation response display is configured to be displayed on the image display means when the first operation means is operated while the fourth type operation waiting display is displayed. (For example, see FIG. 58 (c) and FIGS. 78 (d) to (f)),
The symbol variation display in which the fourth type operation waiting display is performed rather than the symbol variation display in which the third type operation waiting display is performed without performing the fourth type operation waiting display. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(I4)
The gaming machine according to (I3) above,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a first type of operation waiting display (for example, operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 58 (a)),
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a first type of operation response display (for example, the operation response display 1 shown in FIG. 58 (a)),
The first type of operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for an operation of the first operation means (for example, see FIGS. 58 (a) and 59 (d)),
The first type of operation response display is a display that does not include a display performed when waiting for an operation of the second operation means (for example, FIG. 58 (a), FIG. 59 (e)). reference),
The first type operation response display is displayed on the image display means when the first operation means is operated while the first type operation waiting display is displayed. (For example, see FIG. 58 (a), FIG. 59 (d) to (e)),
A first operation response display (for example, a character string image of “chance !!”) is configured to be displayed only when the first operation means is operated during display of the first operation waiting display. (For example, see FIGS. 60C to 60D),
A fourth operation response display (for example, an opportunity button image and a button press instruction image) is configured to be displayed when the first operation means is operated during display of the fourth operation waiting display. Cage (see, for example, FIGS. 71 (c) to (f)),
The fourth operation response display is configured to be displayed even when the first operation means is not operated during the display of the fourth operation waiting display (for example, FIG. 74 (c) to FIG. 74). (See (f)),
The first operation waiting display is an operation waiting display of the first type operation waiting display,
The first operation response display is an operation response display of the first type of operation response display,
The fourth operation waiting display is an operation waiting display of the fourth type operation waiting display,
The fourth operation response display is an operation response display of the fourth type of operation response display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(I5)
A gaming machine as set forth in (I4) above,
The symbol variation display in which the fifth type operation response display is performed rather than the symbol variation display in which the first type operation response display is performed without performing the fifth type operation response display. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(I6)
The game stand according to (I4) or (I5) above,
The symbol variation display in which the first type of operation response display is performed rather than the symbol variation display in which the third type of operation response display is performed without performing the first type of operation response display. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(I7)
The game stand according to any one of (I1) to (I6) above,
The fourth type operation response display when the time from when the third type operation waiting display is displayed until the first operation means is operated is the first time is the first type Display (for example, button response display 4 shown in FIGS. 71 (d) to (f)) (for example, see FIGS. 71 (c) to (f)),
The fourth type operation response display when the time from when the third type operation waiting display is displayed until the first operation means is operated is the second time is the second type Display (for example, button response display 4 shown in FIGS. 74 (e) to (f)) (for example, see FIGS. 74 (c) to (f)),
The second time is longer than the first time,
The initial display of the first display and the initial display of the second display are the same (for example, see FIG. 71 (d) and FIG. 74 (e)),
The end display of the first display and the end display of the second display are the same (for example, see FIG. 71 (f) and FIG. 74 (f)),
The display of at least a part of the middle of the first display (for example, the display of the middle of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 71 (e)) is not displayed in the second display (for example, FIG. 74 (e) to FIG. 74). (See (f)),
A game stand characterized by that.
(I8)
The game stand according to (I7) above,
When the first operation means is operated between the time when the third type operation waiting display is displayed and before the expiration of the operation valid period defined before the start of the third type operation waiting display. The display according to the operation of the first operation means is performed (see, for example, FIGS. 71 (d) to (f)),
The first time is a time from when the third type operation waiting display is started until the first operation means is operated at the shortest timing (for example, FIG. 71 (c)). ) To (d))
The second time is a time when the first operating means is operated at a timing immediately before the end of the operation valid period after the third type operation waiting display is started ( For example, see FIGS. 74 (c) to 74 (d)),
A game stand characterized by that.
(I9)
The game stand according to any one of (I1) to (I8) above,
The image display means can display a second type of operation waiting display (for example, button operation waiting display 2),
The second type operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for an operation of the second operation means (for example, see FIG. 58 (d)),
The second type operation response display is displayed on the image display means when the second operation means is operated while the second type operation waiting display is being displayed. (For example, see FIG. 58 (d)),
The symbol variation display in which the fifth type operation response display is performed rather than the symbol variation display in which the second type operation response display is performed without performing the fifth type operation response display. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(I10)
The game stand according to any one of (I1) to (I9) above,
The display of the character displayed in the fourth type of operation response display (for example, a button press instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped as shown in FIG. 78 (f)) is waiting for the fourth type of operation. It is configured to be displayed on the display (see, for example, FIG. 78 (c)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(I11)
The game stand according to any one of (I1) to (I10) above,
The display of the character displayed on the fourth type of operation response display (for example, a button press instruction image in which three inverted triangles shown in FIG. 71 (f) are overlapped) is awaiting the operation of the third type. It is configured to be displayed on the display (see, for example, FIG. 71 (c)),
A game stand characterized by that.
(I12)
The game stand according to any one of (I1) to (I11) above,
The second operating means is configured to be determined to be operated when pressed by a player.
A game stand characterized by that.
(I13)
The game stand according to any one of (I1) to (I12) above,
The first operating means is configured to be determined to be operated when rotated by a player.
A game stand characterized by that.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the same configuration and control system as the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment. The same components as those of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

Example 1
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87 shows a presentation example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 87 (a) shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 29, and FIG. 1002 is extracted and shown.

  FIG. 87 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is off. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 87 (a), the reserved number in FIG. 1 is 2, for example, and the reserved number in FIG. 2 is 0. In FIG. 87, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted.

  FIG. 87 (b) following FIG. 87 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that the reservation of the first special figure 1 is digested. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is executed.

  FIG. 87 (c) continuing from FIG. 87 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 87 (d) continued from FIG. 87 (c) shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208 c. The normal reach effect is started after FIG. 87 (d).

  FIG. 87 (e) continuing from FIG. 87 (d) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has moved from the initial position to the lowest position in the operating range. The movable body 1010 is stopped at a position on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, the movable body 1010 and a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 overlap, and a part of the image cannot be visually recognized by the player. During the execution of the symbol variation display, the decorative symbol or the preview image (for example, an image of the sun, cloud, balloon, hold icon, variation icon, etc.) does not overlap with the movable body 1010, and the decorative symbol or the preview image is displayed. In the case where at least a portion overlaps the movable body 1010, the big hit symbol form may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display. It should be noted that the portion of the prefetched preview image that can be seen before and after the movement of the movable body 1010 may be different from the portion of the prefetched preview image that is visible before and after the movement of the movable body 1010. It may be configured such that the big hit symbol pattern is easily displayed in a fixed symbol variation display.

  FIG. 87 (f) continued from FIG. 87 (e) shows a state where the movable body 1010 has moved upward and returned to the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 1010 is the uppermost position in the movement range of the movable body 1010.

  FIG. 87 (g) following FIG. 87 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b during the normal reach effect. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fluctuation variation display is displayed in such a manner that “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol aspect, swings to the left and right. In the present embodiment, the wipe effect display described later is not executed during the normal reach effect.

  FIG. 87 (h) continuing from FIG. 87 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is out of place.

  FIG. 87 (i) following FIG. 87 (h) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that the reservation of the first special figure 1 is digested. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is executed.

  FIG. 87 (j) following FIG. 87 (i) shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 87 (k) continuing from FIG. 87 (j) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. The super reach production is started after FIG. 87 (k). In this example, the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed is configured such that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily determined and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  FIG. 87 (l) following FIG. 87 (k) shows a state in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 has changed with the start of the super reach effect. The background image changes from a sky background image including a sun image, a cloud image, and a balloon image to a mountain road background image. In this embodiment, the sky background image is displayed during execution of a normal effect or normal reach effect, and the background image of a mountain road is displayed during execution of a super reach effect.

  FIG. 87 (m) continuing from FIG. 87 (l) shows a state in which the background image displayed on the sub display device 1030 has changed with the start of the super reach effect. The background image changes from a sea background image including a yacht image and a cloud image to a partial image of a mountain road background displayed on the decorative design display device 208. The sub display device 1030 displays an image of a portion that the sub display device 1030 hides on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 87 (n) following FIG. 87 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 provided with the sub display device 1030 has moved to the upper right from the initial position shown in FIG. 87 (m). The sub display device 1030 displays an image of a portion that the sub display device 1030 hides on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this embodiment, the movable body 1002 is a plane substantially parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter, referred to as a display screen front flat surface) by a drive system (not shown). ) Can be moved two-dimensionally. The drive system of the movable body 1002 can take various configurations. For example, one end of two connecting rods connected so as to be rotatable is fixed to a predetermined position of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 outside the decorative symbol display device 208 so as to be rotatable in a two-dimensional manner in the front plane of the display screen. A movable link mechanism is configured. The movable body 1002 is fixed to the other end of the two connecting rods connected so as to be rotatable in the plane. A motor for driving the connecting rod is arranged at one end of the two connecting rods and the connecting node. Thereby, the movable body 1002 can be moved two-dimensionally in the front plane of the display screen. A motor for rotating the effect movable body may be disposed at the other end of the two connecting rods, and the movable body 1002 may be configured to be rotatable within the front plane of the display screen.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. In some periods during the execution of the super reach effect, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in a reduced display mode.

  FIG. 87 (o) following FIG. 87 (n) shows a state in which a character string image of “sorry” is displayed as a display suggesting a shift at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (center of the effect display area 208d). Is shown. The sub display device 1030 is located at a position overlapping with a part of the character image of “n” displayed on the decorative design display device 208, and the lower half of the character of “n” is displayed on the sub display device 1030. It is displayed.

  FIG. 87 (p) following FIG. 87 (o) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fluctuation variation display is displayed in a display mode in which “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” which is an out-of-order symbol pattern is shaken up and down.

  FIG. 87 (q) continued from FIG. 87 (p) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started after “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” indicating the shift is displayed during the super reach effect. . The wipe effect display is an effect of erasing the image so as to wipe off the edge of the display screen of the display device. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes two display devices, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a sub display device 1030. In this embodiment, the wipe effect display is first started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and then the sub display device 208 is displayed. Starts on display device 1030. Hereinafter, the wipe effect display executed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is referred to as a first wipe effect display, the wipe display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is referred to as a first wipe display, and the sub display device 1030 The executed wipe effect display is referred to as a second wipe effect display, and the wipe display displayed on the sub display device 1030 is referred to as a second wipe display.

  As shown in FIG. 87 (q), the wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. To do. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display. The wipe displays w1a and w1b are displayed on the foreground on the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the display of the decorative symbols and the background image displayed before the start of the first wipe effect display. The patterns of the wipe displays w1a and w1b are the same, and in FIG. 87, the patterns are indicated by hatching that goes up to the right.

  The movable body 1002 is moving toward the initial position, and the sub display device 1030 is located at a position that overlaps a part of the character string image of “sorry” displayed on the decorative design display device 208. On the device 1030, the lower half portion of the word “mind” is displayed.

  FIG. 87 (r) continuing from FIG. 87 (q) shows a state where the wipe displays w1a and w1b are spread so as to gradually cover the display screen. The wipe display w1a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to gradually spread from the lower right corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen. .

  87 (s) following FIG. 87 (r) shows a state in which the second wipe effect display is started on the sub display device 1030 while the sub display device 1030 (movable body 1002) is moving. The wipe display w2a starts to appear from the upper right corner of the display screen of the sub display 1030, and the wipe display w2b starts to appear from the lower left corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030. The appearance of the wipe display w2a and the appearance of the wipe display w2b are combined to start the appearance display of the second wipe display, and the appearance of the second wipe display is the start of the second wipe effect display. The wipe displays w2a and w2b are displayed on the foreground in the sub display device 1030, and are displayed so as to wipe off the display of the background image and the like displayed before the start of the second wipe effect display. The patterns of the wipe displays w2a and w2b are the same. In FIG. 87, the patterns are shown as white dots on a black background.

  The pattern of the first wipe display is different from the pattern of the second wipe display. The first wipe display appears from the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the screen, and the second wipe display appears from the upper right corner and the lower left corner of the screen.

  In the present embodiment, the second wipe effect display is started during the execution of the effect operation in which the sub display device 1030 moves to the initial position, but the second wipe effect display after the sub display device 1030 stops at the initial position. The display may be started, the sub display device 1030 may start to move to the initial position after the second wipe effect display ends, or the timing at which the sub display device 1030 starts to move to the initial position and The start timing of the second wipe effect display may be the same.

  FIG. 87 (t) following FIG. 87 (s) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is stopped at the initial position. The first wipe display and the second wipe display are appearing. The wipe display w1a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to gradually spread from the lower right corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen. . The wipe display w2a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper right corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w2b is displayed so as to gradually spread from the lower left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen. .

  FIG. 87 (u) following FIG. 87 (t) shows a state where the appearance display of the second wipe display is completed. The end portion of the wipe display w2a and the end portion of the wipe display w2b are in contact with each other, and the entire display screen of the sub display device 1030 is covered with the wipe displays w2a and w2b. When the entire display screen of the sub display device 1030 is covered with the wipe displays w2a and w2b, the wipe displays w2a and w2b are in a standby display state in which the display is not moved. When the appearance display of the second wipe display is completed, the standby display of the second wipe display is started. The first wipe display is an appearance display, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed from the lower right corner of the display screen. It is displayed to gradually spread in the center.

  FIG. 87 (v) continuing from FIG. 87 (u) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. The end of the wipe display w1a is in contact with the end of the wipe display w1b, and the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w1a and w1b. When the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w1a and w1b, the wipe displays w1a and w1b are in a standby display state in which they are not moved and displayed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  FIG. 87 (w) continued from FIG. 87 (v) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. The wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The second wipe display is a standby display.

  FIG. 87 (x) continued from FIG. 87 (w) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the second wipe display is started. The wipe display w2a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper right corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w2b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower left corner of the display screen.

  FIG. 87 (y) continuing from FIG. 87 (x) shows a state during withdrawal display of the first wipe display and the second wipe display. Between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b, a part of the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped are displayed.

  FIG. 87 (z) continuing from FIG. 87 (y) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the second wipe display is completed. The wipe display w2a shrinks toward the upper right corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030, the wipe display w2a disappears from the display screen, and the wipe display w2b shrinks toward the lower left corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030. When the wipe display w2b is erased from the screen, withdrawal of the second wipe display is completed. When the withdrawal of the second wipe display is completed, the second wipe effect display ends. The first wipe effect display is being withdrawn.

  As shown in FIG. 87 (r), the background image of the mountain road is displayed on the sub display device 1030 before the start of the second wipe effect display, but the second wipe effect display is shown in FIG. 87 (z). After the end, the sub display device 1030 displays the sea background image. Thus, the background image displayed on the sub display device 1030 changes before and after the second wipe effect display.

  In this embodiment, the appearance start position and the withdrawal completion position of the second wipe display are the same. That is, the wipe display w2a starts to appear from the upper right corner of the display screen and completes withdrawal from the upper right corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w2b starts to appear from the lower left corner of the display screen and appears at the lower left corner of the display screen. Complete withdrawal. Note that the appearance start position and the withdrawal completion position of the second wipe display may be different. For example, the wipe display w2a starts to appear from the upper right corner of the display screen and completes withdrawal from the lower right corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w2b starts to appear from the lower left corner of the display screen and is displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen. You may complete the withdrawal.

  FIG. 87 (a) following FIG. 87 (z) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. The wipe display w1a is shrunk toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is shrunk toward the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, When the wipe display w1b is erased from the display screen, the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends. An empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is an out-of-order symbol pattern, shakes in a display manner that swings left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Fluctuation display is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 87 (p), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol in a reduced display mode before the start of the first wipe effect display, but as shown in FIG. After the display of the wipe effect is finished, the decorative symbols are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a normal display mode. Thus, the display mode of the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes before and after the first wipe effect display. In the present embodiment, the size of the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes before and after the first wipe effect display.

  As shown in FIG. 87 (p), the background image of the mountain road is displayed on the decorative design display device 208 before the start of the first wipe effect display, but as shown in FIG. 87 (a), the first wipe effect is displayed. After the display is completed, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this way, the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes before and after the first wipe effect display.

  In the present embodiment, the appearance start position and the withdrawal completion position of the first wipe display are the same. That is, the wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen and completes withdrawal from the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen, and is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen. Complete withdrawal. Note that the appearance start position and the withdrawal completion position of the first wipe display may be different. For example, the wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen and completes withdrawal from the lower left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen and appears at the upper right corner of the display screen. You may complete the withdrawal.

  FIG. 87 (b) continued from FIG. 87 (a) is a display of fluctuation variation in a display mode in which “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” fluctuates left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208. Indicates a state where is displayed.

  FIG. 87 (c) following FIG. 87 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game has been completed. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is wrong. ing.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes an effect display means capable of executing an effect display. The effect display means is a display means composed of a plurality of image display means, and one image display means of the plurality of image display means is a decorative symbol display device 208, of the plurality of image display means. One image display means is a sub display device 1030. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can perform the first wipe effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 after the display indicating the shift in the super reach effect is performed. After the display that suggests is performed, it is possible to perform the second wipe effect display on the sub display device 1030. A scene change is performed in which the background image or the like is changed by the first wipe effect display or the second wipe effect display. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, there are cases where the player's mood can be renewed by making the scene change of the effect gorgeous.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 87 (s) to 87 (t), a part of the second wipe effect display is performed in the sub display device 1030 performing the moving operation. The entire second wipe effect display may be performed while the sub display device 1030 is moving. Note that the decorative symbol display device 208 can perform a moving operation, and at least a part of the first wipe effect display may be performed in the decorative symbol display device 208 performing the moving operation.

(Example 2)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 shows a presentation example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each figure of FIG. 88, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 29, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

  FIG. 88 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is off. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 88 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 3, for example, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays three hold icons indicating the number of holds in FIG. The display modes of the three hold icons are all black circles.

  88 (b) following FIG. 88 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that the reservation of the first special figure 1 has been digested. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is executed, the leftmost hold icon corresponding to the digested hold is deleted, and the hold icon moving animation is executed in which the two hold icons move to the left. Is done.

  88 (c) following FIG. 88 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach effect is started after FIG. 88 (c). In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily determined and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  FIG. 88 (d) following FIG. 88 (c) shows a state in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 has changed with the start of the super reach effect. The background image changes from a sky background image including a sun image, a cloud image, and a balloon image to a mountain road background image. In this embodiment, the sky background image is displayed during execution of a normal effect or normal reach effect, and the background image of a mountain road is displayed during execution of a super reach effect. All the hold icons are erased as the background image changes. The timing at which the hold icon is deleted may be simultaneously with the change of the background image, may be before the change, or may be after the change.

  FIG. 88 (e) following FIG. 88 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. In some periods during the execution of the super reach effect, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in a reduced display mode.

  In this example, it is assumed that one game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230 after the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed in the upper right part of the display screen. Thus, the special figure 1 start information is acquired, and the main control unit 300 executes the special figure prefetching process in which the newly acquired start information is prefetched and the stop symbol is preliminarily determined before the success / failure determination process. After executing the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 transmits a prefetching result information command including a prior determination result to the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 determines by lottery whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice based on the pre-determination result. In this example, it is determined that the prefetch notice is not executed.

  FIG. 88 (f) continued from FIG. 88 (e) shows a state in which a display suggesting a deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A character string image of “sorry” is displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 as a display suggesting a shift, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display region 208b, and the left middle right symbol display region 208a. In -208c, the fluctuation variation display is displayed in a display mode in which “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is a design pattern of the dislocation, swings up and down.

  FIG. 88 (g) following FIG. 88 (f) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started after the display indicating the shift is displayed during the super reach effect. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display. The wipe displays w1a and w1b are displayed on the foreground on the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the display of the decorative symbols and the background image displayed before the start of the first wipe effect display. The patterns of the wipe displays w1a and w1b are the same, and in FIG. 88, the patterns are shown by hatching that goes up to the right.

  FIG. 88 (h) continuing from FIG. 88 (g) shows a state where the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. The end of the wipe display w1a is in contact with the end of the wipe display w1b, and the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w1a and w1b. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  FIG. 88 (i) following FIG. 88 (h) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. The wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative symbols and the hold icon are gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b.

  In the withdrawal display of the first wipe display, at least a part of the hold icon corresponding to the hold with a young hold order is displayed, and the hold icon corresponding to the later hold is displayed with the hold order that has been increased last. The player completes the wipe display withdrawal display while expecting whether the display mode of the hold icon newly displayed corresponding to the hold increased during the reach effect is the pre-reading notice mode. Sometimes you can wait.

  FIG. 88 (j) following FIG. 88 (i) shows a state in which the first wipe display is being withdrawn. The decorative symbols and the hold icon are gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. At the time shown in FIG. 88 (j), a part of the left symbol, the middle symbol, the right symbol, and the whole of all the hold icons are displayed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 88 (c), the number of held icons before erasure is two. However, since the number of held icons in FIG. As shown in 88 (j), the number of the hold icons after the redisplay is three. The display modes of the three hold icons are all black circles.

  FIG. 88 (k) continuing from FIG. 88 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. The wipe display w1a is shrunk toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is shrunk toward the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, When the wipe display w1b is erased from the display screen, the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends. An empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is an out-of-order symbol pattern, shakes in a display manner that swings left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Fluctuation display is displayed.

  FIG. 88 (l) continuing from FIG. 88 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is wrong. ing.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can draw a lottery whether or not to execute a pre-reading notice using the wipe effect display when the holding of the special figure increases before the wipe effect display is executed. In this example, since it is determined not to execute the prefetching notice using the wipe effect display, the prefetching notice is not executed.

(Example 3)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 shows a presentation example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 89, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 29, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

  FIG. 89 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is off. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 89 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 3, for example, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays three hold icons indicating the number of holds in FIG. The display modes of the three hold icons are all black circles.

  FIG. 89 (b) following FIG. 89 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that the reservation of the first special figure 1 has been digested. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is executed, the leftmost hold icon corresponding to the digested hold is deleted, and the hold icon moving animation is executed in which the two hold icons move to the left. Is done.

  FIG. 89 (c) following FIG. 89 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach production is started after FIG. 89 (c). In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily determined and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  FIG. 89 (d) following FIG. 89 (c) shows a state in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 has changed with the start of the super reach effect. The background image changes from a sky background image including a sun image, a cloud image, and a balloon image to a mountain road background image. In this embodiment, the sky background image is displayed during execution of a normal effect or normal reach effect, and the background image of a mountain road is displayed during execution of a super reach effect. All the hold icons are erased as the background image changes.

  FIG. 89 (e) continuing from FIG. 89 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. In some periods during the execution of the super reach effect, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in a reduced display mode.

  In this example, it is assumed that one game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230 after the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed in the upper right part of the display screen. Thus, the special figure 1 start information is acquired, and the main control unit 300 executes the special figure prefetching process in which the newly acquired start information is prefetched and the stop symbol is preliminarily determined before the success / failure determination process. After executing the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 transmits a prefetching result information command including a prior determination result to the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 determines by lottery whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice based on the pre-determination result. In this example, it is determined that the prefetch notice is executed, and the prefetch notice is executed by the first wipe effect display and the hold icon display.

  FIG. 89 (f) following FIG. 89 (e) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started after the display indicating the dislocation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display. The wipe displays w1a and w1b are displayed on the foreground on the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the display of the decorative symbols and the background image displayed before the start of the first wipe effect display. The patterns of the wipe displays w1a and w1b are the same. In FIG. 89, the patterns are black plain.

  In this embodiment, the black plain wipe displays w1a and w1b are displayed as the first wipe effect display as a pre-reading notice. When the first wipe effect display is displayed as the pre-reading notice, the first wipe effect display is started when the first wipe effect display that is not the pre-reading notice is displayed. It is earlier than the start timing. When the pre-reading notice is executed, the first wipe effect display is started immediately after the display indicating the shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 89 (f). If not executed, a display suggesting a deviation as shown in FIG. 88 (f) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and after a predetermined period, a first wipe effect display is displayed as shown in FIG. 88 (g). Has been started.

  The appearance positions of the wipe displays w1a and w1b when the first wipe effect display that is the pre-reading notice is displayed are the positions of the wipe displays w1a and w1b when the first wipe effect display that is not the pre-reading notice is displayed. It is different from the appearance position. In the case of the first wipe effect display that is the pre-reading notice, the appearance position of the wipe display w1a is the upper right corner of the display screen and the appearance position of the wipe display w1b is the lower left corner of the display screen as shown in FIG. 89 (f). is there. On the other hand, in the case of the first wipe effect display that is not a pre-reading notice, the appearance position of the wipe display w1a is the upper left corner of the display screen as shown in FIG. 88 (g), and the appearance position of the wipe display w1b is the right side of the display screen. The bottom corner.

  The speed of the appearance display of the wipe display w1a and w1b when the first wipe effect display that is the pre-reading notice is displayed is the wipe display w1a when the first wipe effect display that is not the pre-reading notice is displayed. It is faster than the appearance display speed of w1b.

  As described above, when the first wipe effect display is executed as the pre-reading notice, the first wipe effect display in which the pattern, the appearance position, and the speed of the appearance display of the first wipe display are not the pre-reading notice is executed. It is different from the case where it is done. When the first wipe effect display is executed as the pre-reading notice, the first wipe effect display in which at least one of the first wipe display pattern, the appearance position, or the speed of the appearance display is not the pre-reading notice is executed. It only has to be different.

  In this example, the prefetch process is executed during the execution of the reach effect, and the prefetch notice based on the result of the prefetch process is executed during the execution of the reach effect. In this case, the mode of the wipe effect display as the pre-reading notice is different from the mode of the normal wipe effect display that is not the pre-reading notice. In addition, when a pre-reading notice is executed based on the pre-reading process before the start of the reach effect and the result of the pre-reading process before the special figure variable game in which the reach effect is executed, a hold icon of the pre-reading notice mode is displayed. In this case, the mode of the wipe effect display may be different from the mode of the normal wipe effect display.

  FIG. 89 (g) continuing from FIG. 89 (f) shows a state where the wipe displays w1a and w1b are spread so as to gradually cover the display screen. The wipe display w1a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper right corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to gradually spread from the lower left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen. .

  FIG. 89 (h) continuing from FIG. 89 (g) shows a state where the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. The end of the wipe display w1a is in contact with the end of the wipe display w1b, and the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w1a and w1b. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  FIG. 89 (i) continuing from FIG. 89 (h) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. The wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper right corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower left corner of the display screen. The decorative symbols and the hold icon are gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. The speed of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w1a and w1b when the first wipe effect display that is the pre-reading notice is displayed is the wipe display w1a when the first wipe effect display that is not the pre-reading notice is displayed. It may be faster than the withdrawal display speed of w1b, may be the same, or may be slower.

  In the withdrawal display of the first wipe display, at least a part of the hold icon corresponding to the hold with a young hold order is displayed, and the hold icon corresponding to the later hold is displayed with the hold order that has been increased last. The player completes the wipe display withdrawal display while expecting whether the display mode of the hold icon newly displayed corresponding to the hold increased during the reach effect is the pre-reading notice mode. Sometimes you can wait.

  FIG. 89 (j) continuing from FIG. 89 (i) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. The wipe display w1a shrinks toward the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b shrinks toward the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, When the wipe display w1b is erased from the display screen, the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends. An empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is an out-of-order symbol pattern, shakes in a display manner that swings left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Fluctuation display is displayed. The hold icon is also displayed again, and the third hold icon from the left is displayed in a white square display mode. The hold icon is displayed in a pre-read notice display mode.

  FIG. 89 (k) continuing from FIG. 89 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is wrong. ing.

  Thus, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the pre-reading notice by the first wipe effect display. When the first wipe effect display is executed as the pre-reading notice, the big win may be always won before all the pending special figure variable games are consumed.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 may be able to execute the pre-reading notice by the second wipe effect display. Similar to the first wipe effect display, the second wipe effect display as the pre-reading notice is a second wipe in which at least one of the second wipe display pattern, appearance position, or appearance display speed is not the pre-reading notice. It may be different from the case where the effect display is executed.

Example 4
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 4 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 shows a presentation example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 90 shows the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the movable body 1002 extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG.

  FIG. 90A shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is off. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 90 (a), the reserved number in FIG. 1 is 2, for example, and the reserved number in FIG. 2 is 4, for example. In each figure of FIG. 90, illustration of the hold icon currently displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming state is an electric support state. At the time shown in FIG. 90 (a), the number of remaining special figure variable games in the electric support state is nine. The sub display device 1030 displays a character string image of “9 times” indicating the number of remaining special figure variable games in the electric support state.

  FIG. 90 (b) following FIG. 90 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the fact that the reservation of the first special figure 2 has been digested. The sub display device 1030 displays a character string image of “8 times” indicating the number of remaining special figure variable games in the electric support state.

  FIG. 90C continuing from FIG. 90B shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach effect is started after FIG. 90 (c). In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily determined and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  In FIG. 90 (d) following FIG. 90 (c), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 changes with the start of the super reach effect, and the main character and the enemy character are changed. This shows a state in which an effect in which a moving image of a scene to be confronted is displayed is started. In the case where the success / failure determination result of the special figure variation game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. An image of a hero character (hereinafter referred to as “hero”) is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and an image of an enemy character (hereinafter referred to as “enemy”) on the right side of the display screen. ) Is displayed, and a character string image of “due” is displayed in the upper left of the display screen. “Decoration 2” as a left pattern is displayed on the front side of the character string image, and a part of the character string image is not visible.

  FIG. 90 (e) following FIG. 90 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. In some periods during the execution of the super reach effect, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in a reduced display mode.

  At the time shown in FIG. 90 (e), the lower pan 128 is full with a prize ball, and a lower pan full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, there is displayed a lower pan full tank error notification image in which a character string image of “please remove the sphere” is displayed in a black horizontally long rectangular image. Yes. The lower pan full error notification image is displayed overlapping the effect display. In FIG. 90 (d), the lower pan full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping the character string image of “due”. The lower pan full tank error notification image is displayed under the control of the first sub control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including information about the lower pan full tank error from the main control unit 300.

  FIG. 90 (f) continued from FIG. 90 (e) shows a state in which a display indicating a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character is defeated by an enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. The lower plate full tank error notification image is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 90 (g) subsequent to FIG. 90 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fluctuation variation display is displayed in a display mode in which “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” which is an out-of-order symbol pattern is shaken up and down. The lower pan full tank error notification image is changed to a display mode in which the character color is black.

  FIG. 90 (h) following FIG. 90 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display are started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen, and the wipe display from the upper right corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030. w2a starts to appear, and the wipe display w2b starts to appear from the lower left corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display. The appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display, and the wipe display w2a The appearance of the second wipe display is started by combining the appearance and the appearance of the wipe display w2b, and the second wipe effect display is started when the second wipe display appears.

  The first wipe display appears so as to wipe out the display other than the error notification image. In this embodiment, the lower pan full tank error notification image is displayed as the error notification image, and the lower pan full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping the wipe display w1a. As shown in FIG. 90 (f), the lower pan full tank error notification image is a display mode in which a character string image of “please remove the sphere” is displayed in a black horizontally long rectangular image before the start of the wipe effect. As shown in FIG. 90 (h), after the wipe effect is started, the display is performed in a display mode in which a character string image “Take out the sphere” is displayed in black. In this embodiment, the display mode of the error notification image is changed between the execution of the wipe effect display and the non-execution of the wipe effect display. In this embodiment, the change timing of the display mode of the error notification image is immediately before the start of the wipe effect display as shown in FIG. 90 (g), but the change timing of the display mode of the error notification image is the start of the wipe effect display. Or after the start of the wipe effect display.

  The first wipe display also overlaps the tutorial display. In this embodiment, the tutorial display which is one of the message displays is erased by the first wipe display, and the error display which is one of the message displays is displayed overlapping the first wipe display. In this embodiment, the lower pan full tank error notification image is taken as an example of the error display, but the same applies to other error displays. For example, a door release error notification image for notifying a door release error, or an abnormal winning In addition, an error notification image for notification of illegal winning, an error notification image for notification of magnetic detection, and the like are also displayed overlapping the first wipe display.

  FIG. 90 (i) following FIG. 90 (h) shows a state where the appearance display of the first wipe display and the appearance display of the second wipe display are completed. The completion of the appearance display of the first wipe display may be simultaneous with the completion of the appearance display of the second wipe display, or the completion of any appearance display may be first. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started, and when the appearance display of the second wipe display is completed, the standby display of the second wipe display is started. The pattern of the second wipe display is a solid black color. By the first wipe display, the display other than the error notification image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect is erased, and all the displays displayed on the sub display device 1030 during the super reach effect are displayed. Erased.

  The first wipe display pattern displayed in the special figure variable game in which the confrontation effect between the hero and the enemy is executed is a pattern including an image of the hero's face. As shown in FIG. 90 (i), the pattern of the wipe display w1a is a pattern including two images of the main character's face, and the pattern of the wipe display w1b is a pattern including four images of the main character's face. The display mode of the hero's face included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the hero's face that has lost the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 90 (g). Thereby, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to causing the player to forget the effect lost in the duel.

  FIG. 90 (j) subsequent to FIG. 90 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display and the second wipe display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative symbols and the like are gradually displayed again between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. In the sub display device 1030, the wipe display w2a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper right corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w2b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower left corner of the display screen. The start of the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be simultaneously with the start of the withdrawal display of the second wipe display, or the start of any withdrawal display may be first.

  FIG. 90 (k) continuing from FIG. 90 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display and the second wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends. An empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is an out-of-order symbol pattern, shakes in a display manner that swings left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Fluctuation display is displayed. The lower-plate full-tank error notification image is displayed in a display form in which a character string image “Pull out a sphere” is displayed in a white horizontally-long rectangular image. In the sub display device 1030, the wipe display w2a shrinks toward the upper right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w2b shrinks toward the lower left corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen.

  FIG. 90 (l) following FIG. 90 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is wrong. ing.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes a wipe effect when the result of determining whether the special figure variation game is right or wrong is out of place. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to causing the player to forget an effect suggesting a loss.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display the display of a plurality of characters on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the super reach effect. One of the plurality of character displays is a hero character display, and one of the plurality of character displays is an enemy character display. The display of the hero or enemy character is erased when the first wipe effect display is displayed. In the super reach effect, the display of the hero or enemy character may be displayed on the sub display device 1030, and the display of the hero or enemy character is erased when the second wipe effect display is displayed. May be.

(Example 5)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 5 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 shows a presentation example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 91 shows the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the movable body 1002 extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG.

  FIG. 91A shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the present embodiment, the gaming state is an electric support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is off. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 91 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, for example, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 4, for example. 91, illustration of the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. It should be noted that the remaining number of special figure variable games executed in the electric support state may not be displayed on either the decorative symbol display device 208 or the sub display device 1030, or may be displayed.

  FIG. 91 (b) continuing from FIG. 91 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the fact that the reservation of the first special figure 2 is digested.

  FIG. 91 (c) following FIG. 91 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach effect is started after FIG. 91 (c). In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily determined and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  In FIG. 91 (d) following FIG. 91 (c), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 changes with the start of the super reach effect, and the main character and the enemy character are changed. This shows a state in which an effect in which a moving image of a scene to be confronted is displayed is started. In the case where the success / failure determination result of the special figure variation game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character image of “due” is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. Yes. “Decoration 2” as a left pattern is displayed on the front side of the character string image, and a part of the character string image is not visible.

  FIG. 91 (e) following FIG. 91 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire character string image of “due” displayed at the upper left of the display screen becomes visible. In some periods during the execution of the super reach effect, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in a reduced display mode.

  FIG. 91 (f) following FIG. 91 (e) shows a state in which a display suggesting a big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins an enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a big hit.

  FIG. 91 (g) following FIG. 91 (f) shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the swing variation display is displayed in such a manner that “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a big hit symbol pattern, swings up and down.

  FIG. 91 (h), which continues from FIG. 91 (g), shows a state where the super reach effect has ended. Along with the end of the super reach production, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208d have a normal size in the center of the display screen, and the display mode in which “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a jackpot symbol, swings left and right The fluctuation display is displayed.

  FIG. 91 (i) following FIG. 91 (h) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. “Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. ing.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment does not display the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display when the result of the special figure variable game is a big hit. Even when the result of the special figure variable game is a big hit, the first wipe effect display may not be displayed and the first wipe effect display may not be displayed. The second wipe effect display may be displayed, or the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display may be displayed. In addition, after the first wipe effect display is performed, a display that suggests a jackpot (for example, a temporary stop display of the decorative pattern of the jackpot symbol pattern) is performed, and then the jackpot symbol pattern is confirmed and displayed or the jackpot The first wipe effect display is performed after the display that suggests the display, and then the jackpot symbol form is confirmed and displayed, or the display that suggests the detachment (for example, the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern of the off symbol pattern) ) Is performed, the first wipe effect display is performed, and after that, the display that suggests the big hit is further performed, and then the big hit symbol form may be confirmed and displayed.

(Example 6)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 6 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 shows a presentation example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 92, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 29, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

  FIG. 92 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the present embodiment, the gaming state is an electric support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is off. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 92 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, for example, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 4, for example.

  FIG. 92 (b) continuing from FIG. 92 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the fact that the reservation of the first special figure 2 is digested.

  FIG. 92 (c) continuing from FIG. 92 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach production is started after FIG. 92 (c). In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily determined and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  FIG. 92 (d) continued from FIG. 92 (c) is a movie of a scene in which the main character and the enemy character confront each other as the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach production. This shows a state in which an effect in which an image is displayed is started. In the case where the success / failure determination result of the special figure variation game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character string image of “due” is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. A character string image “Confrontation start!” Is displayed below the display screen. A “decoration 2” as a left pattern is displayed on the front side of the character string image of “duel”, and a part of the character string image is not visible. The character string image of “Confrontation start!” Is one of the message displays, and is a tutorial display for explaining the production and the like. In this embodiment, during the execution of the super reach effect, a tutorial display for explaining the contents of the effect of the super reach effect is displayed.

  FIG. 92 (e) following FIG. 92 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. In some periods during the execution of the super reach effect, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in a reduced display mode. In the lower part of the display screen, a tutorial display of a character string image “Long wins if the lord wins” is displayed, and in the case of a big win, it is explained that the main character who is the lord wins.

  At the time shown in FIG. 92 (e), the lower pan 128 is full with a prize ball, and a lower pan full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, there is displayed a lower pan full tank error notification image in which a character string image of “please remove the sphere” is displayed in a black horizontally long rectangular image. Yes. The lower plate full tank error notification image is one of message displays, and is displayed overlapping the effect display. In FIG. 92 (e), a lower pan full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping the character string image of “due”. The lower pan full tank error notification image is displayed under the control of the first sub control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including information about the lower pan full tank error from the main control unit 300.

  FIG. 92 (f) continued from FIG. 92 (e) shows a state in which a display indicating a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character is defeated by an enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. At the bottom of the display screen is displayed a tutorial display of a character string image of “Sorry! Swordsman Wins!”, Explaining that the enemy character who is a swordsman has won. The tutorial display is also a display suggesting a loss. The lower plate full tank error notification image is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 92 (g) following FIG. 92 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fluctuation variation display is displayed in a display mode in which “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” which is an out-of-order symbol pattern is shaken up and down. In the lower part of the display screen, a tutorial display of a character string image “If the shrine rises ...” is displayed, and it is explained that the resurrection effect is executed when the main character as the shrine stands. The lower pan full tank error notification image is changed to a display mode in which the character color is black.

  FIG. 92 (h) following FIG. 92 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display.

  The first wipe display appears so as to wipe out the display other than the error notification image. In this embodiment, the lower pan full tank error notification image is displayed as the error notification image, and the lower pan full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping the wipe display w1a. The bottom plate full tank error notification image is displayed in a manner that a character string image of “please remove the sphere” is displayed in a black horizontally long rectangular image before the start of the wipe effect as shown in FIG. 92 (f). As shown in FIG. 92 (h), after the wipe effect is started, the display is performed in a display form in which a character string image “Remove the sphere” is displayed in black. In this embodiment, the display mode of the error notification image is changed between the execution of the wipe effect display and the non-execution of the wipe effect display. In this embodiment, the change timing of the display mode of the error notification image is immediately before the start of the wipe effect display as shown in FIG. 92 (g), but the change timing of the display mode of the error notification image is the start of the wipe effect display. Or after the start of the wipe effect display.

  The first wipe display also overlaps the tutorial display. In this embodiment, the tutorial display which is one of the message displays is erased by the first wipe display, and the error display which is one of the message displays is displayed overlapping the first wipe display. In this embodiment, the lower pan full tank error notification image is taken as an example of the error display, but the same applies to other error displays. For example, a door release error notification image for notifying a door release error, or an abnormal winning In addition, an error notification image for notification of illegal winning, an error notification image for notification of magnetic detection, and the like are also displayed overlapping the first wipe display.

  FIG. 92 (i) following FIG. 92 (h) shows a state where the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started. By the first wipe display, the display other than the error notification image displayed during the super reach effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 is erased.

  The first wipe display pattern displayed in the special figure variable game in which the confrontation effect between the hero and the enemy is executed is a pattern including an image of the hero's face. As shown in FIG. 92 (i), the pattern of the wipe display w1a is a pattern including two images of the main character's face, and the pattern of the wipe display w1b is a pattern including four images of the main character's face. The display mode of the hero included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the hero who lost the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 92 (g). Thereby, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to causing the player to forget the effect lost in the duel.

  FIG. 92 (j) continued from FIG. 92 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative symbols and the tutorial display are gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. In FIG. 92 (j), a character string image of “empty step” which is a part of the tutorial display is displayed.

  FIG. 92 (k) continuing from FIG. 92 (j) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen, and “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an out-of-context pattern, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in a display manner that fluctuates left and right. Is displayed. The lower-plate full-tank error notification image is displayed in a display form in which a character string image “Pull out a sphere” is displayed in a white horizontally-long rectangular image. Below the display screen, a tutorial display of a character string image of “the empty stage may be hidden” is displayed. The super reach production ends at the time shown in FIG. 92 (i), and after the super reach production ends, for example, a tutorial display for explaining the stage production is displayed. The tutorial display is displayed in a scroll display mode in which the character image moves to the left.

  FIG. 92 (l) following FIG. 92 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is wrong. ing. A lower pan full error notification image is displayed at the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a tutorial display of a character string image of “possibility. The sea stage is ...” below the display screen. Is displayed. The tutorial display is displayed in a scroll display mode in which the character image moves to the left.

  In this embodiment, the tutorial display, which is one of the message displays, is erased by the wipe effect display, and the error display, which is one of the message displays, is not erased by the wipe effect display and continues during the display of the wipe effect display. Displayed. The tutorial display of the super reach effect that was displayed before the start of the wipe effect display is not displayed after the end of the wipe effect display, and the tutorial display that was not displayed before the start of the wipe effect display (for example, describes the stage) (Tutorial display) is displayed in a scrolling display mode after the end of the wipe effect display. The tutorial display of the super reach effect that was displayed before the start of the wipe effect display may also be displayed in the scroll display mode. The tutorial display that was displayed before the start of the wipe effect display may be displayed after the end of the wipe effect display. Note that at least one of error display and tutorial display may be displayed on the sub display device 1030.

(Example 7)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 7 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 shows an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 93 shows the main liquid crystal unit 1001 extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 29, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

  FIG. 93 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the present embodiment, the gaming state is an electric support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is off. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 93 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, for example, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 4, for example. In each figure of FIG. 93, illustration of the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted.

  FIG. 93 (b) continuing from FIG. 93 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the fact that the reservation of the first special figure 2 is digested.

  FIG. 93 (c) continuing from FIG. 93 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach production is started after FIG. 93 (c). In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily determined and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  FIG. 93 (d), which continues from FIG. 93 (c), shows a moving image of a scene in which the main character and the enemy character confront each other as the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach production. This shows a state in which an effect in which an image is displayed is started. In the case where the success / failure determination result of the special figure variation game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character image of “due” is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. Yes. “Decoration 2” as a left pattern is displayed on the front side of the character string image, and a part of the character string image is not visible.

  FIG. 93 (e) continuing from FIG. 93 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire character string image of “due” displayed at the upper left of the display screen becomes visible. In some periods during the execution of the super reach effect, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in a reduced display mode.

  FIG. 93 (f) continued from FIG. 93 (e) shows a state in which a display suggesting a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character is defeated by an enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. At the bottom of the display screen is displayed a tutorial display of a character string image of “Sorry! Swordsman Wins!”, Explaining that the enemy character who is a swordsman has won. The tutorial display is also a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 93 (g) following FIG. 93 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fluctuation variation display is displayed in a display mode in which “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” which is an out-of-order symbol pattern is shaken up and down.

  FIG. 93 (h) following FIG. 93 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display.

  FIG. 93 (i) following FIG. 93 (h) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  At the time shown in FIG. 93 (i), the lower pan 128 is full with a prize ball, and a lower pan full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a lower pan full error notification image is displayed in which a character string image of “Please remove the sphere” is displayed in black character color. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping the wipe image w1a.

  The first wipe display pattern displayed in the special figure variable game in which the confrontation effect between the hero and the enemy is executed is a pattern including an image of the hero's face. As shown in FIG. 93 (i), the pattern of the wipe display w1a is a pattern including two images of the main character's face, and the pattern of the wipe display w1b is a pattern including four images of the main character's face. The display mode of the main character included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the main character who lost the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 93 (g). Thereby, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to causing the player to forget the effect lost in the duel.

  FIG. 93 (j) continued from FIG. 93 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative symbols are gradually displayed again between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. The lower plate full tank error notification image is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 93 (k) continuing from FIG. 93 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a jackpot symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner in which it swings left and right. Is displayed. At this time, the player operates the ball discharge lever 132 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 are discharged, so that the lower plate full tank error is eliminated and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

  FIG. 93 (l) subsequent to FIG. 93 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. “Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. ing.

  In the present embodiment, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is a symbol aspect that suggests a shift, is displayed before the start of the wipe effect display, and after the end of the wipe effect display, the symbol aspect that suggests a big hit “ "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is displayed. Wipe effect is provided by providing an effect pattern in which a wipe effect display is executed after a symbol aspect that suggests a loss is displayed even when a big win is won, and a symbol aspect that suggests a big hit is displayed after the wipe effect display There may be a case where it is possible to contribute to helping the player forget the effect suggesting the losing before the display is executed.

(Example 8)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 8 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 shows a presentation example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each figure of FIG. 94, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 29, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

  FIG. 94A shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the present embodiment, the gaming state is an electric support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is off. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 94 (a), the reserved number in FIG. 1 is 2, for example, and the reserved number in FIG. 2 is 4, for example. In each drawing of FIG. 94, illustration of the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted.

  FIG. 94 (b) following FIG. 94 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the fact that the reservation of the first special figure 2 has been digested.

  94 (c) following FIG. 94 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach production is started after FIG. 94 (c). In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily determined and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  FIG. 94 (d) continued from FIG. 94 (c) is a movie of a scene in which the main character and the enemy character confront each other as the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach production. This shows a state in which an effect in which an image is displayed is started. In the case where the success / failure determination result of the special figure variation game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character image of “due” is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. Yes. “Decoration 2” as a left pattern is displayed on the front side of the character string image, and a part of the character string image is not visible.

  FIG. 94 (e) following FIG. 94 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire character string image of “due” displayed at the upper left of the display screen becomes visible. In some periods during the execution of the super reach effect, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in a reduced display mode.

  FIG. 94 (f) subsequent to FIG. 94 (e) shows a state in which a display indicating a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character is defeated by an enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. At the bottom of the display screen is displayed a tutorial display of a character string image of “Sorry! Swordsman Wins!”, Explaining that the enemy character who is a swordsman has won. The tutorial display is also a display suggesting a loss.

  At the time shown in FIG. 94 (f), the lower pan 128 is full with a prize ball, and a lower pan full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, there is displayed a lower pan full tank error notification image in which a character string image of “please remove the sphere” is displayed in a black horizontally long rectangular image. Yes. The lower plate full tank error notification image is one of message displays, and is displayed overlapping the effect display. In FIG. 94 (f), a lower pan full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping the character string image of “due”. The lower pan full tank error notification image is displayed under the control of the first sub control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including information about the lower pan full tank error from the main control unit 300.

  FIG. 94 (g) following FIG. 94 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fluctuation variation display is displayed in a display mode in which “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” which is an out-of-order symbol pattern is shaken up and down. At this time, the player operates the ball discharge lever 132 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 are discharged, so that the lower plate full tank error is eliminated and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

  FIG. 94 (h) following FIG. 94 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display.

  FIG. 94 (i) following FIG. 94 (h) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  At the time shown in FIG. 94 (i), the lower pan 128 is full with a prize ball, and a lower pan full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a lower pan full error notification image is displayed in which a character string image of “Please remove the sphere” is displayed in black character color. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping the wipe image w1a.

  The first wipe display pattern displayed in the special figure variable game in which the confrontation effect between the hero and the enemy is executed is a pattern including an image of the hero's face. As shown in FIG. 94 (i), the pattern of the wipe display w1a is a pattern including two images of the main character's face, and the pattern of the wipe display w1b is a pattern including four images of the main character's face. The display mode of the main character included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the main character who lost the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 94 (g). Thereby, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to helping the player forget the effect lost in the duel.

  FIG. 94 (j) subsequent to FIG. 94 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative symbols are gradually displayed again between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. At this time, the player operates the ball discharge lever 132 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 are discharged, so that the lower plate full tank error is eliminated and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

  FIG. 94 (k) subsequent to FIG. 94 (j) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen, and “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an out-of-context pattern, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in a display manner that fluctuates left and right. Is displayed.

  FIG. 94 (l) subsequent to FIG. 94 (k) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started again. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display.

  FIG. 94 (m) following FIG. 94 (l) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  At the time shown in FIG. 94 (m), the lower pan 128 is filled with prize balls, and a lower pan full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a lower pan full error notification image is displayed in which a character string image of “Please remove the sphere” is displayed in black character color. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping the wipe image w1a.

  FIG. 94 (n) subsequent to FIG. 94 (m) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative symbols are gradually displayed again between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. In the middle symbol display area 208d, the variable display in which the decorative symbol is switched is resumed. At this time, the player operates the ball discharge lever 132 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 are discharged, so that the lower plate full tank error is eliminated and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

  FIG. 94 (o) subsequent to FIG. 94 (n) shows a state in which the display of the moving image of the confrontation scene between the main character and the enemy is started. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of “due” is displayed.

  FIG. 94 (p) following FIG. 94 (o) shows a state in which a display suggesting a big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins an enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a big hit. “Decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”, which is a big hit symbol pattern, is displayed in the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in a display mode that swings up and down. The shaking fluctuation display is displayed.

  FIG. 94 (q) continued from FIG. 94 (p) shows a state where the super reach effect has been completed. Along with the end of the super reach production, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208d have a normal size in the center of the display screen, and the display mode in which “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a jackpot symbol, swings left and right The fluctuation display is displayed.

  FIG. 94 (r) subsequent to FIG. 94 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is finished. “Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. ing.

  In the present embodiment, the first wipe effect display is executed twice during the execution of one special figure variable game. In this embodiment, the patterns of the wipe displays w1a and w2a in the first wipe effect display for the second time are the same as the patterns of the wipe displays w1a and w2a in the first wipe effect display for the first time. Good. Note that the second wipe effect display may be executed twice during the execution of one special figure variable game.

  The first wipe effect display may be displayed before and after the background image changes as shown in FIGS. At this time, a wipe display for scene change may be displayed. The wipe display for scene change may cover the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, or may cover only a part of the display screen. In FIGS. 94L to 94N, a scene change wipe display may be displayed. The same applies to the second wipe effect display.

Example 9
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 9 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 shows a presentation example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 95 shows the main liquid crystal unit 1001 extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 29, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

  FIG. 95 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the present embodiment, the gaming state is an electric support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is off. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 95 (a), the reserved number in FIG. 1 is 2, for example, and the reserved number in FIG. 2 is 4, for example. In each drawing of FIG. 95, illustration of the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted.

  FIG. 95 (b) following FIG. 95 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the fact that the reservation of the first special figure 2 has been digested.

  FIG. 95 (c) continuing from FIG. 95 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach effect is started after FIG. 95 (c). The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed is more easily determined and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  FIG. 95 (d) following FIG. 95 (c) shows a moving image of a scene in which the main character and the enemy character confront each other as the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach production. This shows a state in which an effect in which an image is displayed is started. In the case where the success / failure determination result of the special figure variation game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character image of “due” is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. Yes. “Decoration 2” as a left pattern is displayed on the front side of the character string image, and a part of the character string image is not visible.

  FIG. 95 (e) following FIG. 95 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire character string image of “due” displayed at the upper left of the display screen becomes visible. In some periods during the execution of the super reach effect, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in a reduced display mode.

  FIG. 95 (f) continuing from FIG. 95 (e) shows a state in which a display indicating a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character is defeated by an enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. At the bottom of the display screen is displayed a tutorial display of a character string image of “Sorry! Swordsman Wins!”, Explaining that the enemy character who is a swordsman has won. The tutorial display is also a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 95 (g) subsequent to FIG. 95 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fluctuation variation display is displayed in a display mode in which “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” which is an out-of-order symbol pattern is shaken up and down.

  FIG. 95 (h) following FIG. 95 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display.

  FIG. 95 (i) following FIG. 95 (h) shows a state where the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  At the time shown in FIG. 95 (i), the lower pan 128 is full with a prize ball, and a lower pan full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a lower pan full error notification image is displayed in which a character string image of “Please remove the sphere” is displayed in black character color. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping the wipe image w1a.

  The pattern of the first wipe display is a pattern including an image of the hero's face. As shown in FIG. 95 (i), the pattern of the wipe display w1a is a pattern including two images of the main character's face, and the pattern of the wipe display w1b is a pattern including four images of the main character's face. The display mode of the main character included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the main character who lost the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 95 (g). Thereby, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to causing the player to forget the effect lost in the duel.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes an opportunity button 139 and can execute the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. For example, the pachinko machine 100 can execute effects of effect patterns 1 to 5 using the decorative symbol display device 208 during the first wipe effect display. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 may be able to execute the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 using the sub display device 1030 during the second wipe effect display.

  FIG. 95 (i ′) subsequent to FIG. 95 (i) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the standby display of the first wipe display. A chance button 136 and an opportunity button 139 are schematically shown below the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 95 (i ′). At the time shown in FIG. 95 (i ′), the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. The start timing of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 and the display start timing of the button operation waiting display 1 may be the same, or one of them may be the first.

  In FIG. 95 (i ′), during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). Yes. A plurality of lines shown above the chance button 136 indicate a state in which the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). Represents. When the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner or in a manner different from the normal state, the player knows that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. May be possible. The chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a moving manner (for example, movement that repeats moving display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. There may be a case where it is stopped and displayed outside the valid period.

  In FIG. 95 (j) following FIG. 95 (i ′), the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started in response to the chance button 136 being pressed by the player during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Shows the state. A chance button 136 and an opportunity button 139 are schematically shown below the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. The button operation waiting display 1 is erased when the chance button 136 is pressed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative symbols are gradually displayed again between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. The lower plate full tank error notification image is continuously displayed.

  In this example, when the player presses the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button response display 1 (display performed in response to pressing of the chance button 136) is displayed as the first wipe display. A withdrawal indication is displayed. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the first wipe display withdrawal display may not be displayed, or the chance button 136 may be configured. In some cases, the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be displayed even when the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period. For example, when the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation effective period of the chance button 136, the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be displayed after the operation effective period ends.

  FIG. 95 (k) continuing from FIG. 95 (j) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a jackpot symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner in which it swings left and right. Has been. At this time, the player operates the ball discharge lever 132 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 are discharged, so that the lower plate full tank error is eliminated and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

  As shown in FIGS. 95 (h) and (i), when the effect image is wiped out by the wipe effect display, the button operation waiting display is performed with priority over the wipe effect display, and the chance button 136 is operated. Accordingly, the display of the wipe effect display is ended, and a display that makes the player expect a big hit is displayed. In this example, the swing variation display of the jackpot symbol (“decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”) is a display that makes the player expect a big hit. The display expected by the player may be a jackpot notice display or the like. The symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is performed in preference to the wipe effect display as in this example is the final one than the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is not performed in preference to the wipe effect display. The jackpot symbol may be configured so that it is easy to be confirmed and displayed, and the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is given priority over the wipe effect display may be the jackpot confirmed, or from the wipe effect display Alternatively, the symbol variation display on which the button operation waiting display is preferentially performed may be off. The symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is not performed preferentially over the wipe effect display may be confirmed as lost. The wipe effect display performed together with the button operation waiting display may be the first wipe effect display or the second wipe effect display.

  FIG. 95 (l) continuing from FIG. 95 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is finished. “Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. ing.

  In the present embodiment, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is a pattern that suggests a shift, is displayed before the start of the wipe effect display, a button operation waiting display is displayed during the wipe effect display, and the chance button 136 is displayed. The wipe effect display is terminated in response to the operation. After the end of the wipe effect display, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a design pattern suggesting a big hit, is displayed. Even when winning a big hit, a display pattern that suggests losing is displayed after the display of a pattern that suggests a loss, and an effect pattern that displays a design that suggests a big hit after the display of the wipe is provided. Thus, there may be a case where it is possible to contribute to helping the player forget the effect suggesting the loss before the wipe effect display is executed.

(Example 10)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 shows a presentation example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. Each drawing in FIG. 96 shows the main liquid crystal unit 1001 extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 29, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

  FIG. 96 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the present embodiment, the gaming state is an electric support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is off. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 96 (a), the reserved number in FIG. 1 is 2, for example, and the reserved number in FIG. 2 is 4, for example. In each drawing of FIG. 96, the illustration of the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted.

  FIG. 96 (b) following FIG. 96 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the fact that the reservation of the first special figure 2 has been digested.

  FIG. 96C continuing from FIG. 96B shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach effect is started after FIG. 96 (c). The pachinko machine 100 is configured such that the symbol variation display with the super reach effect is easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol form than the symbol variation display with the normal reach effect.

  FIG. 96 (d) following FIG. 96 (c) shows a moving image of a scene in which the main character and the enemy character confront each other as the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach production. This shows a state in which an effect in which an image is displayed is started. In the case where the success / failure determination result of the special figure variation game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character image of “due” is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. Yes. “Decoration 2” as a left pattern is displayed on the front side of the character string image, and a part of the character string image is not visible.

  FIG. 96 (e) following FIG. 96 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire character string image of “due” displayed at the upper left of the display screen becomes visible. In some periods during the execution of the super reach effect, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in a reduced display mode.

  FIG. 96 (f) following FIG. 96 (e) shows a state in which a display suggesting a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character is defeated by an enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. At the bottom of the display screen is displayed a tutorial display of a character string image of “Sorry! Swordsman Wins!”, Explaining that the enemy character who is a swordsman has won. The tutorial display is also a display suggesting a loss.

  At the time shown in FIG. 96 (f), the lower pan 128 is full with a prize ball, and a lower pan full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, there is displayed a lower pan full tank error notification image in which a character string image of “please remove the sphere” is displayed in a black horizontally long rectangular image. Yes. The lower plate full tank error notification image is one of message displays, and is displayed overlapping the effect display. In FIG. 96 (f), the lower pan full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping the character string image of “due”. The lower pan full tank error notification image is displayed under the control of the first sub control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including information about the lower pan full tank error from the main control unit 300.

  FIG. 96 (g) following FIG. 96 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fluctuation variation display is displayed in a display mode in which “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” which is an out-of-order symbol pattern is shaken up and down. At this time, the player operates the ball discharge lever 132 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 are discharged, so that the lower plate full tank error is eliminated and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

  FIG. 96 (h) following FIG. 96 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display.

  FIG. 96 (i) following FIG. 96 (h) shows a state where the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  At the time shown in FIG. 96 (i), the lower pan 128 is full with a prize ball, and a lower pan full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a lower pan full error notification image is displayed in which a character string image of “Please remove the sphere” is displayed in black character color. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping the wipe image w1a.

  The first wipe display pattern displayed in the special figure variable game in which the confrontation effect between the hero and the enemy is executed is a pattern including an image of the hero's face. As shown in FIG. 96 (i), the pattern of the wipe display w1a is a pattern including two images of the main character's face, and the pattern of the wipe display w1b is a pattern including four images of the main character's face. The display mode of the hero included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the hero who lost the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 96 (g). Thereby, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to helping the player forget the effect lost in the duel.

  FIG. 96 (j) continued from FIG. 96 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative symbols are gradually displayed again between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. At this time, the player operates the ball discharge lever 132 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 are discharged, so that the lower plate full tank error is eliminated and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

  FIG. 96 (k) continued from FIG. 96 (j) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen, and “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an out-of-context pattern, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in a display manner that fluctuates left and right. Is displayed.

  FIG. 96 (l) following FIG. 96 (k) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started again. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display.

  FIG. 96 (m) continuing from FIG. 96 (l) shows a state where the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  At the time shown in FIG. 96 (m), the lower pan 128 is full with a prize ball, and a lower pan full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a lower pan full error notification image is displayed in which a character string image of “Please remove the sphere” is displayed in black character color. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping the wipe image w1a.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes an opportunity button 139 and can execute the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. For example, the pachinko machine 100 can execute effects of effect patterns 1 to 5 using the decorative symbol display device 208 during the first wipe effect display. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 may be able to execute the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 using the sub display device 1030 during the second wipe effect display.

  FIG. 96 (m ′) subsequent to FIG. 96 (m) shows a state where the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the standby display of the first wipe display. A chance button 136 and an opportunity button 139 are schematically shown below the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. At the time shown in FIG. 96 (m ′), the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. The start timing of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 and the display start timing of the button operation waiting display 1 may be the same, or one of them may be the first.

  In FIG. 96 (m ′), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Yes. A chance button 136 and an opportunity button 139 are schematically shown below the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. A plurality of lines shown above the chance button 136 indicate a state in which the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). Represents. When the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner or in a manner different from the normal state, the player knows that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. May be possible. The chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a moving manner (for example, movement that repeats moving display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. There may be a case where it is stopped and displayed outside the valid period.

  In FIG. 96 (n) following FIG. 96 (m ′), the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started in response to the chance button 136 being pressed by the player during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The state is shown. A chance button 136 and an opportunity button 139 are schematically shown below the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. The button operation waiting display 1 is deleted when the chance button 136 is pressed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative symbols are gradually displayed again between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. In the middle symbol display area 208d, the variable display in which the decorative symbol is switched is resumed. At this time, the player operates the ball discharge lever 132 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 are discharged, so that the lower plate full tank error is eliminated and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

  In this example, when the player presses the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button response display 1 (display performed in response to pressing of the chance button 136) is displayed as the first wipe display. A withdrawal indication is displayed. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the first wipe display withdrawal display may not be displayed, or the chance button 136 may be configured. In some cases, the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be displayed even when the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period. For example, when the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation effective period of the chance button 136, the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be displayed after the operation effective period ends.

  As shown in FIGS. 96 (l) to (m '), when the effect image is wiped off by the wipe effect display, the button operation waiting display is performed with priority over the wipe effect display, and the chance button 136 is operated. In response to this, the display of the wipe effect is ended, and a display that causes the player to expect a big hit is displayed. In this example, the reach effect display, which is a jackpot notice display, is a display that makes the player expect a jackpot. The symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is performed in preference to the wipe effect display as in this example is the final one than the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is not performed in preference to the wipe effect display. The jackpot symbol may be configured so that it is easy to be confirmed and displayed, and the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is given priority over the wipe effect display may be the jackpot confirmed, or from the wipe effect display Alternatively, the symbol variation display on which the button operation waiting display is preferentially performed may be off. The symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is not performed preferentially over the wipe effect display may be confirmed as lost. The wipe effect display performed together with the button operation waiting display may be the first wipe effect display or the second wipe effect display.

  FIG. 96 (o) subsequent to FIG. 96 (n) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 96 (o), the display of the moving image of the confrontation scene between the main character and the enemy is started after the end of the first wipe effect display. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of “due” is displayed.

  FIG. 96 (p) following FIG. 96 (o) shows a state in which a display suggesting a big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins an enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a big hit. “Decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”, which is a big hit symbol pattern, is displayed in the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in a display mode that swings up and down. The shaking fluctuation display is displayed.

  FIG. 96 (q) continued from FIG. 96 (p) shows a state in which the super reach effect has ended. Along with the end of the super reach production, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208d have a normal size in the center of the display screen, and the display mode in which “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a jackpot symbol, swings left and right The fluctuation display is displayed.

  FIG. 96 (r) continuing from FIG. 96 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. “Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. ing.

  In this embodiment, the first wipe effect display is executed twice during the execution of one special figure variable game, and the button operation waiting display is displayed in the second wipe effect display. The button operation waiting display may be displayed in the first wipe effect display, or the button operation waiting display may be displayed in the first and second wipe effect displays. The effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 58 may be executed during the execution of the wipe effect display.

(Example 11)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 11 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 shows a presentation example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 97 shows the main liquid crystal unit 1001 extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 29, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

  FIG. 97 (a) shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the present embodiment, the gaming state is an electric support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is off. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 97 (a), the reserved number in FIG. 1 is 2, for example, and the reserved number in FIG. 2 is 4, for example. In each figure of FIG. 97, illustration of the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted.

  FIG. 97 (b) following FIG. 97 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the fact that the reservation of the first special figure 2 has been digested.

  FIG. 97 (c) following FIG. 97 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach production is started after FIG. 97 (c). In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily determined and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  FIG. 97 (d) continued from FIG. 97 (c) is a movie of a scene in which the main character and the enemy character confront each other as the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach production. This shows a state in which an effect in which an image is displayed is started. In the case where the success / failure determination result of the special figure variation game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character image of “due” is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. Yes. “Decoration 2” as a left pattern is displayed on the front side of the character string image, and a part of the character string image is not visible.

  FIG. 97 (e) continuing from FIG. 97 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire character string image of “due” displayed at the upper left of the display screen becomes visible. In some periods during the execution of the super reach effect, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in a reduced display mode.

  FIG. 97 (f) following FIG. 97 (e) shows a state in which a display suggesting a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character is defeated by an enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. At the bottom of the display screen is displayed a tutorial display of a character string image of “Sorry! Swordsman Wins!”, Explaining that the enemy character who is a swordsman has won. The tutorial display is also a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 97 (g) following FIG. 97 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fluctuation variation display is displayed in a display mode in which “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” which is an out-of-order symbol pattern is shaken up and down.

  FIG. 97 (h) following FIG. 97 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display.

  FIG. 97 (i) following FIG. 97 (h) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  The first wipe display pattern displayed in the special figure variable game in which the confrontation effect between the hero and the enemy is executed is a pattern including an image of the hero's face. As shown in FIG. 97 (i), the pattern of the wipe display w1a is a pattern including two images of the main character's face, and the pattern of the wipe display w1b is a pattern including four images of the main character's face. The display mode of the main character included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the main character who lost the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 97 (g). Thereby, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to causing the player to forget the effect lost in the duel.

  At the time shown in FIG. 97 (i), the lower pan 128 is full with a prize ball, and a lower pan full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a lower pan full error notification image is displayed in which a character string image of “Please remove the sphere” is displayed in black character color. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping the wipe image w1a.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes an opportunity button 139 and can execute the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. For example, the pachinko machine 100 can execute effects of effect patterns 1 to 5 using the decorative symbol display device 208 during the first wipe effect display. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 may be able to execute the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 using the sub display device 1030 during the second wipe effect display.

  FIG. 97 (i ′) subsequent to FIG. 97 (i) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A chance button 136 and an opportunity button 139 are schematically shown below the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIGS. 97 (i ′) to (j). In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles are overlapped with the chance button emission image displayed in the approximate center portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, in which the chance button 136 emits light. This mode corresponds to the button press instruction image. The button operation waiting display 3 is displayed overlapping the wipe displays w1a and w1b. In FIG. 97 (i ′), in relation to the display of the button operation waiting display 3, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state). It represents the state of being. When the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state), the player can confirm that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. Sometimes you can know.

  FIG. 97 (i ″) following FIG. 97 (i ′) shows a button response in response to the chance button 136 being pressed by the player while the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 97 (i ′) is displayed. The initial stage of the display 4 (display performed in response to pressing of the chance button 136) is shown in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The button response display 4 in this example is “More chance! "Corresponds to the character string image. The button response display 4 is displayed overlapping the wipe displays w1a and w1b. In this example, the player presses the chance button 136 immediately after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started.

  FIG. 97 (i ′ ″) subsequent to FIG. 97 (i ″) shows a state in which the middle of the button response display 4 is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button response display 4 of the present example, after displaying the character string image of “More chances !!”, the opportunity button image with the opportunity button 139 deceived is framed in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The state displayed in is shown.

  97 (i ″ ″) following FIG. 97 (i ′ ″) shows a state in which the final stage of the button response display 4 is displayed. In FIG. 97 (i ″ ″), the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Opportunity button image displayed to frame in from the right edge of the area is stopped at the center of the display area, the image of “More chances !!” is erased, and the button is pressed in the form of three inverted triangles overlapping The state where the image is displayed is shown. The opportunity button image is stopped and displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button press instruction image is displayed, thereby informing that the operation effective period of the opportunity button 139 is started. The opportunity button image and the button press instruction image are displayed overlapping the wipe displays w1a and w1b. The stop display of the opportunity button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed when waiting for the opportunity button 139 to be pressed. In FIG. 97 (i ″ ″), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined manner (or emits light in a manner different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents the state. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined manner (or emitting light in a manner different from the normal state). There is a case. Note that the opportunity button image and the button press instruction image are displayed during the operation effective period of the opportunity button 139 (for example, movement that repeats moving display in the up and down direction and the left and right direction), and the operation effective period of the opportunity button 139 is displayed. The display may be stopped outside.

  In FIG. 97 (j) following FIG. 97 (i ""), the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started in response to the opportunity button 139 being pressed by the player during the effective operation period of the opportunity button 139. It shows the state that was done. The opportunity button image and the button press instruction image are deleted when the opportunity button 139 is pressed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative symbols are gradually displayed again between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. In the middle symbol display area 208d, the variable display in which the decorative symbol is switched is resumed. At this time, the player operates the ball discharge lever 132 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 are discharged, so that the lower plate full tank error is eliminated and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

  In this example, when the player presses the opportunity button 139 during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139, the button response display 5 (display performed in response to pressing of the opportunity button 139) is used as the first wipe display. A withdrawal indication is displayed. Note that when the opportunity button 139 is not operated during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139, the first wipe display withdrawal display may not be displayed, or the opportunity button 139 may be configured. In some cases, the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be displayed even when the opportunity button 139 is not operated during the operation valid period. For example, when the opportunity button 139 is not operated during the operation effective period of the opportunity button 139, the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be displayed after the operation effective period ends.

  As shown in FIGS. 97 (h) to (i ""), when the effect image is wiped off by the wipe effect display, the button operation waiting display and the button response display are performed with priority over the wipe effect display. In response to the operation of the button 136, the display of the wipe effect display is ended, and a display that allows the player to expect a big hit is displayed. In this example, the reach effect display, which is a jackpot notice display, is a display that makes the player expect a jackpot. The symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display and the button response display are given priority over the wipe effect display as in this example is the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is not given priority over the wipe effect display. Instead, the jackpot symbol may be configured so that it is easier to be confirmed and displayed, and the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display or button response display is performed preferentially over the wipe effect display is determined to be the jackpot confirmed. Alternatively, the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display or the button response display is performed with priority over the wipe effect display may be omitted. The symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display and the button response display are not performed preferentially over the wipe effect display may be confirmed as lost. The wipe effect display performed together with the button operation waiting display and the button response display may be the first wipe effect display or the second wipe effect display.

  FIG. 97 (k) subsequent to FIG. 97 (j) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and disappears from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 97 (k), the display of the moving image of the confrontation scene between the main character and the enemy is started after the first wipe effect display ends. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of “due” is displayed.

  FIG. 97 (l) following FIG. 97 (k) shows a state in which a display suggesting a big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins an enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a big hit. “Decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”, which is a big hit symbol pattern, is displayed in the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in a display mode that swings up and down. The shaking fluctuation display is displayed.

  FIG. 97 (m) continuing from FIG. 97 (l) shows a state in which the super reach effect has been completed. Along with the end of the super reach production, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208d have a normal size in the center of the display screen, and the display mode in which “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a jackpot symbol, swings left and right The fluctuation display is displayed.

  FIG. 97 (n) subsequent to FIG. 97 (m) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. “Decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. ing.

  In the present embodiment, the effect of the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 71 may be executed during the execution of the wipe effect display. Of course, the effects of effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 58 may be executed during the execution of the wipe effect display. During the execution of the wipe effect display, effects related to the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 shown in FIGS. 58 to 86 may be executed. At this time, a button operation waiting display and a button response display are displayed overlapping the first wipe display and the second wipe display. The symbol variation display where the effect display that the button operation waiting display and the button response display are displayed overlapping the first wipe display and the second wipe display overlaps the button operation waiting display and the button response display. The jackpot symbol may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than the symbol variation display in which the effect display in which the first wipe display or the second wipe display is performed is performed. The symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display and the button response display are performed in an overlapped manner with the second wipe display or the second wipe display may be confirmed as a big hit. In addition, even if it is configured so that the symbol variation display in which the effect display that can display the first wipe display or the second wipe display is performed overlapping the button operation waiting display or the button response display may be removed. It is also possible to confirm the disconnection. The wipe effect display and the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 58 can be executed even in the electric support state and the non-electric support state.

Example 12
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 12 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 shows a presentation example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each figure of FIG. 98, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 29, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

  FIG. 98 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the present embodiment, the gaming state is an electric support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is off. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 98 (a), the reserved number in FIG. 1 is 2, for example, and the reserved number in FIG. 2 is 4, for example. In each drawing of FIG. 98, illustration of the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted.

  FIG. 98 (b) following FIG. 98 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the fact that the reservation of the first special figure 2 has been digested.

  FIG. 98 (c) following FIG. 98 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach production is started after FIG. 98 (c). The symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily determined and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

  FIG. 98 (d) continued from FIG. 98 (c) is a movie of a scene where the main character and the enemy character confront each other as the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach production. This shows a state in which an effect in which an image is displayed is started. In the case where the success / failure determination result of the special figure variation game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of a scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character image of “due” is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. Yes. “Decoration 2” as a left pattern is displayed on the front side of the character string image, and a part of the character string image is not visible.

  FIG. 98 (e) following FIG. 98 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire character string image of “due” displayed at the upper left of the display screen becomes visible. In some periods during the execution of the super reach effect, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in a reduced display mode.

  FIG. 98 (f) continued from FIG. 98 (e) shows a state in which a display indicating a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character is defeated by an enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. At the bottom of the display screen is displayed a tutorial display of a character string image of “Sorry! Swordsman Wins!”, Explaining that the enemy character who is a swordsman has won. The tutorial display is also a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 98 (g) following FIG. 98 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fluctuation variation display is displayed in a display mode in which “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” which is an out-of-order symbol pattern is shaken up and down.

  FIG. 98 (h) following FIG. 98 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display.

  FIG. 98 (i) following FIG. 98 (h) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

  At the time shown in FIG. 98 (i), the lower pan 128 is full with a prize ball, and a lower pan full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a lower pan full error notification image is displayed in which a character string image of “Please remove the sphere” is displayed in black character color. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping the wipe image w1a.

  The first wipe display pattern displayed in the special figure variable game in which the confrontation effect between the hero and the enemy is executed is a pattern including an image of the hero's face. As shown in FIG. 98 (i), the pattern of the wipe display w1a is a pattern including two images of the main character's face, and the pattern of the wipe display w1b is a pattern including four images of the main character's face. The display mode of the main character included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the main character who lost the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 98 (g). Thereby, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to causing the player to forget the effect lost in the duel.

  FIG. 98 (j) following FIG. 98 (i) shows a state in which the island simultaneous production is started. In the island simultaneous production, the same model of the pachinko machine 100 executes the same production at the same timing. At the start of the simultaneous island effect, a character string image of “Start an island simultaneous effect!” Is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the island simultaneous effect of this example, an effect in which a princess character image is displayed is executed. When the simultaneous island effect is started, the wipe displays w1a and w1b are reduced and displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the error display such as the lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed so as to overlap the princess character image displayed in the island simultaneous effect, and is displayed with priority over the image displayed in the island simultaneous effect. .

  FIG. 98 (k) continuing from FIG. 98 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started during the execution of the island simultaneous performance. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right. The decorative symbols are gradually displayed again between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. During execution of the island simultaneous production, a character string image of “island simultaneous production” is displayed. The lower pan full tank error notification image is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 98 (l) continued from FIG. 98 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is ended after the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. “Decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is wrong. ing.

  In this embodiment, the island simultaneous effect is started during the execution of the wipe effect display. During the execution of the simultaneous island effect, the effect display that was displayed before the start of the simultaneous island effect such as the wipe effect display, the reach effect display, and the decorative symbol display is reduced to the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. The error display such as the lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed while maintaining the display position, display size, and display mode from before the start of the island simultaneous effect even during the execution of the island simultaneous effect.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is capable of performing island simultaneous effects. The pachinko machine 100 includes a light emitting means (for example, various lamps 418, a game board lamp 532, a game table frame lamp 542 shown in FIG. 4), a transmission area (for example, a transparent plate member 118), and a display means (for example, A decorative design display device 208), and configured to accept a brightness setting operation (hereinafter referred to as "first brightness setting operation") by a player, and when the first effect is being performed. In addition, the luminance according to the first luminance setting operation (for example, “medium (duty ratio 70%)” luminance set by the player's luminance setting operation. Note that the luminance is set by the player's luminance setting operation. If not, the light emitting means can emit light at a brightness of “bright (duty ratio 100%)” initially set on the game machine), and the second effect is being performed. Brightness The light-emitting means emits light at a brightness that does not correspond to a fixed operation (for example, a brightness of “bright (duty ratio 100%)” that is initially set on the game machine), and the first effect is an island simultaneous effect Rather, it is a reach production, the second production is the island simultaneous production, the light emitting means is a means provided above the transmission area, and the game table is The island simultaneous effect can be executed independently, and even if the second effect is performed, a display relating to the brightness of the light emitting means (hereinafter referred to as “brightness setting display”) is displayed on the display means. The brightness setting display is a display showing the brightness according to the first brightness setting operation, and the brightness setting display corresponds to the first brightness setting operation even when the second effect is performed. The brightness setting display is displayed. When the second effect is not performed, the light emitting means can emit light with a luminance corresponding to the first luminance setting operation. The “brightness not responding to the first brightness setting operation” described above is a maximum value of the brightness that can be set by the first brightness setting operation. The “brightness not depending on the setting operation” is a luminance that is initially set. When the second effect is finished, the light emitting means may be able to emit light at a luminance corresponding to the first luminance setting operation. The reach effect is an effect that may be executed when the island simultaneous effect is not being executed. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, there are cases where the sharpness of the effect can be given while the island simultaneous effect is being executed and when the island simultaneous effect is not being executed.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 98 again.

(J1)
Effect display means capable of executing effect display (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 1030)
A game machine equipped with
The effect display means is a display means capable of executing symbol variation display (for example, decorative symbol variation display),
The effect display means is a display means capable of executing a plurality of types of reach effects (for example, a normal reach effect and a super reach effect),
The effect display means is a display means composed of a plurality of image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is first image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is second image display means (for example, sub display device 1030),
One reach effect of the plurality of types of reach effects is a first reach effect (for example, a normal reach effect),
One reach effect of the plurality of types of reach effects is a second reach effect (for example, a super reach effect),
The symbol variation display in which the second reach effect is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the first reach effect is performed,
After the display that suggests the shift is performed in the second reach effect, it is possible to perform the first wipe effect display (for example, wipe display w1a, wipe display w1b) on the first image display means. Yes,
After the display that suggests the shift is performed in the second reach effect, it is possible to perform the second wipe effect display (for example, wipe display w2a, wipe display w2b) on the second image display means. is there,
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, it may be possible to renew the player's mood that has been shifted from the symbol variation display by the first wipe effect display or the second wipe effect display.

(J2)
It is a game stand as described in (J1) above,
According to the first wipe effect display, the image in the first image display means is configured to be wiped out,
By the second wipe effect display, the image in the second image display means is configured to be wiped out.
A game stand characterized by that.

(J3)
The game stand according to (J1) or (J2) above,
A pre-reading notice is performed by at least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display (see, for example, FIG. 89).
A game stand characterized by that.

(J4)
The game stand according to any one of (J1) to (J3) above,
The image display means (for example, the decorative design display device 208) constituting the first image display means and the image display means (for example, the sub display device 1030) constituting the second image display means are different.
A game stand characterized by that.

(J5)
The game stand according to any one of (J1) to (J4) above,
In the second reach production, multiple types of symbols can be variably displayed,
At least one of the plurality of types of symbols is erased by displaying at least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display, and the wipe effect is displayed. It is configured to redisplay when the display ends,
The one design is configured to change from a first display mode (for example, a reduced display mode) to a second display mode (for example, a normal display mode),
The first display mode is a display mode of the one symbol before the one wipe effect display is performed,
The second display mode is a display mode of the one symbol after the one wipe effect display is performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(J6)
The game stand according to any one of (J1) to (J5) above,
In the second reach production, it is configured to be able to display a plurality of characters,
One of the plurality of character displays is a display of the first character (for example, a display of Yoshimune's character),
The display of the first character is erased when the wipe effect display of at least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display is displayed. .

(J7)
The game stand according to any one of (J1) to (J6) above,
A background display (see, for example, FIG. 87) changes before and after at least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display is performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(J8)
The game stand according to any one of (J1) to (J7) above,
Provided with a ball storage means (for example, a lower plate 128) capable of storing game balls,
The first image display means can display a display (for example, a lower pan full tank error notification image) (hereinafter referred to as a “ball removal display”) for notifying that a game ball is to be removed from the ball storage means.
The ball removal display is a display that is displayed overlapping the first wipe effect display,
The ball removal display is configured to be visible from the player during the display of the first wipe effect display,
The ball removal display is configured to be visible from the player even during the display of the second wipe effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(J9)
The game stand according to any one of (J1) to (J8) above,
The first wipe effect display includes an appearance display of the first wipe display (for example, see FIGS. 87 (q) to (v)),
The first wipe effect display includes a withdrawal display of the first wipe display (for example, see FIGS. 87 (w) to (b)),
The second wipe effect display includes an appearance display of the second wipe display (for example, see FIGS. 87 (s) to (u)),
The second wipe effect display includes a withdrawal display of the second wipe display (see, for example, FIGS. 87 (x) to (z)).
A game stand characterized by that.

(J10)
The game stand according to (J9) above,
The first wipe display pattern (for example, the wipe display w1a and w1b pattern shown in FIG. 90) and the second wipe display pattern (for example, the wipe display w2a and w2b pattern shown in FIG. 90) are different.
A game stand characterized by that.

(J11)
The game stand according to (J9) or (J10) above,
The start timing of the appearance display of the first wipe display and the start timing of the appearance display of the second wipe display are different (see, for example, FIGS. 87 (q) and (s)).
A game stand characterized by that.

(J12)
The game stand according to any one of (J1) to (J11) above,
The second image display means is means capable of executing a movement operation,
In the second image display means performing the moving operation, at least a part of the second wipe effect display is performed (see, for example, FIGS. 87 (s) and (t)).
A game stand characterized by that.

(J13)
The game stand according to any one of (J1) to (J12) above,
The first image display means is means capable of executing a movement operation,
In the first image display means performing the moving operation, at least a part of the first wipe effect display is performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(J14)
The gaming machine according to any one of (J1) to (J13),
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.
(J15)
A ball storage means (for example, a lower plate 128) capable of storing game balls;
First image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying an image display;
A game machine equipped with
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a display prompting to discharge the game ball from the ball storage means (for example, lower pan full tank error notification image) (hereinafter referred to as “ball discharge display”). Yes,
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display (for example, display of normal reach effect, display of super reach effect, effect display of the advance notice, effect display of the pre-reading notice),
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a second reach effect display (for example, a display of a super reach effect),
Display of the second reach effect (for example, the display of the super reach effect in the case of the failure shown in FIGS. 87 (l) to (z), FIGS. 90 (d) to (j), and FIGS. 92 (d) to (j)). ) Is a display that suggests a shift (for example, a character string image of “sorry” shown in FIGS. 87 (o) to (q), and a movie of a scene where the main character shown in FIG. 90 (f) or FIG. After the image is displayed, the first image display means displays the first wipe effect display (for example, FIGS. 87 (q) to (z), FIG. 90 (h) ) To (j), see FIGS. 92 (h) to (j)),
The first wipe effect display displayed in a state where the ball discharge display is displayed is configured to overlap the ball discharge display (for example, FIGS. 90 (h) to (j)). 92 (h) to (j)),
A game stand characterized by that.
(J16)
The game stand according to (J15) above,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a first reach effect display (for example, display of a normal reach effect),
The first image display means is means capable of displaying a design variation display (for example, a design variation display),
The symbol fluctuation display in which the second reach effect display (for example, super reach effect display) is performed rather than the symbol fluctuation display in which the first reach effect display (for example, normal reach effect display) is performed. Is configured so that the jackpot symbol pattern is easier to be confirmed and displayed,
A game stand characterized by that.
(J17)
The game stand according to (J15) or (J16) above,
After the first wipe effect display is displayed, an off symbol pattern (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” shown in FIG. 87 (c), FIG. 90 (l), or FIG. 92 (l)). Is configured to be confirmed,
In the second reach effect display (for example, the display of the super reach effect in the case of the big hit shown in FIGS. 91 (d) to (g)), the main character shown in FIG. 91 (f) is the enemy. After the display of the moving image of the winning scene), the jackpot symbol (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” shown in FIG. 91 (i)) is determined and displayed. ,
A game stand characterized by that.
(J18)
The game stand according to any one of (J15) to (J17) above,
In a state where both the first wipe effect display and the ball discharge display are displayed, the ball discharge display is visible to the player (FIGS. 90 (h) to (j) and FIG. 92 (h)). To (j)),
A game stand characterized by that.
(J19)
The game stand according to any one of (J15) to (J18) above,
The first wipe display (for example, wipe display w1a, wipe display w1b) is configured to wipe out the image on the first image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(J20)
The game stand according to any one of (J15) to (J19) above,
The first wipe effect display is a display including an appearance display of a first wipe display (for example, wipe display w1a, wipe display w1b),
The first wipe effect display is a display that includes a withdrawal display of the first wipe display (for example, wipe display w1a, wipe display w1b).
A game stand characterized by that.
(J21)
The game stand according to any one of (J15) to (J20) above,
The background display is configured to change before and after the first wipe effect display is displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 87 (p), (b), 90 (g), and (k)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(J22)
The game stand according to any one of (J15) to (J21) above,
The first image display means is means capable of executing a movement operation,
The first image display means in which the moving operation is performed is configured to display at least a part of the first wipe effect display (see, for example, paragraph “1201”).
A game stand characterized by that.
(J23)
The game table according to any one of (J15) to (J22) above,
A second image display means (for example, a sub display device 1030) capable of displaying an image display;
In the second reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift (for example, the lower half of the “mind” sentence image shown in FIG. 87 (o)) is displayed, the second image display means performs the second display. The game table is configured to display a wipe effect display of (see, for example, FIGS. 87 (s) to (y)).
(J24)
The game stand according to (J23) above,
The display mode of the second wipe effect display (for example, the pattern of the wipe display w2a and the wipe display w2b) is the display mode of the first wipe effect display (for example, the pattern of the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b). Different display modes,
A game stand characterized by that.
(J25)
The game stand according to (J23) or (J24) above,
The image on the second image display means is wiped off by the second wipe effect display (for example, wipe display w2a, wipe display w2b).
A game stand characterized by that.
(J26)
The game stand according to any one of (J23) to (J25) above,
The second wipe effect display is a display that includes an appearance display (for example, wipe display w2a, wipe display w2b) of the second wipe display,
The second wipe effect display is a display that includes a withdrawal display of the second wipe display (for example, wipe display w2a, wipe display w2b).
A game stand characterized by that.
(J27)
The game stand according to any one of (J23) to (J26) above,
The second image display means (for example, the sub display device 1030) is a means capable of executing a moving operation,
The second image display means in which the moving operation is performed is configured to display at least a part of the second wipe effect display (see, for example, FIG. 87 (s)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(J28)
The game stand according to any one of (J23) to (J27) above,
The image display means constituting the first image display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) and the image display means constituting the second image display means (for example, the sub display device 1030) are different.
A game stand characterized by that.
(J29)
The game stand according to any one of (J23) to (J28) above,
Providing production display means capable of displaying production display,
The second reach effect display is configured to be displayed by the effect display means,
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The effect display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is the first image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is the second image display means (for example, the sub display device 1030).
A game stand characterized by that.
(J30)
The game stand according to any one of (J15) to (J29) above,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.

[Fifth Embodiment]
Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention is described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 148. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the same configuration and control system as the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment. The same components as those of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

Example 1
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 99 (a) to (z) and (b) to (c) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 99 (a) shows a simplified front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, and FIG. 1010, the movable body 1002, and the sub display device 1030 are extracted and shown.

  FIG. 99 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and displayed, and the determination result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is wrong. Informed. In the state shown in FIG. 99 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. In each drawing of FIG. 99, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a sky background image including the sun image, cloud image, and balloon image, and the sub display device 1030 displays the sea background including the yacht image and cloud image. An image is displayed.

  FIG. 99 (b) shows a state in which the reservation of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed.

  FIG. 99C shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 99D shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. When the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol displayed in the left symbol display area 208a is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c and reach is reached in the variation display of the decorative symbol, the normal reach effect display or the super reach effect display is started. In this example, normal reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG.

  FIG. 99 (e) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has moved from the initial position to the lowest position in the operating range during the normal reach effect display. The movable body 1010 is stopped at a position on the front side of the central portion of the display screen (display area) of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, the movable body 1010 and a part of the image displayed on the decorative design display device 208 overlap, and a part of the image cannot be visually recognized by the player.

  FIG. 99 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has moved upward and returned to the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 1010 is the uppermost position in the movement range of the movable body 1010.

  FIG. 99 (g) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the normal reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an out of symbol pattern, is displayed in a fluctuation manner (temporary stop display) in a display manner that swings left and right. The shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is a display that suggests detachment. In this embodiment, in the normal reach effect display, the wipe effect display is not displayed after the display indicating the shift is displayed. The normal reach effect display ends when the fluctuation display of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c is started.

  FIG. 99 (h) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped and displayed (determination stop display), and the result of the determination result of the special figure 1 variation display is displayed. It is reported that it is out of place.

  FIG. 99 (i) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative display of the decorative symbols is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 99 (j) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 99 (k) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. When reach is reached in the decorative symbol variation display, normal reach effect display and super reach effect display are started. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 99 (k).

  FIG. 99 (l) shows a state in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 has changed with the start of the super reach effect display. The background image changes from a sky background image to a mountain road background image. In this embodiment, the sky background image is displayed during execution of a normal effect display other than the super reach effect display or during the execution of the normal reach effect display, and the background image of the mountain road is displayed during the execution of the super reach effect display.

  FIG. 99 (m) shows a state in which the background image displayed on the sub display device 1030 has changed with the start of the super reach effect display. The background image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is changed from a sea background image to a partial image of a mountain road background displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Of the background image displayed on the decorative design display device 208, an image corresponding to a portion hidden by the sub display device 1030 is displayed on the sub display device 1030 as a background image.

  FIG. 99 (n) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 including the sub display device 1030 has moved to the upper right from the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 1002 is a position where the movable body 1002 is located in the state shown in FIGS. The movable body 1002 is two-dimensionally within a plane substantially parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a display screen front plane) by a drive system (not shown). Can be moved. Further, the sub-display device 1030 displays the hidden part of the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 on the sub-display device 1030. In addition, as shown in FIG. 99 (n), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period during which the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 99 (o) shows a state in which a character string image of “sorry” is displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 as a display suggesting a shift. The sub display device 1030 is located at a position that overlaps a part of the character image of “n” displayed on the decorative design display device 208 (in this example, the lower part of “now” and the whole of “heart”). The sub-display device 1030 displays the part of the “mind” character image.

  FIG. 99 (p) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an out of symbol pattern, is displayed in a fluctuation manner (temporary stop display) in a display manner that swings up and down. The shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is a display that suggests detachment.

  FIG. 99 (q) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started after “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” indicating a shift in the super reach effect display is displayed. After the swing variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the background image is empty when the wipe effect display is withdrawn (wipe out). The super reach effect display is ended by switching to the normal effect display which is an image. The wipe effect display is an effect display in which images such as effect display are erased by wiping display from the end of the display screen of the display device. As shown in FIG. 99 (q), the appearance display of the wipe display w3a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w3b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is started. The start of the appearance display (wipe-in) of the wipe displays w3a and w3b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w3a and w3b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the display of decorative symbols and background images. The wipe display w3a is a display of a pattern including a plurality (three in this example) of images of the face of the character tactor. The wipe display w3b includes a plurality (three in this example) of the princess's face image and a plurality of star-shaped effect images (three in this example) arranged in the vicinity of the princess's face image. ). The face image included in the wipe display w3a is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise from an aspect in which the orientation is correct (hereinafter may be referred to as a “positive direction”), and then clockwise by 45 °. It is displayed as an animation that repeats the action of rotating and returning to the positive orientation. In the state at the time point shown in FIG. 99 (q), the image of the face of Tono is displayed in a mode rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the normal mode. The star-shaped effect image included in the wipe display w3b is displayed in a blinking display mode in which erasure and display are alternately repeated.

  FIG. 99 (r) shows a state where the wipe displays w3a and w3b are spread so as to gradually cover the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The wipe display w3a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w3b is displayed so as to gradually spread from the lower right corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen. . In the state shown in FIG. 99 (r), the image of the face of the lord included in the wipe display w3a is displayed in a positive orientation. When the wipe effect display is started, the movable body 1002 including the sub display device 1030 starts moving toward the initial position. The sub display device 1030 is located at a position overlapping the lower right portion of “remaining” displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the lower left portion of “near”. The lower part and the lower left part of “Sen” are displayed. The timing at which the movable body 1002 starts moving to the initial position may be prior to the start of the wipe effect display, may be simultaneously with the start of the wipe effect display, or after the start of the wipe effect display. It may be.

  FIG. 99 (s) shows a state where the wipe displays w3a and w3b are gradually spreading toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The image of the face of the lord included in the wipe display w3a is displayed in a mode rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the normal direction. The movable body 1002 is stopped at the initial position. The sub display device 1030 is located at a position overlapping the lower right end portion of the “remaining” and the lower left end portion of the “remaining”. The lower left corner is displayed.

  FIG. 99 (t) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started in the sub display device 1030. In this embodiment, when the wipe display w3b reaches the back of the lower right corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030, the sub display device 1030 starts displaying the wipe display w4b. The wipe display w4b is displayed so as to gradually spread from the lower right corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030 toward the upper left corner of the display screen. The wipe display w4b has the same pattern as the wipe display w3b, and is a display corresponding to a portion hidden by the sub display device 1030 in the wipe display w3b displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The wipe display w3b and the wipe display w4b constitute a wipe display that gradually spreads from the lower right to the upper left as viewed from the player. In addition, in the state at the time point shown in FIG. 99 (t), the image of the face of the lord included in the wipe display w3a is displayed in a positive orientation.

  In FIG. 99 (u), the wipe displays w3a and w3b gradually spread toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w4b gradually moves toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030. It shows the state spreading. Similarly to the wipe display w3b, the wipe display w4b includes a princess face image and a star-shaped effect image. In the state shown in FIG. 99 (u), a wipe display w4b including substantially the whole image of one princess's face and one star-shaped effect image is displayed on the sub display device 1030.

  FIG. 99 (v) shows a state where the entire display screen of the decorative design display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w3a and w3b, and the entire display screen of the sub display device 1030 is covered with the wipe displays w4a and w4b. The state where the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the entire display screen of the sub display device 1030 are covered with the wipe display is the maximum wipe state. Prior to the start of the maximum wipe state, the wipe display w4a is displayed on the sub display device 1030. The wipe display w4a starts to be displayed on the sub display device 1030 when the wipe display w3a reaches the back of the upper right corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030. The wipe display w4a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper left corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030 toward the center of the display screen. The wipe display w4a has the same pattern as the wipe display w3a, and is a display corresponding to a portion hidden by the sub display device 1030 in the wipe display w3a displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The wipe display w3a and the wipe display w4a constitute a wipe display that gradually spreads from the upper left to the lower right as viewed from the player. In the maximum wipe state, the lower right end of the wipe display w3a is in contact with the upper left end of the wipe display w3b, and the lower right end of the wipe display w4a is in contact with the upper left end of the wipe display w4b. In this example, the timing at which the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w3a and w3b and the timing at which the entire display screen of the sub display device 1030 is covered by the wipe displays w4a and w4b are configured at the same time. Has been. The timing at which the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w3a and w3b and the timing at which the entire display screen of the sub display device 1030 is covered by the wipe displays w4a and w4b are configured to be substantially the same. Or one of them may be the first. Further, in this example, in the state where the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w3a and w3b, the image of the face of the lord included in the wipe display w3a is counterclockwise from the normal orientation. Are then displayed in an animation that repeats 45 ° clockwise and 45 ° clockwise to return to the positive orientation. In the state shown in FIG. 99 (v), the face image of the lord included in the wipe display w3a is displayed in a positive orientation. In the maximum wipe state, the image of the princess's face and the star-shaped effect image included in the wipe displays w3b and w4b may be displayed as animations. An animation may be displayed on the wipe display in a state where one or both of the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 or the entire display screen of the sub display device 1030 is covered with the wipe display.

  FIG. 99 (w) shows a state in which the wipe display is started. The wipe display w3a is withdrawn and displayed in a manner that gradually decreases toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w3b is withdrawn and displayed in a manner that gradually decreases toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The The wipe display w4a is withdrawn and displayed in a manner that gradually decreases toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030, and the wipe display w4b is withdrawn and displayed in a manner that gradually decreases toward the lower right corner of the display screen. . When the wipe display is completely erased, the withdrawal display of the wipe display is completed. In addition, when the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w3a and w3b is started, the display of the decorative design and the background image on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible, and the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w4a and w4b is started. Thus, the display of the background image and the like on the sub display device 1030 becomes gradually visible. In addition, with the start of withdrawal display of the wipe displays w3a, w3b, w4a, and w4b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative design is terminated, and the left middle right of the display screen center of the decorative design display device 208 In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol mode, is started. In the state shown in FIG. 99 (w), the wipe display w4a is completely erased from the display screen of the sub display device 1030, and the withdrawal display of the wipe display w4a is completed.

  99 (x) and 99 (y) show a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w3a, w3b, and w4b is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 99 (y), the wipe display w4b is completely erased from the display screen of the sub display device 1030, and the withdrawal display of the wipe display w4b is completed. Thereby, the wipe withdrawal display on the sub display device 1030 is completed.

  As shown in FIGS. 99 (w) to 99 (y), an empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 during the withdrawal display of the wipe display. The hidden part of the sky background image displayed on the decorative design display device 208 by the sub display device 1030 is displayed on the sub display device 1030.

  FIG. 99 (z) shows a state where almost all of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display device 208 are visible as the wipe display of the wipe displays w3a and w3b progresses. As shown in FIGS. 99 (n) to (t), before the start of the wipe effect display and during the appearance display of the wipe display, the decorative design that has been reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative design display device 208 is As shown in FIGS. 99 (w) to (z), during the withdrawal display of the wipe display, the same size as before the start of the reach effect display is displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208 are “decoration 2-decoration 3” which is the out-of-pattern pattern mode. The “decoration 2” is displayed in a swinging manner (temporary stop display) in a display manner that swings left and right. The shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is a display that suggests detachment.

  FIG. 99 (a) showing a state continued from FIG. 99 (z) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe display is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is displayed in a swinging manner. In this example, the completion of the wipe display withdrawal display is the end of the wipe effect display. The background image in the sub display device 1030 is changed to the sea background image for the normal effect after the end of the wipe effect display.

  FIG. 99 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner in which the “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” shakes left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208. Yes.

  FIG. 99 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place.

  In this embodiment, a pair of wipe displays is constituted by the wipe displays w3a and w4a and the wipe displays w3b and w4b. The display screens of 208 and the sub display device 1030 are covered, and a wipe effect display is executed. The patterns of the wipe displays w3a and w4a are different from the patterns of the wipe displays w3b and w4b.

  In the wipe effect display, as shown in FIGS. 99 (q) to 99 (v), wipe-in is performed from the appearance of the wipe display until the wipe display reaches the maximum wipe state that most covers the display screen of the display device. Further, as shown in FIGS. 99 (v) to 99 (b), the wipe-out is performed until the wipe display is completely erased from the maximum wipe state that covers the display screen of the display device.

  In this embodiment, the images of the faces of the lord included in the wipe displays w3a and w4a are displayed as animations that rotate 45 ° counterclockwise from the normal orientation and then rotate 45 ° clockwise. However, the wipe display w3a, w4a is an effect for emphasizing, conspicuous, and easy to see the wipe pattern such as the face of the palace, the wipe display itself, the wipe-in state, the wipe-out state, etc. An effect image as an effect may be included. In the wipe display w3b and w4b, the princess's face, the wipe display itself, the wipe-in state, the wipe-out state, etc. are enhanced around the princess's face image as a production effect to make it stand out or make it easy to see A star-shaped effect image is displayed on the screen, but the image of the princess's face rotates, the image of the princess's face moves around, and other character images are displayed to display the image of the princess's face and the character image. By displaying an animation that operates in conjunction with, the wipe display itself, the wipe-in state, the wipe-out state, and the like may be emphasized or made conspicuous and easy to see. Note that different animations, different effect images, different animations and effect images may be displayed on the wipe displays w3a, w4a and the wipe displays w3b, w4b, animations related to each other, and animations related to each other. Effect images, animations and effect images related to each other may be displayed, animations linked to each other, effect images linked to each other, animations and effect images linked to each other may be displayed, The same effect image or the same animation and effect image may be displayed.

(Example 2)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 100A to 100Z and FIGS. 100A to 100D show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series. FIG. 100 (a) shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, and FIG. 100 (b) and thereafter show the main liquid crystal unit 1001, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movable body from the game board 1000. 1010, the movable body 1002, and the sub display device 1030 are extracted and shown.

  As shown in FIG. 100 (a), the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has three in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in addition to the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Display decorative symbols in a row in the horizontal direction. In the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the decorative symbol displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c is referred to as “decorative symbol A” and is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is referred to as “decorative pattern B”. The design of the decorative design B is different from the design of the decorative design A shown in FIG. Note that the design of the decorative design B may be the same as the design of the decorative design A shown in FIG. In addition, the symbol combination of the decorative symbol B in the case where the result of determining whether the special symbol variable game is right or wrong is different from the symbol combination of the decorative symbol A. For example, as shown in FIG. 100 (a), when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of place, the symbol combination of the decoration symbol A is “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration”. On the other hand, the symbol combination of the decorative symbol B is “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 6” which is a dissociation symbol mode. In addition, in the case where the result of determining whether or not the special figure variation game is correct, the symbol combination of the decorative symbol B may be the same as the symbol combination of the decorative symbol A. In addition, when the determination result of the special figure variation game is a big hit, the symbol combination of the decorative symbol A and the symbol combination of the decorative symbol B may be the same. The symbol combination of the decorative symbol A may be different from the symbol combination of the decorative symbol B. For example, the symbol combination of the decorative symbol A is “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, and the symbol of the ornamental symbol B The combination may be “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”.

  FIG. 100 (a) shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol A of the combination of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4” is stopped and displayed, and the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. , The decorative symbol B of the combination of “decoration 4-decoration 6-decoration 5” is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the determination result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is wrong. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 100 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. In each drawing of FIG. 100, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. In addition, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a sea background image is displayed on the sub display device 1030.

  FIG. 100 (b) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the decoration symbol A is displayed, and in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decoration symbol display device 208, the variation display of the decoration symbol B is displayed. Yes. In the figure, the variation display of the decorative design A is represented by a downward white arrow, and the variation display of the decoration design B is represented by a downward arrow.

  FIG. 100C shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 100D shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, normal reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG.

  FIG. 100 (e) shows a state where the movable body 1010 has moved from the initial position to the lowest position in the operating range and stopped during the normal reach effect display. The movable body 1010 is stopped at a position in front of the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, the movable body 1010 and a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 overlap, and a part of the image cannot be visually recognized by the player.

  FIG. 100F shows a state where the movable body 1010 has moved upward and returned to the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 1010 is the uppermost position in the movement range of the movable body 1010.

  FIG. 100 (g) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the normal reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an out of symbol pattern, is displayed in a fluctuation manner (temporary stop display) in a display manner that swings left and right. The normal reach effect display ends when the fluctuation display of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c is started. The shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is a display that suggests detachment. In this embodiment, in the normal reach effect display, the wipe effect display is not displayed after the display indicating the shift is displayed.

  FIG. 100 (h) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol A of the combination of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” which is the off symbol mode is stopped and displayed (determination stop display). In the lower right corner of the screen, “decoration 5—decoration 4—decoration 1”, which is an off symbol pattern, is stopped and displayed (determined stop display), and the result of the validity determination result relating to the special figure 1 fluctuation display is out of date. Is informed.

  FIG. 100 (i) shows a state in which the hold of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable symbol A starts to be displayed in the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol B is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The change display of is started.

  FIG. 100J shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 100 (k) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. Even during the execution of the super reach effect display, the decorative symbol is not temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol B, and the variation display of the decorative symbol B is continued.

  FIG. 100 (l) shows a state in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 has changed with the start of the super reach effect display. The background image changes from a sky background image to a mountain road background image. In the present embodiment, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the sky background image is displayed during execution of a normal effect display other than the super reach effect display or during the execution of the normal reach effect display, and the background image of the mountain road is being executed of the super reach effect display. Is displayed. In this example, the background image of the sea is continuously displayed on the sub display device 2030 even during execution of the super reach effect display.

  FIG. 100 (m) shows a state where the movable body 1002 provided with the sub display device 1030 has moved to the right from the initial position. The movable body 1002 may be movable from the initial position in the direction of right, left, upward, downward, diagonally upward right, diagonally downward right, diagonally upward left, diagonally downward left.

  FIG. 100 (n) shows a state where the movable body 1002 has moved obliquely upward to the right from the position shown in FIG. 100 (m). Further, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen, and the decorative symbol A is reduced and displayed.

  FIG. 100 (o) shows a state in which a character string image of “sorry” is displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 as a display suggesting a shift. The movable body 1002 provided with the sub display device 1030 has moved obliquely upward to the left from the position shown in FIG. Although a part of the character string image of “unfortunate” displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 by the sub display device 1030 (the upper left portion of “remaining” in the state shown in FIG. 100 (o)) is hidden, this implementation In the example, the display corresponding to the part hidden by the sub display device 1030 is not displayed on the sub display device 1030.

  FIG. 100 (p) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the display of the super reach effect. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an out of symbol pattern, is displayed in a manner of fluctuation fluctuation display (temporary stop display) in a display manner in which it swings up and down. The shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is a display that suggests detachment. In addition, the movable body 1002 provided with the sub display device 1030 moves to the right from the position shown in FIG. 100 (o) and stops in front of the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. A part of the character string image of “unfortunate” displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 by the sub display device 1030 (in the state shown in FIG. 100 (p), the upper right end portion of “remaining” and the upper left end portion of “near”) ) Is hidden, but in this embodiment, the display corresponding to the part hidden by the sub display device 1030 is not displayed on the sub display device 1030.

  FIG. 100 (q) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started after “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” indicating a shift in the super reach effect display is displayed. The normal background image is an empty background image when the wipe effect display is wiped out after the shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. By switching to the effect display, the super reach effect display ends. The wipe effect display is an effect in which an image such as an effect display is erased by wipe display from the end of the display screen of the display device. As shown in FIG. 100 (q), the appearance display of the wipe display w5a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w5b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is started. The start of the appearance (wipe-in) display of the wipe displays w5a and w5b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w5a and w5b are displayed so as to wipe off the display other than the decorative symbol B. Since the decorative design B is displayed so as to overlap the wipe display w5b, the decorative design B is continuously displayed without being wiped off by the wipe display w5b. The wipe display w5a is a display of a pattern including a plurality (three in this example) of images of the face of the character tactor. The wipe display w5b includes a plurality (three in this example) of the princess's face image and a plurality of star-shaped effect images (three in this example) arranged in the vicinity of the princess's face image. ). The image of the face of the lord included in the wipe display w5a is displayed in an animation that repeats the operation of rotating 45 ° counterclockwise from the normal direction and then returning to the normal mode by rotating 45 ° clockwise. . In the state at the time point shown in FIG. 100 (q), the image of the face of the lord is displayed in a state rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the normal direction. The star-shaped effect image included in the wipe display w5b is displayed in a blinking display mode in which erasure and display are alternately repeated.

  FIG. 100 (r) shows a state where the movable body 1002 provided with the sub display device 1030 is moved upward from the position shown in FIG. 100 (q) and stopped. The position of the movable body 1002 in the state shown in FIG. 100 (r) is the standby position of the movable body 1003 (sub display device 1030) when the wipe effect display is executed in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the wipe effect display is started before the movable body 1002 including the sub display device 1030 completes the movement to the standby position. As shown in FIG. 100 (r), the wipe display w5a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w5b is gradually moved from the lower right corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen. It is displayed to spread. After the sub display device 1030 stops at the standby position, the wipe display w5a reaches the back of the upper right corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030, and the wipe display w6a is started to be displayed on the sub display device 1030. The wipe display w6a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper right corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030 toward the lower left corner of the display screen. The wipe display w6a has the same pattern as the wipe display w5a, and is a display corresponding to the hidden portion of the wipe display w5a displayed on the decorative design display device 208 by the sub display device 1030. The wipe display w5a and the wipe display w6a constitute a wipe display that gradually spreads from the upper left to the lower right as viewed from the player. In addition, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 100 (r), the image of the face of the lord included in the wipe display w5a is displayed in a positive orientation.

  In FIG. 100 (s), the wipe displays w5a and w5b gradually spread toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w6a gradually moves toward the lower right corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030. It shows the state spreading. A part of the image of the face of one of the lords is displayed on the wipe display 6a. The images of the faces of the lord included in the wipe displays w5a and w6a are displayed in a mode rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the normal mode.

  In FIG. 100 (t), the wipe displays w5a and w5b gradually spread toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w6a gradually moves toward the lower right corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030. It shows the state spreading. The sub display device 1030 displays almost the entire face image of the face included in the portion of the wipe display w5a displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 that is hidden by the sub display device 1030.

  In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99 (u), in the wipe-in state, the sub display device 1030 located at the initial position displays the sub display of the wipe display w3a displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Whereas almost the entire image of the princess's face included in the portion hidden by the device 1030 is displayed, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 100 (t), the sub display device located at the standby position 1030 displays almost the entire face image of the face included in the portion of the wipe display w5a displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 that is hidden by the sub display device 1030. As described above, the pattern of the wipe display displayed on the sub display device 1030 may differ depending on the position of the sub display device 1030 in wipe-in.

  FIG. 100 (u) shows a maximum wipe state in which the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the entire display screen of the sub display device 1030 are covered with the wipe display. The entire display screen of the decorative design display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w5a and w5b, except for the decorative design B displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative design display device 208, and the entire display screen of the sub display device 1030 is displayed. Is covered by the wipe display w6a. In the maximum wipe state, the lower right end portion of the wipe display w5a and the upper left end portion of the wipe display w5b are in contact with each other. In addition, the images of the faces of the lord included in the wipe displays w5a and w6a are displayed in a positive orientation.

  FIG. 100 (v) shows an image between the wipe display w5a and w6a displayed on the upper left side when viewed from the player and the wipe display w5b displayed on the lower right side when viewed from the player in the maximum wipe state. This shows a state in which the moving animation is displayed. In this example, during the wipe-in (wipe appearance display) shown in FIGS. 100 (q) to (t) and during the maximum wipe state shown in FIG. 100 (u), the facial features included in the wipe displays w5a and w6a are displayed. The image has moved to the wipe display w5b. The face image of Tono moves to the wipe display w5b by an animation that moves while rotating clockwise, for example. In addition, the image of the princess face included in the wipe display w5b during the wipe-in shown in FIGS. 100 (q) to 100 (t) and the maximum wipe state shown in FIG. 100 (u) rotates, for example, counterclockwise. The animation moves while moving to the wipe displays w5a and w6b. In this example, the images included in the wipe displays w5a and w6a during wipe-in (in this example, the images of the faces of the lords) are displayed on the wipe display w5b instead of the wipe displays w5a and w6a in a part of the maximum wipe state. Is done. In addition, during the wipe-in shown in FIGS. 100 (s) and 100 (t), the image of the face of the face included in the wipe display w6a and displayed on the sub display device 1030 is the maximum wipe state shown in FIG. 100 (u). When the display of the movement of the face image of the lord is started on the wipe display w5b, the face image of the lord is displayed on the sub display device 1030 and the decorative symbol display device 208. After being displayed on both display devices, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the wiper display w5a in the upper right part, and the face image of the lord is displayed on the wipe display w5a and the wipe display w5b. After the state displayed, the image moves to the upper right part of the wipe display w5b. In addition, the image of the princess face included in the upper right portion of the wipe display w5b and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the wipe-in shown in FIGS. 100 (s) and (t) is shown in FIG. 100 (u). When the display of the princess face image to the wipe display w6a is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the maximum wipe state shown, the princess face image is displayed as the wipe display w5b and the wipe display w5a. Is displayed in the upper right part of the wipe display w5a, and the face image of the princess is displayed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. Through the state, the sub display device 1030 is moved to be displayed in the wipe display w6a.

  FIG. 100 (w) shows a state in which the image of the face of Tono moves toward the wipe display w5b, and the image of the face of the princess moves toward the wipe displays w5a and w6a. In this example, the withdrawal display of the wipe display is started after the movement of the image of the face of the lord and the image of the face of the princess is completed. The withdrawal display of the wipe display may be started during the movement of the image of the face of the lord and the image of the face of the princess.

  FIG. 100 (x) shows a state in which the wipe display is started. The wipe display w5a is withdrawn and displayed in a manner that gradually decreases toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w5b is withdrawn and displayed in a manner that gradually decreases toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The The wipe display w6a is withdrawn and displayed in a manner that gradually decreases toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030. When wiping out, the wipe displays w5a and w6a include a princess's face image and a star-shaped effect image, and the wipe display w5b includes a lord's face image. When the wipe display is completely erased, the withdrawal display of the wipe display is completed. In addition, by starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w5a and w5b, the display of the decorative design A, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 can be gradually recognized, and the withdrawal display of the wipe display w6a is started. The display of the background image and the like on the sub display device 1030 becomes gradually visible. When the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w5a, w5b, and w46b is started, the background image is changed to an empty background image in the decorative design display device 208, the reduced display of the decorative design is ended, and the display screen of the decorative design display device 208 is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” which is an outlier symbol mode is started.

  FIGS. 100 (y) and (z) show a state in which a withdrawal display of wipe displays w5a, w5b, and w6a is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 100 (y) and (z), during the withdrawal display of the wipe display, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a sea background image is displayed on the sub display device 1030. ing.

  FIG. 100 (a) showing a state continued from FIG. 100 (z) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe display w5a is being performed and the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w5b and w6a has been completed. As shown in FIGS. 100 (n) to 100 (t), the decorative design A that has been reduced and displayed at the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative design display device 208 before the start of the wipe effect display and during the appearance display of the wipe display is As shown in FIGS. 100 (w) to 100 (b), during the withdrawal display of the wipe display, the same size as before the start of the reach effect display is displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208 are “decoration 2-decoration 3” which is the out-of-pattern pattern mode. In the display mode in which “decoration 2” swings to the left and right, the swing variation display (temporary stop display) is displayed. However, since the movable body 1002 is positioned in front of the middle symbol display area 208b, the middle symbol display area 208b is displayed. Other than the lower end portion of “decoration 3” that is temporarily displayed in FIG. In addition, the shaking fluctuation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is a display suggesting a deviation.

  FIG. 100 (b) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe display w6a is completed and the withdrawal display of the wipe display is completed. The completion of the wipe display withdrawal display is the end of the wipe effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol A of the combination of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is displayed in a swinging manner, and the right side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. In the lower corner, the decorative pattern B of the combination of “decoration 6-decoration 1-decoration 4” is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings left and right.

  In FIG. 100 (c), in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol A of the combination of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is displayed in a swinging manner. The lower right corner of the display screen of the device 208 shows a state in which the decorative symbol B of the combination “decoration 6-decoration 1-decoration 4” is displayed in a swinging manner. The symbol combination of the decorative symbol A and the symbol combination of the decorative symbol B when the result of the special symbol variable game is out of place are different.

  FIG. 100 (d) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 have “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” which is an off symbol pattern. The combination decorative symbol A is stopped and displayed, and the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 also displays the decorative symbol B of the combination of “decoration 6-decoration 1-decoration 4”, which is an off symbol pattern, at the lower right corner. It is notified that the result of determining whether or not one variation game is correct is out of date. Further, before the special figure 1 variable game ends, the movable body 1002 moves downward from the standby position located in the state shown in FIGS. 100 (r) to 100 (c) and returns to the initial position. Thereby, the movable body 1002 and the middle symbol display area 208b do not overlap each other, and the entire “decoration 3” displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b can be visually recognized.

  In the present embodiment, a pair of wipe displays is configured by the wipe displays w5a and w6a and the wipe display w5b, and the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display are formed by the pair of wipe displays of the wipe displays w5a and w6a and the wipe display w5b. The display screen of device 1030 is covered and a wipe effect display is executed. As shown in FIGS. 100 (q) to 100 (u), the wipe displays w5a and w6a include the images of the faces of the dragonfly in the entire period of the wipe-in state and the partial period of the maximum wipe state. As shown in (i), the image of the princess's face and the star-shaped effect image are included in a part of the maximum wipe state and the entire period of wipeout. As described above, in this embodiment, a part of the patterns of the wipe displays w5a and w6a and a part of the pattern of the wipe displays w5b are switched in the middle of the wipe effect display.

  In this embodiment, the sub display device 1030 is located at a standby position different from the initial position during a part of the wipe-in state, the entire period of the maximum wipe state, and the entire period of the wipe-out state. In addition, the sub display device 1030 displays an image (for example, a sea background image) that is less relevant to the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  It is configured that the player can select which wipe effect display of the wipe display w3a and w3b shown in FIG. 99 and the wipe effect display of the wipe displays w5a and w5b shown in FIG. 100 is performed. May be. It may be possible to set which wipe effect display is performed by performing settings such as effect customization by the player.

(Example 3)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 (a) to 101 (f) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 101A to 101F, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 101 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the determination result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is wrong. Informed. In the state shown in FIG. 101 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, for example, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. In each drawing of FIG. 101, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an empty background image.

  FIG. 101 (b) shows a state in which the hold of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed.

  FIG. 101C shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the normal reach effect display is started after reaching the reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG.

  FIG. 101D shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the normal reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an out of symbol pattern, is displayed in a fluctuation manner (temporary stop display) in a display manner that swings left and right. The shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is a display that suggests detachment. The normal reach effect display ends when the fluctuation display of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c is started. In this embodiment, in the normal reach effect display, the wipe effect display is not displayed after the display indicating the shift is displayed.

  FIG. 101 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” which is an out of symbol mode is stopped and displayed (main stop display), and the determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is not correct. It is reported that there is.

  FIG. 101 (f) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative display of the decorative symbols is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a display that suggests a shift is displayed in a normal reach effect display (short reach effect display) that is shorter in execution time than a super reach effect display (long reach effect display). The display of the wipe effect display is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 until is displayed. Although the illustration of the sub display device 1030 is omitted, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment does not display the sub display device 10 after the display indicating the shift is displayed in the normal reach effect display until the display of the deviated symbol form is confirmed. The display device 1030 is configured not to display the wipe effect display. In the normal reach effect display, the wipe effect display may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the sub display device 1030 after the display indicating the shift is displayed until the display of the off symbol pattern is confirmed. May be.

Example 4
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 4 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 (A) to (L) show examples of performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 101A to 101L, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 101A shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the determination result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is wrong. Informed. In the state shown in FIG. 101 (A), the reserved number in FIG. 1 is 1, for example, and the reserved number in FIG. In each drawing of FIG. 101, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an empty background image.

  FIG. 101 (B) shows a state in which the hold of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed.

  FIG. 101C shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 101 (C). The pachinko machine 100 is configured such that the symbol variation display on which the super reach effect display is performed is more easily confirmed and displayed on the symbol variation display than the symbol variation display on which the normal reach effect display is performed.

  FIG. 101 (D) shows a scene in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach production display, and the main character (hero character) and the main enemy (enemy character) confront each other. This shows a state in which the effect of displaying the animation (moving image) is started. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen. When the result of the special figure 1 variable game success / failure determination is a big hit, the animation of the scene where the lord wins the enemy of the grandfather is displayed in the production, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game success / failure determination is out of sync Displays an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy.

  FIG. 101E shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 101 (F) shows a state in which a display indicating a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach production display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 101 (G) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the display of the super reach effect. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. The normal background image is an empty background image when the wipe effect display is wiped out after the shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. By switching to the effect display, the super reach effect display ends. Note that the end of the super reach effect display may be when the maximum wipe state is reached in the wipe effect display.

  FIG. 101 (H) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The wipe display w7a includes a plurality of images (two in this example) of the face of the lord, and the wipe display w7b includes a plurality of images (two in the example) of the face of the lord. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbols, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, the background image, and the like.

  FIG. 101 (I) shows a maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible. In addition, the patterns of the wipe displays w7a and w7b displayed in the super reach effect display in which the confrontation effect between the lord and the lord's enemy is executed are the patterns including the image of the face of the lord. The display manner of the face of the lord included in the wipe displays w7a and w7b is different from the display manner of the lord who lost the confrontation with the enemy shown in FIGS. 101 (F) and 101 (G). Thereby, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to make it easier for the player to forget the effect lost in the confrontation.

  FIG. 101 (J) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Then, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern mode, is started.

  FIG. 101 (K) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. The completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a dissimilar symbol pattern, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The fluctuation variation is displayed in a manner.

  FIG. 101 (L) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, in the super reach production display including the confrontation scenes between the lord and the enemy, the decorative symbol is displayed after the indication indicating the divergence is displayed until the errant symbol pattern is displayed. The display device 208 is configured to display a wipe effect display. In the super-reach effect display including the confrontation scene between the lord and the enemy, the sub-display device 1030 displays the wipe effect display after the display indicating the shift is displayed until the display pattern mode is confirmed. It may be configured to be displayed.

(Example 5)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 5 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 (a) to 101 (l) show examples of performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 101A to 101R, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 101 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the determination result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is wrong. Informed. In the state shown in FIG. 101 (a), the reserved number in FIG. 1 is 2, for example, and the reserved number in FIG. 2 is 0. In each drawing of FIG. 101, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an empty background image.

  FIG. 101 (b) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed.

  FIG. 101C shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the variation display of the decorative symbols in FIG.

  FIG. 101 (d) shows an animation (movie) of a scene where the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super-reach effect display, and Tono and Tsuji contest against drinking alcohol. This shows a state in which the effect of displaying (image) is started. On the right side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of the dragonfly is displayed, and on the left side of the display screen, an image of a bag is displayed. A background image including a princess image and a cocoon image is displayed on the back of the image on the display screen and the cocoon image. If the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, the animation of the scene where the shrine wins over the drinking and the addict is drunk in the production is displayed, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is wrong. In some cases, an animation of a scene in which Rin wins over drinking and gets drunk in the production is displayed.

  FIG. 101 (e) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation of a scene of drinking alcohol with a bowl and a bowl. Note that the timing at which the decorative pattern variation display is reduced and the timing at which the animation of the drinking scene with the bowl and the bowl is started may be simultaneous, or either One may be first.

  FIG. 101 (f) shows a state in which a display suggesting a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach production display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the frog wins over the drinking and gets drunk is displayed as a display that suggests a loss.

  FIG. 101G shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the display of the super reach effect. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The swing variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is a display suggesting a deviation.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment displays a decorative symbol display after a display suggesting a shift is displayed in a super-reach effect display including an animation of a drink comparison scene, and before the display of the deviated symbol form is confirmed. The device 208 does not display the wipe effect display. FIG. 101 (C) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended without displaying the wipe effect display after the super reach effect display. When the super reach effect display of this example is completed, an empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2-” is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the upper center of the display screen. After “decoration 3—decoration 2” is displayed in a swinging manner, the special figure 1 variable game is ended, and “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of date.

  FIG. 101 (ri) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is completed and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the decoration pattern is displayed after the display indicating the shift is displayed in the super reach production display including the animation of the scene of the drink comparison. The display device 208 is configured not to display a wipe effect display. Note that the pachinko machine 100 has a sub-display device 1030 during a period from the time when a display indicating the shift is displayed in the super reach effect display including the animation of the scene of comparison of drinking and drinking until the display pattern mode is confirmed and displayed. The wipe effect display is not displayed in FIG. As described above, after the display indicating the shift is displayed in the super reach effect display, the wipe effect display may not be displayed. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 may be configured such that the wipe effect display is performed after the display indicating the shift is displayed in all the super reach effect display until the deviated symbol pattern is displayed. . In the pachinko machine 100, a wipe effect is performed after a display indicating a shift is displayed in all reach effect displays such as a normal reach effect display and a super reach effect display until the dismissed symbol form is confirmed and displayed. It may be configured as follows.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment uses the super reach effect display shown in FIGS. 99 (k) to (p) and FIGS. 100 (k) to (p) as the first reach effect display and FIGS. 101 (C) to (C). G) can execute the super reach effect display shown in FIG. 101, can execute the super reach effect display shown in FIGS. 101 (c) to (g) as the second reach effect display, and shows the third reach effect display as the third reach effect display. The normal reach effect display shown in 101 (c) and (d) can be executed. The jackpot reliability of the reach effect display is set to increase in the order of the third reach effect display, the second reach effect display, and the first reach effect display. The pachinko machine 100 is configured such that the symbol variation display on which the first reach effect display is performed is more easily determined and displayed on the symbol variation display than the symbol variation display on which the third reach effect display is performed. The symbol variation display on which the second reach effect display is performed is configured such that the big hit symbol mode is more easily determined and displayed than the symbol variation display on which the third reach effect display is performed.

(Example 6)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 6 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 (a) to 102 (m) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 102A to 102M, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 102 (a) shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the determination result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is wrong. Informed. In the state shown in FIG. 102 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, for example, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. In each drawing of FIG. 102, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an empty background image.

  FIG. 102 (b) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed.

  FIG. 102C shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG.

  In FIG. 102 (d), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an effect is displayed in which an animation of a scene where the lord and the enemy of the lord confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

  FIG. 102 (e) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 102 (f) shows a state where an animation of a scene where the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed. The animation of the scene where Tono loses to the enemy of Tono is a display that suggests a loss.

  FIG. 102 (g) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment.

  FIG. 102 (h) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbol, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image. As shown in FIG. 102 (h), the wipe display w7b is displayed so as to overlap the image of the defeated and defeated by the enemy, and the image of the deity is invisible.

  FIG. 102 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started before the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. Yes. The wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By displaying the wipe display w7b withdrawing, the image of the lord can be gradually recognized. The image of the shrine after the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7b is not a collapsed display mode but a display mode that stands out after slashing.

  FIG. 102 (j) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. The completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. In addition, after the end of the wipe effect display, the decorative symbol variation display in the middle symbol display area 208b is resumed. It should be noted that the resumption timing of the decorative symbol variation display in the middle symbol display area 208b may be during the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, or may be simultaneously with the completion of the withdrawal of the wipe displays w7a and w7b. . Further, as shown in FIG. 102 (j), an image of the standing up after being cut off is displayed on the right side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and after being cut off on the left side of the display screen. The image of the standing enemy is displayed, and the fluctuation display of “decoration 2” in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 102 (k) shows a state where an animation of a scene in which the enemy of Tono defeated and Tono wins the confrontation is displayed. In the middle symbol display area 208b, “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed, and in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a big hit symbol pattern, swings up and down. It is displayed with the fluctuation fluctuation display of the mode. The animation of the scene where Tono wins the confrontation and the shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” are indications that suggest a big hit. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured so that the wipe effect display is not displayed after the display indicating the big hit is displayed in the reach effect display until the big hit symbol form is confirmed and displayed.

  FIG. 102 (l) shows a state where the super reach effect display has been completed. The super reach effect display in this example is finished after “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” is displayed in a swinging manner in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. When the super reach effect display ends, the decorative symbol display device 208 changes to an empty background image, and the reduced display of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c ends. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is displayed in a shaking variation display in a manner of swinging left and right.

  FIG. 102 (m) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” which is a big hit symbol form is displayed. A stop display (main stop display) is displayed, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

  In the super reach production display, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 (f) and 102 (g), is displayed in FIGS. As shown, a wipe effect display is displayed. The wipe effect display ends before reaching the maximum wipe state, and as shown in FIG. 102 (j), the animation of the confrontation scene in the super reach effect display is resumed after the wipe effect display ends, as shown in FIG. 102 (k). In this way, a display suggesting a big hit is displayed. In this way, in the super reach effect display, after the display suggesting the losing is displayed, the animation such as the confrontation scene is resumed, and then the effect display in which the display suggesting the big hit is displayed is the revival effect display ( Reverse display). The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes the wipe effect display as shown in FIGS. 102 (h) and 102 (i) before the revival effect display shown in FIGS. 102 (j) and 102 (k) is started. . In the wipe effect display in the present embodiment, the maximum wipe state may be set.

(Example 7)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 7 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 (A) to 102 (P) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 102A to 102P, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 102 (A) shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the determination result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is wrong. Informed. In the state shown in FIG. 102 (A), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, for example, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. In each drawing of FIG. 102, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an empty background image.

  FIG. 102 (B) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed.

  FIG. 102C shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG.

  In FIG. 102 (D), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an effect is displayed in which an animation of a scene where the lord and the enemy of the lord confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

  FIG. 102 (E) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 102 (F) shows a state in which an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed. The animation of the scene where Tono loses to the enemy of Tono is a display that suggests a loss.

  FIG. 102G shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the display of the super reach effect. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment.

  FIG. 102 (H) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbol, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image. As shown in FIG. 102 (h), the wipe display w7b is displayed so as to overlap the image of the defeated and defeated by the enemy, and the image of the deity is invisible.

  FIG. 102 (I) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started before the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. Yes. The wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By displaying the wipe display w7b withdrawing, the image of the lord can be gradually recognized. The image of the shrine after the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7b is not a collapsed display mode but a display mode that stands out after slashing.

  FIG. 102 (J) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. The completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. In addition, after the end of the wipe effect display, the decorative symbol variation display in the middle symbol display area 208b is resumed. It should be noted that the resumption timing of the decorative symbol variation display in the middle symbol display area 208b may be during the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, or may be simultaneously with the completion of the withdrawal of the wipe displays w7a and w7b. . Further, as shown in FIG. 102 (J), an image of the standing up after being cut off is displayed on the right side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and after being cut off on the left side of the display screen. The image of the standing enemy is displayed, and the fluctuation display of “decoration 2” in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 102 (K) shows a state in which an animation of a scene in which the shrine has fallen, the shrine has been defeated in a confrontation, and the enemy has won the confrontation is displayed. In the middle symbol display area 208b, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed, so that “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol pattern in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, swings up and down. It is displayed with the fluctuation fluctuation display of the mode. The animation of the scene where Tono lost the confrontation and the shaking variation display of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” are indications that indicate a gap. After the swing variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c shown in FIG. 102 (K) is started, the background image is displayed when the wipe effect display is wiped out. The super reach effect display is ended by switching to the normal effect display which is the sky background image.

  FIG. 102 (L) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbol, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image.

  FIG. 102 (M) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible. In addition, the patterns of the wipe displays w7a and w7b displayed in the super reach effect display in which the confrontation effect between the lord and the lord's enemy is executed are the patterns including the image of the face of the lord. The display form of the face of the lord included in the wipe displays w7a and w7b is different from the display form of the lord who lost the confrontation with the enemy shown in FIG. 102 (K). Thereby, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to make it easier for the player to forget the effect lost in the confrontation.

  FIG. 102 (N) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Then, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern mode, is started.

  FIG. 102 (O) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. The completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a dissimilar symbol pattern, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The fluctuation variation is displayed in a manner.

  FIG. 102 (P) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place.

  As shown in FIGS. 102 (F) and 102 (G), the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment displays a display suggesting a deviation as shown in FIGS. 102 (F) and 102 (G). As shown, a wipe effect display is displayed. The wipe effect display is terminated without reaching the maximum wipe state, and after the wipe effect display ends, as shown in FIG. 102 (J), the animation of the confrontation scene in the super reach effect display is resumed. As shown in (), the display suggesting the detachment is displayed again. In this way, in the super reach effect display of this example, it is displayed that the resurrection effect display is executed, and a display that suggests the disengagement is displayed again, and then the second wipe effect display in the super reach effect display is performed. Executed. Thereby, the pachinko machine 100 by a present Example may be able to increase the variation of an effect display. Note that the maximum wipe state may be displayed in the first wipe effect display in the present embodiment.

(Example 8)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 8 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 (a) to 103 (n) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 103A to 103N, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 103 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the determination result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is wrong. Informed. In the state shown in FIG. 103 (a), the reserved number in FIG. 1 is 1, for example, and the reserved number in FIG. 2 is 0. In each drawing of FIG. 103, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an empty background image.

  FIG. 103 (b) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed.

  FIG. 103C shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the variation display of the decorative symbols in FIG.

  In FIG. 103 (d), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an effect is displayed in which an animation of a scene in which the lord and the enemy of the lord confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen. When the result of the special figure 1 variable game success / failure determination is a big hit, the animation of the scene where the lord wins the enemy of the grandfather is displayed in the production, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game success / failure determination is out of sync Displays an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy.

  FIG. 103 (e) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 103 (f) shows a state in which a display indicating a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 103 (g) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the display of the super reach effect. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. The normal background image is an empty background image when the wipe effect display is wiped out after the shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. By switching to the effect display, the super reach effect display ends.

  FIG. 103 (h) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbol, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image.

  FIG. 103 (i) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible. In addition, the patterns of the wipe displays w7a and w7b displayed in the super reach effect display in which the confrontation effect between the lord and the lord's enemy is executed are the patterns including the image of the face of the lord. The display manner of the face of the lord included in the wipe displays w7a and w7b is different from the display manner of the lord who lost the confrontation with the enemy shown in FIGS. 103 (f) and 103 (g). Thereby, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to make it easier for the player to forget the effect lost in the confrontation.

  FIG. 103 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Then, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern mode, is started. Further, in this embodiment, with the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the notice image j1 of the treasure chest image is displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The notice image j1 is a notice image (the notice image of the change) about the special figure 1 variable game. A part of the preview image j1 is displayed so as to overlap with a part of “decoration 3” in the middle symbol display area 208b located in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thus, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the wipe effect display ends, the jackpot notice effect display by the notice image j1 is started.

  FIG. 103 (k) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. The completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, after the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed, the preview image j1 is displayed in a reduced size from the beginning of the display, and “decoration 3” in the middle symbol display area 208b is temporarily deleted. The timing at which the preview image j1 is displayed in a reduced size and the timing at which the “decoration 3” in the middle symbol display area 208b is deleted may be simultaneously, or one of them may be first.

  FIG. 103 (l) shows a state where an animation is displayed in which the treasure box is opened and “decoration 3” as a middle symbol pops up from the preview image j1. When the animation is displayed, a preview image j1 is displayed between “decoration 2” of the left symbol in the left symbol display area 208a and “decoration 2” of the right symbol in the right symbol display area 208a. The When the animation is displayed, the fluctuation display of the display mode in which “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is a dissimilar symbol form, is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 103 (m) shows a state in which the preview image j1 has been deleted. The notice image j1 is erased after the display of fluctuation variation of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c is started.

  FIG. 103 (n) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place.

  A normal effect display state in which an empty background image is displayed from the super reach effect display state by the wipe-in in which the wipe displays w7a and w7b appear and the wipe-out in which the wipe displays w7a and w7b withdraw as in the present embodiment. The notice image j1 that was not displayed in the super reach effect display shown in FIGS. 103C to 103G may be displayed at the time of wipeout. The notice image j1 is a jackpot notice image. The pachinko machine 100 is configured so that the jackpot symbol pattern is displayed more easily when the jackpot notice image is displayed at the time of wipeout than when the jackpot notice image is not displayed at the time of wipeout. Has been. Note that the display mode of the jackpot notice image may not be a treasure box pattern, but may be a character pattern, a family crest pattern, or an item pattern such as a sword or shuriken. Note that a pre-read notice image may be displayed at the time of wipeout.

  It should be noted that a wipe effect display by wipe-in in which the wipe displays w7a and w7b appear and a wipe-out effect by wipe-out in which the wipe displays w7a and w7b are withdrawn changes from a super reach effect display state to a normal effect display state in which an empty background image is displayed. However, a certain image such as a jackpot notice image that was not displayed in the super reach effect display is not displayed in the normal effect state after the wipeout, and the certain image is displayed in the normal effect state after the wipeout. In the case of being made, the big hit symbol pattern may be configured to be easily stopped in the special figure variable game. In this embodiment, since the result of determining whether or not the special figure variation game is correct is out of order, after the animation in which “decoration 3” that constitutes the symbol pattern is separated from the notice image j1 of the treasure box is displayed as a middle symbol, Although the off symbol pattern is confirmed and displayed, if the determination result of the special figure variation game is a big hit, “decoration 2” that will constitute the big hit symbol form from the notice image of the treasure box pops out as a middle symbol After the animation is displayed, there may be a case where the jackpot symbol form is finally displayed. Further, when the certain image is not displayed in the normal effect display state, the big hit symbol pattern may be configured not to be displayed in a definite manner. In addition, in the symbol variation display in which the effect of changing from the super reach effect display state to the normal effect display state is executed by wipe-in and wipe out, an image that was not displayed in the super reach effect display state is displayed in the normal effect display state. If the image is displayed in the normal effect display state after the symbol variation display of one of a plurality of symbol variation displays held at the time of wipeout, The jackpot symbol may be configured so as to be easily displayed. The certain image is not limited to the jackpot notice image or the prefetch notice image, and may be a navigation character (navigation character used for tutorial effect) image, a help character image, or the like.

Example 9
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 9 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 (A) to 103 (N) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 103A to 103N, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 103 (A) shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the determination result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is wrong. Informed. In the state shown in FIG. 103 (A), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, for example, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. In each drawing of FIG. 103, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an empty background image.

  FIG. 103 (B) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed.

  FIG. 103C shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 103 (C).

  In FIG. 103 (D), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an effect is displayed in which an animation of a scene where the lord and the enemy of the lord confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen. When the result of the special figure 1 variable game success / failure determination is a big hit, the animation of the scene where the lord wins the enemy of the grandfather is displayed in the production, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game success / failure determination is out of sync Displays an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy.

  FIG. 103 (E) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 103 (F) shows a state in which a display indicating a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach production display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 103 (G) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. After the fluctuation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the background image becomes a normal effect display of an empty background image before and after the wipe effect display. The display of the super reach effect is ended by switching.

  FIG. 103 (H) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w9a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w9b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w9a and w9b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w9a and w9b are displayed on the forefront of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbols, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image. The wipe display w9a includes an image that is a pattern of a part of the family crest (upper left), and the wipe display w9b includes an image that is a pattern of the other part of the family crest (lower right). In the maximum wipe state, a family crest image of one pattern is formed by the family crest image included in the wipe display w9a and the family crest image included in the wipe display w9b.

  FIG. 103 (I) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w9a and w9b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w9a and the upper left end of the wipe display w9b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w9a and w9b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w9a and w9b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible. When the wipe display w9a and the wipe display w9b are displayed in contact with each other in the maximum wipe state, the family crest image included in the wipe display w9a and the family crest image included in the wipe display w9b are continuous. A family crest image of one pattern is formed from these family crest images. The family crest image is displayed to notify or suggest that the jackpot symbol pattern is displayed after wiping out, or that the jackpot notice is executed after wiping out. In this example, the family crest image is a notice image of the change, and is displayed for notifying that the jackpot notice is executed after wiping out.

  FIG. 103 (J) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w9a and w9b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w9a is retracted so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w9b is retracted so as to contract toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w9a and w9b, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w9a and w9b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Then, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern mode, is started. Further, in this embodiment, with the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w9a and w9b, a notice image j2 of a family crest pattern is displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The notice image j2 is a notice image about the special figure 1 variable game (the notice image of the change, the jackpot notice image). A part of the preview image j2 is displayed so as to overlap with a part of “decoration 3” in the middle symbol display area 208b. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the wipe effect display ends, the jackpot notice effect display by the notice image j2 is started. The family crest image included in the wipes w9a and w9b is an image for notifying that the preview image j2 is displayed at the time of wipeout. The family crest image included in the wipes w9a and w9b has the same pattern as the preview image j2. Thus, the image for notifying that the jackpot notice effect display is displayed is displayed with the same pattern as the jackpot notice effect display. Note that the image for notifying that the jackpot notice effect display is displayed may be displayed in a pattern related to the jackpot notice effect display.

  FIG. 103 (K) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w9a and w9b is completed. The wipe display w9a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w9b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. The completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w9a and w9b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. A part of the preview image j2 is displayed so as to overlap with a part of “decoration 3” in the middle symbol display area 208b.

  FIG. 103 (L) shows a state in which the preview image j2 is displayed so as to overlap the entire “decoration 3” displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the “decoration 3” becomes invisible. Yes. The “decoration 3” may be deleted when the whole is overlapped. The preview image j2 is displayed between “decoration 2” in the right symbol display area 208a and “decoration 2” in the left symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 103 (M) shows a state in which the preview image j2 has been deleted. Since the preview image j2 is deleted, the middle symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b becomes visible again. The middle symbol changes from “decoration 3” to “decoration 2”. If the middle symbol is once erased when the preview image j2 is displayed so as to overlap the entire middle symbol, the preview image j2 is erased after the preview image j2 is erased. At the same time, “decoration 2” is displayed as a middle symbol.

  FIG. 103 (N) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” which is a big hit symbol form is displayed. The stop display is made, and it is informed that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, after the display indicating the shift is displayed in the super reach effect display, the wipe effect display is displayed, and the notice image j2 which is a big hit notice image is displayed at the time of wipeout. After the preview image j2 is displayed between the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol, the big hit symbol pattern is displayed in a swinging manner, and then the big hit symbol symbol is displayed. The state in which the preview image j2 is displayed between the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol is a stunning effect state in which it is struck that it will be a big hit. The pachinko machine 100 is configured so that the jackpot symbol pattern is displayed more easily when the jackpot notice image is displayed at the time of wipeout than when the jackpot notice image is not displayed at the time of wipeout. Has been. Further, the wipe displays w9a and w9b include family crest images, and in the maximum wipe state, the end of the wipe display w9a and the end of the wipe display w9b come into contact with each other, so that the preview image j2 displayed later The family crest image having the same display mode is displayed (see FIG. 103 (I)). The preview image j2 is gradually displayed from between the family crest images included in the wipe displays w9a and w9b at the time of wipeout.

  In the present embodiment, the wipe display pattern is as shown in FIGS. 99 (v), 100 (w), 101 (I), 102 (M), 103 (i), and 103 (I). Are provided in plurality. The family crest shown in FIG. 103 (I) is displayed rather than the case where the wipe display of the picture including the image of the face shown in FIG. 103 (i) or the like (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “first picture”) is displayed. When the wipe display of a pattern including an image (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “second pattern”) is displayed, after changing from the super reach effect display state to the normal effect display state by wipe-in and wipe-out Thus, the jackpot symbol may be configured so as to be easily confirmed and displayed. When the wipe display of the second pattern is displayed than when the wipe display of the first pattern is displayed, the super reach effect display state is changed from the super reach effect display state by the wipe-in and wipe-out. At this time, it may be configured such that the jackpot notice image that is not displayed in the super reach effect display or the pre-read notice image is easily displayed as a wipe-out. The jackpot notice image and the prefetch notice image may include at least a character image. Here, the first pattern and the second pattern may be any pattern, and are not limited to the patterns shown in FIGS. 103 (i) and (I). In addition, when the wipe display pattern is the second pattern of the plurality of patterns, when changing from the super reach effect display state to the normal effect display state by wipe-in and wipe-out, the super reach effect display state The jackpot notice image or the prefetch notice image that has not been displayed may be configured to be displayed by wipeout.

  In the present embodiment, an example in which the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display during execution after the warning image j2 that is a jackpot warning image is displayed is shown. However, a plurality of types of jackpot warning images are provided. When one of the types of jackpot notice images (for example, the second jackpot notice image) is displayed, the jackpot symbol pattern is always displayed in a definite manner. Also good. In addition, the first jackpot notice image (a notice picture j1 or an image in which blue characters such as blue letters are used frequently) or blue was used characteristically during the wipeout. The second jackpot notice image (for example, the notice image j2, an image in which red is used more frequently, an image in which red is used characteristically, etc.) is displayed. In this case, the jackpot symbol pattern may be finally displayed more easily in the symbol variation display being executed. In addition, a third jackpot notice image (for example, an image of a gold treasure box, an image of a golden family crest, an image with a lot of gold used, such as gold letters, or an image with a special use of gold) was displayed. In such a case, it may be configured such that, in the symbol variation display being executed, the jackpot symbol pattern is finally displayed in a definite manner.

(Example 10)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 and 105. First, the hold icon of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a decorative symbol display device 208 as a holding display means. The hold display means is a display means for displaying the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of holds and a changing icon. The changing icon is sometimes referred to as the hold icon, and is simply referred to as a hold icon. There is also a case. That is, the hold display means is display means for displaying a hold icon. When there is only one hold during the symbol variation display, the hold icon is displayed only in the hold 1 display region, and when there are only two holds during the symbol variation display, the two hold icons are the hold 1 display region. One is displayed only in the hold 2 display area. Similarly, when there are only M holds during symbol variation display, one M hold icon is displayed only in each of the hold 1 display area to the hold M display area. If the hold is full (eg, N, where N is 4 or 8) during the symbol variation display, the hold icon is displayed in all of the hold 1 display area to the hold N display area. When the hold icon displayed on the icon is changed to the changing icon display area (sometimes referred to as the hold display area or the hold 0 display area) when the hold decreases, the change icon (the hold icon, simply referred to as the hold icon) is displayed. If the hold is 0 during the symbol variation display, the variation icon is displayed only in the hold 0 display area, while the symbol variation display or the symbol temporary stop display is in progress. Or the symbol change display may be deleted from the hold 0 display area during symbol stop display (sometimes referred to as symbol fixed display or symbol main stop display). Hold during The changing icon may be deleted from the display area, and the holding icon displayed in the hold 0 display area to the hold M display area may be deleted once or a plurality of times during the symbol change display. Similarly, the hold icon displayed in the hold 2 display area is displayed in the hold 1 display area when the hold is reduced, that is, normally, the hold 1 display is displayed. The hold icon displayed in each of the area to the hold M display area is displayed in each of the hold 0 display area to the hold M-1 display area when the hold is reduced. The hold icon displayed in the area is displayed in the hold M-1 display area or suddenly displayed while the hold reduction animation is performed when the hold is reduced, and the mode (color, pattern) of the hold icon is displayed. Changed Or displayed, it may be or appear to change the size.

  When a game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 210 or the special figure 2 starting port 212 in a state where the symbol variation display is not performed, the holding icon corresponding to the holding increased by the winning is once in the holding 1 display area. Next, the pending icon is a floating icon display area (the pending display area, the pending 0 display area) as a floating icon (sometimes referred to as “the pending icon” or simply “the pending icon”). Is displayed. When a game ball wins the special figure 1 starting port 210 or the special figure 2 starting port 212 in a state where the symbol variation display is not performed, the holding icon corresponding to the holding increased by the winning is the holding 1 Instead of being displayed in the display area, it may be configured to be displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon.

  As shown in FIG. 104, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is provided with six types of hold icons. FIG. 104 is a table showing a list of hold icons. The table shown in FIG. 104 includes “name”, “mode”, and “meaning” items. The “name” column in the left column of the figure indicates the name of each hold icon. The names of the six types of hold icons are “white circle hold icon”, “black circle hold icon”, “button hold icon”, “triangular hold icon”, “face hold icon”, and “haniwa hold icon”.

  The column of “mode” in the middle of the figure shows the display mode of each hold icon. The “display mode” of the white circle hold icon is a white circular display mode. The “display mode” of the black circle hold icon is a black circular display mode. The “display mode” of the button hold icon is a display mode imitating the chance button 136. The “display mode” of the triangle hold icon is a display mode of white regular triangles. The “display mode” of the face hold icon is a display mode of the face of the character. The “display mode” of the Minowa hold icon is a display mode of the character's Minowa pattern.

  In the right column of the figure, the “Meaning” column indicates the meaning of each hold icon. The “meaning” of the white circle hold icon is “default hold icon” (normal hold icon). In this embodiment, six types of hold icons are provided, and the white circle hold icon is the hold icon with the lowest jackpot reliability among the six types of hold icons.

  The “meaning” of the black circle hold icon is “high change rate hold icon”. The pachinko machine 100 can execute a hold change effect display (a hold effect of a sixth embodiment to be described later) that changes the hold icon to another type of hold icon, and the black circle hold icon is a white circle hold icon, a triangle This is a hold icon that has a higher probability of changing to a white circle hold icon, a button hold icon, a triangle hold icon, a face hold icon, or a soot hold icon than the hold icon, face hold icon, and soot hold icon. The same applies to the hold effect in the sixth embodiment to be described later. The black circle hold icon may not change to the white circle hold icon in the hold change effect display. Also, the big hit reliability when the black circle hold icon is displayed in the hold 0 display area may be the same as the big hit reliability of the white circle hold icon, and the display mode when the hold icon is finally erased is the black circle hold icon. The jackpot reliability in the case where it is left may be the same as the jackpot reliability of the white circle hold icon.

  The “meaning” of the button hold icon is “button press change hold icon”. The button hold icon is a white circle hold icon, a black circle hold icon, a triangle hold icon, a face hold icon, or a white circle hold icon, a black circle hold icon, a triangle hold icon, a face hold icon, It is a hold icon with a high probability of changing to a Minowa hold icon. The button hold icon may change to another type of hold icon when the player operates the chance button 136. The button hold icon may not change to a white circle hold icon, and the button hold icon may not change to a black circle hold icon. Further, the big hit reliability when the button hold icon is displayed in the hold 0 display area may be the same as the big hit reliability of the white circle hold icon, and the display mode when the hold icon is finally erased may be used. The jackpot reliability when the button hold icon remains as it may be the same as the jackpot reliability of the white circle hold icon. Further, even if there is no operation of the chance button 136 by the player, a certain hold display area (for example, a hold 0 display area, a hold 1 display area, a hold 2 display area, or a hold 0 is displayed according to one or more hold reductions. The button hold icon changes to another type of hold icon when a certain condition is satisfied (for example, hold decrease, hold increase) when displayed in any one of the display area to the hold N display area) It may be configured.

  The “meaning” of the triangle hold icon is “medium reliability hold icon”. The triangular hold icon is a hold icon having a higher jackpot reliability than the white circle hold icon, the black circle hold icon, and the button hold icon, and a hold icon having a lower jackpot reliability than the face hold icon and the minow hold icon. The triangular hold icon is a hold icon that may change from any one type of hold icon, multiple types of hold icons, or all types of hold icons among the white circle hold icon, the black circle hold icon, and the button hold icon. .

  The “meaning” of the face hold icon is “high reliability hold icon”. The face hold icon is a hold icon having a higher jackpot reliability than the white circle hold icon, the black circle hold icon, the button hold icon, and the triangular hold icon, and is a hold icon having a lower jackpot reliability than the Minowa hold icon. The face hold icon may be changed from any one of the hold icon, one of the hold icon, the hold icon, the button icon, the triangle icon, the hold icon of multiple types, or the hold icon of all types. It is.

  The “meaning” of the Minowa hold icon is a “big hit fixed hold icon”. The Minowa hold icon has the highest jackpot reliability among the six types of hold icons, and the big hit reliability of the Minowa hold icon is 100%. In the symbol change display of the hold corresponding to the Minowa hold icon, the big hit symbol mode is always confirmed and displayed. Minowa hold icon changes from white circle hold icon, black circle hold icon, button hold icon, triangle hold icon, face hold icon, one type of hold icon, multiple types of hold icons, or all types of hold icons There is a hold icon. It should be noted that even if the white circle hold icon changes, it does not have to be a Minowa hold icon.

  The types of hold icons are not limited to the six types shown in FIG. 104, and seven or more hold icons may be provided, or less than six hold icons may be provided. Note that each of the six types of hold icons shown in FIG. 104 is composed of one part, but one hold icon may be composed of a plurality of parts.

  The name of the hold icon can be changed as appropriate. For example, a white circle hold icon is referred to as a first hold icon, a certain white circle hold icon is referred to as a first hold icon, and another white circle hold icon is referred to as a second hold icon. It may be referred to as a hold icon, or six types of hold icons may be referred to as a plurality of types of hold icons, or one white circle hold icon and another white circle hold icon may be captured and referred to as a plurality of types of hold icons. Alternatively, one of the six types of hold icons may be referred to as a third hold icon or a third type of hold icon. Similarly, when there are four hold full tanks, the hold 0 display area is referred to as the first hold display area, the hold 4 display area is referred to as the fifth hold display area, or the hold 0 display area to the hold 4 display area. May be referred to as a plurality of hold display areas, or the hold 1 display area to the hold 4 display area may be referred to as a plurality of hold display areas. When there are eight reserved full tanks, the reserved 8 display area is referred to as the ninth reserved display area, the reserved 0 display area to the reserved 8 display area is referred to as a plurality of reserved display areas, or the reserved 1 display area to the reserved 8 display. The area may be referred to as a plurality of hold display areas, or the hold 1 display area to the hold 7 display area may be referred to as a plurality of hold display areas.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 (a) to 105 (l) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 105A to 105, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 105 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the determination result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is wrong. Informed. In the state shown in FIG. 105 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 4, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. In the present embodiment, a special figure 1 holding icon display area is provided in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The special figure 1 hold icon display area is divided into four areas from the left: a hold 1 display area, a hold 2 display area, a hold 3 display area, and a hold 4 display area. In the hold 1 display area, a hold icon corresponding to the hold of the first special figure 1 variable game with the hold order is displayed, and in the hold 2 display area, the hold order of the second special figure 1 variable game corresponding to the hold is displayed. The hold icon is displayed, the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the third special figure 1 variable game is displayed in the hold 3 display area, and the hold figure is changed in the hold 4 display area. A hold icon corresponding to the game hold is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 105 (a), since the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 4, the hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area, and the hold 3 A hold icon b3 is displayed in the display area, and a hold icon b4 is displayed in the hold 4 display area. The hold icons b1 to b4 are black circle hold icons shown in FIG. Note that the black circle hold icon may be a default hold icon (normal hold icon). In this case, the big hit reliability of the black circle hold icon is the lowest among the plurality of types of hold icons. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an empty background image.

  FIG. 105 (b) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In this example, the display of the special symbol display device 208 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is started almost simultaneously with the start of the variable symbol display of the special symbol 1 (special symbol 1 variable game). A logo image j3 of “Yoshimune” which is the model name of the pachinko machine 100 (title logo, the title of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is “CR Yoshimune”) is displayed on the display screen. The logo image j3 in this example is displayed as a prefetching preview image. The logo image j3 is displayed so as to overlap with a decorative pattern of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”. The logo image j3 may be displayed before the start of the special figure 1 variable game.

  FIG. 105 (c) shows a state where the decorative symbol variation display is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative display of the decorative symbols is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon decreasing animation is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area. . A logo image j3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol variation display. In the hold icon decreasing animation, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold is deleted, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area, and the hold icon b4 is displayed. Moved and displayed in the hold 3 display area. In the present embodiment, the hold icon corresponding to the digested hold is not displayed as the changing icon during the symbol change display. Note that the hold icon corresponding to the digested hold may be displayed as a changing icon during the symbol change display.

  FIG. 105 (d) shows a state in which the hold change effect display is started. The hold change effect display is an effect display that is displayed as a prefetch notice, and is displayed to change the hold icon corresponding to the hold to be prefetched. In the hold change effect display of this example, an animation in which a beam is emitted from the logo image j3 toward the hold icon b2 indicating the hold to be notified is displayed, and the smoke screen effect overlaps with the hold icon b2 that the beam hit directly. An animation for displaying an image (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a “smoke screen image”) is displayed. Since the hold icon b2 is entirely overlapped with the smoke screen image, it cannot be visually recognized. The hold change effect display is a change animation that changes the hold icon. Note that the hold change effect display may not be displayed as an animation, and the hold change effect display may be displayed as a still image.

  FIG. 105 (e) shows a state in which the hold icon b2 is changed by the hold change effect display. The hold icon b2 is changed from the black circle hold icon shown in FIG. 104 to the Minowa hold icon. The Minowa hold icon is a hold icon of a prefetch notice mode, and is displayed only when the prefetch result related to the corresponding hold is a big hit. When the change of the change target hold icon (the hold icon b2 in this example) is completed, the hold change effect display ends.

  FIG. 105 (f) shows a state where the logo image j3 has been deleted. The decorative symbol display is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 105 (g) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 105 (h) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 105 (i) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol mode, is stopped and displayed (this stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is correct is out of place. It is reported that there is.

  FIG. 105 (j) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative display of the decorative symbols is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon decreasing animation is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area. . In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold is deleted, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area.

  FIG. 105 (k) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208a. Show. In this example, for example, super reach production display is started. The description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted.

  FIG. 105 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished after the super reach effect display is finished. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”, which is a big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed (this stop indication), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is correct is a big hit It is reported that there is.

  In this example, the hold icon changes in the hold change effect display, and the symbol variation display started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon (in this example, the Minowa hold icon) that is the pre-reading notice mode is digested from the black circle hold icon Finally, the big hit symbol form is confirmed and displayed. Note that there may be a case where the symbol variation display started after digestion of the hold corresponding to the hold icon (for example, the triangle hold icon) having the pre-reading mode is finally dismissed and the symbol mode is displayed. Rather than the symbol variation display that is started after digestion of the hold corresponding to the normal hold icon (for example, the black circle hold icon), the pre-read mode hold icon (for example, the triangle hold icon, the face hold icon, the Minowa hold icon) The symbol variation display that is started after the suspension corresponding to) is digested may be configured such that the big hit symbol pattern is finally displayed more easily. The symbol variation display that is started after digestion of the hold corresponding to the hold icon (for example, the Minowa hold icon) having a pre-read mode among a plurality of types of pre-read modes is finally displayed as a decisive display. It may be configured.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modification of the present embodiment will be described. 105 (e ′) to (l ′) and (l ″) show time-series examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification. 105 (e ') to (l') and (l "), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative design display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 105 (e ′) shows a state continued from FIG. 105 (d). In this example, the hold icon b2 is not changed even when the hold change effect display shown in FIG. 105 (d) is displayed. Thus, the hold icon may not change when the hold change effect display is displayed. The hold change effect display of this example ends after the animation display of the beam and the animation display of the smoke screen are erased. The hold change effect display in which the hold icon does not change is a hold change failure effect display. On the other hand, the hold change effect display in which the hold icon shown in FIGS. 105 (d) and 105 (e) changes is a hold change success effect display.

  FIG. 105 (f ′) shows a state where the logo image j3 has been deleted. The decorative symbol display is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 105 (g ′) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 105 (h ′) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 105 (i ′) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol pattern, is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the determination result of the special symbol 1 fluctuation display is incorrect. ing.

  FIG. 105 (j ') shows a state in which the hold of the first special figure 1 is consumed and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative display of the decorative symbols is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon decreasing animation is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area. . In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold is deleted, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area.

  In FIG. 105 (k ′), “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, then “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208a, and reach effect display is started. Is shown. In this example, super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 105 (k ′). The description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted.

  FIG. 105 (l ′) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”, which is a big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed (this stop indication), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is correct is a big hit It is reported that there is.

  In this example, the hold icon does not change even after the hold change effect display is displayed. As described above, the hold change effect display is provided with two effect patterns: a hold change success effect display of a successful pattern in which the hold icon changes, and a hold change failure effect display of a failure pattern in which the hold icon does not change. . The hold change effect display of this example is a hold change failure effect display of a failure pattern, and is a symbol variation display in which the hold corresponding to the black circle hold icon which is the normal mode that has not changed in the hold change effect display is digested and started. Finally, the big hit symbol form is confirmed and displayed. In addition, the hold change effect display is a failure pattern, and the hold change effect display is a success pattern rather than the symbol variation display started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon that did not change in the hold change effect display, The symbol variation display started after digestion of the hold corresponding to the hold icon changed in the hold change effect display is configured such that the big hit symbol pattern is finally easily displayed.

  FIG. 105 (l ″) shows an example of an effect when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is in a state continued from FIG. 105 (k ′). The special figure 1 variable game has ended, and the decoration pattern “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It is informed that the determination result is out of place.

  In this example, the hold change effect display is a hold change failure effect display of a failure pattern, and the symbol pattern display finally determined by the symbol variation display started after the hold corresponding to the black circle hold icon which is the normal mode is digested. It is displayed. In addition, even if the hold icon has the same normal mode, the change of hold is more than the symbol variation display that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon in the normal mode is digested without going through the hold change failure effect display. The symbol variation display that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is in the normal mode through the failure effect display is started may be configured so that the big hit symbol mode is finally displayed in a definite manner.

  Moreover, even if the hold icon corresponding to the hold icon corresponding to the hold icon that has become the normal mode through the hold change failure display is changed to the hold icon with the pre-reading notice mode by the hold change success display, the hold change failure is the same. Corresponds to the hold icon that has become the normal mode through the hold change failure effect display at least once than the symbol variation display that has been started after digestion of the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is in the normal mode without performing the effect display The symbol variation display that has been started after digestion of the hold may be configured so that the big hit symbol mode is finally displayed in a definite manner.

  Moreover, even if the hold icon has the same look-ahead mode, it is more than the symbol variation display that has been started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has a look-ahead mode without the hold change failure effect display being digested. The hold corresponding to the hold icon (for example, the hold icon that has been in the pre-read mode before the hold change failure display is executed) that has been in the pre-read mode even after the change failure display is started and started. The displayed symbol variation display may be configured so that the jackpot symbol pattern is finally displayed in a definite manner.

  In addition, the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has been pre-read through the hold change failure effect display (for example, the hold icon that has been in the pre-read form before the hold change failure display is executed) is digested. Even if it becomes a hold icon with another pre-reading notice mode having higher jackpot reliability due to the hold change success effect display before, it is the same, and the hold icon having the pre-read notice mode without the hold change failure effect display The hold icon (for example, before the hold change failure effect display is executed) is in a pre-reading notice mode that has undergone the hold change failure effect display at least once more than the symbol variation display started after digestion of the hold corresponding to The symbol variation display that was started after digestion of the hold corresponding to the hold icon that had been in a certain look-ahead mode from the end is the big hit symbol state There may be configured easily determined display.

  It should be noted that the character images of the lord, princess, and niece may be displayed as the pre-reading notice display in the hold change display animation. In this case, the jackpot reliability of the character image may be set higher in the order of niece, princess, and lord.

  In addition, a plurality of types of on-hold change display animations may be provided, and a plurality of types of animations may be used to display the character images of the shrine, the princess, and the samurai as a pre-reading notice effect display. When the first animation display and the second display animation are provided as the hold change display animation, the second animation may have a higher jackpot reliability or a higher hit reliability. It may be easy to change to a high hold icon.

(Example 11)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 11 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 (a) to 106 (u) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 106 (a) to 106 (u), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 106 (a) shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the determination result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is wrong. Informed. In the state shown in FIG. 106 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 4, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, four hold icons b1, b2, b3, and b4 are displayed. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area 2, the hold icon b3 is displayed in the hold 3 display area, and the hold icon b4 is displayed in the hold 4 display area. Yes. The hold icons b1 to b4 are black circle hold icons shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the black circle hold icon is a default hold icon. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an empty background image.

  FIG. 106 (b) shows a state in which the hold of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative display of the decorative symbols is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon decreasing animation is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area. . In the hold icon decreasing animation, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold is deleted, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area, and the hold icon b4 is displayed. Moved and displayed in the hold 3 display area.

  FIG. 106C shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the variation display of the decorative symbols in FIG.

  FIG. 106 (d) shows an animation of a scene where the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, the hold icon is erased, and the enemy and the enemy of the lord confront each other. This shows a state in which the effect of displaying is started. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen. The hold icon is not displayed during a part of the super reach production display.

  FIG. 106 (e) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 106 (f) shows a state where an animation of a scene where the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed. The animation of the scene where Tono loses to the enemy of Tono is a display that suggests a loss.

  FIG. 106 (g) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the display of the super reach effect. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. The normal background image is an empty background image when the wipe effect display is wiped out after the shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. By switching to the effect display, the super reach effect display ends.

  FIG. 106 (h) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w11a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w11b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w11a and w11b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w11a and w11b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbols, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image. The wipe display w11a includes a part (upper left) of the logo image of “Yoshimune”, and the wipe display w11b includes the other part (lower right) of the “Yoshimune” logo image. In the maximum wipe state, a logo image of one pattern is formed by the logo image included in the wipe display w11a and the logo image included in the wipe display w11b.

  FIG. 106 (i) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w11a and w11b is completed. The lower right end portion of the wipe display w11a and the upper left end portion of the wipe display w11b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w11a and w11b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w11a and w11b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible. When the wipe display w11a and the wipe display w11b are displayed in contact with each other in the maximum wipe state, the logo image included in the wipe display w11a and the logo image included in the wipe display w11b are continuous. A logo image of one pattern is formed by these logo images. The logo image is displayed in order to notify or suggest that a pre-reading notice effect display is displayed after wipeout. In this example, the logo image is displayed to notify that the pre-reading notice effect display of the hold change effect display is displayed after the wipeout. The logo image is a prefetching preview image.

  In this example, in the state shown in FIG. 106 (i), one game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is increased by one. As a result, the number of holds in FIG.

  FIG. 106 (j) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w11a and w11b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w11a is displayed withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w11b is displayed withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w11a and w11b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative pattern is terminated, and in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen, A certain “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” fluctuation display is started, and the hold icon is displayed again. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w11a and w11b, the display of decorative symbols, background images, hold icons, etc. on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. In the present embodiment, the logo image j3 is displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w11a and w11b is started. The logo image j3 is displayed as a prefetch notice effect display. The logo image j3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. The logo image included in the wipes w11a and w11b is an image for notifying that the logo image j3 is displayed at the time of wipeout. The logo image included in the wipes w11a and w11b has the same pattern as the logo image j3. In this way, the image for notifying that the prefetch notice effect display is displayed is displayed with the same pattern as the prefetch notice effect display. Note that the image for notifying that the pre-reading notice effect display is displayed may be displayed with a pattern related to the pre-reading notice effect display. Further, in the maximum wipe state shown in FIG. 106 (i), the number of holds in FIG. 1 has increased by 1, so that the hold icon b5 corresponding to the increased hold is displayed in the hold 4 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. ing.

  FIG. 106 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w11a and w11b is completed. After “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is displayed in a swinging manner in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the special figure 1 variation game is finished. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration” is displayed. “2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. Further, a logo image j3 is displayed overlapping “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”. The logo image j3 is displayed at the same display position as the logo image included in the wipe displays w11a and w11b in the maximum wipe state shown in FIG.

  FIG. 106 (l) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is completed and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative display of the decorative symbols is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon decreasing animation is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area. . In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold is deleted, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area, and the hold icon b5 is displayed. Moved and displayed in the hold 3 display area. The logo image j3 is displayed so as to overlap the variation display of the decorative design.

  FIG. 106 (m) shows a state in which the hold change effect display is started. The hold change effect display is displayed as a prefetch notice and is displayed to change the hold icon corresponding to the hold to be prefetched. In the hold change effect display of this example, an animation in which a beam is emitted from the logo image j3 toward the hold icon b3 corresponding to the hold to be notified is displayed, and the smoke screen image overlaps with the hold icon b3 hit directly by the beam. Is displayed. The entire hold icon b3 is overlapped with the animation display of the smoke screen image, and the entire hold icon b3 becomes invisible.

  FIG. 106 (n) shows a state in which the hold icon b3 is changed by the hold change effect display. The hold icon b3 is changed from the black circle hold icon shown in FIG. 104 to the Minowa hold icon. The hold change effect display of this example is a hold change success effect display of a success pattern. The hold change effect display ends when the change of the hold icon b3 is completed. The Minowa hold icon is displayed only when the prefetch result related to the corresponding hold is a big hit.

  FIG. 106 (o) shows a state where the logo image j3 has been deleted. The decorative symbol display is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 106 (p) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 106 (q) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 106 (r) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. Prior to the shift symbol pattern being stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3-decoration 2—decoration 2” is displayed in a swinging manner in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. , “Decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol pattern, is stopped and displayed (this stop display), and it is reported that the determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is out of date.

  FIG. 106 (s) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is completed and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative display of the decorative symbols is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon decreasing animation is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area. . In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold is deleted, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area.

  FIG. 106 (t) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208a. Show. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the variation display of the decorative symbols in FIG. The description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted.

  FIG. 106 (u) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after the super reach effect display. The determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”, which is a big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed (this stop indication), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is correct is a big hit It is reported that there is. The pachinko machine 100 starts a jackpot game (hit operation) after displaying the stoppage of the jackpot symbol.

  In the present embodiment, a logo image j3 that is a pre-reading notice effect display that was not displayed by wipe-in is displayed together with the wipe-out, and the hold icon is changed from the default black circle hold icon to the pre-reading notice mode by using the hold change effect display. An animation that changes to is displayed. The logo images included in the wipe displays w11a and w11b and the logo image j3 displayed in the hold change effect display are the same display mode.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first modification of the present embodiment will be described. 106 (h ′) to (n ′) show an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in time series. In each of FIGS. 106 (h ′) to (n ′), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 106 (h ′) shows a state continued from FIG. 106 (g). In FIG. 106 (h ′), a wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbol, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image.

  FIG. 106 (i ′) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible.

  In this example, at the time shown in FIG. 106 (i ′), one game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is increased by one. As a result, the number of holds in FIG.

  FIG. 106 (j ′) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative design is terminated, and in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen, A certain “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” fluctuation display is started, and the hold icon is displayed again. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of decorative symbols, background images, hold icons, etc. on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. In the present modification, the logo image j3 is displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 with the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b. The logo image j3 is displayed as a prefetch notice effect display. The logo image j3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 106 (i ′), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is increased by 1, and the hold icon b5 corresponding to the increased hold is displayed in the hold 4 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. It is displayed.

  FIG. 106 (k ′) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w11a and w11b is completed. After “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is displayed in a swinging manner in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the special figure 1 variation game is finished. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration” is displayed. “2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. Further, a logo image j3 is displayed overlapping “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”.

  FIG. 106 (l ′) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is completed and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative display of the decorative symbols is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon decreasing animation is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area. . In the hold icon decreasing animation, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold is deleted, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area, and the hold icon b4 is displayed. Moved and displayed in the hold 3 display area. The logo image j3 is displayed so as to overlap the variation display of the decorative design.

  FIG. 106 (m ′) shows a state in which the hold change effect display is started. In the hold change effect display of this example, an animation in which a beam is emitted from the logo image j3 toward the hold icon b3 corresponding to the hold to be notified is displayed, and the smoke screen image overlaps with the hold icon b3 hit directly by the beam. Is displayed. The entire hold icon b3 is overlapped with the animation display of the smoke screen image, and the entire hold icon b3 becomes invisible.

  FIG. 106 (n ′) shows a state in which the animation display in the hold change effect display is finished and the hold icon b3 becomes visible again. Since the hold change effect display in this example is a hold change failure effect display which is a failure pattern, the hold icon b3 does not change and remains a black circle hold icon.

  In this example, in the wipe effect display that is displayed immediately before the start of the hold change effect display, the wipe display w7a and w7b of the pattern not related to the logo image j3 are displayed. Thus, in the wipe effect display displayed before the start of the hold change effect display, the wipe display of the pattern not related to the pre-reading notice image (the logo image j3 in this example) in the hold change effect display (in this example, the wipe display) The pattern (in this example, the wipe display w11a, w11b including the logo image having the same pattern as the logo image j3) is displayed in comparison with the case where w7a, w7b) is displayed. In this case, the pending change success effect display is easier to display. In the wipe effect display that is displayed before the start of the hold change effect display, a wipe display of a pattern (in this example, the wipe display w7a, unrelated to the pre-reading preview image (the logo image j3 in this example) in the hold change effect display). The pattern (in this example, the wipe display w11a, w11b including the logo image of the same pattern as the logo image j3) is displayed in comparison with the case where w7b) is displayed. On the other hand, in the symbol variation display of the pre-reading notice object, the big hit symbol mode is easily displayed.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second modification of the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 106 (l ″) to (m ″) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 106 (l ″) to (m ″), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 106 (l ″) is a state that continues from FIG. 106 (k) or a state that continues from FIG. 106 (k ′). Indicates a state where is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. The logo image j3 is displayed so as to overlap the variation display of the decorative design.

  FIG. 106 (m ′) shows a state where the logo image j3 is erased. The hold change effect display of this example is a hold change failure effect display which is a failure pattern. In the hold change failure effect display of this example, the logo image j3 is deleted without displaying the animation in which the beam is shot toward the hold icon and the animation of the smoke screen image, and the hold change effect display ends.

  In the hold change failure effect display of this example, the animation in which the beam is shot and the animation overlapped with the smoke screen image hold icon are omitted. In this way, at least part of the animation may be omitted in the hold change failure effect display. Thereby, the pachinko machine 100 may be able to make the player notice early that the effect is a failure pattern so as not to give excessive expectations to the player.

Example 12
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 12 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 (a) to 107 (u) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 107 (a) to (u), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 107 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the fluctuation fluctuation display of the decorative pattern in the off-symbol pattern mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol, is displayed in a fluctuation manner (temporary stop display) in a display manner that swings to the left and right. . Further, in the state shown in FIG. 107 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 4, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, four hold icons b1, b2, b3, and b4 are displayed. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area 2, the hold icon b3 is displayed in the hold 3 display area, and the hold icon b4 is displayed in the hold 4 display area. Yes. The hold icons b1 to b4 are black circle hold icons shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the black circle hold icon is a default hold icon. A changing icon display area for displaying a changing icon is provided above the special figure 1 reserved icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 107 (a), the changing icon a1 in the display mode of the black circle hold icon is displayed in the changing icon display area. In this embodiment, the changing icon in the display mode of the black circle pending icon is the default changing icon (the changing icon in the normal mode). The changing icon a1 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icons b1 to b4. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an empty background image.

  FIG. 107 (b) shows a state where the changing icon a1 is deleted. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 to 208c, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” which is an outlier symbol mode is displayed. In this example, the changing icon a <b> 1 is erased during the fluctuation change display of the decorative symbol in the off-pattern design.

  FIG. 107 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol pattern, is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the determination result of the special symbol 1 fluctuation display is incorrect. Yes.

  FIG. 107 (d) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is completed and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold icon reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a2. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. The changing icon a2 may be enlarged during the movement to the changing icon display area, or may be enlarged after the movement to the changing icon display area is completed. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 3 display area.

  FIG. 107 (e) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 107 (e).

  In FIG. 107 (f), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, the changing icon and the hold icon are deleted, and the enemy and the enemy of the lord confront each other. This shows a state in which an effect in which an animation of a scene to be displayed is started. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen. The changing icon and the hold icon are hidden during a part of the super reach effect display.

  FIG. 107 (g) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 107 (h) shows a state in which an animation of a scene where the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed. The animation of the scene where Tono loses to the enemy of Tono is a display that suggests a loss.

  FIG. 107 (i) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the display of the super reach effect. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. Further, in this example, in the state shown in FIG. 107 (i), one game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is increased by one. As a result, the number of holds in FIG.

  FIG. 107 (j) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w11a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w11b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w11a and w11b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w11a and w11b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbols, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image. The wipe display w11a includes a part (upper left) of the logo image of “Yoshimune”, and the wipe display w11b includes the other part (lower right) of the “Yoshimune” logo image. A logo image of one pattern is formed by the logo image included in the wipe display w11a and the logo image included in the wipe display w11b. The normal background image is an empty background image when the wipe effect display is wiped out after the shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. By switching to the effect display, the super reach effect display ends.

  In this example, the patterns of the wipe displays w11a and w11b including the logo image are the patterns for the pre-reading notice, and the wipe displays w11a and w11b for the pre-reading notices are displayed as the pre-reading notice display. Note that the wipe display for the pre-reading notice is not limited to the wipe displays w11a and w11b, and may include an image of the face of the princess of the character. Also, for example, when the patterns of the wipe displays w7a and w7b shown in FIGS. 106 (h ′) and (i ′) are normal patterns, the pattern of the wipe display for the pre-reading notice is different from the normal pattern. It only has to be.

  FIG. 107 (k) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w11a and w11b is completed. The lower right end portion of the wipe display w11a and the upper left end portion of the wipe display w11b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w11a and w11b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w11a and w11b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible. When the wipe display w11a and the wipe display w11b are displayed in contact with each other in the maximum wipe state, the logo image included in the wipe display w11a and the logo image included in the wipe display w11b are continuous. A logo image of one pattern is formed by these logo images.

  FIG. 107 (l) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w11a and w11b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w11a is displayed withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w11b is displayed withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w11a and w11b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative pattern is terminated, and in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen, A certain “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” fluctuation display is started, and the held icon and the changing icon are displayed again. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w11a and w11b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, the hold icon, the changing icon, etc. on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. In the present embodiment, the logo image j3 is displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w11a and w11b is started. The logo image j3 is displayed as a pre-reading notice display in FIGS. 107 (l) to (n). The logo image j3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. The logo image included in the wipes w11a and w11b also notifies that the logo image j3 is displayed at the time of wipeout. The logo image included in the wipes w11a and w11b has the same pattern as the logo image j3. In this way, the image for notifying that the prefetch notice effect display is displayed is displayed with the same pattern as the prefetch notice effect display. Note that the image for notifying that the pre-reading notice effect display is displayed may be displayed with a pattern related to the pre-reading notice effect display. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 107 (i), the number of holds in FIG. 1 has increased by 1, so that the hold icon b5 corresponding to the increased hold is displayed in the hold 4 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. ing.

  FIG. 107 (m) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w11a and w11b is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol design, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that fluctuates left and right. A logo image j3 is displayed overlapping “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”. The logo image j3 is displayed at the same display position as the logo image included in the wipe displays w11a and w11b in the maximum wipe state shown in FIG. 107 (i).

  FIG. 107 (n) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. After “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is displayed in a swinging manner in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the special figure 1 variation game is finished. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration” is displayed. “2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. Further, a logo image j3 is displayed overlapping “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”.

  FIG. 107 (o) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold icon reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a3. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area, and the hold icon b5 is moved and displayed in the hold 3 display area. The logo image j3 is displayed so as to overlap the variation display of the decorative design. In FIGS. 107 (o) to (q), the logo image j3 is displayed as a notice effect display of the change.

  FIG. 107 (p) shows a state in which the changing icon change effect display is started. The changing icon change effect display is displayed as a notice of the change, and is displayed to change the changing icon. In the changing icon change effect display in this example, an animation in which a beam is emitted from the logo image j3 toward the changing icon a3 is displayed, and the animation of the smoke screen image is overlapped with the changing icon a3 hit directly by the beam. Is displayed. The entire changing icon a3 is overlapped with the animation display of the smoke screen image, and the entire changing icon a3 becomes invisible. The display mode of the changing icon change effect during the change is the same as the display mode of the hold change effect display shown in FIGS. 105 (d), 106 (m), and 106 (m ′). In addition, the display mode of the changing icon change effect may be different from the display mode of the hold change effect display.

  FIG. 107 (q) shows a state where the changing icon a3 is changed by the changing icon change effect display. The changing icon a3 is changed from the display mode of the black circle hold icon shown in FIG. 104 to the display mode of the mined wheel hold icon. The changing icon of the display mode of the hold icon of the Minowa is the changing icon of the notice mode. The changing icon change effect display in this example is a changing icon change success effect display during change of the success pattern. Further, the changing icon change effect display ends when the change of the changing icon a3 is completed. The changing icon of the display mode of the Minowa hold icon is displayed only when the success / failure determination result of the special figure changing game being executed is a big hit. Note that the changing icon change effect display during change may be provided with the changing icon change failure display during change of the failure pattern, similarly to the hold change effect display. During the symbol variation display, when the variation icon change success representation display is displayed, the big hit symbol pattern is more easily determined and displayed in the symbol variation display than when the variation icon change failure representation display is displayed. ing.

  FIG. 107 (r) shows a state where the logo image j3 has been deleted. The decorative symbol display is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 107 (s) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 107 (t) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 107 (t). The description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted.

  FIG. 107 (u) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished after the super reach effect display is finished. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Prior to the jackpot symbol display being stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3-decoration 3—decoration 3” is displayed in a swinging manner in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Then, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”, which is a jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed, and it is reported that the determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is a big hit. The pachinko machine 100 starts a jackpot game (hit operation) after displaying the stoppage of the jackpot symbol.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first modification of the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 107 (j ′) to (p ′) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to this modification in time series. 107 (j ') to (p'), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 107 (j ′) shows a state continued from FIG. 107 (i). In FIG. 107 (j ′), a wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbol, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image.

  FIG. 107 (k ′) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible.

  FIG. 107 (l ′) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative design is terminated, and in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen, A certain “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” fluctuation display is started, and the hold icon is displayed again. The changing icon a2 is not displayed after the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe effect display in this example is started. During the symbol variation display, when the changing icon corresponding to the symbol variation display is not displayed after the wipeout, the variation icon corresponding to the symbol variation display is displayed after the wipeout. The big hit symbol pattern may be easily displayed in the symbol variation display. In the case where the changing icon corresponding to the symbol fluctuation display is not displayed after the wipeout during the symbol fluctuation display, the changing icon corresponding to the symbol fluctuation display is displayed after the wipeout. However, the revival effect display (reverse effect display) after the end of the wipe effect may be easily displayed.

  By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of decorative symbols, background images, hold icons, etc. on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. In the present modification, the logo image j3 is displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 with the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b. The logo image j3 is displayed as a prefetch notice effect display in FIGS. 107 (l ′) to (m ′). The logo image j3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 107 (i), the number of holds in FIG. 1 has increased by 1, and the hold icon b5 corresponding to the increased hold is displayed in the hold 4 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Has been.

  FIG. 107 (m ′) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol pattern, is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the determination result of the special symbol 1 fluctuation display is incorrect. ing. Further, a logo image j3 is displayed overlapping “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”.

  FIG. 107 (n ′) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is consumed and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold icon reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a3. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area, and the hold icon b5 is moved and displayed in the hold 3 display area. The logo image j3 is displayed so as to overlap the variation display of the decorative design. The logo image j3 is displayed as a notice effect display of the change in FIGS. 107 (n ′) to (p ′).

  FIG. 107 (o ′) shows a state in which the changing icon change effect display is started. The changing icon change effect display is displayed as a notice of the change, and is displayed to change the changing icon. In the changing icon change effect display in this example, an animation in which a beam is emitted from the logo image j3 toward the changing icon a3 is displayed, and the animation of the smoke screen image is overlapped with the changing icon a3 hit directly by the beam. Is displayed. The entire changing icon a3 is overlapped with the animation display of the smoke screen image, and the entire changing icon a3 becomes invisible.

  FIG. 107 (p ′) shows a state where the animation display in the changing icon change effect display is finished and the changing icon a3 becomes visible again. Since the changing icon change effect display in this example is a changing icon change failure effect display that is a failure pattern, the changing icon a3 does not change and remains in the display state of the black circle pending icon.

  In this example, the wipe display w7a and w7b of the pattern not related to the logo image j3 are displayed in the wipe effect display displayed immediately before the start of the changing icon change effect display. In this way, in the wipe effect display that is displayed before the start of the changing icon change effect display, the wipe display of the pattern (in this example, the logo image j3) that is not related to the notice image in the changing icon change effect display (in this example). , A display related to the notice image in the changing icon change effect display (in this example, a wipe display w11a, w11b including a logo image having the same pattern as the logo image j3) than when the wipe display w7a, w7b) is displayed. When “” is displayed, it is easier to display the changing icon change success display. In the wipe effect display that is displayed before the start of the changing icon change effect display, a wipe display of a pattern that is not related to the notice image (the logo image j3 in this example) in the changing icon change effect display (in this example, wipe) The display related to the notice image in the changing icon change effect display (in this example, the wipe display w11a, w11b including the logo image having the same pattern as the logo image j3) is displayed rather than the display w7a, w7b). In this case, the big hit symbol pattern is more easily displayed in the symbol variation display being executed.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second modification of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 107 (o ″) to (p ″) shows an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 107 (o ″) to (p ″), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 107 (o ″) shows a state continued from FIG. 107 (n) or a state continued from FIG. 107 (m ′). FIG. 107 (o ″) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is completed and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. The logo image j3 is displayed so as to overlap the variation display of the decorative design. The logo image j3 is displayed as a notice effect display of the change in FIGS. 107 (o ″) to (p ″).

  FIG. 107 (p ″) shows a state where the logo image j3 has been deleted. The changing icon change effect display in this example is a changing icon change failure effect display that is a failure pattern. In the changing icon change effect display in this example, the logo image j3 is deleted without displaying the animation of the beam being shot toward the changing icon and the animation of the smoke screen image, and the changing icon change effect display ends. .

  In the changing icon change failure effect display in this example, the animation in which the beam is shot and the animation in which the smoke screen image overlaps the changing icon are omitted. In this way, in the changing icon change failure effect display, at least a part of the animation may be omitted. Thereby, the pachinko machine 100 may be able to make the player notice early that the effect is a failure pattern so as not to give excessive expectations to the player.

Note that even if the icon is changing in the normal mode, the changing icon change failure in the changing state is more than the symbol change display in which the changing icon in the normal mode is displayed without passing the changing icon change failure effect. The symbol variation display in which the changing icon that is in the normal mode through the effects is displayed may be configured such that the big hit symbol mode is finally displayed in a definite manner.
Even if the changing icon, which is in the normal mode after the changing icon change failure production, becomes the changing icon in the notification mode by the changing icon success production by the end of the symbol fluctuation display, the changing icon change is the same. The symbol variation display in which the changing icon is displayed at least once after the variation in the icon change failure effect is displayed at least once than the symbol variation display in which the variation icon that is in the normal mode without passing the failure effect is displayed. The jackpot symbol pattern may be configured to be easily displayed.
Even if it is a changing icon that has the same notice mode, it changes more than the symbol change display that displays the changing icon that is in the notification mode without the changing icon change failure effect or the changing icon change success effect. A graphic in which a changing icon (for example, a changing icon that has been in a certain notice state before the changing icon change effect is executed) that is in a certain notice form even after a medium icon change failure effect is displayed is displayed. The variable display may be configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is finally displayed in a definite manner.
The changing icon that is in the notice mode even after the changing icon change effect is changed (for example, the changing icon that has been in the notice form before the changing icon change effect is executed) Even if the changing icon succeeds before the display is finished, the same icon is displayed. The changing icon (for example, the changing icon) having the notice mode that has undergone the changing icon change failure effect at least once than the symbol changing display in which the changing icon that is changing the notice is displayed. The symbol variation display in which the variation icon that was in a certain notice mode) was displayed before the change failure presentation was executed is finally a big hit chart Embodiments may be configured easily determined displayed.
There is a hold corresponding to a pre-reading notice mode or a changing icon having a notice form rather than the probability that the jackpot symbol form is determined and displayed after the symbol change display that starts after the hold corresponding to the changing icon having the default form is digested. It may be configured such that the probability that the jackpot symbol pattern is determined and displayed after the symbol variation display started after digestion is higher.

(Example 13)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 13 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 (a) to 108 (n) show examples of performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 108A to 108N, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 108 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the determination result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is wrong. Informed. In the state shown in FIG. 108 (a), the reserved number in FIG. 1 is 1, for example, and the reserved number in FIG. 2 is 0. In each figure of FIG. 108, the display of the hold icon and the changing icon in the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an empty background image.

  FIG. 108 (b) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed.

  FIG. 108C shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching the reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG.

  FIG. 108 (d) shows an effect in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and the animation of the scene where the lord and the enemy of the lord confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

  FIG. 108 (e) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 108 (f) shows a state in which a display suggesting a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, as a display suggesting a loss, an animation of a scene where the lord loses to the enemy of the lord, and “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a deviation of the symbol pattern in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The fluctuation is displayed in a display manner that swings up and down. After the fluctuation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the background image becomes a normal effect display of an empty background image before and after the wipe effect display. The display of the super reach effect is ended by switching.

  FIG. 108 (g) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbol, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image.

  FIG. 108 (h) shows a state where the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible.

  FIG. 108 (i) shows a state where the wipe effect display of the wipe displays w <b> 13 a and w <b> 13 b is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w13a is started from the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w13b is started from the upper right corner of the display screen. Thus, in this embodiment, two wipe effect displays are displayed. The wipe effect display by the first wipe display w7a and w7b is the first wipe, and the wipe effect display by the second wiping display 13a and 13b is the second wipe. In this embodiment, after the wipe effect display of wipe displays w7a and w7b reaches the maximum wipe state of the first wipe, the wipe display different from the wipe displays w7a and w7b (in this example, wipe displays w13a and w13b) appears. Display starts. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the first wipe, and the start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w13a and w13b is the start of the second wipe. The wipe displays w13a and w13b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe the wipe displays w7a and w7b. Thus, the wipe display of the first wipe is wiped out by the wipe display of the second wipe.

  The wipe display w13a includes a plurality of princess face images (two in this example), and the wipe display w13b includes a plurality of princess face images (two in this example). In this example, the patterns of the wipe displays w7a and w7b in the first wipe are different from the patterns of the wipe displays w13a and w13b.

  FIG. 108 (j) shows a state in which the wipe displays w13a and w13b are spread so as to gradually cover the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The wipe display w13a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the lower left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w13b is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper right corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen. .

  FIG. 108 (k) shows the maximum wipe state of the second wipe in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w13a and w13b is completed. The upper right end of the wipe display w13a and the lower left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w13a and w13b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w13a and w13b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the first wipe wipe displays w7a and w7b become invisible.

  FIG. 108 (l) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w13a and w13b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w13a is displayed withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w13b is displayed withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper right corner of the display screen. With the start of withdrawal display of the second wipe display w13a and w13b, the wipe display w7a and w7b of the first wipe are deleted, the background image becomes an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative design is terminated, and the display of the decorative design display device 208 is displayed. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center of the screen, the swing variation display of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” which is a big hit symbol mode is started. By starting withdrawal display of the wipe displays w13a and w13b, the display of decorative symbols, background images, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible.

  In this example, before the start of the wipe effect, as shown in FIGS. 108 (f) and (g), the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c are “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol pattern. As shown in FIG. 108 (l), “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a big hit symbol form, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c after the start of the wipe effect. Is displayed. The variation display of the jackpot symbol is a display that suggests a jackpot. Once the variation variation display of the symbol pattern is displayed once, the variation display of the variation variation of the jackpot symbol is displayed as a reverse effect display. It is.

  FIG. 108 (m) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w13a and w13b is completed. The wipe display w13a shrinks toward the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w13b shrinks toward the upper right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. In this example, the completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w13a and w13b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”, which is a big hit symbol, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The fluctuation variation is displayed in a manner.

  FIG. 108 (n) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” which is a big hit symbol form is displayed. The stop display is made, and it is informed that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

  In this embodiment, after the super-reach effect display of the outlier, the wipe effect display of the first wipe by the wipe displays w7a and w7b is executed, and then the wipe effect display of the second wipe by the wipe displays 13a and 13b is executed. Wipe effect display is executed. It should be noted that N times (N> M) wipe effects are displayed more than when M times of wipe effects are displayed (wipe-in and wipe-out) in one opportunity (for example, execution of outlier super reach effect display). In the case of being performed, the symbol variation display being executed may be configured so that the big hit symbol form is finally displayed in a finalized manner, or at one time (for example, execution of super-reach effect display of outliers) It may be configured such that a reverse effect display is more likely to occur when N wipe effects are displayed than when M wipe effects are displayed. After the reverse effect display, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed in a definitive manner, or the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed in a final manner, or the final symbol mode may be finalized. You may be comprised so that it may be. It should be noted that the pre-reading notice effect display or the notice of the change is more noticeable when the wipe effect is performed N times than when the wipe effect is performed M times at one opportunity (for example, the super-reach effect display of the outlier). You may be comprised so that effect display may be performed easily.

  In the present embodiment, the second wipe wipe-in is started in the maximum wipe state of the first wipe. However, the second wipe wipe-in may be started during the first wipe wipe-in, or the first wipe wipe-in and the second wipe wipe-in may be started. Both of the first wipe and the second wipe may be completed at the same time, and the first wipe and the second wipe may be at the maximum wipe state at the same time. Both the out wipe and the second wipe wipe-out may be started simultaneously, and both the first wipe wipe-out and the second wipe wipe-out may be ended simultaneously.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first modification of the present embodiment will be described. 108 (l ') to (p') show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in time series. 108 (l ') to (p'), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 108 (l ′) shows a state continued from FIG. 108 (k). FIG. 108 (l ′) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the second wipe wipe display w13a and w13b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w13a is displayed withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w13b is displayed withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the second wipe display w13a and w13b is started, the first wipe display w7a and w7b can be gradually recognized.

  FIG. 108 (m ′) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w13a and w13b is completed. The wipe display w13a shrinks toward the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w13b shrinks toward the upper right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. The completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w13a and w13b is the end of the second wipe. On the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, wipe displays w7a and w7b of the first wipe are displayed. The first wipe is a maximum wipe state in which the wipes w7a and w7b cover the entire display screen.

  FIG. 108 (n ′) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b of the first wipe is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. With the start of withdrawal display of the first wipe display w7a and w7b, the background image becomes an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display region 208a to the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. In 208c, the swing variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a jackpot symbol, is started. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible.

  FIG. 108 (o ′) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. In this example, the completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”, which is a big hit symbol, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The fluctuation variation is displayed in a manner.

  FIG. 108 (p ′) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” which is a big hit symbol form is displayed. The stop display is made, and it is informed that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second modification of the present embodiment will be described. 108 (l ″) to (p ″) show an example of the effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in time series. 108 (l ″) to (p ″), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 108 (l ″) shows a state continued from FIG. 108 (k). FIG. 108 (l ″) shows a state in which withdrawal display of the second wipe wipe display w13a and w13b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w13a is displayed withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w13b is displayed withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the second wipe display w13a and w13b is started, the first wipe display w7a and w7b can be gradually recognized.

  FIG. 108 (m ″) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe wipe displays w7a and w7b is started during the withdrawal display of the second wipe wipe displays w13a and w13b. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. With the start of withdrawal display of the first wipe display w7a and w7b, the background image becomes an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display region 208a to the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. In 208c, the swing variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a jackpot symbol, is started. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible.

  FIG. 108 (n ″) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the second wipe display w13a and w13b is completed. The wipe display w13a shrinks toward the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w13b shrinks toward the upper right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. The completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w13a and w13b is the end of the second wipe. On the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a withdrawal display of the first wipe wipe displays w7a and w7b is displayed.

  FIG. 108 (o ″) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. In this example, the completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”, which is a big hit symbol, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The fluctuation variation is displayed in a manner.

  FIG. 108 (p ″) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” which is a big hit symbol form is displayed. The stop display is made, and it is informed that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

  In the present embodiment and this variation, the wipe display w7a and w7b is displayed in the upper left corner and the lower right corner in the first wipe, and the wipe displays w13a and w13b are displayed in the lower left and right corners of the display screen in the second wipe. This is a display mode that appears from the bottom corner. The wipe display of the first wipe may appear from the upper left corner and the lower right corner, the wipe display of the second wipe may appear from the upper left corner and the lower right corner, and the wipe display of the first wipe appears from the lower left corner and the upper right corner. The wipe display of the second wipe may appear from the lower left corner and the upper right corner. The first wipe wipe display and the second wipe wipe display may have the same pattern. For example, the wipe display pattern of the first wipe and the second wipe may be a pattern of wipe display w7a and w7b, or a pattern of wipe display w13a and w13b.

(Example 14)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 14 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 (a) to (q) show an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 109 (a) to 109 (q) show the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 109 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the determination result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is wrong. Informed. In the state shown in FIG. 109 (a), the reserved number in FIG. 1 is 1, for example, and the reserved number in FIG. 2 is 0. In each figure of FIG. 109, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an empty background image.

  FIG. 109 (b) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed.

  FIG. 109C shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the variation display of the decorative symbol in FIG. 109 (c).

  FIG. 109 (d) shows an effect in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and the animation of the scene where the lord and the enemy of the lord confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

  FIG. 109 (e) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 109 (f) shows a state in which a display suggesting a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 109 (g) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. After the fluctuation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the background image becomes a normal effect display of an empty background image before and after the wipe effect display. The display of the super reach effect is ended by switching.

  FIG. 109 (h) shows a state where the first wipe wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The wipe-in start of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the first wipe. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbols, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, the background image, and the like.

  FIG. 109 (i) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b of the first wipe is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible.

  FIG. 109 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Then, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern mode, is started.

  FIG. 109 (k) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b of the first wipe is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. The wipe-out completion of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the end of the first wipe. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a dissimilar symbol pattern, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The fluctuation variation is displayed in a manner.

  FIG. 109 (l) shows a state in which the second wipe wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. The appearance display of the wipe display w13a is started from the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w13b is started from the upper right corner of the display screen. The wipe-in start of the wipe displays w13a and w13b is the start of the second wipe. The wipe displays w13a and w13b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbols and the background image.

  In the present embodiment, the second wipe is started after the end of the first wipe. The wipe display of the first wipe may appear from the upper left corner and the lower right corner, the wipe display of the second wipe may appear from the upper left corner and the lower right corner, and the wipe display of the first wipe appears from the lower left corner and the upper right corner. The wipe display of the second wipe may appear from the lower left corner and the upper right corner. The first wipe wipe display and the second wipe wipe display may have the same pattern. For example, the wipe display pattern of the first wipe and the second wipe may be a pattern of wipe display w7a and w7b, or a pattern of wipe display w13a and w13b.

  FIG. 109 (m) shows a state where the second wipe wipe displays w <b> 13 a and w <b> 13 b are spread so as to gradually cover the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The wipe display w13a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the lower left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w13b is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper right corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen. .

  FIG. 109 (n) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the second wipe wipe displays w13a and w13b has been completed. The upper right end of the wipe display w13a and the lower left end of the wipe display w13b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w13a and w13b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w13a and w13b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative symbols and the background image become invisible.

  FIG. 109 (o) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the second wipe wipe display w13a, w13b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w13a is displayed withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w13b is displayed withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper right corner of the display screen. By starting withdrawal display of the wipe displays w13a and w13b, the display of decorative symbols, background images, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w13a and w13b, the swing variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a jackpot symbol form, is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 109 (g) and 109 (h), after the fluctuation pattern display of the off symbol pattern is once displayed, as shown in FIG. 109 (o), the swing variation of the jackpot symbol pattern The display is displayed. The second wipe in this example is a reverse effect display.

  FIG. 109 (p) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the second wipe display w13a and w13b is completed. The wipe display w13a shrinks toward the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w13b shrinks toward the upper right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. The wipe-out completion of the wipe displays w13a and w13b is the end of the second wipe. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”, which is a big hit symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. ing.

  FIG. 109 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” which is a big hit symbol form is displayed. The stop display is made, and it is informed that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modification of the present embodiment will be described. 109 (j ') to (q') show an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to this modification in chronological order. 109 (j ') to (q'), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 109 (j ′) shows a state continued from FIG. 109 (i). FIG. 109 (j ′) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe wipe display w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Then, the fluctuation display of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a jackpot symbol, is started.

  Thus, in this example, as shown in FIG. 109 (h), “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol pattern, was displayed in a shaking manner before the first wipe was started. At the time of wipeout, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a jackpot symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner. In this example, the wipe effect display of the first wipe is a revival effect display.

  FIG. 109 (k ′) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. The wipe-out completion of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the end of the first wipe. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a display mode in which “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”, which is a big hit symbol pattern, swings left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The fluctuation is displayed.

  FIG. 109 (l ′) shows a state where the second wipe wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w13a is started from the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w13b is started from the upper right corner of the display screen. The wipe-in start of the wipe displays w13a and w13b is the start of the second wipe. The wipe displays w13a and w13b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbols and the background image.

  In this modification, the second wipe is started after the end of the first wipe. The wipe display of the first wipe may appear from the upper left corner and the lower right corner, the wipe display of the second wipe may appear from the upper left corner and the lower right corner, and the wipe display of the first wipe appears from the lower left corner and the upper right corner. The wipe display of the second wipe may appear from the lower left corner and the upper right corner. The first wipe wipe display and the second wipe wipe display may have the same pattern. For example, the wipe display pattern of the first wipe and the second wipe may be a pattern of wipe display w7a and w7b, or a pattern of wipe display w13a and w13b.

  FIG. 109 (m ′) shows a state where the second wipe wipe displays w <b> 13 a and w <b> 13 b are spread so as to gradually cover the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The wipe display w13a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the lower left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w13b is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper right corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen. .

  FIG. 109 (n ′) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the second wipe wipe displays w13a and w13b is completed. The upper right end of the wipe display w13a and the lower left end of the wipe display w13b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w13a and w13b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w13a and w13b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative symbols and the background image become invisible.

  FIG. 109 (o ′) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the second wipe display w13a and w13b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w13a is displayed withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w13b is displayed withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper right corner of the display screen. By starting withdrawal display of the wipe displays w13a and w13b, the display of decorative symbols, background images, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w13a and w13b, the swing variation display of “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”, which is a big hit symbol form, is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The symbol aspect of “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is a symbol combination in the case of a probable big hit.

  FIG. 109 (p ′) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the second wipe display w13a and w13b is completed. The wipe display w13a shrinks toward the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w13b shrinks toward the upper right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. The wipe-out completion of the wipe displays w13a and w13b is the end of the second wipe. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3”, which is a big hit symbol pattern, is displayed in a swinging manner in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. ing. In this example, as shown in FIG. 109 (k ′), after the fluctuation display of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a jackpot symbol pattern for the non-probable big hit, is displayed after the wipe effect of the first wipe. As shown in FIG. 109 (o ′), after the wipe effect display of the second wipe, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”, which is a big hit symbol pattern with a probable big hit, is displayed. The second wipe effect display of this example is a promotion effect display that is switched from an effect display that suggests a non-probable big hit to an effect display that suggests a probable big hit.

  FIG. 109 (q ′) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” which is a big hit symbol form is displayed. The stop display is made, and it is informed that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

  In this modification, the wipe effect display is performed a plurality of times (in this example, twice) during one symbol variation display (for example, after the start of fluctuation variation of the off-symbol pattern). The pattern of the first wipe wipe display and the pattern of the second wipe wipe display may be different or the same. In addition, the wipe display of the first wipe including the image of the face of the princess is displayed more than the display of the wipe display w7a and w13b of the pattern including the image of the princess. The direction in which the effect display is performed may be configured such that a plurality of wipe effects are easily performed. In addition, in one symbol variation display, it is easier to perform reverse effect display and revival effect display when more than one wipe effect display is performed, compared to when one wipe effect display is performed, Finally, the big hit symbol mode may be easily displayed. The pattern (pattern) of the multiple wipe effect display in one pattern variation display may be all different, part may be the same, part may be the same number of times, It may be the same number of times.

(Example 15)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 15 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 (a) to 110 (q) show examples of performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 110A to 110Q, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 110 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the decoration fluctuation display of the decorative pattern in the off-symbol pattern mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol, is displayed in a fluctuation manner (temporary stop display) in a display manner that swings to the left and right. . In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 110 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 4, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, four hold icons b1, b2, b3, and b4 are displayed. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area 2, the hold icon b3 is displayed in the hold 3 display area, and the hold icon b4 is displayed in the hold 4 display area. Yes. The hold icons b1 to b4 are black circle hold icons shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the black circle hold icon is a default hold icon. A changing icon display area for displaying a changing icon is provided above the special figure 1 reserved icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 110 (a), the changing icon a1 in the display mode of the black circle hold icon is displayed in the changing icon display area. In this embodiment, the changing icon in the display mode of the black circle pending icon is the default changing icon (the changing icon in the normal mode). The changing icon a1 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icons b1 to b4. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an empty background image.

  FIG. 110B shows a state where the changing icon a1 is deleted. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 to 208c, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” which is an outlier symbol mode is displayed. In this example, the changing icon a <b> 1 is erased during the fluctuation change display of the decorative symbol in the off-pattern design.

  FIG. 110 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol pattern, is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the determination result of the special symbol 1 fluctuation display is incorrect. Yes.

  FIG. 110 (d) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is completed and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold icon reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a2. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. The changing icon a2 may be enlarged during the movement to the changing icon display area, or may be enlarged after the movement to the changing icon display area is completed. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 3 display area.

  FIG. 110E shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 110 (e).

  In FIG. 110 (f), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, the changing icon and the hold icon are deleted, and the enemy and the enemy are confronted. This shows a state in which an effect in which an animation of a scene to be displayed is started. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen. The changing icon and the hold icon are hidden during a part of the super reach effect display.

  FIG. 110 (g) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 110 (h) shows a state where an animation of a scene where the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed. The animation of the scene where Tono loses to the enemy of Tono is a display that suggests a loss.

  FIG. 110 (i) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the display of the super reach effect. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. Further, in this example, in the state shown in FIG. 110 (i), one game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is increased by one. As a result, the number of holds in FIG.

  FIG. 110 (j) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w11a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w11b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w11a and w11b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w11a and w11b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbols, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image. The wipe display w11a includes a part (upper left) of the logo image of “Yoshimune”, and the wipe display w11b includes the other part (lower right) of the “Yoshimune” logo image. A logo image of one pattern is formed by the logo image included in the wipe display w11a and the logo image included in the wipe display w11b. In this example, the super effect display is interrupted by the start of the wipe effect display.

  In this example, the patterns of the wipe displays w11a and w11b including the logo image are the patterns for notice of the change, and the wipe displays w11a and w11b are displayed as the notice effect display of the change. Note that the wipe display for the pre-reading notice is not limited to the wipe displays w11a and w11b, and may include an image of the face of the princess of the character. Also, for example, when the patterns of the wipe displays w7a and w7b shown in FIGS. 106 (h ′) and (i ′) are normal patterns, the pattern of the wipe display for the pre-reading notice is different from the normal pattern. It only has to be.

  FIG. 110 (k) shows a state where the wipe effect display is interrupted during the appearance display of the wipe displays w11a and w11b, and the darkening effect display in which the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in black is started. Yes. The decorative symbols are displayed even during the darkening effect display. The darkening effect display may be started in the maximum wipe state of the wipe effect display, or may be started when the wipe effect display is wiped out. Note that when the wipe effect display is interrupted, the dark effect display may not be displayed, and after the wipe effect display is interrupted, the dark effect display is not displayed and the effect display shown in FIG. 110 (l) is displayed. Good.

  FIG. 110 (l) shows a state in which the super reach effect display is resumed after the dark turn effect display ends, and the display of the animation of the scene where the lord and the enemy of the lord confront each other is displayed again. The decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the size before the reduced display, “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display regions 208a and 208c, and the decorative symbol variation display is in the middle symbol display region 208b. Has been resumed.

  FIG. 110 (m) shows a state where the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. "Decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b.

  FIG. 110 (n) shows a state where an animation of a scene in which the lord and the enemy of the lord are slashed is displayed.

  FIG. 110 (o) shows a state where an animation of a scene in which the enemy of Tono defeated and Tono wins the confrontation is displayed. In the middle symbol display area 208b, “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed, and in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a big hit symbol pattern, swings up and down. It is displayed with the fluctuation fluctuation display of the mode. The animation of the scene where Tono wins the confrontation and the shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” are indications that suggest a big hit.

  FIG. 110 (p) shows a state where the super reach effect display has been completed. The super reach effect display in this example is finished after “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” is displayed in a swinging manner in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. When the super reach effect display ends, the decorative symbol display device 208 changes to an empty background image, and the reduced display of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c ends. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is displayed in a shaking variation display in a manner of swinging left and right.

  FIG. 110 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” which is a big hit symbol form is displayed. A stop display (main stop display) is displayed, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

  For example, the pattern of the wipe display w7a, w7b including the image of the face of the lord is a normal wipe pattern, and the pattern for the notice different from the normal wipe pattern (in this example, the pattern including the logo image of “Yoshimune”) ) Wipe display w11a and w11b may be displayed as a notice that the reverse rotation display will be performed. In addition, the pattern of the wipe display w11a and w11b may be a pattern for interruption in the middle used when the wipe effect display is interrupted in the middle. The wipe effect display is more likely to be interrupted in the middle when the wipe effect display is performed in the middle of the pattern wipe display than in the case where the wipe effect display is performed in the normal pattern wipe display. It may be configured.

  Even if the wipe effect display is performed by the wipe display of the notice pattern, the reverse effect display may not be displayed after the wipe effect display. For example, in the wipe effect display by the wipe display of the notice pattern, the maximum wipe state is set, and then the wipeout is performed. In the normal effect display, the fluctuation variation of the shift pattern mode is displayed, and finally the shift pattern mode is displayed. There may be a case where an effect display is displayed. Note that the wipe effect display by the normal pattern wipe display is performed and the reverse effect display is performed after the wipe effect display in the case where the wipe effect display by the wipe pattern display of the notice pattern is performed. You may be comprised so that it may be easy. Here, the reverse effect may be an effect in which the big hit symbol pattern is finally displayed.

(Example 16)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 16 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 (a) to 111 (n) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 111 (a) to 111 (n), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 111 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the determination result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is wrong. Informed. In the state shown in FIG. 111 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, for example, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. In each figure of FIG. 111, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an empty background image.

  FIG. 111 (b) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed.

  FIG. 111 (c) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the variation display of the decorative symbols in FIG.

  In FIG. 111 (d), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and the effect that the animation of the scene where the lord and the enemy of the lord confront each other is displayed is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen. When the result of the special figure 1 variable game success / failure determination is a big hit, the animation of the scene where the lord wins the enemy of the grandfather is displayed in the production, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game success / failure determination is out of sync Displays an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy.

  FIG. 111 (e) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 111 (f) shows a state in which a display indicating a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 111 (g) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. After the fluctuation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the background image becomes a normal effect display of an empty background image before and after the wipe effect display. The display of the super reach effect is ended by switching.

  FIG. 111 (h) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the wipe effect display of the present embodiment, the display of the wipe display w15 is started at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w15 spreads in the entire counter screen in a counterclockwise spiral shape. Appeared and displayed in a manner. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w15 is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe display w15 is displayed so as to wipe off all but the decorative symbols.

  FIG. 111 (i) shows a wipe-in state in which the appearance display of the wipe display w15 is displayed. The wipe display w15 wipes out the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image. The decorative design is displayed overlapping the wipe display w15. In this example, the decorative design is visible even during the wipe effect display. In the state shown in FIG. 111 (i), the wipe display w15 includes two images of the face of the lord. The face image of Tono was not displayed at the beginning of the appearance of the wipe display w15, but is displayed as the appearance display of the wipe display w15 proceeds. The images of the faces of these lords may be displayed as still images or may be displayed as animations. The animation may be an animation in which the image of the face of the shrine is rotated, or an animation in which the image of the face of the shrine is shaken up and down or up and down.

  FIG. 111 (j) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe display w15 is completed. The entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe display w15. When the appearance display of the wipe display w15 is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible. In addition, the pattern of the wipe display w15 displayed in the super reach effect display in which the confrontation effect between the lord and the enemy of the lord is executed is a pattern including the image of the face of the lord. The display mode of the face of the lord included in the wipe display w15 is different from the display mode of the lord who lost the confrontation with the enemy of the lord shown in FIGS. 111 (f) and 111 (g). Thereby, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to make it easier for the player to forget the effect lost in the confrontation.

  FIG. 111 (k) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe display w15 is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, wipe-out is performed in a display mode opposite to the wipe-in, in which the wipe display w15 shrinks in a clockwise spiral shape. By performing the wipeout, the display of the background image and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w715, the background image changes to an empty background image.

  FIG. 111 (l) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe display w15 is displayed. The withdrawal display of the wipe display w15 is almost completed, and most of the sky background image is visible. In the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is displayed in a swinging manner so as to overlap the wipe display w15. In addition, a mini decoration symbol “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” in a reduced display mode is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen so as to overlap the right symbol of the decoration symbol. Thus, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols may be displayed in two places. The timing at which the decorative symbols are displayed at two locations may be at the time of wipeout, at the time of completion of the wipeout, or after the wipeout. The display of fluctuation fluctuation corresponding to the off-design of the mini decorative design may be erased by wiping out.

  FIG. 111 (m) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe display 15 is completed. The wipe display w15 is erased in such a manner as to shrink in a clockwise spiral shape. The completion of the withdrawal of the wipe display 15 is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is a pattern that is out of place in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen. "" Is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings from side to side.

  FIG. 111 (n) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place.

  In the wipe effect display wipe-in in the present embodiment, the wipe display w15 appears at the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w15 spreads around the periphery so as to roll around. Further, in the wipe-out of the wipe effect display in the present embodiment, the wipe display w15 is contracted in the direction opposite to the wipe-in, and the background image can be gradually recognized from the periphery of the wipe display w15. Thus, in the wipe effect display, the wipe display may not appear from the corner of the display screen. It should be noted that the wipe display that appears from the corner of the display screen (for example, wipe display w3a, w3b, w5a, w5b, w7a, w7b, w9a, w9b, w11a, w11b, w13a, w13b) is displayed. The symbol variation display in which the wipe display that appears from the center of the display screen (for example, wipe display w15) is displayed may be easier to finally display the big hit symbol form, or the wipe that appears from the center of the display screen. The symbol variation display in which the wipe display that appears from the corner of the display screen is displayed may be easier to finally display the big hit symbol form than the symbol variation display in which the display is displayed. In addition, even if the wipe display that appears from the center of the display screen is displayed rather than the case that the wipe display that appears from the corner of the display screen is displayed, the pre-reading notice display is more likely to be displayed at the time of wipe-out. It is better to see the pre-reading notice on wipe-out when the wipe display that appears from the corner of the display screen is displayed than when the wipe display that appears from the center of the display screen is displayed. Also good. Note that one of the wipe display that appears from the corner of the display screen or the wipe display that appears from the center of the display screen may be a pre-read notice display.

  In the wipe effect display, wipe display that appears from the corner of the display screen (for example, wipe displays w3a, w3b, w5a, w5b, w7a, w7b, w9a, w9b, w11a, w11b, w13a, w13b) It may be configured such that the player can set on the setting screen which wipe display is displayed with the wipe display that appears from the center (for example, wipe display w15). It should be noted that one of the wipe display that appears from the end of the display screen (wipe effect A) and the wipe display that appears from the center of the display screen (wipe effect B) is the other than the symbol variation display in which one wipe display is displayed. The symbol variation display on which the wipe display is displayed may be easier to finally display the big hit symbol form.

(Example 17)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 17 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 (a) to 112 (z) and FIGS. 112 (a) to (z) and (b) to (b) show time-series examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In each drawing of FIG. 112, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the special figure 1 start opening and the special figure 2 start opening are arranged one below the center of the game board, and are divided into two branches of a substantially inverted Y-shaped game ball passage. A special figure 1 starting port is provided at one of the lower ends, and a special figure 2 starting port is provided at one of the other lower ends. Each time a game ball entered from the upper end opening of the game ball passage passes through the game ball passage, a special mechanism shown in FIG. 1 and a special view are provided by a distribution mechanism (not shown) provided in the game ball passage. Alternating to 2 starting ports. Thus, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the game balls win alternately at the special figure 1 start opening and the special figure 2 start opening, so that the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold increase alternately. . The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a so-called start port winning order fluctuation pachinko machine that executes special figure variable games in the order in which game balls win the special figure 1 start opening or the special figure 2 start opening.

  FIG. 112 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the fluctuation fluctuation display of the decorative pattern in the off-symbol pattern mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol, is displayed in a fluctuation manner (temporary stop display) in a display manner that swings to the left and right. . In addition, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 112 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 1. In the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a special figure hold icon display area is provided. The special figure hold icon display area is, from the left, hold 1 display area, hold 2 display area, hold 3 display area, hold 4 display area, hold 5 display area, hold 6 display area, hold 7 display area, hold 8 display area 8 areas, and a maximum of 8 hold icons can be displayed. A hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special figure variable game with the first hold order is displayed in the hold 1 display area, and a hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special figure variable game with the second hold order is displayed in the hold 2 display area. Is displayed in the hold 3 display area, the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the third special figure variable game is held in the hold order, and the hold 4 display area is held in the fourth special figure variable game hold. The corresponding hold icon is displayed, the hold 5 display area displays the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the fifth special figure variation game, and the hold 6 display area has the sixth special figure change. The hold icon corresponding to the hold of the game is displayed, the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the seventh special figure variable game is displayed in the hold 7 display area, and the hold order is 8th in the hold 8 display area. The special figure of floating game Hold icon is displayed corresponding to the cut. In the state shown in FIG. 112 (a), the special figure 2 variable game is held first and the special figure 1 variable game is held second, so the first special figure is displayed in the hold 1 display area. A hold icon c1 corresponding to the second hold is displayed, and a hold icon b2 corresponding to the second hold in FIG. 1 is displayed in the hold 2 display area. The hold icons c1 and b2 are white circle hold icons shown in FIG. The white circle hold icon is a default hold icon (normal hold icon).

  A changing icon display area for displaying a changing icon is provided above the special figure holding icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 112 (a), a changing icon a1 having a display mode of a white circle pending icon is displayed in the changing icon display area. In this embodiment, the changing icon of the display mode of the white circle pending icon is the default changing icon (the changing icon of the normal mode). The changing icon a1 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an empty background image. The gaming state is a non-electric support state (ordinary low probability state).

  FIG. 112B shows a state where the changing icon a1 is deleted. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 to 208c, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” which is an outlier symbol mode is displayed. In the present embodiment, the changing icon is deleted during the fluctuation change display of the decorative symbol in the off-set pattern mode.

  FIG. 112 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol form, is fixedly displayed (stop display, main stop display), and the determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is displayed. It is reported that it is out of place.

  FIG. 112 (d) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started after the reservation of the special figure 2 having the first holding order is digested. With the start of the special figure 2 variable game, the decorative symbols display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the decorative symbol display device 208, The hold icon reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon c1 corresponding to the hold of the special figure 2 that has been digested is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a2. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. The changing icon may be enlarged during the movement to the changing icon display area, or may be enlarged after the movement to the changing icon display area is completed. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

  FIG. 112 (e) shows a state in which six game balls are won at the starting port during the execution of the special figure 2 variable game, and 6 special figure variable games are held. In this embodiment, game balls are alternately won at the special figure 1 start opening and the special figure 2 start opening, so three game balls are won at the special figure 1 start opening and the game balls are at the special figure 2 start opening. I have won three. Also, since the winning of the first game ball among the six winnings of the first game ball is a winning at the starting point of the special figure 1, the winning of the six gaming balls is a special figure 2. The game balls win in the order of the starting port, special figure 1 starting port, special figure 2 starting port, special figure 1 starting port, special figure 2 starting port, and special figure 1 starting port. A hold icon c2 corresponding to the hold of the second special figure 2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the hold icon display area, and a hold icon corresponding to the hold of the third special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 3 display area. b3 is displayed, a hold icon c3 corresponding to the hold of the fourth special figure 2 is displayed in the hold 4 display area, and the hold 5 display area corresponds to the hold of the fifth special figure 1 A hold icon b4 is displayed, a hold icon c4 corresponding to the hold of the sixth special figure 2 is displayed in the hold 6 display area, and a hold of the seventh special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 7 display area. A corresponding hold icon b5 is displayed. In the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the hold in the first special figure 1 is displayed. Thereby, it is notified that the number of reserved special figure floating games is seven. In the case of an increase in hold, a hold icon increase animation is displayed. The hold icon increase animation may be an animation in which the hold icon is gradually raised from the lower part of the display screen, an animation that is displayed in a form in which the display size of the hold icon is gradually increased, or the like. .

  FIG. 112 (f) shows a state where the display before the reserved full tank is started. In this embodiment, the special figure hold is 8 at full, and when the number of holds reaches 7, the display before the reserved full tank is started. At the start of the pre-full display, an animation in which an image j4 of a princess's face (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “princess j4”) moves to the left from the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Is displayed. In the figure, the left-pointing arrow shown at the upper left of the princess j4 indicates the moving direction of the princess j4. Princess j4 is moved and displayed to the left while swinging left and right. At the start of the display before the reserved full tank, the appearance of the appearance scene of the princess displayed before the reserved full tank is displayed.

  FIG. 112 (g) shows a state where the animation in which the princess j4 moves is completed. As a result, the annealing of the appearance scene of the princess that is displayed before the reserved full is completed.

  FIG. 112 (h) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. It is displayed in a stopped state, and it is reported that the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place.

  FIG. 112 (i) shows a state in which the suspension of the special figure 1 with the first holding order is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold icon reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the hold of the special figure 1 that has been digested is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a3. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon c2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area, the hold icon c3 is moved and displayed in the hold 3 display area, and the hold icon b4 is held. 4 is moved and displayed in the display area 4, the hold icon c4 is moved and displayed in the hold 5 display area, and the hold icon b5 is moved and displayed in the hold 6 display area. It is reported that the number of hold is 6 based on the number of hold icons.

  FIG. 112 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place.

  FIG. 112 (k) shows a state in which the holding of the special figure 2 having the first holding order is digested and the special figure 2 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 2 variable game, the decorative symbols display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the decorative symbol display device 208, The hold icon reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon c2 corresponding to the hold of the special figure 2 that has been digested is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a4. The changing icon a4 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon c3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area, the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 3 display area, and the hold icon c4 is held. 4 is moved and displayed in the display area 4, and the hold icon b5 is moved and displayed in the hold 5 display area. It is notified that the number of hold is 5 based on the number of hold icons.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the number of reservations becomes less than 6 after the number of reservations once becomes 7 or more, an image exit animation before the reserved full tank is started. The pre-full image exit animation is an animation that is erased in such a manner that the princess j4 that is pre-full display moves outside the display screen. Princess j4 is displayed moving to the right. In the figure, the rightward arrow shown above the princess j4 indicates the moving direction of the princess j4.

  FIG. 112 (l) shows a state in which the pre-full image exit animation is displayed. The princess j4, which is displayed before the reserved full, moves to the right and is gradually erased.

  FIG. 112 (m) shows a state in which the pre-full image exit animation has been completed. When the princess j4 displayed before the reserved full tank moves to the right and is erased, the animation image exit animation before the reserved full tank ends.

  FIG. 112 (n) shows a state in which two game balls are won at the starting port during the execution of the special figure 2 variable game, and two special figure variable games are held. In this embodiment, game balls are alternately won at the special figure 1 start opening and the special figure 2 start opening, so one game ball is won at the special figure 1 start opening and the game ball is received at the special figure 2 start opening. One is won. Further, since the winning of the first game ball of the two of the two is the winning of the special game 1 starting gate, the winning of the second gaming ball is the special game 2 of FIG. The game balls win in the order of the starting opening and the special figure 1 starting opening. The hold icon c5 corresponding to the hold of the sixth special figure 2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the hold icon display area, and the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the seventh special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 7 display area. b6 is displayed. On hold 1 display area to hold 5 display area, hold icons b3, c3, b4, c4, and b5 corresponding to the first to fifth holds are displayed. Thereby, it is notified that the number of reserved special figure floating games is seven.

  Further, in FIG. 112 (n), since the number of reservations is 7, the display before the reservation full is started. With the start of the pre-full display, an animation in which the princess j4 moves to the left from the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. In the figure, the left-pointing arrow shown at the upper left of the princess j4 indicates the moving direction of the princess j4.

  FIG. 112 (o) shows a state in which the animation in which the princess j4 moves is completed. As a result, the annealing of the appearance scene of the princess that is displayed before the reserved full is completed.

  FIG. 112 (p) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. It is displayed in a stopped state, and it is reported that the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place.

  FIG. 112 (q) shows a state in which the holding of the special figure 1 having the first holding order is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold icon reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b4 corresponding to the hold of the special figure 1 that has been digested is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a5. The changing icon a5 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold icon decreasing animation, the hold icon c3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area, the hold icon c4 is moved and displayed in the hold 3 display area, and the hold icon b5 is held. 4, the hold icon c5 is moved and displayed in the hold 5 display area, and the hold icon b6 is moved and displayed in the hold 6 display area. It is reported that the number of hold is 6 based on the number of hold icons.

  FIG. 112 (r) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place.

  FIG. 112 (s) shows a state in which the holding of the special figure 2 with the first holding order is digested and the special figure 2 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 2 variable game, the decorative symbols display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the decorative symbol display device 208, The hold icon reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon c3 corresponding to the hold of the special figure 2 that has been digested is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a6. The changing icon a6 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold icon decreasing animation, the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon c4 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area, the hold icon b5 is moved and displayed in the hold 3 display area, and the hold icon c5 is held. 4 is moved and displayed in the display area 4, and the hold icon b6 is moved and displayed in the hold 5 display area. It is notified that the number of hold is 5 based on the number of hold icons.

  In FIG. 112 (s), since the number of holdings is less than 6 after the number of holdings once becomes 7 or more, an image leaving animation before the holding full tank is started. The princess j4 is moved and displayed on the right side due to the pre-full image exit animation. In the figure, the rightward arrow shown above the princess j4 indicates the moving direction of the princess j4.

  FIG. 112 (t) shows a state in which two game balls have been won at the starting port during the execution of the special figure 2 variable game, and two special figure variable games have been put on hold. In this embodiment, game balls are alternately won at the special figure 1 start opening and the special figure 2 start opening, so one game ball is won at the special figure 1 start opening and the game ball is received at the special figure 2 start opening. One is won. Further, since the winning of the first game ball of the two of the two is the winning of the special game 1 starting gate, the winning of the second gaming ball is the special game 2 of FIG. The game balls win in the order of the starting opening and the special figure 1 starting opening. A hold icon c6 corresponding to the hold of the sixth special figure 2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the hold icon display area, and a hold icon corresponding to the hold of the seventh special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 7 display area. b7 is displayed. On hold 1 display area to hold 5 display area, hold icons b4, c4, b5, c5, and b6 corresponding to the first to fifth hold are continuously displayed. Thereby, it is notified that the number of reserved special figure floating games is seven.

  In FIG. 112 (t), since the number of holdings is 7 again, the display before the holding full is started. By starting the display before the reserved full tank, the animation exiting image before the reserved full tank is canceled halfway, and an animation in which the princess j4 moves to the left from the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. In the figure, the left-pointing arrow shown at the upper left of the princess j4 indicates the moving direction of the princess j4.

  FIG. 112 (u) shows a state where the animation in which the princess j4 moves is finished. As a result, the annealing of the appearance scene of the princess that is displayed before the reserved full is completed.

  FIG. 112 (v) shows a state in which one game ball is won at the starting port during the execution of the special figure 2 variable game, and the special figure variable game hold is increased by one. As a result, the number of reservations becomes 8 and the tank is full. In the hold 2 display area of the hold icon display area, a hold icon c7 corresponding to the hold of the eighth special figure 2 is displayed. On hold 1 display area to hold 7 display area, hold icons b4, c4, b5, c5, b6, c6, and b7 corresponding to the first to fifth holds are displayed. Thereby, it is notified that the number of reserved special figure variable games is eight.

  When the hold is full, the hold full tank blessing animation is started. As shown in FIG. 112 (v), in the reserved full blessing animation of the present embodiment, an animation in which the display size of the princess j4 gradually increases is displayed. The princess j4 is displayed so as to be overlapped with the variation display of the decorative symbols. The princess j4 may be displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol variation display.

  FIG. 112 (w) shows a state in which the pending full tank blessing animation has ended. The reserved full blessing animation ends when the display size of the princess j4 reaches a predetermined display size. In the period in which the number of holds is full after the hold full tank blessing animation ends, a hold full tank blessing display in which the princess j4 is displayed in a predetermined display size is displayed.

  FIG. 112 (x) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is an extraordinary symbol mode. It is displayed in a stopped state, and it is reported that the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place. Princess j4 is displayed overlapping the stop display of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 112 (y) shows a state in which the suspension of the special figure 1 having the first holding order is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold icon reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b4 corresponding to the hold of the special figure 1 that has been digested is moved and displayed in the change icon display area as the change icon a7. The changing icon a7 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon c4 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b5 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area, the hold icon c5 is moved and displayed in the hold 3 display area, and the hold icon b6 is held. 4, the hold icon c6 is moved and displayed in the hold 5 display area, the hold icon b7 is moved and displayed in the hold 6 display area, and the hold icon c7 is moved and displayed in the hold 7 display area. It is notified that the number of hold is 7 based on the number of hold icons.

  When the number of holds becomes 7 and the tank is no longer full, the hold full tank blessing display is terminated, and an animation for switching to the display before the hold full tank is displayed. As shown in FIG. 112 (y), in the switching animation, an animation in which the princess j4 having a predetermined size in the reserved full blessing display is gradually reduced to the display size in the display before the reserved full tank display is displayed. . The princess j4 is displayed so as to be overlapped with the variation display of the decorative symbols. The princess j4 may be displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol variation display.

  FIG. 112 (z) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place. Princess j4 is displayed overlapping the stop display of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 112 (a) shows a state that continues from FIG. 112 (z), and shows a state in which the suspension of the special figure 2 with the first holding order is digested and the special figure 2 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 2 variable game, the decorative symbols display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the decorative symbol display device 208, The hold icon reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon c4 corresponding to the hold of the special figure 2 that has been digested is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a8. The changing icon a8 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold icon decreasing animation, the hold icon b5 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon c5 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area, the hold icon b6 is moved and displayed in the hold 3 display area, and the hold icon c6 is held. 4, the hold icon b7 is moved and displayed in the hold 5 display area, and the hold icon c7 is moved and displayed in the hold 6 display area. It is reported that the number of hold is 6 based on the number of hold icons. In FIG. 112 (z), the switching animation to the display before the reserved full tank is finished, and the princess j4 is displayed in the display size in the display before the reserved full tank.

  FIG. 112 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. It is displayed in a stopped state, and it is reported that the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place.

  FIG. 112 (c) shows a state in which the holding of the special figure 1 having the first holding order is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold icon reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b5 corresponding to the hold of the special figure 1 that has been digested is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a9. The changing icon a4 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold icon decreasing animation, the hold icon c5 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b6 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area, the hold icon c6 is moved and displayed in the hold 3 display area, and the hold icon b7 is held. 4 is moved and displayed in the display area 4, and the hold icon c7 is moved and displayed in the hold 5 display area. It is notified that the number of hold is 5 based on the number of hold icons.

  In FIG. 112 (c), since the number of reservations is less than 6 after the number of reservations once becomes 7 or more, an image exit animation before the reserved full tank is started. The princess j4 is moved and displayed on the right side due to the pre-full image exit animation. In the figure, the rightward arrow shown above the princess j4 indicates the moving direction of the princess j4.

  FIG. 112 (D) shows a state in which the pre-full image exit animation is displayed. The princess j4, which is displayed before the reserved full, moves to the right and is gradually erased.

  FIG. 112 (e) shows a state where the pre-full image exit animation has been completed. When the princess j4 displayed before the reserved full tank moves to the right and is erased, the animation image exit animation before the reserved full tank ends.

  FIG. 112 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a so-called start opening winning order variation pachinko machine that executes special figure variable games in the order of winning in the special figure 1 starting opening 230 or the special figure 2 starting opening. Become a tongue. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment displays the appearance animation of the display before the reserved full tank and the display before the reserved full tank when the number of held is 7 which is 1 less than the full tank, and the number of held is full. The reserved full tank blessing display is displayed, and when the number of held is 5 or less, which is 3 less than the full tank, an image exit animation before the reserved full tank is displayed. In addition, when the pachinko machine 100 is a special figure 2 priority fluctuation machine, when the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is 3, which is 1 less than the full tank, the appearance animation of the display before the full tank and the full tank is displayed. When the number of holds in Special Figure 1 becomes full, a blessed full tank congratulatory display is displayed. The near-image exit animation may be displayed, and when the number of reserved figures in Special Figure 2 is 3, which is 1 less than the full tank, the appearance animation of the pending full tank display and the display before the reserved full tank are displayed. When the number of holds in 2 is full, a hold full tank congratulation display is displayed. When the number of holds in Special Figure 2 is 2 or less, which is 2 less than the full tank, an image exit animation is displayed. May be. In addition, the appearance animation of the display before the reserved full tank, the display before the reserved full tank, the reserved full tank blessing display, and the image exit animation before the reserved full tank may be displayed only when the gaming state is the non-electric support state. .

(Example 18)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 18 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 (a) to (z) and (b) to (f). 113 (a) to (z) and (b) to (f) show time-series examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In each drawing of FIG. 113, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. Similarly to the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventeenth embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes a special figure variable game in the order in which game balls win the special figure 1 start opening or the special figure 2 start opening. This is a slinging pachinko machine.

  FIG. 113 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the fluctuation fluctuation display of the decorative pattern in the off-pattern style is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol, is displayed in a fluctuation manner (temporary stop display) in a display manner that swings to the left and right. . Further, in the state shown in FIG. 113 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 1. First, the special figure 2 variable game is reserved, and second, the special figure 1 variable game is reserved. The hold icon c1 corresponding to the hold of the first special figure 2 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 2 display area. A hold icon b2 corresponding to the hold is displayed. The hold icons c1 and b2 are white circle hold icons shown in FIG. The white circle hold icon is a default hold icon (normal hold icon). In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. In this embodiment, the changing icon of the display mode of the white circle pending icon is the default changing icon (the changing icon of the normal mode). The changing icon a1 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an empty background image. The gaming state is a non-electric support state (ordinary low probability state).

  FIG. 113B shows a state in which the changing icon a1 is deleted. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 to 208c, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” which is an outlier symbol mode is displayed. The changing icon may be erased during the display of the fluctuation change of the decorative symbol in the off-pattern mode.

  FIG. 113 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol form, is fixedly displayed (stop display, main stop display), and the determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is displayed. It is reported that it is out of place.

  FIG. 113 (d) shows a state in which the holding of the special figure 2 with the first holding order is digested and the special figure 2 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 2 variable game, the decorative symbols display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the decorative symbol display device 208, The hold icon reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon c1 corresponding to the hold of the special figure 2 that has been digested is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a2. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

  FIG. 113E shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG.

  In FIG. 113 (f), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, the changing icon and the hold icon are deleted, and the enemy and the enemy of the lord confront each other. This shows a state in which an effect in which an animation of a scene to be displayed is started. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen. The changing icon and the hold icon are hidden during a part of the super reach effect display.

  FIG. 113 (g) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 113 (h) shows a state in which an animation of a scene where the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed. The animation of the scene where Tono loses to the enemy of Tono is a display that suggests a loss.

  FIG. 113 (i) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment.

  FIG. 113 (j) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbol, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image.

  FIG. 113 (k) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible.

  In this example, six game balls are won at the starting point and six special figure variable games are held before the maximum wipe state is reached after the hold icon is erased at the start of the super reach production display. It will increase and the total number of holds will be 7. In this embodiment, game balls are alternately won at the special figure 1 start opening and the special figure 2 start opening, so three game balls are won at the special figure 1 start opening and the game balls are at the special figure 2 start opening. I have won three. Also, since the winning of the first game ball among the six winnings of the first game ball is a winning at the starting point of the special figure 1, the winning of the six gaming balls is a special figure 2. The game balls win in the order of the starting port, special figure 1 starting port, special figure 2 starting port, special figure 1 starting port, special figure 2 starting port, and special figure 1 starting port. In this embodiment, the special figure hold is 8 and the tank is full, and when the number of holds reaches 7, the display before the reserved full tank is started. From the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the princess is displayed. Since the animation in which j4 moves to the left overlaps with the wipe display w7 and starts to be displayed, the princess j4 is invisible to the player.

  FIG. 113 (l) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the decorative symbol display, the background image, the changing icon, the hold icon, and the display of the princess j4 on the decorative symbol display device 208 can be gradually recognized. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Then, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern mode, is started. As shown in FIG. 113 (i), the changing icon a2, the hold icons b2, c2, b3, b4, and the princess j4 are gradually displayed from the gap between the wipe displays w7a and w7b. In the figure, the left-pointing arrow shown above the princess j4 indicates the moving direction of the princess j4.

  FIG. 113 (m) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. The completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a dissimilar symbol pattern, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The fluctuation variation is displayed in a manner. A changing icon a2 is displayed in the changing icon display area. In the hold icon display area, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the hold of the first special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon c2 corresponding to the hold of the second special figure 2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area. Is displayed, the hold icon b3 corresponding to the hold of the third special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 3 display area, and the hold icon c3 corresponding to the hold of the fourth special figure 2 is displayed in the hold 4 display area. Is displayed, the hold icon b4 corresponding to the hold of the fifth special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 5 display area, and the hold icon c4 corresponding to the hold of the sixth special figure 2 is displayed in the hold 6 display area. Is displayed, and the hold icon b5 corresponding to the hold of the seventh special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 7 display area. By displaying seven hold icons, it is notified that the number of holds is seven. Further, in FIG. 113 (m), the animation of the appearance scene of the princess displayed in front of the reserved full tank where the princess j4 moves is finished.

  FIG. 113 (n) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. It is displayed in a stopped state, and it is reported that the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place. The changing icon a2 is deleted while the decorative symbol is stopped. The changing icon may be deleted while the decorative symbol is stopped.

  FIG. 113 (o) shows a state in which the suspension of the special figure 1 with the first holding order is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold icon reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the hold of the special figure 1 that has been digested is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a3. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon c2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area, the hold icon c3 is moved and displayed in the hold 3 display area, and the hold icon b4 is held. 4 is moved and displayed in the display area 4, the hold icon c4 is moved and displayed in the hold 5 display area, and the hold icon b5 is moved and displayed in the hold 6 display area. In addition, one game ball is won at the special figure 2 starting port, the number of holds is increased by 1, and the hold icon c5 is displayed in the hold 7 display area. It is notified that the number of hold is 7 by displaying 7 hold icons.

  FIG. 113 (p) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 113 (p). With the start of super reach production display, princess j4 is deleted. The princess j4 may be displayed during the super reach production display.

  In FIG. 113 (q), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, the changing icon and the hold icon are deleted, and the enemy and the enemy of the lord confront each other. This shows a state in which an effect in which an animation of a scene to be displayed is started. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen. The changing icon and the hold icon are hidden during a part of the super reach effect display.

  FIG. 113 (r) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 113 (s) shows a state in which an animation of a scene where the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed. The animation of the scene where Tono loses to the enemy of Tono is a display that suggests a loss.

  FIG. 113 (t) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the display of the super reach effect. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment.

  FIG. 113 (u) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbol, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image.

  FIG. 113 (v) shows a maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible.

  In this example, during the period from the start of the wipe-in when the wipe displays w7a and w7b appear until the maximum wipe state is reached, one game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port, and the special figure variable game is held on hold. The number increases, and the total number of holds becomes 8. Since the number of holds is full, the hold full tank blessing animation is started during the maximum wipe state. In the reserved full blessing animation of this embodiment, an animation in which the display size of the princess j4 gradually increases is displayed. However, since the princess j4 is displayed overlapping the wipe display w7b, the animation of the princess j4 is visually recognized. It is impossible.

  FIG. 113 (w) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the decorative symbol display, the background image, the changing icon, the hold icon, and the display of the princess j4 on the decorative symbol display device 208 can be gradually recognized. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Then, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern mode, is started. As shown in FIG. 113 (w), the changing icon a3, the hold icons c2, b3, c3, b4, and the princess j4 are gradually displayed from the gap between the wipe displays w7a and w7b. The display size of the princess j4 gradually increases.

  FIG. 113 (x) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place. The changing icon a3 is deleted while the decorative symbol is stopped. In the hold icon display area, the hold icon c2 corresponding to the hold of the first special figure 2 is displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b3 corresponding to the hold of the second special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 2 display area. Is displayed, the hold icon c3 corresponding to the hold of the third special figure 2 is displayed in the hold 3 display area, and the hold icon b4 corresponding to the hold of the fourth special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 4 display area. Is displayed, the hold icon c4 corresponding to the hold of the fifth special figure 2 is displayed in the hold 5 display area, and the hold icon b5 corresponding to the hold of the sixth special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 6 display area. Is displayed, the hold icon c5 corresponding to the hold of the seventh special figure 2 is displayed in the hold 7 display area, and the hold icon b6 corresponding to the hold of the eighth special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 8 display area. Is displayed. By displaying eight hold icons, it is informed that the number of holds is eight. In addition, in FIG. 113 (x), the pending full tank blessing animation in which the display size of princess j4 expands is finished, and the pending full tank blessing display in which princess j4 is displayed in a predetermined display size is displayed. . The princess j4 is displayed overlapping the stop display of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 113 (y) shows a state in which the holding of the special figure 2 having the first holding order is digested and the special figure 2 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 2 variable game, the decorative symbols display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the decorative symbol display device 208, The hold icon reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon c2 corresponding to the hold of the special figure 2 that has been digested is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a3. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon c3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area, the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 3 display area, and the hold icon c4 is held. 4, the hold icon b5 is moved and displayed in the hold 5 display area, the hold icon c5 is moved and displayed in the hold 6 display area, and the hold icon b6 is moved and displayed in the hold 7 display area. It is notified that the number of hold is 7 by displaying 7 hold icons.

  When the number of holds becomes 7 and the tank is no longer full, the hold full tank blessing display is terminated, and an animation for switching to the display before the hold full tank is displayed. As shown in FIG. 113 (y), in the switching animation, an animation is displayed in which the princess j4 having a predetermined size in the hold full tank blessing display is gradually reduced to the display size in the display before the hold full tank display. . The princess j4 is displayed so as to be overlapped with the variation display of the decorative symbols. The princess j4 may be displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol variation display.

  FIG. 113 (z) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. It is displayed in a stopped state, and it is reported that the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place. Princess j4 is displayed overlapping the stop display of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 113 (a) shows a state that continues from FIG. 113 (z), and shows a state in which the suspension of the special figure 1 with the first holding order is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold icon reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b3 corresponding to the hold of the special figure 1 that has been digested is moved and displayed in the change icon display area as the change icon a5. The changing icon a5 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold icon decreasing animation, the hold icon c3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area, the hold icon c4 is moved and displayed in the hold 3 display area, and the hold icon b5 is held. 4, the hold icon c5 is moved and displayed in the hold 5 display area, and the hold icon b6 is moved and displayed in the hold 6 display area. It is reported that the number of hold is 6 based on the number of hold icons. Further, in FIG. 113 (a), the switching animation to the pre-hold full tank display has been completed. The princess j4 is displayed in the display size in the near-full display.

  FIG. 113 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place.

  FIG. 113 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started after the reservation of the special figure 2 having the first holding order has been digested. With the start of the special figure 2 variable game, the decorative symbols display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the decorative symbol display device 208, The hold icon reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon c3 corresponding to the hold of the special figure 2 that has been digested is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a6. The changing icon a6 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold icon decreasing animation, the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon c4 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area, the hold icon b5 is moved and displayed in the hold 3 display area, and the hold icon c5 is held. 4 is moved and displayed in the display area 4, and the hold icon b5 is moved and displayed in the hold 5 display area. It is notified that the number of hold is 5 based on the number of hold icons.

  In FIG. 113 (c), since the number of reservations is less than 6 after the number of reservations once becomes 7 or more, an image exit animation before the reserved full tank is started. The princess j4 is moved and displayed on the right side due to the pre-full image exit animation. In the figure, the rightward arrow shown above the princess j4 indicates the moving direction of the princess j4.

  FIG. 113 (d) shows a state in which a pre-full image exit animation is displayed. The princess j4, which is displayed before the reserved full, moves to the right and is gradually erased.

  FIG. 113 (e) shows a state in which the pre-full image exit animation has been completed. When the princess j4 displayed before the reserved full tank moves to the right and is erased, the animation image exit animation before the reserved full tank ends.

  FIG. 113 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. It is displayed in a stopped state, and it is reported that the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the appearance animation of the princess j4 displayed in front of the reserved full tank and the animation in which the display size of the princess j4 that switches to the reserved full tank blessing display is enlarged are displayed overlapping the wipe display. In this way, the pending full tank display, the reserved full blessing display, and the effect display (in this example, princess j4) in the reserved full tank image exit animation may be displayed overlapping the wipe display. .

(Example 19)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 19 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 (a) to (x) show an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 114 shows the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative design display device 208 extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variation machine provided with a game board 1000 shown in FIG. Note that the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be a pachinko machine that changes in order of winning prizes.

  FIG. 114 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the fluctuation fluctuation display of the decorative pattern in the off-symbol pattern mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol, is displayed in a fluctuation manner (temporary stop display) in a display manner that swings to the left and right. . In addition, in the state at the time point shown in FIG. 114 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 corresponding to the hold of the first special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 2 display area. A hold icon b2 corresponding to the hold of is displayed. The hold icons b1 and b2 are white circle hold icons shown in FIG. The white circle hold icon is a default hold icon (normal hold icon). In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. In this embodiment, the changing icon of the display mode of the white circle pending icon is the default changing icon (the changing icon of the normal mode). The changing icon a1 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an empty background image.

  FIG. 114 (b) shows a state where the changing icon a1 is deleted. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 to 208c, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” which is an outlier symbol mode is displayed. The changing icon may be erased during the display of the fluctuation change of the decorative symbol in the off-pattern mode.

  FIG. 114 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol form, is fixedly displayed (stop display, main stop display), and the determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is displayed. It is reported that it is out of place.

  FIG. 114 (d) shows a state in which the holding of the special figure 1 having the highest holding order is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and displays the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the hold icon decrease animation. Is done. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the hold of the special figure 1 that has been digested is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a2. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

  FIG. 114E shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 114 (e).

  In FIG. 114 (f), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, the changing icon and the hold icon are deleted, and the enemy and the enemy of the lord confront each other. This shows a state in which an effect in which an animation of a scene to be displayed is started. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen. The changing icon and the hold icon are hidden during a part of the super reach effect display.

  FIG. 114 (g) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. In this example, in the super reach effect display, as a display suggesting a loss, a wipe effect is displayed after an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord and a fluctuation display of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” are displayed. Display is performed. In the super reach effect display, the wipe effect display may not be performed after the display indicating the shift is displayed.

  FIG. 114 (h) shows a state after the wipe display withdrawal display is completed. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a dissimilar symbol pattern, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The variation icon a2 is displayed again in the changing icon display area, and the hold icon b2 is displayed again in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Further, in this example, one game ball wins the special drawing 1 starting port 230 from the time when the hold icon is hidden with the start of the super reach production display until the end of the wipe production display. 1 hold increases by 1. The hold icon b3 corresponding to the increased hold is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The hold icon b3 is a face hold icon shown in FIG. The hold icon b3 is a prefetch notice mode.

  FIG. 114 (i) shows a state in which “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is displayed in a swinging manner in the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c.

  FIG. 114 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place.

  FIG. 114 (k) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is consumed and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and displays the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the hold icon decrease animation. Is done. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the hold of the special figure 1 that has been digested is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a3. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

  FIG. 114 (l) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 114 (l).

  In FIG. 114 (m), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach production display, the changing icon and the hold icon are deleted, and the enemy and the enemy of the lord confront each other. This shows a state in which an effect in which an animation of a scene to be displayed is started. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

  FIG. 114 (n) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 114 (o) shows a state in which a display indicating a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 114 (p) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. The normal background image is an empty background image when the wipe effect display is wiped out after the shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. By switching to the effect display, the super reach effect display ends.

  FIG. 114 (q) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbols, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, the background image, and the like.

  FIG. 114 (r) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible.

  FIG. 114 (s) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. When the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b starts, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, the changing icon and the hold icon are displayed again, and the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” which is an outlier symbol mode is started. As shown in FIG. 114 (s), the changing icon a3 and the hold icon b3 are gradually displayed from between the wipe displays w7a and w7b. Further, in this example, one game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the wipe effect display, and the hold icon b4 corresponding to the increased hold gradually moves from below to the hold 2 display area. The hold increase animation is displayed. The hold icon b4 is displayed overlapping the wipe display w7b. The hold icon b4 is a face hold icon shown in FIG. In the drawing, an upward arrow illustrated above the hold icon b4 indicates the moving direction of the hold icon b4.

  FIG. 114 (t) shows a state during the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b. A hold increase animation in which the hold icon b4 moves is displayed overlapping the wipe display w7b. In the figure, an upward arrow shown at the upper right of the hold icon b4 indicates the moving direction of the hold icon b4.

  In FIG. 114 (u), “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is a shifted pattern in the middle left and right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c, shakes left and right after the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w 7 a and w 7 b is completed. A state in which fluctuation fluctuation is displayed in the display mode is shown. The movement of the hold icon b4 to the hold 2 display area has been completed, and the hold increase animation has ended.

  FIG. 114 (v) shows a state in which “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is displayed in a swinging manner in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 114 (w) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place.

  FIG. 114 (x) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and displays the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the hold icon decrease animation. Is done. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b3 corresponding to the hold of the special figure 1 that has been digested is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a4. The changing icon a4 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

  In the present embodiment, a hold increase animation in which a hold icon displayed when the hold increases is moved to a predetermined hold display area is displayed overlapping the wipe display.

(Example 20)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 20 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 (a) to 115 (u) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 115 shows the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variation machine provided with a game board 1000 shown in FIG. Note that the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be a pachinko machine that changes in order of winning prizes.

  FIG. 115 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the fluctuation fluctuation display of the decorative pattern in the off-symbol pattern mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol, is displayed in a fluctuation manner (temporary stop display) in a display manner that swings to the left and right. . In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 115 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. A hold icon b1 corresponding to the hold of the first special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon shown in FIG. The white circle hold icon is a default hold icon (normal hold icon). In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. In this embodiment, the changing icon of the display mode of the white circle pending icon is the default changing icon (the changing icon of the normal mode). The changing icon a1 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an empty background image.

  FIG. 115B shows a state where the changing icon a1 is deleted. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 to 208c, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” which is an outlier symbol mode is displayed. The changing icon may be erased during the display of the fluctuation change of the decorative symbol in the off-pattern mode.

  FIG. 115 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol form, is fixedly displayed (stop display, main stop display), and the determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is displayed. It is reported that it is out of place.

  FIG. 115 (d) shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 1 with the highest hold order is consumed and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and displays a moving animation between the hold / change icons. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the hold of the special figure 1 that has been digested is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a2. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

  FIG. 115E shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started in the state shown in FIG. 115 (e). With the start of the super reach effect display, the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes, the changing icon is erased, and an effect is displayed in which the animation of the scene where the lord and the enemy of the lord confront each other is displayed. Has been started. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen. The changing icon is not displayed during a part of the super reach production display.

  FIG. 115 (f) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 115 (g) shows a state in which a display suggesting a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 115 (h) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. The normal background image is an empty background image when the wipe effect display is wiped out after the shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. By switching to the effect display, the super reach effect display ends.

  FIG. 115 (i) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbols, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, the background image, and the like.

  FIG. 115 (j) shows a maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible.

  FIG. 115 (k) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. When the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b starts, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, the changing icon and the hold icon are displayed again, and the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” which is an outlier symbol mode is started. As shown in FIG. 115 (k), the changing icon a2 is gradually displayed from between the wipe displays w7a and w7b. Further, in this example, one game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the wipe effect display, and the hold icon b2 corresponding to the increased hold gradually moves from the lower side toward the hold 1 display area. The hold increase animation is displayed. The hold icon b2 is displayed overlapping the wipe display w7b. The hold icon b2 is a button hold icon shown in FIG. The display mode of the button hold icon is a display mode of a prefetch notice, and is a display that prompts the player to press the chance button 136. In the figure, an upward arrow shown above the hold icon b2 indicates the moving direction of the hold icon b2. The hold icon b2, which is a button hold icon, is displayed in a form rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the positive orientation at the start of display.

  FIG. 115 (l) shows a state during the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b. A hold increase animation in which the hold icon b2 moves is displayed overlapping the wipe display w7b. In the figure, an upward arrow shown at the upper right of the hold icon b2 indicates the moving direction of the hold icon b4. The hold icon b2 rotates clockwise as long as it moves upward, and gradually takes a positive direction.

  In FIG. 115 (m), “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a shifted pattern in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, swings to the left and right after the wipe display w7a and w7b is withdrawn. A state in which fluctuation fluctuation is displayed in the display mode is shown. The movement of the hold icon b2 to the hold 1 display area has been completed, and the hold increase animation has ended. When the hold increase animation of the hold icon b2, which is the button hold icon, ends, the operation valid period (operation reception period) of the chance button 136 is started. Note that the operation period may be started while the reserved image is being animated.

  FIG. 115 (n) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place.

  FIG. 115 (o) shows a state in which the hold of the first special figure 1 is consumed and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and displays a moving animation between the hold / change icons. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the hold of the special figure 1 that has been digested is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a3. In the figure, an upward arrow shown to the right of the changing icon a3 indicates the moving direction of the changing icon. The changing icon a3 that is the display mode of the button hold icon is gradually enlarged while moving to the changing icon display area (hold 0 display area). The changing icon a3 that is the display mode of the button hold icon is displayed as a notice effect display of the change.

  FIG. 115 (p) shows a state where the movement between the hold / change icons has been completed. The changing icon a3 is displayed in the changing icon display area with a predetermined display size. The period during which the changing icon a3 that is the display mode of the button hold icon is displayed is the operation effective period of the chance button 136.

  FIG. 115 (q) shows a state in which the changing icon change effect display is started because the chance button 136 is pressed by the player. In the changing icon change display, an animation in which the smoke effect image j5 is displayed overlapping the changing icon a3 is displayed, and the changing icon a3 becomes invisible.

  FIG. 115 (r) shows a state in which the changing icon change effect display is finished. When the effect image j5 is deleted, the changing icon a3 becomes visible again, and the changing icon ends. The changing icon a3 that can be viewed again has changed to the display mode of the face hold icon shown in FIG. The display mode of the face hold icon is a notice mode.

  FIG. 115 (s) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 115 (s). Description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted.

  FIG. 115 (t) shows a state where the super reach effect display has been completed. The super reach effect display in this example is finished after “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” is displayed in a swinging manner in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. When the super reach effect display ends, the decorative symbol display device 208 changes to an empty background image, and the reduced display of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c ends. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is displayed in a shaking variation display in a manner of swinging left and right.

  FIG. 115 (u) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” which is a big hit symbol form is displayed. A stop display (main stop display) is displayed, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

  In the present embodiment, a hold increase animation in which a hold icon displayed when the hold increases is moved to a predetermined hold display area is displayed overlapping the wipe display. Further, when the hold button 136 is pressed while the hold icon or the changing icon in the display mode of the button hold icon is displayed, the hold change display or the changing icon change display is displayed. In this example, since the chance button 136 is pressed when the changing icon a3 which is the display mode of the button hold icon is displayed, the changing icon change display is displayed. When the hold icon b2 that is a button hold icon is displayed, when the chance button 136 is pressed, a hold change effect display is displayed. Note that the pending change effect display and the changing icon change effect display are the only differences between whether the icon to be changed is a hold icon or a changing icon, and the display mode (display content) of the effect display is the same. is there. Note that the changing icon may be referred to as the hold icon. The icon change effect display during change may be referred to as a hold change effect display. The display mode of the effect display may be different between the hold change effect display and the changing icon change effect display.

(Example 21)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 21 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 (a) to 116 (n) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 116, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variation machine provided with a game board 1000 shown in FIG. Note that the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be a pachinko machine that changes in order of winning prizes.

  FIG. 116 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the fluctuation fluctuation display of the decorative symbol in the off symbol mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol, is displayed in a fluctuation manner (temporary stop display) in a display manner that swings to the left and right. . In addition, in the state at the time point shown in FIG. 115 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 corresponding to the hold of the first special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second special icon is displayed in the hold 2 display area. A hold icon b2 corresponding to the hold in FIG. 2 is displayed. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon shown in FIG. 104, and the hold icon b2 is a button hold icon shown in FIG. The white circle hold icon is a default hold icon (normal hold icon). The button hold icon is a pre-reading notice mode and is a display that prompts the player to press the chance button 136. The period during which the hold icon of the button hold icon is displayed is the operation valid period of the chance button 136. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. In this embodiment, the changing icon of the display mode of the white circle pending icon is the default changing icon (the changing icon of the normal mode). The changing icon a1 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an empty background image.

  FIG. 116B shows a state in which the changing icon a1 is deleted. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 to 208c, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” which is an outlier symbol mode is displayed. The changing icon may be erased during the display of the fluctuation change of the decorative symbol in the off-pattern mode.

  FIG. 116 (c) shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol form, is fixedly displayed (stop display, main stop display), and the determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is displayed. It is reported that it is out of place.

  FIG. 116 (d) shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 1 with the highest hold order is consumed and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and displays the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the hold decrease animation. The In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the hold of the special figure 1 that has been digested is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a2. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

  In FIG. 116 (e), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state. With the start of the super reach production display, the background image displayed on the decorative design display device 208 changes, the changing icon and the hold icon are erased, and the scene where the niece and niece compete against each other for drinking alcohol. The production in which the animation is displayed is started. Once the hold icon b2, which is a button hold icon, is once deleted, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 related to the button hold icon is once interrupted. On the right side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of the dragonfly is displayed, and on the left side of the display screen, an image of a bag is displayed. A background image including a princess image and a cocoon image is displayed on the back of the image on the display screen and the cocoon image.

  FIG. 116 (f) shows a state where a button press suggestion display including a character string image “start by button operation” is displayed in a white rectangular frame on the decorative symbol display device 208. The period during which the button press suggestion is displayed is the operation effective period of the chance button 136, and the button press suggestion is a display prompting the player to press the chance button 136. In this example, when the player presses the chance button 136 during the operation effective period, a confrontation is started by comparing the drinking of the bowl and the bowl, and the chance button 136 is not pressed by the player during the operation effective period. In this case, only the result of the confrontation is displayed without displaying the confrontation scene of Tono and Tsuji. In addition, when the chance button 136 is pressed by the player during the operation effective period, the button press indication is deleted, and the operation effective period ends.

  FIG. 116 (g) shows a state in which an animation of a comparison scene of drinking and drinking with a cup filled with candy and a bowl in response to the player pressing the chance button 136 is displayed. Note that the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 116 (h) shows a state in which a display indicating a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the frog wins over the drinking and gets drunk is displayed as a display that suggests a loss.

  FIG. 116 (i) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The swing variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is a display suggesting a deviation. In the super reach effect display including the animation of the drinking and drinking scene, the wipe effect display is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 after the display indicating the shift is displayed until the display of the pattern pattern is confirmed. .

  FIG. 116 (j) shows a state in which the super reach effect display has been completed. When the super reach effect display is completed, an empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative design display device 208, and “decoration 2-decoration 3-” is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the upper center of the display screen. The “decoration 2” is displayed in a swinging manner and the changing icon a2 and the hold icon b2 are displayed again. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed during the super reach effect display, but when the super reach effect display ends and the normal effect display is restored, the hold icon b2 that is the button hold icon is displayed differently. There is no change in aspect.

  FIG. 116 (k) shows a state where the changing icon a2 is deleted. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 to 208c, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” which is an outlier symbol mode is displayed.

  FIG. 116 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol form, is fixedly displayed (stop display, main stop display), and the determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is displayed. It is reported that it is out of place.

  FIG. 116 (m) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and displays a moving animation between the hold / change icons. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the hold of the special figure 1 that has been digested is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a3. In the figure, an upward arrow shown to the right of the changing icon a3 indicates the moving direction of the changing icon. The changing icon a3 that is the display mode of the button hold icon is gradually enlarged while moving to the changing icon display area (hold 0 display area). The changing icon a3 that is the display mode of the button hold icon is displayed as a notice effect display of the change.

  FIG. 116 (n) shows a state where the movement between the hold / change icons has been completed. The changing icon a3 is displayed in the changing icon display area with a predetermined display size. The period during which the changing icon a3 that is the display mode of the button hold icon is displayed is the operation effective period of the chance button 136.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 116 (f), a display prompting the user to press the chance button 136 is displayed during the super reach effect display. Since the hold icon b2 that is the button hold icon is not displayed during the super reach effect display, even if the chance button 136 is pressed during the super reach effect display, the display mode of the hold icon b2 does not change. Further, since the chance button 136 is not pressed after the redisplay of the hold icon b2 and during the display of the changing icon a3, the display mode of the hold icon b2 and the changing icon a3 is not changed.

(Example 22)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 22 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 (A) to 116 (P) show examples of performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 116A to 116P, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variation machine provided with a game board 1000 shown in FIG. Note that the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be a pachinko machine that changes in order of winning prizes.

  FIG. 116 (A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is being executed and the fluctuation variation display of the decorative symbol in the off-symbol pattern mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol, is displayed in a fluctuation manner (temporary stop display) in a display manner that swings to the left and right. . In addition, in the state at the time point shown in FIG. 116 (A), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 corresponding to the hold of the first special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second special icon is displayed in the hold 2 display area. A hold icon b2 corresponding to the hold in FIG. 2 is displayed. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon shown in FIG. 104, and the hold icon b2 is a button hold icon shown in FIG. The white circle hold icon is a default hold icon (normal hold icon). The button hold icon is a pre-reading notice mode and is a display that prompts the player to press the chance button 136. The period during which the hold icon of the button hold icon is displayed is the operation valid period of the chance button 136. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. In this embodiment, the changing icon of the display mode of the white circle pending icon is the default changing icon (the changing icon of the normal mode). The changing icon a1 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an empty background image.

  FIG. 116 (B) shows a state where the changing icon a1 is deleted. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 to 208c, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” which is an outlier symbol mode is displayed. The changing icon may be erased during the display of the fluctuation change of the decorative symbol in the off-pattern mode.

  FIG. 116 (C) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol form, is fixedly displayed (stop display, main stop display), and the determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is displayed. It is reported that it is out of place.

  FIG. 116 (D) shows a state in which the holding of the special figure 1 with the highest holding order is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and displays the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the hold decrease animation. The In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the hold of the special figure 1 that has been digested is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a2. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

  In FIG. 116E, “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state. As the super reach production display starts, the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes, the changing icon and the hold icon are erased, and an animation of a scene where the enemy and the enemy are confronting each other is displayed. Production is started. Once the hold icon b2, which is a button hold icon, is once deleted, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 related to the button hold icon is once interrupted. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

  FIG. 116 (F) shows a state where a button press suggestion display including a character string image “start by button operation” is displayed in a white rectangular frame on the decorative symbol display device 208. The period during which the button press suggestion is displayed is the operation effective period of the chance button 136, and the button press suggestion is a display prompting the player to press the chance button 136. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed by the player during the operation effective period, the confrontation between the enemy and the enemy is started, and the chance button 136 is not pressed by the player during the operation effective period. In this case, only the result of the confrontation is displayed without displaying the confrontation scene of the enemy. In addition, when the chance button 136 is pressed by the player during the operation effective period, the button press indication is deleted, and the operation effective period ends. Note that the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 116 (G) shows a state in which an animation of a confrontation scene in which the enemy of the lord slashes in response to the player pressing the chance button 136 is displayed. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 116 (H) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. The normal background image is an empty background image when the wipe effect display is wiped out after the shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. By switching to the effect display, the super reach effect display ends.

  FIG. 116 (I) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbols, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, the background image, and the like.

  FIG. 116J shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible.

  FIG. 116 (K) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, the changing icon a2 and the hold icon b2 are redisplayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen, the fluctuation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol design, is started.

  In FIG. 116 (L), after the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a shifted symbol form, swings to the left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A state in which fluctuation fluctuation is displayed in the display mode is shown.

  FIG. 116 (M) shows a state in which “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is displayed in a swinging manner in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 116 (N) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place.

  FIG. 116 (O) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is completed and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and displays a moving animation between the hold / change icons. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the hold of the special figure 1 that has been digested is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a3. In the figure, an upward arrow shown to the right of the changing icon a3 indicates the moving direction of the changing icon. The changing icon a3 that is the display mode of the button hold icon is gradually enlarged while moving to the changing icon display area (hold 0 display area). The changing icon a3 that is the display mode of the button hold icon is displayed as a notice effect display of the change.

  FIG. 116 (P) shows a state where the movement between the hold / change icons has been completed. The changing icon a3 is displayed in the changing icon display area with a predetermined display size. The period during which the changing icon a3 that is the display mode of the button hold icon is displayed is the operation effective period of the chance button 136.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 116 (F), a display prompting the user to press the chance button 136 is displayed during the super reach effect display. Since the hold icon b2 that is the button hold icon is not displayed during the super reach effect display, even if the chance button 136 is pressed during the super reach effect display, the display mode of the hold icon b2 does not change. Further, since the chance button 136 is not pressed after the redisplay of the hold icon b2 and during the display of the changing icon a3, the display mode of the hold icon b2 and the changing icon a3 is not changed.

(Example 23)
A pachinko machine 100 according to a twenty-third example of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 (a) to (n). 117 (a) to 117 (n) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 117A to 117N, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variation machine provided with a game board 1000 shown in FIG. Note that the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be a pachinko machine that changes in order of winning prizes.

  FIG. 117 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the display of the fluctuation fluctuation display of the decorative symbol in the off symbol mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol, is displayed in a fluctuation manner (temporary stop display) in a display manner that swings to the left and right. . In addition, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 117 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 corresponding to the hold of the first special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second special icon is displayed in the hold 2 display area. A hold icon b2 corresponding to the hold in FIG. 2 is displayed. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon shown in FIG. 104, and the hold icon b2 is a button hold icon shown in FIG. The white circle hold icon is a default hold icon (normal hold icon). The button hold icon is a pre-reading notice mode and is a display that prompts the player to press the chance button 136. The period during which the hold icon of the button hold icon is displayed is the operation valid period of the chance button 136. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. In this embodiment, the changing icon of the display mode of the white circle pending icon is the default changing icon (the changing icon of the normal mode). The changing icon a1 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an empty background image.

  FIG. 117 (b) shows a state where the changing icon a1 is deleted. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 to 208c, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” which is an outlier symbol mode is displayed. The changing icon may be erased during the display of the fluctuation change of the decorative symbol in the off-pattern mode.

  FIG. 117 (c) shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol form, is fixedly displayed (stop display, main stop display), and the determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is displayed. It is reported that it is out of place.

  FIG. 117 (d) shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 1 with the highest hold order is consumed and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and displays the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the hold decrease animation. The In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the hold of the special figure 1 that has been digested is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a2. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

  In FIG. 117 (e), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state. As the super reach production display starts, the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes, the changing icon and the hold icon are erased, and an animation of a scene where the enemy and the enemy are confronting each other is displayed. Production is started. Once the hold icon b2, which is a button hold icon, is once deleted, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 related to the button hold icon is once interrupted. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

  FIG. 117 (f) shows a state where a button press suggestion display including a character string image “start by button operation” is displayed in a white rectangular frame on the decorative symbol display device 208. The period during which the button press suggestion is displayed is the operation effective period of the chance button 136, and the button press suggestion is a display prompting the player to press the chance button 136. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed by the player during the operation effective period, the confrontation between the enemy and the enemy is started, and the chance button 136 is not pressed by the player during the operation effective period. In this case, only the result of the confrontation is displayed without displaying the confrontation scene of the enemy. In addition, when the chance button 136 is pressed by the player during the operation effective period, the button press indication is deleted, and the operation effective period ends. Note that the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 117 (g) shows a state in which an animation of a confrontation scene in which the lord and the enemy are slashed is displayed. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 117 (h) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. The normal background image is an empty background image when the wipe effect display is wiped out after the shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. By switching to the effect display, the super reach effect display ends.

  FIG. 117 (i) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbols, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, the background image, and the like.

  FIG. 117 (j) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible.

  FIG. 117 (k) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, the changing icon a2 and the hold icon b2 are redisplayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen, the fluctuation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol design, is started.

  In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed by the player in a state in which a part of the hold icon b2 that is the button hold icon becomes visible after the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. When a part of the button hold icon becomes visible, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 relating to the button hold icon is resumed, so that the player starts the hold change effect display in response to the pressing. As shown in FIG. 117 (k), in the hold change effect display, an animation in which the smoke effect image j5 is displayed overlapping the changing icon a3 is displayed, and the hold icon b2 becomes invisible. A part of the effect image j5 is displayed overlapping the wipe display w7b. As described above, a part of the hold change effect display may be displayed so as to overlap the wipe effect display. Note that the effect image j5 may be displayed so as to be overlapped with a part of the hold icon or the changing icon different from the change target. The hold change effect display in this example is a response display that is displayed in response to an operation of the chance button 136.

  In FIG. 117 (l), after the wipe display of w7a and w7b is completed, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is a shifted pattern in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, swings left and right. A state in which fluctuation fluctuation is displayed in the display mode is shown. Moreover, in FIG. 117 (l), the hold change effect display is finished. When the effect image j5 is deleted, the hold icon b2 becomes visible again, and the hold change effect display ends. The hold icon b2 that has become visible again has changed to the display mode of the face hold icon shown in FIG. The display mode of the face hold icon is a prefetch notice mode.

  FIG. 117 (m) shows a state in which “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is displayed in a swinging manner in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 117 (n) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place.

  In this embodiment, the hold change effect display is not performed in response to the press of the chance button 136 during the super reach effect display, but the button hold icon 136 is pressed when the button hold icon becomes visible after the wipeout starts. Accordingly, the hold change effect display is performed. In addition, when the changing icon of the display mode of the button hold icon is displayed at the time of starting the super reach production display, and when the changing icon becomes visible after the start of wipeout, when the chance button 136 is pressed, A changing icon effect display may be performed in response to the pressing.

(Example 24)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 24 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 (A) to (O). 117 (A) to 117 (O) show an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series. 117 (A) to 117 (O), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variation machine provided with a game board 1000 shown in FIG. Note that the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be a pachinko machine that changes in order of winning prizes.

  FIG. 117 (A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the fluctuation fluctuation display of the decorative pattern in the off-pattern style is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol, is displayed in a fluctuation manner (temporary stop display) in a display manner that swings to the left and right. . In addition, in the state at the time point shown in FIG. 117 (A), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 corresponding to the hold of the first special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second special icon is displayed in the hold 2 display area. A hold icon b2 corresponding to the hold in FIG. 2 is displayed. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon shown in FIG. 104, and the hold icon b2 is a button hold icon shown in FIG. The white circle hold icon is a default hold icon (normal hold icon). The button hold icon is a pre-reading notice mode and is a display that prompts the player to press the chance button 136. The period during which the hold icon of the button hold icon is displayed is the operation valid period of the chance button 136. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. In this embodiment, the changing icon of the display mode of the white circle pending icon is the default changing icon (the changing icon of the normal mode). The changing icon a1 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an empty background image.

  FIG. 117 (B) shows a state where the changing icon a1 is deleted. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 to 208c, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” which is an outlier symbol mode is displayed. The changing icon may be erased during the display of the fluctuation change of the decorative symbol in the off-pattern mode.

  FIG. 117 (C) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol form, is fixedly displayed (stop display, main stop display), and the determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is displayed. It is reported that it is out of place.

  FIG. 117 (D) shows a state in which the holding of the special figure 1 with the highest holding order is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and displays the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the hold decrease animation. The In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the hold of the special figure 1 that has been digested is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a2. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

  117 (E), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state. As the super reach production display starts, the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes, the changing icon and the hold icon are erased, and an animation of a scene where the enemy and the enemy are confronting each other is displayed. Production is started. Once the hold icon b2, which is a button hold icon, is once deleted, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 related to the button hold icon is once interrupted. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

  FIG. 117 (F) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  In the super reach effect display of this example, the button pressing suggestion prompting the operation of the chance button 136 is not displayed, and the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is not started. In the super reach production display of this example, the confrontation between the lord and the enemy of the lord is started regardless of whether or not the player presses the chance button 136.

  FIG. 117 (G) shows a state in which an animation of a confrontation scene in which the lord and the enemy of the lord are slashing is displayed. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 117 (H) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. The normal background image is an empty background image when the wipe effect display is wiped out after the shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. By switching to the effect display, the super reach effect display ends.

  FIG. 117 (I) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbols, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, the background image, and the like.

  FIG. 117 (J) shows a maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible.

  FIG. 117 (K) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, the changing icon a2 and the hold icon b2 are redisplayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen, the fluctuation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol design, is started.

  FIG. 117 (L) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is pressed by the player after a part of the hold icon b2 which is the button hold icon becomes visible after the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. Yes. When a part of the button hold icon becomes visible, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 relating to the button hold icon is resumed, so that the player starts the hold change effect display in response to the pressing. As shown in FIG. 117 (L), in the hold change effect display, an animation in which the smoke effect image j5 is displayed overlapping the changing icon a3 is displayed, and the hold icon b2 becomes invisible. A part of the effect image j5 is displayed overlapping the wipe display w7b. As described above, a part of the hold change effect display may be displayed so as to overlap the wipe effect display. Note that the effect image j5 may be displayed so as to be overlapped with a part of the hold icon or the changing icon different from the change target.

  In FIG. 117 (M), “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is a shifted pattern in the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, swings to the left and right after the wipe display of w7a and w7b is completed. A state in which fluctuation fluctuation is displayed in the display mode is shown. Moreover, in FIG. 117 (l), the hold change effect display is finished. When the effect image j5 is deleted, the hold icon b2 becomes visible again, and the hold change effect display ends. The hold icon b2 that has become visible again has changed to the display mode of the face hold icon shown in FIG. The display mode of the face hold icon is a prefetch notice mode.

  FIG. 117 (N) shows a state in which “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is displayed in a swinging manner in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The changing icon a <b> 2 is erased during the shaking change display of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”.

  FIG. 117 (O) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place.

  In this embodiment, the button press suggestion display that suggests pressing the chance button 136 is not displayed during the super reach production display, and the operation effective period is not started. In addition, a hold change effect display is performed in response to pressing of the chance button 136 when the button hold icon becomes visible after the start of wipeout. In addition, when the changing icon of the display mode of the button hold icon is displayed at the time of starting the super reach production display, and when the changing icon becomes visible after the start of wipeout, when the chance button 136 is pressed, A changing icon effect display may be performed in response to the pressing.

  In the twenty-third and twenty-fourth embodiments, a hold change effect display may be performed in response to pressing of the chance button 136 after the maximum wipe state. Note that a hold change effect display may be performed in response to pressing of the chance button 136 after wipe-in. The entire pending change display may be overlapped with the wipe display. The hold change effect display in which the button hold icon changes in response to the press of the chance button 136 in the maximum wipe state is not performed, and the hold change effect in which the button hold icon changes in response to the press of the chance button 136 after the start of wipeout. You may comprise so that a display may be performed. Note that at least a hold change effect display in which the button hold icon changes in response to pressing of the chance button 136 during wipeout may be performed. In response to pressing of the chance button 136 at an earlier timing than another super reach effect display (for example, a super reach effect display of a performance in which Tono and Tsuji compare drinking) You may comprise so that the hold change production display in which a button hold icon changes may be performed. Also, a certain time before the start of wipe-in, a certain time after the start of wipe-in, a certain time before the maximum wipe state, a certain time after the maximum wipe state, and a certain time before the start of wipe-out The hold change effect display in which the button hold icon changes in response to the player pressing the chance button 136 at a certain time after the start of wipeout may be performed. When the chance button 136 is pressed during the period in which the button hold icon is displayed as the hold icon, the hold change effect display is performed, and the chance button 136 is displayed during the period in which the button hold icon is displayed as the changing icon. When is pressed, the changing icon change effect display is performed, so the difference between the hold change effect display and the changing icon change display is whether the change target is displayed as a hold icon or a change icon Only the difference. For this reason, the execution / non-execution of the changing icon change effect display at the timing of pressing the chance button 136 is the same as the hold change effect display.

(Example 25)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 25 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 (a) to 118 (p). 118 (a) to 118 (p) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 118A to 118P, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variation machine provided with a game board 1000 shown in FIG. Note that the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be a pachinko machine that changes in order of winning prizes.

  FIG. 118 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the fluctuation fluctuation display of the decorative pattern in the off-pattern style is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol, is displayed in a fluctuation manner (temporary stop display) in a display manner that swings to the left and right. . In addition, in the state at the time point shown in FIG. 118 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 corresponding to the hold of the first special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second special icon is displayed in the hold 2 display area. A hold icon b2 corresponding to the hold in FIG. 2 is displayed. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon shown in FIG. 104, and the hold icon b2 is a button hold icon shown in FIG. The white circle hold icon is a default hold icon (normal hold icon). The button hold icon is a pre-reading notice mode and is a display that prompts the player to press the chance button 136. The period during which the hold icon of the button hold icon is displayed is the operation valid period of the chance button 136. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. In this embodiment, the changing icon of the display mode of the white circle pending icon is the default changing icon (the changing icon of the normal mode). The changing icon a1 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an empty background image.

  FIG. 118B shows a state where the changing icon a1 is deleted. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 to 208c, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” which is an outlier symbol mode is displayed. The changing icon may be erased during the display of the fluctuation change of the decorative symbol in the off-pattern mode.

  FIG. 118 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol form, is fixedly displayed (stop display, main stop display), and the determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is displayed. It is reported that it is out of place.

  FIG. 118 (d) shows a state in which the holding of the special figure 1 with the highest holding order is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and displays the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the hold decrease animation. The In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the hold of the special figure 1 that has been digested is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a2. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

  In FIG. 118 (e), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state. As the super reach production display starts, the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes, the changing icon and the hold icon are erased, and an animation of a scene where the enemy and the enemy are confronting each other is displayed. Production is started. Once the hold icon b2, which is a button hold icon, is once deleted, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 related to the button hold icon is once interrupted. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

  FIG. 118F shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  In the super reach effect display of this example, the button pressing suggestion prompting the operation of the chance button 136 is not displayed, and the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is not started. In the super reach production display of this example, the confrontation between the lord and the enemy of the lord is started regardless of whether or not the player presses the chance button 136.

  FIG. 118 (g) shows a state in which an animation of a confrontation scene in which the lord and the enemy of the lord are slashing is displayed. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 118 (h) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. The normal background image is an empty background image when the wipe effect display is wiped out after the shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. By switching to the effect display, the super reach effect display ends.

  FIG. 118 (i) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbols, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, the background image, and the like.

  FIG. 118 (j) shows a maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible.

  FIG. 118 (k) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, the changing icon a2 and the hold icon b2 are redisplayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen, the fluctuation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol design, is started.

  FIG. 118 (l) shows a state where the chance button 136 is pressed by the player after a part of the hold icon b2 which is the button hold icon becomes visible after the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b starts. Yes. In this example, it is determined that the reverse effect display is displayed after the wipe effect display. In this case, the hold change effect display is not displayed in response to pressing of the chance button 136 after a part of the hold icon b2 becomes visible.

  In FIG. 118 (m), after the wipe display of w7a and w7b is completed, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is a shift in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, swings to the left and right. A state in which fluctuation fluctuation is displayed in the display mode is shown.

  FIG. 118 (n) shows a state in which the darkening effect display in which the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in black after the wipe effect display is started. The dark turn effect display in this example is a reverse effect display.

  FIG. 118 (o) shows a state where the darkening effect display is finished. The darkening effect display of this example is a reverse effect display, and after the darkening effect display of the reverse effect display is completed, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” that is a big hit symbol form in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. "" Is displayed with shaking fluctuation.

  FIG. 118 (p) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” which is a big hit symbol form is displayed. A stop display (main stop display) is displayed, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. During the stop display of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, the changing icon a2 is deleted. It should be noted that the changing icon a2 may be deleted during the fluctuation display of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”.

  In this embodiment, after the display indicating the shift is displayed in the super reach effect display, the wipe effect display is performed, and the chance button 136 is pressed by the player during the wipe out in the wipe effect display. When the reverse effect display is performed after the wipe effect display, the hold change effect display is not performed in response to pressing of the chance button 136 during the wipeout. As described above, when the revival effect display or the reverse effect display is performed after the wipe effect display, the hold change effect display is not performed in response to pressing of the chance button 136 after the wipe effect display is started. The same applies to the icon change display during fluctuation.

(Example 26)
A pachinko machine 100 according to a twenty-sixth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 (a) to 119 (p) show an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 119, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variation machine provided with a game board 1000 shown in FIG. Note that the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be a pachinko machine that changes in order of winning prizes.

  FIG. 119 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the fluctuation fluctuation display of the decorative pattern in the off-symbol pattern mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol, is displayed in a fluctuation manner (temporary stop display) in a display manner that swings to the left and right. . Further, in the state shown in FIG. 119 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 corresponding to the hold of the first special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second special icon is displayed in the hold 2 display area. A hold icon b2 corresponding to the hold in FIG. 2 is displayed. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon shown in FIG. 104, and the hold icon b2 is a button hold icon shown in FIG. The white circle hold icon is a default hold icon (normal hold icon). The button hold icon is a pre-reading notice mode and is a display that prompts the player to press the chance button 136. The period during which the hold icon of the button hold icon is displayed is the operation valid period of the chance button 136. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. In this embodiment, the changing icon of the display mode of the white circle pending icon is the default changing icon (the changing icon of the normal mode). The changing icon a1 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an empty background image.

  FIG. 119 (b) shows a state where the changing icon a1 is deleted. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 to 208c, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” which is an outlier symbol mode is displayed. The changing icon may be erased during the display of the fluctuation change of the decorative symbol in the off-pattern mode.

  FIG. 119 (c) shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol form, is fixedly displayed (stop display, main stop display), and the determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is displayed. It is reported that it is out of place.

  FIG. 119 (d) shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 1 with the highest hold rank is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and displays the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the hold decrease animation. The In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the hold of the special figure 1 that has been digested is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a2. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

  In FIG. 119 (e), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c, and then the super reach effect display is started. Indicates the state. As the super reach production display starts, the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes, the changing icon and the hold icon are erased, and an animation of a scene where the enemy and the enemy are confronting each other is displayed. Production is started. Once the hold icon b2, which is a button hold icon, is once deleted, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 related to the button hold icon is once interrupted. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

  FIG. 119 (f) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  In the super reach effect display of this example, the button pressing suggestion prompting the operation of the chance button 136 is not displayed, and the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is not started. In the super reach production display of this example, the confrontation between the lord and the enemy of the lord is started regardless of whether or not the player presses the chance button 136.

  FIG. 119 (g) shows a state in which an animation of a confrontation scene in which the lord and the enemy of the lord are slashed is displayed. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 119 (h) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. The normal background image is an empty background image when the wipe effect display is wiped out after the shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. By switching to the effect display, the super reach effect display ends.

  FIG. 119 (i) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbols, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, the background image, and the like.

  FIG. 119 (j) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible.

  FIG. 119 (k) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, the changing icon a2 and the hold icon b2 are redisplayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen, the fluctuation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol design, is started.

  FIG. 119 (l) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is pressed by the player after a part of the hold icon b2 which is the button hold icon becomes visible after the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b starts. Yes. When a part of the button hold icon becomes visible, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 relating to the button hold icon is resumed, so that the player starts the hold change effect display in response to the pressing. As shown in FIG. 117 (L), in the hold change effect display, an animation in which the smoke effect image j5 is displayed overlapping the changing icon a3 is displayed, and the hold icon b2 becomes invisible. A part of the effect image j5 is displayed overlapping the wipe display w7b. As described above, a part of the hold change effect display may be displayed so as to overlap the wipe effect display. Note that the effect image j5 may be displayed so as to be overlapped with a part of the hold icon or the changing icon different from the change target.

  In FIG. 119 (m), “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a shifted pattern in the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, swings left and right after the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. A state in which fluctuation fluctuation is displayed in the display mode is shown. Further, in FIG. 119 (m), the hold change effect display is finished. When the effect image j5 is deleted, the hold icon b2 becomes visible again, and the hold change effect display ends. The hold icon b2 that has become visible again has changed to the display mode of the face hold icon shown in FIG. The display mode of the face hold icon is a prefetch notice mode.

  FIG. 119 (n) shows a state in which the darkening effect display in which the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in black after the wipe effect display is started. The dark turn effect display in this example is a reverse effect display.

  FIG. 119 (o) shows a state where the darkening effect display is finished. The darkening effect display of this example is a reverse effect display, and after the darkening effect display of the reverse effect display is completed, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” that is a big hit symbol form in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. "" Is displayed with shaking fluctuation.

  FIG. 119 (p) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” which is a big hit symbol form is displayed. A stop display (main stop display) is displayed, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In addition, the changing icon a2 is erased during the shaking change display of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”.

  In this embodiment, after the display indicating the shift is displayed in the super reach effect display, the wipe effect display is performed, and the chance button 136 is pressed by the player during the wipe out in the wipe effect display. Even when the reverse effect display is performed after the wipe effect display, the hold change effect display is performed in response to pressing of the chance button 136 during the wipeout. Thus, even when the revival effect display or the reverse effect display is performed after the wipe effect display, the hold change effect display may be performed in response to pressing of the chance button 136 after the wipe effect display is started. The same applies to the icon change display during fluctuation.

(Example 27)
A pachinko machine 100 according to a twenty-seventh embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 (a) to 120 (o) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 120 shows the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative design display device 208 extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variation machine provided with a game board 1000 shown in FIG. Note that the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be a pachinko machine that changes in order of winning prizes.

  FIG. 120 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the fluctuation fluctuation display of the decorative pattern in the off-pattern style is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol, is displayed in a fluctuation manner (temporary stop display) in a display manner that swings to the left and right. . In addition, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 120 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 corresponding to the hold of the first special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second special icon is displayed in the hold 2 display area. A hold icon b2 corresponding to the hold in FIG. 2 is displayed. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon shown in FIG. 104, and the hold icon b2 is a button hold icon shown in FIG. The white circle hold icon is a default hold icon (normal hold icon). The button hold icon is a pre-reading notice mode and is a display that prompts the player to press the chance button 136. The period during which the hold icon of the button hold icon is displayed is the operation valid period of the chance button 136. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. In this embodiment, the changing icon of the display mode of the white circle pending icon is the default changing icon (the changing icon of the normal mode). The changing icon a1 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an empty background image.

  FIG. 120B shows a state in which the changing icon a1 is deleted. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 to 208c, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” which is an outlier symbol mode is displayed. The changing icon may be erased during the display of the fluctuation change of the decorative symbol in the off-pattern mode.

  FIG. 120 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol form, is fixedly displayed (stop display, main stop display), and the determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is displayed. It is reported that it is out of place.

  FIG. 120 (d) shows a state in which the holding of the special figure 1 with the highest holding order is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and displays the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the hold decrease animation. The In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the hold of the special figure 1 that has been digested is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a2. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

  In FIG. 120 (e), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state. With the start of the super reach production display, the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes, the changing icon is erased, and an animation of a scene where the lord and the foes are confronted is displayed. Be started. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen. In the super reach production display of this example, the hold icon is displayed. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 120 (e), the hold icon b2 is displayed so as to overlap the image of the palace. Since the hold icon b2 which is the button hold icon is displayed, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 related to the button hold icon is also continued. Note that a changing icon may also be displayed during the super reach production display.

  FIG. 120F shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  In the super reach effect display of this example, the button pressing suggestion prompting the operation of the chance button 136 is not displayed, and the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is not started. In the super reach production display of this example, the confrontation between the lord and the enemy of the lord is started regardless of whether or not the player presses the chance button 136.

  FIG. 120 (g) shows a state in which an animation of a confrontation scene in which the lord and the enemy of the lord are slashed is displayed. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 120 (h) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the display of the super reach effect. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. The normal background image is an empty background image when the wipe effect display is wiped out after the shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. By switching to the effect display, the super reach effect display ends.

  FIG. 120 (i) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the hold icon b2, the decorative symbol, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy, the background image, and the like. . Further, in this example, the chance button 136 is pressed by the player before the hold icon b2 is overlapped with the wipe displays w7a and w7b and becomes invisible.

  FIG. 120 (j) shows a maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible.

  In addition, the chance button 136 is pressed by the player before the hold icon b2 is overlapped with the wipe displays w7a and w7b and becomes invisible, and the hold icon b2 changes from the button hold icon in response to the press. The hold change effect display is started. In this example, the hold change effect display is started during the maximum wipe state, but the hold change effect display is not visible at the beginning because the hold change effect display is overlapped by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. .

  FIG. 120 (k) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, the changing icon a2 and the hold icon b2 are redisplayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen, the fluctuation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol design, is started.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (k), the effect image j5 of the hold change effect display is displayed between the wipe displays w7a and w7b. A part of the effect image j5 is overlapped with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. Thus, in this example, the hold change effect display is started during the maximum wipe state, and the hold change effect display becomes gradually visible as the wipeout starts.

  FIG. 120 (l) shows a state in which the hold change effect display is completed during the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b. The effect image j5 of the hold change effect display is deleted, and the hold icon b2 is changed to a face hold icon. A part of the hold icon b2 is overlapped with the wipe display w7b. The face hold icon is a hold icon of a prefetch notice mode.

  In FIG. 120 (m), “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a shifted pattern in the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, swings left and right after the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. A state in which fluctuation fluctuation is displayed in the display mode is shown.

  FIG. 120 (n) shows a state in which “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is displayed in a swinging manner in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The changing icon a <b> 2 is erased during the shaking change display of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”.

  FIG. 120 (o) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place.

  In this embodiment, the hold icon is displayed even during the confrontation effect between the lord and the enemy on the super reach effect display, and the hold change effect display is displayed in response to the press of the chance button 136 during the super reach effect display or during the wipe-in. Be started. The hold change effect display is displayed overlapping the wipe effect display. The changing icon may also be displayed during the confrontation effect in the super reach effect display. When the changing icon of the display mode of the button hold icon is displayed during the super reach effect display, the super reach is displayed. The changing icon change effect display may be started in response to pressing of the chance button 136 during the effect display or during wipe-in.

  Note that operation means other than the chance button 136 may be provided, and a hold icon simulating the operation means may be displayed. The operation means may be any lever, switch, handle, touch sensor, or the like, and the button hold icon can be appropriately replaced with a hold icon simulating these operation means such as a lever hold icon simulating a lever.

(Example 28)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 28 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 (a) to 121 (s). 121 (a) to 121 (s) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 121, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variation machine provided with a game board 1000 shown in FIG. Note that the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be a pachinko machine that changes in order of winning prizes.

  FIG. 121 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the fluctuation fluctuation display of the decorative pattern in the off-symbol pattern mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol, is displayed in a fluctuation manner (temporary stop display) in a display manner that swings to the left and right. . Further, in the state shown in FIG. 121 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. In each drawing of FIG. 121, the display of the changing icon and the hold icon is omitted.

  FIG. 121 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol pattern, is displayed in a swinging manner.

  FIG. 121 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol form, is fixedly displayed (stop display, main stop display), and the determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is displayed. It is reported that it is out of place.

  FIG. 121 (d) shows a state in which the holding of the special figure 1 with the highest holding order is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 121 (e) shows a state in which the volume adjustment display j6 is displayed in response to the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 being pressed by the player. In this example, the volume adjustment display j6 is displayed when the upper button or the lower button of the setting operation unit is pressed during the decorative display variation display during the normal effect display. The volume adjustment display j6 displays, from the left, a character string image of “volume”, a square frame image including “small” characters, a square frame image including “medium” characters, and a “large” character. Including square frame images including images arranged in this order. In this example, when the player presses the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137, the sound output from the speaker 120 and the volume of the BGM are set to three levels of “small”, “medium”, and “large”. Can do. A frame image corresponding to the currently set volume is displayed with a thick frame. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 121 (e), “medium” is set. For example, in a state where the volume is set to “medium”, when the left button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed, the volume is set to “small”, and when the right button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed, the volume is set. Set to “Large”. Similarly, when the right button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed while the volume is set to “low”, the volume is set to “medium”, and the setting operation is performed when the volume is set to “high”. When the left button of the section 137 is pressed, the volume is set to “medium”. Note that when the left button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed while the volume is set to “low”, the volume may be set to “high”, or the volume is set to “high”. When the right button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed, the volume may be set to “small”.

  FIG. 121 (f) shows a state in which the volume is set to “high” in response to the player pressing the right button of the setting operation unit 137. Since the sound volume is set to “high”, the sound output from the speaker 120 and the sound volume of the BGM are relatively increased.

  FIG. 121 (g) shows a state where the volume adjustment display j6 is deleted. In this embodiment, the volume adjustment display j6 is erased if the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137 are not pressed for a predetermined time while the volume adjustment display j6 is displayed. Note that the volume adjustment display j6 may be deleted after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of display, regardless of whether or not the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137 are pressed.

  FIG. 121 (h) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 121 (h).

  In FIG. 121 (i), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an effect is displayed in which an animation of a scene where the lord and the enemy of the lord confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen. In the case where the volume adjustment display j6 is displayed immediately before the start of the confrontation effect in which an animation in which the confrontation is displayed, the sound volume adjustment display j6 may be deleted simultaneously with the start of the confrontation effect. .

  In the present embodiment, the volume adjustment display j6 is not displayed even if the up / down button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed during the confrontation effect in which the animation of the confrontation between the lord and the enemy of the lord shown in FIG. 121 (i) is displayed. In this example, the player presses the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 at the time shown in FIG. 121 (i), but the volume adjustment display j6 is not displayed because the confrontation effect has already started.

  FIG. 121 (j) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 121 (k) shows a state in which an animation of a confrontation scene in which the lord and the enemy of the lord slash is displayed. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 121 (l) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. The normal background image is an empty background image when the wipe effect display is wiped out after the shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. By switching to the effect display, the super reach effect display ends.

  FIG. 121 (m) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbols, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, the background image, and the like.

  FIG. 121 (n) shows a maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible.

  FIG. 121 (o) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Then, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern mode, is started.

  In this example, the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed during the maximum wipe state. In response to the pressing, the volume adjustment display j6 is displayed together with the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b. In the present embodiment, the volume adjustment display j6 starts to be displayed with the start of wipe-out in response to the up / down buttons of the setting operation unit 137 being pressed after the maximum wipe state. As shown in FIG. 121 (o), a part of the volume adjustment display j6 is displayed so as to be visible between the wipe displays w7a and w7b during the withdrawal display. The volume adjustment display j6 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays w7a and w7b, and the volume adjustment display j6 is displayed so as to be gradually visible as the wipe displays w7a and w7b are withdrawn. In the state shown in FIG. 121 (o), the volume is set to “high”.

  FIG. 121 (p) shows a state in which the volume is set to “medium” by the player pressing the left button of the setting operation unit 137 during the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b. As a result, the sound output from the speaker 120 and the volume of the BGM become relatively smaller than before the press.

  FIG. 121 (q) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol design, is displayed in a swinging manner in such a manner that it swings left and right. The volume adjustment display j6 is continuously displayed, and the volume is set to “medium”.

  In FIG. 121 (r), “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is a shifted symbol pattern in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, is displayed after the wipe display w7a and w7b are withdrawn. It shows the state being done. Further, since the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137 are not pressed for a predetermined time while the volume adjustment display j6 is displayed, the volume adjustment display j6 is deleted.

  FIG. 121 (s) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place.

  In this embodiment, the volume adjustment display j6 is displayed as an effect adjustment screen when the upper button or the lower button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed during the decorative symbol variation display (design variation display). In the super reach effect display, an effect display in which a background image different from the normal effect display such as a confrontation effect in which the lord and the enemy of the sword slash and a confrontation effect in which the lord and the niece drink and compare is displayed and an animation is displayed. Even if the up / down button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed during execution of the above, the effect adjustment screen is not displayed, and when the up / down button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed after the maximum wipe state, the effect adjustment screen is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the volume adjustment display j6 for adjusting the volume of sound output from the speaker 120, BGM, or the like is displayed as the effect adjustment screen, but the effect adjustment screen is not limited to this. For example, as a player custom setting such as an effect setting, a display for setting the brightness of an LED provided on a game board or a main body, a character setting display for selecting a player's favorite character from a plurality of characters, a plurality of reach Display of reach effect setting for selecting a player's favorite reach effect from effect, display of effect scene setting for selecting a player's favorite effect scene from a plurality of effect scenes, player's favorite BGM from a plurality of BGMs A plurality of types of effect adjustment screens such as a display to be set, a display to set a jackpot reliability of a certain effect, and a display to select a sound effect may be provided. Note that the type of effect adjustment screen may be switched by pressing the up / down button of the setting operation unit 137. For example, when the volume adjustment display j6 is displayed, a display for setting BGM is displayed when the lower button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed, and the brightness of the LED is displayed when the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed. It may be configured so that a display for setting is displayed.

  In this embodiment, an example in which the call operation and the volume adjustment operation of the volume adjustment display j6 after the maximum wipe state are effective is shown, but the call operation and the volume adjustment operation of the volume adjustment display j6 after the wipe-in are enabled. Alternatively, the call operation and the volume adjustment operation of the volume adjustment display j6 may not be effective in the maximum wipe state, and the call operation and the volume adjustment operation of the volume adjustment display j6 may be enabled after the wipeout. The volume adjustment display j6 and the volume adjustment operation may be configured to be effective at least during wipeout. The volume of the super-reach effect display is earlier than that of another super-reach effect display. It may be configured such that the call operation and volume adjustment operation of the adjustment display j6 are valid. Also, a certain time before the start of wipe-in, a certain time after the start of wipe-in, a certain time before the maximum wipe state, a certain time after the maximum wipe state, and a certain time before the start of wipe-out The volume adjustment display j6 and the volume adjustment operation may be enabled at a timing such as a certain time after the start of wipeout. In the present embodiment, in the wipe effect display, display of the volume adjustment display j6 is started by the player's operation of the setting operation unit 137, but in the wipe effect display, display of a BGM setting display j7 described later is started. There is no.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modification of the present embodiment will be described. 121 (o ′) to (s ′) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in chronological order. 121 (o ′) to (s ′), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 121 (o ′) shows a state continued from FIG. 121 (n), and shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In this example, the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed during the maximum wipe state, and the volume adjustment display j6 is displayed together with the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b in response to the press. In this example, the volume adjustment display j6 is displayed overlapping the wipe displays w7a and w7b. Note that the volume adjustment display j6 of this example may be displayed overlapping the wipe displays w7a and w7b in the maximum wipe state. In the state shown in FIG. 121 (o ′), the volume is set to “high”. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is retracted and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is retracted and displayed so as to contract toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Then, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern mode, is started.

  FIG. 121 (p ′) shows a state in which the volume is set to “medium” by the player pressing the left button of the setting operation unit 137 during the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b. As a result, the sound output from the speaker 120 and the volume of the BGM become relatively smaller than before the press. The volume adjustment display j6 is displayed overlapping the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

  FIG. 121 (q ′) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol design, is displayed in a swinging manner in such a manner that it swings left and right. The volume adjustment display j6 is continuously displayed, and the volume is set to “medium”.

  In FIG. 121 (r ′), “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is a shifted pattern in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, fluctuates after the wipe display of w7a and w7b is completed. Indicates the displayed state. Further, since the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137 are not pressed for a predetermined time while the volume adjustment display j6 is displayed, the volume adjustment display j6 is deleted.

  FIG. 121 (s ′) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place.

  In this modification, the volume adjustment display j6 as the effect adjustment screen is displayed with priority over the wipe display. Thus, the effect adjustment screen may be displayed with priority over the wipe display.

(Example 29)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 29 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 (a) to (q) show an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 122, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variation machine provided with a game board 1000 shown in FIG. Note that the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be a pachinko machine that changes in order of winning prizes.

  FIG. 122 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the fluctuation fluctuation display of the decorative symbol in the off symbol mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol, is displayed in a fluctuation manner (temporary stop display) in a display manner that swings to the left and right. . In addition, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 122 (a), for example, the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. In each drawing of FIG. 122, the display of the changing icon and the hold icon is omitted.

  FIG. 122 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol pattern, is displayed in a swinging manner.

  FIG. 122 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol form, is fixedly displayed (stop display, main stop display), and the determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is displayed. It is reported that it is out of place.

  FIG. 122 (d) shows a state in which the holding of the special figure 1 having the highest holding order is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 122E shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 122 (e).

  FIG. 122 (f) shows a confrontation effect in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene where the lord and the enemy of the lord confront each other is displayed. Indicates a state where is started. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

  FIG. 122 (g) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 122 (h) shows a state in which an animation of a confrontation scene where the lord and the enemy of the lord are slashing is displayed. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. Further, in this example, the player presses the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 during the confrontation effect where the enemies of the lord and the lord are slashing, but the press is not accepted during the confrontation effect, and the volume adjustment display is performed. j6 is not displayed.

  FIG. 122 (i) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the display of the super reach effect. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. The normal background image is an empty background image when the wipe effect display is wiped out after the shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. By switching to the effect display, the super reach effect display ends.

  FIG. 122 (j) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbols, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, the background image, and the like.

  FIG. 122 (k) shows a maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible.

  In this example, the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed by the player in the maximum wipe state. In addition, it is determined that the revival effect display is performed after the wipe effect display of this example is completed. In this case, the pressing is not accepted and the volume adjustment display j6 is not displayed. As described above, even when the up / down button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed after the maximum wipe, if the revival effect display is determined to be performed after the wipe effect display, the pressing is accepted. The effect adjustment screen (for example, volume adjustment display j6) is not displayed.

  FIG. 122 (l) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Then, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern mode, is started. In this example, the player presses the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 during wipeout. However, since it is determined that the revival effect display is performed after the wipe effect display in this example is finished, the press is performed. Is not accepted and the volume adjustment display j6 is not displayed.

  FIG. 122 (m) shows a state where the wipe displays w7a and w7b are being retracted (wiped out). In this example, since it is determined that the restoration effect display is performed after the wipe effect display, the pressing of the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 during the wipeout is not accepted, and the volume adjustment display j6 is not displayed.

  In FIG. 122 (n), “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is a shifted pattern in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, swings to the left and right after the wipe display w7a, w7b is withdrawn. A state in which fluctuation fluctuation is displayed in the display mode is shown.

  FIG. 122 (o) shows a state in which the darkening effect display in which the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in black after the wipe effect display is started. The dark turn effect display in this example is a reverse effect display.

  FIG. 122 (p) shows a state where the darkening effect display is finished. The darkening effect display of this example is a reverse effect display, and after the darkening effect display of the reverse effect display is completed, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” that is a big hit symbol form in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. "" Is displayed with shaking fluctuation.

  FIG. 122 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” which is a big hit symbol form is displayed. A stop display (main stop display) is displayed, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

  In this embodiment, it is determined that the revival effect display is performed after the wipe effect display. In this case, the call operation of the effect adjustment screen after the maximum wipe state (for example, the upper and lower buttons of the setting operation unit 137 are changed). (Press) is configured not to be accepted. Even if it is set to accept the call operation of the effect adjustment screen after wipe-in, if the revival effect display is performed after the wipe effect display, the call operation of the effect adjustment screen after wipe-in is It may not be accepted.

(Example 30)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 30 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 (a) to (q). 123 (a) to (q) show an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 123, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variation machine provided with a game board 1000 shown in FIG. Note that the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be a pachinko machine that changes in order of winning prizes.

  FIG. 123 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the fluctuation fluctuation display of the decorative symbol in the off-symbol pattern mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol, is displayed in a fluctuation manner (temporary stop display) in a display manner that swings to the left and right. . In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 123A, for example, the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. In each drawing of FIG. 123, the display of the changing icon and the hold icon is omitted.

  FIG. 123 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol pattern, is displayed in a swinging manner.

  FIG. 123 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol form, is fixedly displayed (stop display, main stop display), and the determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is displayed. It is reported that it is out of place.

  FIG. 123 (d) shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 1 with the highest hold order is consumed and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 123E shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the variation display of the decorative symbol in FIG. 123 (e).

  FIG. 123 (f) shows a confrontation effect in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene where the lord and the enemy of the lord confront each other is displayed. Indicates a state where is started. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

  FIG. 123 (g) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 123 (h) shows a state in which an animation of a confrontation scene in which the lord and the enemy are slashed is displayed. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. Further, in this example, the player presses the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 during the confrontation effect where the enemies of the lord and the lord are slashing, but the press is not accepted during the confrontation effect, and the volume adjustment display is performed. j6 is not displayed.

  FIG. 123 (i) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the display of the super reach effect. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. The normal background image is an empty background image when the wipe effect display is wiped out after the shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. By switching to the effect display, the super reach effect display ends.

  FIG. 123 (j) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbols, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, the background image, and the like.

  FIG. 123 (k) shows a maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible.

  In this example, the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed by the player in the maximum wipe state. In addition, it is determined that the revival effect display is performed after the wipe effect display of this example is completed. Even in this case, the pressing may be accepted, and the volume adjustment display j6 may be displayed with the start of wipeout.

  FIG. 123 (l) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipe out) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Then, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern mode, is started.

  Further, in this example, the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed during the maximum wipe state, and the volume adjustment display j6 is displayed with the start of wipeout in response to the press. The volume adjustment display j6 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays w7a and w7b, and the volume adjustment display j6 is displayed so as to be gradually visible as the wipe displays w7a and w7b are withdrawn. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 123 (l), the volume is set to “high”.

  FIG. 123 (m) shows a state in which the volume is set to “medium” by the player pressing the left button of the setting operation unit 137 during the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b. As a result, the sound output from the speaker 120 and the volume of the BGM become relatively smaller than before the press.

  FIG. 123 (n) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol design, is displayed in a swinging manner in such a manner that it swings left and right. The volume adjustment display j6 is continuously displayed, and the volume is set to “medium”.

  FIG. 123 (o) shows a state in which the darkening effect display in which the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in black after the wipe effect display is started. The dark turn effect display in this example is a reverse effect display. The volume adjustment display j6 is deleted when the darkening effect display starts.

  FIG. 123 (p) shows a state where the darkening effect display is finished. The darkening effect display of this example is a reverse effect display, and after the darkening effect display of the reverse effect display is completed, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” that is a big hit symbol form in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. "" Is displayed with shaking fluctuation.

  FIG. 123 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” which is a big hit symbol form is displayed. A stop display (main stop display) is displayed, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined that the revival effect display is performed after the wipe effect display. Even in this case, the call operation of the effect adjustment screen after the maximum wipe state (for example, the upper and lower of the setting operation unit 137) Button press) is accepted. Even if it is set to accept the call operation of the effect adjustment screen after wipe-in, if the revival effect display is performed after the wipe effect display, the call operation of the effect adjustment screen after wipe-in is It may be accepted.

(Example 31)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 31 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 (a) to 124 (s) show examples of performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. Each drawing of FIG. 124 shows the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variation machine provided with a game board 1000 shown in FIG. Note that the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be a pachinko machine that changes in order of winning prizes.

  FIG. 124 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the fluctuation fluctuation display of the decorative pattern in the off-symbol pattern mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol, is displayed in a fluctuation manner (temporary stop display) in a display manner that swings to the left and right. . Further, in the state shown in FIG. 124 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. In each drawing of FIG. 121, the display of the changing icon and the hold icon is omitted.

  FIG. 124 (b) shows a state where “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is displayed in a swinging manner.

  FIG. 124 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol form, is fixedly displayed (stop display, main stop display), and the determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is displayed. It is reported that it is out of place.

  FIG. 124 (d) shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 1 with the highest hold order is consumed and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 124 (e) shows a state in which the BGM setting display j7 is displayed in response to the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 being pressed by the player. In this example, the BGM setting display j7 is displayed when the upper button or the lower button of the setting operation section is pressed during the decorative symbol variation display during the normal effect display. The BGM setting display j7 displays, from the left, a character string image “BGM”, a square frame image including a number “1”, a square frame image including a number “2”, and a number “3”. Including square frame images including images arranged in this order. In this example, when the player presses the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137, the types of BGM output from the speaker 120 are “1”, “2”, and “3”. Can be set from A frame image corresponding to the currently set BGM is displayed with a thick frame. In the state shown in FIG. 124 (e), BGM is set to “2”. For example, in a state where BGM is set to “2”, BGM is set to “1” when the left button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed, and BGM is set when the right button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed. Set to “3”. Similarly, when the right button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed while BGM is set to “1”, BGM is set to “2”, and setting operation is performed while BGM is set to “3”. When the left button of the section 137 is pressed, BGM is set to “2”. Note that when the left button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed while BGM is set to “1”, BGM may be set to “3”, or BGM is set to “3”. When the right button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed, BGM may be set to “1”.

  FIG. 124 (f) shows a state where the BGM is set to “3” in response to the player pressing the right button of the setting operation unit 137. Since the BGM is set to “3”, the BGM output from the speaker 120 is changed to the song “3”.

  FIG. 124 (g) shows a state where the BGM setting display j7 is erased. In this embodiment, the BGM setting display j7 is erased if the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137 are not pressed for a predetermined time during the display of the BGM setting display j7. The BGM setting display j7 may be deleted after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of display regardless of whether the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137 are pressed.

  FIG. 124 (h) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the variation display of the decorative symbols in FIG. 124 (h).

  In FIG. 124 (i), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an effect is displayed in which an animation of a scene where the lord and the enemy of the lord confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen. In the case where the BGM selection display j7 is displayed immediately before the start of the confrontation effect in which an animation in which the confrontation is displayed, the BGM selection display j7 may be deleted simultaneously with the start of the confrontation effect. .

  In the present embodiment, the BGM setting display j7 is not displayed even if the up / down button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed during the confrontation effect in which the animation of the confrontation between the lord and the enemy shown in FIG. In this example, the player presses the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 at the time shown in FIG. 124 (i), but the BGM setting display j7 is not displayed because the confrontation effect has already started.

  FIG. 124 (j) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 124 (k) shows a state in which an animation of a confrontation scene where the lord and the enemy of the lord slash is displayed. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 124 (l) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the display of the super reach effect. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. The normal background image is an empty background image when the wipe effect display is wiped out after the shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. By switching to the effect display, the super reach effect display ends.

  FIG. 124 (m) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbols, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, the background image, and the like.

  FIG. 124 (n) shows a maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible.

  FIG. 124 (o) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Then, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern mode, is started.

  In this example, the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed during the maximum wipe state. In response to the pressing, the BGM setting display j7 is displayed together with the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b. In this embodiment, the BGM setting display j7 starts to be displayed at the start of wipe-out in response to the up and down buttons of the setting operation unit 137 being pressed after the maximum wipe state. As shown in FIG. 124 (o), a part of the BGM setting display j7 is displayed so as to be visible between the wipe displays w7a and w7b during the withdrawal display. The BGM setting display j7 is displayed so as to overlap with the wipe displays w7a and w7b, and the BGM setting display j7 is displayed so as to be gradually visible as the wipe displays w7a and w7b are withdrawn. In the state shown in FIG. 124 (o), BGM is set to “3”.

  FIG. 124 (p) shows a state in which BGM is set to “2” by the player pressing the left button of the setting operation unit 137 during the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b. As a result, the BGM output from the speaker 120 is changed to the song “2”.

  FIG. 124 (q) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol design, is displayed in a swinging manner in such a manner that it swings left and right. The BGM setting display j7 is continuously displayed, and BGM is set to “2”.

  In FIG. 124 (r), “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is a shift in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, is displayed after the wipe display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. It shows the state being done. In addition, while the BGM setting display j7 is being displayed, the BGM setting display j7 is erased because the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137 have not been pressed for a predetermined time.

  FIG. 124 (s) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place.

  In the present embodiment, the BGM setting display j7 is displayed as an effect adjustment screen when the upper button or the lower button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed during the decorative symbol variation display (design variation display). In the super reach effect display, an effect display in which a background image different from the normal effect display such as a confrontation effect in which the lord and the enemy of the sword slash and a confrontation effect in which the lord and the niece drink and compare is displayed and an animation is displayed. Even if the up / down button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed during execution of the above, the effect adjustment screen is not displayed, and when the up / down button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed after the maximum wipe state, the effect adjustment screen is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, an example in which the calling operation and the BGM setting operation of the BGM setting display j7 after the maximum wipe state is performed is shown, but even if the calling operation and the BGM setting operation of the BGM setting display j7 after the wipe-in are enabled. Alternatively, the calling operation and the BGM setting operation of the BGM setting display j7 may not be enabled in the maximum wipe state, and the calling operation and the BGM setting operation of the BGM setting display j7 may be enabled after the wipeout. It should be noted that the BGM setting display j7 call operation and BGM setting operation may be valid at least during wipeout, and BGM is displayed earlier than another super reach effect display in one super reach effect display. It may be configured such that the call operation of the setting display j7 and the BGM setting operation are valid. Also, a certain time before the start of wipe-in, a certain time after the start of wipe-in, a certain time before the maximum wipe state, a certain time after the maximum wipe state, and a certain time before the start of wipe-out The BGM setting display j7 call operation and BGM setting operation may be made valid at a timing such as a certain time after the start of wipeout.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modification of the present embodiment will be described. 124 (o ′) to (s ′) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in time series. 124 (o ') to (s'), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 124 (o ′) shows a state continued from FIG. 124 (n), and shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In this example, the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed during the maximum wipe state, and the BGM setting display j7 is displayed together with the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b in response to the press. In this example, the BGM setting display j7 is displayed overlapping the wipe displays w7a and w7b. Note that the BGM setting display j7 of this example may be displayed overlapping the wipe displays w7a and w7b in the maximum wipe state. In the state shown in FIG. 124 (o ′), the BGM is set to “3”. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is retracted and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is retracted and displayed so as to contract toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Then, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern mode, is started.

  FIG. 124 (p ′) shows a state in which the BGM is set to “2” by pressing the left button of the setting operation unit 137 by the player during the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b. . As a result, the BGM output from the speaker 120 is changed to the song “2”. The BGM setting display j7 is displayed overlapping the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

  FIG. 124 (q ′) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol design, is displayed in a swinging manner in such a manner that it swings left and right. The BGM setting display j7 is continuously displayed, and BGM is set to “2”.

  FIG. 124 (r ′) shows that “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is a shifted pattern in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, fluctuates after the wipe display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. Indicates the displayed state. In addition, while the BGM setting display j7 is being displayed, the BGM setting display j7 is erased because the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137 have not been pressed for a predetermined time.

  FIG. 124 (s ′) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place.

  In this modification, the BGM setting display j7 as the effect adjustment screen is displayed with priority over the wipe display. Thus, the effect adjustment screen may be displayed with priority over the wipe display.

(Example 32)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 32 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 (a) to 125 (q) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 125 shows the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative design display device 208 extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variation machine provided with a game board 1000 shown in FIG. Note that the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be a pachinko machine that changes in order of winning prizes.

  FIG. 125 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the fluctuation fluctuation display of the decorative symbol in the off symbol mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol, is displayed in a fluctuation manner (temporary stop display) in a display manner that swings to the left and right. . In addition, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 125A, for example, the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. In each drawing of FIG. 122, the display of the changing icon and the hold icon is omitted.

  FIG. 125 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier design, is displayed in a swinging manner.

  FIG. 125 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol form, is fixedly displayed (stop display, main stop display), and the determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is displayed. It is reported that it is out of place.

  FIG. 125 (d) shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 1 with the highest hold order is consumed and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 125 (e) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching the reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 125 (e).

  FIG. 125 (f) shows a confrontation effect in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene in which the lord and the enemy of the lord confront each other is displayed. Indicates a state where is started. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

  FIG. 125 (g) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 125 (h) shows a state in which an animation of a confrontation scene where the lord and the enemy of the lord are slashing is displayed. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. Further, in this example, the player presses the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 during the confrontation effect where the enemies of the lord and the lord are slashing, but the pressing is not accepted during the confrontation effect, and the BGM setting display is displayed. j7 is not displayed.

  FIG. 125 (i) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. The normal background image is an empty background image when the wipe effect display is wiped out after the shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. By switching to the effect display, the super reach effect display ends.

  FIG. 125 (j) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbols, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, the background image, and the like.

  FIG. 125 (k) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible.

  In this example, the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed by the player in the maximum wipe state. In addition, it is determined that the revival effect display is performed after the wipe effect display of this example is completed. In this case, the press is not accepted and the BGM selection display j7 is not displayed. As described above, even when the up / down button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed after the maximum wipe, if the revival effect display is determined to be performed after the wipe effect display, the pressing is accepted. The effect adjustment screen (for example, BGM selection display j7) is not displayed.

  FIG. 125 (l) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipe out) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Then, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern mode, is started. In this example, the player presses the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 during the wipeout. However, since it is determined that the revival effect display is performed after the wipe effect display in this example is finished, The press is not accepted and the BGM setting display j7 is not displayed.

  FIG. 125 (m) shows a state in which the wipe displays w7a and w7b are being withdrawn (wiping out). In this example, since it is determined that the revival effect display is performed after the wipe effect display, pressing of the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 during the wipeout is not accepted, and the BGM setting display j7 is not displayed.

  In FIG. 125 (n), “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is a shifted pattern in the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, swings to the left and right after the wipe display w7a, w7b is withdrawn. A state in which fluctuation fluctuation is displayed in the display mode is shown.

  FIG. 125 (o) shows a state in which the darkening effect display in which the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in black after the wipe effect display is started. The dark turn effect display in this example is a reverse effect display.

  FIG. 125 (p) shows a state where the darkening effect display is finished. The darkening effect display of this example is a reverse effect display, and after the darkening effect display of the reverse effect display is completed, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” that is a big hit symbol form in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. "" Is displayed with shaking fluctuation.

  FIG. 125 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” which is a big hit symbol form is displayed. A stop display (main stop display) is displayed, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

  In this embodiment, it is determined that the revival effect display is performed after the wipe effect display. In this case, the call operation of the effect adjustment screen after the maximum wipe state (for example, the upper and lower buttons of the setting operation unit 137 are changed). (Press) is configured not to be accepted. Even if it is set to accept the call operation of the effect adjustment screen after wipe-in, if the revival effect display is performed after the wipe effect display, the call operation of the effect adjustment screen after wipe-in is It may not be accepted.

(Example 33)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 33 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 (a) to (q) show an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 126 shows the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative design display device 208 extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variation machine provided with a game board 1000 shown in FIG. Note that the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be a pachinko machine that changes in order of winning prizes.

  FIG. 126 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the fluctuation fluctuation display of the decorative symbol in the off-symbol pattern mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol, is displayed in a fluctuation manner (temporary stop display) in a display manner that swings to the left and right. . In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 126 (a), for example, the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. In each drawing of FIG. 126, the display of the changing icon and the hold icon is omitted.

  FIG. 126 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol pattern, is displayed in a swinging manner.

  FIG. 126 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol form, is fixedly displayed (stop display, main stop display), and the determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is displayed. It is reported that it is out of place.

  FIG. 126 (d) shows a state in which the holding of the special figure 1 having the highest holding order is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 126 (e) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 126 (e).

  FIG. 126 (f) shows a confrontation effect in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene where the lord and the enemy of the lord confront each other is displayed. Indicates a state where is started. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

  FIG. 126 (g) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 126 (h) shows a state in which an animation of a confrontation scene in which the lord and the enemy are slashed is displayed. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. Further, in this example, the player presses the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 during the confrontation effect where the enemies of the lord and the lord are slashing, but the pressing is not accepted during the confrontation effect, and the BGM setting display is displayed. j7 is not displayed.

  FIG. 126 (i) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. The normal background image is an empty background image when the wipe effect display is wiped out after the shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. By switching to the effect display, the super reach effect display ends.

  FIG. 126 (j) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbols, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, the background image, and the like.

  FIG. 126 (k) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible.

  In this example, the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed by the player in the maximum wipe state. In addition, it is determined that the revival effect display is performed after the wipe effect display of this example is completed. Even in this case, the pressing may be accepted, and the BGM setting display j7 may be displayed with the start of wipeout.

  FIG. 126 (l) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipe out) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Then, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern mode, is started.

  In this example, the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed during the maximum wipe state, and the BGM setting display j7 is displayed together with the start of wipeout in response to the press. The BGM setting display j7 is displayed so as to overlap with the wipe displays w7a and w7b, and the BGM setting display j7 is displayed so as to be gradually visible as the wipe displays w7a and w7b are withdrawn. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 126 (l), BGM is set to “3”.

  FIG. 126 (m) shows a state in which BGM is set to “2” by the player pressing the left button of the setting operation unit 137 during the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b. As a result, the BGM output from the speaker 120 is changed to the song “2”.

  FIG. 126 (n) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol design, is displayed in a swinging manner in such a manner that it swings left and right. The BGM setting display j7 is continuously displayed, and BGM is set to “2”.

  FIG. 126 (o) shows a state in which the darkening effect display in which the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in black after the wipe effect display is started. The dark turn effect display in this example is a reverse effect display. The BGM setting display j7 is erased when the darkening effect display is started.

  FIG. 126 (p) shows a state where the darkening effect display is finished. The darkening effect display of this example is a reverse effect display, and after the darkening effect display of the reverse effect display is completed, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” that is a big hit symbol form in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. "" Is displayed with shaking fluctuation.

  FIG. 126 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” which is a big hit symbol form is displayed. A stop display (main stop display) is displayed, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined that the revival effect display is performed after the wipe effect display. Even in this case, the call operation of the effect adjustment screen after the maximum wipe state (for example, the upper and lower of the setting operation unit 137) Button press) is accepted. Even if it is set to accept the call operation of the effect adjustment screen after wipe-in, if the revival effect display is performed after the wipe effect display, the call operation of the effect adjustment screen after wipe-in is It may be accepted.

(Example 34)
A pachinko machine 100 according to a thirty-fourth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 (a) to (p). 127 (a) to (p) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 127, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variation machine provided with a game board 1000 shown in FIG. Note that the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be a pachinko machine that changes in order of winning prizes.

  FIG. 127 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the fluctuation fluctuation display of the decorative pattern in the off-symbol pattern mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol, is displayed in a fluctuation manner (temporary stop display) in a display manner that swings to the left and right. . In the state at the time shown in FIG. 127 (a), for example, the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. In each drawing of FIG. 127, the display of the changing icon and the hold icon is omitted.

  FIG. 127 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off-set pattern, is displayed in a swinging manner.

  FIG. 127 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol form, is fixedly displayed (stop display, main stop display), and the determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is displayed. It is reported that it is out of place.

  FIG. 127 (d) shows a state in which the holding of the special figure 1 with the highest holding order is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 127E shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the variation display of the decorative symbols in FIG. 127 (e).

  In FIG. 127 (f), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an effect is displayed in which an animation of a scene in which the enemy and the enemy are confronting each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

  In the present embodiment, the effect adjustment screen is not displayed even if the up / down button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed during the confrontation effect in which the animation of the confrontation between the lord and the enemy shown in FIG. 127 (f) is displayed. In this example, the player presses the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 at the time shown in FIG. 127 (f), but the effect adjustment screen is not displayed because the confrontation effect has already started.

  FIG. 127 (g) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 127 (h) shows a state in which an animation of a confrontation scene in which the lord and the enemy are slashed is displayed. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 127 (i) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. The normal background image is an empty background image when the wipe effect display is wiped out after the shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. By switching to the effect display, the super reach effect display ends.

  FIG. 127 (j) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbols, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, the background image, and the like.

  FIG. 127 (k) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible.

  FIG. 127 (l) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Then, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern mode, is started.

  In this example, the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed during the maximum wipe state. In response to the depression, the volume adjustment display j6 and the BGM setting display j7 are displayed as the effect adjustment screen with the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b. In the present embodiment, the volume adjustment display j6 and the BGM setting display j7 are displayed when wipe-out is started in response to pressing of the up and down buttons of the setting operation unit 137 after the maximum wipe state. As shown in FIG. 127 (o), a volume adjustment display j6 and a BGM setting display j7 are displayed between the wipe displays w7a and w7b during the withdrawal display. The volume adjustment display j6 is displayed below the BGM adjustment display j7. The volume adjustment display j6 is displayed overlapping with the wipe displays w7a and w7b, and the BGM setting display j7 is displayed overlapping with the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 127 (l), the BGM setting display j7 is displayed so as to overlap with the fluctuation display of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. In this manner, the effect adjustment screen is displayed so as to overlap the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol. It should be noted that the effect adjustment screen may be displayed so as to overlap with the variation display of the decorative symbol, or may be displayed overlapping with the fluctuation variation display of the decorative symbol. Note that the effect adjustment screen may be displayed so as to overlap with the confirmation display of the decoration symbol, or may be displayed overlapping with the confirmation display of the decoration symbol.

  When the volume adjustment display j6 and the BGM setting display j7 are displayed at the same time, the volume adjustment display j6 is initially selected. In this case, the frame image corresponding to the currently set volume is thick. Displayed blinking in the frame. By pressing the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137 while the volume adjustment display j6 is selected, the player can set the volume to “low”, “medium”, or “high”. Further, when the volume adjustment display j6 is selected and the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed, the BGM setting display j7 is selected. In this case, the frame image corresponding to the currently set BGM is displayed blinking with a thick frame. The player can set BGM to any one of “1”, “2”, and “3” by pressing the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137 while the BGM setting display j7 is selected. In the state shown in FIG. 127 (m), the volume adjustment display j6 is selected, the volume is set to “high”, and the BGM is set to “2”.

  FIG. 127 (m) shows a state where the volume is set to “medium” by the player pressing the left button of the setting operation unit 137 during the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b. As a result, the sound output from the speaker 120 and the volume of the BGM become relatively smaller than before the press.

  FIG. 127 (n) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol design, is displayed in a swinging manner in such a manner that it swings left and right. The volume adjustment display j6 and the BGM setting display j7 are continuously displayed, the volume is set to “medium”, and the BGM is set to “2”.

  In FIG. 127 (o), “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is a shifted pattern in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, is displayed after the wipe display w7a, w7b is withdrawn. It shows the state being done. Further, since the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137 are not pressed for a predetermined time during the display of the volume adjustment display j6 and the BGM setting display j7, the volume adjustment display j6 is deleted. Note that the volume adjustment display j6 and the BGM setting display j7 may be deleted after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of display regardless of whether the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137 are pressed.

  FIG. 127 (p) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place.

  In the present embodiment, two types of effect adjustment screens, ie, an effect adjustment screen of volume adjustment display j6 and an effect adjustment screen of BGM setting display j7, are displayed at the time of wipeout. Thus, when two types of effect adjustment screens are displayed during wipeout, one effect adjustment screen (in this example, volume adjustment display j6) is displayed overlapping the wipe display, while the other The effect adjustment screen (in this example, BGM adjustment display j7) may be displayed overlapping the wipe display. Note that all of the plurality of effect adjustment screens may be displayed overlapping with the wipe display, or all of the plurality of effect adjustment screens may be displayed overlapping with the wipe display.

(Example 35)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 35 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the gaming board 1500 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 (a) is a schematic front view of the game board 1500 as viewed from the front. As with the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29, the game board 1500 includes a game area 124 that is defined by an outer rail and an inner rail, and a main liquid crystal unit 1001 that is arranged at the approximate center. A decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed at substantially the center of the main liquid crystal unit 1001. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority change machine.

  The game board 1500 is a so-called game board for left-handed machines. Special figure 1 start port 230, special figure 2 start port 232 (electric Chu), universal figure start port 228, and variable prize opening 244 fall on the left path due to the influence of the presence of game nail arrangement patterns, warp devices, etc. It is relatively easy for a game ball to enter, and it is relatively difficult to enter a game ball falling on the right path. The special drawing 2 starting port 232 cannot enter a ball while the pair of blade members 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right are closed, and can enter a ball while the blade members 232a are opened. In this embodiment, a left-handed machine is used as an example. However, a right-handed machine may be used. For the special figure 2 starting port 232, the universal drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning port 244, the right hand route is dropped. It may be relatively easy for a game ball to enter. Note that the game board 1500 may include a sub liquid crystal display device 1030, a movable body, and an illumination unit, similarly to the game board 1000.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 (a) to (q) show an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 128 (a) to 128 (j) show the game board 1500 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIGS. 128 (k) to 128 (q) show the main liquid crystal unit from the game board 1500. 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted and shown. In the present embodiment, the display of the changing icon and the pending icon is not shown.

  FIG. 128 (a) shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and displayed, and the determination result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is wrong. Informed. In the state shown in FIG. 128 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 0, the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0, and is in a non-electric support state (ordinary figure low probability state).

  FIG. 128 (b) shows a state in which a general-game variable game is started in response to the passing of one game ball through the general-game start opening 228. In the present embodiment, when the ordinary figure variable game is started, a normal effect area (ordinary effect area) j8 for displaying a square-shaped ordinary figure effect display is provided in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the normal performance area j8, the variation display of the general-purpose decorative symbols in which the display of the general-purpose decorative symbols such as “◯” and “X” is sequentially switched is performed. In FIG. 128 (b) and thereafter, the fluctuation display of the general decoration pattern is represented by a downward arrow.

  FIG. 128 (c) shows a state in which the variation time of the ordinary variable game has elapsed since the start of the ordinary variable game, and the ordinary variable game has ended. The result of the usual figure variable game is out of place (the stop symbol is "common figure C" shown in FIG. 5). In the normal effect area j8, “x” which is the off symbol pattern is displayed in a stop (determined display, main stop display), and it is notified that the result of the usual figure variation game is out of place.

  FIG. 128 (d) shows a state in which the normal drawing effect display has been completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the normal effect area j8 is deleted, and the normal effect display is ended. In this embodiment, when the next ordinary figure variable game is not started within a predetermined time after the end of the offending ordinary figure variable game, the ordinary figure effect display is ended.

  FIG. 128 (e) shows a state in which a game ball is passing through the normal start port 228. As a result, the usual figure variation game is started.

  FIG. 128 (f) shows a state in which the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game has elapsed since the start of the normal figure variable game, and the normal figure variable game has ended. The result of the usual figure variable game is a win (the stop symbol is “common figure A” shown in FIG. 5). In the normal performance area j8, “O”, which is a winning symbol mode, is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the usual figure variation game is winning.

  FIG. 128 (g) shows a state in which a display suggesting that a game ball is to be left-handed is displayed in the normal performance area j8. In the normal effect area j8, a “left” character image is displayed. In the present embodiment, since the special figure 2 starting port 232 is provided on the left path, the game area 124 is displayed with a weaker launch intensity of the game ball to the player after the symbol mode is stopped and displayed on the normal effect area j8. Is displayed in the normal performance area j8.

  FIG. 128 (h) shows a state in which the special figure 2 starting port 232 is open. A character image of “open” is displayed in the normal performance area j8, and the game ball is suggested and requested to aim at the opened special figure 2 start port 232.

  FIG. 128 (i) shows a state in which the opening of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is completed and the special figure 2 starting port 232 is closed. In the normal performance area j8, a character image of “End” is displayed immediately after the opening of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is completed, and it is notified that the opening of the special figure 2 starting port 232 has been completed. In this example, it is assumed that a game ball has not entered the open special figure 2 starting port 232. It should be noted that a character image of “End” is displayed in the normal effect area j8 before the opening of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is completed to indicate in advance that the opening of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is completed. May be.

  FIG. 128 (j) shows a state in which the normal drawing effect display has been completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the normal effect area j8 is deleted, and the normal effect display is ended. In this embodiment, when the next ordinary figure variable game is not started within a predetermined time after the opening of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is finished, the ordinary figure effect display is ended.

  FIG. 128 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started in response to the winning of the game ball at the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative display of the decorative symbols is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 128 (l) shows a state in which a normal game effect display is started in response to the passing of a single game ball through the normal game start port 228 during execution of the special figure 1 variable game. In the normal effect area j8, the variable display of the general-purpose decorative symbols (variable display of the normal-color decorative symbols) in which the display of the decorative symbols is sequentially switched is performed.

  FIG. 128 (m) shows a state in which the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game has elapsed since the start of the normal figure variable game during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game, and the normal figure variable game has ended. The result of the usual figure variation game is a win (the stop symbol is “female figure B” shown in FIG. 5). In the normal performance area j8, “O”, which is a winning symbol mode, is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the usual figure variation game is winning.

  FIG. 128 (n) shows a state where the normal drawing effect area j5 has been erased and the normal drawing effect display has ended. In the present embodiment, the special figure 2 starting port 232 is not in the open state when the “general map B” is hit in the non-electric support state (when the time is not activated), and the result is the general map fluctuation of the “general map B”. When the next ordinary figure variable game is not started within a predetermined time from the end of the game, the ordinary figure effect display is ended. Note that the special figure 2 starting port 232 may be in an open state for 100 ms in the case of “general map B” in the non-electric support state (when the time is not activated).

  When the special figure starting game 232 is not in the open state, the normal effect area j8 may be displayed with a stop symbol “x” in the normal effect area j8. FIG. 2 At the end of the general variable game where the start port 232 is not opened, a “○” is displayed in the normal performance area j8, so that a special map variable game being executed is announced (notice of the change). It may be broken. The “◯” may be displayed only when the success / failure determination result of the special figure variable game being executed is a big hit. Thus, the notice effect display of the change may be displayed in the normal effect region j8. In addition, when the special figure 2 starting port 232 is not in the open state, the normal game area j8 is displayed with “O” compared to the case where “X” is displayed in the normal performance area j8. In the case of the case, it may be configured such that the decorative symbol of the big hit symbol pattern is easily displayed.

When the special figure starting game 232 is not in the open state, the normal effect area j8 may be displayed with a stop symbol “x” in the normal effect area j8. FIG. 2 At the end of the general variable game where the start port 232 is not opened, a notice of advance (pre-reading advance notice) of the pending special map variable game is performed by displaying “O” in the normal performance area j8. Also good. The “◯” may be displayed only when the prefetching result of the prefetch notice target is a big hit. In this way, the pre-reading notice effect display may be displayed in the normal effect region j8. In addition, when the special figure 2 starting port 232 is not in the open state, the normal game area j8 is displayed with “O” compared to the case where “X” is displayed in the normal performance area j8. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol pattern is more likely to be displayed in the symbol variation display subject to prefetching notice.

  FIG. 128 (o) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208a. Show. In this example, super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 128 (o). The description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In FIG. 128 (o), the normal reach effect display may be started after reaching the reach of the decorative symbol variation display.

  In FIG. 128 (p), after the super reach effect display ends, the “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a big hit symbol pattern, swings in the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in a display manner that fluctuates horizontally. Indicates the displayed state. The shaking fluctuation display is an undecided state display of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 128 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed (this stop indication), and the determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is a big hit. It is reported that there is.

  In the present embodiment, with the start of the general map variable game, the general graphic effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the general drawing effect display, a roulette display of one symbol may be displayed as in the variation display of the general symbol decoration symbol of the present embodiment, or an effect display like a slot for variably displaying a plurality of symbols is displayed. In the case of a win, an effect display that arrives at the result showing the hit in the Amidakuji may be displayed. May be.

  The normal effect area j8 may be referred to as a special effect area or an interrupt effect area. For example, the decorative display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 is displayed as the first variable display, the decorative display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the special figure 2 is displayed as the second variable display, ) The variation display (variable display) at j8 is referred to as the third variation display or the effect variable display, the variation display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the special drawing is the first variation display, and the variation in the normal effect region j8 of this embodiment. The display may be referred to as a second variation display.

(Example 36)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 36 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 (A) to 128 (F). 128 (A) to 128 (F) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 128A to 128F, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1500 shown in FIG. 128A. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority change machine including a game board 1500. In the present embodiment, the display of the changing icon and the pending icon is not shown.

  FIG. 128 (A) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed and the normal figure variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the determination result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is wrong. Informed. In the normal performance area j8, a variation display of the general decoration pattern is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 128 (A), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 0, the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0, and the non-electric support state (ordinary low probability state).

  FIG. 128 (B) shows a state in which the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game has elapsed from the start of the normal figure variable game, and the normal figure variable game has ended. The result of the usual figure variable game is a win (the stop symbol is “common figure A” shown in FIG. 5). In the normal performance area j8, “Δ”, which is a chance mode, is stopped (determined display, final stop display). In the present embodiment, when the result of the usual figure variation game is a win, the chance mode is stopped and displayed in the normal performance area j8. In addition, when the result of the usual figure variable game is a win, the symbol pattern may be stopped and displayed in the normal effect area j8.

  FIG. 128 (C) shows a state in which a display suggesting that a game ball is to be fired left-handed is displayed in the normal performance area j8. In the normal effect area j8, a “left” character image is displayed. In the present embodiment, since the special figure 2 starting port 232 is provided on the left path, the game area 124 is displayed with a weaker launch intensity of the game ball to the player after the symbol mode is stopped and displayed on the normal effect area j8. Is displayed in the normal performance area j8.

  FIG. 128 (D) shows an effect display in a state where the special figure 2 starting port 232 is open. A character image of “open” is displayed in the normal performance area j8, and it is suggested to the game ball to launch the game ball in the left route with a low firing strength aiming at the open special figure 2 starting port 232 and It is requested.

  FIG. 128 (E) shows an effect display in a state where the opening of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is completed and the special figure 2 starting port 232 is closed. In the normal performance area j8, a character image of “End” is displayed immediately after the opening of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is completed, and it is notified that the opening of the special figure 2 starting port 232 has been completed. It should be noted that a character image of “End” is displayed in the normal effect area j8 before the opening of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is completed to indicate in advance that the opening of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is completed. May be.

  FIG. 128 (F) shows a state in which the ordinary drawing effect display has been completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the normal effect area j8 is deleted, and the normal effect display is ended. In this embodiment, when the next ordinary figure variable game is not started within a predetermined time after the opening of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is finished, the ordinary figure effect display is ended.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the general-purpose variable game is a win, the chance mode is stopped and displayed in the normal performance area j8. In this way, when the result of the usual figure variation game is a win, the chance mode may be stopped and displayed in the normal effect area j8 instead of the win symbol mode.

(Example 37)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 37 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 (a) to (f) show time-series examples of performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. 128 (a) to 128 (f), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1500 shown in FIG. 128 (a). The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority change machine including a game board 1500. In the present embodiment, the display of the changing icon and the pending icon is not shown.

  FIG. 128 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is being executed and the normal figure variable game is being executed. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative symbol variation display is displayed, and in the normal effect region j8, a regular symbol decorative symbol variation display is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 128 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 0, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0, which is a non-electric support state (ordinary low probability state).

  FIG. 128 (b) shows a state in which the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation game has elapsed since the start of the normal fluctuation game, and the normal fluctuation game has ended. The result of the usual figure variable game is out of place (the stop symbol is "common figure C" shown in FIG. 5). In the normal performance area j8, “Δ”, which is a chance mode, is stopped (determined display, final stop display). In the present embodiment, the chance mode is displayed as a notice of the special figure variation game being executed (symbol variation display). In the present embodiment, when the result of the usual figure variable game is out of place, the chance mode may be stopped and displayed in the normal performance area j8. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, during the symbol variation display, when the chance mode is not stopped and displayed, the jackpot symbol mode is displayed in the symbol variation display when the chance mode is stopped and displayed. It is configured to be easy to be. In addition, when the result of the usual figure variable game is out of order, the out-of-order pattern mode may be stopped and displayed in the normal performance area j8.

  FIG. 128 (c) shows a state in which the normal drawing effect display has been completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the normal effect area j8 is deleted, and the normal effect display is ended. In the present embodiment, when the next common figure variable game is not started within a predetermined time from the start of the stop display of the off symbol design, the general figure effect display is ended.

  In the present embodiment, although the chance mode is stopped and displayed in the normal performance area j8, no display suggesting that the special figure 2 starting port 232 (electric Chu) is aimed is performed. In this case, the chance mode warns that the jackpot symbol mode may be displayed in a fixed stop state with the decorative symbol being changed.

  FIG. 128 (D) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208a. Show. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. The description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In FIG. 128 (d), the normal reach effect display may be started after reaching the reach of the decorative symbol variation display.

  FIG. 128 (e) shows a swing variation in a display mode in which “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a big hit symbol pattern, swings to the left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c after the super reach effect display ends. Indicates the displayed state. The shaking fluctuation display is an undecided state display of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 128 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed (this stop indication), and the determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is a big hit. It is reported that there is.

  In the present embodiment, the chance mode displayed in the normal performance area j8 is displayed as a notice of the special figure change game being executed (notice of the change). Thus, the notice effect display of the change may be displayed in the normal effect region j8. It should be noted that a pre-reading notice effect display may be displayed in the normal effect region j8, and the chance mode may be displayed as a pre-reading notice of a pending special figure variable game, or a special figure variable game (special figure) being changed. If it is held in addition to the variability display), it may be a jackpot notice when the k figure fluctuation game is executed, or it is not a big hit notice of the special figure fluctuation game being fluctuated, but a special figure fluctuation game that is held It is good also as a jackpot notice when is executed.

(Example 38)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 38 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 129 (a) to 129 (g) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 129 (a) to 129 (g), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1500 shown in FIG. 128 (a). The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority change machine including a game board 1500. In the present embodiment, the display of the changing icon and the pending icon is not shown.

  FIG. 129 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 129 (a), for example, the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0, and the non-electric support state (ordinary low probability state).

  FIG. 129 (b) shows a state in which the base-game effect display is started in response to the passing of one game ball through the base-game start port 228 during the execution of the special FIG. 1 variable game. In the normal effect area j8, the variable display of the general-purpose decorative symbols (variable display of the normal-color decorative symbols) in which the display of the decorative symbols is sequentially switched is performed.

  FIG. 129 (c) shows a state in which the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation game has elapsed since the start of the normal fluctuation game, and the normal fluctuation game has ended. The result of the usual figure variable game is out of place (the stop symbol is "common figure C" shown in FIG. 5). In the normal performance area j8, “Δ”, which is a chance mode, is stopped (determined display, final stop display). In the present embodiment, the chance mode is displayed as a notice of the special figure variation game being executed (symbol variation display). In the present embodiment, when the result of the usual figure variable game is out of place, the chance mode may be stopped and displayed in the normal performance area j8. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, during the symbol variation display, when the chance mode is not stopped and displayed, the jackpot symbol mode is displayed in the symbol variation display when the chance mode is stopped and displayed. It is configured to be easy to be. In addition, when the result of the usual figure variable game is out of order, the out-of-order pattern mode may be stopped and displayed in the normal performance area j8.

  FIG. 129 (d) shows a state in which the ordinary drawing effect display has been completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the normal effect area j8 is deleted, and the normal effect display is ended. In the present embodiment, when the next common figure variable game is not started within a predetermined time from the start of the stop display of the off symbol design, the general figure effect display is ended.

  In the present embodiment, although the chance mode is stopped and displayed in the normal performance area j8, no display suggesting that the special figure 2 starting port 232 (electric Chu) is aimed is performed. In this case, the chance mode warns that the jackpot symbol mode may be displayed in a fixed stop state with the decorative symbol being changed.

  FIG. 129 (e) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208a. Show. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 129 (e). The description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In FIG. 129 (e), the normal reach effect display may be started after reaching the reach in the decorative symbol variation display.

  FIG. 129 (f) shows a display pattern in which “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is a misalignment pattern in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, oscillates left and right after the super reach effect display ends. Indicates the displayed state. The shaking fluctuation display is an undecided state display of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 129 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. This determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” which is an out of symbol mode is stopped and displayed (main stop display), and the determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is not correct. It is reported that there is.

  In the present embodiment, the chance mode displayed in the normal performance area j8 is displayed as a notice of the special figure change game being executed (notice of the change). Thus, the notice effect display of the change may be displayed in the normal effect region j8. As in the present embodiment, there is a case where the chance mode is stopped and displayed when the symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display.

(Example 39)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 39 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 129 (A) to 129 (L) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 129A to 129, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1500 shown in FIG. 128A. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority change machine including a game board 1500. In the present embodiment, the display of the changing icon and the pending icon is not shown.

  FIG. 129 (A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a decorative symbol variation display is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 129A, for example, the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0, which is a non-electric support state (ordinary low probability state).

  FIG. 129 (B) shows that “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a in the state where the sky background image that is the normal effect display is displayed, and then “ The decoration 2 ”is displayed in a temporarily stopped state. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 129 (B). The pachinko machine 100 is configured such that the symbol variation display on which the super reach effect display is performed is more easily confirmed and displayed on the symbol variation display than the symbol variation display on which the normal reach effect display is performed.

  In FIG. 129 (C), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an effect is displayed in which an animation of a scene where the lord and the lord's enemies confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen. When the result of the special figure 1 variable game success / failure determination is a big hit, the animation of the scene where the lord wins the enemy of the grandfather is displayed in the production, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game success / failure determination is out of sync Displays an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy.

  FIG. 129 (D) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 129 (E) shows a state in which a display suggesting a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 129 (F) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. The normal background image is an empty background image when the wipe effect display is wiped out after the shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. By switching to the effect display, the super reach effect display ends.

  In FIG. 129 (F), the multi-game effect display is started in response to the passage of one game ball through the multi-game start opening 228 during the execution of the special game 1 variable game. In the normal effect area j8, the variable display of the general-purpose decorative symbols (variable display of the normal-color decorative symbols) in which the display of the decorative symbols is sequentially switched is performed.

  FIG. 129 (G) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the front of the display screen of the decorative design display device 208 excluding the normal effect region j8, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy, the background image, and the like. The The wipe display w7b is displayed so as to overlap the normal effect area j8. Thus, the normal effect area j8 is displayed with priority over the wipe effect display.

  FIG. 129 (H) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end portion of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end portion of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen excluding the normal effect area j8 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible.

  In FIG. 129 (H), the fluctuation time of the usual figure variable game has elapsed since the start of the usual figure variable game, and the usual figure variable game has ended. The result of the usual figure variable game is a win (the stop symbol is “common figure A” shown in FIG. 5). Even in the maximum wipe state, the normal effect area j8 is displayed overlapping the wipe display w7b, and the normal effect area j8 is stopped and displayed as a symbol pattern “○”. It is reported that the game result is a win.

  FIG. 129 (I) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipe out) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Then, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern mode, is started. Even during the wipeout, the normal effect area j8 is displayed overlapping the wipe display w7b, and a character image of “left” is displayed in the normal effect area j8, which suggests that a game ball is to be fired left-handed. Has been. In the present embodiment, since the special figure 2 starting port 232 is provided on the left path, the game area 124 is displayed with a weaker launch intensity of the game ball to the player after the symbol mode is stopped and displayed on the normal effect area j8. Is displayed in the normal performance area j8.

  FIG. 129 (J) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. The completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a dissimilar symbol pattern, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The fluctuation variation is displayed in a manner. A character image of “open” is displayed in the normal performance area j8, and the player is informed that the special figure 2 starting port 232 is opened, and the game ball is aimed at the special figure 2 starting port 232. It is suggested and required for game balls to fire.

  FIG. 129 (K) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place. In the normal effect area j8, a character image of “END” is displayed, and it is notified that the opening of the special figure 2 start port 232 has ended.

  FIG. 129 (L) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. Moreover, in the state at the time point shown in FIG. 129 (L), the ordinary drawing effect display is finished. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the normal effect area j8 is deleted, and the normal effect display is ended. In this embodiment, when the next ordinary figure variable game is not started within a predetermined time after the opening of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is finished, the ordinary figure effect display is ended.

  In this embodiment, the normal effect area j8 is displayed overlapping the wipe display w7b. In this way, even when the variation display, the result display, the hitting suggestion display, the opening notification display of the special figure 2 starting port 232, etc. are displayed overlapping the wipe effect display in the normal effect region j8. Good.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modification of the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 129 (G ′) to (L ′) show an example of the effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in time series. In each of FIGS. 129 (G ′) to (L ′), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1500 shown in FIG. 128 (a).

  FIG. 129 (G ′) shows a state continued from FIG. 129 (f), and shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the present modification, the normal effect area j8 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe display w7b being wiped in. In the state shown in FIG. 129 (G ′), the special figure 2 starting port 232 is not in the open state, and in this case, the wipe effect display is displayed with priority over the normal effect region j8. Also good.

  FIG. 129 (H ′) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The normal effect area j8 is overlapped with the wipe display w7b and cannot be visually recognized. In the state shown in FIG. 129 (H ′), the special figure 2 start port 232 is not open, and in this case, the wipe effect display is displayed with priority over the normal effect region j8. Also good.

  FIG. 129 (I ′) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. With the start of wipeout, the normal performance area j8 is displayed overlapping the wipe display w7b, and the “left” character image is displayed in the normal performance area j8, suggesting that a game ball is to be fired with a left strike. Yes. As described above, in order to give priority to giving the player some information such as a suggestion of how to hit, a request for how to hit, and a suggestion of a winning winning opening at the time of wipeout, the normal performance area j8 is displayed on the wipe display w7b. It is displayed overlapping.

  FIG. 129 (J ′) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. The completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a dissimilar symbol pattern, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The fluctuation variation is displayed in a manner. A character image of “open” is displayed in the normal performance area j8, and the player is informed that the special figure 2 starting port 232 is opened, and the game ball is aimed at the special figure 2 starting port 232. It is suggested and required for game balls to fire.

  FIG. 129 (K ′) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place. In the normal effect area j8, a character image of “END” is displayed, and it is notified that the opening of the special figure 2 start port 232 has ended.

  FIG. 129 (L ′) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. Moreover, in the state at the time point shown in FIG. 129 (L), the ordinary drawing effect display is finished. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the normal effect area j8 is deleted, and the normal effect display is ended. In this embodiment, when the next ordinary figure variable game is not started within a predetermined time after the opening of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is finished, the ordinary figure effect display is ended.

  In this modification, the first decorative design (decorative design corresponding to the special design) of the multiple types of decorative designs is overlapped with the wipe display, and the second decorative design (general design) The wipe is overlapped by a decorative pattern corresponding to the figure. The second decorative symbol may be a fourth symbol corresponding to the special symbol. Displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 is a decorative pattern display device 208 that is started in response to the start of the general variable game, ends in response to the end of the general variable game, and displays a fixed display according to the result of the general variable game. The wipe effect display may be overlapped by the usual pattern decoration pattern.

  In this modification, the example in which the display in the normal effect area j8 is prioritized over the wipe effect display from the time before the opening of the special figure 2 start port 23 is started is shown. However, the result display in the normal effect area j8 is displayed. In the case of the winning “◯” or the chance mode “Δ”, it may be configured to prioritize the display of the normal drawing effect area over the wipe effect display from the result display stage. Further, when the result display in the normal effect area j8 is successful and the special figure 2 start port 232 is opened, the normal effect area j8 is more effective than the wipe effect display from the stage of the result display in the normal effect area j8. The display may be prioritized. Further, the display in the normal effect area j8 may be prioritized over the wipe effect display from the stage of the result display in the normal effect area j8, regardless of the content of the result display in the normal effect area j8.

(Example 40)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 40 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 130 (a) to (l) show examples of performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 130A to 130L, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1500 shown in FIG. 128A. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority change machine including a game board 1500. In the present embodiment, the display of the changing icon and the pending icon is not shown.

  FIG. 130 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a decorative symbol variation display is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 130 (a), for example, the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0, and is in a non-electric support state (ordinary low probability state).

  FIG. 130 (b) shows that “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a in the state where the sky background image that is a normal effect display is displayed, and then “ The decoration 2 ”is displayed in a temporarily stopped state. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG.

  FIG. 130 (c) shows an effect in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and the animation of the scene where the lord and the enemy of the lord confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

  FIG. 130D shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 130 (e) shows a state in which a display indicating a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss.

  Further, in FIG. 130 (e), the multi-game effect display is started in response to the passage of one game ball through the multi-game start opening 228 during the execution of the special game 1 variable game. In the normal effect area j8, the variable display of the general-purpose decorative symbols (variable display of the normal-color decorative symbols) in which the display of the decorative symbols is sequentially switched is performed.

  FIG. 130 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208 b during the super reach effect display. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down.

  Further, in FIG. 130 (f), the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game has elapsed since the start of the normal figure variable game, and the normal figure variable game has ended. The result of the usual figure variable game is a win (the stop symbol is “common figure A” shown in FIG. 5). In the normal performance area j8, “O”, which is a winning symbol mode, is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result of the usual figure variation game is winning.

  FIG. 130 (g) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the front of the display screen of the decorative design display device 208 excluding the normal effect region j8, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy, the background image, and the like. The The wipe display w7b is displayed so as to overlap the normal effect area j8. In the normal performance area j8, a “left” character image is displayed, which suggests that a game ball is to be fired left-handed.

  FIG. 130 (h) shows a maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end portion of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end portion of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen excluding the normal effect area j8 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible. The normal effect area j8 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe display w7b, the character image of “open” is displayed in the normal effect area j8, and the special figure 2 start port 232 is opened. The game ball is suggested and requested to fire the game ball aiming at the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  FIG. 130 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipe out) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Then, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern mode, is started. Further, during the wipeout, the normal effect area j8 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe display w7b, and in FIG. 130 (i), the opening of the special figure 2 start port 232 is terminated in the normal effect area j8. Is displayed. However, since a part of the normal effect area j8 is invisible, the “end” character image is invisible. As the wipeout progresses, the “end” character image becomes gradually visible.

  FIG. 130 (j) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. The completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a dissimilar symbol pattern, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The fluctuation variation is displayed in a manner. Further, in the state at the time point shown in FIG. 130 (j), the ordinary drawing effect display is finished. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the normal effect area j8 is deleted, and the normal effect display is ended.

  FIG. 130 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place.

  FIG. 130 (l) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the normal effect area j8 is initially displayed as being overlapped with the wipe display w7b, and at the same time as the wipeout is started, the normal effect area j8 is displayed as being overlapped with the wipe display w7b. Note that after the opening of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is ended, the normal effect region j8 may be overlapped with the wipe display w7b.

(Example 41)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 41 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 130A to 130K show examples of performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 130A to 130K, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1500 shown in FIG. 130A. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority change machine including a game board 1500. In the present embodiment, the display of the changing icon and the pending icon is not shown.

  FIG. 130 (A) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed and the normal figure variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the determination result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is wrong. Informed. In the normal effect area j8, a variation display of the usual decoration pattern is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 130A, the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 0, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0, which is a non-electric support state (ordinary low probability state).

  FIG. 130 (B) shows a state in which the variation time of the ordinary variable game has elapsed since the start of the ordinary variable game, and the ordinary variable game has ended. The result of the usual figure variation game is a win (the stop symbol is “female figure B” shown in FIG. 5). In the normal effect area j8, “Δ” is stopped (determined display, main stop display). In this embodiment, the special figure 2 starting port 232 is opened only for 100 ms at the time of the “general map B” in the non-electric support state (when the time is not operating). In this case, “Δ” is displayed as a result display in the normal effect area j8. In addition, when the result of the usual figure variable game is a win, “○”, which is a symbol pattern, may be stopped and displayed in the normal effect area j8.

  FIG. 130 (C) shows a state in which a display suggesting that a game ball is to be left-handed is displayed in the normal performance area j8. In the normal effect area j8, a “left” character image is displayed. In the present embodiment, since the special figure 2 starting port 232 is provided on the left path, the game area 124 is displayed with a weaker launch intensity of the game ball to the player after the symbol mode is stopped and displayed on the normal effect area j8. Is displayed in the normal performance area j8.

  FIG. 130D shows an effect display in a state where the special figure 2 start port 232 is open. A character image of “open” is displayed in the normal performance area j8, and it is suggested to the game ball to launch the game ball in the left route with a low firing strength aiming at the open special figure 2 starting port 232 and It is requested.

  FIG. 130 (E) shows an effect display in a state where the opening of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is completed and the special figure 2 starting port 232 is closed. In the normal performance area j8, a character image of “End” is displayed immediately after the opening of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is completed, and it is notified that the opening of the special figure 2 starting port 232 has been completed. In this example, it is assumed that no game ball enters the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  FIG. 130 (F) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started in the normal drawing effect area 8j. The appearance display of the wipe display w17a is started from the upper left corner of the normal effect area j8, and the appearance display of the wipe display w17b is started from the lower right corner of the normal effect area j8. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w17a and w17b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w17a and w17b are displayed in the foreground of the normal effect area j8 and are displayed so as to wipe off the character image of “END”.

  FIG. 130 (G) shows a state where a wipe-in in which wipe displays w17a and w17b appear in the normal effect area j8 is being performed.

  FIG. 130H shows a maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w17a and w17b is completed. The lower right end portion of the wipe display w17a and the upper left end portion of the wipe display w17b are in contact with each other, and the entire surface of the normal effect area j8 is covered with the wipe displays w17a and w17b.

  FIG. 130 (I) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe displays w17a and w17b is started. In the normal effect area j8, the wipe display w17a is retracted so as to be contracted toward the upper left corner, and the wipe display w17b is retracted so as to be contracted toward the lower right corner. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w17a and w17b, the character image of “END” in the normal effect area j8 is deleted. Further, the square frame image defining the area of the normal effect area j8 is gradually deleted together with the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w17a and w17b.

  FIG. 130 (J) shows a state in which the wipe displays w17a and w17b are being retracted (wiped out). In the area where the wipe displays w17a and w17b have been withdrawn, the normal effect area j8 is deleted.

  FIG. 130 (K) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w17a and w17b is completed. The wipe display w17a is reduced and erased toward the upper left corner of the normal effect area j8, and the wipe display w17b is reduced and erased toward the lower right corner of the normal effect area j8. The completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w17a and w17b is the end of the wipe effect display in the normal effect area j8. With the completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w17a and w17b, the normal effect area j8 is also deleted.

  In the wipe effect display of the present embodiment, the frame image surrounding the normal effect area j8 is wiped off by the wipe-out wipe displays w17a and w17b, and the normal effect area j8 is deleted at the end of the wipeout. It is configured. In the wipe effect display in the normal effect region j8, the wipe display pattern (pattern), the wipe-in direction, and the wipe-out direction may be different from the wipe display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

  The wipe effect display is not only performed so as to wipe out the entire display screen of the display device, but as in the present embodiment, the wipe effect display may be performed only within a part of the display device display screen. Good. The wipe effect display may be performed in a plurality of areas of the display screen of the display device, and the wipe effect display is performed in a part of the plurality of areas of the display screen of the display device. It does not have to be performed in this area. Here, the areas include a hold icon display area, a changing icon display area, a special figure 1 hold icon display area, a special figure 2 hold icon display area, a hold display area using a numerical image, and a mini-game related to a notice or a prefetch notice. It may be a display area for a mini game effect, a display area for a notice item, or a general winning opening effect display area in which a winning effect is performed when winning a general winning opening 226.

Here, the display in the normal effect area j8 will be described again.
The change display of the general-purpose decorative symbol indicates that the general-purpose decorative symbol is in the variable display (variable display) and has not reached the final display, and is indicated by a downward arrow in the above embodiment.

  When the result of the usual figure variation game is lost or the result is released for a short time such that the game ball cannot enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 (electric Chu) (“ This is a fixed display symbol in the case of “common figure B”. It should be noted that the symbol “X” has a high possibility that the result of the variable symbol game will be off, that there is a high possibility that the special figure 2 starting port 232 will not open, and that the special figure 2 starting port 232 is short. There is a high possibility that the time will be released, the fixed figure display result is a certain symbol aspect, or whether the special figure 2 start port 232 that is opened when the game ball passes the normal view start port 228 is opened? It is good also as a fixed display which shows that the lottery (determination result) of whether it decided to a certain result (non-opening, short-time opening) etc., or a fixed display which shows either of these.

  The regular figure decoration symbol “Δ” is a confirmation display indicating that the special figure 2 starting port 232 will notify that there is a possibility that the game ball will be opened for a long time enough to enter the game ball. It should be noted that the symbol “△” for the general-purpose decorative pattern has a certain degree of reliability per general-purpose graphic, the possibility that the special-purpose figure 2 starting port 232 will be opened for a long time, and a confirmation display in the normal performance area j8. Compared to the case where is “×”, the reliability that the special figure 2 start port 232 is opened for a long time is high, the big hit reliability of the special figure is more than a certain level, and the confirmation display in the normal effect area j8 Compared to the case of “×”, the special jackpot reliability is higher, the jackpot reliability of the pre-reading notice is more than a certain level, and the final display in the normal performance area j8 is “×”. As a comparison, a confirmation display indicating that the reliability of the big hit of the prefetch notice is high, or a confirmation display indicating any one of these may be used.

  The symbol “O” is a confirmation display indicating that the special figure 2 starting port 232 is opened for a long time or that the result of the usual figure variable game is a win. It should be noted that the symbol “○” for the general-purpose decorative pattern has a certain degree of reliability per general-purpose graphic, the possibility that the special-purpose figure 2 starting port 232 will be opened for a long time, and a confirmation display in the normal performance area j8. Compared with the case where “Δ” is “△”, the reliability that the special figure 2 start port 232 is open for a long time is high, the big hit reliability of the special figure is more than a certain degree, and the confirmation display in the normal production area j8 Compared to the case of “△”, when the big hit reliability of the special drawing is higher, the big hit reliability of the pre-reading notice is more than a certain level, and when the final display in the normal performance area j8 is “△” As a comparison, a confirmation display indicating that the reliability of the big hit of the prefetch notice is high, or a confirmation display indicating any one of these may be used.

  The character image of “Left” is a fixed display that prompts, requests, or suggests that the special figure 2 starting port 232 is opened for a long time or that a game ball is aimed at the left side of the game board 1500. Note that the character image of “left” may be a confirmation display indicating that the special figure 2 starting port 232 is opened and that the special figure 2 starting port 232 is likely to be opened or opened for a long time. In this embodiment, the “left” mode is in this mode because the special figure 2 starting port 232 is provided on the left side of the game board 1500, and instead of “left”, the game ball is fired. “Weak” indicating the strength may be displayed, or “top” may be displayed if the special figure 2 starting port 232 is on the upper side of the game board 1500.

  The character image of “open” is a confirmation display indicating that the special figure 2 starting port 232 has been open for a long time. The character image of “open” may be a confirmation display indicating that the special figure 2 starting port 232 is open and that the special figure 2 starting port 232 is likely to be open or open for a long time. .

  The character image of “END” is a confirmation display indicating that the long time opening of the special figure 2 starting port 232 has ended. Note that the character image of “End” indicates that the opening of the special figure 2 starting port 232 has been completed, the opening of the special figure 2 starting port has been completed or the opening has been completed for a long time, or the special figure 2 starting port 232 has been opened or has been opened for a long time. It is good also as a fixed display which shows that possibility of completion | finish of opening is high.

  Note that the short time opening is the shortest opening time among a plurality of opening times. The short-time opening may be an opening time that is less than or less than a certain opening time among a plurality of opening times. The long open time is the longest open time among a plurality of open times. Opening for a long time may be an opening time longer than a certain opening time among a plurality of opening times or exceeding a certain time.

  Although an example in which a still image is displayed in the normal effect area j8 is shown, in the normal effect area j8, “↓”, “×”, “Δ”, “O”, “Left”, “Open” , “End” animations may be displayed, images having the same meaning as those images may be displayed, or other images may have a meaning other than these images. An animated image may be displayed.

(Example 42)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 42 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 (a) to 131 (r). 131 (a) to 131 (r) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 131, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variation machine provided with a game board 1000 shown in FIG. Note that the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be a pachinko machine that changes in order of winning prizes.

  FIG. 131 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the fluctuation fluctuation display of the decorative symbol in the off symbol pattern mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol, is displayed in a fluctuation manner (temporary stop display) in a display manner that swings to the left and right. . Further, in the state shown in FIG. 131 (a), for example, the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. In each drawing of FIG. 131, the display of the changing icon and the hold icon is omitted.

  FIG. 131 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol pattern, is displayed in a swinging manner.

  FIG. 131 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol form, is fixedly displayed (stop display, main stop display), and the determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is displayed. It is reported that it is out of place.

  FIG. 131 (d) shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 1 with the highest hold order is consumed and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 131 (e) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the variation display of the decorative symbols in FIG. 134 (e).

  In FIG. 131 (f), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an effect is displayed in which an animation of a scene where the lord and the enemy of the lord confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

  FIG. 131 (g) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 131 (h) shows a state in which an animation of a confrontation scene where the lord and the enemy of the lord are slashing is displayed. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 131 (i) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the display of the super reach effect. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. The normal background image is an empty background image when the wipe effect display is wiped out after the shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. By switching to the effect display, the super reach effect display ends.

  FIG. 131 (j) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this embodiment, a wipe effect display is performed by a pair of wipe displays on each of the right half and the left half of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. First, as shown in FIG. 134 (j), the wipe effect display is started in the right half of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w19a is started from the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w19a is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w19a and w19b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w19a and w19b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbols, the image of the palace, the background image, and the like.

  FIG. 131 (k) shows a state where the appearance display of wipe displays w19a and w19b is displayed. When the wipe display w19a overlaps a part of the fluctuation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are decorated. The symbol display device 208 is moved from the upper right corner to the upper left corner of the display screen, and the fluctuation display is not overlapped with the wipe display w19a. Note that the timing of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c moving from the upper right corner to the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is “decoration 2-decoration 3- It may be after the wipe display w19a overlaps all of the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2”.

  FIG. 131 (l) shows a state where the appearance display of the wipe displays w19a and w19b is completed and the right half of the display screen is in the maximum wipe state. The lower right end of the wipe display w19a is in contact with the upper left end of the wipe display w19b, and the right half of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w19a and w19b.

  FIG. 131 (m) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started in the left half of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. The appearance display of the wipe display w21a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w21a is started from the lower center of the display screen. The wipe displays w21a and w21b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbol, the enemy image, the background image, and the like.

  FIG. 131 (n) shows a state where the appearance display of the wipe displays w21a and w21b is completed and the left half of the display screen is in the maximum wipe state. The lower right end of the wipe display w21a is in contact with the upper left end of the wipe display w21b, and the left half of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w19a and w19b. As a result, the entire screen of the decorative design display device 208 is in a maximum wipe state in which the display is covered with the wipe display, and the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible.

  FIG. 131 (o) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w21a and w21b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w21a is retracted so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w21b is retracted so as to shrink toward the lower center of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w21a and w21b, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the left half of the display screen of the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w21a and w21b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Then, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern mode, is started.

  FIG. 131 (p) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w19a and w19b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w19a is displayed withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper center of the display screen, and the wipe display w19b is displayed withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w19a and w19b, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the right half of the display screen of the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible.

  FIG. 131 (q) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w19a, w19b, w21a, and w21b is completed. In this example, the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w19a and w19b is completed after the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w21a and w21b is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol design, is displayed in a swinging manner in such a manner that it swings left and right.

  FIG. 131 (r) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place.

  In this embodiment, different wipe effect displays are performed on the right half and the left half of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thus, the wipe effect display may be performed for each partial area of the display screen of the display device 208. The patterns of the wipe displays w19a and w19b are the same, the patterns of the wipe displays w21a and w21b are the same, and the patterns of the wipe displays w19a and 19b and the patterns of the wipe displays w21a and 21b are the same. The patterns of the wipe displays w19a and 19b and the patterns of the wipe displays w21a and 21b may be different. Further, the wipe display w21a, 21b may start wipe-in (appearance display) earlier than the wipe display w19a, 19b, or the wipe display w19a, 19b wipes earlier than the wipe display w21a, 21b. Out (withdrawal display) may be started, and these wipe displays may start wipe-in and wipe-out simultaneously. These wipe displays may be in the maximum wipe state at the same time.

(Example 43)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 43 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the game board 1600 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 (a) is a schematic front view of the game board 1600 as viewed from the front. As with the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29, the game board 1600 includes a game area 124 that is defined by an outer rail and an inner rail, and a main liquid crystal unit 1001 that is disposed substantially at the center. A decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed at substantially the center of the main liquid crystal unit 1001. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority change machine.

  The game board 1600 is a so-called game board for right-handed machines. For Special Figure 2 Start Port 232 (Electric Chu), Universal View Start Port 228, and Variable Winner Port 244, game balls falling on the right path are affected by the presence of game nail arrangement patterns, warp devices, etc. It is relatively easy, and it is relatively difficult to enter a game ball that falls on the left path. On the other hand, for Special Figure 1 starting port 230, it is relatively easy to enter a game ball falling on the left path due to the influence of the arrangement pattern of game nails, the warp device, etc., and the game falling on the right path. Sphere entry is relatively difficult. Note that the game board 1600 may include a sub liquid crystal display device 1030, a movable body, and an illumination unit, similarly to the game board 1000.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 132 (a) to 132 (m) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 132 (a) shows a gaming board 1500 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIGS. 132 (b) to 132 (m) show the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 from the gaming board 1600. Is extracted and shown. In the present embodiment, the display of the changing icon and the pending icon is not shown.

  FIG. 132 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and displayed, and the determination result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is wrong. Informed. In the state shown in FIG. 132 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 0, the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0, and the non-electric support state (ordinary low probability state).

  FIG. 132 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started in response to the winning of the game ball in the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative display of the decorative symbols is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 132C shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 132 (c).

  In FIG. 132 (d), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an effect is displayed in which an animation of a scene where the lord and the enemy of the lord confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

  FIG. 132 (e) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 132 (f) shows a state in which a display indicating a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss.

  Further, in FIG. 132 (f), a left-handed display j9 including a character string image “Return to the left!” Is displayed. The left-handed display j9 is one of notifications (specific operation request notification) for requesting a specific operation (left-handed) from the player. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the special figure 1 starting port 230 is arranged on the left side path, and the general figure starting port 228 and the special figure 2 starting port 232 are arranged on the right side path. In the electric support state, it is the correct way to play the game with a left-hand hit, and in the electric support state, it is the correct way to play a game with a right-hand hit. The left-handed display j9 is displayed when a game is played with a right-hand hit even though the game is in a normal state, and a game ball passes through the usual-time start opening 228. In this example, in spite of the normal state (non-electric support), the player accidentally hits the right side (for example, the game ball has flowed down the right side of the game area because the game ball has been launched with high firing strength) State), when the game ball has passed through the normal start port 228, a notification (prompt notification) requesting that the game ball be launched toward the left side of the game area (operation to weaken the launch intensity) is requested. A left-handed display j9 is displayed.

  FIG. 132 (g) is a display in which “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol pattern, is swayed up and down while “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. The state where the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208 after the fluctuation variation display in the mode is shown. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative design display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the left-handed display j9, the decorative design, the image of the shrine, the image of the enemy of the shrine, the background image, and the like. The In this example, the left-handed display j9 is overlapped with the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

  FIG. 132 (h) shows a state where the appearance display of wipe displays w7a and w7b is displayed. The image is wiped off by the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

  FIG. 132 (i) shows a maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the left-handed display j9, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible.

  FIG. 132 (j) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the left-handed display j9, the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 can be gradually recognized. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Then, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern mode, is started.

  FIG. 132 (k) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. The completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a dissimilar symbol pattern, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The fluctuation variation is displayed in a manner, and a left-handed display j9 is displayed.

  FIG. 132 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place. Further, the left-handed display j9 is deleted. The left-handed display j9 is erased when a predetermined period has elapsed since the display was started. The left-handed display j9 may be deleted when a game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the notification condition was established. The specific operation request notification such as the left-handed display j9 is deleted when a game ball is won at the starting port, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the notification condition is established or the notification is started.

  FIG. 132 (l) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the wipe effect display is displayed with priority over the left-handed display j9 which is a specific operation request notification. In this way, there may be a specific operation request notification that gives priority to the wipe effect display.

(Example 44)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 44 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 (A) to (L) show an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 132A to 132L, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1600 shown in FIG. 132A. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority change machine provided with a game board 1600 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 132 (A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed.

  FIG. 132B shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 132 (B).

  FIG. 132 (C) shows an effect in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and the animation of the scene where the lord and the enemy of the lord confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

  In FIG. 132C, a ball removal display j10 including a character string image of “Exclude Ball!” Is displayed. The ball removal display j10 is displayed when the lower plate 128 is full of game balls. The ball removal display j10 is one of specific operation request notifications. The ball removal display j10 indicates that the ball discharge lever 128 is used to discharge the game ball in the game ball storage unit to the outside when it is detected that the game ball storage unit such as the lower plate 128 is full. This is a display requesting or prompting to operate the (ball removal lever). The ball removal display j10 may be called a dish full tank error notification, a dish full tank notification, a lower plate full tank error image, or the like, and may be displayed as an image imitating the state in which the ball removal lever is operated. .

  FIG. 132D shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 132 (E) shows a state in which a display suggesting a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach production display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. In FIG. 132 (E), a left-handed display j9 is displayed.

  FIG. 132 (F) is a display in which “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol pattern, swings up and down while “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during super reach production display. The state where the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208 after the fluctuation variation display in the mode is shown. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed so as to wipe out the left-handed display j9, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, the background image, and the like. In this example, the left-handed display j9 is overlapped with the wipe displays w7a and w7b, and the ball removal display j10 is displayed overlapping with the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

  FIG. 132 (G) shows a state where the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is displayed. The left-handed display j9 is overlapped with the wipe displays w7a and w7b and gradually becomes invisible, and the ball removal display j10 is displayed so as to overlap with the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

  FIG. 132 (H) shows a maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the left-handed display j9, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible.

  FIG. 132 (I) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the left-handed display j9, the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 can be gradually recognized. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Then, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern mode, is started. The ball removal display j10 is displayed overlapping the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

  FIG. 132 (J) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. The completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a dissimilar symbol pattern, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The swing variation display is performed in a manner, and a left-handed display j9 and a ball removal display j10 are displayed.

  FIG. 132 (K) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place. Further, the left-handed display j9 is deleted. The left-handed display j9 is deleted when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display was started.

  FIG. 132 (L) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. Further, the ball removal display j10 is deleted. The ball removal display j10 is erased when the game balls on the lower plate 128 are reduced due to the player performing a ball removal operation or the like, and the full state is eliminated.

  In the present embodiment, the wipe effect display is given priority over the left-handed display j9 that is the specific operation request notification, and the ball removal display j10 that is the specific operation request notification is displayed with priority over the wipe effect display. In this way, the wipe effect display is displayed with priority over one specific operation request notification of the plurality of specific operation request notifications, and one specific operation request notification of the plurality of specific operation request notifications is displayed as the wipe effect display. May be displayed with priority over.

(Example 45)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 45 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 (a) to (l) show an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 133A to 133, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1600 shown in FIG. 132A. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority change machine provided with a game board 1600 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 133 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is being executed. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming state is an electric support state. Since the normal start port 228 and the special figure 2 start port 232 are arranged on the right path, in the electric support state, it is a correct way to play the game with the right hand. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state, the decorative symbol display device 208 has a right-handed display j11 including a character image “right” in a round frame and a right-handed image including a character string image “put right”! Display j12 is displayed. The right-handed displays j11 and j12 are specific operation request notifications that instruct the player to perform a right-handed operation. The right-handed specific operation request notification may be displayed from the start to the end of the electric support state (short-time state), or when a variable winning opening 234 (attacker) is provided on the right path, a big hit game It may also be displayed inside. Note that the right-handed display j11 may be displayed large, decorated, blinked, or scrolled for easy viewing by the player.

  FIG. 133B shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 133 (b).

  In FIG. 133 (c), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an effect is displayed in which the animation of the scene where the enemy and the enemy are confronting each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

  FIG. 133 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 133 (e) shows a state in which a display suggesting a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 133 (f) is a display in which “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol pattern, is swayed up and down while “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during super reach production display. The state where the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208 after the fluctuation variation display in the mode is shown. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed so as to wipe off the right-handed display j12, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, the background image, and the like. In this example, the right-handed display j11 is displayed overlapping with the wipe display w7a, and the right-handed display j12 is displayed overlapping with the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

  FIG. 133 (g) shows a state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is displayed. The right-handed display j12 overlaps with the wipe displays w7a and w7b and becomes gradually invisible. The right-handed display j11 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe display w7a, and the entire display is visible.

  FIG. 133 (h) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the right-handed display j12, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible.

  FIG. 133 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the right-handed display j12, the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 can be gradually recognized. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Then, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern mode, is started. The right-handed display j11 is displayed overlapping the wipe display w7a.

  FIG. 133 (j) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. The completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a dissimilar symbol pattern, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The fluctuation variation is displayed in a manner, and right-handed displays j11 and j12 are displayed.

  FIG. 133 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. It is displayed in a stopped state, and it is reported that the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place. Also, right-handed displays j11 and j12 are displayed.

  FIG. 133 (l) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 2 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. Also, right-handed displays j11 and 12 are displayed.

  In this embodiment, right-handed displays j11 and j12 are displayed as displays for instructing right-handed. The right-handed display j11 is a display with a relatively small display size, and the right-handed display j12 is a display with a relatively large display size. Since the right-handed display j11 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe display w7a, the right-handed display j11 is always visible during the wipe effect display. The right-handed display j12 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays w7a and w7b, and the entire display is not visible in the maximum wipe state. Thus, among the specific operation request notifications instructing the right-handed operation, the first notification (right-handed display j11) is displayed overlapping the wipe effect display, and the second notification (right-handed display j12). May be displayed overlapping the wipe effect display.

(Example 46)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 46 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 (A) to (L) show an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 133A to 133L, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1600 shown in FIG. 132A. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority change machine provided with a game board 1600 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 133 (A) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is being executed. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed.

  In this embodiment, the gaming state is a non-electric support state. Since the normal start port 228 and the special figure 2 start port 232 are arranged on the right path, it is the right way to play the game in the right-handed state in the electric support state, and the special figure 1 start port 230 is on the left path. Since it is arranged, in the electric support state, it is the right way to play a game with a left hand. In this embodiment, at a predetermined time after the end of the power support state, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a left-handed display j13 including a “left” character image in a circle and a character string image “return to the left!”. And a left-handed display j9 including. The right-handed displays j9 and j13 are specific operation request notifications for instructing the player to perform a left-handed operation.

  FIG. 133B shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 133 (B).

  In FIG. 133 (C), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an effect is displayed in which the animation of the scene where the enemy and the enemy are confronting each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

  FIG. 133 (D) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 133 (E) shows a state in which a display indicating a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the display of the super reach effect. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 133 (F) is a display in which “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol pattern, swings up and down while “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during super reach production display. The state where the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208 after the fluctuation variation display in the mode is shown. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed so as to wipe out the left-handed display j9, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, the background image, and the like. In this example, the left-handed display j13 is displayed overlapping with the wipe display w7a, and the left-handed display j9 is displayed overlapping with the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

  FIG. 133 (G) shows a state where the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is displayed. The left-handed display j9 is overlapped with the wipe displays w7a and w7b and gradually becomes invisible. The left-handed display j13 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe display w7a, and the entire display is visible.

  FIG. 133 (H) shows a maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the left-handed display j9, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible.

  FIG. 133 (I) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the right-handed display j12, the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 can be gradually recognized. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Then, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern mode, is started. The left-handed display j13 is displayed overlapping the wipe display w7a.

  FIG. 133 (J) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. The completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a dissimilar symbol pattern, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In this manner, the fluctuation variation is displayed, and left-handed displays j9 and j13 are displayed.

  FIG. 133 (K) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is finished. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. It is displayed in a stopped state, and it is reported that the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place. In addition, right-handed display j9 and j13 are displayed.

  FIG. 133 (L) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 2 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. Further, left-handed displays j9 and 13 are displayed.

  In this embodiment, left-handed displays j9 and j13 are displayed as displays for instructing left-handed. The left-handed display j9 is a display having a relatively large display size, and the left-handed display j13 is a display having a relatively small display size. Since the left-handed display j13 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe display w7a, the left-handed display j13 is always visible during the wipe effect display. The left-handed display j9 is displayed so as to overlap with the wipe displays w7a and w7b, and the entire display is not visible in the maximum wipe state. Thus, among the specific operation request notifications instructing the left-handed operation, the first notification (left-handed display j13) is displayed overlapping the wipe effect display, and the second notification (left-handed display j9). May be displayed overlapping the wipe effect display.

  Note that the left-handed notification and the right-handed notification may be notifications indicating how to hit by a symbol such as an arrow display or an image / animation. The right-handed display j11 is a small right-handed display with a small display size, and the left-handed display j13 is a small left-handed display with a small display size. The small left-handed notification and the small right-handed notification may be notifications indicating how to hit by a symbol such as an arrow display, a red circle, a blue circle, or an image / animation. The right-handed display j11 and the left-handed display j13 may have a larger display size than the right-handed display j12 and the left-handed display j9.

(Example 47)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 47 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 (a) to (l). 134 (a) to (l) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 134A to 134, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1600 shown in FIG. 132A. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority change machine provided with a game board 1600 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 134 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed.

  FIG. 134B shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 134 (b).

  FIG. 134 (c) shows an effect in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and the animation of the scene where the lord and the enemy of the lord confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

  In FIG. 134 (c), a ball removal display j10 including a character string image of “Exclude ball!” Is displayed. The ball removal display j10 is displayed when the lower plate 128 is full of game balls. The ball removal display j10 is one of specific operation request notifications. The ball removal display j10 indicates that the ball discharge lever 128 is used to discharge the game ball in the game ball storage unit to the outside when it is detected that the game ball storage unit such as the lower plate 128 is full. This is a display requesting or prompting to operate the (ball removal lever). The ball removal display j10 may be called a dish full tank error notification, a dish full tank notification, a lower plate full tank error image, or the like, and may be displayed as an image imitating the state in which the ball removal lever is operated. .

  FIG. 134 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 134 (e) shows a state in which a display suggesting a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 134 (f) is a display in which “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol pattern, is swayed up and down while “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. The state where the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208 after the fluctuation variation display in the mode is shown. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative pattern, the image of the shrine, the image of the enemy of the shrine, the background image, and the like. In this example, the ball removal display j10 is displayed overlapping the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

  FIG. 134 (g) shows a state where the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is displayed. The ball removal display j10 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays w7a and w7b, and the entire display is visible.

  FIG. 134 (h) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible. The ball removal display j10 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays w7a and w7b, and the entire display is visible.

  FIG. 134 (i) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the left-handed display j9, the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 can be gradually recognized. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Then, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern mode, is started. Further, the ball removal display j10 is deleted. The ball removal display j10 is erased when the game balls on the lower plate 128 are reduced due to the player performing a ball removal operation or the like, and the full state is eliminated.

  FIG. 134 (j) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. The completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a dissimilar symbol pattern, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The fluctuation variation is displayed in a manner.

  FIG. 134 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place.

  FIG. 134 (l) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed.

  In this embodiment, the ball removal display j10 which is a specific operation request notification is displayed with priority over the wipe effect display. The ball removal display j10 is erased when the player operates the ball discharge lever 132 to discharge the game ball from the lower plate 128 and the full state of the lower plate 128 is eliminated. The ball removal display j10 is erased in response to the player's operation. In addition, it is detected that the ball has won and passed through the gate and electric Chu provided on the right side of the game area as a result of left-handing in another display, normal state and aiming for the special figure 1 starting port The same applies to the left-handed suggestion display (for example, left-handed display) that prompts the user to turn left based on what has been done, and to perform the left-handed suggestion display during the wipe effect display, for example, to return to the left. If the player requested an operation to weaken the firing strength in the game, and the player weakened the firing strength, it detected that the game ball entered the special figure 1 starting port that flows down the left side of the game area and wins. The display in which the suggestion display is deleted may be a display in response to the player's operation (response display). Note that a button hold icon, a display indicating the appearance of the button, a display for reducing the period during which the button operation is valid, a display for counting down, and the like are examples of the operation request display. A display in which a notice is displayed when an operation is performed, a prefetch notice is displayed, or a hold icon is changed to a prefetch notice form is an example of a response display. In addition, displays that request or prompt the operation by the game clerk (for example, “Door is open”, “Inner frame is open”, “Clogged ball”, etc.) are displayed during the wipe effect display. It may be possible to clear the display requesting the store clerk's operation by the store clerk's operation (door closing, inner frame closure, ball clogging, etc.). It is an example.

  The display of the hold icon by the hold display means is overlapped with the wipe display, and the same image display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) or another image display means (for example, the display of the number of holds by the hold display means) The sub display device 1030) may notify the number of holds (second notification), and the wipe display may be overlapped by the second notification.

  In the normal state, the hold display in FIG. 1 (for example, the hold icon in FIG. 1) is overlapped with the wipe display, and the hold display in FIG. 2 (for example, the hold icon in FIG. 2) overlaps with the wipe display. You may comprise so that it may do. Note that the special figure 1 starts to change when a game ball is awarded to the special figure 1 start opening constituted by a winning opening whose entrance size does not change, and the special figure 2 is a variable prize whose entrance size changes. The variation may be configured to be started by winning a game ball in the special figure 2 starting port configured by the mouth (electrical chew).

  During the time reduction, the hold display in FIG. 2 may be overlapped with the wipe display, and the hold display in FIG. 1 may be overlapped with the wipe display. Note that the special figure 1 starts to change when a game ball is awarded to the special figure 1 start opening constituted by a winning opening whose entrance size does not change, and the special figure 2 is a variable prize whose entrance size changes. The variation may be configured to be started by winning a game ball in the special figure 2 starting port configured by the mouth (electrical chew).

  Specific operation request notification (for example, specific operation request notification such as small right strike notification, small left strike notification, etc.), decorative symbol, 4th symbol, number of reserved special symbols, number of reserved regular symbols, regular diagram decorative symbols, general symbol Effect display (display in the normal effect area j8), display of the introduction of the effect character, display of how to distinguish the reliability of the jackpot notice such as “red letters are hot”, “hot when the hold icon is red”, etc. Display of how to distinguish the reliability of the pre-reading notice, tutorial display regarding production such as explanation of the operation method such as “Right-handed during jackpot”, “Let's reach 7” and “Let super reach within 5 rotations” ”, Etc., display of the production name (reach name, stage name), etc., display of the production (RTC production, island simultaneous production, etc.) that starts every time a certain time elapses and until the production starts Time display, occur Display of the type of error to be displayed, display of the remaining number of time reductions, display of the remaining number of STs, display of information notification such as the number of outgoing balls, display of volume adjustment display, display of brightness adjustment display, character selection display, BGM selection Display, selection display such as hold frame selection display, adjustment display, display indicating that the door is open, display indicating that the inner frame is open, display indicating that the connector is disconnected, clogged balls The wipe display may be configured to be overlapped by any one of the system displays such as a display indicating the occurrence or a plurality of these displays.

  Specific operation request notification (for example, specific operation request notification such as small right strike notification, small left strike notification, etc.), decorative symbol, 4th symbol, number of reserved special symbols, number of reserved regular symbols, regular diagram decorative symbols, general symbol Effect display (display in the normal effect area j8), display of the introduction of the effect character, display of how to distinguish the reliability of the jackpot notice such as “red letters are hot”, “hot when the hold icon is red”, etc. Display of how to distinguish the reliability of the pre-reading notice, tutorial display regarding production such as explanation of the operation method such as “Right-handed during jackpot”, “Let's reach 7” and “Let super reach within 5 rotations” ”, Etc., display of the production name (reach name, stage name), etc., display of the production (RTC production, island simultaneous production, etc.) that starts every time a certain time elapses and until the production starts Time display, occur Display of the type of error to be displayed, display of the remaining number of time reductions, display of the remaining number of STs, display of information notification such as the number of outgoing balls, display of volume adjustment display, display of brightness adjustment display, character selection display, BGM selection Display, selection display such as hold frame selection display, adjustment display, display indicating that the door is open, display indicating that the inner frame is open, display indicating that the connector is disconnected, clogged balls It may be configured such that the wipe display overlaps any one of the system displays such as a display indicating the occurrence, or a plurality of these displays.

(Example 48)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 48 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 (a) to 135 (f). 135 (a) to 135 (f) show an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 135A to 135F, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 135 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the determination result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is wrong. Informed. In the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, for example, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. In each drawing of FIG. 135, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. The effect stage is an empty stage, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an empty background image corresponding to the empty stage.

  FIG. 135 (b) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. Further, in this example, the production stage is changed from the start of the next change in response to the player performing a stage change operation. On the decorative symbol display device 208, a stage change display j14 including a character string image of “next variation stechen” is displayed, and it is notified that the stage change operation by the player has been accepted. The stage change operation is, for example, one of pressing the chance button 136 during the special figure variation game and pressing the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137.

  FIG. 135 (c) shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the normal reach effect display is started after reaching the reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 135 (c).

  FIG. 135 (d) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” which is an out of symbol mode is stopped and displayed (main stop display), and the determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is not correct. It is reported that there is. Further, the stage change display j14 is deleted. The stage change display j14 is erased when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of display, or at the end of the variation display of the decorative symbols before the stage change.

  FIG. 135 (e) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative display of the decorative symbols is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 135 (f) shows a state where the production stage is changed to the mountain stage. The background image changes from an empty background image to a mountain background image corresponding to the mountain stage after the decorative symbol variation display is started, and the production stage is changed from the empty stage to the mountain stage.

  In the present embodiment, the stage change display j14 is displayed in the symbol variation display before the effect stage is changed, and it is notified that the effect stage is changed.

(Example 49)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 49 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 (A) to (J). 135 (A) to 135 (J) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series. 135A to 135J, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 135 (A) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the determination result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is wrong. Informed. In the state shown in FIG. 135 (A), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is, for example, 2 and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. 135 (A) to 135 (J), the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. The effect stage is an empty stage, and an empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 135 (B) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. Further, in this example, the production stage is changed from the start of the next change in response to the player performing a stage change operation. On the decorative symbol display device 208, a stage change display j14 including a character string image of “next variation stechen” is displayed, and it is notified that the stage change operation by the player has been accepted. The stage change operation is, for example, one of pressing the chance button 136 during the special figure variation game and pressing the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137.

  FIG. 135 (C) shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the normal reach effect display is started after reaching the reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 135 (C).

  FIG. 135 (D) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” which is an out of symbol mode is stopped and displayed (main stop display), and the determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is not correct. It is reported that there is. Further, the stage change display j14 is deleted. The stage change display j14 is erased when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of display, or at the end of the variation display of the decorative symbols before the stage change.

  FIG. 135 (E) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative display of the decorative symbols is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 135 (F) shows a state where the stage change wipe effect display is started. Wipe appearance display (wipe-in) is started in such a manner that the wipe display w23 spreads from the outer periphery of the rectangular shape of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 toward the center. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w23 is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe display w23 is displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol and the background image.

  FIG. 135 (G) shows a state where the appearance display of the wipe display w23 is displayed. The wipe appearance display is displayed in such a manner that the wipe display w23 gradually spreads toward the center.

  FIG. 135 (H) shows a maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe display w23 is completed. The entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe display w23. When the appearance display of the wipe display w23 is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design and the background image become invisible.

  FIG. 135 (I) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe display w23 is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w23 is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink from the center of the display screen toward the outer periphery of the rectangular shape. The background image changes to a mountain background image with the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w23. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w23 is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image of the mountain, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible.

  FIG. 135 (J) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe display w23 is completed. A mountain background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the production stage is changed from an empty stage to a mountain stage.

  In the present embodiment, a wipe effect display is displayed when the effect stage is changed, and the background image is changed before and after the wipe effect display.

(Example 50)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 50 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 (a) to (wo) show an example of presentation of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 135A to 135, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 135 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the determination result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is wrong. Informed. In the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the reserved number in FIG. 1 is 2, for example, and the reserved number in FIG. 2 is 0. 135 (a) to 135 (o), the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. The effect stage is an empty stage, and an empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 135 (b) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is completed and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. Further, in this example, the production stage is changed from the start of the next change in response to the player performing a stage change operation. On the decorative symbol display device 208, a stage change display j14 including a character string image of “next variation stechen” is displayed, and it is notified that the stage change operation by the player has been accepted. The stage change operation is, for example, one of pressing the chance button 136 during the special figure variation game and pressing the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137.

  FIG. 135 (C) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the variation display of the decorative symbols in FIG.

  In FIG. 135 (d), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an effect is displayed in which an animation of a scene where the lord and the enemy of the lord confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen. Further, the stage change display j14 is deleted when the super reach effect display is started.

  FIG. 135 (e) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 135 (f) shows a state in which a display indicating a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach production display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 135 (G) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the display of the super reach effect. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. After the swing variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the background image becomes the normal effect display of the mountain background image after the wipe effect display. By switching, the super reach effect display ends.

  FIG. 135 (h) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbols, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, the background image, and the like.

  FIG. 135 (ri) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible.

  FIG. 135 (nu) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to a mountain background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Then, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is started.

  FIG. 135 (l) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. The completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. A background image of a mountain is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a dissimilar symbol aspect, swings to the left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The fluctuation variation is displayed in a manner. As described above, in this example, after the end of the wipe effect, the background image of the mountain is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect stage is changed from the empty stage to the mountain stage.

  FIG. 135 (wo) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place.

  In the present embodiment, the confrontation effect super reach effect display is displayed in the symbol variation display in which the change operation of the effect stage is accepted, and then the wipe effect display is displayed, and the background image is a mountain after the wipe effect display. The background image has been changed. As described above, when it is determined that the production stage is changed, the stage image is changed to the background image of the production stage change destination at the time of wipe-out of the wipe production display after the production having high expectation such as the confrontation production.

(Example 51)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 51 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 (a) to (q). 136 (a) to 136 (q) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 136 (a) to 136 (q), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 136 (a) shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the determination result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is wrong. Informed. In the state shown in FIG. 136 (a), the reserved number in FIG. 1 is 2, for example, and the reserved number in FIG. 2 is 0. In each drawing of FIG. 136, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. The effect stage is an empty stage, and an empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 136 (b) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. Further, in this example, the production stage is changed from the start of the next change in response to the player performing a stage change operation. On the decorative symbol display device 208, a stage change display j14 including a character string image of “next variation stechen” is displayed, and it is notified that the stage change operation by the player has been accepted. The stage change operation is, for example, one of pressing the chance button 136 during the special figure variation game and pressing the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137.

  FIG. 136C shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the variation display of the decorative symbols in FIG. 136 (c).

  In FIG. 136 (d), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an effect is displayed in which an animation of a scene in which the enemy and the enemy are confronting each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen. Further, the stage change display j14 is deleted when the super reach effect display is started.

  FIG. 136 (e) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 136 (f) shows a state in which a display indicating a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 136 (g) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. After the swing variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, after the wipe effect display, the background image becomes a normal effect display of an empty background image. By switching, the super reach effect display ends.

  FIG. 136 (h) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbols, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, the background image, and the like.

  FIG. 136 (i) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible.

  FIG. 136 (j) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Then, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern mode, is started.

  FIG. 136 (k) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. The completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a dissimilar symbol pattern, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The fluctuation variation is displayed in a manner.

  FIG. 136 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place.

  FIG. 136 (m) shows a state where the stage change wipe effect display is started after the suspension of the first special figure 1 is completed and the special figure 1 variable game is started. Wipe appearance display (wipe-in) is started in such a manner that the wipe display w23 spreads from the outer periphery of the rectangular shape of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 toward the center. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w23 is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe display w23 is displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol and the background image.

  FIG. 136 (n) shows a state where the appearance display of the wipe display w23 is displayed. The wipe appearance display is displayed in such a manner that the wipe display w23 gradually spreads toward the center.

  FIG. 136 (o) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe display w23 is completed. The entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe display w23. When the appearance display of the wipe display w23 is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design and the background image become invisible.

  FIG. 136 (p) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe display w23 is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w23 is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink from the center of the display screen toward the outer periphery of the rectangular shape. The background image changes to a mountain background image with the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w23. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w23 is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image of the mountain, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible.

  FIG. 136 (q) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe display w23 is completed. A mountain background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the production stage is changed from an empty stage to a mountain stage.

  In this embodiment, the stage is not changed by the wipe effect display at the end of the super reach effect display, and the wipe effect display for changing the effect stage is displayed during the next symbol variation display after the wipe effect display. The stage is changed.

(Example 52)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 52 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 137 (a) to (l) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 137A to 137, the main liquid crystal unit 1001, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movable body 1010 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 137 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the determination result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is wrong. Informed. In the state shown in FIG. 137 (a), the reserved number in FIG. 1 is 1, for example, and the reserved number in FIG. 2 is 0. In each drawing of FIG. 137, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an empty background image.

  FIG. 137 (b) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed.

  FIG. 137 (c) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 137 (c).

  In FIG. 137 (d), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an effect is displayed in which an animation of a scene in which the enemy and the enemy are confronting each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

  FIG. 137 (e) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. In FIG. 137 (e), the movable body 1010 is moved downward from the initial position as a big hit notice during the display of the super reach effect. In the drawing, downward arrows shown on the left and right of the movable body 1010 indicate the moving direction of the movable body 1010. In this embodiment, the initial position of the movable body 1010 is a position above the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 137 (a) to 137 (d). The initial position of the movable body 1010 may be a position where at least a part of the movable body 1010 overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208 in the front-rear direction.

  FIG. 137 (f) shows a state in which a display suggesting a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 137 (g) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. The normal background image is an empty background image when the wipe effect display is wiped out after the shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. By switching to the effect display, the super reach effect display ends.

  FIG. 137 (h) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display (wipe-in) of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbols, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, the background image, and the like.

  FIG. 137 (i) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible. In this example, the operation in which the movable body 1010 moves upward and returns to the initial position during the maximum wipe state is started. In the drawing, upward arrows shown on the left and right of the movable body 1010 indicate the moving direction of the movable body 1010. Note that the start timing of the return operation of the movable body 1010 to the initial position may be during wipe-in, during wipe-out, or before the start of wipe-in. A part of the wipe display w7a is overlapped with the movable body 1010. Thus, when the wipe effect display is performed during the operation of the effect movable body, at least a part of the wipe effect display may be overlapped with the effect movable body.

  FIG. 137 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipe out) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Then, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern mode, is started. In addition, the movable body 1010 is moving to the initial position. In the drawing, downward arrows shown on the left and right of the movable body 1010 indicate the moving direction of the movable body 1010. In this example, during wipeout, a part of the movable body 1010 is positioned on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movable body 1010 is moved to a position where most of the movable body 1010 is not positioned on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. It moves and the return operation of the movable body 1010 to the initial position proceeds. Note that the entire movable body 1010 may have moved to a position not located on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the start of wipeout, and the return operation of the movable body 1010 to the initial position is completed at the start of wipeout. You may comprise as follows.

  FIG. 137 (k) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. The completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a dissimilar symbol pattern, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The fluctuation variation is displayed in a manner. In addition, the movable body 1010 is moving to the initial position. In the drawing, downward arrows shown on the left and right of the movable body 1010 indicate the moving direction of the movable body 1010. Note that when the wipeout is completed, the return operation of the movable body 1010 may proceed until a part of the movable body 1010 is positioned on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. When the wipeout is completed, the movable body 1010 It may have moved to the initial position, or when the wipeout is completed, the return operation of the movable body 1010 may be completed.

  FIG. 137 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place. Further, the movement of the movable body 1010 to the initial position is completed. In addition, the movement of the movable body 1010 to the initial position may be completed before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or the movement of the movable body 1010 to the initial position may be completed while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. .

(Example 53)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 53 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 137 (A) to 137 (L) show examples of performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 137 (A) to (L), the main liquid crystal unit 1001, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movable body 1010 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 137 (A) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the determination result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is wrong. Informed. In the state shown in FIG. 137 (A), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, for example, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. In each drawing of FIG. 137, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an empty background image.

  FIG. 137 (B) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed.

  FIG. 137 (C) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 137 (C).

  In FIG. 137 (D), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an effect is displayed in which an animation of a scene in which the enemy and the enemy are confronting each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

  FIG. 137 (E) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. In FIG. 137 (E), the movable body 1010 is moved downward from the initial position as a big hit notice during the display of the super reach effect. In the drawing, downward arrows shown on the left and right of the movable body 1010 indicate the moving direction of the movable body 1010.

  FIG. 137 (F) shows a state in which a display suggesting a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 137 (G) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. The normal background image is an empty background image when the wipe effect display is wiped out after the shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. By switching to the effect display, the super reach effect display ends.

  FIG. 137 (H) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display (wipe-in) of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbols, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, the background image, and the like.

  FIG. 137 (I) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible. In this example, the advance notice is made by performing an operation in which the movable body 1010 rotates counterclockwise during the maximum wipe state. In the drawing, an arrow shown on the movable body 1010 indicates the rotation direction of the movable body 1010. In this example, a reversal jackpot notice operation is performed in which the reversal effect display is performed by rotating the movable body 1010 during the wipe effect display. In this example, the operation in which the movable body 1010 makes one rotation corresponds to the reverse rotation big hit notification operation. It may be confirmed that the big hit symbol mode is confirmed and stopped when the reverse jackpot warning operation is performed, or the final symbol mode is finally stopped and displayed even when the reverse jackpot warning operation is performed. You may be comprised so that. It should be noted that the jackpot symbol pattern is more easily determined and displayed when the reverse jackpot notice operation is performed than when the reverse jackpot notice operation is not performed.

  FIG. 137 (J) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipe out) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Then, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is started. In this example, the swaying variation of the symbol pattern before the wipe effect display is displayed, but the swaying variation display of the big hit symbol mode is started after the wipeout after the start of the reversal jackpot notice operation. In addition, the movable body 1010 is moving to the initial position after one rotation. In the drawing, downward arrows shown on the left and right of the movable body 1010 indicate the moving direction of the movable body 1010.

  FIG. 137 (K) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. The completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a display mode in which “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”, which is a big hit symbol pattern, swings left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The fluctuation is displayed. In addition, the movable body 1010 is moving to the initial position. In the drawing, downward arrows shown on the left and right of the movable body 1010 indicate the moving direction of the movable body 1010.

  FIG. 137 (L) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” which is a big hit symbol form is displayed. The stop display is made, and it is informed that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Further, the movement of the movable body 1010 to the initial position is completed. In addition, the movement of the movable body 1010 to the initial position may be completed before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or the movement of the movable body 1010 to the initial position may be completed while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. .

  In the present embodiment, the reverse big hit notification operation by the movable body 1010 is started during the maximum wipe state. Note that the reversing big hit notification operation by the movable body 1010 may be started before the start of wipe-in, may be started during wipe-in, or may be started during wipe-out. Further, the reversing big hit notification operation by the movable body 1010 may be ended during the wipe effect display (for example, during wipe-in, in the maximum wipe state, or during the wipe-out state) or after the wipe-out. You may make it do.

(Example 54)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 54 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 138 (a) to (l). FIGS. 138 (a) to (l) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 138 (a) to (l), the main liquid crystal unit 1001, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movable body 1010 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 138 (a) shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the determination result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is wrong. Informed. In the state shown in FIG. 138 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is, for example, 1, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. In each drawing of FIG. 138, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an empty background image.

  FIG. 138 (b) shows a state in which the reservation of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed.

  FIG. 138 (c) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 138 (c).

  FIG. 138 (d) shows the effect that the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and the animation of the scene where the lord and the enemy of the lord confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

  FIG. 138 (e) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 138 (f) shows a state in which a display indicating a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 138 (g) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. The normal background image is an empty background image when the wipe effect display is wiped out after the shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. By switching to the effect display, the super reach effect display ends.

  FIG. 138 (h) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display (wipe-in) of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbols, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, the background image, and the like. In this embodiment, the movable body 1010 is moved downward from the initial position as a big hit notice during wipe-in. In the drawing, downward arrows shown on the left and right of the movable body 1010 indicate the moving direction of the movable body 1010.

  FIG. 138 (i) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible.

  FIG. 138 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Then, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern mode, is started. Further, in this example, an operation is started in which the movable body 1010 moves upward during the wipeout and returns to the initial position. In the drawing, upward arrows shown on the left and right of the movable body 1010 indicate the moving direction of the movable body 1010.

  FIG. 138 (k) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. The completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a dissimilar symbol pattern, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The fluctuation variation is displayed in a manner. In addition, the movable body 1010 is moving to the initial position. In the drawing, downward arrows shown on the left and right of the movable body 1010 indicate the moving direction of the movable body 1010.

  FIG. 138 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place. Further, the movement of the movable body 1010 to the initial position is completed. In addition, the movement of the movable body 1010 to the initial position may be completed before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or the movement of the movable body 1010 to the initial position may be completed while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. .

  In this embodiment, the moving operation of the movable body 1010 is started during wipe-in, and the return operation of the movable body 1010 to the initial position is started during wipe-out. In this embodiment, the operation of the movable body 1010 is executed as a jackpot notice operation. Note that the operation of the movable body 1010 may be executed as a pre-reading notice operation or a reverse big hit notice operation, or may be a simple movement, not a notice operation, or an operation as a wipe effect display. There may be. The operation of the movable body 1010 at the time of the wipe effect display may be always performed at the time of the wipe effect display, or at the time of one or a plurality of wipe effect display among the plurality of types of wipe effect display. It may be configured so that it is not performed at the time of another wipe effect display, or an effect movable body that includes a plurality of effect movable bodies and performs an effect operation for each of the plurality of wipe effect displays. It may be different.

(Example 55)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 55 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 138 (A) to (L) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 138 (A) to (L), the main liquid crystal unit 1001, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movable body 1010 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 138 (A) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the determination result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is wrong. Informed. In the state shown in FIG. 138 (A), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, for example, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. In FIGS. 138 (A) to 138 (L), the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an empty background image.

  FIG. 138 (B) shows a state in which the reservation of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed.

  FIG. 138 (C) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the variation display of the decorative symbols in FIG. 138 (C).

  In FIG. 138 (D), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an effect is displayed in which an animation of a scene in which the enemy and the enemy are confronting each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

  FIG. 138 (E) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 138 (F) shows a state in which a display indicating a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 138 (G) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the display of the super reach effect. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. The normal background image is an empty background image when the wipe effect display is wiped out after the shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. By switching to the effect display, the super reach effect display ends.

  FIG. 138 (H) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display (wipe-in) of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbols, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, the background image, and the like. Further, in the present embodiment, the movable body 1010 is moved downward from the initial position as a reverse hitting notice operation during wipe-in. In the drawing, downward arrows shown on the left and right of the movable body 1010 indicate the moving direction of the movable body 1010.

  FIG. 138 (I) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible.

  FIG. 138 (J) shows a state where the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Then, the fluctuation display of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a jackpot symbol, is started. In this example, the swaying variation of the symbol pattern before the wipe effect display is displayed, but the swaying variation display of the big hit symbol mode is started after the wipeout after the start of the reversal jackpot notice operation. Further, in this example, an operation is started in which the movable body 1010 moves upward during the wipeout and returns to the initial position. In the drawing, upward arrows shown on the left and right of the movable body 1010 indicate the moving direction of the movable body 1010.

  FIG. 138 (K) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. The completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a display mode in which “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”, which is a big hit symbol pattern, swings left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The fluctuation is displayed. In addition, the movable body 1010 is moving to the initial position. In the drawing, downward arrows shown on the left and right of the movable body 1010 indicate the moving direction of the movable body 1010.

  FIG. 138 (L) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” which is a big hit symbol form is displayed. The stop display is made, and it is informed that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Further, the movement of the movable body 1010 to the initial position is completed. In addition, the movement of the movable body 1010 to the initial position may be completed before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or the movement of the movable body 1010 to the initial position may be completed while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. .

  In the present embodiment, the operation of the movable body 1010 is executed as a reversal big hit notification operation. In addition, when the movable body 1010 moves as some kind of notice operation, the notice is a definitive notice (finally notice that the jackpot symbol form will be stopped and displayed finally, a symbol that has been started after any of the suspensions have been digested. In the variable display, it may be a pre-fetching advance notice that the jackpot symbol pattern will be stopped in the end, or the final symbol pattern may be finally stopped in the final display. In each symbol variation display that is started after each of the suspensions is completed, there may be a case where all symbol patterns are finally stopped and displayed.

(Example 56)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 56 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 139 (a) to (l) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 139 (a) to (l), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 139 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 139 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, for example, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon shown in FIG. Further, a changing icon a1 is displayed in the changing icon display area. The display mode of the changing icon a1 is a display mode of the white circle hold icon.

  FIG. 139 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 138 (b).

  In FIG. 139 (c), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an effect is displayed in which an animation of a scene in which the enemy and the enemy are confronted is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen. With the start of the super reach effect display, the changing icon a1 and the hold icon b1 are deleted.

  FIG. 139 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 139 (e) shows a state in which a display indicating a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 139 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208 b during the super reach effect display. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. The normal background image is an empty background image when the wipe effect display is wiped out after the shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. By switching to the effect display, the super reach effect display ends.

  FIG. 139 (g) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display (wipe-in) of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbols, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, the background image, and the like.

  FIG. 139 (h) shows a maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible.

  FIG. 139 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Then, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern mode, is started. In this example, the redisplay of the changing icon and the hold icon is not started when the wipeout is started.

  FIG. 139 (j) shows a state where the wipe displays w7a and w7b are being withdrawn. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a dissimilar symbol pattern, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The fluctuation variation is displayed in a manner. In FIG. 139 (j), the wipe-out in the changing icon display area and the special figure 1 hold icon display area is in a state of being completed, but redisplay of the changing icon and the hold icon is not started. .

  FIG. 139 (k) shows a state in which redisplay of the changing icon a1 and the hold icon b1 is started during the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b. In this embodiment, after the wipe-out in the changing icon display area and the special figure 1 hold icon display area is completed, redisplay of the changing icon and the hold icon is started.

  FIG. 139 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the wipeout is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place.

  In this embodiment, when the wipeout is started, the redisplay of the changing icon and the hold icon is not started, and the changing icon is displayed after the wipeout in the changing icon display area and the special figure 1 hold icon display area is completed. And the redisplay of the hold icon starts.

(Example 57)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 57 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 139 (A) to (L) show examples of performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series. 139 (A) to (L), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 139 (A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 139 (A), the reserved number in FIG. 1 is 1, for example, and the reserved number in FIG. 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon shown in FIG. Further, a changing icon a1 is displayed in the changing icon display area. The display mode of the changing icon a1 is a display mode of the white circle hold icon.

  FIG. 139 (B) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 138 (B).

  FIG. 139 (C) shows an effect in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and the animation of the scene where the lord and the enemy of the lord confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen. With the start of the super reach effect display, the changing icon a1 and the hold icon b1 are deleted.

  FIG. 139 (D) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 139 (E) shows a state in which a display indicating a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 139 (F) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. The normal background image is an empty background image when the wipe effect display is wiped out after the shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. By switching to the effect display, the super reach effect display ends.

  FIG. 139 (G) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display (wipe-in) of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbols, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, the background image, and the like.

  FIG. 139 (H) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible.

  FIG. 139 (I) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Then, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern mode, is started. In this example, the redisplay of the changing icon and the hold icon is not started when the wipeout is started.

  FIG. 139 (J) shows a state during the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a dissimilar symbol pattern, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The fluctuation variation is displayed in a manner. Further, in this example, one game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230 between FIGS. 139 (C) to 139 (J), and the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is increased to two. In FIG. 139 (J), the wipe-out in the changing icon display area and the special figure 1 hold icon display area is in a state of being completed, but the changing icon and the hold icon are redisplayed and the increased hold is displayed. The display of the hold icon corresponding to is not started.

  FIG. 139 (K) shows a state in which redisplay of the changing icon a1 and the hold icon b1 is started during the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b. In this embodiment, after the wipe-out in the changing icon display area and the special figure 1 hold icon display area is completed, the redisplay of the changing icon a1 and the hold icon b1 and the hold icon b2 corresponding to the increased hold are displayed. Display starts. Note that the hold icon b2 is a face hold icon 104, which is a prefetching notice mode.

  FIG. 139 (L) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the wipeout is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place.

  In this example, at the start of wipeout, the display of the hold icon corresponding to the hold increased from the redisplay of the changing icon and the hold icon and the super reach effect display to the start of wipeout is not started, After the wipe-out in the changing icon display area and the special figure 1 holding icon display area is completed, the changing icon and the holding icon are displayed again and the holding icon corresponding to the increased holding is displayed.

(Example 58)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 58 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 (a) to 140 (l) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 140A to 140L, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 140 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 140 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is, for example, 1, and the number of holds in FIG. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon shown in FIG. Further, a changing icon a1 is displayed in the changing icon display area. The display mode of the changing icon a1 is a display mode of the face hold icon, and is a notice mode.

  FIG. 140B shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the variation display of the decorative symbols in FIG. 140 (b).

  FIG. 140 (c) shows an effect in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and the animation of the scene where the lord and the enemy of the lord confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen. With the start of the super reach effect display, the changing icon a1 and the hold icon b1 are deleted.

  FIG. 140D shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 140 (e) shows a state in which a display indicating a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 140 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208 b during the super reach effect display. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. The normal background image is an empty background image when the wipe effect display is wiped out after the shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. By switching to the effect display, the super reach effect display ends.

  FIG. 140 (g) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display (wipe-in) of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbols, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, the background image, and the like.

  FIG. 140 (h) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible.

  FIG. 140 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Then, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern mode, is started. In this example, the redisplay of the changing icon and the hold icon is not started when the wipeout is started.

  FIG. 140 (j) shows a state where the wipe displays w7a and w7b are being withdrawn. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a dissimilar symbol pattern, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The fluctuation variation is displayed in a manner. In FIG. 140 (j), the wipe-out icon a1 and the hold icon b1 are started to be displayed again, although the wipe-out in a part of the changing icon display area is not completed.

  FIG. 140 (k) shows a state where redisplay of the changing icon a1 and the hold icon b1 is started during the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

  FIG. 140 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the wipeout is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place.

  In the present embodiment, the changing icon display area and the special figure 1 holding icon display area are holding display means, and when the wipe-out in a part of the holding display means is not completed, the changing icon and the holding icon are displayed. Display resumes.

(Example 59)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 59 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 (A) to 140 (L) show time-series examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In each of FIGS. 140A to 140L, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 140 (A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 140 (A), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, for example, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon shown in FIG. Further, a changing icon a1 is displayed in the changing icon display area. The display mode of the changing icon a1 is a display mode of the white circle hold icon.

  FIG. 140B shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 140 (B).

  In FIG. 140 (C), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an effect is displayed in which an animation of a scene where the lord and the enemy of the lord confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen. With the start of the super reach effect display, the changing icon a1 and the hold icon b1 are deleted.

  FIG. 140D shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 140 (E) shows a state in which a display suggesting a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach production display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 140 (F) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the display of the super reach effect. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. The normal background image is an empty background image when the wipe effect display is wiped out after the shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. By switching to the effect display, the super reach effect display ends.

  FIG. 140 (G) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display (wipe-in) of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbols, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, the background image, and the like.

  FIG. 140 (H) shows a maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible.

  FIG. 140 (I) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Then, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern mode, is started. In this example, the redisplay of the changing icon and the hold icon is not started when the wipeout is started.

  FIG. 140 (J) shows a state where the wipe displays w7a and w7b are being withdrawn. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a dissimilar symbol pattern, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The fluctuation variation is displayed in a manner. Further, in this example, one game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230 between FIGS. 140 (C) to 140 (J), and the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is increased to two. In FIG. 139 (J), the wipe-out in the changing icon display area and the special figure 1 hold icon display area is in a state of being completed, but the changing icon and the hold icon are redisplayed and the increased hold is displayed. The display of the hold icon corresponding to is not started.

  FIG. 140 (K) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipe out) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. In the present embodiment, after the wipeout is completed, redisplay of the changing icon a1 and the hold icon b1 and display of the hold icon b2 corresponding to the increased hold are started. The hold icon b2 is a face hold icon 104, which is a pre-reading notice mode.

  FIG. 140 (L) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place.

  In this embodiment, after the wipeout is completed, redisplay of the changing icon and the hold icon and display of the hold icon corresponding to the increased hold are started.

  An effect display (for example, background display, decorative design, etc.) that is displayed gradually as the wipeout progresses, and part of the display (below the changing icon) that the wipeout has progressed to the specified paragraph There is an effect display in which a part or part of the hold icon) or the entire hold display area is displayed. In such a case, since there is a part that can be gradually seen as the wipeout progresses, a part of the effect display appears unnaturally, so it is easy to pay attention to the part of the effect display. In some cases, the effect of the effect display can be enhanced. It is preferable to apply the hold display, the pre-reading notice mode or the notice mode that may be displayed in the notice mode as the part of the effect display, the pre-notification display, and the pre-reading notice display. Alternatively, some display such as a volume adjustment display, a BGM selection display, and a character selection display may be applied.

(Example 60)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 60 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 (a) to (m) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 141A to 141M, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 141 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 141 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is, for example, 1, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. In this embodiment, the display of the changing icon and the hold icon is not shown.

  FIG. 141 (b) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the variation display of the decorative symbols in FIG. 141 (b).

  In FIG. 141 (c), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an effect is displayed in which an animation of a scene where the lord and the enemy of the lord confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

  FIG. 141 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 141 (e) shows a state in which a display suggesting a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach production display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 141 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. The normal background image is an empty background image when the wipe effect display is wiped out after the shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. By switching to the effect display, the super reach effect display ends.

  FIG. 141 (g) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display (wipe-in) of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbols, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, the background image, and the like.

  FIG. 141 (h) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible.

  FIG. 141 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Then, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern mode, is started.

  FIG. 141 (j) shows a state in which the wipe displays w7a and w7b are being withdrawn. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a dissimilar symbol pattern, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The fluctuation variation is displayed in a manner. In this example. Display of the logo image j3 is started during wipeout. The logo image j3 is displayed so as to overlap with “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is a pattern pattern of dislocation.

  FIG. 141 (k) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier design, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings left and right.

  In FIG. 141 (l), the logo image j3 is deleted, and “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a jackpot symbol pattern, is displayed in the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in place of the off symbol pattern. Shows the state. The logo image j3 of the present embodiment is a reverse effect display, and the big hit symbol pattern is displayed instead of the off symbol pattern simultaneously with or after the logo image j3 is deleted.

  FIG. 141 (m) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” which is a big hit symbol form is displayed. The stop display is made, and it is informed that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

  In this embodiment, a logo image j3 that is a reverse effect display is displayed during wipeout. When the reverse effect display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be confirmed and displayed, or even when the reverse effect display is displayed, the final symbol pattern may be finally displayed. .

(Example 61)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 61 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 (a) to 142 (k). 142 (a) to (k) show an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 142 (a) to 142 (k) show the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 142 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a jackpot symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings left and right. The jackpot symbol of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” is not a jackpot symbol that is relatively advantageous to the player (in this example, a probability variation symbol), but is relatively advantageous to the player. It is a low jackpot symbol aspect (in this example, a non-probable variation symbol aspect). The “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” jackpot design is a design that suggests a non-probable change jackpot. It should be noted that the jackpot design of “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7” is a design that suggests a probable variation jackpot.

  In addition, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 142 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, hold icons b1 and b2 are displayed. The hold icons b1 and b2 are white circle hold icons shown in FIG.

  FIG. 142 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” which is a big hit symbol form is displayed. The stop display is made, and it is informed that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

  FIG. 142 (c) shows a state in which the big hit game is started. At the time shown in FIG. 142 (c), the opening of the variable winning opening 234 (attacker) has not started. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character string image of “big hit” and notifies that the big hit game has started. In addition, “decoration 2” is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the big hit symbol pattern when the symbol is stopped is “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”. Has been. Further, as the big hit game is started, the background image is changed and the hold icon is also deleted.

  FIG. 142 (d) shows a state in which a round display j 15 including a character string image “1R” is displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Immediately before the first round of the big hit game is started, the round display j15 is displayed in a relatively large display size to notify that the first round is started. Also, a right-handed display j16 including a character string image of “Right →” is displayed at the upper right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this embodiment, since the variable winning opening 234 is provided on the right path of the game area 124, the right-handed display j16 is displayed because the right-handed game ball is fired right during the big hit game. It is displayed.

  FIG. 142 (e) shows a state in which the first round of the jackpot game has started. When the first round is started, the variable winning opening 234 is opened, and the round display j15 is displayed in a relatively small display size on the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, when the first round is started, a confrontation effect (battle effect) in which an animation of a scene in which the lord and the enemy of the lord confront each other is displayed is started. At the start of the confrontation effect, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the character image of the dragonfly is displayed on the left side of the display screen, the enemy character image is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the background image is changed. The confrontation effect in this example is a probability change promotion effect that is an effect for causing the player to expect that a state advantageous to the player (in this example, a probability change state) may be started after the jackpot game ends. . When the stop symbol of the special symbol display devices 212 and 214 is a special symbol for probability variation big hit (for example, “special symbol A” shown in FIG. 5), and the non-probable variable big hit symbol mode is confirmed and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 Is a probability change promotion success display that wins over the enemy of Tono, and the stop symbol of the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is a special figure with a non-probable big hit (for example, “Special Figure C” shown in FIG. 5). Yes, when the non-probable big hit symbol form is confirmed and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, a probable change promotion failure display that defeats the enemy is displayed. At the start of the confrontation effect display in this example, the decoration symbol (in this example, “decoration 2”) is deleted in the decoration symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 142 (f) shows a state in which the probability change promotion success display of the animation display of the scene in which the enemy of the lord fell down and won the confrontation is displayed. In this example, when the stop symbol of the special symbol 1 display device 212 is a special symbol for probability variation big hit (for example, “special symbol A” shown in FIG. 5), the non-probable variable big hit symbol pattern is determined in the decorative symbol display device 208. Since it is displayed, the probability change promotion success effect display is displayed. The probability variation promotion success display is a display that suggests that the probability variation state is started after the big hit game. Note that the display of “decoration 2” is resumed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 142 (g) shows a state in which “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”, which is a probable big hit symbol pattern, is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. It is informed that the state (probability change state) advantageous to the player is started after the big hit game is displayed by displaying the symbol form by “decoration 3” constituting the big hit symbol aspect advantageous to the player.

  FIG. 142 (h) shows a state where “decoration 3” is displayed in a reduced size. It should be noted that “decoration 3” may continue to be displayed until the jackpot game ends.

  FIG. 142 (i) shows a state in which the darkening display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the end of the confrontation effect. Even during the dark display, the right-handed display j16 is continuously displayed. The dark display may be in a state where no wipe effect is performed, or the dark display may be a wipe effect display different from the wipe effect display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

  FIG. 142 (j) shows a state in which an effect display in a normal jackpot game is displayed after the dark display is completed. A round display j15 including a character string image of “1R” is displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, in the upper left corner of the display screen, “decoration 3” constituting a jackpot symbol pattern advantageous to the player is displayed, and after the jackpot game ends, a state advantageous to the player (probability change state) is started. It has been reported.

  FIG. 142 (k) shows a state in which the second round of the big hit game is started. When the first round is completed, the variable prize opening 234 is closed, and when the second round is started, the variable prize opening 234 is opened. In the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a round display j15 including a character string image of “2R” is displayed in a relatively large display size, and it is notified that the second round has started.

  In this embodiment, the wipe effect display is not displayed after the effect display suggesting that the player wins in the confrontation effect during the big hit game is advantageous. It should be noted that the wipe effect display may be displayed after the effect display suggesting that it is advantageous to the player in the confrontation effect during the big hit game.

(Example 62)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 62 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 (A) to (M). 142 (A) to (M) show an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 142 (A) to 142 (M) show the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 142 (A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a jackpot symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings left and right. The jackpot symbol of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” is not a jackpot symbol that is relatively advantageous to the player (in this example, a probability variation symbol), but is relatively advantageous to the player. It is a low jackpot symbol aspect (in this example, a non-probable variation symbol aspect). The “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” jackpot design is a design that suggests a non-probable change jackpot. It should be noted that the jackpot design of “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7” is a design that suggests a probable variation jackpot.

  Further, in the state at the time point shown in FIG. 142 (A), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, hold icons b1 and b2 are displayed. The hold icons b1 and b2 are white circle hold icons shown in FIG.

  FIG. 142 (B) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” which is a big hit symbol form is displayed. The stop display is made, and it is informed that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

  FIG. 142 (C) shows a state where the big hit game is started. At the time shown in FIG. 142 (C), opening of the variable winning opening 234 (attacker) has not started. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character string image of “big hit” and notifies that the big hit game has started. In addition, “decoration 2” is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the big hit symbol pattern when the symbol is stopped is “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”. Has been. Further, as the big hit game is started, the background image is changed and the hold icon is also deleted.

  FIG. 142 (D) shows a state in which a round display j15 including a character string image of “1R” is displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Immediately before the first round of the big hit game is started, the round display j15 is displayed in a relatively large display size to notify that the first round is started. Also, a right-handed display j16 including a character string image of “Right →” is displayed at the upper right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this embodiment, since the variable winning opening 234 is provided on the right path of the game area 124, the right-handed display j16 is displayed because the right-handed game ball is fired right during the big hit game. It is displayed.

  FIG. 142 (E) shows a state in which the first round of the jackpot game has started. When the first round is started, the variable winning opening 234 is opened, and the round display j15 is displayed in a relatively small display size on the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, when the first round is started, a confrontation effect (battle effect) in which an animation of a scene in which the lord and the enemy of the lord confront each other is displayed is started. At the start of the confrontation effect, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the character image of the dragonfly is displayed on the left side of the display screen, the enemy character image is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the background image is changed. The confrontation effect in this example is a probability change promotion effect that is an effect for causing the player to expect that a state advantageous to the player (in this example, a probability change state) may be started after the jackpot game ends. . At the start of the confrontation effect display in this example, the decoration symbol (in this example, “decoration 2”) is deleted in the decoration symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 142 (F) shows a state in which the probability change promotion failure effect display of the animation display of the scene where the lord fell and the lord lost the confrontation is displayed. In this example, when the stop symbol of the special figure 1 display device 212 is a special figure with a non-probable change big hit (for example, “special figure C” shown in FIG. 5), the non-probable big hit symbol pattern is displayed in the decorative design display device 208. Since the confirmation display has been made, the probability change promotion failure display is displayed. The probability change promotion failure display is a display that suggests that the probability change state is not started after the big hit game. Note that the display of “decoration 2” is resumed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 142 (G) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display (wipe-in) of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed so as to wipe off the round display j15, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, the background image, and the like. The right-handed display j16 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

  FIG. 142 (H) shows a state where the appearance display of wipe displays w7a and w7b is displayed. The right-handed display j16 is displayed overlapping the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

  FIG. 142 (I) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. The right-handed display j16 is displayed overlapping the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

  FIG. 142 (J) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipe out) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. Along with the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, a round display j15 including a character string image of “1R” is displayed, and the background image changes to a normal background image during a big hit game.

  FIG. 142 (K) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is displayed. The wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen.

  FIG. 142 (L) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. The completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a normal background image during a big hit game is displayed, and a round display j15 is displayed in a relatively large display size in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the upper right corner of the display screen. Is displayed as a right-handed display j16, and “decoration 2” is displayed at the upper left of the display screen.

  FIG. 142 (M) shows a state in which the second round of jackpot game has started. When the first round is completed, the variable prize opening 234 is closed, and when the second round is started, the variable prize opening 234 is opened. In the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a round display j15 including a character string image of “2R” is displayed in a relatively large display size, and it is notified that the second round has started.

  In the present embodiment, the wipe effect display is displayed after the effect display suggesting that the player wins in the confrontation effect during the big hit game is disadvantageous. Thus, the wipe effect display may be displayed during the big hit game.

(Example 63)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 63 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 143 (a) to 143 (i) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 143 (a) to 143 (i), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative design display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 143 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a jackpot symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings left and right. The jackpot symbol of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” is not a jackpot symbol that is relatively advantageous to the player (in this example, a probability variation symbol), but is relatively advantageous to the player. It is a low jackpot symbol aspect (in this example, a non-probable variation symbol aspect). The “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” jackpot design is a design that suggests a non-probable change jackpot.

  Further, in the state at the time point shown in FIG. 143 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, hold icons b1 and b2 are displayed. The hold icons b1 and b2 are white circle hold icons shown in FIG.

  FIG. 143 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” which is a big hit symbol form is displayed. The stop display is made, and it is informed that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

  FIG. 143 (c) shows a state where the big hit game is started. At the time shown in FIG. 143 (c), the opening of the variable prize opening 234 (attacker) has not started. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character string image of “big hit” and notifies that the big hit game has started. In addition, “decoration 2” is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the big hit symbol pattern when the symbol is stopped is “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”. Has been. Further, as the big hit game is started, the background image is changed and the hold icon is also deleted.

  FIG. 143 (d) shows a state in which the round display j 15 including the character string image “1R” is displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Immediately before the first round of the big hit game is started, the round display j15 is displayed in a relatively large display size to notify that the first round is started. Also, a right-handed display j16 including a character string image of “Right →” is displayed at the upper right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this embodiment, since the variable winning opening 234 is provided on the right path of the game area 124, the right-handed display j16 is displayed because the right-handed game ball is fired right during the big hit game. It is displayed.

  FIG. 143 (e) shows a state in which the first round of the jackpot game has started. When the first round is started, the variable winning opening 234 is opened, and the round display j15 is displayed in a relatively small display size on the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, when the first round is started, a confrontation effect (battle effect) is displayed in which an animation of a scene where Tono and Sakai confront and compare with each other is displayed. At the start of the confrontation effect, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the character image of the dragonfly is displayed on the right side of the display screen, the character image of the spear is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and the background image is changed. The confrontation effect in this example is a probability change promotion effect that is an effect for causing the player to expect that a state advantageous to the player (in this example, a probability change state) may be started after the jackpot game ends. . At the start of the confrontation effect display in this example, the decoration symbol (in this example, “decoration 2”) is deleted in the decoration symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 143 (f) shows a state in which the probability change promotion failure effect display of the animation display of the scene in which Tono is drunk and Tono is defeated in the confrontation is displayed. In this example, when the stop symbol of the special figure 1 display device 212 is a special figure with a non-probable change big hit (for example, “special figure C” shown in FIG. 5), the non-probable big hit symbol pattern is displayed in the decorative design display device 208. Since the confirmation display has been made, the probability change promotion failure display is displayed. The probability change promotion failure display is a display that suggests that the probability change state is not started after the big hit game. Note that the display of “decoration 2” is resumed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 143 (g) shows a state in which a darkening display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the end of the confrontation effect. Even during the dark display, the right-handed display j16 is continuously displayed. The dark display may be in a state where no wipe effect is performed, or the dark display may be a wipe effect display different from the wipe effect display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

  FIG. 143 (h) shows a state in which the dark background display is finished and the normal background image during the big hit game is gradually displayed. In the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a round display j15 including a character string image of “1R” is displayed in a relatively large display size.

  FIG. 143 (i) shows a state in which the second round of the jackpot game is started. When the first round is completed, the variable prize opening 234 is closed, and when the second round is started, the variable prize opening 234 is opened. In the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a round display j15 including a character string image of “2R” is displayed in a relatively large display size, and it is notified that the second round has started.

  In this embodiment, the wipe effect display is not displayed after the effect display that suggests that it is disadvantageous for the player who wins in the confrontation effect during the big hit game. Thus, the wipe effect display may not be displayed during the big hit game. It is to be noted that the confrontation effect in which the lord and the enemy of the lord slash with each other as shown in the above-described embodiments 61 and 62 is configured to display the probability change promotion success effect display more easily than the confrontation effect of drinking comparison shown in the present embodiment. It is.

  The first big hit effect during the jackpot game (the above-mentioned embodiment 63) and the big hit are shown in the effect display whether or not a state advantageous to the player is started during the big hit game. Among a plurality of jackpot effects such as a second jackpot effect (a battle effect of the lord and the swordsman in Examples 61 and 62 above) showing whether or not a state advantageous to the player is started is displayed. If the first jackpot production is a failure production, the wipe production is not performed, but if the second jackpot production is more likely to be successful than the first jackpot production, it is a failure production. A wipe effect may be performed and the display may return to the normal big hit effect display. Note that a wipe effect may also be performed when the first jackpot effect is a failure effect. Note that the wipe effect display during the symbol variation display described in the above embodiment (after the display suggesting the shift in the super reach effect display) may be applied to the wipe effect display during the big hit.

(Example 64)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 64 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 143 (A) to 143 (H) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 143A to 143, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 143 (A) shows a state in which the final round (for example, 7 rounds) in the big hit game is being performed. In the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a round display j15 including the character string image of “final R” is displayed to notify that the final round is being performed. Further, a right-handed display j16 is displayed on the upper right of the display screen, and “decoration 2” is displayed on the upper left of the display screen. Further, in response to the lower plate 128 being filled with game balls, a ball removal display j17 including a white character string image of “ball removal” is displayed. The ball removal display j17 is a lower plate full tank error display, and is a display that prompts the player to discharge the game ball from the lower plate 128. In this example, a part of the ball removal display j17 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the round display j15.

  FIG. 143 (B) shows a state in which the final round is completed. When the final round ends, a character string image of “big hit” is displayed instead of the round display j15. It should be noted that the sphere removal display j17 may be displayed so as to overlap a part of the “big hit” character string image, or the sphere removal display j17 may not overlap the part of the “big hit” character string image. May be displayed.

  FIG. 143 (C) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display (wipe-in) of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol and the character string image of “big hit”. The right-handed display j16 and the ball removal display j17 are displayed overlapping the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

  FIG. 143 (D) shows a maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. The right-handed display j16 and the ball removal display j17 are displayed overlapping the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

  FIG. 143 (E) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. The background image changes to an empty background image with the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the latest symbol mode is “ Stop display of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” is started. In this example, the player starts operating the ball discharge lever 132 at the timing shown in FIG.

  FIG. 143 (F) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is displayed. Since the full state of the lower pan 128 is canceled by operating the ball discharge lever 132, the ball removal display j17 is erased. The right-handed display j16 is continuously displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the hold icons b1 and b2 that are white circle hold icons are displayed, and the hold number of the special figure 1 is 2. Is informed.

  FIG. 143 (G) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. The completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” which is the latest symbol aspect is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Yes. Further, the right-handed display j16 is continuously displayed. In this example, the big hit game ends after the wipe effect display ends, and when the big hit game ends, the right-handed display j16 is deleted. When the electric support state is started after the big hit game, the right-handed display j16 may be displayed even after the big hit game.

  FIG. 143 (H) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In this example, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the hold of the special figure 1 that has been digested is not displayed as a change icon but is deleted at the start or after the start of the change display of the decorative symbol. The hold icon b2 is moved and displayed from the hold 2 display area to the hold 1 display area.

  In this embodiment, the game is a big hit game, and the wipe effect display is displayed before the symbol variation display is started. In this example, a wipe effect display is displayed after the final round of the big hit game.

  Note that the wipe effect display displayed after the probability change promotion display during the big hit game or after the end of the final round is not limited to the wipe display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, and any of the wipe displays shown above is possible. For example, the wipe display w15 shown in FIG. 111 may be used.

(Example 65)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 65 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 (a) to (i) show an example of presentation of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 144A to 144I, the main liquid crystal unit 1001, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movable body 1010 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. The movable body 1010 of this embodiment includes an LED lamp, and the movable body 1010 may be in a light emitting state.

  FIG. 144 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the determination result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is wrong. Informed. In the state shown in FIG. 144 (a), the reserved number in FIG. 1 is 1, for example, and the reserved number in FIG. 2 is 0. In each figure of FIG. 144, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. The effect stage is an empty stage, and an empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the movable body 1010 is in an extinguished state.

  FIG. 144 (b) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed.

  FIG. 144 (c) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 144 (c), reach is displayed in the decorative symbol variation display, and the movable body 1010 enters the light emitting state, and the super reach effect display is started.

  In FIG. 144 (d), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an effect is displayed in which an animation of a scene where the lord and the enemy of the lord confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

  FIG. 144 (e) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 144 (f) shows a state in which a display that suggests a big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the display of the super reach effect. In this example, an animation of a scene where Tono wins the enemy of Tono is displayed as a display suggesting a big hit.

  FIG. 144 (g) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display, and the movable body 1010 is turned off. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a jackpot symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the big hit symbol pattern is a display that suggests a big hit loss. The light emission of the movable body 1010 is finished, and the movable body 1010 is in a light-off state.

  FIG. 144 (h) shows a state where the super reach effect display has been completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is displayed in a swinging manner and overlaps with the right symbol of the decorative symbol. In the upper right corner of the display screen, a decoration pattern “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” in a reduced display mode is displayed. Thus, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols may be displayed in two places.

  FIG. 144 (i) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” which is a big hit symbol form is displayed. The stop display is made, and it is informed that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

  In the present embodiment, the big hit announcement is made by the announcement lamp of the movable body 1010. The movable body 1010 is a logo movable body on which the logo of the pachinko machine 100 is written, and the lamp of the movable body 1010 may be a logo lamp.

Example 66
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 66 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 (A) to 144 (L) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 144A to 144L, the main liquid crystal unit 1001, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movable body 1010 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. The movable body 1010 of this embodiment includes an LED lamp, and the movable body 1010 may be in a light emitting state.

  FIG. 144 (A) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the determination result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is wrong. Informed. In the state shown in FIG. 144 (A), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, for example, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. 144 (A) to 144 (L), the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. The effect stage is an empty stage, and an empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The movable body 1010 is in an extinguished state.

  FIG. 144 (B) shows a state in which the reservation of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed.

  FIG. 144 (C) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 144 (C), the reach is displayed by the variation display of the decorative symbols, and the movable body 1010 enters the light emitting state, and the super reach effect display is started.

  In FIG. 144 (D), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an effect is displayed in which an animation of a scene in which the enemy and the enemy are confronting each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

  FIG. 144 (E) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 144 (F) shows a state in which a display indicating a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 144 (G) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed so as to wipe out the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, the background image, and the like. Even during wipe-in, the movable body 1010 is in a light emitting state, and the notice operation (lighting) is continued. In this example, the decorative symbols are displayed overlapping the wipe displays w7a and w7b. The decorative symbol is a mini decorative symbol, which is different from the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left and right symbols. Has been.

  FIG. 144 (H) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible. The decorative symbols are displayed overlapping the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

  FIG. 144 (I) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the background image and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. The background image changes to an empty background image with the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration” The swing variation display of “2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is started. In addition, the display of the decorative symbols (mini decorative symbols) on the upper left of the display screen is displayed overlapping the wipe displays w7a and w7b, and the variable display of the middle symbols is continued.

  FIG. 144 (J) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. The completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a dissimilar symbol pattern, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The fluctuation variation is displayed in a manner. A mini decorative symbol is displayed overlapping “decoration 2” on the right symbol of the shaking fluctuation display. The variable display of the medium design of the mini decorative design is continued.

  FIG. 144 (K) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed on the middle design of the mini-decoration symbol. In addition, the movable body 1010 is turned off. The mini-decoration pattern is deleted before the special figure 1 variable game is terminated.

  FIG. 144 (L) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place.

  In the present embodiment, a mini decorative design that is a decorative design is displayed overlapping the wipe display. In addition, a temporary stop display may be started for the mini decorative symbol with the middle symbol before the wipe effect display is started. When the decorative symbol is displayed overlapping the wipe display, the temporary stop display may be started with the middle symbol before the wipe effect display is started.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modification of the present embodiment will be described. 144 (K ′) to (N ′) show an example of the effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in chronological order. 144 (K ′) to (N ′), the main liquid crystal unit 1001, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movable body 1010 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 144 (K ′) shows a state continued from FIG. 144 (J), and shows a state in which a dark display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 after the wipe effect display. The mini decorative pattern is displayed even during dark display.

  FIG. 144 (L ′) shows a state where the dark display has been completed. The dark display in this example is a reverse effect indication, and in the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” which is a jackpot symbol is left and right. The shaking fluctuation is displayed in a shaking manner. A mini decoration symbol is displayed overlapping “decoration 2” which is the right symbol of the fluctuation variation display. The variable display of the medium design of the mini decorative design is continued.

  FIG. 144 (M ′) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed on the middle design of the mini-decoration symbol. In addition, the movable body 1010 is turned off.

  FIG. 144 (N ′) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” which is a big hit symbol form is displayed. The display is stopped and “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” is also stopped in the mini-decoration symbol, and it is informed that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

  In this modification, the big hit symbol pattern is permanently stopped (determined stop display) in both the mini decorative symbols and the normal decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In FIG. 144 (L), an example in which a mini decorative symbol is deleted at the timing when a normal decorative symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed is shown. However, as in this example, each of a plurality of decorative symbols corresponds to a lottery result. You may make it carry out a fixed stop display of the symbol aspect (big hit symbol aspect, a dismissal symbol aspect).

  In addition, the example in which the lamp of the movable body 1010 as the notice display means (an example of the notice means) performs the notice operation has been shown. However, other lamps such as LEDs provided on the game board, LEDs near the start port, and LEDs are used. A notice operation may be performed, or image display means, dot matrix display means, 7-segment display means, or the like may be used as the notice display means. Moreover, you may make it perform a notice by the movement by the movable body for production. When the symbol change display is performed, the case where the notice operation by the notice means (for example, the notice display means or the effect movable body) is not performed is performed after the symbol change display. It may be configured so that the big win symbol pattern is easily displayed in a fixed stop, or by pre-reading notice means (for example, those exemplified as the notice means or the notice display means) in a state where the start of the symbol variation display is suspended. When the pre-reading notice operation is not performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol pattern is finally displayed in a fixed stop manner after the symbol variation display. In addition, in FIG. 144, the movable body 1010 is lit before the wipe-in and starts the warning operation and continues to be lit until after the out-out. However, the movable body 1010 is not limited to this, but before the wipe-in, during the wipe-in, the maximum wipe is performed. The notice operation may be started in any state, during wipeout, or after wipeout, and the notice operation may be turned off during wipeout, in the maximum wipe state, during wipeout, or after wipeout, and the notice operation may be terminated. .

(Example 67)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 67 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 145 (a) to 145 (l) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 145 (a) to 145 (l), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 145 (a) shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the determination result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is wrong. Informed. In the state shown in FIG. 145 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, for example, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. In each drawing of FIG. 145, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. The effect stage is an empty stage, and an empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In this embodiment, a square-shaped mini game area j18 is provided in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the mini game area, a mini game is played. As a result display of the mini-game (slot production), there are “probable”, “win”, “re”, “gi”, “?”, And “first”. When “certain” is confirmed and displayed as a result display, it is forewarned that the fluctuating symbol variation display will be finally confirmed and displayed in the jackpot symbol form, and the result display “this” is the result display “? ”Is displayed more easily than the case where the symbol change is finally displayed in the big hit symbol form, and the result display“ Li ”is more variable than the case where the result display“? ”Is displayed. Reach production is easier to perform, and the result display “Gi” is more likely to perform pseudo-continuous production in the changing pattern than the result display “?”, And the result display “destination” is the result display “?”. When the pending symbol variation display is started rather than when the symbol is displayed, it is forewarned that after the symbol variation display, it will be easier to finally confirm and display in the big hit symbol form. Here, “?” Is displayed in a fixed manner as an example of a failure effect. In the state shown in FIG. 145 (a), no mini game is played. In a state in which the mini game is not being performed, a normal background of a diagonal check pattern (indicated by cross hatching in the figure) is displayed in the mini game area j18. In this embodiment, the normal background is displayed only when the mini game is not being played, but the normal background may be displayed continuously during the mini game.

  FIG. 145 (b) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 145 (b), no mini game is played.

  FIG. 145 (c) shows a state in which the mini game is started. A downward arrow shown in the mini game area j18 indicates that a mini game is being played.

  FIG. 145 (d) shows a state where “?” Is displayed in the mini game area as a result display of the mini game. “?” May be a display that suggests that the mini-game result is a failure effect, and the failure effect suggests a loss in the mini-game.

  FIG. 145 (e) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 145 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In addition, the wipe effect display is started in the mini game area j18. The appearance display of the wipe display w25a is started from the upper left corner of the mini game area j18, and the appearance display of the wipe display w25b is started from the lower right corner of the mini game area j18. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w25a and w25b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w25a and w25b are displayed on the forefront of the mini game area j18 and are displayed so as to wipe off “?”.

  FIG. 145 (g) shows a state in which the appearance display (wipe-in) of the wipe displays w25a and w25b is displayed in the mini game area j18.

  FIG. 145 (h) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w25a and w25b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w25a and the upper left end of the wipe display w25b are in contact with each other, and the entire mini game area j18 is covered with the wipe displays w25a and w25b.

  FIG. 145 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe displays w25a and w25b is started. In the mini game area j18, the wipe display w25a is displayed withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner, and the wipe display w25b is displayed withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner. The image of “?”, Which is the result display, is deleted at the same time as the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w25a and w25b is started.

  FIG. 145 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w25a and w25b is completed. The wipe display w25a is contracted and erased toward the upper left corner of the mini game area j18, and the wipe display w25b is contracted and erased toward the lower right corner of the mini game area j18.

  FIG. 145 (k) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 3” is displayed in a swinging manner.

  FIG. 145 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 3” which is an off symbol pattern. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place.

  In this embodiment, a wipe effect display is displayed in the mini game area j18. Thus, the wipe effect display may be displayed in a region where a certain effect is performed in the display screen of the display device.

(Example 68)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 68 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 145 (A) to 145 (K) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 145A to 145K, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 145 (A) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the determination result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is wrong. Informed. In the state shown in FIG. 145 (A), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, for example, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. In each drawing of FIG. 145, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. The effect stage is an empty stage, and an empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state shown in FIG. 145 (A), no mini game is played. In a state in which the mini game is not being performed, a normal background of a diagonal check pattern (indicated by cross hatching in the figure) is displayed in the mini game area j18. In this embodiment, the normal background is displayed only when the mini game is not being played, but the normal background may be displayed continuously during the mini game.

  FIG. 145 (B) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 145 (B), no mini game is played.

  FIG. 145 (C) shows a state in which the mini game is started. A downward arrow shown in the mini game area j18 indicates that a mini game is being played.

  FIG. 145 (D) shows a state where “Gi” is displayed in the mini game area as a result display of the mini game. The result display “Gi” is more likely to have a pseudo-continuous effect in the changing pattern than when the result display “?” Is displayed, but when the result display “Gi” is displayed, the pseudo-continuous effect is performed. It does not have to be.

  FIG. 145 (E) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 145 (F) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In addition, the wipe effect display is started in the mini game area j18. The appearance display of the wipe display w25a is started from the upper left corner of the mini game area j18, and the appearance display of the wipe display w25b is started from the lower right corner of the mini game area j18. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w25a and w25b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w25a and w25b are displayed on the foreground of the mini game area j18 and are displayed so as to wipe off “Gi”.

  FIG. 145 (G) shows a state in which the appearance display (wipe-in) of the wipe displays w25a and w25b is displayed in the mini game area j18. In addition, a pseudo-continuous effect in which the variable display in the left and right symbol display area 208ac is resumed is started.

  FIG. 145 (H) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w25a and w25b has been completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w25a and the upper left end of the wipe display w25b are in contact with each other, and the entire mini game area j18 is covered with the wipe displays w25a and w25b. In addition, “decoration 2” is temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 145 (I) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe displays w25a and w25b is started. In the mini game area j18, the wipe display w25a is displayed withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner, and the wipe display w25b is displayed withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner. At the same time as the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w25a and w25b is started, the “G” image as the result display is deleted. “Decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 145 (J) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w25a and w25b is completed. The wipe display w25a is contracted and erased toward the upper left corner of the mini game area j18, and the wipe display w25b is contracted and erased toward the lower right corner of the mini game area j18. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after the completion of the withdrawal of the wipe displays w25a and w25b. It should be noted that the normal reach effect display may be started after the completion of the withdrawal of the wipe displays w25a and w25b, or the super reach effect display and the normal reach effect display may not be performed.

  FIG. 145 (K) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished after the super reach effect display is finished. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place.

  In this embodiment, a wipe effect display is displayed in the mini game area j18. Thus, the wipe effect display may be displayed in a region where a certain effect is performed in the display screen of the display device. In addition, when the result display “T” is confirmed and displayed when the result display “Gi” of the mini-game is confirmed, the symbol variation display that is fluctuating is finally confirmed and displayed in the big hit symbol form. The result display “Gi” may be used as an outlier suggestion in the mini game. The confirmation display of “Gi” may be a successful production because a pseudo-continuous production is easily performed.

(Example 69)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 69 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 146 (a) to 146 (n) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 146 (a) to (n), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 146 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the determination result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is wrong. Informed. In the present embodiment, a mini decoration symbol is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decoration symbol display device 208, and the mini decoration symbol “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is temporarily stopped. The mini decorative symbol is displayed overlapping the decorative symbol in the right symbol display area 208c. In the state shown in FIG. 146 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, for example, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. In each drawing of FIG. 145, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. The effect stage is an empty stage, and an empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state shown in FIG. 146 (a), no mini game is played. In a state in which the mini game is not being performed, a normal background of a diagonal check pattern (indicated by cross hatching in the figure) is displayed in the mini game area j18. In this embodiment, the normal background is displayed only when the mini game is not being played, but the normal background may be displayed continuously during the mini game.

  FIG. 146 (b) shows a state in which the reservation of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In addition, a variable display of the mini decorative pattern is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 146 (b), no mini game is played.

  FIG. 146 (c) shows a state in which the mini game is started. A downward arrow shown in the mini game area j18 indicates that a mini game is being played.

  FIG. 146 (d) shows a state where “Li” is displayed in the mini game area as a result display of the mini game.

  FIG. 146 (e) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the variation display of the decorative symbols in FIG. 146 (e).

  FIG. 146 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In addition, the wipe effect display is started in the mini game area j18. The appearance display of the wipe display w25a is started from the upper left corner of the mini game area j18, and the appearance display of the wipe display w25b is started from the lower right corner of the mini game area j18. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w25a and w25b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w25a and w25b are displayed on the forefront of the mini game area j18 and are displayed so as to wipe off “li”.

  FIG. 146 (g) shows a scene in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, the mini game area j18 is erased, and the enemy and the enemy of the lord confront each other. This shows a state where an effect of displaying the animation is started. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

  FIG. 146 (h) shows a state in which a display suggesting a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. Further, the normal decorative symbol variation display in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c is deleted. The variable display of the mini decorative pattern is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 146 (i) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display (wipe-in) of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the forefront of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, the background image, and the like. The mini decorative symbols are displayed overlapping the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

  FIG. 146 (j) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible. The mini decorative symbols are displayed overlapping the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

  FIG. 146 (k) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipe out) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. When the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b starts, the background image changes to an empty background image, the display of the mini game area j18 is restarted, the display of the normal decorative design is restarted, and the display screen of the decorative design display device 208 In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” which is an outlier symbol mode is started. Note that the symbols displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c do not have to be the same before and after wipe-in and wipe-out. For example, they are shifted to the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to The “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 3” may be displayed as a symbol.

  FIG. 146 (l) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. The completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a dissimilar symbol pattern, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The fluctuation variation is displayed in a manner. Further, the wipe effect display in the mini game area j18 is finished before the wipe effect display in the decorative symbol display device 208, and no mini game is played. Note that if the mini game area j18 is erased with the start of the super reach effect display, the wipe effect display in the mini game area j18 may be terminated even when the mini game area j18 is erased.

  FIG. 146 (m) shows a state in which the swing variation display of the mini-decorative symbol “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started. The swing variation display with the mini decorative symbols is started after the swing variation display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 146 (n) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The mini-decoration symbol “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is wrong.

  In the present embodiment, the mini game area j18 is erased by starting the super reach effect display during the wipe effect display in the mini game area j18. Moreover, the display of the mini decorative pattern in the present embodiment is also applicable to the above embodiment.

  The wipe effect display of the mini game area j8 may be displayed only when the result display “out” is confirmed and displayed, or the result display including the result display of the mini game area j8 (for example, “?”, “G ”), Or may be displayed only when the result of the mini game area j8 is a result display (for example,“? ”,“ Gi ”). In the case of “Re”), a result display or wipe effect display of a different pattern may be displayed, or a mini game area when an effect corresponding to the result display of the mini game area j8 is not performed. The wipe effect display may be performed. For example, even though the result display of the mini game area j8 is “Re”, the effect display area (in the above embodiment, the decorative design is displayed in a variable manner, or the confrontation effect between the lord and the enemy is performed. It may be configured such that the wipe effect display of the mini game area j8 is performed when the advance notice is ill, such as the reach effect is not performed in the display area to be broken. Although the slot effect is illustrated as a mini game performed in the mini game area j8, the effect (for example, the pseudo-continuous effect, the reach effect, the pre-reading notice effect, the hold change effect, etc.) generated in the main effect display area by the result display is generated. Anything that gives a notice, a big hit notice by a result display, or a prefetch notice may be used. Instead of a slot effect, it may be an effect such as a confrontation such as a confrontation between the lord and the enemy, fishing, bowling, or the like. For example, if the mini game is a fishing production, whether or not a fish written as “reach”, a fish written as “mysterious”, a fish written as “hit? Characters written on the written fish may be used as a result display to affect any notice or effect performed in the effect display area. A mini game effect may be applied to the slot machine. For example, when a failure effect is displayed for some effect, a wipe effect may be performed in the mini game area of the display device of the slot machine.

(Example 70)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 70 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 147 (a) to 147 (n) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 147 (a) to (n), the main liquid crystal unit 1001, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movable body 1010 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 147 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the determination result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is wrong. Informed. In the state shown in FIG. 147 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 4, for example, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, hold icons b1 to b4 that are white circle hold icons are displayed. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an empty background image.

  FIG. 147 (b) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. The hold icon b1 is deleted, and the hold icons b2 to b4 are moved and displayed to the left.

  FIG. 147 (c) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 147 (c).

  FIG. 147 (d) shows a scene in which the all-hold icon is deleted and the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and the enemy and the enemy of the lord confront each other. The state in which the production in which the animation is displayed is started. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

  FIG. 147 (e) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 147 (f) shows a state in which a display indicating a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 147 (g) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. The normal background image is an empty background image when the wipe effect display is wiped out after the shaking variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. By switching to the effect display, the super reach effect display ends.

  FIG. 147 (h) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display (wipe-in) of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbols, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, the background image, and the like.

  FIG. 147 (i) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible.

  FIG. 147 (j) shows a state in which a hole j19 is provided in a part of the wipe display w7b. From the hole j19, a part of the display overlapped with the wipe display w7b is displayed so as to be visible. In this example, the hold icon is displayed during the maximum wipe state, and a part of the hold icon and a part of the background image are displayed through the hole j19 so as to be visible.

  FIG. 147 (k) shows a state in which the hole j19 has been erased and the maximum wipe state has been reached again.

  FIG. 147 (l) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipe out) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Then, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern mode, is started.

  FIG. 147 (m) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. The completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a dissimilar symbol pattern, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The fluctuation variation is displayed in a manner. In this example, the hold icon is not displayed from the start to the end of the wipeout. The hold icon is displayed when the next symbol variation display is started. Note that a hold icon may be displayed from the start of wipeout.

  FIG. 147 (n) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place.

  In this embodiment, the process is started when the hole j19 in which the background display can be seen from a part of the wipe display is in the maximum wipe state. In the wipe display, one or a plurality of holes are provided, and at least a part of the hold icon may be visible from the holes. There may be a case where a changing icon among the held icons can be seen from the hole, and a hold icon other than the changing icon among the held icons may be seen. What a player can see from one or a plurality of holes is not limited to a hold icon, but may be a decorative symbol or a notice-display-reversal jackpot notice display. The time when one or more holes appear on the wipe display is not limited to the maximum wipe state, and the holes may appear during wipe-in, may appear during wipe-out, One or more holes may appear in any state in the state, the maximum wipe state, or the wipe-out state, a plurality of these states, or the entire state, or the wipe-in state or the maximum wipe state One or a plurality of holes may disappear in any state, a plurality of states, or all states in the wipe-out state. In the present embodiment, an example in which a hole appears in the wipe display has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to the appearance of the hole, as long as the player can visually recognize the background display hidden by the wipe, One or a plurality of translucent parts or notches may appear or disappear on the wipe display, or they may not appear or disappear, but one or more translucent parts or notches may be displayed on the wipe display. A part may be provided.

(Example 71)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 71 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 148 (a) to 148 (l) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 148 (a) to (l), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 148 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the determination result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is wrong. Informed. In the state shown in FIG. 148 (a), the reserved number in FIG. 1 is 1, for example, and the reserved number in FIG. 2 is 0. In each drawing of FIG. 148, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. Since the present stage is an empty stage, an empty background image corresponding to the empty stage is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 148 (b) shows a state where the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started in the state where the production stage is the empty stage. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed.

  FIG. 148 (c) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 148 (c).

  FIG. 148 (d) shows the effect that the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and the animation of the scene where the enemy and the enemy are confronting each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

  FIG. 148 (e) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 148 (f) shows a state in which a display suggesting a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. The animation of the scene where Tono loses to the enemy of Tono is a failure effect of the super reach effect display in this example.

  FIG. 148 (g) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. After the swing variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the background image is displayed in accordance with the empty stage when the wipe effect display is wiped out. By switching to the background image, the super reach effect display ends.

  FIG. 148 (h) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display (wipe-in) of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. In this embodiment, the pattern (picture) wipe display w7a and w7b including the image of the palace is a wipe display corresponding to the empty stage. In this example, the wipe effect display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started during the empty stage. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative pattern, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, the background image, etc. in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 148 (h), a mini decorative design is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative design display device 208 so as to overlap the wipe display w7b. In this example, the mini decoration symbol “decoration 7-decoration 3—decoration 7” is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings left and right. The mini-decorated pattern is displayed at the same time as the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started. Note that the mini-decorated symbol may be displayed before the start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7b, or may be displayed after the start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7b. Further, in this example, the mini decorative symbol for displaying the wipe effect is the mini decorative symbol (in this example, “decoration 2” when the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c displayed during the super reach effect display. -Decoration 3-Decoration 2 ") is included in a different pattern mode (in this example," Decoration 7-Decoration 3-Decoration 7 "). The mini decorative symbols displayed in the effect display (in this example, “decoration 2” and “decoration 3”) may not be included.

  FIG. 148 (i) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c become invisible. In the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a mini decorative symbol having a symbol form of “decoration 7-decoration 3-decoration 7” is displayed in a swinging manner so as to overlap the wipe display w7b.

  FIG. 148 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c is terminated, and the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” which is an outlier symbol mode is started. In the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a mini decorative symbol having a symbol form of “decoration 7-decoration 3-decoration 7” is displayed in a swinging manner so as to overlap the wipe display w7b. In this example, the variable display by the mini decoration symbol for the wipe effect display is displayed from the start or before the start of the wipe-in and is displayed until the end or the end of the wipe-out. First, the display of the mini decoration symbol for the wipe effect display may be started after the start of wipe-in, may be ended before the end of wipe-out, or is displayed only in the maximum wipe state. You may do it. In this example, the mini decorative design for displaying the wipe effect is shown as a swinging variation display in the out-of-order design, but the mini decorative design for displaying the wipe effect is one or more mini decorative designs. May be displayed so as to be variably displayed, or may be configured to be stopped and displayed in a deviated symbol form.

  FIG. 148 (k) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. The completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a dissimilar symbol pattern, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The fluctuation variation is displayed in a manner. In this example, at the end of the wipeout, the mini decorative symbols that are displayed in the wipe effect are deleted.

  FIG. 148 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place.

(Example 72)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 72 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 148 (A) to 148 (L) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 148 (A) to (L), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 148 (A) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the determination result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is wrong. Informed. In the state shown in FIG. 148 (A), the reserved number in FIG. 1 is 1, for example, and the reserved number in FIG. 2 is 0. In each drawing of FIG. 148, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. In addition, since the current stage is a mountain stage, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a mountain background image corresponding to the mountain stage.

  FIG. 148 (B) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started in the state where the production stage is the mountain stage. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed.

  FIG. 148 (C) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 148 (C).

  FIG. 148 (D) shows a state in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and the effect of displaying the animation of the scene where the merchant chases the merchant is started. Is shown. On the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of Tono is displayed, and on the right side of the display screen, an image of a merchant is displayed. The super reach production display in this example is a chase reach production for the merchant chasing the merchant.

  FIG. 148 (E) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. In FIG. 148 (E), an animation of a scene in which Tono pursues the merchant is displayed.

  FIG. 148 (F) shows a state in which a display suggesting a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the merchant escapes from the hall is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. The animation of the scene where the merchant escaped from the hall is a failure production of the super reach production display in this example.

  FIG. 148 (G) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an outlier symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. After the swing variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the background image corresponds to the mountain stage when the wipe effect display wipes out. By switching to the background image, the super reach effect display ends.

  FIG. 148 (H) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w27a is started from the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display (wipe-in) of the wipe display w27b is started from the lower left corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w27a and w27b is the start of the wipe effect display. The patterns of the wipe displays w27a and w27b are vertical stripe patterns and are different from the patterns of the wipe displays w7a and w7b. In this embodiment, the vertical stripe pattern (picture) wipe display w27a, w27b is a wipe display corresponding to a mountain stage. In this example, the wipe effect display of the wipe displays w27a and w27b is started during the mountain stage. The wipe displays w27a and w27b are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative pattern, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, the background image, and the like in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  The wipe displays w27a and w27b of the present embodiment appear from the upper right corner and the lower left corner of the display screens of the decorative symbol display devices 208a to 208c, and are expanded and displayed toward the lower left and the upper right. On the other hand, the wipe displays w7a and w7b of Example 71 appear from the upper left corner and lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display devices 208a to 208c, and are expanded and displayed toward the lower right and the upper left. In this way, a plurality of types of wipe displays are provided, and the pattern, appearance position, expansion direction, and withdrawal direction may be different for each of the plurality of types of wipe displays.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 148 (H), a mini decorative design is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative design display device 208 so as to overlap the wipe displays w27a and w27b. In this example, the mini decoration symbol “decoration 7-decoration 3—decoration 7” is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings left and right. The mini decorative symbols are displayed at the same time as the appearance display of the wipe displays w27a and w27b. The mini decorative symbols may be displayed before the start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w27a and w27b, or may be displayed after the start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w27 and w27b. Further, in this example, the mini decorative symbol for displaying the wipe effect is the mini decorative symbol (in this example, “decoration 2” when the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c displayed during the super reach effect display. -Decoration 3-Decoration 2 ") is included in a different pattern mode (in this example," Decoration 7-Decoration 3-Decoration 7 "). The mini decorative symbols displayed in the effect display (in this example, “decoration 2” and “decoration 3”) may not be included.

  FIG. 148 (I) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w27a and w27b is completed. The lower left end portion of the wipe display w27a and the upper right end portion of the wipe display w27b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w27a and w27b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w27a and w27b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c become invisible. In the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a mini decorative symbol having a symbol pattern of “decoration 7-decoration 3-decoration 7” is displayed in a swinging manner so as to overlap the wipe displays w27a, w27b.

  FIG. 148 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c is terminated, and the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” which is an outlier symbol mode is started. In the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a mini decorative symbol having a symbol form of “decoration 7-decoration 3-decoration 7” is displayed in a swinging manner so as to overlap the wipe display w7b. In this example, the variable display by the mini decoration symbol for the wipe effect display is displayed from the start or before the start of the wipe-in and is displayed until the end or the end of the wipe-out. First, the display of the mini decoration symbol for the wipe effect display may be started after the start of wipe-in, may be ended before the end of wipe-out, or is displayed only in the maximum wipe state. You may do it. In this example, the mini decorative design for displaying the wipe effect is shown as a swinging variation display in the out-of-order design, but the mini decorative design for displaying the wipe effect is one or more mini decorative designs. May be displayed so as to be variably displayed, or may be configured to be stopped and displayed in a deviated symbol form.

  FIG. 148 (K) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w27a and w27b is completed. The wipe display w27a shrinks toward the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w27b shrinks toward the lower left corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. The completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w27a and w27b is the end of the wipe effect display. A background image of a mountain is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a dissimilar symbol aspect, swings to the left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The fluctuation variation is displayed in a manner. In this example, at the end of the wipeout, the mini decorative symbols that are displayed in the wipe effect are deleted.

  FIG. 148 (L) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modification of the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 148 (F ′) to (I ′) show an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in chronological order. 148 (F ') to (I'), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 148 (F ′) is a state that continues from FIG. 148 (E), and shows a state in which a display that suggests a big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene where the merchant caught a merchant is displayed as a display suggesting a big hit. The animation of the scene where Tono caught the merchant is a successful production of the super reach production display in this example.

  FIG. 148 (G ′) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a jackpot symbol, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The swing variation display of the jackpot symbol is a display suggesting a jackpot. After the fluctuation display of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the super reach effect display ends.

  FIG. 148 (H ′) shows a state where the super reach effect display has been completed. A background image of a mountain is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 with the end of the super reach effect display, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen are “decoration” which is a jackpot symbol. “2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings left and right.

  FIG. 148 (I ′) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” which is a big hit symbol form is displayed. The stop display is made, and it is informed that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

  In the example 71 and the present example, a different wipe effect display is performed for each effect stage. Note that the wipe effect display may be different depending on the type of the failure effect (super reach effect), instead of performing the wipe effect display different for each effect stage. For example, if the shrine wins the enemy of the shrine (swordsman), the victory will be won, and if the shrine is defeated by the swordsman, if it fails in the confrontation production, the wipe display of the pattern on the face of the shrine w7a, w7b If the merchant catches the merchant who runs away, the victory will be won, and if the merchant who runs away fails to catch the merchant who runs away, it will fail if the chase production will fail. The vertical stripe wipe display w27a and 27b will be displayed. May be performed.

  Next, a characteristic configuration of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 148 again.

(K1)
A game machine comprising first image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying an image display,
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays (for example, a normal reach effect, a super reach effect, a notice effect display of the change, a pre-read notice effect display),
One effect display among the plurality of types of effect displays is a first reach effect display (for example, a super reach effect display shown in FIGS. 99 (k) to (p) and FIGS. 100 (k) to (p)). And the super reach production display shown in FIGS. 101 (C) to (G)).
Display that suggests a shift in the first reach production display (for example, a display of fluctuation of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, a character image of “sorry”, or an animation of a scene where Tono loses a confrontation) Is displayed, a first wipe effect display (for example, wipe display by wipe displays w3a, w3b, w4a, and w4b shown in FIGS. 99 (q) to (z)) is displayed on the first image display means. May be displayed,
In the first reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” or a character string image of “sorry”) is displayed, In the image display means, a third wipe effect display (for example, wipe display w5a, w5b, and w6a shown in FIGS. 100 (q) to 100 (a)) may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, it may be possible to renew the mood of the player who sees the display suggesting the detachment by the wipe display, and to improve the interest of the effect display after the wipe display.

(K2)
The game stand according to (K1) above,
By the first wipe effect display, the image (for example, a decorative pattern, a character string image of “sorry”, or a background image) in the first image display means is configured to be wiped off,
By the third wipe effect display, an image (for example, a decorative pattern, a character string image of “sorry”, or a background image) in the first image display means is configured to be wiped out.
A game stand characterized by that.

(K3)
The game stand according to (K1) or (K2) above,
In the first reach effect display, after the display indicating the shift (for example, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” or the character string image of “sorry”) is displayed, , “Decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”), the first wipe display may be displayed on the first image display means. ,
In the first reach effect display, after the display indicating the shift (for example, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” or the character string image of “sorry”) is displayed, , “Decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is configured so that the third wipe effect display may be displayed on the first image display means. ,
A game stand characterized by that.

(K4)
The game stand according to any one of (K1) to (K3) above,
Symbol display means (for example, left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214) capable of executing symbol variation display are provided.
A game stand characterized by that.

(K5)
The game stand according to (K4) above,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a third reach effect display (for example, a normal reach effect display),
In the third reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift (for example, “fluctuation display of“ decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2 ”) is displayed, the symbol display means (eg,“ decoration 2 ”) is displayed on the symbol display means. The first wipe display is not displayed on the first image display means until the decoration 3 -decoration 2 ") is confirmed and displayed.
In the third reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift (for example, “fluctuation display of“ decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2 ”) is displayed, the symbol display means (eg,“ decoration 2 ”) is displayed on the symbol display means. The third wipe display is not displayed on the first image display means until the decoration 3-decoration 2 ") is confirmed and displayed.
The symbol variation display on which the first reach effect display is performed is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means than the symbol variation display on which the third reach effect display is performed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.

(K6)
The game stand according to (K5) above,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect displays is a second reach effect display (for example, a super reach effect display of drinking comparison shown in FIGS. 101 (d) to (d)),
In the second reach effect display, a display suggesting a shift (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is displayed, and an animation of a scene in which a man wins and the man is drunk in comparison with drinking is displayed. The first wipe display may be displayed on the first image display means before the deviated symbol form (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is displayed. Configured to not,
In the second reach effect display, a display suggesting a shift (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is displayed, and an animation of a scene in which a man wins and the man is drunk in comparison with drinking is displayed. The third wipe effect display may be displayed on the first image display means before the deviated symbol pattern (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is displayed. Configured to not,
The symbol variation display on which the second reach effect display is performed is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means than the symbol variation display on which the third reach effect display is performed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.

(K7)
The game stand according to any one of (K1) to (K6) above,
A second image display means (for example, a sub display device 1030) capable of displaying an image display;
The first image display means includes a first image display,
The second image display means includes a second image display,
The first image display means is configured without including the second image display,
The second image display means is configured without including the first image display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(K8)
The game stand according to (K7) above,
In the first reach effect display, a display that suggests a shift (for example, a part of a character image such as “sorry” or a part of a display that suggests a shift in the decorative design display device 208) is displayed. The second wipe display is configured to be displayed on the second image display means until the mode is fixedly displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(K9)
The game stand according to any one of (K1) to (K8) above,
In the first reach effect display, the display of the first wipe effect and the third in the first image display means is performed after the display indicating the shift is displayed until the deviated symbol form is displayed. The player can select whether or not to display the wipe effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(K10)
The game stand according to any one of (K1) to (K9) above,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.

(K11)
A game machine comprising first image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying an image display,
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display (for example, a normal reach effect, a super reach effect, a notice effect display of the change, and a pre-read notice effect display), for example.
One effect display among the plurality of types of effect displays is a first reach effect display (for example, a super reach effect display shown in FIGS. 99 (k) to (p), FIG. 100 (k) to ( p) and a super reach production display shown in FIGS. 101 (C) to (G).
In the first reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift is displayed, the first wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(K12)
The game stand according to any one of (K1) to (K11) above,
Provided with a ball storage means (for example, a lower plate 128) capable of storing game balls,
The first image display means displays a display that prompts the game balls to be discharged from the ball storage means (hereinafter referred to as “ball discharge display” (for example, lower pan full tank error notification image, ball removal display)). Possible means,
The first wipe effect display displayed in a state where the ball discharge display is displayed is configured to overlap the ball discharge display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(K13)
The game stand according to (K12) above,
In a state where both the first wipe effect display and the ball discharge display are displayed, the ball discharge display is visible from the player.
A game stand characterized by that.

(K14)
The game stand according to any one of (K1) to (K13) above,
A game area in which a game ball can roll (for example, a game area 124),
A game board (for example, game boards 1000, 1500, 1600) provided with the game area;
A main body (for example, the main body 104) to which the game board can be attached;
A door body (for example, front frame door 106) attached to the main body,
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a display indicating that the door is open (hereinafter referred to as “door open display”),
The first wipe effect display displayed in a state where the door open display is displayed is configured to overlap the ball door open display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(K15)
The game stand according to (K14) above,
The third wipe effect display displayed in a state where the ball discharge display is displayed is configured to overlap the ball discharge display,
In a state where both the third wipe effect display and the door opening display are displayed, the door opening display is visible from the player.
A game stand characterized by that.

(K16)
The game stand according to (K14) or (K15) above,
In a state where both the first wipe effect display and the door opening display are displayed, the door opening display is visible from the player.
A game stand characterized by that.

(M1)
A game machine comprising first image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying an image display,
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays (for example, a normal reach effect, a super reach effect, a notice effect display of the change, a pre-read notice effect display),
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a first reach effect display (for example, a super reach effect display),
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a first prefetch notice effect display (for example, logo image j3),
In the first reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift (for example, a detachment pattern mode) is displayed, a first wipe effect display (for example, wipe display w7a, w7b) is displayed on the first image display means. Wipe effect display) may be displayed,
At the end of the first wipe effect display, the first prefetch notice effect display may be started,
A game stand characterized by that.

(M2)
The game machine according to (M1) above,
By the first wipe effect display, the image (for example, a decorative pattern, a character string image of “sorry”, or a background image) in the first image display means is configured to be wiped off,
A game stand characterized by that.

(M3)
The game stand according to (M1) or (M2) above,
In the first reach effect display, after the display indicating the shift (for example, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” or the character string image of “sorry”) is displayed, , “Decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is configured so that the first wipe effect display may be displayed on the first image display means. ,
A game stand characterized by that.

(M4)
The gaming machine according to any one of (M1) to (M3),
Symbol display means (for example, left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214) capable of executing symbol variation display are provided.
A game stand characterized by that.

(M5)
When a display suggesting a shift is displayed in the first reach effect display, a third wipe effect display (for example, a wipe effect display of the wipe display w11a) is displayed on the first image display means. There is
At the end of the third wipe effect display, the first prefetch notice effect display may be started,
By the third wipe effect display, the image in the first image display means is configured to be wiped out.
A game stand characterized by that.

(M6)
The gaming machine according to (M5) above,
In the first reach effect display, after the display indicating the shift (for example, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” or the character string image of “sorry”) is displayed, , “Decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is configured so that the third wipe effect display may be displayed on the first image display means. ,

(M7)
The game stand according to (M5) or (M6) above,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a third reach effect display (for example, a normal reach effect display),
In the third reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift (for example, “fluctuation display of“ decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2 ”) is displayed, the symbol display means (eg,“ decoration 2 ”) is displayed on the symbol display means. The first wipe display is not displayed on the first image display means until the decoration 3 -decoration 2 ") is confirmed and displayed.
In the third reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift (for example, “fluctuation display of“ decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2 ”) is displayed, the symbol display means (eg,“ decoration 2 ”) is displayed on the symbol display means. The third wipe display is not displayed on the first image display means until the decoration 3-decoration 2 ") is confirmed and displayed.
The symbol variation display on which the first reach effect display is performed is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means than the symbol variation display on which the third reach effect display is performed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.

(M8)
The gaming machine according to (M7) above,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect displays is a second reach effect display (for example, a super reach effect display of drinking comparison shown in FIGS. 101 (d) to (d)),
In the second reach effect display, a display suggesting a shift (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is displayed, and an animation of a scene in which a man wins and the man is drunk in comparison with drinking is displayed. The first wipe display may be displayed on the first image display means before the deviated symbol form (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is displayed. Configured to not,
In the second reach effect display, a display suggesting a shift (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is displayed, and an animation of a scene in which a man wins and the man is drunk in comparison with drinking is displayed. The third wipe effect display may be displayed on the first image display means before the deviated symbol pattern (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is displayed. Configured to not,
The symbol variation display on which the second reach effect display is performed is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means than the symbol variation display on which the third reach effect display is performed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.

(M9)
The game stand according to any one of (M1) to (M8) above,
A second image display means (for example, a sub display device 1030) capable of displaying an image display;
The first image display means includes a first image display,
The second image display means includes a second image display,
The first image display means is configured without including the second image display,
The second image display means is configured without including the first image display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(M10)
The gaming machine according to (M9) above,
In the first reach effect display, a display that suggests a shift (for example, a part of a character image such as “sorry” or a part of a display that suggests a shift in the decorative design display device 208) is displayed. The second wipe display is configured to be displayed on the second image display means until the mode is fixedly displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(M11)
The game stand according to any one of (M1) to (M10) above,
The first look-ahead notice effect display is a character display (for example, a character image of a lord, a princess or a niece) that appears in a first animation display (for example, an animation of a hold change display),
The first animation display is an animation display that changes the mode of the hold icon to a pre-reading notice mode (for example, the face hold icon or the haniwa hold icon shown in FIG. 104).
A game stand characterized by that.

(M12)
The gaming machine according to any one of (M1) to (M11),
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a second look-ahead notice effect display (for example),
At the end of the first wipe effect display, the second pre-read notice effect display may be started,
A game stand characterized by that.

The gaming machine according to (M12) above,
The second look-ahead notice effect display is a character display that appears in the second animation display (for example, a character display of a shrine, a princess, or a spear)
The second animation display is an animation display (for example) that changes the mode of the hold icon to a pre-reading notice mode (for example, the face hold icon or the haniwa hold icon shown in FIG. 104).
A game stand characterized by that.

(N1)
A game machine comprising first image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying an image display,
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays (for example, a normal reach effect, a super reach effect, a notice effect display of the change, a pre-read notice effect display),
One effect display among the plurality of types of effect displays is a first reach effect display (for example, a super reach effect shown in FIGS. 103 (c) to 103 (g) and FIGS. 103 (C) to 103 (G)). Super reach production)
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a first jackpot notice effect display (for example, a notice effect display of the change by the notice image j1 shown in FIGS. 103 (j) to (l)), or FIG. (J) to (l) the notice image of the change by the notice image j2 shown in FIG.
In the first reach effect display, after the display indicating the shift (for example, the display of the fluctuation variation of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” or the animation of a scene in which Tono loses the confrontation) is displayed, In one image display means, a first wipe effect display (for example, wipe display w7a and w7b shown in FIGS. 103 (h) to (j)) may be displayed.
At the end of the first wipe effect display, the first jackpot notice effect display may be started,
A game stand characterized by that.

(N2)
The game stand according to (N1) above,
By the first wipe effect display, the image (for example, a decorative pattern, a character string image of “sorry”, or a background image) in the first image display means is configured to be wiped off,
A game stand characterized by that.

(N3)
The game stand according to (N1) or (N2) above,
In the first reach effect display, after the display indicating the shift (for example, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” or the character string image of “sorry”) is displayed, , “Decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is configured so that the first wipe effect display may be displayed on the first image display means. ,
A game stand characterized by that.

(N4)
The gaming machine according to any one of (M1) to (M3),
Symbol display means (for example, left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214) capable of executing symbol variation display are provided.
A game stand characterized by that.

(N5)
After the display indicating the shift is displayed in the first reach effect display, a third wipe effect display (for example, wipe effect display of wipe display w9a, w9b) is displayed on the first image display means. There is a case,
At the end of the third wipe effect display, the first jackpot notice effect display (for example, the notice image j2) may be started,
By the third wipe effect display, the image in the first image display means is configured to be wiped out.
A game stand characterized by that.

(N6)
The game stand according to (N5) above,
In the first reach effect display, after the display indicating the shift (for example, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” or the character string image of “sorry”) is displayed, , “Decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is configured so that the third wipe effect display may be displayed on the first image display means. ,

(N7)
The game stand according to (N5) or (N6) above,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a third reach effect display (for example, a normal reach effect display),
In the third reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift (for example, “fluctuation display of“ decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2 ”) is displayed, the symbol display means (eg,“ decoration 2 ”) is displayed on the symbol display means. The first wipe display is not displayed on the first image display means until the decoration 3 -decoration 2 ") is confirmed and displayed.
In the third reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift (for example, “fluctuation display of“ decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2 ”) is displayed, the symbol display means (eg,“ decoration 2 ”) is displayed on the symbol display means. The third wipe display is not displayed on the first image display means until the decoration 3-decoration 2 ") is confirmed and displayed.
The symbol variation display on which the first reach effect display is performed is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means than the symbol variation display on which the third reach effect display is performed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.

(N8)
The game stand according to (N7) above,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect displays is a second reach effect display (for example, a super reach effect display of drinking comparison shown in FIGS. 101 (d) to (d)),
In the second reach effect display, a display suggesting a shift (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is displayed, and an animation of a scene in which a man wins and the man is drunk in comparison with drinking is displayed. The first wipe display may be displayed on the first image display means before the deviated symbol form (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is displayed. Configured to not,
In the second reach effect display, a display suggesting a shift (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is displayed, and an animation of a scene in which a man wins and the man is drunk in comparison with drinking is displayed. The third wipe effect display may be displayed on the first image display means before the deviated symbol pattern (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is displayed. Configured to not,
The symbol variation display on which the second reach effect display is performed is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means than the symbol variation display on which the third reach effect display is performed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.

(N9)
The game stand according to any one of (N1) to (N8) above,
A second image display means (for example, a sub display device 1030) capable of displaying an image display;
The first image display means includes a first image display,
The second image display means includes a second image display,
The first image display means is configured without including the second image display,
The second image display means is configured without including the first image display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(N10)
The game stand according to (N9) above,
In the first reach effect display, a display that suggests a shift (for example, a part of a character image such as “sorry” or a part of a display that suggests a shift in the decorative design display device 208) is displayed. The second wipe display is configured to be displayed on the second image display means until the mode is fixedly displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(N11)
The game stand according to any one of (N1) to (N10) above,
When the first jackpot notice effect display is displayed, the symbol pattern display (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” or “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration”) is finally displayed in the symbol variation display being executed. 3 ”) may be displayed in a fixed manner.
A game stand characterized by that.

(N12)
The game stand according to any one of (N1) to (N11) above,
When the first jackpot notice effect display is displayed, the currently displayed pattern variation display is finally deviated from the symbol pattern (for example, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” or “decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration”. 3 ”) may be displayed in a fixed manner.
A game stand characterized by that.

(N13)
The game stand according to any one of (N1) to (N12) above,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a second jackpot notice effect display (for example, a notice effect display for determining the jackpot of a golden family crest image),
At the end of the first wipe effect display, the second jackpot notice effect display may be started,
A game stand characterized by that.

(N14)
The game stand according to (N13) above,
When the second jackpot notice effect display is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed in the symbol variation display during execution.
A game stand characterized by that.

(O1)
A game machine comprising first image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying an image display,
The first image display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a first reach effect display,
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect adjustment screens (for example, volume adjustment display j6 and BGM setting display j7),
In the first reach effect display, after the display indicating the shift (for example, the fluctuation variation display of the off symbol pattern) is displayed, the first image display means displays the first wipe effect display (for example, the wipe display). w7a, w7b wipe effect display) may be displayed,
In the first wipe effect display, the effect adjustment screen may start to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(O2)
The game stand according to (O1) above,
By the first wipe effect display, the image (for example, a decorative pattern, a character string image of “sorry”, or a background image) in the first image display means is configured to be wiped off,
A game stand characterized by that.

(O3)
The game table according to (O1) or (O2) above,
In the first reach effect display, after the display indicating the shift (for example, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” or the character string image of “sorry”) is displayed, , “Decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is configured so that the first wipe effect display may be displayed on the first image display means. ,
A game stand characterized by that.

(O4)
The game stand according to any one of (O1) to (O3) above,
Symbol display means (for example, left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214) capable of executing symbol variation display are provided.
A game stand characterized by that.

(O5)
After the display indicating the shift is displayed in the first reach effect display, a third wipe effect display (for example, wipe effect display of wipe display w9a, w9b) is displayed on the first image display means. There is a case,
By the third wipe effect display, the image in the first image display means is configured to be wiped out.
A game stand characterized by that.

(O6)
The game table according to (O5) above,
In the first reach effect display, after the display indicating the shift (for example, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” or the character string image of “sorry”) is displayed, , “Decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is configured so that the third wipe effect display may be displayed on the first image display means. ,

(O7)
The game stand according to (O5) or (O6) above,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a third reach effect display (for example, a normal reach effect display),
In the third reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift (for example, “fluctuation display of“ decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2 ”) is displayed, the symbol display means (eg,“ decoration 2 ”) is displayed on the symbol display means. The first wipe display is not displayed on the first image display means until the decoration 3 -decoration 2 ") is confirmed and displayed.
In the third reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift (for example, “fluctuation display of“ decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2 ”) is displayed, the symbol display means (eg,“ decoration 2 ”) is displayed on the symbol display means. The third wipe display is not displayed on the first image display means until the decoration 3-decoration 2 ") is confirmed and displayed.
The symbol variation display on which the first reach effect display is performed is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means than the symbol variation display on which the third reach effect display is performed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.

(O8)
The game stand according to (O7) above,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect displays is a second reach effect display (for example, a super reach effect display of drinking comparison shown in FIGS. 101 (d) to (d)),
In the second reach effect display, a display suggesting a shift (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is displayed, and an animation of a scene in which a man wins and the man is drunk in comparison with drinking is displayed. The first wipe display may be displayed on the first image display means before the deviated symbol form (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is displayed. Configured to not,
In the second reach effect display, a display suggesting a shift (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is displayed, and an animation of a scene in which a man wins and the man is drunk in comparison with drinking is displayed. The third wipe effect display may be displayed on the first image display means before the deviated symbol pattern (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is displayed. Configured to not,
The symbol variation display on which the second reach effect display is performed is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means than the symbol variation display on which the third reach effect display is performed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.

(O9)
The game stand according to any one of (O1) to (O8) above,
A second image display means (for example, a sub display device 1030) capable of displaying an image display;
The first image display means includes a first image display,
The second image display means includes a second image display,
The first image display means is configured without including the second image display,
The second image display means is configured without including the first image display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(O10)
The game table according to (O9) above,
In the first reach effect display, a display that suggests a shift (for example, a part of a character image such as “sorry” or a part of a display that suggests a shift in the decorative design display device 208) is displayed. The second wipe display is configured to be displayed on the second image display means until the mode is fixedly displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(P1)
A game machine comprising first image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying an image display,
The first image display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a first reach effect display,
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect adjustment screens (for example, volume adjustment display j6 and BGM setting display j7),
One display of the plurality of types of effect adjustment screens is a first effect adjustment screen (for example, volume adjustment display j6),
One display of the plurality of types of effect adjustment screens is a second effect adjustment screen (for example, BGM setting display j7),
In the first reach effect display, after the display indicating the shift (for example, the fluctuation variation display of the off symbol pattern) is displayed, the first image display means displays the first wipe effect display (for example, the wipe display). w7a, w7b wipe effect display) may be displayed,
In the first wipe effect display, the first effect adjustment screen may be displayed.
In the first wipe effect display, the second effect adjustment screen is not started to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(P2)
It is a gaming machine described in (P1) above,
By the first wipe effect display, the image (for example, a decorative pattern, a character string image of “sorry”, or a background image) in the first image display means is configured to be wiped off,
A game stand characterized by that.

(P3)
The game stand according to (P1) or (P2) above,
In the first reach effect display, after the display indicating the shift (for example, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” or the character string image of “sorry”) is displayed, , “Decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is configured so that the first wipe effect display may be displayed on the first image display means. ,
A game stand characterized by that.

(P4)
The game stand according to any one of (P1) to (P3) above,
Symbol display means (for example, left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214) capable of executing symbol variation display are provided.
A game stand characterized by that.

(P5)
After the display indicating the shift is displayed in the first reach effect display, a third wipe effect display (for example, wipe effect display of wipe display w9a, w9b) is displayed on the first image display means. There is a case,
By the third wipe effect display, the image in the first image display means is configured to be wiped out.
A game stand characterized by that.

(P6)
It is a gaming machine described in (P5) above,
In the first reach effect display, after the display indicating the shift (for example, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” or the character string image of “sorry”) is displayed, , “Decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is configured so that the third wipe effect display may be displayed on the first image display means. ,

(P7)
The game stand according to (P5) or (P6) above,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a third reach effect display (for example, a normal reach effect display),
In the third reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift (for example, “fluctuation display of“ decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2 ”) is displayed, the symbol display means (eg,“ decoration 2 ”) is displayed on the symbol display means. The first wipe display is not displayed on the first image display means until the decoration 3 -decoration 2 ") is confirmed and displayed.
In the third reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift (for example, “fluctuation display of“ decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2 ”) is displayed, the symbol display means (eg,“ decoration 2 ”) is displayed on the symbol display means. The third wipe display is not displayed on the first image display means until the decoration 3-decoration 2 ") is confirmed and displayed.
The symbol variation display on which the first reach effect display is performed is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means than the symbol variation display on which the third reach effect display is performed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.

(P8)
It is a gaming machine described in (P7) above,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect displays is a second reach effect display (for example, a super reach effect display of drinking comparison shown in FIGS. 101 (d) to (d)),
In the second reach effect display, a display suggesting a shift (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is displayed, and an animation of a scene in which a man wins and the man is drunk in comparison with drinking is displayed. The first wipe display may be displayed on the first image display means before the deviated symbol form (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is displayed. Configured to not,
In the second reach effect display, a display suggesting a shift (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is displayed, and an animation of a scene in which a man wins and the man is drunk in comparison with drinking is displayed. The third wipe effect display may be displayed on the first image display means before the deviated symbol pattern (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is displayed. Configured to not,
The symbol variation display on which the second reach effect display is performed is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means than the symbol variation display on which the third reach effect display is performed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.

(P9)
The game stand according to any one of (P1) to (P8) above,
A second image display means (for example, a sub display device 1030) capable of displaying an image display;
The first image display means includes a first image display,
The second image display means includes a second image display,
The first image display means is configured without including the second image display,
The second image display means is configured without including the first image display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(P10)
It is a gaming machine described in (P9) above,
In the first reach effect display, a display that suggests a shift (for example, a part of a character image such as “sorry” or a part of a display that suggests a shift in the decorative design display device 208) is displayed. The second wipe display is configured to be displayed on the second image display means until the mode is fixedly displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Q1)
Operation means (for example, chance button 136, setting operation unit 137);
First image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying an image display;
A game machine equipped with
When the operation means is operated during display of a screen requesting operation of the operation means, a response display (for example, a button hold icon shown in FIG. 117 (k) changes in the first image display means. Hold change display) can be displayed,
In the first reach effect display, after the display indicating the shift (for example, the fluctuation variation display of the off symbol pattern) is displayed, the first image display means displays the first wipe effect display (for example, the wipe display). (wipe effect display by w7a, w7b) may be displayed,
The response display may be performed during execution of the first wipe effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Q2)
The game stand according to (Q1) above,
By the first wipe effect display, the image (for example, a decorative pattern, a character string image of “sorry”, or a background image) in the first image display means is configured to be wiped off,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Q3)
The game stand according to (Q1) or (Q2) above,
In the first reach effect display, after the display indicating the shift (for example, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” or the character string image of “sorry”) is displayed, , “Decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is configured so that the first wipe effect display may be displayed on the first image display means. ,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Q4)
The game stand according to any one of (Q1) to (Q3) above,
Symbol display means (for example, left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214) capable of executing symbol variation display are provided.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Q5)
After the display indicating the shift is displayed in the first reach effect display, a third wipe effect display (for example, wipe effect display of wipe display w9a, w9b) is displayed on the first image display means. There is a case,
By the third wipe effect display, the image in the first image display means is configured to be wiped out.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Q6)
The game stand according to (Q5) above,
In the first reach effect display, after the display indicating the shift (for example, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” or the character string image of “sorry”) is displayed, , “Decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is configured so that the third wipe effect display may be displayed on the first image display means. ,

(Q7)
The game stand according to (Q5) or (Q6) above,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a third reach effect display (for example, a normal reach effect display),
In the third reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift (for example, “fluctuation display of“ decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2 ”) is displayed, the symbol display means (eg,“ decoration 2 ”) is displayed on the symbol display means. The first wipe display is not displayed on the first image display means until the decoration 3 -decoration 2 ") is confirmed and displayed.
In the third reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift (for example, “fluctuation display of“ decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2 ”) is displayed, the symbol display means (eg,“ decoration 2 ”) is displayed on the symbol display means. The third wipe display is not displayed on the first image display means until the decoration 3-decoration 2 ") is confirmed and displayed.
The symbol variation display on which the first reach effect display is performed is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means than the symbol variation display on which the third reach effect display is performed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Q8)
The game stand according to (Q7) above,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect displays is a second reach effect display (for example, a super reach effect display of drinking comparison shown in FIGS. 101 (d) to (d)),
In the second reach effect display, a display suggesting a shift (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is displayed, and an animation of a scene in which a man wins and the man is drunk in comparison with drinking is displayed. The first wipe display may be displayed on the first image display means before the deviated symbol form (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is displayed. Configured to not,
In the second reach effect display, a display suggesting a shift (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is displayed, and an animation of a scene in which a man wins and the man is drunk in comparison with drinking is displayed. The third wipe effect display may be displayed on the first image display means before the deviated symbol pattern (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is displayed. Configured to not,
The symbol variation display on which the second reach effect display is performed is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means than the symbol variation display on which the third reach effect display is performed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Q9)
The game stand according to any one of (Q1) to (Q8) above,
A second image display means (for example, a sub display device 1030) capable of displaying an image display;
The first image display means includes a first image display,
The second image display means includes a second image display,
The first image display means is configured without including the second image display,
The second image display means is configured without including the first image display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Q10)
The game stand according to (Q9) above,
In the first reach effect display, a display that suggests a shift (for example, a part of a character image such as “sorry” or a part of a display that suggests a shift in the decorative design display device 208) is displayed. The second wipe display is configured to be displayed on the second image display means until the mode is fixedly displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(R1)
First image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying an image display;
A movable body for production (for example, movable body 1010);
A game machine equipped with
The first image display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a first reach effect display,
After the display indicating the shift is displayed in the first reach effect display, the first image display means displays the first wipe effect display (for example, the wipe effect display by the wipe displays w7a and w7b). There is a case,
In some cases, at least a part of the wipe effect display is overlapped with the effect movable body (see, for example, FIG. 137 (i)).
A game stand characterized by that.

(R2)
The game stand according to (R1) above,
In the first reach effect display, the effect movable body is configured to operate (see, for example, FIGS. 137 (e) to (k)).
A game stand characterized by that.

(R3)
The game stand according to (R1) or (R2) above,
By the first wipe effect display, the image (for example, a decorative pattern, a character string image of “sorry”, or a background image) in the first image display means is configured to be wiped off,
A game stand characterized by that.

(R4)
The game stand according to any one of (R1) to (R3) above,
In the first reach effect display, after the display indicating the shift (for example, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” or the character string image of “sorry”) is displayed, , “Decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is configured so that the first wipe effect display may be displayed on the first image display means. ,
A game stand characterized by that.

(R5)
The game stand according to any one of (R1) to (R4) above,
Symbol display means (for example, left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214) capable of executing symbol variation display are provided.
A game stand characterized by that.

(R6)
After the display indicating the shift is displayed in the first reach effect display, a third wipe effect display (for example, wipe effect display of wipe display w9a, w9b) is displayed on the first image display means. There is a case,
By the third wipe effect display, the image in the first image display means is configured to be wiped out.
A game stand characterized by that.

(R7)
The game stand according to (R6) above,
In the first reach effect display, after the display indicating the shift (for example, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” or the character string image of “sorry”) is displayed, , “Decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is configured so that the third wipe effect display may be displayed on the first image display means. ,

(R8)
The game stand according to (R6) or (R7) above,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a third reach effect display (for example, a normal reach effect display),
In the third reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift (for example, “fluctuation display of“ decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2 ”) is displayed, the symbol display means (eg,“ decoration 2 ”) is displayed on the symbol display means. The first wipe display is not displayed on the first image display means until the decoration 3 -decoration 2 ") is confirmed and displayed.
In the third reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift (for example, “fluctuation display of“ decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2 ”) is displayed, the symbol display means (eg,“ decoration 2 ”) is displayed on the symbol display means. The third wipe display is not displayed on the first image display means until the decoration 3-decoration 2 ") is confirmed and displayed.
The symbol variation display on which the first reach effect display is performed is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means than the symbol variation display on which the third reach effect display is performed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.

(R9)
The game stand according to (R8) above,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect displays is a second reach effect display (for example, a super reach effect display of drinking comparison shown in FIGS. 101 (d) to (d)),
In the second reach effect display, a display suggesting a shift (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is displayed, and an animation of a scene in which a man wins and the man is drunk in comparison with drinking is displayed. The first wipe display may be displayed on the first image display means before the deviated symbol form (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is displayed. Configured to not,
In the second reach effect display, a display suggesting a shift (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is displayed, and an animation of a scene in which a man wins and the man is drunk in comparison with drinking is displayed. The third wipe effect display may be displayed on the first image display means before the deviated symbol pattern (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is displayed. Configured to not,
The symbol variation display on which the second reach effect display is performed is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means than the symbol variation display on which the third reach effect display is performed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.

(R10)
The game stand according to any one of (R1) to (R9) above,
A second image display means (for example, a sub display device 1030) capable of displaying an image display;
The first image display means includes a first image display,
The second image display means includes a second image display,
The first image display means is configured without including the second image display,
The second image display means is configured without including the first image display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(S1)
A game machine comprising first image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying an image display,
The first image display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
In the first timing, the first image display means may start displaying the first wipe effect display (for example, wipe display w7a, w7b wipe effect display),
The first timing is a timing after a big hit (for example, a big hit game) is started (see, for example, FIG. 142 (g)).
The first timing is the timing before the symbol variation display is started (see, for example, FIG. 143 (c)).
A game stand characterized by that.

(S2)
The gaming machine according to (S1) above,
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a first reach effect display (for example, a super reach effect display),
The first wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means after the display indicating the shift is displayed in the first reach effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(S3)
The game stand according to (S2) above,
In the first reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means after the display suggesting the shift is displayed until the dismissed symbol form is confirmed and displayed. Configured to be the case,
A game stand characterized by that.

(S4)
The game stand according to any one of (S1) to (S3) above,
By the first wipe effect display, the image in the first image display means is configured to be wiped out.
A game stand characterized by that.

(S5)
The game stand according to any one of (S1) to (S4) above,
In the first timing, the display of the third wipe effect display (for example, wipe display 15) may be started in the first image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(S6)
The game stand according to (S5) above,
By the third wipe effect display, the image in the first image display means is configured to be wiped out.
A game stand characterized by that.

(S7)
The game stand according to any one of (S1) to (S6),
A second image display means (for example, a sub display device 1030) capable of displaying an image display;
The first image display means includes a first image display,
The second image display means includes a second image display,
The first image display means is configured without including the second image display,
The second image display means is configured without including the first image display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(S8)
The game stand according to any one of (S1) to (S7),
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.

(T1)
A gaming machine comprising first image display means capable of displaying an image display,
The first image display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
The first image display means is means provided with a hold display means capable of informing the number of holds,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a first reach effect display,
In the first reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift is displayed, the first wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means,
After the first wipe effect display is ended, the display of the hold display means that was not displayed may be started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(T2)
A gaming machine according to (T1) above,
By the first wipe effect display, the image (for example, a decorative pattern, a character string image of “sorry”, or a background image) in the first image display means is configured to be wiped off,
A game stand characterized by that.

(T3)
The game table according to (T1) or (T2) above,
In the first reach effect display, after the display indicating the shift (for example, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” or the character string image of “sorry”) is displayed, , “Decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is configured so that the first wipe effect display may be displayed on the first image display means. ,
A game stand characterized by that.

(T4)
The game stand according to any one of (T1) to (T3) above,
Symbol display means (for example, left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214) capable of executing symbol variation display are provided.
A game stand characterized by that.

(T5)
After the display indicating the shift is displayed in the first reach effect display, a third wipe effect display (for example, wipe effect display of wipe display w9a, w9b) is displayed on the first image display means. There is a case,
By the third wipe effect display, the image in the first image display means is configured to be wiped out.
A game stand characterized by that.

(T6)
The game stand according to (T5) above,
In the first reach effect display, after the display indicating the shift (for example, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” or the character string image of “sorry”) is displayed, , “Decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is configured so that the third wipe effect display may be displayed on the first image display means. ,

(T7)
The game table according to (T5) or (T6) above,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a third reach effect display (for example, a normal reach effect display),
In the third reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift (for example, “fluctuation display of“ decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2 ”) is displayed, the symbol display means (eg,“ decoration 2 ”) is displayed on the symbol display means. The first wipe display is not displayed on the first image display means until the decoration 3 -decoration 2 ") is confirmed and displayed.
In the third reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift (for example, “fluctuation display of“ decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2 ”) is displayed, the symbol display means (eg,“ decoration 2 ”) is displayed on the symbol display means. The third wipe display is not displayed on the first image display means until the decoration 3-decoration 2 ") is confirmed and displayed.
The symbol variation display on which the first reach effect display is performed is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means than the symbol variation display on which the third reach effect display is performed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.

(T8)
It is a gaming machine described in (T7) above,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect displays is a second reach effect display (for example, a super reach effect display of drinking comparison shown in FIGS. 101 (d) to (d)),
In the second reach effect display, a display suggesting a shift (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is displayed, and an animation of a scene in which a man wins and the man is drunk in comparison with drinking is displayed. The first wipe display may be displayed on the first image display means before the deviated symbol form (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is displayed. Configured to not,
In the second reach effect display, a display suggesting a shift (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is displayed, and an animation of a scene in which a man wins and the man is drunk in comparison with drinking is displayed. The third wipe effect display may be displayed on the first image display means before the deviated symbol pattern (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”) is displayed. Configured to not,
The symbol variation display on which the second reach effect display is performed is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means than the symbol variation display on which the third reach effect display is performed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.

(T9)
The game stand according to any one of (T1) to (T8) above,
A second image display means (for example, a sub display device 1030) capable of displaying an image display;
The first image display means includes a first image display,
The second image display means includes a second image display,
The first image display means is configured without including the second image display,
The second image display means is configured without including the first image display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(T10)
The game stand according to (T9) above,
In the first reach effect display, a display that suggests a shift (for example, a part of a character image such as “sorry” or a part of a display that suggests a shift in the decorative design display device 208) is displayed. The second wipe display is configured to be displayed on the second image display means until the mode is fixedly displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Part or all of the effect display shown in FIGS. 101 to 147 may be displayed on the sub display device 1030. The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIGS. 99 to 147 may be either a special figure 2 priority change machine or a start opening winning order change machine.

[Sixth Embodiment]
Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention is described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 175. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the same configuration and control system as the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment. The same components as those of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display the seven types of on-hold icons and the seven types of changing icons that are the same as the on-hold icons shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the decorative change display device 208 can execute the hold change effect display and the changing icon effect display). In the hold effect, there is a success effect in which the hold icon or the fluctuation icon in one display mode shown in FIG. 104 is changed to the hold icon or the fluctuation icon in another display mode shown in FIG. 104 or a failure effect in which the hold icon or the fluctuation icon does not change. Executed. Further, the big hit reliability of the hold icon is set so as to increase in the order of the white circle hold icon, the black circle hold icon, the button hold icon, the triangle hold icon, the face hold icon, and the Minowa hold icon.

  FIG. 149 is a table showing a list of holding effects. The table shown in FIG. 149 includes items of “name”, “target”, “mode α”, “appearance rate”, “mode β”, “progress rate”, and “success rate”. As shown in the “name” column in the figure, the holding effect is “white bird effect (W bird effect)”, “black bird effect (B bird effect)”, “black bird effect with button (B bird effect with button) ) ”,“ White bomber production (W bomber production) ”,“ Black bomber production (B bomber production) ”,“ White UFO production (WUFO production) ”,“ Black UFO production (BUFO) production ”7 Types of hold effects can be executed. In the following, “white bird effect” is referred to as “W bird effect”, “black bird effect” is referred to as “B bird effect”, “black bird effect with button” is referred to as “B bird effect with button”, and “ "White bomber production" is called "W bomber production", "Black bomber production" is called "B bomber production", "White UFO production" is called "WUFO production", and "Black UFO production" It is called “BUFO”.

  In the figure, the “object” column indicates a hold icon targeted by each hold effect. For example, “Hold 0” indicates the changing icon, and “Hold 4” indicates the hold icon corresponding to the fourth hold in the hold order. In the present embodiment, the hold icon and the changing icon in FIG. 1 are targeted for hold production, so “hold 4” is the hold icon corresponding to the fourth hold having the lowest hold order. Further, since the changing icon may be referred to as the hold icon, it may be simply referred to as a hold icon, and the changing icon display area may be referred to as a hold 0 display area. In FIG. 149, the changing icon is described as “Hold 0”. As shown in FIG. 149, the “target” of the W bird effect is “hold 0 to hold 4”, that is, the changing icon and the hold icon corresponding to the hold with the first hold to the hold with the fourth hold. Is a hold icon corresponding to. The “target” of the B bird effect is “hold 0 to hold 4”, that is, the changing icon and the hold icon corresponding to the hold with the first hold order to the hold icon corresponding to the hold with the fourth hold order. . The “target” of the B bird effect with a button is “hold 0 to hold 4”, that is, the changing icon and the hold icon corresponding to the hold with the first hold order to the hold icon corresponding to the hold with the fourth hold order. It is. The “target” of the W bomber effect is “hold 1 to hold 4”, that is, a hold icon corresponding to the first hold with the hold order to a hold icon corresponding to the fourth hold with the hold order. The “target” of the B bomber effect is “hold 1 to hold 4”, that is, the hold icon corresponding to the hold with the first hold order to the hold icon corresponding to the hold with the fourth hold order. The “target” of the WUFO effect is only “hold 0”, that is, the changing icon 0. The “target” of the BUFO effect is only “hold 0”, that is, the changing icon 0.

  In each hold effect, an image corresponding to each hold effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the W bird effect, a white bird image (hereinafter referred to as “W bird”), which is a white bird, is displayed. In the B bird effect, a black bird image (hereinafter referred to as “B bird”) which is a black bird (indicated by cross hatching in the figure) is displayed. In the B bird effect with button, a B bird (hereinafter referred to as “B bird with button”) on which a button image imitating the chance button 136 is displayed. In the W bomber production, a white bomber image (hereinafter referred to as “W bomber”) that is a white bomber is displayed. In the B bomber effect, a black bomber image (hereinafter referred to as “B bomber”) which is a black bomber (indicated by cross hatching in the drawing) is displayed. In the WUFO effect, a white UFO image (hereinafter referred to as “WUFO”) is displayed. In the BUFO effect, a black UFO image (hereinafter referred to as “BUFO”) is displayed (indicated by cross hatching in the figure).

  The column of “mode α” in the figure shows the display mode of the first stage of each holding effect. The “aspect α” of the W bird effect is an aspect in which the W bird moves to the left. The “mode α” of the B bird effect is a mode in which the B bird moves to the left. The “mode α” of the B bird effect with button is a mode in which the B bird with button moves to the left. The “mode α” of the W bomber effect is a mode in which the W bomber moves to the left. The “mode α” of the B bomber effect is a mode in which the B bomber moves to the left. The “mode α” of the WUFO effect is a mode in which the WUFO moves to the left. The “mode α” of the BUFO effect is a mode in which the BUFO moves to the left.

  The column “appearance rate” in the figure indicates the appearance rate of each reserved effect. Appearance rates are expressed as A, B, C, D, E, and F in descending order. As shown in FIG. 149, the “appearance rate” of the W bird effect is “A”, the “appearance rate” of the B bird effect is “C”, and the “appearance rate” of the B bird effect with a button is “C”. The “appearance rate” of the W bomber directing is “B”, the “appearance rate” of the B bomber directing is “D”, and the “appearance rate” of the WUFO directing is “E”, The “appearance rate” of the BUFO effect is “F”. That is, the appearance rate of each holding effect is, in descending order, W bird effect, W bomber effect, B bird effect, B bird effect with buttons, B bomber effect, WUFO effect, and BUFO effect.

  In the figure, the column “mode β” indicates the display mode of the second stage that can be displayed next to “mode α” in each holding effect. Each holding effect may progress from “aspect α” to “aspect β” with a predetermined probability and may not progress from “aspect α” to “aspect β”. The “mode β” of the W bird effect is a mode in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the W bird. The “mode β” of the B bird effect is a mode in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird. The “mode β” of the B bird effect with a button is a mode in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird. The “aspect β” of the B bird effect with a button and the “aspect β” of the B bird effect are the same. The “mode β” of the bomber effect is a mode in which a missile is launched from the W bomber. The “mode β” of the B bomber effect is a mode in which a missile is fired from the B bomber. The “mode β” of WUFO production is a mode in which a mysterious light beam is irradiated from WUFO. The “mode β” of the BUFO effect is a mode in which a mysterious light beam is emitted from the BUFO.

  In the figure, the “progress rate” column indicates the progress rate from “mode α” to “mode β” of each holding effect. Appearance rates are expressed as premium, A, B, C, D, E in descending order. As shown in FIG. 149, the “advance rate” of the W bird effect is “D”, the “advance rate” of the B bird effect is “B”, and the “advance rate” of the B bird effect with a button is “B”. , “Progress rate” for W bomber directing is “E”, “Progress rate” for B bomber directing is “C”, and “Progress rate” for WUFO directing is “A”, The “progress rate” of the BUFO production is “premium”. That is, the appearance rate of each hold effect is, in descending order, a BUFO effect, a WUHO effect, a B bird effect, a B bird effect with buttons, a B bomber effect, a W bomber effect, and a W bird effect. “Premium” indicates that the progress rate is 100%, and the BUFO effect for the changing icon is set to always progress from “mode α” to “mode β”.

  The column of “success rate” in the figure indicates the probability that a success effect in which the hold icon or the changing icon due to each hold effect changes is executed. The success rate is expressed as premium, A, B, C, D in descending order. As shown in FIG. 149, the “success rate” of the W bird effect is “D”, the “success rate” of the B bird effect is “B”, and the “success rate” of the B bird effect with a button is “B”. "The success rate" of the W bomber directing is "C", the "success rate" of the B bomber directing is "A", and the "success rate" of the WUFO directing is "A" The “success rate” of BUFO production is “premium”. That is, the success rate of each holding effect is, in descending order, BUFO effect, WUHO effect and B bomber effect, B bird effect and B bird effect with button, B bomber effect, W bomber effect, and W bird effect. “Premium” indicates that the success rate is 100%, and the BUFO effect targeting the changing icon is set so that the success effect is always performed.

Example 1
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 150 (a) to 150 (p) show an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 150A to 150P, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 150 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the fluctuation fluctuation display of the decorative symbol in the off symbol mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol, is displayed in a fluctuation manner (temporary stop display) in a display manner that swings to the left and right. . Further, in the state at the time point shown in FIG. 150 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. A hold icon b1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area corresponding to the hold with the first hold order. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon shown in FIG. The white circle hold icon is a default hold icon. Above the special figure 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon display area (hold 0 display area) for displaying a changing icon is provided. As shown in FIG. 150 (a), a changing icon a1 having a display mode of a white circle pending icon is displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon of the display mode of the white circle pending icon is a default changing icon. The changing icon a1 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an empty background image.

  FIG. 150 (b) shows a state where the changing icon a1 is deleted. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 to 208c, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” which is an outlier symbol mode is displayed. In this example, the changing icon is erased during the fluctuation change display of the decorative symbol in the off-pattern mode.

  FIG. 150 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol pattern, is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the determination result of the special symbol 1 fluctuation display is incorrect. Yes.

  FIG. 150 (d) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation between the hold / change icons is displayed. Is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a2. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. The changing icon may be enlarged during the movement to the changing icon display area, or may be enlarged after the movement to the changing icon display area is completed.

  FIG. 150E shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In addition, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 150 (e), during the special figure 1 variable game, one game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special figure 1 hold is increased by 1, and the hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The hold icon b2 is a black circle hold icon shown in FIG.

  FIG. 150F shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 150 (f), during the special figure 1 variable game, one game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special figure 1 hold increases by 1 and the number of holds is 2. The hold icon b3 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The hold 2 display area is an area in which a hold icon corresponding to the hold with the second hold order is displayed, and the hold icon b3 is a white circle hold icon shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 150 (g), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 3”, which is a shifted symbol pattern, is displayed in the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A state in which the fluctuation fluctuation is displayed in a manner of shaking is shown.

  FIG. 150 (h) shows a state in which “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 3”, which is a shifted symbol form, is displayed in a swinging manner in a manner that it swings left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 150 (i) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 3”, which is an outlier design, is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is wrong. Yes.

  FIG. 150 (j) shows a state in which the hold of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a3. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

  FIG. 150 (k) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 150 (l) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 150 (m), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 3-decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is a shifted symbol pattern, is displayed in the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A state in which the fluctuation fluctuation is displayed in a manner of shaking is shown.

  FIG. 150 (n) shows a state where the changing icon a <b> 3 is erased during the shaking change display of “decoration 3−decoration 3−decoration 2”. The changing icon is erased while the fluctuation change display of the decorative symbol in the off-symbol pattern mode is displayed.

  FIG. 150 (o) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 2”, which is an off symbol pattern, is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is incorrect. Yes.

  FIG. 150 (p) shows a state in which the hold of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation between the hold / change icons is displayed. Is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b3 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed as the changing icon a4 in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a4 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

  In the present embodiment, a black circle hold icon is displayed when one game ball wins a special figure 1 starting port 230 during a certain symbol variation display and the hold increases (see FIG. 150 (e)). In the symbol variation display that starts after the hold corresponding to the black circle hold icon is digested, the shift symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. As described above, there is a case where the hold effect for one certain hold icon (the hold icon b2 in this example) is not performed.

(Example 2)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 150 (A) to (M) show an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 150A to 150M show the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 150A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 150 (A), the number of holdings in FIG. 1 is 2, and the number of holdings in FIG. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area at the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Is displayed. The hold icon b1 is a black circle hold icon, and the hold icon b2 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

  FIG. 150 (B) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect that does not target any of the on-hold icons and the changing icons.

  FIG. 150C shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which the B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. B bird k2 is displayed overlapping the decorative symbol display. In this way, the hold effect is displayed with priority over the variation display of the decorative symbol. In addition, W bird k1, B bird k3 with button, W bomber k4, B bomber k5, WUFOk6, and BUFOk7, which will be described later, are displayed in an overlapping manner with the decorative symbol variation display.

  FIG. 150D shows a state immediately before the B bird effect is ended without the B bird effect progressing from the “mode α” shown in FIG. 149 to the “mode β”. B bird k2 is erased in such a manner that it disappears above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 150E, after the B bird k2 is deleted and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state.

  In FIG. 150 (F), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 3-decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a shifted symbol pattern, is displayed in the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A state where temporary stop display (swing fluctuation display) is performed in such a manner that it swings is shown.

  FIG. 150 (G) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a1 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 150 (H) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a2. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

  FIG. 150 (I) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 150J, “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 3”, which is a shifted symbol pattern, is displayed in the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The state of the fluctuation fluctuation display (temporary stop display) is shown in a manner of shaking.

  FIG. 150 (K) shows a state in which the changing icon a3 is erased during the shaking change display of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 3” (in the temporary stop table). The changing icon is erased during the fluctuation change display (temporary stop display) of the decorative pattern in the off-pattern form.

  FIG. 150 (L) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 3”, which is an outlier design, is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is wrong. Yes.

  FIG. 150 (M) shows a state in which the hold of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation between the hold / change icons is displayed. Is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a3. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

  In the present embodiment, the mode α of the B bird effect was performed, but the progress corresponding to the black circle hold icon displayed when the B bird effect was performed is not digested (development) until the mode β is performed. The symbol variation display started and the symbol pattern display is confirmed. The B bird effect in this example does not target any on-hold icons and changing icons including the black circle on-hold icon. In this way, the B bird effect is provided with a failure effect that does not proceed to the mode β without targeting any of the on-hold icons and the changing icons.

(Example 3)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 (1a) to (1g). 151 (1a) to (1g) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 151 (1a) to (1g), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 151 (1a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 151 (1a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area at the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Is displayed. The hold icon b1 is a black circle hold icon, and the hold icon b2 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

  FIG. 151 (1b) shows a state in which the W bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which W bird k1 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. A mode when W bird k1 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of W Bird k1 is the start of W Bird production. The W bird effect in this example is an effect that does not target any on-hold icon or changing icon.

  FIG. 151 (1c) shows a state in which a W bird effect is being performed. An animation in which the W bird k1 moves to the left is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  151 (1d) shows a state immediately before the W bird effect is ended without the W bird effect having progressed from the “mode α” to the “mode β” shown in FIG. The W bird k1 is erased in such a manner that it disappears above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 151 (1e), after the W bird k1 is deleted in the state α and the W bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then in the right symbol display area 208c. The “decoration 2” is in a temporarily stopped display state.

  In FIG. 151 (1f), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” which is a shifted symbol pattern is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A state where temporary stop display (swing fluctuation display) is performed in such a manner that it swings is shown.

  FIG. 151 (1g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a1 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, the hold corresponding to the hold icon b1 which is the black circle hold icon is digested, and the special figure 1 variable game is started. The success / failure determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place, and when the special figure 1 variable game is finished, the left and right right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed with the decorative symbols which are out of the pattern form.

  In the present embodiment, the aspect α of the W bird effect is performed, but does not proceed (develop) to the aspect β, and is displayed when the W bird effect is finished while the aspect α is finished and the W bird effect is performed. In the symbol variation display that is started after the hold corresponding to the black circle hold icon is digested, the shifted symbol form is confirmed and displayed. The W bird effect in this example does not target any on-hold icons and changing icons including the black circle on-hold icon. In this way, the W bird effect is provided with a failure effect that does not proceed to the aspect β without targeting any on-hold icon and changing icon.

Example 4
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 4 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 (2a) to (2g). 151 (2a) to (2g) show an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 151 (2a) to 151 (2g), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 151 (2a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 151 (2a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area at the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Is displayed. The hold icon b1 is a black circle hold icon, and the hold icon b2 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

  FIG. 151 (2b) shows a state in which the W bomber effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which the W bomber k4 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when the W bomber k4 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The appearance of the W bomber k4 is the start of the W bomber production. The W bomber effect in this example is an effect that does not target any hold icon or changing icon.

  FIG. 151 (2c) shows a state in which the W bomber effect is being performed. An animation in which the W bomber k4 moves to the left is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  151 (2d) shows a state immediately before the W bomber effect is ended without the W bomber effect having progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The W bomber k4 is erased in such a manner that it disappears above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 151 (2e) shows that after the W bomber k4 is deleted in the state α and the W bomber effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then the right symbol display area. A state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed is shown in 208c.

  In FIG. 151 (2f), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” which is a shifted symbol pattern is displayed in the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A state where temporary stop display (swing fluctuation display) is performed in such a manner that it swings is shown.

  FIG. 151 (2g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a1 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, the hold corresponding to the hold icon b1 which is the black circle hold icon is digested, and the special figure 1 variable game is started. The success / failure determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place, and when the special figure 1 variable game is finished, the left and right right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed with the decorative symbols which are out of the pattern form.

  In the present embodiment, the aspect α of the W bomber effect is performed, but does not proceed (develop) to the aspect β, the W bomber effect is finished in the state α, and the W bomber effect is performed. In the symbol variation display started after the hold corresponding to the displayed black circle hold icon is digested, the shifted symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. The W bomber effect in this example does not target any on-hold icons and changing icons including the black circle on-hold icon. As described above, the W bomber effect is provided with a failure effect that does not proceed to the mode β without targeting any on-hold icon and changing icon.

(Example 5)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 5 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 (3a) to (3g). 151 (3a) to (3g) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 151 (3a) to (3g), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 151 (3 a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 151 (3a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area at the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Is displayed. The hold icon b1 is a black circle hold icon, and the hold icon b2 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

  FIG. 151 (3b) shows a state in which the B bomber effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which the B bomber k5 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. A mode when the B bomber k5 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The appearance of the B bomber k5 is the start of the B bomber production. The B bomber effect in this example is an effect that does not target any on-hold icon or changing icon.

  FIG. 151 (3c) shows a state in which the B bomber effect is being performed. An animation in which the B bomber k5 moves to the left is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 151 (3d) shows a state immediately before the B-bomber effect is ended without the B-bomber effect progressing from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The B bomber k5 is erased in such a manner that it disappears above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 151 (3e), after the B bomber k5 is deleted in the state α and the B bomber effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then the right symbol display area. A state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed is shown in 208c.

  In FIG. 151 (3f), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” which is a shifted symbol pattern is displayed in the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A state where temporary stop display (swing fluctuation display) is performed in such a manner that it swings is shown.

  FIG. 151 (3g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a1 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, the hold corresponding to the hold icon b1 which is the black circle hold icon is digested, and the special figure 1 variable game is started. The success / failure determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place, and when the special figure 1 variable game is finished, the left and right right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed with the decorative symbols which are out of the pattern form.

  In the present embodiment, the mode B of the B bomber effect is performed, but does not proceed (develop) to the mode β, the B bomber effect is finished in the state α, and the B bomber effect is performed. In the symbol variation display started after the hold corresponding to the displayed black circle hold icon is digested, the shifted symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. The B bomber effect in this example does not target any on-hold icons and changing icons including the black circle on-hold icon. In this way, the B bomber effect is provided with a failure effect that does not proceed to the aspect β without targeting any on-hold icon and changing icon.

(Example 6)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 6 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 (4a) to (4g). 151 (4a) to (4g) show an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 151 (4a) to (4g), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 151 (4a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 151 (4a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area at the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Is displayed. The hold icon b1 is a black circle hold icon, and the hold icon b2 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

  FIG. 151 (4b) shows a state in which the WUFO effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which WUFOk6 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. A mode when WUFOk6 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of WUFOk6 is the start of WUFO production. The WUFO effect in this example is an effect that does not target any pending icons or changing icons.

  FIG. 151 (4c) shows a state where the WUFO effect is being performed. An animation in which WUFOk 6 moves to the left is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 151 (4d) shows a state immediately before the WUFO effect is ended without the WUFO effect progressing from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. WUFOk6 is deleted in such a manner that it disappears above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 151 (4e), after the WUFOk6 is deleted in the state α and the WUFO effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. "Indicates a temporarily stopped display state.

  In FIG. 151 (4f), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a shifted symbol pattern, is displayed in the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A state where temporary stop display (swing fluctuation display) is performed in such a manner that it swings is shown.

  FIG. 151 (4g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a1 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, the hold corresponding to the hold icon b1 which is the black circle hold icon is digested, and the special figure 1 variable game is started. The success / failure determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place, and when the special figure 1 variable game is finished, the left and right right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed with the decorative symbols which are out of the pattern form.

  In the present embodiment, the aspect α of the WUFO effect is performed, but the progress (development) does not proceed to the aspect β, the WUFO effect is ended in the state α, and the black circle is displayed when the WUFO effect is performed. In the symbol variation display started after the hold corresponding to the icon is digested, the shifted symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. The WUFO effect in this example does not target any on-hold icons and changing icons including the black circle on-hold icon. In this way, the WUFO effect is provided with a failure effect that ends without proceeding to the mode β without targeting any held icon or changing icon.

(Example 7)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 7 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 (5a) to (5g). 151 (5a) to (5g) show an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 151 (5a) to (5g), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 151 (5a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 151 (5a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area at the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Is displayed. The hold icon b1 is a black circle hold icon, and the hold icon b2 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

  FIG. 151 (5b) shows a state where the BUFO effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which BUFok7 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when BUFok 7 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. 149. The beginning of the appearance of BUFOk7 is the start of BUFO production. The BUFO effect in this example is an effect that does not target any pending icons or changing icons.

  FIG. 151 (5c) shows a state where the BUFO effect is being performed. An animation in which BUFok 7 moves to the left is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 151 (5d) shows a state immediately before the BUFO effect is ended without progressing from the “mode α” to the “mode β” shown in FIG. The BUFok 7 is erased in such a manner that it disappears above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The BUFO effect that does not target any pending icon or changing icon is terminated without proceeding to “mode β”.

  In FIG. 151 (5e), after the BUFOK7 is deleted in the state α and the BUFO effect is ended, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. "Indicates a temporarily stopped display state.

  In FIG. 151 (5f), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” which is a shifted symbol pattern is displayed in the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A state where temporary stop display (swing fluctuation display) is performed in such a manner that it swings is shown.

  FIG. 151 (5g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a1 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, the hold corresponding to the hold icon b1 which is the black circle hold icon is digested, and the special figure 1 variable game is started. The success / failure determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place, and when the special figure 1 variable game is finished, the left and right right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed with the decorative symbols which are out of the pattern form.

  In the present embodiment, the mode α of the BUFO effect is performed, but the progress (development) does not proceed to the mode β, the BUFO effect is finished while the mode α is maintained, and the black circle displayed when the BUFO effect is performed. In the symbol variation display started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon is digested, the shifted symbol form is confirmed and displayed. The BUFO effect in this example does not target any on-hold icons and changing icons including the black circle on-hold icon. As described above, the BUFO effect is provided with a failure effect that ends without proceeding to the mode β without targeting any held icon or changing icon.

(Example 8)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 8 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 (a) to 152 (k). 152 (a) to (k) show an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 152A to 152K, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 152 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 152 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area at the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Is displayed. The hold icon b1 is a black circle hold icon, and the hold icon b2 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

  FIG. 152 (b) shows a state in which the W bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which W bird k1 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. A mode when W bird k1 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of W Bird k1 is the start of W Bird production. The W bird effect in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b1.

  FIG. 152 (c) shows a state in which a W bird effect is being performed. An animation in which W bird k1 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire W bird k1 is displayed.

  FIG. 152 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the W bird effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. The W bird k1 is displayed so as to rise to the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

  FIG. 152 (e) shows a state in which the W bird effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The W bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b1, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the W bird k1 is displayed on the target hold icon b1.

  FIG. 152 (f) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b1. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of W bird k1 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started while the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the W bird k1 is displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b1, the entire hold icon b1 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a1 and the holding icon b2 that are not the target of the holding effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 152 (g) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b1 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b1 remains a black circle hold icon. The W bird effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

  FIG. 152 (h) shows a state where the reduced display of the decorative symbol variation display is finished. In FIG. 152 (h), the W bird k1 is erased in such a manner that it returns to the state α and disappears in the form of disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is the state immediately before the end of the W bird effect.

  In FIG. 152 (i), after the W bird k1 is deleted and the W bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state.

  In FIG. 152 (j), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 3-decoration 2—decoration 2” which is a shifted symbol pattern is displayed in the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The state of the fluctuation fluctuation display (temporary stop display) is shown in a manner of shaking.

  FIG. 152 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a1 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  In this modification, the W bird effect has progressed (developed) from the aspect α to the aspect β, but the hold icon b1 that is the target of the W bird effect has not changed from the black circle hold icon to the other hold icons shown in FIG. . As described above, the W bird effect is provided with a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modification of the present embodiment will be described. 152 (g ′) to (k ′) show an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in chronological order. 152 (g ′) to (k ′) show the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 152 (g ′) shows a state continued from FIG. 152 (f). In FIG. 152 (g ′), the effect image k8 has been deleted, and the hold icon b1 is displayed so as to be visible again. When the hold icon b1 is redisplayed, the black circle hold icon shown in FIG. 104 changes to a triangular hold icon. The W bird effect in this example is a successful effect in which the target hold icon changes.

  FIG. 152 (h ′) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 152 (h ′), W bird k1 is erased in such a manner that it returns to the state α and disappears in the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the W bird effect. .

  FIG. 152 (i ′) shows “decoration 3” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a after W bird k1 is deleted and the W bird effect is finished, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. "Indicates a temporarily stopped display state.

  In FIG. 152 (j ′), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” which is a shifted symbol pattern is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A state in which the fluctuation variation display (temporary stop display) is performed in a manner of swinging left and right is shown.

  FIG. 152 (k ′) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a1 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, the W bird effect mode α progresses to the mode β, and the hold icon b1 that is the target of the W bird effect changes from a black circle hold icon to a triangle hold icon. In this way, the W bird effect is provided with a success effect in which the target hold icon changes.

Example 9
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 9 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 (A) to (K). FIGS. 152A to 152K show examples of performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 152A to 152K, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 152 (A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 152 (A), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area at the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Is displayed. The hold icon b1 is a black circle hold icon, and the hold icon b2 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

  FIG. 152 (B) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b1.

  FIG. 152 (C) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

  FIG. 152 (D) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced and displayed during the B bird effect. The B bird k2 is displayed so as to rise to the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

  FIG. 152 (E) shows a state in which the B bird effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. 149. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b1, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is emitted from the eyes of B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icon b1.

  FIG. 152 (F) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b1. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b1, the entire hold icon b1 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a1 and the holding icon b2 that are not the target of the holding effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 152 (G) shows a state in which the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b1 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b1 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

  FIG. 152 (H) shows a state where the reduced display of the decorative symbol variation display has been completed. In FIG. 152 (H), B bird k2 has been erased in such a manner that it returns to the state α and disappears in the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

  In FIG. 152 (I), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state.

  In FIG. 152 (J), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” which is a shifted symbol pattern is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The state of the fluctuation fluctuation display (temporary stop display) is shown in a manner of shaking.

  FIG. 152 (K) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a1 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the B bird effect has progressed (developed) from the aspect α to the aspect β, but the hold icon b1 that is the target of the B bird effect has not changed from the black circle hold icon to the other hold icons shown in FIG. . As described above, the B bird effect is provided with a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modification of the present embodiment will be described. 152 (G ′) to (K ′) show an example of the effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in chronological order. 152 (G ′) to (K ′), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 152 (G ′) shows a state continued from FIG. 152 (F). In FIG. 152 (G ′), the effect image k8 has been deleted, and the hold icon b1 is displayed so as to be visible again. When the hold icon b1 is redisplayed, the black circle hold icon shown in FIG. 104 changes to a face hold icon. The B bird effect in this example is a successful effect in which the target hold icon changes.

  FIG. 152 (H ′) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 152 (H ′), B bird k2 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears to the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the B bird effect ends. .

  In FIG. 152 (I ′), after the B bird k2 is deleted and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. "Indicates a temporarily stopped display state.

  In FIG. 152 (J ′), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” which is a shifted symbol pattern is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A state in which the fluctuation variation display (temporary stop display) is performed in a manner of swinging left and right is shown.

  FIG. 152 (K ′) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a1 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  In the present modification, the B bird effect is progressed (developed) from the aspect α to the aspect β, and the hold icon b1 that is the target of the B bird effect is changed from the black circle hold icon to the face hold icon. In this way, the B bird effect is provided with a successful effect in which the target hold icon changes. The face hold icon is set to have a higher jackpot reliability than the triangle hold icon. The B bird effect may be set to have a higher probability that the hold icon or the variation icon that is the target of the hold effect will change to a hold icon with a high jackpot reliability than the W bird effect.

(Example 10)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 153 (a) to 153 (k) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 153 (a) to 153 (k), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 153 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 153 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area at the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Is displayed. The hold icons b1 and b2 are white circle hold icons. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

  FIG. 153 (b) shows a state where the W bomber effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which the W bomber k4 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when the W bomber k4 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The appearance of the W bomber k4 is the start of the W bomber production. The W bomber effect in this example is an effect for the hold icon b2.

  FIG. 153 (c) shows a state in which the W bomber effect is being performed. An animation in which the W bomber k4 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire bomber k4 is displayed.

  FIG. 153 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the W bomber effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. The W bomber k4 is displayed so as to rise to the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

  FIG. 153 (e) shows a state in which the W bomber effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The W bomber effect in this example is for the hold icon b2, and an animation of a scene in which a missile is being fired from the W bomber k4 is displayed on the target hold icon b2.

  FIG. 153 (f) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene in which the missile launched from the W bomber k4 hits the hold icon b2 and explodes ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be displayed after the missile fired from the W bomber k4 hits the hold icon b2, or the effect image k8 starts to be displayed at the same time when the missile hits the hold icon b2. Also good. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 is not visible. The effect image k8 of the present example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a1 and the hold icon b1 that are not the target of the hold effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 153 (g) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b2 remains a black circle hold icon. The W bomber effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

  FIG. 153 (h) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 153 (h), the W bomber k4 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears to the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the W bomber effect. is there.

  In FIG. 153 (i), after the W bomber k4 is deleted and the W bomber effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. “2” indicates a state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

  In FIG. 153 (j), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” which is a shifted symbol pattern is displayed in the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The state of the fluctuation fluctuation display (temporary stop display) is shown in a manner of shaking.

  FIG. 153 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a1 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, the W bomber effect has progressed (developed) from the aspect α to the aspect β, but the hold icon b2 that is the target of the W bomber effect has changed from the black circle hold icon to another hold icon shown in FIG. Not. As described above, the W bomber effect is provided with a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modification of the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 153 (g ′) to (k ′) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in time series. In each of FIGS. 153 (g ′) to (k ′), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 153 (g ′) shows a state continued from FIG. 153 (f). In FIG. 153 (g ′), the effect image k8 has been deleted, and the hold icon b2 is displayed so as to be visible again. When the hold icon b2 is redisplayed, the black circle hold icon shown in FIG. 104 changes to a triangular hold icon. The W bomber effect in this example is a successful effect in which the target hold icon changes.

  FIG. 153 (h ′) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 153 (h ′), the W bomber k4 returns to the state α, and is erased in such a manner that it disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the state immediately before the end of the W bomber effect. It is.

  In FIG. 153 (i ′), after the W bomber k4 is deleted and the W bomber effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “right decoration display area 208c” The decoration 2 ”is displayed in a temporarily stopped state.

  In FIG. 153 (j ′), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” which is a shifted symbol pattern is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A state in which the fluctuation variation display (temporary stop display) is performed in a manner of swinging left and right is shown.

  FIG. 153 (k ′) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a1 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  In the present modification, the W-bomber effect aspect α progresses to the aspect β (development), and the hold icon b2 that is the target of the W-bomber effect changes from a black circle hold icon to a triangle hold icon. As described above, the W bomber effect is provided with a success effect in which the target hold icon changes.

(Example 11)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 11 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 153 (A) to 153 (K) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 153 (A) to 153 (K), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 153 (A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 153 (A), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area at the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Is displayed. The hold icons b1 and b2 are white circle hold icons. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

  FIG. 153 (B) shows a state in which the B bomber effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which the B bomber k5 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. A mode when the B bomber k5 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The appearance of the B bomber k5 is the start of the B bomber production. The B bomber effect in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b2.

  FIG. 153 (C) shows a state where the B bomber effect is being performed. An animation in which the B bomber k5 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire bomber k5 is displayed.

  FIG. 153 (D) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bomber effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. The B bomber k5 is displayed so as to rise to the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

  FIG. 153 (E) shows a state in which the B bomber effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The B bomber effect in this example is for the hold icon b2, and an animation of a scene in which a missile is being fired from the B bomber k5 is displayed on the target hold icon b2.

  FIG. 153 (F) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene in which the missile launched from the B bomber k5 hits the hold icon b2 and explodes ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be displayed after the missile fired from the B bomber k5 hits the hold icon b2, or the effect image k8 starts to be displayed at the same time as the missile hits the hold icon b2. Also good. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 is not visible. The effect image k8 of the present example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a1 and the hold icon b1 that are not the target of the hold effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 153 (G) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b2 remains a black circle hold icon. The W bomber effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

  FIG. 153 (H) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 153 (H), the B bomber k5 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears to the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bomber effect. is there.

  In FIG. 153 (I), after the B bomber k5 is erased and the B bomber effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. “2” indicates a state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

  In FIG. 153 (J), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” which is a shifted symbol pattern is displayed in the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The state of the fluctuation fluctuation display (temporary stop display) is shown in a manner of shaking.

  FIG. 153 (K) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a1 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, the B-bomber production mode α has progressed (developed) from the mode α to the mode β, but the hold icon b2 that is the target of the B-bomber production changes from the black circle hold icon to another hold icon shown in FIG. Not. In this way, the B bomber effect is provided with a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modification of the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 153 (G ′) to (K ′) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in time series. In each of FIGS. 153 (G ′) to (K ′), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 153 (G ′) shows a state continued from FIG. 153 (F). In FIG. 153 (G ′), the effect image k8 has been deleted, and the hold icon b2 is displayed so as to be visible again. When the hold icon b2 is redisplayed, the black circle hold icon shown in FIG. 104 changes to a face hold icon. The B bomber effect in this example is a successful effect in which the target hold icon changes.

  FIG. 153 (H ′) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 153 (H ′), the B bomber k5 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the state immediately before the W bomber effect ends. It is.

  In FIG. 153 (I ′), after the B bomber k5 is erased and the B bomber effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. The decoration 2 ”is displayed in a temporarily stopped state.

  In FIG. 153 (J ′), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” which is a shifted symbol pattern is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A state in which the fluctuation variation display (temporary stop display) is performed in a manner of swinging left and right is shown.

  FIG. 153 (K ′) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a1 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  In the present modification, the B-bomber effect aspect α progresses to the aspect β, and the hold icon b2 that is the target of the B-bomber effect changes from the black circle hold icon to the face hold icon. As described above, the B bomber effect is provided with a success effect in which the target hold icon changes. The face hold icon is set to have a higher jackpot reliability than the triangle hold icon. The B bird effect may be set to have a higher probability that the hold icon or the variation icon that is the target of the hold effect will change to a hold icon with a high jackpot reliability than the W bird effect.

Example 12
A pachinko machine 100 according to a twelfth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 154 (a) to 154 (k) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 154 (a) to (k), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 154 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 154 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area at the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Is displayed. The hold icons b1 and b2 are white circle hold icons. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the black circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

  FIG. 154 (b) shows a state in which the WUFO effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which WUFOk6 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. A mode when WUFOk6 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of WUFOk6 is the start of WUFO production. The WUFO effect in this example is an effect for the changing icon a1.

  FIG. 154 (c) shows a state where the WUFO effect is being performed. An animation in which WUFOk6 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire WUFOKk6 is displayed.

  FIG. 154 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the WUFO effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. WUFOKk 6 is displayed so as to rise to the right of the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

  FIG. 154 (e) shows a state in which the WUFO effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The WUFO effect is for the changing icon a1, and an animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray is irradiated from WUFOk6 is displayed on the changing icon a1.

  FIG. 154 (f) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the changing icon a1. When the animation of a scene in which a mysterious light beam irradiated from WUFOKk6 hits the changing icon a1 and explodes, an effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be displayed after the mysterious light beam irradiated from WUFOk6 hits the changing icon a1, or the effect image k8 is displayed simultaneously with the mysterious light beam hitting the changing icon a1. May be started. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire changing icon a1, the entire changing icon a1 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icons b1 and b2 that are not the target of the hold effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the hold icon that is not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 154 (g) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the changing icon a1 is displayed so as to be visible again. The changing icon a1 remains in the display mode of the black circle hold icon. The WUFO effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target changing icon does not change.

  FIG. 154 (h) shows a state in which the reduced display of the decorative symbol variation display is finished. In FIG. 154 (h), WUFOk6 has been erased in such a manner that it returns to the state α and disappears in the manner of disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the WUFO effect.

  FIG. 154 (i) shows that “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a and then “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c after WUFOk6 is erased and the WUFO effect ends. The displayed state is shown.

  In FIG. 154 (j), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a shifted symbol pattern, is displayed in the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The state of the fluctuation fluctuation display (temporary stop display) is shown in a manner of shaking.

  FIG. 154 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a1 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the WUFO effect mode α has progressed (developed) from the mode β, but the changing icon a1 that is the target of the WUFO effect is changed from the black circle hold icon display mode to the other hold icon display modes shown in FIG. It has not changed. Thus, the WUFO effect is provided with a failure effect in which the target changing icon does not change.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modification of the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 154 (g ′) to (r ′) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in time series. In each of FIGS. 154 (g ′) to (r ′), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 154 (g ′) shows a state continued from FIG. 154 (f). In FIG. 154 (g ′), the effect image k8 has been deleted, and the changing icon a1 is displayed so as to be visible again. When being changed, the hold icon a1 changes from the black circle hold icon display mode shown in FIG. 104 to the button hold icon display mode when displayed again. The button hold icon is a display that prompts the player to press the chance button 136 once, and an operation valid period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is effective is started together with the start of displaying the button hold icon. The WUFO effect in this example is a successful effect in which the target changing icon changes.

  FIG. 154 (h ′) shows a state where the reduced display of the decorative symbol variation display is finished. In FIG. 154 (h ′), WUFOk6 is erased in such a manner that it returns to mode α and disappears in the mode of disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the WUFO effect.

  FIG. 154 (i ′) shows that “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a after WUFOk6 is deleted and the WUFO effect is finished, and then “decoration 3” is temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. The stop display is shown. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching the reach in the variation display of the decorative symbols in FIG. 154 (i ').

  FIG. 154 (j ′) shows that the changing icon a1 displays the face holding icon in response to the chance button 136 being pressed once by the player while the changing icon a1 that is the display mode of the button holding icon is displayed. The state which changed into the aspect is shown.

  In FIG. 154 (k ′), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, the changing icon and the hold icon are deleted, and A state in which an effect in which an animation of a confronting scene is displayed has been started is shown. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are shown in a state of being reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 154 (l ′) shows a state in which a display indicating a shift is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the display of the super reach effect. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the shrine is defeated by the enemy of the shrine is displayed as a display suggesting a loss.

  FIG. 154 (m ′) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3”, which is an outlier design, is displayed in a swinging manner in a display manner that swings up and down. The fluctuation variation display of the detachment pattern mode is a display that suggests detachment. The normal background image is an empty background image when the wipe effect display is wiped out after the shaking variation display of “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3” is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. By switching to the effect display, the super reach effect display ends.

  FIG. 154 (n ′) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbols, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, the background image, and the like.

  FIG. 154 (o ′) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is obtained, the decorative design, the image of the lord, the image of the enemy of the lord, and the background image become invisible.

  FIG. 154 (p ′) shows a state where the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn and displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. When the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b starts, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, the changing icon and the hold icon are displayed again, and the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 In the middle left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fluctuation variation display of “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3”, which is the off symbol design, is started. As shown in FIG. 154 (p ′), the changing icon a1 and the hold icons b1 and b2 are gradually displayed from between the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

  FIG. 154 (q ′) shows that “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3”, which is a shifted pattern in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, is left and right after the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a, w7b is completed. A state in which the shaking fluctuation is displayed in the shaking display mode is shown.

  FIG. 154 (r ′) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 include “decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3” which is a disparity symbol form. The stop display is made and it is informed that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a1 is deleted before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed.

  In this modified example, the WUFO effect from the aspect α to the aspect β progresses (develops), the changing icon a1 that is the target of the WUFO effect changes from the black circle hold icon display form to the button hold icon display form, The changing icon a1 in the display mode of the button hold icon changes to the display mode of the face hold icon as a response display of pressing the chance button 136, and the symbol change display is confirmed and displayed in the symbol change display corresponding to the changing icon a1. . As described above, there is a case where the symbol pattern display is determined and displayed in the symbol variation display corresponding to the changing icon whose display mode is changed, which is a target of the hold effect. In addition, it corresponds to the changing icon which became the object of the holding effect and the display form has changed rather than the symbol changing display corresponding to the changing icon whose display form has not changed from the beginning of the display. The symbol variation display is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily displayed.

(Example 13)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 13 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 154 (A) to (N) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 154A to 154N, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 154 (A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 154 (A), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area at the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Is displayed. The hold icons b1 and b2 are white circle hold icons. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the black circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

  FIG. 154 (B) shows a state where the BUFO effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which BUFok7 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when BUFok 7 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. 149. The beginning of the appearance of BUFOk7 is the start of BUFO production. The BUFO effect is an effect for the changing icon a1.

  FIG. 154 (C) shows a state where a BUFO effect is being performed. An animation in which BUFok 7 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire BUFok 7 is displayed.

  FIG. 154 (D) shows a state where the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the BUFO effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. The BUFok 7 is displayed so as to rise to the right of the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

  FIG. 154 (E) shows a state where the BUFO effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The BUFO effect is for the changing icon a1, and an animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray is irradiated from the BUFOK7 is displayed on the changing icon a1.

  FIG. 154 (F) shows a state where the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the changing icon a1. When the animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray irradiated from BUFok 7 hits the changing icon a1 and explodes, an effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be displayed after the mysterious ray irradiated from BUFOK7 hits the changing icon a1, or the effect image k8 is displayed at the same time that the mysterious ray hits the changing icon a1. May be started. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire changing icon a1, the entire changing icon a1 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icons b1 and b2 that are not the target of the hold effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the hold icon that is not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 154 (G) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the changing icon a1 is displayed so as to be visible again. The changing icon a1 is changed from the display mode of the black circle hold icon to the display mode of the Minowa hold icon. The Minowa hold icon is displayed only when the jackpot symbol form is confirmed and displayed in the corresponding symbol variation display. Moreover, in the BUFO effect for the change icon, a success effect in which the changing icon is always changed is executed.

  FIG. 154 (H) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 154 (H), BUFOK7 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the BUFO effect ends.

  In FIG. 154 (I), after BUFok7 is erased and the BUFO effect ends, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. The displayed state is shown. In this example, super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 154 (I).

  In FIG. 154 (J), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, the changing icon and the hold icon are deleted, and the enemy and the enemy of the lord confront each other. This shows a state in which an effect in which an animation of a scene to be displayed is started. The image of the lord is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the lord is displayed on the right side of the display screen. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are shown in a state of being reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period when the super reach effect display is being executed, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced.

  FIG. 154 (K) shows a state in which an animation of a scene in which the lord and the enemy of the lord are slashed is displayed during the super reach production display.

  FIG. 154 (L) shows a state where a display suggesting a big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the display of the super reach effect. In this example, the animation of a scene where the lord wins over the enemy of the lord as a display that suggests the jackpot, and a temporary stop display of “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” are displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. .

  FIG. 154 (M) shows a state where the super reach effect display has been completed. The super reach effect display in this example is finished after “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is displayed in a swinging manner in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. When the super reach effect display is completed, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the reduced display of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c is terminated, the changing icon a1, and the hold icons b1, b2 Display is resumed. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” is displayed in a fluctuation display in a display manner that swings left and right.

  FIG. 154 (N) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” which is a big hit symbol form is displayed. A stop display (main stop display) is displayed, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In addition, the changing icon a1 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. The changing icon a <b> 1 is erased during the shaking change display of “decoration 3−decoration 3−decoration 3”.

  In the present embodiment, the FOFO effect mode α progresses to the mode β, and the changing icon a1 that is the target of the BUFO effect changes from the black circle hold icon display mode to the Minowa hold icon display mode. In the symbol variation display corresponding to the icon a1, the jackpot symbol mode is fixedly displayed. As described above, there is a case in which the big hit symbol pattern is fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display corresponding to the changing icon whose display mode has been changed. The display mode of the Minowa hold icon is set higher in the jackpot reliability than the display mode of the face hold icon. The BUFO effect may be set to have a higher probability that the variable icon that is the target of the hold effect will change to a hold icon with a high jackpot reliability than the WUFO effect. In addition, it corresponds to the changing icon which became the object of the holding effect and the display form has changed rather than the symbol changing display corresponding to the changing icon whose display form has not changed from the beginning of the display. The symbol variation display is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily displayed.

(Example 14)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 14 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 155 (a) to 155 (m) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 155 (a) to 155 (m), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 155 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 155 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area at the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Is displayed. The hold icon b1 is a black circle hold icon, and the hold icon b2 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

  FIG. 155 (b) shows a state in which the B bird effect with a button for the hold effect is started. An animation in which a B bird k3 with a button appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. A mode when the B bird k3 with a button appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of the B bird k3 with buttons is the start of the B bird effect with buttons. The B bird k3 with a button is a display that prompts the player to press the chance button 136. The B-bird effect with a button in this example is an effect that does not target any held icons or changing icons.

  FIG. 155 (c) shows a state where a B-bird effect with buttons is being performed. An animation in which the button B bird k3 moves to the left is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 155 (d) shows a state immediately before the B-bird effect with a button is ended without the B-bird effect with a button progressing from the “mode α” to the “mode β” shown in FIG. The B-bird effect with buttons in this example is an effect that does not target any hold icon or changing icon. In this case, even if the player presses the chance button 136 while the B-bird k3 with buttons is displayed. The pressing is not accepted, and the B bird effect with a button does not proceed to the mode β. The B-bird effect with buttons remains in the form α, and the B-bird with buttons k2 is erased in such a manner that it disappears above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 155 (e), after the B bird with button k3 is erased and the B bird effect with button is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then in the right symbol display area 208c. The “decoration 2” is in a temporarily stopped display state.

  In FIG. 155 (f), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” which is a shifted symbol pattern is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A state where temporary stop display (swing fluctuation display) is performed in such a manner that it swings is shown.

  FIG. 155 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a1 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 155 (h) shows a state in which the reservation of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a2. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

  FIG. 155 (i) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 155 (j), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 3”, which is a shifted symbol pattern, is displayed in the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The state of the fluctuation fluctuation display (temporary stop display) is shown in a manner of shaking.

  FIG. 155 (k) shows a state in which the changing icon a3 is erased while the fluctuation change display of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 3” is in progress (temporary stop table). The changing icon is erased during the fluctuation change display (temporary stop display) of the decorative pattern in the off-pattern form.

  FIG. 155 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 3”, which is an outlier design, is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is wrong. Yes.

  FIG. 155 (m) shows a state in which the hold of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation between the hold / change icons is displayed. Is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a3. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

  In the present embodiment, the mode α of the B bird effect with button is performed, but does not proceed (evolve) to the mode β, and corresponds to the black circle hold icon displayed when the B bird effect with button is performed. The symbol variation display that has been started after the hold is digested is removed, and the symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. The B bird effect with a button in this example does not target any on-hold icons and changing icons including the black circle on-hold icon. As described above, the B bird effect with a button is provided with a failure effect that ends without proceeding to the mode β without targeting any held icon or changing icon.

(Example 15)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 15 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 155 (A) to (K) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 155A to 155K, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 155 (A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 152 (A), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area at the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Is displayed. The hold icon b1 is a black circle hold icon, and the hold icon b2 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

  FIG. 155 (B) shows a state where the B bird effect with a button for the hold effect is started. An animation in which a B bird k3 with a button appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. A mode when the B bird k3 with a button appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The appearance of B bird k3 with a button is the start of B bird production. The B bird effect with a button of this example is an effect for the hold icon b1.

  FIG. 155 (C) shows a state in which a B-bird effect with buttons is being performed. An animation in which the B bird k3 with button moves to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k3 with button is displayed.

  FIG. 155 (D) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect with buttons, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. The B bird k3 with a button is displayed so as to rise to the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen. The buttoned B bird k3 is a display that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136. When the buttoned B bird k3 is stationary at the center of the display screen, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. The B-bird effect with a button in this example is an effect for the hold icon b1, and in this case, when the player presses the chance button 136 while the B-bird with button k3 is still displayed, the press is accepted. The B bird effect with buttons proceeds to the mode β. When the chance button 136 is not pressed during the operation valid period, the B bird effect with button is terminated without proceeding to the mode β.

  FIG. 155 (E) shows a state in which the B bird effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. 149 in response to the chance button 136 being pressed by the player. When the player presses the chance button 136, the button image included in the B bird k3 with button is deleted, the B bird k3 with button becomes B bird k2, and the eye of the B bird k2 appears on the hold icon b1 that is the production target. An animation of the scene where the laser beam is emitted from is displayed.

  FIG. 155 (F) shows a state where the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b1. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b1, the entire hold icon b1 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a1 and the holding icon b2 that are not the target of the holding effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 155 (G) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b1 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b1 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect with buttons in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

  FIG. 155 (H) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 155 (H), B bird k2 is in the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears to the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the B bird effect with buttons ends. . In the B bird effect with button, the effect of the aspect α in which the B bird k3 with button appears is performed, then the effect of the aspect β in which the B bird k2 irradiates the laser beam is performed, and then the B bird k2 is deleted. Production of the aspect α is performed.

  In FIG. 155 (I), after the B bird k2 is deleted and the B bird effect with the button is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. “2” indicates a state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

  In FIG. 155 (J), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” which is a shifted symbol pattern is left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The state of the fluctuation fluctuation display (temporary stop display) is shown in a manner of shaking.

  FIG. 155 (K) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a1 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the B-bird effect with a button has progressed (developed) from the aspect α to the aspect β, but the hold icon b1 that is the target of the B-bird effect with a button changes from the black circle hold icon to another hold icon shown in FIG. It has not changed. Thus, the B bird effect with a button is provided with a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modification of the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 155 (G ′) to (K ′) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to this modification in time series. In each of FIGS. 155 (G ′) to (K ′), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 155 (G ′) shows a state continued from FIG. 155 (F). In FIG. 155 (G ′), the effect image k8 has been deleted, and the hold icon b1 is displayed so as to be visible again. When the hold icon b1 is redisplayed, the black circle hold icon shown in FIG. 104 changes to a face hold icon. The B bird effect with buttons in this example is a successful effect in which the target hold icon changes.

  FIG. 155 (H ′) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 155 (H ′), B bird k2 is in the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the B bird effect with a button ends. is there.

  In FIG. 155 (I ′), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect with the button is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. The decoration 2 ”is displayed in a temporarily stopped state.

  In FIG. 155 (J ′), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” which is a shifted symbol pattern is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A state in which the fluctuation variation display (temporary stop display) is performed in a manner of swinging left and right is shown.

  FIG. 155 (K ′) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a1 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  In the present modification, the B-bird effect with button advancing (developed) from the aspect α to the aspect β, the hold icon b1 that is the target of the B-bird effect with button changes from the black circle hold icon to the face hold icon. As described above, the B-bird effect with buttons is provided with a success effect in which the target hold icon changes. The face hold icon is set to have a higher jackpot reliability than the triangle hold icon. Note that the B bird effect with a button may be set to have a higher probability that the hold icon or the variable icon that is the target of the hold effect will change to a hold icon with a high hit reliability, than the B bird effect. .

(Example 16)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 16 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 (a) to (q). FIGS. 156 (a) to (q) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 156 (a) to (q), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 156 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 156 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area at the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Is displayed. The hold icon b1 is a black circle hold icon, and the hold icon b2 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

  FIG. 156 (b) shows a state where the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b1.

  FIG. 156 (c) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

  FIG. 156 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. The B bird k2 is displayed so as to rise to the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

  FIG. 156 (e) shows a state in which the B bird effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b1, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is emitted from the eyes of B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icon b1.

  FIG. 156 (f) shows a state where the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b1. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b1, the entire hold icon b1 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a1 and the holding icon b2 that are not the target of the holding effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 156 (g) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b1 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b1 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

  FIG. 156 (h) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 156 (h), B bird k2 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

  In FIG. 156 (i), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state.

  In FIG. 156 (j), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” which is a shifted symbol pattern is displayed in the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The state of the fluctuation fluctuation display (temporary stop display) is shown in a manner of shaking.

  FIG. 156 (k) shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a1 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 156 (l) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a2. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area. The special figure 1 variable game is a special figure variable game that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b1 that is the target of the B bird effect is digested.

  FIG. 156 (m) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 156 (n) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching the reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 156 (n). Description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In FIG. 156 (n), normal reach effect display may be started instead of super reach effect display after reaching the reach of the decorative symbol variation display, or super reach effect display and normal reach effect display may not be started. Good.

  FIG. 156 (o) shows a state where the super reach effect display has been completed. The super reach effect display in this example is finished after “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is displayed in a swinging manner in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. When the super reach effect display is completed, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the reduced display of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c is terminated, and the changing icon a2 and the hold icon b2 are displayed. Is resumed. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” is displayed in a fluctuation display in a display manner that swings left and right.

  FIG. 156 (p) shows a state where the changing icon a2 is deleted. The changing icon a <b> 2 is erased during the shaking change display of “decoration 3−decoration 3−decoration 3”.

  FIG. 156 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” which is a big hit symbol form is displayed. A stop display (main stop display) is displayed, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In addition, the changing icon a2 is deleted before “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the B bird effect has progressed (developed) from the aspect α to the aspect β, but the hold icon b1 that is the target of the B bird effect has not changed from the black circle hold icon to the other hold icons shown in FIG. . As described above, the B bird effect is provided with a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change. In addition, the big hit symbol form is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b1 is digested. The pachinko machine 100 becomes the target of the failure effect and the success effect of the hold effect even once, rather than the symbol variation display that has been started after digestion of the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has never been a target of the hold effect. The symbol variation display that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon is digested is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is finally displayed more easily.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first modification of the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 156 (m ′) to (w ′) show an example of the effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 156 (m ′) to (w ′), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 156 (m ′) shows a state continued from FIG. 156 (l). In FIG. 156 (m ′), the WUFO effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which WUFOk6 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. A mode when WUFOk6 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of WUFOk6 is the start of WUFO production. The WUFO effect in this example is an effect for the changing icon a2.

  FIG. 156 (n ′) shows a state where the WUFO effect is being performed. An animation in which WUFOk6 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire WUFOKk6 is displayed.

  FIG. 156 (o ′) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the WUFO effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. WUFOKk 6 is displayed so as to rise to the right of the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

  FIG. 156 (p ′) shows a state in which the WUFO effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The WUFO effect targets the changing icon a2, and an animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray is irradiated from WUFOk6 is displayed on the changing icon a2 that is the target.

  FIG. 156 (q ′) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the changing icon a2. When the animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray irradiated from WUFOKk6 hits the changing icon a2 and explodes, an effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be displayed after the mysterious light beam irradiated from WUFOKk6 hits the changing icon a2, or the effect image k8 is displayed at the same time that the mysterious light beam hits the changing icon a2. May be started. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire changing icon a2, the entire changing icon a2 is not visible. The effect image k8 in this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon b2 that is not the target of the hold effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the hold icon that is not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 156 (r ′) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the changing icon a2 is displayed so as to be visible again. The changing icon a2 remains in the display mode of the black circle hold icon. The WUFO effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target changing icon does not change.

  FIG. 156 (s ′) shows a state in which the reduced display of the decorative symbol variation display is finished after the WUFOk 6 is erased and the WUFO effect is finished.

  FIG. 156 (t ′) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching the reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 156 (t ′). Description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In FIG. 156 (t ′), after reaching the reach in the decorative symbol variation display, the normal reach effect display may be started instead of the super reach effect display, or the super reach effect display and the normal reach effect display are not started. Also good.

  FIG. 156 (u ′) shows a state where the super reach effect display has been completed. The super reach effect display in this example is finished after “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is displayed in a swinging manner in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. When the super reach effect display is completed, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the reduced display of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c is terminated, and the changing icon a2 and the hold icon b2 are displayed. Is resumed. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” is displayed in a fluctuation display in a display manner that swings left and right.

  FIG. 156 (v ′) shows a state where the changing icon a2 is deleted. The variation icon a2 is erased during the shaking variation display of “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”.

  FIG. 156 (w ′) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” which is a big hit symbol form is displayed. A stop display (main stop display) is displayed, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In addition, the changing icon a2 is deleted before “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. The changing icon a <b> 2 is erased during the shaking change display of “decoration 3−decoration 3−decoration 3”.

  In this modification, when the hold icon that is the target of the B bird effect of the hold effect becomes the changing icon, the changing icon is the target of the WUFO effect. When the hold icon that has been the target of the hold effect is displayed as the changing icon at least once, the hold icon is displayed as the change icon rather than being a change icon without being the target of the hold effect. It is configured so that the target holding effect is easily performed. It should be noted that the symbol variation display corresponding to the changing icon that is the target of the failure effect of the holding effect and the variation effect that is the target of the successful effect is more than the symbol variation display corresponding to the icon of the variation that was not the target of the holding effect. Eventually, the big hit symbol pattern is configured to be easily displayed.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second modification of the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 157 (m ″) to (w ″) show time-series examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification. In each of FIGS. 157 (m ″) to (w ″), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 157 (m ″) shows a state continued from FIG. 156 (l). In FIG. 157 (m ″), the BUFO effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which BUFok7 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when BUFok 7 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. 149. The beginning of the appearance of BUFOk7 is the start of BUFO production. The BUFO effect in this example is an effect for the changing icon a2.

  FIG. 157 (n ″) shows a state where a BUFO effect is being performed. An animation in which BUFok 7 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire BUFok 7 is displayed.

  FIG. 157 (o ″) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the BUFO effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. The BUFok 7 is displayed so as to rise to the right of the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

  FIG. 157 (p ″) shows a state where the BUFO effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The BUFO effect is for the changing icon a2, and an animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray is irradiated from the BUFOK7 is displayed on the changing icon a2.

  FIG. 157 (q ″) shows a state where the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the changing icon a2. When the animation of a scene in which a mysterious light beam irradiated from BUFok 7 hits the changing icon a2 and explodes, an effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be displayed after the mysterious ray irradiated from BUFOK7 hits the changing icon a2, or the effect image k8 is displayed at the same time that the mysterious ray hits the changing icon a2. May be started. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire changing icon a2, the entire changing icon a2 is not visible. The effect image k8 in this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon b2 that is not the target of the hold effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the hold icon that is not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 157 (r ″) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the changing icon a2 is displayed so as to be visible again. The changing icon a2 is changed from the display mode of the black circle hold icon to the display mode of the mince hold icon shown in FIG. The BUFO effect is a successful effect in which the target changing icon changes.

  FIG. 157 (s ″) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbols is finished after the BUFok 7 is erased and the BUFO effect is finished.

  FIG. 157 (t ″) shows a state where “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching the reach of the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 157 (t ″). Description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In FIG. 157 (t ″), after reaching the reach in the decorative symbol display, the normal reach effect display may be started instead of the super reach effect display, or the super reach effect display and the normal reach effect display are not started. May be.

  FIG. 157 (u ″) shows a state in which the super reach effect display is completed. The super reach effect display in this example is finished after “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is displayed in a swinging manner in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. When the super reach effect display is completed, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the reduced display of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c is terminated, and the changing icon a2 and the hold icon b2 are displayed. Is resumed. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” is displayed in a fluctuation display in a display manner that swings left and right.

  FIG. 157 (v ″) shows a state where the changing icon a2 is deleted. The variation icon a2 is erased during the shaking variation display of “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”.

  FIG. 157 (w ″) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” which is a big hit symbol form is displayed. A stop display (main stop display) is displayed, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

  In the present modification, when the hold icon that is the target of the B bird effect of the hold effect becomes the changing icon, the changing icon is the target of the BUFO effect. When the hold icon that has been the target of the hold effect is displayed as the changing icon at least once, the hold icon is displayed as the change icon rather than being a change icon without being the target of the hold effect. It is configured so that the target holding effect is easily performed. It should be noted that the symbol variation display corresponding to the changing icon that is the target of the failure effect of the holding effect and the variation effect that is the target of the successful effect is more than the symbol variation display corresponding to the icon of the variation that was not the target of the holding effect. Eventually, the big hit symbol pattern is configured to be easily displayed.

(Example 17)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 17 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 158 (a) to (s). FIGS. 158 (a) to (s) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 158 (a) to (s), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 158 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 158 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 4, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area at the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Is displayed, the hold icon b3 is displayed in the hold 3 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the hold icon b4 is displayed in the hold 4 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. A hold icon corresponding to the hold with the third hold order is displayed in the hold 3 display area, and a hold icon corresponding to the hold with the fourth hold order is displayed in the hold 4 display area. The hold icons b1 and b3 are white circle hold icons, and the hold icons b2 and b4 are black circle hold icons. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

  FIG. 158 (b) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b2.

  FIG. 158 (c) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

  FIG. 158 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. The B bird k2 is displayed so as to rise to the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

  FIG. 158 (e) shows a state in which the B bird effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b2, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icon b2.

  FIG. 158 (f) shows a state where the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a1 and the hold icons b1 and b3 that are not the target of the hold effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 158 (g) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b2 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

  FIG. 158 (h) shows a state where the reduced display of the decorative symbol variation display is finished. In FIG. 158 (h), B bird k2 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

  In FIG. 158 (i), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state.

  FIG. 158 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a1 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 158 (k) shows a state in which the hold of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a2. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 3 display area.

  FIG. 158 (l) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect that does not target any of the on-hold icons and the changing icons.

  FIG. 158 (m) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which the B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 158 (n) shows a state immediately before the B bird effect is ended without the B bird effect having progressed from the “mode α” to the “mode β” shown in FIG. B bird k2 is erased in such a manner that it disappears above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 158 (o), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state.

  FIG. 158 (p) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a2 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 158 (q) shows a state in which the reservation of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a3. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area.

  FIG. 158 (r) shows a state where “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the variation display of the decorative symbol in FIG. 158 (r). Description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In FIG. 158 (r), normal reach effect display instead of super reach effect display may be started after reaching the reach in the decorative symbol variation display, or super reach effect display and normal reach effect display may not be started. Good.

  FIG. 158 (s) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished after the super reach effect display is finished. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” which is a big hit symbol form is displayed. A stop display (main stop display) is displayed, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In addition, the changing icon a3 is deleted before “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. The changing icon a <b> 3 is erased during the shaking change display of “decoration 3 -decoration 3-decoration 3”.

  In this modified example, when the hold icon that is the target of the B effect of the hold effect becomes the changing icon, the B bird effect of the hold effect that does not target any of the hold icons and the change icons is performed. .

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first modification of the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 158 (n ′) to (v ′) show time-series examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification. In each of FIGS. 158 (n ′) to (v ′), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 158 (n ′) shows a state continued from FIG. 158 (m). In FIG. 158 (n ′), the B bird effect progresses from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b2, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icon b2.

  FIG. 158 (o ′) shows a state where the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a2 and the holding icon b3 that are not the target of the holding effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 158 (p ′) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b2 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

  FIG. 158 (q ′) shows a state in which the reduced display of the decorative symbol variation display is finished. In FIG. 158 (q ′), B bird k2 has been deleted in such a manner that it returns to mode α and disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect. .

  In FIG. 158 (r ′), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. "Indicates a temporarily stopped display state.

FIG. 158 (s ′) shows “decoration 2” temporarily displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b.
FIG. 1 shows a state in which the variable game is finished. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a2 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 158 (t ′) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is completed and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a3. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area. The special figure 1 variable game is a special figure variable game that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b2 that is the target of the B bird effect is digested.

  FIG. 158 (u ′) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching the reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 158 (u ′). Description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In FIG. 158 (u ′), after reaching the reach in the decorative symbol variation display, the normal reach effect display may be started instead of the super reach effect display, or the super reach effect display and the normal reach effect display are not started. Also good.

  FIG. 158 (v ′) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished after the super reach effect display is finished. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” which is a big hit symbol form is displayed. A stop display (main stop display) is displayed, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In addition, the changing icon a2 is deleted before “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. The changing icon a <b> 3 is erased during the shaking change display of “decoration 3 -decoration 3-decoration 3”.

  In this modification, the B bird effect has progressed (developed) from the aspect α to the aspect β, but the hold icon b2 that is the target of the B bird effect has not changed from the black circle hold icon to the other hold icons shown in FIG. . As described above, the B bird effect is provided with a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change. In addition, the big hit symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b2 is digested. The pachinko machine 100 becomes the target of the failure effect and the success effect of the hold effect even once, rather than the symbol variation display that has been started after digestion of the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has never been a target of the hold effect. The symbol variation display that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon is digested is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is finally displayed more easily.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second modification of the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 158 (n ″) to (p ″) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in time series. In each of FIGS. 158 (n ″) to (p ″), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 158 (n ″) shows a state continued from FIG. 158 (m). In FIG. 158 (n ″), the B bird effect progresses from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b4, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is emitted from the eyes of B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icon b4.

  FIG. 158 (o ″) shows a state where the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b4, the entire hold icon b2 is not visible. The effect image k8 in this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon b3 that is not the target of the hold effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 158 (p ″) shows a state in which the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b4 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b2 is changed from the black circle hold icon to the Minowa hold icon shown in FIG. The B bird effect in this example is a successful effect in which the target hold icon changes.

  If the hold icon (the hold icon b2 in this example) that has been the target of the failure effect of the hold effect once is displayed in another display area by one or more hold actions, it is likely to be the same hold effect again. However, when another hold icon (in this example, the hold icon b4) is the target of the hold effect, the other hold icon may be easily changed to another type of hold icon. Good. For example, it may be more likely to change compared to the case where the hold icon that is the target of the failed production of the hold effect is once again the target of the same hold effect, and is not the target of the failed effect of the hold effect. It may be easier to change than when the same type of hold icon is the target of the hold effect, or the hold icon that is the target of the failure effect or the success effect of another type of hold effect is the same hold effect again. It may be easy to change compared to the case where it becomes a target. Moreover, when the another hold icon becomes the target of the hold effect, the other hold icon may be changed to another type of hold icon. In this modification, the other hold icon (the hold icon b4 in this example) is a premium Minowa hold icon, that is, the symbol variation display started after digestion is changed to the jackpot confirmed hold icon that always displays the jackpot symbol form. Although the example which changes is shown, you may comprise so that it may change into another kind of hold icon.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third modification of the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 159 (n ′) to (v ′) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in time series. In each of FIGS. 159 (n ′) to (v ′), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 159 (n ′) shows a state continued from FIG. 158 (m). In FIG. 159 (n ′), the B bird effect progresses from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b2, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icon b2.

  FIG. 159 (o ′) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a2 and the holding icon b3 that are not the target of the holding effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 159 (p ′) shows a state in which the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b2 changes from a black circle hold icon to a triangular hold icon shown in FIG. The B bird effect in this example is a successful effect in which the target hold icon changes.

  FIG. 159 (q ′) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 159 (q ′), B bird k2 returns to the state α, and is erased in such a manner that it disappears to the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect. .

  In FIG. 159 (r ′), after the B bird k2 is deleted and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. "Indicates a temporarily stopped display state.

FIG. 159 (s ′) shows “decoration 2” temporarily displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b.
FIG. 1 shows a state in which the variable game is finished. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a2 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 159 (t ′) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is completed and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a3. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area. The special figure 1 variable game is a special figure variable game that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b2 that is the target of the B bird effect is digested.

  FIG. 159 (u ′) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 159 (u ′). Description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In FIG. 159 (u ′), after reaching the reach in the decorative symbol variation display, the normal reach effect display may be started instead of the super reach effect display, or the super reach effect display and the normal reach effect display are not started. Also good.

  FIG. 159 (v ′) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished after the super reach effect display is finished. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” which is a big hit symbol form is displayed. A stop display (main stop display) is displayed, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In addition, the changing icon a2 is deleted before “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. The changing icon a <b> 3 is erased during the shaking change display of “decoration 3 -decoration 3-decoration 3”.

  In the present modification, the B bird effect mode α progresses to the mode β, and the hold icon b2 that is the target of the B bird effect changes from the black circle hold icon to the triangular hold icon shown in FIG. In this way, the B bird effect is provided with a successful effect in which the target hold icon changes. In addition, the big hit symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b2 is digested. The pachinko machine 100 becomes the target of the failure effect and the success effect of the hold effect even once, rather than the symbol variation display that has been started after digestion of the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has never been a target of the hold effect. The symbol variation display that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon is digested is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is finally displayed more easily.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth modification of the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 159 (n ″) to (d ″) illustrate time-series examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification. In each of FIGS. 159 (n ″) to (d ″), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 159 (n ″) shows a state continued from FIG. 158 (m). In FIG. 158 (n ″), the B bird effect progresses from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b2, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icon b2.

  FIG. 159 (o ″) shows a state where the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a2 and the holding icon b3 that are not the target of the holding effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 159 (p ″) shows a state in which the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b2 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

  FIG. 159 (q ″) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 159 (q ″), B bird k2 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect. is there.

  In FIG. 159 (r ″), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. “2” indicates a state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

  FIG. 159 (s ″) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a2 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 159 (t ″) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is completed and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a3. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area. The special figure 1 variable game is a special figure variable game that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b2 that is the target of the B bird effect is digested.

  FIG. 159 (u ″) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed.

  FIG. 159 (v ″) shows a state in which the BUFO effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which BUFok7 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when BUFok 7 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. 149. The beginning of the appearance of BUFOk7 is the start of BUFO production. The BUFO effect in this example is an effect for the changing icon a3.

  FIG. 159 (w ″) shows a state where the BUFO effect is being performed. An animation in which BUFok 7 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire BUFok 7 is displayed.

  FIG. 159 (x ″) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the BUFO effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. The BUFok 7 is displayed so as to rise to the right of the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

  FIG. 159 (y ″) shows a state where the BUFO effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The BUFO effect is for the changing icon a2, and an animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray is irradiated from the BUFOK7 is displayed on the changing icon a3.

  FIG. 159 (z ″) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the changing icon a2. When the animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray irradiated from BUFok 7 hits the changing icon a3 and explodes, an effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be displayed after the mysterious ray irradiated from BUFok 7 hits the changing icon a3, or the effect image k8 is displayed at the same time that the mysterious ray hits the changing icon a3. May be started. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire changing icon a3, the entire changing icon a3 is not visible. The effect image k8 in this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon b2 that is not the target of the hold effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the hold icon that is not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 159 (A ″) shows a state that continues from FIG. 159 (Z ″), and shows a state in which the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the changing icon a3 is displayed so as to be visible again. The changing icon a3 is changed from the display mode of the black circle hold icon to the display mode of the mince hold icon shown in FIG. The BUFO effect is a successful effect in which the target changing icon changes.

  In FIG. 159 (b ''), the reduced display of the decorative symbol variation display is completed while BUFok 7 returns to the mode α and moves toward the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates the state. The reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol may be terminated during the holding effect.

  In FIG. 159 (c), after BUFok7 is erased and the BUFO effect is ended, “decoration 3” is temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 3” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching the reach of the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 159 (c). Description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In FIG. 159 (c), after reaching the reach of the decorative symbol display, the normal reach effect display may be started instead of the super reach effect display, or the super reach effect display and the normal reach effect display are not started. May be.

  FIG. 159 (d ") shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished after the super reach effect display is finished. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit, in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” which is a big hit symbol form is displayed. A stop display (main stop display) is displayed, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. The changing icon a <b> 3 is erased during the shaking change display of “decoration 3 -decoration 3-decoration 3”.

  In the present modification, when the hold icon that is the target of the B bird effect of the hold effect becomes the changing icon, the changing icon is the target of the BUFO effect. When the hold icon that has been the target of the hold effect is displayed as the changing icon at least once, the hold icon is displayed as the change icon rather than being a change icon without being the target of the hold effect. It is configured so that the target holding effect is easily performed. It should be noted that the symbol variation display corresponding to the changing icon that is the target of the failure effect of the holding effect and the variation effect that is the target of the successful effect is more than the symbol variation display corresponding to the icon of the variation that was not the target of the holding effect. Eventually, the big hit symbol pattern is configured to be easily displayed.

(Example 18)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 18 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 (a) to 160 (z) and FIGS. 160 (a) to (z) and (a) to (wo) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 160, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 160 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 160 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 3, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area at the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Is displayed, and the hold icon b3 is displayed in the hold 3 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon, and the hold icons b2 and b3 are black circle hold icons. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

  FIG. 160 (b) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

  FIG. 160 (c) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

  FIG. 160 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced and displayed during the B bird effect. B bird k2 is displayed so as to rise to the center of the display screen after moving to the center bottom of the display screen.

  FIG. 160 (e) shows a state in which the B bird effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b3, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icon b3.

  FIG. 160 (f) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 is not visible. The effect image k8 in this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon b2 that is not the target of the hold effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 160 (g) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b3 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

  FIG. 160 (h) shows a state where the reduced display of the decorative symbol variation display has been completed. In FIG. 160 (h), B bird k2 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears to the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the B bird effect ends.

  In FIG. 160 (i), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state.

  FIG. 160 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a1 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed. The changing icon is erased while the decorative symbol is shaking and displayed (temporarily stopped).

  FIG. 160 (k) shows a state in which the hold of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a2. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area.

  FIG. 160 (l) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

  FIG. 160 (m) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

  FIG. 160 (n) shows the B-bird effect shown in FIG. 149 after the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B-bird effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced and displayed. The state of progressing from “aspect α” to “aspect β” is shown. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b3, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icon b3.

  FIG. 160 (o) shows a state where the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a2 and the holding icon b2 that are not the target of the holding effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 160 (p) shows a state in which the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b3 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

  FIG. 160 (q) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 160 (q), B bird k2 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears to the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the B bird effect ends.

  In FIG. 160 (r), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state.

  FIG. 160 (s) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a2 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 160 (t) shows a state in which the hold of the first special figure 1 is consumed and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a3. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

  FIG. 160 (u) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

  FIG. 160 (v) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

  FIG. 160 (w) shows the B bird effect shown in FIG. 149 after the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced and displayed. The state of progressing from “aspect α” to “aspect β” is shown. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b3, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icon b3.

  FIG. 160 (x) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the changing icon a3 that is not the target of the hold effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 160 (y) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b3 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

  FIG. 160 (z) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 160 (z), B bird k2 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears to the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the B bird effect ends.

  FIG. 160 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 160 (z), and after the B bird k2 is deleted and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. Next, a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c is shown.

  FIG. 160 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a3 is deleted before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed. Note that the changing icon may be deleted in the stop table of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 160 (c) shows a state in which the hold of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation between the hold / change icons is displayed. Is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b3 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed as the changing icon a4 in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a4 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. The special figure 1 variable game is a special figure variable game that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b3 that is the target of the three B bird effects is digested.

  FIG. 160 (d) shows a state in which the WUFO effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which WUFOk6 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. A mode when WUFOk6 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of WUFOk6 is the start of WUFO production. The WUFO effect in this example is an effect for the changing icon a4.

  FIG. 160 (e) shows a state in which a WUFO effect is being performed. An animation in which WUFOk6 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire WUFOKk6 is displayed.

  FIG. 160 (f) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the WUFO effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. WUFOKk 6 is displayed so as to rise to the right of the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

  FIG. 160 (G) shows a state in which the WUFO effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The WUFO effect targets the changing icon a4, and an animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray is irradiated from WUFOk6 is displayed on the target changing icon a4.

  FIG. 160 (h) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed so as to overlap the changing icon a4. When the animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray irradiated from WUFOKk6 hits the changing icon a4 and explodes, an effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be displayed after the mysterious ray irradiated from WUFOk6 hits the changing icon a4, or the effect image k8 is displayed at the same time that the mysterious ray hits the changing icon a4. May be started. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire changing icon a4, the entire changing icon a4 is not visible.

  FIG. 160 (ri) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the changing icon a4 is displayed so as to be visible again. The changing icon a4 remains in the display mode of the black circle hold icon. The WUFO effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target changing icon does not change.

  FIG. 160 (N) shows a state in which the reduced display of the decorative symbol variation display is finished. In FIG. 160 (nu), WUFOk6 has been erased in such a manner that it returns to mode α and disappears in the mode of disappearing above the left end of the display screen of decorative design display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the WUFO effect.

  FIG. 160 (L) shows that “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a after WUFOk6 is erased and the WUFO effect ends, and then “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. The displayed state is shown.

  FIG. 160 (wo) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 3”, which is the off symbol mode, is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a4 is deleted before “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, the three hold effects (in this example, the B bird effect) are for the hold icon corresponding to one hold (in this example, the hold icon b3), and all the hold icons are targeted. When the hold effect is a failure effect, and the hold icon becomes a changing icon (in this example, a changing icon a4), a hold effect (in this example, a WUFO effect) targeting the changing icon is displayed. Has been done. The pachinko machine 100 performs a holding effect on the changing icon when the holding icon becomes a changing icon when all the holding effects on the one holding icon are failure effects. It is configured to be easily broken. The changing icon a4 is the target of the B bird effect after the hold icon b3 that is the target of the B bird effect and has not changed to the other type of hold icon becomes the changing icon a4. It is configured such that the probability of being the target of production is higher. In addition, the probability that the hold icon that is not the target of any hold effect among the multiple types of hold effects becomes the changing icon after the change is changed, becomes the target of the hold effect, and other types It is configured such that the probability that the hold icon that has not changed to the hold icon becomes the changing icon becomes the target of the hold effect. In addition, a holding effect for a changing icon is performed in a symbol variation display started by digesting a holding corresponding to a holding icon that has not been a target of any holding effect among a plurality of types of holding effects. The third hold for the changing icon in the symbol variation display started by digesting the hold corresponding to the previous hold icon that is the target of the hold effect and did not change to another type of hold icon rather than the probability It is configured such that the probability that the production is performed is higher. Successful presentation when a pending presentation is performed for the changing icon in the symbol variation display that is started after digestion of the holding corresponding to the holding icon that has been changed to another type of holding icon. It is configured to be easily.

  In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display that has been started after digestion of the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the hold effect is finally displayed in a fixed manner, but the hold corresponding to one hold is displayed. In the case where all the holding effects for the icon are failure effects, it may be configured that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed with the symbol variation display started by the digestion of the holding corresponding to the one holding icon. . “Easy to be done” here may be easier to do than a case where a successful presentation of a holding effect is performed once for a holding icon corresponding to one holding, or a holding icon corresponding to one holding. On the other hand, it may be easier to be compared with a case where a successful presentation of any hold effect is performed, or compared to a case where a hold effect is not performed once for a hold icon corresponding to one hold. It may be easy to be done.

(Example 19)
A pachinko machine 100 according to a nineteenth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 (a) to (z) and (a) to (wo). 161 (a) to (z) and (a) to (wo) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 161 shows the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 161 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 161 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 3, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area at the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Is displayed, and the hold icon b3 is displayed in the hold 3 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon, and the hold icons b2 and b3 are black circle hold icons. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

  FIG. 161 (b) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

  FIG. 161 (c) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

  FIG. 161 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. B bird k2 is displayed so as to rise to the center of the display screen after moving to the center bottom of the display screen.

  FIG. 161 (e) shows a state in which the B bird effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b3, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icon b3.

  FIG. 161 (f) shows a state where the effect image k8 is displayed so as to overlap the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 is not visible. The effect image k8 in this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon b2 that is not the target of the hold effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 161 (g) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b3 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

  FIG. 161 (h) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 161 (h), B bird k2 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears to the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the B bird effect ends.

  In FIG. 161 (i), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state.

  FIG. 161 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a1 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 161 (k) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a2. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area.

  FIG. 161 (l) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

  FIG. 161 (m) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

  FIG. 161 (n) shows the B-bird effect shown in FIG. 149 after the left middle right symbol display area 208a-208c is reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. The state of progressing from “aspect α” to “aspect β” is shown. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b3, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icon b3.

  FIG. 161 (o) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a2 and the holding icon b2 that are not the target of the holding effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 161 (p) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b3 is changed from a black circle hold icon to a triangular hold icon shown in FIG. The B bird effect in this example is a successful effect in which the target hold icon changes.

  FIG. 161 (q) shows a state where the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 161 (q), B bird k2 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears in the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the B bird effect ends.

  In FIG. 161 (r), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state.

  FIG. 161 (s) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a2 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 161 (t) shows a state in which the hold of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a3. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

  FIG. 161 (u) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

  FIG. 161 (v) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

  FIG. 161 (w) shows the B-bird effect shown in FIG. 149 after the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B-bird effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced and displayed. The state of progressing from “aspect α” to “aspect β” is shown. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b3, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icon b3.

  FIG. 161 (x) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the changing icon a3 that is not the target of the hold effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 161 (y) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b3 remains a triangular hold icon. The B bird effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

  FIG. 161 (z) shows a state in which the reduced display of the decorative symbol variation display is finished. In FIG. 161 (z), B bird k2 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the B bird effect ends.

  161 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 161 (z), and after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. Next, a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c is shown.

  FIG. 161 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a3 is deleted before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed. Note that the changing icon may be deleted in the stop table of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 161 (c) shows a state in which the hold of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation between the hold / change icons is displayed. Is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b3 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed as the changing icon a4 in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a4 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. The special figure 1 variable game is a special figure variable game that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b3 that is the target of the three B bird effects is digested.

  FIG. 161 (d) shows a state in which the BUFO effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which BUFok7 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when BUFok 7 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. 149. The beginning of the appearance of BUFOk7 is the start of BUFO production. The BUFO effect in this example is an effect for the changing icon a4.

  FIG. 161 (e) shows a state in which a BUFO effect is being performed. An animation in which BUFok 7 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire BUFok 7 is displayed.

  FIG. 161 (f) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the BUFO effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. The BUFok 7 is displayed so as to rise to the right of the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

  161 (g) shows a state in which the BUFO effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The BUFO effect is for the changing icon a4, and an animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray is irradiated from the BUFOK7 is displayed on the changing icon a4.

  FIG. 161 (h) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the changing icon a4. When the animation of a scene in which a mysterious light beam irradiated from BUFok 7 hits the changing icon a4 and explodes, an effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be displayed after the mysterious light beam emitted from BUFOK7 hits the changing icon a4, or the effect image k8 is displayed at the same time that the mysterious light beam hits the changing icon a4. May be started. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire changing icon a4, the entire changing icon a4 is not visible.

  FIG. 161 (i) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the changing icon a4 is displayed so as to be visible again. The changing icon a4 is changed from the triangular hold icon to the display mode of the mink hold icon shown in FIG. The BUFO effect is a successful effect in which the target changing icon changes.

  FIG. 161 (nu) shows a state where the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbols is finished. In FIG. 161 (nu), BUFOK7 returns to the mode α and is erased in such a mode that it disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the BUFO effect ends.

  In FIG. 161 (L), after BUFok7 is deleted and the BUFO effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. The displayed state is shown. In this example, super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. Description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In FIG. 161 (l), normal reach effect display instead of super reach effect display may be started after reaching the reach of the decorative symbol variation display, or super reach effect display and normal reach effect display may not be started. Good.

  FIG. 161 (wo) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished after the super reach effect display is finished. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”, which is a jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed (determined display, main stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is a big hit. In addition, the changing icon a4 is deleted before “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, the three hold effects (in this example, the B bird effect) are targeted for the hold icon (in this example, the hold icon b3) corresponding to one hold, and the hold icon 2 One hold effect is a failure effect, and one hold effect is a success effect. When the pending icon is a changing icon (in this example, a changing icon a4), a holding effect (in this example, a BUFO effect) is performed on the changing icon. The pachinko machine 100 targets the changing icon when the holding icon becomes a changing icon when a plurality of holding effects for the one holding icon are failed. It is configured so that a holding effect is easily performed. Also, the hold icon that is not the target of any hold effect among the multiple types of hold effects was the target of the hold effect and did not change to another type of hold icon, rather than the probability of being the target of the hold effect. The hold icon is configured to have a higher probability of being a hold effect.

  In addition, if a B bird production effect is performed even once in a plurality of B bird productions for a single hold icon, it is easy to perform a B bird production for the same hold icon even once. If the production failure production is performed, it is easy to perform the same type of hold production as the hold production for the same hold icon as the hold production. In addition, if the failure effect of the hold effect (in this example, the B bird effect) is performed even once, if the hold icon targeted by the hold effect becomes a changing icon, the changing icon is targeted An on-hold effect (in this example, a WUFO effect) is easily performed. In addition, the symbol variation display that is the target of the failure effect of the hold effect is confirmed and displayed in the big hit pattern mode rather than the symbol change display corresponding to the hold icon that has never been the target of the hold effect. Easier than the symbol fluctuation display corresponding to the black circle hold icon that has never been the target of the B bird production failure or the success production, the black circle hold icon that has been the target of the B bird production failure production even once. The corresponding symbol variation display is more likely to display the big hit symbol form. It should be noted that even if the design variation display corresponding to the hold icon that is a black circle hold icon is started from the time of appearance that is not the target of any failure effect or success effect of any hold effect, it will be at least once. The symbol variation display corresponding to the black circle hold icon, which is the target of the failure effect of any hold effect, makes it easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol pattern. Here, the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon is a symbol variation display that starts after the hold corresponding to the hold icon is digested.

(Example 20)
A pachinko machine 100 according to a twentieth example of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 (a) to (z) and (b) to (v). 162 (a) to (z) and (a) to (wo) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. Each drawing of FIG. 162 shows the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 162 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state at the time point shown in FIG. 162 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 3, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area at the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Is displayed, and the hold icon b3 is displayed in the hold 3 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon, and the hold icons b2 and b3 are black circle hold icons. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

  FIG. 162 (b) shows a state where the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

  FIG. 162 (c) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

  FIG. 162 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. B bird k2 is displayed so as to rise to the center of the display screen after moving to the center bottom of the display screen.

  FIG. 162 (e) shows a state in which the B bird effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b3, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icon b3.

  FIG. 162 (f) shows a state where the effect image k8 is displayed so as to overlap the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 is not visible. The effect image k8 in this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon b2 that is not the target of the hold effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 162 (g) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b3 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

  FIG. 162 (h) shows a state where the reduced display of the decorative symbol variation display is finished. In FIG. 162 (h), B bird k2 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

  In FIG. 162 (i), after the B bird k2 is deleted and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state.

  FIG. 162 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a1 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 162 (k) shows a state in which the reservation of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a2. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area.

  FIG. 162 (l) shows a state in which the B bomber effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which the B bomber k5 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. A mode when the B bomber k5 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The appearance of the B bomber k5 is the start of the B bomber production. The B bomber effect in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

  FIG. 162 (m) shows a state where the B bomber effect is being performed. An animation in which the B bomber k5 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire B bomber k5 is displayed.

  FIG. 162 (n) shows that the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bomber effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced, and then the B bomber effect is shown in FIG. The state of progressing from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. The B bomber effect in this example is for the hold icon b3, and an animation of a scene in which a missile is fired from the B bomber k5 is displayed on the target hold icon b3.

  FIG. 162 (o) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene in which the missile launched from the B bomber k5 hits the hold icon b3 and explodes ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be displayed after the missile fired from the B bomber k5 hits the hold icon b3, or the effect image k8 starts to be displayed at the same time when the missile hits the hold icon b3. Also good. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a2 and the holding icon b2 that are not the target of the holding effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 162 (p) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b3 is changed from a black circle hold icon to a triangular hold icon shown in FIG. The B bomber effect in this example is a successful effect in which the target hold icon changes.

  FIG. 162 (q) shows a state where the reduced display of the decorative symbol variation display is finished. In FIG. 162 (q), the B bomber k5 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bomber effect. is there.

  In FIG. 162 (r), after the B bomber k5 is deleted and the B bomber effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. “2” indicates a state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

  FIG. 162 (s) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a2 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 162 (t) shows a state in which the reservation of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a3. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

  FIG. 162 (u) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

  FIG. 162 (v) shows a state where the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

  FIG. 162 (w) shows the B-bird effect shown in FIG. 149 after the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced and displayed. The state of progressing from “aspect α” to “aspect β” is shown. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b3, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icon b3.

  FIG. 162 (x) shows a state where the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the changing icon a3 that is not the target of the hold effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 162 (y) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b3 remains a triangular hold icon. The B bird effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

  FIG. 162 (z) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 162 (z), B bird k2 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears in the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the B bird effect ends.

  FIG. 162 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 162 (z). After the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. Next, a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c is shown.

  FIG. 162 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a3 is deleted before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed. Note that the changing icon may be deleted in the stop table of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 162 (c) shows a state in which the hold of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation between the hold / change icons is displayed. Is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b3 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed as the changing icon a4 in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a4 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. The special figure 1 variable game is a special figure fluctuation that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b3 that is the target of the hold effect of 3 times in total, that is, the 2 B bird effects and the 1 B bombing effect is digested. It is a game.

  FIG. 162 (D) shows a state in which the BUFO effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which BUFok7 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when BUFok 7 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. 149. The beginning of the appearance of BUFOk7 is the start of BUFO production. The BUFO effect in this example is an effect for the changing icon a4.

  FIG. 162 (e) shows a state where the BUFO effect is being performed. An animation in which BUFok 7 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire BUFok 7 is displayed.

  FIG. 162 (f) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the BUFO effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. The BUFok 7 is displayed so as to rise to the right of the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

  FIG. 162 (g) shows a state in which the BUFO effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The BUFO effect is for the changing icon a4, and an animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray is irradiated from the BUFOK7 is displayed on the changing icon a4.

  FIG. 162 (h) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the changing icon a4. When the animation of a scene in which a mysterious light beam irradiated from BUFok 7 hits the changing icon a4 and explodes, an effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be displayed after the mysterious light beam emitted from BUFOK7 hits the changing icon a4, or the effect image k8 is displayed at the same time that the mysterious light beam hits the changing icon a4. May be started. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire changing icon a4, the entire changing icon a4 is not visible.

  FIG. 162 (i) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the changing icon a4 is displayed so as to be visible again. The changing icon a4 is changed from the triangular hold icon to the display mode of the mink hold icon shown in FIG. The BUFO effect is a successful effect in which the target changing icon changes.

  FIG. 162 (N) shows a state in which the reduced display of the decorative symbol variation display is finished. In FIG. 162 (nu), BUFok7 returns to mode α and is erased in such a mode that it disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the BUFO effect ends.

  In FIG. 162 (L), after BUFok7 is deleted and the BUFO effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. The displayed state is shown. In this example, super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. Description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In FIG. 162 (l), after reaching the reach in the decorative symbol variation display, the normal reach effect display may be started instead of the super reach effect display, or the super reach effect display and the normal reach effect display may not be started. Good.

  FIG. 162 (wo) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished after the super reach effect display is finished. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”, which is a jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed (determined display, main stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is a big hit. In addition, the changing icon a4 is deleted before “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the B bomber effect that is the second hold effect is the success effect, but the B bird effect that is the first hold effect is the failure effect. If a failure effect of a B bird effect is performed even once among a plurality of hold effects for one hold icon, a B bird effect targeting the same hold icon as the B bird effect is likely to be performed, If the failure effect of the hold effect is performed even once, the same kind of hold effect for the same hold icon as the hold effect is easily performed. In addition, if the failure effect of the hold effect is performed even once, if the hold icon that is the target of the hold effect becomes the changing icon, the hold effect for the changing icon is easily performed. . It should be noted that the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the failure effect of the hold effect is never more than the symbol change display corresponding to the hold icon that has not been the target of the failure effect of the hold effect or the success effect. It is easier to confirm the big win symbol pattern, and it is the target of the successful effect of the hold effect even once than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon that has never been the target of the failure effect or the success effect of the hold effect. The symbol variation display corresponding to the held icon becomes easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol form. The hold icon which has been the target of the failure effect of the hold effect even once than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon which is the black circle hold icon since the appearance that was not the target of the failure effect or the success effect of the hold effect once. The symbol variation display corresponding to, it is easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol pattern design variation corresponding to the hold icon that is a black circle hold icon from the time of appearance that was never the target of the failure production of the hold production or the success production The symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the success effect of the hold effect is easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol pattern than the display. The probability that the hold icon b3 is the target of the B bird effect is higher than the probability that the hold icon b3 that is the target of the B bird effect and does not change to another type of hold icon is the target of the B bomber effect. It is configured as follows. The probability that a hold icon that is the target of one hold effect and that has not changed to another type of hold icon is the target of another hold effect is higher than the probability that the hold icon is the target of the one hold effect. It is comprised so that it may become.

(Example 21)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 21 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 163 (a) to (z) and (b) to (v). FIGS. 163 (a) to (z) and (a) to (wo) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 163, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 163 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state at the time point shown in FIG. 163 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 3, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area at the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Is displayed, and the hold icon b3 is displayed in the hold 3 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon, and the hold icons b2 and b3 are black circle hold icons. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

  FIG. 163 (b) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

  FIG. 163 (c) shows a state where the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

  FIG. 163 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. B bird k2 is displayed so as to rise to the center of the display screen after moving to the center bottom of the display screen.

  FIG. 163 (e) shows a state in which the B bird effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b3, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icon b3.

  FIG. 163 (f) shows a state where the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 is not visible. The effect image k8 in this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon b2 that is not the target of the hold effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 163 (g) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b3 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

  FIG. 163 (h) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 163 (h), B bird k2 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the B bird effect ends.

  In FIG. 163 (i), after the B bird k2 is deleted and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state.

  FIG. 163 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a1 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 163 (k) shows a state in which the hold of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a2. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area.

  FIG. 163 (l) shows a state where the B bomber effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which the B bomber k5 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. A mode when the B bomber k5 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The appearance of the B bomber k5 is the start of the B bomber production. The B bomber effect in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

  FIG. 163 (m) shows a state in which the B bomber effect is being performed. An animation in which the B bomber k5 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire B bomber k5 is displayed.

  FIG. 163 (n) shows that the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bomber effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced, and then the B bomber effect is shown in FIG. The state of progressing from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. The B bomber effect in this example is for the hold icon b3, and an animation of a scene in which a missile is fired from the B bomber k5 is displayed on the target hold icon b3.

  FIG. 163 (o) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene in which the missile launched from the B bomber k5 hits the hold icon b3 and explodes ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be displayed after the missile fired from the B bomber k5 hits the hold icon b3, or the effect image k8 starts to be displayed at the same time when the missile hits the hold icon b3. Also good. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a2 and the holding icon b2 that are not the target of the holding effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 163 (p) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b3 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bomber effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

  FIG. 163 (q) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 163 (q), the B bomber k5 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears to the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bomber effect. is there.

  In FIG. 163 (r), after the B bomber k5 is erased and the B bomber effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. “2” indicates a state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

  FIG. 163 (s) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a2 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 163 (t) shows a state in which the reservation of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a3. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

  FIG. 163 (u) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

  FIG. 163 (v) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

  FIG. 163 (w) shows the B-bird effect in FIG. 149 after the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced and displayed. The state of progressing from “aspect α” to “aspect β” is shown. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b3, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icon b3.

  FIG. 163 (x) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the changing icon a3 that is not the target of the hold effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 163 (y) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b3 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

  FIG. 163 (z) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 163 (z), B bird k2 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears to the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the B bird effect ends.

  FIG. 163 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 163 (z), and after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. Next, a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c is shown.

  FIG. 163 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a3 is deleted before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed. Note that the changing icon may be deleted in the stop table of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 163 (c) shows a state in which the hold of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation between the hold / change icons is displayed. Is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b3 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed as the changing icon a4 in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a4 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. The special figure 1 variable game is a special figure fluctuation that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b3 that is the target of the hold effect of 3 times in total, that is, the 2 B bird effects and the 1 B bombing effect is digested. It is a game.

  FIG. 163 (d) shows a state in which the BUFO effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which BUFok7 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when BUFok 7 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. 149. The beginning of the appearance of BUFOk7 is the start of BUFO production. The BUFO effect in this example is an effect for the changing icon a4.

  FIG. 163 (e) shows a state where the BUFO effect is being performed. An animation in which BUFok 7 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire BUFok 7 is displayed.

  FIG. 163 (f) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the BUFO effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. The BUFok 7 is displayed so as to rise to the right of the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

  FIG. 163 (g) shows a state in which the BUFO effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The BUFO effect is for the changing icon a4, and an animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray is irradiated from the BUFOK7 is displayed on the changing icon a4.

  FIG. 163 (h) shows a state where the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the changing icon a4. When the animation of a scene in which a mysterious light beam irradiated from BUFok 7 hits the changing icon a4 and explodes, an effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be displayed after the mysterious light beam emitted from BUFOK7 hits the changing icon a4, or the effect image k8 is displayed at the same time that the mysterious light beam hits the changing icon a4. May be started. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire changing icon a4, the entire changing icon a4 is not visible.

  FIG. 163 (i) shows a state in which the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the changing icon a4 is displayed so as to be visible again. The changing icon a4 is changed from a black circle hold icon to a display mode of the Minowa hold icon shown in FIG. The BUFO effect is a successful effect in which the target changing icon changes.

  FIG. 163 (nu) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 163 (nu), BUFOK7 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the BUFO effect ends.

  In FIG. 163 (L), after BUFok7 is erased and the BUFO effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. The displayed state is shown. In this example, super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. Description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In FIG. 163 (l), after reaching the reach of the decorative symbol display, the normal reach effect display may be started instead of the super reach effect display, or the super reach effect display and the normal reach effect display may not be started. Good.

  FIG. 163 (W) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished after the super reach effect display is finished. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”, which is a jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed (determined display, main stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is a big hit. In addition, the changing icon a4 is deleted before “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, the three hold effects (in this example, the B bird effect and the B bomber effect) are targeted for the hold icon corresponding to one hold (the hold icon b3 in this example), and the hold icon The three on-hold effects directed at are the failure effects. When the pending icon is a changing icon (in this example, a changing icon a4), a holding effect (in this example, a WUFO effect) is performed on the changing icon. The pachinko machine 100 targets the changing icon when the holding icon becomes a changing icon when a plurality of holding effects for the one holding icon are failed. It is configured so that a holding effect is easily performed.

  In addition, if a B bird production failure effect is made even once in multiple B bird productions for one hold icon, it is easy to perform a B bird production for the same hold icon even once. If the production failure production is performed, it is easy to perform the same type of hold production as the hold production for the same hold icon as the hold production. In addition, if the failure effect of the hold effect (in this example, the B bird effect) is performed even once, if the hold icon targeted by the hold effect becomes a changing icon, the changing icon is targeted An on-hold effect (in this example, a BUFO effect) is easily performed. In addition, the symbol variation display that is the target of the failure effect of the hold effect is confirmed and displayed in the big hit pattern mode rather than the symbol change display corresponding to the hold icon that has never been the target of the hold effect. Easier than the symbol fluctuation display corresponding to the black circle hold icon that has never been the target of the B bird production failure or the success production, the black circle hold icon that has been the target of the B bird production failure production even once. The corresponding symbol variation display is more likely to display the big hit symbol form. It should be noted that even if the design variation display corresponding to the hold icon that is a black circle hold icon is started from the time of appearance that is not the target of any failure effect or success effect of any hold effect, it will be at least once. The symbol variation display corresponding to the black circle hold icon, which is the target of the failure effect of any hold effect, makes it easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol pattern.

(Example 22)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 22 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 (a) to (z) and (b) to (v). FIGS. 164 (a) to (z) and (a) to (wo) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 164, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 164 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 164 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 3, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area at the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Is displayed, and the hold icon b3 is displayed in the hold 3 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The hold icons b1 and b3 are white circle hold icons, and the hold icon b2 is a black circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

  FIG. 164 (b) shows a state where the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

  FIG. 164 (c) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

  FIG. 164 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. B bird k2 is displayed so as to rise to the center of the display screen after moving to the center bottom of the display screen.

  FIG. 164 (e) shows a state in which the B bird effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b3, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icon b3.

  FIG. 164 (f) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 is not visible. The effect image k8 in this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon b2 that is not the target of the hold effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 164 (g) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b3 changes from a white circle hold icon to a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect in this example is a successful effect in which the target hold icon changes.

  FIG. 164 (h) shows a state in which the reduced display of the decorative symbol variation display is finished. In FIG. 164 (h), B bird k2 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the B bird effect ends.

  In FIG. 164 (i), after the B bird k2 is deleted and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state.

  FIG. 164 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a1 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 164 (k) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a2. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area.

  FIG. 164 (l) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

  FIG. 164 (m) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

  FIG. 164 (n) shows the B-bird effect shown in FIG. 149 after the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced and displayed. The state of progressing from “aspect α” to “aspect β” is shown. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b3, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icon b3.

  FIG. 164 (o) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a2 and the holding icon b2 that are not the target of the holding effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 164 (p) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b3 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

  FIG. 164 (q) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 164 (q), B bird k2 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the B bird effect ends.

  In FIG. 164 (r), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state.

  FIG. 164 (s) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a2 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 164 (t) shows a state in which the hold of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a3. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

  FIG. 164 (u) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

  FIG. 164 (v) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

  FIG. 164 (w) shows the B-bird effect shown in FIG. 149 after the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced and displayed. The state of progressing from “aspect α” to “aspect β” is shown. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b3, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icon b3.

  FIG. 164 (x) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the changing icon a3 that is not the target of the hold effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 164 (y) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b3 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

  FIG. 164 (z) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 164 (z), B bird k2 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

  FIG. 164 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 164 (z). After the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. Next, a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c is shown.

  FIG. 164 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a3 is deleted before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed. Note that the changing icon may be deleted in the stop table of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 164 (c) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation between the hold / change icons is displayed. Is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b3 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed as the changing icon a4 in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a4 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. The special figure 1 variable game is a special figure variable game that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b3 that is the target of the three B bird effects is digested.

  FIG. 164 (d) shows a state in which the BUFO effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which BUFok7 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when BUFok 7 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. 149. The beginning of the appearance of BUFOk7 is the start of BUFO production. The BUFO effect in this example is an effect for the changing icon a4.

  FIG. 164 (e) shows a state in which a BUFO effect is being performed. An animation in which BUFok 7 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire BUFok 7 is displayed.

  FIG. 164 (f) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the BUFO effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. The BUFok 7 is displayed so as to rise to the right of the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

  FIG. 164 (g) shows a state in which the BUFO effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The BUFO effect is for the changing icon a4, and an animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray is irradiated from the BUFOK7 is displayed on the changing icon a4.

  FIG. 164 (h) shows a state where the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the changing icon a4. When the animation of a scene in which a mysterious light beam irradiated from BUFok 7 hits the changing icon a4 and explodes, an effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be displayed after the mysterious light beam emitted from BUFOK7 hits the changing icon a4, or the effect image k8 is displayed at the same time that the mysterious light beam hits the changing icon a4. May be started. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire changing icon a4, the entire changing icon a4 is not visible.

  FIG. 164 (i) shows a state in which the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the changing icon a4 is displayed so as to be visible again. The changing icon a4 is changed from a black circle hold icon to a display mode of the Minowa hold icon shown in FIG. The BUFO effect is a successful effect in which the target changing icon changes.

  FIG. 164 (nu) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 164 (nu), BUFok7 returns to mode α and is erased in such a mode that it disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the BUFO effect ends.

  In FIG. 164, after BUFok7 is erased and the BUFO effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. The displayed state is shown. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. Description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In FIG. 164 (L), after reaching the reach in the decorative symbol variation display, the normal reach effect display may be started instead of the super reach effect display, or the super reach effect display and the normal reach effect display may not be started. Good.

  FIG. 164 (wo) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished after the super reach effect display is finished. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”, which is a jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed (determined display, main stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is a big hit. In addition, the changing icon a4 is deleted before “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, the three hold effects (in this example, the B bird effect) are targeted for the hold icon (in this example, the hold icon b3) corresponding to one hold, and the hold icon 2 One hold effect is a failure effect, and one hold effect is a success effect. When the pending icon is a changing icon (in this example, a changing icon a4), a holding effect (in this example, a WUFO effect) is performed on the changing icon. The pachinko machine 100 targets the changing icon when the holding icon becomes a changing icon when a plurality of holding effects for the one holding icon are failed. It is configured so that a holding effect is easily performed.

  In addition, if a B bird production effect is performed even once in a plurality of B bird productions for a single hold icon, it is easy to perform a B bird production for the same hold icon even once. If the production failure production is performed, it is easy to perform the same type of hold production as the hold production for the same hold icon as the hold production. In addition, if the failure effect of the hold effect (in this example, the B bird effect) is performed even once, if the hold icon targeted by the hold effect becomes a changing icon, the changing icon is targeted An on-hold effect (in this example, a BUFO effect) is easily performed. In addition, the symbol variation display that is the target of the failure effect of the hold effect is confirmed and displayed in the big hit pattern mode rather than the symbol change display corresponding to the hold icon that has never been the target of the hold effect. Easier than the symbol fluctuation display corresponding to the black circle hold icon that has never been the target of the B bird production failure or the success production, the black circle hold icon that has been the target of the B bird production failure production even once. The corresponding symbol variation display is more likely to display the big hit symbol form. It should be noted that even if the design variation display corresponding to the hold icon that is a black circle hold icon is started from the time of appearance that is not the target of any failure effect or success effect of any hold effect, it will be at least once. The symbol variation display corresponding to the black circle hold icon, which is the target of the failure effect of any hold effect, makes it easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol pattern. Here, the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon is a symbol variation display that starts after the hold corresponding to the hold icon is digested.

(Example 23)
A pachinko machine 100 according to a twenty-third example of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 (a) to (z) and (b) to (v). FIGS. 165 (a) to (z) and (a) to (wo) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 165, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 165 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 165 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 3, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area at the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Is displayed, and the hold icon b3 is displayed in the hold 3 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The hold icons b1 and b3 are white circle hold icons, and the hold icon b2 is a black circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

  FIG. 165 (b) shows a state in which the B bomber effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which the B bomber k5 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. A mode when the B bomber k5 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The appearance of the B bomber k5 is the start of the B bomber production. The B bomber effect in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

  FIG. 165 (c) shows a state in which the B bomber effect is being performed. An animation in which the B bomber k5 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire B bomber k5 is displayed.

  FIG. 165 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bomber effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. The B bomber k5 is displayed so as to rise to the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

  FIG. 165 (e) shows a state in which the B bird effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The B bomber effect in this example is for the hold icon b3, and an animation of a scene in which a missile is fired from the B bomber k5 is displayed on the target hold icon b3.

  FIG. 165 (f) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene in which the missile launched from the B bomber k5 hits the hold icon b3 and explodes ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be displayed after the missile fired from the B bomber k5 hits the hold icon b3, or the effect image k8 starts to be displayed at the same time when the missile hits the hold icon b3. Also good. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 is not visible. The effect image k8 in this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon b2 that is not the target of the hold effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 165 (g) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b3 changes from a white circle hold icon to a black circle hold icon. The B bomber effect in this example is a successful effect in which the target hold icon changes.

  FIG. 165 (h) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 165 (h), the B bomber k5 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bomber effect. is there.

  In FIG. 165 (i), after the B bomber k5 is deleted and the B bomber effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. “2” indicates a state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

  FIG. 165 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a1 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 165 (k) shows a state in which the reservation of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a2. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area.

  FIG. 165 (l) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

  FIG. 165 (m) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

  FIG. 165 (n) shows a B bird effect shown in FIG. 149 after the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced and displayed. The state of progressing from “aspect α” to “aspect β” is shown. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b3, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icon b3.

  FIG. 165 (o) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a2 and the holding icon b2 that are not the target of the holding effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 165 (p) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b3 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

  FIG. 165 (q) shows a state where the reduced display of the decorative symbol variation display is finished. In FIG. 165 (q), B bird k2 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the B bird effect ends.

  In FIG. 165 (r), after the B bird k2 is deleted and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state.

  FIG. 165 (s) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a2 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 165 (t) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a3. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

  FIG. 165 (u) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

  FIG. 165 (v) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

  FIG. 165 (w) shows the B-bird effect shown in FIG. 149 after the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced and displayed. The state of progressing from “aspect α” to “aspect β” is shown. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b3, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icon b3.

  FIG. 165 (x) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the changing icon a3 that is not the target of the hold effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 165 (y) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b3 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

  FIG. 165 (z) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 165 (z), B bird k2 is erased in such a manner that it returns to the state α and disappears in the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

  FIG. 165 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 165 (z), and after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. Next, a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c is shown.

  FIG. 165 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a3 is deleted before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed. Note that the changing icon may be deleted in the stop table of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 165 (c) shows a state in which the reservation of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation between the hold / change icons is displayed. Is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b3 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed as the changing icon a4 in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a4 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. The special figure 1 variable game is a special figure variable game that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b3 that is the target of the three B bird effects is digested.

  FIG. 165 (d) shows a state in which the BUFO effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which BUFok7 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when BUFok 7 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. 149. The beginning of the appearance of BUFOk7 is the start of BUFO production. The BUFO effect in this example is an effect for the changing icon a4.

  FIG. 165 (e) shows a state in which a BUFO effect is being performed. An animation in which BUFok 7 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire BUFok 7 is displayed.

  FIG. 165 (f) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the BUFO effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. The BUFok 7 is displayed so as to rise to the right of the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

  FIG. 165 (g) shows a state in which the BUFO effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The BUFO effect is for the changing icon a4, and an animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray is irradiated from the BUFOK7 is displayed on the changing icon a4.

  FIG. 165 (h) shows a state where the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the changing icon a4. When the animation of a scene in which a mysterious light beam irradiated from BUFok 7 hits the changing icon a4 and explodes, an effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be displayed after the mysterious light beam emitted from BUFOK7 hits the changing icon a4, or the effect image k8 is displayed at the same time that the mysterious light beam hits the changing icon a4. May be started. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire changing icon a4, the entire changing icon a4 is not visible.

  FIG. 165 (i) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the changing icon a4 is displayed so as to be visible again. The changing icon a4 is changed from a black circle hold icon to a display mode of the Minowa hold icon shown in FIG. The BUFO effect is a successful effect in which the target changing icon changes.

  FIG. 165 (nu) shows a state in which the reduced display of the decorative symbol variation display is finished. In FIG. 165 (nu), BUFOK7 returns to the mode α and is erased in such a mode that it disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the BUFO effect ends.

  In FIG. 165 (L), after BUFok7 is erased and the BUFO effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. The displayed state is shown. In this example, super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. Description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In FIG. 165 (L), after reaching the reach of the decorative symbol variation display, the normal reach effect display may be started instead of the super reach effect display, or the super reach effect display and the normal reach effect display may not be started. Good.

  FIG. 165 (wo) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished after the super reach effect display is finished. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”, which is a jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed (determined display, main stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is a big hit. In addition, the changing icon a4 is deleted before “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, three hold effects (in this example, one B-bomber effect and two B bird effects) are targeted for a hold icon (in this example, hold icon b3) corresponding to one hold. The two holding effects for the holding icon are failure effects, and the one holding effect is a success effect. When the pending icon is a changing icon (in this example, a changing icon a4), a holding effect (in this example, a WUFO effect) is performed on the changing icon. The pachinko machine 100 targets the changing icon when the holding icon becomes a changing icon when a plurality of holding effects for the one holding icon are failed. It is configured so that a holding effect is easily performed.

  In addition, if a B bird production effect is performed even once in a plurality of B bird productions for a single hold icon, it is easy to perform a B bird production for the same hold icon even once. If the production failure production is performed, it is easy to perform the same type of hold production as the hold production for the same hold icon as the hold production. In addition, if the failure effect of the hold effect (in this example, the B bird effect) is performed even once, if the hold icon targeted by the hold effect becomes a changing icon, the changing icon is targeted An on-hold effect (in this example, a BUFO effect) is easily performed. In addition, the symbol variation display that is the target of the failure effect of the hold effect is confirmed and displayed in the big hit pattern mode rather than the symbol change display corresponding to the hold icon that has never been the target of the hold effect. Easier than the symbol fluctuation display corresponding to the black circle hold icon that has never been the target of the B bird production failure or the success production, the black circle hold icon that has been the target of the B bird production failure production even once. The corresponding symbol variation display is more likely to display the big hit symbol form. It should be noted that even if the design variation display corresponding to the hold icon that is a black circle hold icon is started from the time of appearance that is not the target of any failure effect or success effect of any hold effect, it will be at least once. The symbol variation display corresponding to the black circle hold icon, which is the target of the failure effect of any hold effect, makes it easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol pattern. Here, the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon is a symbol variation display that starts after the hold corresponding to the hold icon is digested.

(Example 24)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 24 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 166 (a) to (z) and (A) to (W). 166 (a) to (z) and (a) to (wo) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 166, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 166 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 166 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 3, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area at the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Is displayed, and the hold icon b3 is displayed in the hold 3 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The hold icons b1 and b3 are white circle hold icons, and the hold icon b2 is a black circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

  FIG. 166 (b) shows a state in which the B bomber effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which the B bomber k5 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. A mode when the B bomber k5 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The appearance of the B bomber k5 is the start of the B bomber production. The B bomber effect in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

  FIG. 166 (c) shows a state in which the B bomber effect is being performed. An animation in which the B bomber k5 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire B bomber k5 is displayed.

  FIG. 166 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B-bomber production, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. The B bomber k5 is displayed so as to rise to the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

  FIG. 166 (e) shows a state in which the B bird effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The B bomber effect in this example is for the hold icon b3, and an animation of a scene in which a missile is fired from the B bomber k5 is displayed on the target hold icon b3.

  FIG. 166 (f) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene in which the missile launched from the B bomber k5 hits the hold icon b3 and explodes ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be displayed after the missile fired from the B bomber k5 hits the hold icon b3, or the effect image k8 starts to be displayed at the same time when the missile hits the hold icon b3. Also good. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 is not visible. The effect image k8 in this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon b2 that is not the target of the hold effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 166 (g) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b3 changes from a white circle hold icon to a button hold icon. The button hold icon is a display that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136. The button hold icon is an operation effective period (operation reception period) in which the press of the chance button 136 is valid while the button hold icon is displayed. The B bomber effect in this example is a successful effect in which the target hold icon changes.

  FIG. 166 (h) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 166 (h), the B bomber k5 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears to the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bomber effect. is there.

  In FIG. 166 (i), after the B bomber k5 is erased and the B bomber effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. “2” indicates a state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

  FIG. 166 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a1 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed. Further, the hold icon b3 is changed from the button hold icon to the black circle hold icon in response to the chance button 136 being pressed by the player. The change display of the hold icon b3 is a response display that is displayed in response to the chance button 136 being pressed by the player.

  FIG. 166 (k) shows a state in which the reservation of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a2. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area.

  FIG. 166 (l) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

  FIG. 166 (m) shows a state where the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

  FIG. 166 (n) shows a B bird effect shown in FIG. 149 after the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced and displayed. The state of progressing from “aspect α” to “aspect β” is shown. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b3, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icon b3.

  FIG. 166 (o) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a2 and the holding icon b2 that are not the target of the holding effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 166 (p) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b3 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

  FIG. 166 (q) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 166 (q), B bird k2 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

  In FIG. 166 (r), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state.

  FIG. 166 (s) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a2 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 166 (t) shows a state in which the reservation of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a3. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

  FIG. 166 (u) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

  FIG. 166 (v) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

  FIG. 166 (w) shows the B bird effect shown in FIG. 149 after the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced and displayed. The state of progressing from “aspect α” to “aspect β” is shown. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b3, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icon b3.

  FIG. 166 (x) shows a state where the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the changing icon a3 that is not the target of the hold effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 166 (y) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b3 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

  FIG. 166 (z) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 166 (z), B bird k2 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

  FIG. 166 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 166 (z), and after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. Next, a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c is shown.

  FIG. 166 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a3 is deleted before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed. Note that the changing icon may be deleted in the stop table of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 166 (C) shows a state in which the hold of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation between the hold / change icons is displayed. Is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b3 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed as the changing icon a4 in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a4 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. The special figure 1 variable game is a special figure variable game that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b3 that is the target of the three B bird effects is digested.

  FIG. 166 (d) shows a state in which the BUFO effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which BUFok7 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when BUFok 7 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. 149. The beginning of the appearance of BUFOk7 is the start of BUFO production. The BUFO effect in this example is an effect for the changing icon a4.

  FIG. 166 (e) shows a state in which a BUFO effect is being performed. An animation in which BUFok 7 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire BUFok 7 is displayed.

  FIG. 166 (f) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the BUFO effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. The BUFok 7 is displayed so as to rise to the right of the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

  FIG. 166 (G) shows a state in which the BUFO effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The BUFO effect is for the changing icon a4, and an animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray is irradiated from the BUFOK7 is displayed on the changing icon a4.

  FIG. 166 (h) shows a state where the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the changing icon a4. When the animation of a scene in which a mysterious light beam irradiated from BUFok 7 hits the changing icon a4 and explodes, an effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be displayed after the mysterious light beam emitted from BUFOK7 hits the changing icon a4, or the effect image k8 is displayed at the same time that the mysterious light beam hits the changing icon a4. May be started. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire changing icon a4, the entire changing icon a4 is not visible.

  FIG. 166 (i) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the changing icon a4 is displayed so as to be visible again. The changing icon a4 is changed from a black circle hold icon to a display mode of the Minowa hold icon shown in FIG. The BUFO effect is a successful effect in which the target changing icon changes.

  FIG. 166 (nu) shows a state in which the reduced display of the decorative symbol variation display is finished. In FIG. 166 (nu), BUFok7 returns to the mode α and is erased in such a mode that it disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the BUFO effect ends.

  In FIG. 166 (L), after BUFok7 is erased and the BUFO effect ends, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. The displayed state is shown. In this example, super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. Description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In FIG. 166 (l), after reaching the reach in the decorative symbol variation display, the normal reach effect display may be started instead of the super reach effect display, or the super reach effect display and the normal reach effect display may not be started. Good.

  FIG. 166 (W) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished after the super reach effect display is finished. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”, which is a jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed (determined display, main stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is a big hit. In addition, the changing icon a4 is deleted before “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, three hold effects (in this example, one B-bomber effect and two B bird effects) are targeted for a hold icon (in this example, hold icon b3) corresponding to one hold. The two holding effects for the holding icon are failure effects, and the one holding effect is a success effect. When the pending icon is a changing icon (in this example, a changing icon a4), a holding effect (in this example, a WUFO effect) is performed on the changing icon. Note that the hold icon b3 may be a button hold icon from the beginning when the display is started in response to the winning of a game ball in the special figure 1 starting port 230. The pachinko machine 100 targets the changing icon when the holding icon becomes a changing icon when a plurality of holding effects for the one holding icon are failed. It is configured so that a holding effect is easily performed.

  In addition, if a B bird production effect is performed even once in a plurality of B bird productions for a single hold icon, it is easy to perform a B bird production for the same hold icon even once. If the production failure production is performed, it is easy to perform the same type of hold production as the hold production for the same hold icon as the hold production. In addition, if the failure effect of the hold effect (in this example, the B bird effect) is performed even once, if the hold icon targeted by the hold effect becomes a changing icon, the changing icon is targeted An on-hold effect (in this example, a BUFO effect) is easily performed. In addition, the symbol variation display that is the target of the failure effect of the hold effect is confirmed and displayed in the big hit pattern mode rather than the symbol change display corresponding to the hold icon that has never been the target of the hold effect. Easier than the symbol fluctuation display corresponding to the black circle hold icon that has never been the target of the B bird production failure or the success production, the black circle hold icon that has been the target of the B bird production failure production even once. The corresponding symbol variation display is more likely to display the big hit symbol form. It should be noted that even if the design variation display corresponding to the hold icon that is a black circle hold icon is started from the time of appearance that is not the target of any failure effect or success effect of any hold effect, it will be at least once. The symbol variation display corresponding to the black circle hold icon, which is the target of the failure effect of any hold effect, makes it easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol pattern. Here, the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon is a symbol variation display that starts after the hold corresponding to the hold icon is digested.

(Example 25)
A pachinko machine 100 according to a twenty-fifth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 167 (a) to (z) and (A) to (W). 167 (a) to (z) and (i) to (wo) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 167, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 167 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 167 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 3, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area at the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Is displayed, and the hold icon b3 is displayed in the hold 3 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The hold icons b1 and b3 are white circle hold icons, and the hold icon b2 is a black circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

  FIG. 167 (b) shows a state where the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

  FIG. 167 (c) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

  FIG. 167 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. B bird k2 is displayed so as to rise to the center of the display screen after moving to the center bottom of the display screen.

  FIG. 167 (e) shows a state in which the B bird effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b3, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icon b3.

  FIG. 167 (f) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 is not visible. The effect image k8 in this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon b2 that is not the target of the hold effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 167 (g) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b3 is changed from a black circle hold icon to a button hold icon. The button hold icon is a display that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136. The button hold icon is an operation effective period (operation reception period) in which the press of the chance button 136 is valid while the button hold icon is displayed. The B bird effect in this example is a successful effect in which the target hold icon changes.

  FIG. 167 (h) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 167 (h), B bird k2 is erased in such a manner that it returns to the state α and disappears in the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

  In FIG. 167 (i), after the B bird k2 is deleted and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state.

  FIG. 167 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a1 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed. Further, the hold icon b3 is changed from the button hold icon to the black circle hold icon in response to the chance button 136 being pressed by the player. The change display of the hold icon b3 is a response display that is displayed in response to the chance button 136 being pressed by the player.

  FIG. 167 (k) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a2. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area.

  FIG. 167 (l) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

  FIG. 167 (m) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

  FIG. 167 (n) shows the B-bird effect shown in FIG. 149 after the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B-bird effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced and displayed. The state of progressing from “aspect α” to “aspect β” is shown. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b3, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icon b3.

  FIG. 167 (o) shows a state where the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a2 and the holding icon b2 that are not the target of the holding effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 167 (p) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b3 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

  FIG. 167 (q) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 167 (q), B bird k2 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the B bird effect ends.

  In FIG. 167 (r), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state.

  FIG. 167 (s) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a2 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 167 (t) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a3. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

  FIG. 167 (u) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

  FIG. 167 (v) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

  FIG. 167 (w) shows the B-bird effect shown in FIG. 149 after the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced and displayed. The state of progressing from “aspect α” to “aspect β” is shown. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b3, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icon b3.

  FIG. 167 (x) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the changing icon a3 that is not the target of the hold effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 167 (y) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b3 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

  FIG. 167 (z) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 167 (z), B bird k2 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the B bird effect ends.

  FIG. 167 (a) shows a state that continues from FIG. 167 (z). After the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. Next, a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c is shown.

  FIG. 167 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a3 is deleted before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed. Note that the changing icon may be deleted in the stop table of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 167 (C) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation between the hold / change icons is displayed. Is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b3 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed as the changing icon a4 in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a4 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. The special figure 1 variable game is a special figure variable game that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b3 that is the target of the three B bird effects is digested.

  FIG. 167 (d) shows a state in which the BUFO effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which BUFok7 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when BUFok 7 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. 149. The beginning of the appearance of BUFOk7 is the start of BUFO production. The BUFO effect in this example is an effect for the changing icon a4.

  FIG. 167 (e) shows a state in which a BUFO effect is being performed. An animation in which BUFok 7 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire BUFok 7 is displayed.

  FIG. 167 (f) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the BUFO effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. The BUFok 7 is displayed so as to rise to the right of the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

  FIG. 167 (g) shows a state in which the BUFO effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The BUFO effect is for the changing icon a4, and an animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray is irradiated from the BUFOK7 is displayed on the changing icon a4.

  FIG. 167 (h) shows a state where the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the changing icon a4. When the animation of a scene in which a mysterious light beam irradiated from BUFok 7 hits the changing icon a4 and explodes, an effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be displayed after the mysterious light beam emitted from BUFOK7 hits the changing icon a4, or the effect image k8 is displayed at the same time that the mysterious light beam hits the changing icon a4. May be started. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire changing icon a4, the entire changing icon a4 is not visible.

  FIG. 167 (i) shows a state in which the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the changing icon a4 is displayed so as to be visible again. The changing icon a4 is changed from a black circle hold icon to a display mode of the Minowa hold icon shown in FIG. The BUFO effect is a successful effect in which the target changing icon changes.

  FIG. 167 (nu) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 167 (nu), BUFOK7 returns to the mode α and is erased in such a mode that it disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the BUFO effect ends.

  In FIG. 167 (L), after BUFok7 is erased and the BUFO effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. The displayed state is shown. In this example, super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. Description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In FIG. 167 (l), normal reach effect display instead of super reach effect display may be started after reaching the reach of the decorative symbol variation display, or super reach effect display and normal reach effect display may not be started. Good.

  FIG. 167 (wo) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished after the super reach effect display is finished. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”, which is a jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed (determined display, main stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is a big hit. In addition, the changing icon a4 is deleted before “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, the three hold effects (in this example, the B bird effect) are targeted for the hold icon (in this example, the hold icon b3) corresponding to one hold, and the hold icon 2 One hold effect is a failure effect, and one hold effect is a success effect. When the pending icon is a changing icon (in this example, a changing icon a4), a holding effect (in this example, a BUFO effect) is performed on the changing icon. Note that the hold icon b3 may be a button hold icon from the beginning when the display is started in response to the winning of a game ball in the special figure 1 starting port 230. The pachinko machine 100 targets the changing icon when the holding icon becomes a changing icon when a plurality of holding effects for the one holding icon are failed. It is configured so that a holding effect is easily performed.

  In addition, if a B bird production effect is performed even once in a plurality of B bird productions for a single hold icon, it is easy to perform a B bird production for the same hold icon even once. If the production failure production is performed, it is easy to perform the same type of hold production as the hold production for the same hold icon as the hold production. In addition, if the failure effect of the hold effect (in this example, the B bird effect) is performed even once, if the hold icon targeted by the hold effect becomes a changing icon, the changing icon is targeted An on-hold effect (in this example, a WUFO effect) is easily performed. In addition, the symbol variation display that is the target of the failure effect of the hold effect is confirmed and displayed in the big hit pattern mode rather than the symbol change display corresponding to the hold icon that has never been the target of the hold effect. Easier than the symbol fluctuation display corresponding to the black circle hold icon that has never been the target of the B bird production failure or the success production, the black circle hold icon that has been the target of the B bird production failure production even once. The corresponding symbol variation display is more likely to display the big hit symbol form. It should be noted that even if the design variation display corresponding to the hold icon that is a black circle hold icon is started from the time of appearance that is not the target of any failure effect or success effect of any hold effect, it will be at least once. The symbol variation display corresponding to the black circle hold icon, which is the target of the failure effect of any hold effect, makes it easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol pattern. Here, the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon is a symbol variation display that starts after the hold corresponding to the hold icon is digested.

(Example 26)
A pachinko machine 100 according to a twenty-sixth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 168 (a) to 168 (z) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 168, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 168 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 168 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. A hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

  FIG. 168 (b) shows that during the special figure 1 variable game, one game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is 2. This shows the state. The hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area at the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b2 is a button hold icon. The button hold icon is a display that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136. The button hold icon is an operation effective period (operation reception period) in which the press of the chance button 136 is valid while the button hold icon is displayed.

  FIG. 168 (c) shows that one more game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the special figure 1 variable game, the number of retained figures in the special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the number of retained figures in the special figure 1 is 3. This shows the state. The hold icon b3 is displayed in the hold 3 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b3 is a white circle hold icon.

  In FIG. 168 (d), during the special figure 1 variable game, one more game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the number of reserved figures in special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the number of reserved figures in special figure 1 is 4. This shows the state. The hold icon b4 is displayed in the hold 4 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b4 is a black circle hold icon.

  FIG. 168 (e) shows a state in which the hold icon b2 changes from the button hold icon to the black circle hold icon in response to the chance button 136 being pressed by the player. The change display of the hold icon b2 is a response display that is displayed in response to the chance button 136 being pressed by the player.

  FIG. 168 (f) shows a state where the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b2.

  FIG. 168 (g) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

  FIG. 168 (h) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. B bird k2 is displayed so as to rise to the center of the display screen after moving to the center bottom of the display screen.

  FIG. 168 (i) shows a state in which the B bird effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b2, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icon b2.

  FIG. 168 (j) shows a state where the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icons b1 and b3 and the changing icon a1 that are not the target of the hold effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 168 (k) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b2 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect of this example is a failure effect that does not have a target hold icon.

  FIG. 168 (l) shows a state in which the reduced display of the decorative symbol variation display is finished. In FIG. 168 (l), B bird k2 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

  In FIG. 168 (m), after the B bird k2 is deleted and the B bird effect is ended, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state.

  FIG. 168 (n) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a1 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 168 (o) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a2. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 3 display area.

  FIG. 168 (p) shows a state where the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b2.

  FIG. 168 (q) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

  FIG. 168 (r) shows the B bird effect shown in FIG. 149 after the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced and displayed. The state of progressing from “aspect α” to “aspect β” is shown. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b2, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icon b2.

  FIG. 168 (s) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a2 and the holding icon b3 that are not the target of the holding effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 168 (t) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b2 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

  FIG. 168 (u) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 168 (u), B bird k2 has been erased in such a manner that it returns to aspect α and disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the B bird effect ends.

  In FIG. 168 (v), after the B bird k2 is deleted and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state.

  FIG. 168 (w) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a2 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 168 (x) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a3. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area. The special figure 1 variable game is a special figure variable game that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b2 that is the target of the B-bird effect twice.

  FIG. 168 (y) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching the reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 168 (y). Description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In FIG. 168 (y), normal reach effect display instead of super reach effect display may be started after reaching the reach in the decorative symbol variation display, or super reach effect display and normal reach effect display may not be started. Good.

  FIG. 168 (z) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished after the super reach effect display is finished. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”, which is a jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed (determined display, main stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is a big hit. In addition, the changing icon a3 is deleted before “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the hold icon b2 that appears in response to the increase in the hold due to the winning of the game ball to the special figure 1 starting port 230 is the button hold icon, and the hold icon b2 that has started to be displayed as the button hold icon is targeted. The holding effect (in this example, the B bird effect) is performed twice, and both of the holding effects are failure effects. Moreover, the big hit symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon b2. The pachinko machine 100 uses the symbol variation table corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the failure effect of the hold effect at least once, rather than the symbol change display corresponding to the hold icon that was never the target of the hold effect. Is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is easily displayed. It should be noted that the symbol variation table corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the successful presentation of the hold effect is larger than the symbol change display corresponding to the hold icon that was not the target of the hold effect even once. The mode is configured to be easily displayed in a fixed manner.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modification of the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 168 (y ′) to (z ′) and (A ′) to (G ′) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in time series. 168 (y ′) to (z ′) and (b ′) to (g ′) show the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. Yes.

  FIG. 168 (y ′) shows a state continued from FIG. 168 (x). In FIG. 168 (y ′), the BUFO effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which BUFok7 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when BUFok 7 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. 149. The beginning of the appearance of BUFOk7 is the start of BUFO production. The BUFO effect in this example is an effect for the changing icon a3.

  FIG. 168 (z ′) shows a state in which a BUFO effect is being performed. An animation in which BUFok 7 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire BUFok 7 is displayed.

  FIG. 168 (a ′) shows a state continued from FIG. 168 (z ′). During the BUFO effect, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed. The reduced display state is shown. The BUFok 7 is displayed so as to rise to the right of the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

  FIG. 168 (B ′) shows a state in which the BUFO effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The BUFO effect targets the changing icon a3, and an animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray is irradiated from the BUFOK7 is displayed on the changing icon a3.

  FIG. 168 (C ') shows a state where the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the changing icon a3. When the animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray irradiated from BUFok 7 hits the changing icon a3 and explodes, an effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be displayed after the mysterious ray irradiated from BUFok 7 hits the changing icon a3, or the effect image k8 is displayed at the same time that the mysterious ray hits the changing icon a3. May be started. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire changing icon a3, the entire changing icon a3 is not visible.

  FIG. 168 (d ') shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the changing icon a4 is displayed so as to be visible again. The changing icon a3 is changed from the black circle hold icon to the display mode of the Minowa hold icon shown in FIG. The BUFO effect is a successful effect in which the target changing icon changes.

  FIG. 168 (e ') shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 168 (e '), BUFOK7 returns to mode α and is erased in such a mode that it disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the BUFO effect ends.

  In FIG. 168 (F '), after BUFok7 is erased and the BUFO effect ends, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 3” is temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. The stop display is shown. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 168 (f '). Description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In FIG. 168 (he '), the normal reach effect display instead of the super reach effect display may be started after reaching the reach of the decorative symbol variation display, or the super reach effect display and the normal reach effect display are not started. Also good.

  FIG. 168 (G ') shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished after the super reach effect display is finished. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”, which is a jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed (determined display, main stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is a big hit. In addition, the changing icon a3 is deleted before “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the two hold effects (in this example, the B bird effect) are for the hold icon corresponding to 1 hold (the hold icon b2 in this example), and the hold icon 2 This is a failure production. When the pending icon is a changing icon (in this example, a changing icon a3), a holding effect (in this example, a BUFO effect) is performed on the changing icon. The pachinko machine 100 targets the changing icon when the holding icon becomes a changing icon when a plurality of holding effects for the holding icon is a failure effect even once. It is configured so that a holding effect is easily performed.

(Example 27)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 27 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 (a) to (z) and (b)). FIGS. 169 (a) to (z), (a) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 169, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 169 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 169 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 4, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area at the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Is displayed, the hold icon b3 is displayed in the hold 3 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the hold icon b4 is displayed in the hold 4 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The hold icons b1 and b3 are white circle hold icons, and the hold icons b2 and b4 are black circle hold icons. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

  FIG. 169 (b) shows a state where the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect in this example is an effect for the hold icons b2 and b4. Thus, the hold effect may be performed for a plurality of hold icons.

  FIG. 169 (c) shows a state where the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

  In FIG. 169 (d), during the B bird effect, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced, and B bird k2 soars to the center of the display screen. After the display, the B bird effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icons b2 and b4, and the animation of the scene where the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icons b2 and b4.

  FIG. 169 (e) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b2, and the effect image k9 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b4. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, effect images k8 and k9 are displayed. The effect images k8 and k9 may be displayed during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eye of the B bird k2. When the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 becomes invisible, and when the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b4, the entire hold icon b4 is displayed. Visible. The effect image k8 in this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icons b1 and b3 that are not the target of the hold effect, and the effect image k9 of this example is the hold icon b3 that is not the target of the hold effect. It is displayed overlapping a part. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 169 (f) shows a state where the effect images k8 and k9 have been deleted. Since the effect images k8 and k9 are deleted, the hold icons b2 and b4 are displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icons b2 and b4 remain black circle hold icons. The B bird effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change. It should be noted that in a hold effect for a plurality of hold icons, an effect of a pattern in which one hold icon changes and the remaining hold icons do not change may be provided.

  FIG. 169 (g) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 169 (g), B bird k2 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears to the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

  In FIG. 169 (h), after the B bird k2 is deleted and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state.

  FIG. 169 (i) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a1 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 169 (j) shows a state in which the hold of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a2. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 3 display area.

  FIG. 169 (k) shows a state where the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect in this example is an effect for the hold icons b2 and b4.

  FIG. 169 (l) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

  In FIG. 169 (m), during the B bird effect, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced, and the B bird k2 soars to the center of the display screen. After the display, the B bird effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icons b2 and b4, and the animation of the scene where the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icons b2 and b4.

  FIG. 169 (n) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b2, and the effect image k9 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b4. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, effect images k8 and k9 are displayed. The effect images k8 and k9 may be displayed during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eye of the B bird k2. When the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 becomes invisible, and when the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b4, the entire hold icon b4 is displayed. Visible. The effect image k8 in this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icons b1 and b3 that are not the target of the hold effect, and the effect image k9 of this example is the hold icon b3 that is not the target of the hold effect. It is displayed overlapping a part. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 169 (o) shows a state where the effect images k8 and k9 are deleted. Since the effect images k8 and k9 are deleted, the hold icons b2 and b4 are displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icons b2 and b4 remain black circle hold icons. The B bird effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change. It should be noted that in a hold effect for a plurality of hold icons, an effect of a pattern in which one hold icon changes and the remaining hold icons do not change may be provided.

  FIG. 169 (p) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 169 (p), B bird k2 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

  In FIG. 169 (q), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state.

  FIG. 169 (r) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a2 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 169 (s) shows a state in which the reservation of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a3. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area.

  FIG. 169 (t) shows a state where the BUFO effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which BUFok7 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when BUFok 7 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. 149. The beginning of the appearance of BUFOk7 is the start of BUFO production. The BUFO effect in this example is an effect for the changing icon a3.

  FIG. 169 (u) shows a state in which a BUFO effect is being performed. An animation in which BUFok 7 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire BUFok 7 is displayed.

  In FIG. 169 (v), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the BUFO effect, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced, and the BUFok 7 is displayed so as to rise to the right of the display screen center. FIG. 149 shows a state in which the BUFO effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β”. The BUFO effect targets the changing icon a3, and an animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray is irradiated from the BUFOK7 is displayed on the changing icon a3.

  FIG. 169 (w) shows a state where the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the changing icon a3. When the animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray irradiated from BUFok 7 hits the changing icon a3 and explodes, an effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be displayed after the mysterious ray irradiated from BUFok 7 hits the changing icon a3, or the effect image k8 is displayed at the same time that the mysterious ray hits the changing icon a3. May be started. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire changing icon a3, the entire changing icon a3 is not visible.

  FIG. 169 (x) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the changing icon a3 is displayed so as to be visible again. The changing icon a3 is changed from the black circle hold icon to the display mode of the Minowa hold icon shown in FIG. The BUFO effect is a successful effect in which the target changing icon changes.

  FIG. 169 (y) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 169 (y), BUFOK7 returns to the mode α and is erased in such a mode that it disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the BUFO effect ends.

  In FIG. 169 (z), after BUFok7 is deleted and the BUFO effect ends, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. The displayed state is shown. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the variation display of the decorative symbols in FIG. 169 (z). Description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In FIG. 169 (z), normal reach effect display may be started instead of super reach effect display after reaching the reach of the decorative symbol variation display, or super reach effect display and normal reach effect display may not be started. Good.

  FIG. 169 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished after the super reach effect display is finished. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”, which is a jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed (determined display, main stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is a big hit. In addition, the changing icon a4 is deleted before “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, B bird effects are performed a plurality of times (in this example, twice) for a plurality of black circle hold icons, and all B bird effects are failure effects. In addition, in the symbol variation display started by the digestion of the hold corresponding to the hold icon b2 which is the target of the B bird effect, the big hit symbol form is finally displayed. When a hold effect for a plurality of hold icons is performed, the jackpot symbol form is finally determined in the symbol variation display that starts with the digestion of the hold corresponding to all the hold icons of the plurality of hold icons. It may be configured so as to be easily displayed, or in the symbol variation display that starts with the digestion of the hold corresponding to one hold icon among the plurality of hold icons, the jackpot symbol form is finally easily displayed in a fixed manner. Alternatively, in the symbol variation display that starts with the digestion of the hold corresponding to a part of the hold icons among the plurality of hold icons, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol mode is finally easily displayed. .

(Example 28)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 28 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 (a) to (z). 170 (a) to (z) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 170, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 170 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 170 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. A hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

  In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 170 (a), the lower plate 128 is full of game balls, and a black horizontally long rectangular image is displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and white is contained therein. A full dish display k10 including a character string image of “exclude ball!” Is displayed. The dish full tank display k10 indicates that the player operates the ball removal lever 132 when the lower dish 128 is filled with game balls by the lower dish full sensor that detects that the lower dish 128 is full. This is the display requested. The ball removal display k10 is displayed by the control of the first sub-control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including information about the lower pan full tank error from the main control unit 300. The dish full tank display may be called a ball empty display or a lower dish full tank error notification image. The dish full display k10 may be displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol variation display, the temporary stop display, and the stop display.

  FIG. 170 (b) shows that one game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the special figure 1 variable game, the number of retained figures in the special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the number of retained figures in the special figure 1 is 2. This shows the state. The hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area at the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b2 is a button hold icon. The button hold icon is a display that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136. The button hold icon is an operation effective period (operation reception period) in which the press of the chance button 136 is valid while the button hold icon is displayed.

  FIG. 170 (c) shows that one more game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the special figure 1 variable game, the number of retained figures in FIG. 1 is increased by 1, and the number of retained figures in FIG. This shows the state. The hold icon b3 is displayed in the hold 3 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b3 is a white circle hold icon.

  FIG. 170 (d) shows that one more game ball wins the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the special figure 1 variable game, the number of reserved figures in special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the number of reserved figures in special figure 1 is 4. This shows the state. The hold icon b4 is displayed in the hold 4 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b4 is a black circle hold icon.

  FIG. 170 (e) shows a state in which the hold icon b2 changes from the button hold icon to the black circle hold icon in response to the chance button 136 being pressed by the player. The change display of the hold icon b2 is a response display that is displayed in response to the chance button 136 being pressed by the player.

  FIG. 170 (f) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect in this example is an effect for the hold icon b. At the beginning of the start of the B bird effect, B bird k2 is not overlapped with the dish full tank display k10.

  FIG. 170 (g) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed, and B bird k2 is overlapped with dish full display k10.

  FIG. 170 (h) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. B bird k2 is displayed so as to rise to the center of the display screen after moving to the center bottom of the display screen. B bird k2 is displayed overlapping the dish full tank display k10.

  FIG. 170 (i) shows a state in which the B bird effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b2, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icon b2. Since the eyes of B bird k2 are overlapped with the dish full display k10, it is difficult for the player to specify the moment when the laser beam is irradiated.

  FIG. 170 (j) shows a state where the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. The dish full tank display k10 does not overlap the effect image k8 and the hold icon b2 that is the target of the hold effect. In this way, a series of effect displays (pending change animation) in which the effect image is overlapped with the hold icon that is the target of the hold effect, and then the effect image is erased and the hold icon is displayed so as to be visible again. It is not overlapped with the dish full tank display k10. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icons b1 and b3 and the changing icon a1 that are not the target of the hold effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 170 (k) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b2 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect of this example is a failure effect that does not have a target hold icon. Further, B bird k2 is overlapped with the dish full tank display k10.

  FIG. 170 (l) shows a state in which the reduced display of the decorative symbol variation display is finished. In FIG. 170 (l), B bird k2 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears in the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect. When B bird k2 disappears above the left end of the display screen, B bird k2 is not overlapped with dish full display k10.

  In FIG. 170 (m), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state.

  FIG. 170 (n) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a1 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 170 (o) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is consumed and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a2. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 3 display area.

  FIG. 170 (p) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b2. At the beginning of the start of the B bird effect, the B bird k2 is not overlapped with the dish full tank display k10.

  FIG. 170 (q) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed, and B bird k2 is overlapped with dish full display k10.

  FIG. 170 (r) shows the B bird effect shown in FIG. 149 after the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced and displayed. The state of progressing from “aspect α” to “aspect β” is shown. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b2, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icon b2. Since the eyes of B bird k2 are overlapped with the dish full display k10, it is difficult for the player to specify the moment when the laser beam is irradiated.

  FIG. 170 (s) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. The dish full tank display k10 does not overlap the effect image k8 and the hold icon b2 that is the target of the hold effect. In this way, a series of effect displays (pending change animation) in which the effect image is overlapped with the hold icon that is the target of the hold effect, and then the effect image is erased and the hold icon is displayed so as to be visible again. It is not overlapped with the dish full tank display k10. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a2 and the holding icon b3 that are not the target of the holding effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 170 (t) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b2 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change. Further, B bird k2 is overlapped with the dish full tank display k10.

  FIG. 170 (u) shows a state in which the reduced display of the decorative symbol variation display is finished. In FIG. 170 (u), B bird k2 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears to the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect. When B bird k2 disappears above the left end of the display screen, B bird k2 is not overlapped with dish full display k10.

  In FIG. 170 (v), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state.

  FIG. 170 (w) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a2 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 170 (x) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is completed and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a3. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area. The special figure 1 variable game is a special figure variable game that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b2 that is the target of the B-bird effect twice.

  FIG. 170 (y) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the variation display of the decorative symbols in FIG. 170 (y). Description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In FIG. 170 (y), normal reach effect display instead of super reach effect display may be started after reaching the reach in the decorative symbol variation display, or super reach effect display and normal reach effect display may not be started. Good.

  FIG. 170 (z) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished after the super reach effect display is finished. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”, which is a jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed (determined display, main stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is a big hit. In addition, the changing icon a3 is deleted before “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, a lower pan full tank error has occurred, and a full pan display k10 is displayed. The display of the hold effect (B bird k2 in this example) is not overlapped with the dish full tank display k10 at the beginning of the appearance, but is overlapped with the dish full tank display k10 after appearance, and exits from the display screen. Thus, when erasing is performed, it is not overlapped with the dish full display k10. In this example, the B-bird effect of the hold effect has been described as an example, but the same applies to other hold effects.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modification of the present embodiment will be described. 170 (y ′) to (z ′) and (A ′) to (G ′) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to this modification in time series. 170 (y ′) to (z ′), (b ′) to (g ′), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. Yes.

  FIG. 170 (y ′) shows a state continued from FIG. 170 (x). In FIG. 170 (y ′), the BUFO effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which BUFok7 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when BUFok 7 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. 149. The beginning of the appearance of BUFOk7 is the start of BUFO production. The BUFO effect in this example is an effect for the changing icon a3. At the beginning of the BUFO production, BUFOk7 is not overlapped with the dish full display k10.

  FIG. 170 (z ′) shows a state in which a BUFO effect is being performed. An animation in which BUFok 7 moves to the left is displayed, and BUFok 7 is overlapped with the dish full display k10.

  FIG. 170 (A ′) shows a state continued from FIG. 170 (Z ′). During the BUFO effect, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed. The reduced display state is shown. The BUFok 7 is displayed so as to rise to the right of the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen. BUFOK7 is overlapped with the dish full tank display k10.

  FIG. 170 (B ′) shows a state in which the BUFO effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The BUFO effect targets the changing icon a3, and an animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray is irradiated from the BUFOK7 is displayed on the changing icon a3. Since the light irradiation spot of BUFOK7 is overlapped with the dish full display k10, it is difficult for the player to specify the moment when the light is irradiated.

  FIG. 170 (c ′) shows a state where the effect image k8 is displayed so as to overlap the changing icon a3. When the animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray irradiated from BUFok 7 hits the changing icon a3 and explodes, an effect image k8 is displayed. The dish full tank display k10 is not overlapped with the effect image k8 and the changing icon a3 that is the target of the hold effect. In this way, a series of effect display (pending change animation) in which the effect image is overlapped with the changing icon that is the target of the holding effect, and then the effect image is deleted and the changing icon is displayed so as to be visible again. Is not overlapped with the dish full display k10. The effect image k8 may be displayed after the mysterious ray irradiated from BUFok 7 hits the changing icon a3, or the effect image k8 is displayed at the same time that the mysterious ray hits the changing icon a3. May be started. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire changing icon a3, the entire changing icon a3 is not visible.

  FIG. 170 (d ') shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the changing icon a4 is displayed so as to be visible again. The changing icon a3 is changed from the black circle hold icon to the display mode of the Minowa hold icon shown in FIG. The BUFO effect is a successful effect in which the target changing icon changes. Further, BUFOK7 is overlapped with the dish full tank display k10.

  FIG. 170 (e ') shows a state in which the reduced display of the decorative symbol variation display is finished. In FIG. 170 (e '), BUFOK7 returns to mode α and is erased in such a mode that it disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the BUFO effect ends. When BUFok 7 disappears above the left end of the display screen, BUFok 7 is not overlapped with the dish full display k10.

  In FIG. 170 (He ′), after BUFok7 is erased and the BUFO effect ends, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 3” is temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. The stop display is shown. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. Description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In FIG. 170 (he '), normal reach effect display instead of super reach effect display may be started after reaching the reach of the decorative symbol variation display, or the super reach effect display and normal reach effect display are not started. Also good.

  FIG. 170 (G) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished after the super reach effect display is finished. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”, which is a jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed (determined display, main stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is a big hit. In addition, the changing icon a3 is deleted before “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed.

  In this modification, a lower pan full tank error has occurred, and a full pan display k10 is displayed. The display of the hold effect (in this example, BUFOK7) is not overlapped with the dish full tank display k10 at the beginning of the appearance, but is overlapped with the dish full tank display k10 in the aspect β after the appearance, and leaves the display screen. When it is deleted, it is not overlapped with the dish full display k10. In this example, the BUFO effect of the hold effect has been described as an example, but the same applies to other hold effects.

  When the failure effect of the hold effect (B bird effect in this example) for one hold icon is repeatedly performed, the display of the hold effect (B bird k2BUFFOk7) is overlapped by the dish full display. Therefore, the display of the hold effect is not disturbed by the full tray display, so that the player wants to see it, and the player wants to perform the ball removal operation. There is a case where it is possible to reduce the act of continuing the tongue state for a long time. If the plate full state is continued for a long time, it may cause a ball clogging in the gaming machine or a failure of the payout device, and the prize ball will not be paid out to the player from the gaming machine. Since a signal indicating that there is a prize ball is not transmitted from the gaming machine to the hall computer in a timely manner, the hall computer may not be able to accurately grasp the operating state of the gaming machine. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce that the lower plate full state is continued for a long time, and therefore, these adverse effects may be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the display of the hold effect such as the B bird effect and the BUFO effect (in this example, B bird k2, BUFOk 7) will not be overlapped by the dish full tank display soon after the appearance / exit. Although it was shown, it is not limited to this, and the display of the hold effect may be prevented from being overlapped by the dish full display when both the appearance of the hold effect such as the B bird effect and the BUFO effect and the exit are left. The display of the hold effect may not be overlapped with the dish full tank display only when the display of the effect is displayed, and the display of the hold effect may be overlapped with the dish full tank display when the display of the hold effect is left. The display of the hold effect is not overlapped by the dish full display only when leaving the display of the hold effect, and the display of the hold effect is overlapped with the dish full display. It may be the current, display the pending production may also be display of appearance, sent off in a state of being overlapped on full display dish is carried out.

In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which at least a part of the display of the hold effect such as the B bird effect and the BUFO effect displayed for the same hold icon may be overlapped by the dish full display. It is not limited to the above, and it may be configured so that at least a part of the display of all the reserved effects may be overlapped with the dish full tank display, or all the displays of all the reserved effects are displayed as the dish full tank display. For example, at least a part or all of the display of one hold effect (for example, B bird effect) of a plurality of hold effects is overlapped by the dish full display. The display of the hold effect (for example, the W bird effect) having an appearance rate higher than that of the one hold effect may not be overlapped by the dish full tank display. Even if the display of the hold effect (for example, W bird effect) whose progress rate is lower than the one hold effect may be configured so as not to be overlapped by the dish full tank display. Alternatively, the display of the hold effect (for example, W bird) having a lower success rate than the one hold effect may be configured not to be overlapped by the dish full tank display.
Conversely, at least a part or all of the display of a part of the reserved effect such as the B bird effect may be overlapped by the dish full display, but the reserved effect having a lower appearance rate than the B bird effect (for example, B bombing The display of the machine effect) may not be overlapped by the dish full display, and the display of the hold effect (for example, WUFO) having a higher progress rate than the B bird effect is displayed. The display may not be overlapped by the display, and the display of the hold effect (for example, WUFO) having a higher success rate than the B bird effect is not overlapped by the dish full display. It may be configured as follows.
However, there is a case where at least a part or all of the display of the hold effect for any of the hold icons of some of the “hold 1 to hold 4” such as B bird is overlapped by the dish full display, The display of the hold effect (for example, WUFO) for the “hold 0” hold icon may be configured not to be overlapped by the dish full tank display, or the “hold 0” hold may be configured. The display of the hold effect for the icon (for example, WUFO) may be configured so as not to be overlapped by the dish full tank display, or the hold effect for the hold icon of “Take 0”. (For example, WUFO) may be configured not to be overlapped by the dish full tank display.
Conversely, at least a part or all of the hold effect display for some “hold 0” hold icons such as the B bird effect may be overlapped by the dish full display. The display of the hold effect (for example, W bird) for any of the hold icons of “4” may be configured not to be overlapped by the dish full tank display, The display of the hold effect (for example, W bird) for any of the hold icons of “4” may be configured not to be overlapped by the dish full tank display, The display of the hold effect (for example, W bird) targeting any of the hold icons of “4” may be configured not to be overlapped by the dish full tank display.

  In the present embodiment, an example in which at least a part of B bird k2 or BUFOKk7 and at least a part of a laser beam or a mysterious beam emitted from B bird k2 or BUFFOk7 may be overlapped by the dish full display. It was. Bbird k2, BUFOKk7, etc. are characters that are displayed regardless of whether the hold effect is a success effect or a failure effect, and the laser beam and the mysterious light beam advance from aspect α to aspect β. It is an additional character that is not displayed in some failure effects such as when there is no such effect. For example, in the case of the W bomber effect, the W bomber k4 is a character, and a missile fired from the W bomber k4 corresponds to an additional character. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least a part or all of the character may be overlapped by the full dish display, but the additional character is configured not to be overlapped by the full dish display. May be. Conversely, at least part or all of the additional character may be overlapped by the dish full display, but the character may be configured not to be overlapped by the dish full display.

  In the present embodiment, there is a case where at least part of B bird k2, BUFOKk7, etc. and at least part of holding effects such as laser beams and mysterious rays emitted from B bird k2, BUFFOk7 are overlapped by the dish full display. Although there is an example in which the hold change animation is not overlapped by the dish full display, it is not limited to this, and at least a part of the hold change animation may be overlapped by the dish full display. The production may be configured not to be overlapped by the dish full tank display.

  In the present embodiment, an example of the full dish display is shown, but an error during opening that is displayed when it is detected that the main body 104 is open with respect to the outer frame 102 instead of the full dish display. Other displays such as a display or an error display during opening that is displayed when it is detected that the front frame door 106 is open with respect to the main body may be applied.

(Example 29)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 29 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 171 (a) to (z) and (b) to (g). 171 (a) to (z) and (b) to (g) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 171, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 171 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 171 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. A hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

  In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 171 (a), the lower plate 128 is filled with game balls, and a black horizontally long rectangular image is displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and white is included in the image. A full dish display k10 including a character string image of “exclude ball!” Is displayed. The dish full tank display k10 indicates that the player operates the ball removal lever 132 when the lower dish 128 is filled with game balls by the lower dish full sensor that detects that the lower dish 128 is full. This is the display requested. The ball removal display k10 is displayed by the control of the first sub-control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including information about the lower pan full tank error from the main control unit 300. The dish full tank display may be called a ball empty display or a lower dish full tank error notification image. The dish full display k10 may be displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol variation display, the temporary stop display, and the stop display.

  In FIG. 171 (b), during the special figure 1 variable game, one game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is 2. This shows the state. The hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area at the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b2 is a button hold icon. The button hold icon is a display that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136. The button hold icon is an operation effective period (operation reception period) in which the press of the chance button 136 is valid while the button hold icon is displayed.

  FIG. 171 (c) shows that one more game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the special figure 1 variable game, the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is three. This shows the state. The hold icon b3 is displayed in the hold 3 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b3 is a white circle hold icon.

  FIG. 171 (d) shows that during the special figure 1 variable game, one more game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the number of reserved figures in special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the number of reserved figures in special figure 1 is 4. This shows the state. The hold icon b4 is displayed in the hold 4 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b4 is a black circle hold icon.

  FIG. 171 (e) shows a state in which the hold icon b2 changes from the button hold icon to the black circle hold icon in response to the chance button 136 being pressed by the player. The change display of the hold icon b2 is a response display that is displayed in response to the chance button 136 being pressed by the player.

  FIG. 171 (f) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect in this example is an effect for the hold icon b. At the beginning of the start of the B bird effect, B bird k2 is not overlapped with the dish full tank display k10.

  FIG. 171 (g) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed, and B bird k2 is overlapped with dish full display k10.

  FIG. 171 (h) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. B bird k2 is displayed so as to rise to the center of the display screen after moving to the center bottom of the display screen. B bird k2 is displayed overlapping the dish full tank display k10.

  FIG. 171 (i) shows a state in which the B bird effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b2, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icon b2. Since the eyes of B bird k2 are overlapped with the dish full display k10, it is difficult for the player to specify the moment when the laser beam is irradiated.

  FIG. 171 (j) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. The dish full tank display k10 does not overlap the effect image k8 and the hold icon b2 that is the target of the hold effect. In this way, a series of effect displays (pending change animation) in which the effect image is overlapped with the hold icon that is the target of the hold effect, and then the effect image is erased and the hold icon is displayed so as to be visible again. It is not overlapped with the dish full tank display k10. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icons b1 and b3 and the changing icon a1 that are not the target of the hold effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 171 (k) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b2 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect of this example is a failure effect that does not have a target hold icon. Further, B bird k2 is overlapped with the dish full tank display k10.

  FIG. 171 (l) shows a state in which the reduced display of the decorative symbol variation display is finished. In FIG. 171 (l), B bird k2 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect. When B bird k2 disappears above the left end of the display screen, B bird k2 is not overlapped with dish full display k10.

  In FIG. 171 (m), after the B bird k2 is deleted and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state. In addition, since the lower plate full tank error has been eliminated by the player's operation of the ball removal lever 132, the plate full tank display k10 is erased.

  FIG. 171 (n) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a1 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 171 (o) shows a state in which the reservation of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a2. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 3 display area.

  FIG. 171 (p) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b2.

  FIG. 171 (q) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed, and B bird k2 is overlapped with dish full display k10.

  FIG. 171 (r) shows a B bird effect shown in FIG. 149 after the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced and displayed. The state of progressing from “aspect α” to “aspect β” is shown. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b2, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icon b2.

  FIG. 171 (s) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a2 and the holding icon b3 that are not the target of the holding effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 171 (t) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b2 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

  FIG. 171 (u) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 171 (u), B bird k2 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears to the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the B bird effect ends.

  In FIG. 171 (v), after the B bird k2 is deleted and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state.

  FIG. 171 (w) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a2 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed. In addition, since the lower plate 128 is filled with game balls again and a lower plate full tank error occurs, the plate full tank display k10 is displayed.

  FIG. 171 (x) shows a state in which the hold of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a3. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area. The special figure 1 variable game is a special figure variable game that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b2 that is the target of the B-bird effect twice.

  FIG. 171 (y) shows a state in which the BUFO effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which BUFok7 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when BUFok 7 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. 149. The beginning of the appearance of BUFOk7 is the start of BUFO production. The BUFO effect in this example is an effect for the changing icon a3. At the beginning of the BUFO production, BUFOk7 is not overlapped with the dish full display k10.

  FIG. 171 (z) shows a state where a BUFO effect is being performed. An animation in which BUFok 7 moves to the left is displayed, and BUFok 7 is overlapped with the dish full display k10.

  FIG. 171 (a) shows a state that continues from FIG. 171 (z). During the BUFO effect, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. It shows the state that was done. The BUFok 7 is displayed so as to rise to the right of the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen. BUFOK7 is overlapped with the dish full tank display k10.

  FIG. 171 (b) shows a state in which the BUFO effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The BUFO effect targets the changing icon a3, and an animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray is irradiated from the BUFOK7 is displayed on the changing icon a3. Since the light irradiation spot of BUFOK7 is overlapped with the dish full display k10, it is difficult for the player to specify the moment when the light is irradiated.

  FIG. 171 (c) shows a state where the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the changing icon a3. When the animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray irradiated from BUFok 7 hits the changing icon a3 and explodes, an effect image k8 is displayed. The dish full tank display k10 is not overlapped with the effect image k8 and the changing icon a3 that is the target of the hold effect. In this way, a series of effect display (pending change animation) in which the effect image is overlapped with the changing icon that is the target of the holding effect, and then the effect image is deleted and the changing icon is displayed so as to be visible again. Is not overlapped with the dish full display k10. The effect image k8 may be displayed after the mysterious ray irradiated from BUFok 7 hits the changing icon a3, or the effect image k8 is displayed at the same time that the mysterious ray hits the changing icon a3. May be started. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire changing icon a3, the entire changing icon a3 is not visible.

  FIG. 171 (d) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the changing icon a4 is displayed so as to be visible again. The changing icon a3 is changed from the black circle hold icon to the display mode of the Minowa hold icon shown in FIG. The BUFO effect is a successful effect in which the target changing icon changes. Further, BUFOK7 is overlapped with the dish full tank display k10.

  FIG. 171 (e) shows a state in which the reduced display of the decorative symbol variation display is finished. In FIG. 171 (e), BUFOK7 returns to the mode α and is erased in such a mode that it disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the BUFO effect ends. When BUFok 7 disappears above the left end of the display screen, BUFok 7 is not overlapped with the dish full display k10.

  In FIG. 171 (F), after BUFok7 is deleted and the BUFO effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. The displayed state is shown. In this example, super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. Description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In FIG. 171 (F), normal reach effect display instead of super reach effect display may be started after reaching the reach of the decorative symbol variation display, or super reach effect display and normal reach effect display may not be started. Good.

  FIG. 171 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished after the super reach effect display is finished. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”, which is a jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed (determined display, main stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is a big hit. In addition, the changing icon a3 is deleted before “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed.

  In the present embodiment, it is difficult for the player to perform the ball removal operation by making it difficult to see the on-hold effect by the dish full tank display k10, and as a result, the player performs the ball removal operation to display the dish full tank display k10. Is erased and it becomes easier to see the second on-hold production, but while the player is out of luck, the lower plate 128 becomes full again with the game ball due to the winning of the game ball to the general prize opening, etc. The display k10 is displayed again, and a part of the display of the BUFO effect is overlapped by the dish full tank display k10.

(Example 30)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 30 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 172 (a) to (z) and (b) to (g). FIGS. 172 (a) to (z) and (b) to (g) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 172, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 172 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 172 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. A hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 172 (a), the lower plate 128 is filled with game balls, and a black horizontally long rectangular image is displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and white is contained therein. A full dish display k10 including a character string image of “exclude ball!” Is displayed. The dish full tank display k10 indicates that the player operates the ball removal lever 132 when the lower dish 128 is filled with game balls by the lower dish full sensor that detects that the lower dish 128 is full. This is the display requested. The ball removal display k10 is displayed by the control of the first sub-control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including information about the lower pan full tank error from the main control unit 300. The dish full tank display may be called a ball empty display or a lower dish full tank error notification image. The dish full display k10 may be displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol variation display, the temporary stop display, and the stop display.

  FIG. 172 (b) shows that one game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the special figure 1 variable game, the number of retained figures in the special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the number of retained figures in the special figure 1 is 2. This shows the state. The hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area at the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b2 is a button hold icon. The button hold icon is a display that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136. The button hold icon is an operation effective period (operation reception period) in which the press of the chance button 136 is valid while the button hold icon is displayed.

  FIG. 172 (c) shows that one more game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the special figure 1 variable game, the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is 3. This shows the state. The hold icon b3 is displayed in the hold 3 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b3 is a white circle hold icon.

  FIG. 172 (d) shows that, during the special figure 1 variable game, one more game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the number of reserved figures in special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the number of reserved figures in special figure 1 is 4. This shows the state. The hold icon b4 is displayed in the hold 4 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b4 is a black circle hold icon.

  FIG. 172 (e) shows a state in which the hold icon b2 is changed from the button hold icon to the black circle hold icon in response to the chance button 136 being pressed by the player. The change display of the hold icon b2 is a response display that is displayed in response to the chance button 136 being pressed by the player.

  FIG. 172 (f) shows a state where the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect in this example is an effect for the hold icon b. At the beginning of the start of the B bird effect, B bird k2 is not overlapped with the dish full tank display k10.

  FIG. 172 (g) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed, and B bird k2 is overlapped with dish full display k10.

  FIG. 172 (h) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. B bird k2 is displayed so as to rise to the center of the display screen after moving to the center bottom of the display screen. B bird k2 is displayed overlapping the dish full tank display k10.

  FIG. 172 (i) shows a state in which the B bird effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b2, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icon b2. Since the eyes of B bird k2 are overlapped with the dish full display k10, it is difficult for the player to specify the moment when the laser beam is irradiated.

  FIG. 172 (j) shows a state where the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. The dish full tank display k10 does not overlap the effect image k8 and the hold icon b2 that is the target of the hold effect. In this way, a series of effect displays (pending change animation) in which the effect image is overlapped with the hold icon that is the target of the hold effect, and then the effect image is erased and the hold icon is displayed so as to be visible again. It is not overlapped with the dish full tank display k10. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icons b1 and b3 and the changing icon a1 that are not the target of the hold effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 172 (k) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b2 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect of this example is a failure effect that does not have a target hold icon. Further, B bird k2 is overlapped with the dish full tank display k10.

  FIG. 172 (l) shows a state where the reduced display of the decorative symbol variation display is finished. In FIG. 172 (l), B bird k2 is deleted in such a manner that it returns to mode α and disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the B bird effect ends. When B bird k2 disappears above the left end of the display screen, B bird k2 is not overlapped with dish full display k10.

  In FIG. 172 (m), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state. In addition, since the lower plate full tank error has been eliminated by the player's operation of the ball removal lever 132, the plate full tank display k10 is erased.

  FIG. 172 (n) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a1 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 172 (o) shows a state in which the reservation of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a2. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 3 display area.

  FIG. 172 (p) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b2.

  FIG. 172 (q) shows a state where the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed, and B bird k2 is overlapped with dish full display k10.

  FIG. 172 (r) shows the B bird effect shown in FIG. 149 after the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced and displayed. The state of progressing from “aspect α” to “aspect β” is shown. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b2, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icon b2.

  FIG. 172 (s) shows a state where the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a2 and the holding icon b3 that are not the target of the holding effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 172 (t) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b2 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

  FIG. 172 (u) shows a state where the reduced display of the decorative symbol variation display is finished. In FIG. 172 (u), B bird k2 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the B bird effect ends.

  In FIG. 172 (v), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state.

  FIG. 172 (w) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a2 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 172 (x) shows a state in which the hold of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a3. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area. The special figure 1 variable game is a special figure variable game that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b2 that is the target of the B-bird effect twice.

  FIG. 172 (y) shows a state in which the BUFO effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which BUFok7 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when BUFok 7 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. 149. The beginning of the appearance of BUFOk7 is the start of BUFO production. The BUFO effect in this example is an effect for the changing icon a3.

  FIG. 172 (z) shows a state in which a BUFO effect is being performed. An animation in which BUFok 7 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire BUFok 7 is displayed.

  FIG. 172 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 172 (z). During the BUFO effect, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. It shows the state that was done. The BUFok 7 is displayed so as to rise to the right of the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

  FIG. 172 (b) shows a state in which the BUFO effect has progressed from “mode α” shown in FIG. 149 to “mode β”. The BUFO effect targets the changing icon a3, and an animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray is irradiated from the BUFOK7 is displayed on the changing icon a3.

  FIG. 172 (C) shows a state where the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the changing icon a3. When the animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray irradiated from BUFok 7 hits the changing icon a3 and explodes, an effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be displayed after the mysterious ray irradiated from BUFok 7 hits the changing icon a3, or the effect image k8 is displayed at the same time that the mysterious ray hits the changing icon a3. May be started. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire changing icon a3, the entire changing icon a3 is not visible.

  FIG. 172 (d) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the changing icon a4 is displayed so as to be visible again. The changing icon a3 is changed from the black circle hold icon to the display mode of the Minowa hold icon shown in FIG. The BUFO effect is a successful effect in which the target changing icon changes.

  FIG. 172 (e) shows a state in which the reduced display of the decorative symbol variation display is finished. In FIG. 172 (e), BUFOK7 returns to mode α and is erased in such a mode that it disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the BUFO effect ends.

  In FIG. 172 (F), after BUFok7 is erased and the BUFO effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. The displayed state is shown. In this example, super reach effect display is started after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 172 (f). Description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In FIG. 172 (F), after reaching the reach in the decorative symbol variation display, the normal reach effect display may be started instead of the super reach effect display, or the super reach effect display and the normal reach effect display may not be started. Good.

  FIG. 172 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished after the super reach effect display is finished. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”, which is a jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed (determined display, main stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is a big hit. In addition, the changing icon a3 is deleted before “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, the player is encouraged to perform the ball removal operation by making it difficult to see the on-hold effect by the dish full display k10, and as a result, the player performs the ball removal operation until the lower plate 128 is empty. By doing so, the plate full display k10 is not displayed again, and the hold effect after the ball removing operation is easy to see.

(Example 31)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 31 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 173 (a) to 173 (w) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 173, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 173 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state at the time point shown in FIG. 173 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. A hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

  FIG. 173 (b) shows that one game ball wins a special figure 1 starting port 230 during the special figure 1 variable game, the number of reserved figures in special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the number of reserved figures in special figure 1 is two. This shows the state. The hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area at the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b2 is a black circle hold icon.

  FIG. 173 (c) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b2.

  FIG. 173 (d) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

  In FIG. 173 (e), during the B bird effect, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced, and the B bird k2 rises to the center of the display screen. After the display, the B bird effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b2, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icon b2.

  FIG. 173 (f) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon b1 and the changing icon a1 that are not the target of the hold effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 173 (g) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b2 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect of this example is a failure effect that does not have a target hold icon.

  FIG. 173 (h) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 173 (h), B bird k2 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears to the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

  In FIG. 173 (i), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state.

  FIG. 173 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game has ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a1 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 173 (k) shows a state in which the hold of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a2. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

  FIG. 173 (l) shows a state where the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b2.

  FIG. 173 (m) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

  FIG. 173 (n) shows the B bird effect shown in FIG. 149 after the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and the decorative symbol variation display is reduced and displayed. The state of progressing from “aspect α” to “aspect β” is shown. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b2, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icon b2.

  FIG. 173 (o) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a2 that is not the target of the hold effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 173 (p) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b2 is changed from the black circle hold icon to the Minowa hold icon shown in FIG. The B bird effect in this example is a successful effect in which the target hold icon changes.

  FIG. 173 (q) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 173 (q), B bird k2 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

  In FIG. 173 (r), after the B bird k2 is deleted and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state.

  FIG. 173 (s) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a2 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 173 (t) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation between the hold / change icons is displayed. Is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a3. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. The special figure 1 variable game is a special figure variable game that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b2 that is the target of the B-bird effect twice.

  FIG. 173 (u) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, normal reach effect display is started when reach is reached in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 173 (u). Note that in FIG. 173 (u), after reaching the reach in the decorative symbol variation display, the super reach effect display may be started instead of the normal reach effect display.

  In FIG. 173 (v), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 3-decoration 3—decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Indicates the state.

  FIG. 173 (w) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”, which is a jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed (determined display, main stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is a big hit. In addition, the changing icon a3 is deleted before “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. The changing icon decoration symbol may be erased during the stop display.

  In the present embodiment, the hold icon that is the target of the hold effect in the previous symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (a) to (j)) is the target of the hold effect again.

  As illustrated, the symbol variation display (in the case of being performed in the previous symbol variation display is a failure presentation (in this example, a failure production. It may be a success production) is not performed). 173 (a) to (j)) next symbol variation display, etc. (in this example, FIG. 173 (k) to (s)), but the number of suspensions reported in the previous symbol variation display is digested. It may be any of the symbol variation displays started before ), It may be configured such that a hold effect, the same hold effect, or another hold effect is easily performed. However, even if a holding effect (failure) is performed in the previous symbol variation display, there may be a case where the holding effect, the same holding effect, or another holding effect is not performed in the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display. Good.

A certain change effect is likely to occur due to the next fluctuation.
As illustrated, the direction when a certain hold effect (in this example, a failure effect due to a B bird effect, which may be a successful effect) is not performed in the previous symbol variation display. Is the next symbol variation display etc. (in this example, FIG. 173 (k) to (s)) of the symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (a) to (j)), but was notified in the previous symbol variation display. It may be any of the symbol variation displays that are started before the number hold is exhausted. ), The holding effect or the same holding effect (B bird effect in this example) may be easily performed again. However, even if the hold effect (failure) is performed in the previous symbol variation display, the hold effect may not be performed in the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display.

It is easy to be subject to change production by the next fluctuation.
As illustrated, the hold icon that is the target of the hold icon that was not the target of the hold effect in the previous symbol change display is the next symbol change display etc. of the symbol change display (corresponding to the hold icon) It may be any of the symbol variation display that is started before the hold to be digested.) It may be configured to easily become the target of the hold effect, the same hold effect, or another hold effect. However, there may be a case where the hold icon that is not the target of the hold effect in the previous symbol change display becomes the hold effect, the same hold effect, or another hold effect in the next symbol change display of the symbol change display.

The next change is likely to be the subject of a certain change effect.
As illustrated, the hold icon that is the target of a certain holding effect (in this example, the B bird effect) in the previous symbol variation display is the symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display or the like (the previous symbol variation display). In any case, the symbol variation display that is started before the reserved number of minutes, which has been informed in the above, is consumed.) The previous symbol variation display rather than the holding effect that was not performed in the previous symbol variation display. It may be configured so that it is likely to be a target of a holding effect (in this example, a B bird effect) performed in step 1. However, even if the previous symbol variation display is a target of a certain reserved effect (for example, a B bird effect), there is a reserved effect that was not performed in the previous symbol variation display in the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display. It may be performed in the next symbol variation display or the like.

When the next change is the target of the change effect, the change effect is likely to succeed.
As illustrated, the symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display is performed in the case where the hold variation effect (in this example, the failure effect of the B bird effect) is not performed in the previous symbol variation display. Or the like (which may be any of the symbol variation display that starts before the number of suspensions reported in the previous symbol variation display is digested), or the success of the holding effect or the same holding effect or another holding effect. It may be configured such that the hold mode is easily changed to a prefetch notice mode or a button press change hold icon with higher reliability. However, even if a hold effect (failure) is made in the previous symbol variation display, the hold effect, the same hold effect, or another hold effect may fail in the next symbol variation display etc. of the previous symbol variation display. Also good.

When a change effect is the target of the next change, the change effect is likely to succeed.
As illustrated, the hold icon that is the target of the hold icon that is not the target of the hold effect (in this example, the failure effect of the B bird effect) in the previous symbol change display is the next to the symbol change display. In the symbol fluctuation display (which may be any of the symbol fluctuation display started before the hold corresponding to the hold icon is digested), the hold effect or the same hold effect (in this example, B bird failure) In this case, it may be configured such that the success of the hold effect (successful change to the pre-reading notice mode or button press change hold icon with a higher degree of reliability) is easily performed. However, the hold icon that is the target of the hold effect in the previous symbol change display is the next symbol change display of the symbol change display (any of the symbol change displays that are started before the hold corresponding to the hold icon is consumed) However, even if it becomes the object of the hold effect or the same hold effect again, the hold effect may be failed.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modification of the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 173 (p ′) to (z ′) and (b ′) to (c ′) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to this modification in time series. 173 (p ′) to (z ′) and (b ′) to (c ′), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. Yes.

  FIG. 173 (p ′) shows a state continued from FIG. 173 (o). In FIG. 173 (p ′), after the laser beam is irradiated from the B bird k2 toward the hold icon b2, the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b2 does not change the black circle hold icon. The B bird effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

  FIG. 173 (q ′) shows a state where the reduced display of the decorative symbol variation display is finished. In FIG. 173 (q ′), B bird k2 has been erased in such a manner that it returns to mode α and disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect. .

  In FIG. 173 (r ′), after the B bird k2 is deleted and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. "Indicates a temporarily stopped display state.

  FIG. 173 (s ′) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a2 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 173 (t ′) shows a state in which the hold of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation between the hold / change icons is displayed. Is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a3. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. The special figure 1 variable game is a special figure variable game that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b2 that is the target of the B-bird effect twice.

  FIG. 173 (u ′) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect in this example is an effect for the changing icon a3.

  FIG. 173 (v ′) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

  FIG. 173 (w ′) shows that the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced in the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and the variation display of the decorative symbols is reduced and displayed. The state of progressing from “Aspect α” to “Aspect β” is shown. The B bird effect in this example is for the changing icon a3, and the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the changing icon a3 that is the target.

  FIG. 173 (x ′) shows a state where the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the changing icon a3. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire changing icon a3, the entire changing icon a3 is not visible. Note that the effect image k8 may be overlapped only by a part of the hold icon or the change icon that is the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 173 (y ′) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the changing icon a3 is displayed so as to be visible again. The halfway icon a3 is changed from a black circle holding icon to a display mode of the Minowa holding icon shown in FIG. The B bird effect in this example is a successful effect in which the changing icon as a target changes.

  FIG. 173 (z ′) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 173 (z ′), B bird k2 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears to the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect. .

  FIG. 173 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 173 (z ′). In FIG. 173 (a), after the B bird k2 is deleted and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 3” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state. In this example, normal reach effect display is started when reach is reached in the variation display of decorative symbols in FIG. In addition, after reaching reach in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 173 (I '), the super reach effect display may be started instead of the normal reach effect display.

  In FIG. 173 (B ′), “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Shows the state.

  FIG. 173 (C ') shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”, which is a jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed (determined display, main stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is a big hit. In addition, the changing icon a3 is deleted before “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. The changing icon decoration symbol may be erased during the stop display.

  In this modification, following FIG. 173 (a) to (o), the B-bird effect fails again, and the symbol variation display (t During ') to (C'), the changing icon succeeds in the holding effect by the B bird effect, and the big hit symbol pattern is finally displayed in the symbol change display.

  Symbol change display before two times (FIGS. 173 (a) to (j)) and symbol change display before one time (FIGS. 173 (k) to (o), (p ′) to (s ′) ) In the state where the hold icon that is the target of the hold effect (in this example, the B bird effect) is displayed as the variable icon, it is again the target of the hold effect or the same hold effect.

It is easy to hit a symbol variation display that starts with the pending digest corresponding to the subject pending icon.
As illustrated, a certain hold icon indicates a previous symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (a) to (j)) or a previous symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (k) to (o), (p ′) to ( s ′)), the hold corresponding to the certain hold icon is more likely to be the target than the case where it is not the target of the hold effect (in this example, the failure effect, which may be a success effect). In the symbol variation display that starts after digestion (in this example, FIGS. 173 (t ′) to (c ′)), it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is likely to be stopped and displayed finally. However, even if a certain hold icon is the target of the hold effect in the previous symbol variation display or the immediately preceding symbol variation display, the symbol variation display that starts after the hold corresponding to the certain hold icon is digested is finally performed. There may be a case where the off symbol pattern is stopped and displayed.

If a certain effect is performed with a symbol variation display that starts with the hold-up corresponding to the target hold icon, it is easy to win.
As illustrated, a certain hold icon indicates a previous symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (a) to (j)) or a previous symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (k) to (o), (p ′) to ( s ′)), the hold corresponding to the certain hold icon is more likely to be the target than the case where it is not the target of the hold effect (in this example, the failure effect, which may be a success effect). A certain effect (in this example, a normal reach effect (FIG. 173 (I ′)) in the symbol variation display (in this example, FIGS. 173 (t ′) to (c ′)) that is started after digestion, but it is a big hit rather than normal reach It may be possible to generate super-reach with a high degree of reliability, a certain notice display, a pseudo-continuous effect, etc.). It may be configured to be. However, even if a certain hold icon becomes the target of a hold effect in the previous symbol change display or the previous symbol change display, a certain effect in the symbol change display that starts after the hold corresponding to the certain hold icon is digested In some cases, the symbol pattern may eventually be removed and the symbol pattern may be stopped and displayed.

It is easy to hit a big hit if a change effect is generated in the symbol variation display that starts with the hold digest corresponding to the target hold icon.
As illustrated, a certain hold icon indicates a previous symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (a) to (j)) or a previous symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (k) to (o), (p ′) to ( s ′)), the hold corresponding to the certain hold icon is more likely to be the target than the case where it is not the target of the hold effect (in this example, the failure effect, which may be a success effect). In the symbol change display (in this example, FIGS. 173 (t ′) to (c ′)) started after digestion, the hold effect, the same hold effect, or another hold effect (in this example, the B bird effect of the same hold effect (FIG. 173 (u ′) to (z ′)), but it may be possible to generate another holding effect such as a WUFO effect. It may be configured. However, even if a certain hold icon becomes the target of the hold effect in the previous symbol change display or the previous symbol change display, the hold effect is displayed in the symbol change display that starts after the hold corresponding to the certain hold icon is digested. Even if it is performed, there may be a case where the symbol pattern is finally stopped and displayed.

A change effect is likely to occur in the symbol variation display that is started by the on-hold digestion corresponding to the target on-hold icon.
As illustrated, a certain hold icon indicates a previous symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (a) to (j)) or a previous symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (k) to (o), (p ′) to ( s ′)), the hold corresponding to the certain hold icon is more likely to be the target than the case where it is not the target of the hold effect (in this example, the failure effect, which may be a success effect). In the symbol change display (in this example, FIGS. 173 (t ′) to (c ′)) started after digestion, the hold effect, the same hold effect, or another hold effect (in this example, the B bird effect of the same hold effect (FIG. 173 (u ′) to (z ′)), but it may be possible to generate another hold effect such as a WUFO effect. However, even if a certain hold icon becomes the target of the hold effect in the previous symbol change display or the previous symbol change display, the hold effect is displayed in the symbol change display that starts after the hold corresponding to the certain hold icon is digested. It may not be done.

The changing icon is likely to be the target of the change effect in the symbol change display that starts with the hold digest corresponding to the target hold icon.
As illustrated, a certain hold icon indicates a previous symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (a) to (j)) or a previous symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (k) to (o), (p ′) to ( s ′)), the hold corresponding to the certain hold icon is more likely to be the target than the case where it is not the target of the hold effect (in this example, the failure effect, which may be a success effect). In the symbol variation display (in this example, FIGS. 173 (t ′) to (c ′)) started after digestion, the hold icon (the changing icon) is a hold effect or the same hold effect or another than another hold icon. Of the hold effect (in this example, the B bird effect (FIG. 173 (u ′) to (z ′) of the same hold effect), but may be another hold effect such as a WUFO effect, etc.). You may be comprised so that it may become easy. However, even if a certain hold icon becomes the target of the hold effect in the previous symbol variation display or the immediately preceding symbol variation display, another hold in the symbol variation display that starts after the hold corresponding to the certain hold icon is digested The icon may be the target.

Becomes a target ... When a certain effect is performed in the symbol variation display, the changing icon tends to be the target of the variation effect.
As illustrated, a certain hold icon indicates a previous symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (a) to (j)) or a previous symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (k) to (o), (p ′) to ( In s ′), the hold corresponding to the certain hold icon is consumed more than the case where it is not the target of the hold effect (in this example, the failure effect, which may be the success effect). In the symbol variation display (in this example, FIGS. 173 (t ′) to (c ′)) which is started, a certain effect (in this example, a normal reach effect (FIG. 173 (i ′))), but the big hit reliability than the normal reach May occur as a super-reach, a notice display, a pseudo-continuous effect, etc.)), the hold icon (the changing icon) is the hold effect or the same hold effect or Another hold effect (same in this example) The hold effect is performed for the B bird effect (FIG. 173 (u ′) to (z ′)) of the stop effect, but may be another hold effect such as a WUFO effect. However, even if a certain hold icon becomes a target of a hold effect in the previous symbol variation display or the previous symbol variation display, the hold corresponding to the certain hold icon is not performed. In the symbol variation display that is started after digestion, there may be a case where the hold effect for the hold icon fails, or a certain hold icon is displayed in the previous symbol change display or the previous symbol change display. Even if it becomes the target, there may be a case where the hold effect for the hold icon is not performed in the symbol variation display that starts after the hold corresponding to the certain hold icon is digested.

The changing effect of the changing icon is likely to be successful in the symbol change display started by the holding digest corresponding to the target holding icon.
As illustrated, a certain hold icon indicates a previous symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (a) to (j)) or a previous symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (k) to (o), (p ′) to ( s ′)), the hold corresponding to the certain hold icon is more likely to be the target than the case where it is not the target of the hold effect (in this example, the failure effect, which may be a success effect). In the symbol variation display (in this example, FIGS. 173 (t ′) to (c ′)) that is started after digestion, the hold icon (the changing icon) is a hold effect, the same hold effect, or another hold effect (this example Then, the same hold effect B bird (u ′) to (z ′), but may be another hold effect such as a WUFO effect, etc.) More reliable look-ahead notice mode and button press change hold icon Success to change to) may be configured so as to be easily performed. However, even if a certain hold icon becomes the target of the hold effect in the previous symbol variation display or the immediately preceding symbol variation display, the hold icon in the symbol variation display that starts after digestion of the hold corresponding to the certain hold icon is started. There may be cases where the hold effect for the target fails, and even if a certain hold icon becomes the target of the hold effect in the previous symbol variation display or the previous symbol variation display, it corresponds to the certain hold icon There may be a case where the hold effect for the hold icon is not performed in the symbol variation display that starts after the hold to be digested.

A certain effect is likely to occur in the symbol variation display that is started by the on-hold digestion corresponding to the target on-hold icon.
As illustrated, a certain hold icon indicates a previous symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (a) to (j)) or a previous symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (k) to (o), (p ′) to ( s ′)), the hold corresponding to the certain hold icon is more likely to be the target than the case where it is not the target of the hold effect (in this example, the failure effect, which may be a success effect). A certain effect (in this example, normal reach effect (in FIG. 173 (b))) in the symbol variation display (in this example, FIGS. 173 (t ′) to (c ′)) that is started after digestion, but is more reliable than the normal reach The occurrence of a high level of super-reach, the occurrence of a certain notice display, the occurrence of a pseudo-continuous effect, etc.) may occur easily or may occur. However, even if a certain hold icon becomes the target of a hold effect in the previous symbol change display or the previous symbol change display, a certain effect in the symbol change display that starts after the hold corresponding to the certain hold icon is digested May not be done.

It became the target ... A certain effect is likely to occur due to the change effect of the changing icon in the symbol change display.
As illustrated, a certain hold icon indicates a previous symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (a) to (j)) or a previous symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (k) to (o), (p ′) to ( s ′)), the hold corresponding to the certain hold icon is more likely to be the target than the case where it is not the target of the hold effect (in this example, the failure effect, which may be a success effect). In the symbol variation display (in this example, FIGS. 173 (t ′) to (c ′)) started after digestion, the hold icon (the changing icon) is a hold effect, the same hold effect, or another hold effect (in this example, The hold effect for the same B-bard effect (FIG. 173 (u ′) to (z ′)), but may be another hold effect such as a WUFO effect) is performed. When it is played or successful, a certain performance (in this example, normal reach performance) (FIG. 173 (A ′)), however, there may be a case where super-reach having a higher hit reliability than normal reach, occurrence of a notice display, generation of pseudo-continuous effects, etc.) is likely or likely to occur. It may be configured to. However, even if a certain hold icon becomes the target of the hold effect in the previous symbol change display or the previous symbol change display, the hold effect is again displayed in the symbol change display that starts after the hold corresponding to the certain hold icon is digested. There may be a case where a certain effect is not performed even if the above is performed.

(Example 32)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 32 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 (a) to (p). FIGS. 174 (a) to 174 (p) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 174, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 174 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state at the time point shown in FIG. 174 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. A hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

  In FIG. 174 (b), during the special figure 1 variable game, one game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is 2. This shows the state. The hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area at the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b2 is a white circle hold icon.

  FIG. 174 (c) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b2.

  FIG. 174 (d) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

  In FIG. 174 (e), during the B bird effect, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced, and B bird k2 soars to the center of the display screen. After the display, the B bird effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b2, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icon b2.

  FIG. 174 (f) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon b1 and the changing icon a1 that are not the target of the hold effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 174 (g) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b2 changes from a white circle hold icon to a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect in this example is a successful effect with a target hold icon.

  FIG. 174 (h) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 174 (h), B bird k2 is erased in such a manner that it returns to the state α and disappears in the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the B bird effect ends.

  In FIG. 174 (i), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state.

  FIG. 174 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a1 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 174 (k) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a2. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

  In FIG. 174 (l), “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a without holding effect during the special figure 1 variable game, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state. In this example, the holding effect for the holding icon b2, which is a black circle holding icon, is not performed.

  FIG. 174 (m) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a2 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 174 (n) shows a state in which the reservation of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation between the hold / change icons is displayed. Is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a3.

  FIG. 174 (o) shows that “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and “decoration 2” is then displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, without the holding effect being performed during the special figure 1 variable game. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state. In this example, the hold effect for the changing icon a3 that is the display mode of the black circle hold icon is not performed.

  FIG. 174 (p) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a3 is deleted before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, the hold icon (B bird effect) is a target, and the hold icon b2 changes to a black circle hold icon due to the success of the hold effect, but the hold effect is not performed in the next change, and the hold icon is displayed. The symbol pattern display is finally displayed in the symbol variation display that starts after the corresponding hold is digested.

Change effects are likely to occur due to the next fluctuation.
As illustrated, after the symbol variation display in which a holding effect (in this example, a successful effect by a B bird effect) that has been successfully changed to a holding icon (in this example, a black circle holding icon) having a certain aspect has been performed. A certain holding effect (for example, FIG. 173 (c)) for a holding icon (in this example, a black circle holding icon) that is in a certain form from the appearance than the symbol variation display (FIGS. 174 (k) to (s)). ~ (H) B bird effect) The symbol change display next to the symbol change display where the failure effect was performed is the hold effect or the same hold effect again (in this example, the B bird effect) or another hold effect. You may be comprised so that it may be easy to break. However, even if the hold effect (success) is performed in the previous symbol variation display, the hold effect may be performed in the next symbol variation display or the like of the symbol variation display.

A certain change effect is likely to occur due to the next fluctuation.
As illustrated, after the symbol variation display in which a holding effect (in this example, a successful effect by a B bird effect) that has been successfully changed to a holding icon (in this example, a black circle holding icon) having a certain aspect has been performed. The symbol variation display (see FIG. 174 (k) to (s)), the appearance of a certain holding effect (for example, FIG. 173 (c) to FIG. Even if the symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display in which the (B) bird effect of (h) is performed is performed, a certain holding effect (B bird effect in this example) is more easily performed. However, even if the holding effect (success) is performed in the previous symbol variation display, the certain holding effect may be performed in the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display or the like.

It is easy to be subject to change production by the next fluctuation.
As illustrated, the next to the symbol variation display in which a holding effect (in this example, a successful effect by B Bird) that has been successfully changed to a holding icon (in this example, a black circle holding icon) having a certain aspect has been performed. On-hold effects (for example, FIGS. 173 (c) to (173) in FIG. 173) that are intended for a hold icon (in this example, a black circle hold icon) that is in a certain form from the appearance than the symbol variation display (FIG. 174 (k) to (s)). h) The design variation display next to the design variation display in which the failure production of the B bird production) is performed is configured such that the hold icon is more likely to be the target of the hold effect, the same hold effect, or another hold effect. It may be. However, even if the holding effect (success) is performed in the previous symbol variation display, even if the symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display or the like may be the target of the holding effect, the same holding effect, or another holding effect. Good.

The next change is likely to be the subject of a certain change effect.
As illustrated, after the symbol variation display in which a holding effect (success effect by B bird effect in this example) that has been successfully changed to a holding icon (in this example, a black circle holding icon) having a certain aspect has been performed. A certain holding effect (for example, FIG. 173 (c)) for a holding icon (in this example, a black circle holding icon) that is in a certain form from the appearance than the symbol variation display (FIGS. 174 (k) to (s)). ~ (H) B bird production) The design variation display next to the design variation display in which the failure production was performed is a holding effect in which the hold icon is a certain holding effect (for example, the same holding effect as the holding effect in which the failure production is performed). You may be comprised so that it may become easy to become object of. However, even if the holding effect (success) is performed in the previous symbol variation display, there may be a case where a certain holding effect is a target in the symbol variation display subsequent to the symbol variation display.

When the next change is the target of the change effect, the change effect is likely to succeed.
As illustrated, after the symbol variation display in which a holding effect (in this example, a successful effect by a B bird effect) that has been successfully changed to a holding icon (in this example, a black circle holding icon) having a certain aspect has been performed. From the appearance variation display (FIGS. 174 (k) to (s)), the holding effect (for example, FIGS. 173 (c) to (173) shown in FIG. h) The design variation display next to the design variation display in which the failure production of the B bird production) is performed is more likely to be the subject of the hold icon, the same hold effect, or another hold effect. May be configured such that the hold effect is likely to be successful (successful change to the pre-reading notice mode or button press change hold icon with higher reliability). However, even if the holding effect (success) is performed in the previous symbol variation display, there may be a case where the symbol variation display subsequent to the symbol variation display becomes a target of the holding effect and succeeds.

When a change effect is the target of the next change, the change effect is likely to succeed.
As illustrated, the next to the symbol variation display in which a holding effect (in this example, a successful effect by B Bird) that has been successfully changed to a holding icon (in this example, a black circle holding icon) having a certain aspect has been performed. On-hold effects (for example, FIGS. 173 (c) to (h) shown in FIG. 173) are intended for a hold icon (in this example, a black circle hold icon) that is in a certain form from the appearance than the symbol variation display (FIG. 174 (k) to (s)). ) (B bird production)) The symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display in which the failure production was performed is more likely to be the subject of the hold icon (in the examples so far, B bird production). The hold effect may be configured so that the success of the hold effect (successful change to the pre-reading notice mode or the button press change hold icon with higher reliability) is likely to be successful. However, even if a holding effect (successful) is performed in the previous symbol variation display, there may be a case where the symbol variation display subsequent to the symbol variation display becomes a target of a certain holding effect and succeeds.

It is easy to hit a symbol variation display that starts with the pending digest corresponding to the subject pending icon.
As illustrated, the symbol variation started after digestion of the hold corresponding to the hold icon (in this example, the black circle hold icon) changed in some manner due to the hold effect (success effect by the B bird effect in this example) A certain holding effect (for example, the B bird effect shown in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) is performed on the holding icon (in this example, the black circle holding icon) that is in a certain form from the appearance. Nevertheless, the symbol variation display that is started when the hold corresponding to the hold icon having the certain aspect is started may be configured so that the jackpot symbol form is likely to be stopped and displayed finally. However, there may be a case where the jackpot symbol pattern is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display that starts after digestion of the hold corresponding to the hold icon changed to a certain mode as a result of the hold effect.

If a certain effect is performed with a symbol variation display that starts with the hold-up corresponding to the target hold icon, it is easy to win.
As illustrated, the symbol variation started after digestion of the hold corresponding to the hold icon (in this example, the black circle hold icon) changed in some manner due to the hold effect (success effect by the B bird effect in this example) A certain holding effect (for example, the B bird effect shown in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) is performed on the holding icon (in this example, the black circle holding icon) that is in a certain form from the appearance. Nonetheless, the symbol variation display started when the hold corresponding to the hold icon having a certain aspect is started is a certain effect (in this example, the normal reach effect (FIG. 173 (I ′))), but than the normal reach. In some cases, it may be possible to generate a super-reach with a high degree of jackpot reliability, a certain notice display, a pseudo-continuous effect, etc.). You may be comprised so that it may be displayed easily or a stop display is carried out. However, even if a certain effect is performed in the symbol variation display that is started after digestion of the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has changed to a certain form as a result of the hold effect, the jackpot symbol form is finally stopped and displayed. There may be cases.

It is easy to hit a big hit if a change effect is generated in the symbol variation display that starts with the hold digest corresponding to the target hold icon.
As illustrated, the symbol variation display started by digestion of the hold corresponding to the hold icon (in this example, the black circle hold icon) having a certain aspect changed due to the hold effect (success effect by B bird in this example). Even if a certain holding effect (for example, the B bird effect shown in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) is performed for the holding icon (in this example, the black circle holding icon) that has been in a certain form since the appearance. Regardless, the symbol variation display started when the hold corresponding to the hold icon having the certain aspect is digested is the hold effect or the same hold effect or another hold effect (in this example, the B-bird effect (the same hold effect) 173 (u ′) to (z ′)), but there may be cases where another holding effect such as a WUFO effect may be generated. Yo It may be configured to. However, even if the hold effect is performed in the symbol variation display that starts after the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has changed as a result of the hold effect is changed to a certain state, the jackpot symbol form is finally stopped and displayed. There may be cases.

A change effect is likely to occur in the symbol variation display that is started by the on-hold digestion corresponding to the target on-hold icon.
As illustrated, the symbol variation display started by digestion of the hold corresponding to the hold icon (in this example, the black circle hold icon) having a certain aspect changed due to the hold effect (success effect by B bird in this example). Even if a certain holding effect (for example, the B bird effect shown in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) is performed for the holding icon (in this example, the black circle holding icon) that has been in a certain form since the appearance. Regardless, the symbol variation display started when the hold corresponding to the hold icon having the certain aspect is digested is the hold effect or the same hold effect or another hold effect (in this example, the B-bird effect (the same hold effect) 173 (u ′) to (z ′)), however, it may be possible to generate another hold effect such as a WUFO effect. However, there may be a case where the holding effect is not performed in the symbol variation display that starts after the holding corresponding to the holding icon that has changed as a result of the holding effect has been changed into a certain form.

The changing icon is likely to be the target of the change effect in the symbol change display that starts with the hold digest corresponding to the target hold icon.
As illustrated, the hold icon (the black circle hold icon in this example) is changed from the appearance of the hold icon (in this example, the black circle hold icon) changed from the hold effect (success effect by the B bird effect in this example). In this example, the hold icon having a certain aspect is performed even though a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) is performed on the black circle hold icon). When the hold icon becomes a variation icon, the hold effect, the same hold effect, or another hold effect (in this example, the B bird effect of the same hold effect (FIG. 173 (u ′) to (z ′)), but the WUFO effect It may be possible to generate another hold effect such as, etc.). However, there may be a case where the hold icon (the changing icon) is targeted in the symbol change display that starts after the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has changed as a result of the hold effect is changed into a certain form.

Becomes a target ... When a certain effect is performed in the symbol variation display, the changing icon tends to be the target of the variation effect.
As illustrated, the hold icon (the black circle hold icon in this example) is changed from the appearance of the hold icon (in this example, the black circle hold icon) changed from the hold effect (success effect by the B bird effect in this example). In this example, the hold icon having a certain aspect is performed even though a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) is performed on the black circle hold icon). When the hold icon becomes a change icon, the hold effect for the change icon or the same hold effect or another hold effect (in this example, the B hold effect of the same hold effect (FIG. 173 (u ′) to (z ')) However, there may be a case where another holding effect such as a WUFO effect may be generated. However, there may be a case where the hold effect for the hold icon (the changing icon) is performed in the symbol change display that starts after the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has changed as a result of the hold effect has been changed. There may be.

The changing effect of the changing icon is likely to be successful in the symbol change display started by the holding digest corresponding to the target holding icon.
As illustrated, the hold icon (the black circle hold icon in this example) is changed from the appearance of the hold icon (in this example, the black circle hold icon) changed from the hold effect (success effect by the B bird effect in this example). In this example, the hold icon having a certain aspect is performed even though a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) is performed on the black circle hold icon). When the hold icon becomes a change icon, the hold effect for the change icon or the same hold effect or another hold effect (in this example, the B hold effect of the same hold effect (FIG. 173 (u ′) to (z ')) However, there may be cases where another hold effect such as a WUFO effect may be generated.) Success (pre-reading notice mode or button press change hold icon with a more reliable hold mode) Success to change to) may be configured so as to be easily performed. However, there may be a case where the hold effect for the hold icon (the changing icon) is successful in the symbol variation display that starts after the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has changed as a result of the hold effect is changed. There may be.

A certain effect is likely to occur in the symbol variation display that is started by the on-hold digestion corresponding to the target on-hold icon.
As illustrated, the symbol variation started after digestion of the hold corresponding to the hold icon (in this example, the black circle hold icon) changed in some manner due to the hold effect (success effect by the B bird effect in this example) A certain holding effect (for example, a B bird effect shown in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) for a holding icon (in this example, a black circle holding icon) having a certain form from the appearance was performed. In spite of this, the symbol variation display started after digestion of the hold corresponding to the hold icon having a certain aspect is a certain effect (in this example, the normal reach effect diagram 173 (I ')), but than the normal reach. In some cases, the occurrence of a super reach with a high hitting reliability, the occurrence of a certain notice display, the occurrence of a pseudo-continuous effect, or the like may be possible. ) Are likely to occur or may be configured to occur. However, there may be a case where a certain effect is performed in the symbol variation display that starts after digestion of the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has changed to a certain form as a result of the hold effect.

It became the target ... A certain effect is likely to occur due to the change effect of the changing icon in the symbol change display.
As illustrated, the hold icon (this display is changed from the appearance to the hold icon (in this example, the black circle hold icon) changed from the hold effect (in this example, the success effect by B Bird) from the appearance (this In the example, even if a certain holding effect (for example, the B bird effect shown in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) is performed on the black circle holding icon), the holding icon having the certain aspect is the one. When the hold icon becomes a change icon, the hold effect for the change icon, the same hold effect, or another hold effect (in this example, the B bird effect of the same hold effect (FIG. 173 (u ′) to (z ′ )) However, there may be a case where another holding effect such as a WUFO effect may be generated.) When an effect is performed or when it is successful, a certain effect (in this example, a normal reach effect (FIG. 173 (I ′))). However, in some cases, it may be possible to generate super reach with higher hit reliability than normal reach, occurrence of a notice display, occurrence of pseudo-continuous effects, etc.) Good. However, there is a case in which a certain effect is not performed even if the hold effect is performed again in the symbol variation display that starts after the hold corresponding to the hold icon changed as a result of the hold effect is changed. Also good.

(Example 33)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 33 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 (A) to 174 (P) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 174, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 174 (A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 174 (A), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. A hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

  FIG. 174 (B) shows that one game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the special figure 1 variable game, the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is 2. This shows the state. The hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area at the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b2 is a black circle hold icon.

  FIG. 174 (C) shows a state where the W bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which W bird k1 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. A mode when W bird k1 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of W Bird k1 is the start of W Bird production. The W bird effect in this example is an effect for the hold icon b2.

  FIG. 174 (D) shows a state in which a W bird effect is being performed. An animation in which W bird k1 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire W bird k1 is displayed.

  In FIG. 174E, during the W bird effect, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced, and W bird k1 rises to the center of the display screen. In this way, the W bird effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The W bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b2, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the W bird k1 is displayed on the target hold icon b2.

  FIG. 174 (F) shows a state where the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of W bird k1 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started while the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the W bird k1 is displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon b1 and the changing icon a1 that are not the target of the hold effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 174 (G) shows a state in which the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b2 remains a black circle hold icon. The W bird effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

  FIG. 174 (H) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 174 (H), W bird k1 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears at the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is the state immediately before the end of the W bird effect.

  In FIG. 174 (I), after the W bird k1 is deleted and the W bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state.

  FIG. 174 (J) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a1 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 174 (K) shows a state in which the reservation of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a2. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

  FIG. 174 (L) shows that “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, without the holding effect being performed during the special figure 1 variable game. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state. In this example, the holding effect for the holding icon b2, which is a black circle holding icon, is not performed.

  FIG. 174 (M) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a2 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 174 (N) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation between the hold / change icons is displayed. Is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a3.

  FIG. 174 (O) shows that “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and “decoration 2” is then displayed in the right symbol display area 208c without the holding effect being performed during the special figure 1 variable game. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state. In this example, the hold effect for the changing icon a3 that is the display mode of the black circle hold icon is not performed.

  FIG. 174 (P) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a3 is deleted before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, the hold effect for the black circle hold icon that is the target of the hold effect (W bird) and has not changed due to the failure of the hold effect is not performed by the next change, and corresponds to the hold icon. This is an example in which the symbol pattern display is finally displayed in the symbol variation display that starts after the hold is digested.

Change effects are likely to occur due to the next fluctuation.
As illustrated, a hold different from a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect shown in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) for a hold icon having a certain form (in this example, a black circle hold icon). Appears more than the symbol variation display (Figs. 174 (K) to (S)) next to the symbol variation display (Figs. 174 (A) to (J)) where the production (in this example, the failure effect due to the W bird effect) is performed. The design variation in which a failure effect of a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) for the hold icon (in this example, the black circle hold icon) having a certain aspect is performed. The design variation display next to the display may be configured such that the holding effect or the same holding effect (B bird effect in this example) or another holding effect is easily performed again. However, even if the other holding effect is performed in the previous symbol variation display, the holding effect may be performed in the next symbol variation display or the like of the symbol variation display.

A certain change effect is likely to occur due to the next fluctuation.
As illustrated, a hold different from a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect shown in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) for a hold icon having a certain form (in this example, a black circle hold icon). From the appearance of the symbol variation display (Figs. 174 (K) to (S)) next to the symbol variation display (Figs. 174 (A) to (J)) where the production (in this example, the failure effect due to the W bird effect) is performed. Symbol variation display in which a failure effect of a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) for the hold icon (in this example, a black circle hold icon) having a certain aspect is performed. The next symbol variation display may be configured so that a certain holding effect (in this example, the B bird effect) is more easily performed, but the other symbol variation display is performed in the previous symbol variation display. However, for the next symbol variation display etc. There may be a case where the one holding effect is performed are.

It is easy to be subject to change production by the next fluctuation.
As illustrated, a hold different from a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect shown in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) for a hold icon having a certain form (in this example, a black circle hold icon). From the appearance of the symbol variation display (Figs. 174 (K) to (S)) next to the symbol variation display (Figs. 174 (A) to (J)) where the production (in this example, the failure effect due to the W bird effect) is performed. Symbol variation display in which a failure effect of a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) for the hold icon (in this example, a black circle hold icon) having a certain aspect is performed. The next symbol variation display may be configured such that the hold icon is more likely to be the target of the hold effect, the same hold effect, or another hold effect, but another hold effect is displayed in the previous symbol change display. Even if it is done, It may become the subject of pending effect or the same hold director or another hold demonstration in symbol variable display, etc. There may be.

The next change is likely to be the subject of a certain change effect.
As illustrated, a hold different from a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect shown in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) for a hold icon having a certain form (in this example, a black circle hold icon). From the appearance of the symbol variation display (Figs. 174 (K) to (S)) next to the symbol variation display (Figs. 174 (A) to (J)) where the production (in this example, the failure effect due to the W bird effect) is performed. Symbol variation display in which a failure effect of a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) for the hold icon (in this example, a black circle hold icon) having a certain aspect is performed. The next symbol variation display may be configured such that the hold icon is more likely to be the target of a certain hold effect (for example, the same hold effect as the hold effect that has become a failure effect). When another hold effect is performed on the display It may be be subject to certain pending effect in the next symbol variable display of the symbol variable display even.

When the next change is the target of the change effect, the change effect is likely to succeed.
As illustrated, a hold different from a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect shown in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) for a hold icon having a certain form (in this example, a black circle hold icon). From the appearance of the symbol variation display (Figs. 174 (K) to (S)) next to the symbol variation display (174 (A) to (J)) where the production (in this example, the failure effect due to the W bird effect) was performed. Symbol variation display in which a failure effect of a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) for the hold icon (in this example, a black circle hold icon) having a certain aspect is performed. The next symbol variation display is more likely to be the subject of the hold icon, the same hold effect or another hold effect, and the success of the hold effect (the hold mode has a more reliable look-ahead notice mode or button) To the press change hold icon etc. May be configured so as to success) is carried out easily the hold effect of the likely success. However, even if another holding effect is performed in the previous symbol variation display, there may be a case where the symbol variation display subsequent to the symbol variation display becomes a target of the holding effect and succeeds.

When a change effect is the target of the next change, the change effect is likely to succeed.
As illustrated, a hold different from a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect shown in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) for a hold icon having a certain form (in this example, a black circle hold icon). From the appearance of the symbol variation display (Figs. 174 (K) to (S)) next to the symbol variation display (Figs. 174 (A) to (J)) where the production (in this example, the failure effect due to the W bird effect) is performed. Symbol variation display in which a failure effect of a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) for the hold icon (in this example, a black circle hold icon) having a certain aspect is performed. The next symbol change display is more likely to be the target of the hold icon (B bird effect in the example so far) and the success of the hold effect (the hold mode is a more reliable look-ahead notice) Mode, button press change hold icon, etc. It may be configured such that the hold effect that is likely to be successful) is easy to succeed, but even if another hold effect is made in the previous symbol variation display, There may be a case where it becomes a target of a certain holding effect in a symbol variation display or the like and succeeds.

It is easy to hit a symbol variation display that starts with the pending digest corresponding to the subject pending icon.
As illustrated, there is no change due to a hold effect (in this example, a failure effect due to a W bird effect) different from a hold effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173h). The hold icon (in this example, a black circle hold icon) that is in a certain form from the appearance rather than the symbol variation display that has started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon (in this example, the black circle hold icon) has started. In spite of a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect shown in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) being performed, the change corresponding to the hold icon having the certain form is digested and started. The display may be configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is likely to be stopped and displayed finally. However, even if there is a case where the symbol pattern display is stopped and displayed finally in the symbol variation display that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon having a certain form without changing as a result of the other hold effect. Good.

If a certain effect is performed with a symbol variation display that starts with the hold-up corresponding to the target hold icon, it is easy to win.
As illustrated, the hold icon that was not changed by a hold effect (in this example, a failure effect due to the W bird effect) different from a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173h). A certain holding effect for a holding icon (in this example, a black circle holding icon) that is in a certain form from the appearance rather than the symbol variation display that is started after the holding corresponding to (black dot holding icon in this example) is digested. (For example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) is a symbol variation display that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon having a certain aspect is digested. (In this example, the normal reach production (Fig. 173 (i ')), but it is also possible to generate a super reach with higher hit reliability than normal reach, a certain notice display, or a pseudo-continuous production. In the event of occurrence), the jackpot symbol pattern may be configured to be easily or stop-displayed finally. However, even if a certain effect is performed in the symbol variation display that is started by digestion of the hold corresponding to the hold icon having a certain form without changing as a result of the other hold effect, the big hit symbol form is finally obtained. A stop display may be displayed.

It is easy to hit a big hit if a change effect is generated in the symbol variation display that starts with the hold digest corresponding to the target hold icon.
As illustrated, the hold icon (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173h) that is different from the hold effect (in this example, the failure effect due to W bird) is not changed. In this example, a certain holding effect (in this example, a black circle holding icon) for a holding icon (in this example, a black circle holding icon) that has been in a certain form from the appearance rather than the symbol variation display that is started after the holding corresponding to the black circle holding icon is started. 173 (c) to (h) (B Bird) are performed, but the symbol variation display that is started after digestion of the hold corresponding to the hold icon having the certain aspect is started is the hold effect or Same hold effect or another hold effect (in this example, the same hold effect B bird effect (FIG. 173 (u ′) to (z ′)), but may be another hold effect such as a WUFO effect, etc. Occurs) Finally jackpot symbol aspect may be configured to facilitate display stopped if. However, even if the hold effect is performed in the symbol variation display that starts after the hold corresponding to the hold icon having a certain form is digested without changing as a result of the other hold effect, the jackpot symbol form is finally stopped. It may be displayed.

A change effect is likely to occur in the symbol variation display that is started by the on-hold digestion corresponding to the target on-hold icon.
As illustrated, a hold that was not changed by a hold effect (in this example, a failure effect due to a W bird effect) different from a hold effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173h). A certain hold for a hold icon (in this example, a black circle hold icon) that is in a certain form from the appearance rather than the symbol variation display that is started after the hold corresponding to the icon (black circle hold icon in this example) is digested The symbol variation display started when the hold corresponding to the hold icon having a certain aspect is digested in spite of the effect (for example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) being performed. Hold effect or the same hold effect or another hold effect (in this example, the B hold effect of the same hold effect (FIG. 173 (u ′) to (z ′)), but the occurrence of another hold effect such as the WUFO effect, etc. It may be good. There may also be configured as likely to occur. However, there may be a case where the hold effect is not performed in the symbol variation display that starts after the hold corresponding to the hold icon having a certain form is digested without changing as a result of the other hold effect.

The changing icon is likely to be the target of the change effect in the symbol change display that starts with the hold digest corresponding to the target hold icon.
As illustrated, there was no change due to a holding effect (in this example, a failure effect due to a W bird effect) different from a certain holding effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173h). A certain holding effect (for example, FIG. 173 (c) to FIG. 173) that is targeted for a holding icon (in this example, a black circle holding icon) that has a certain aspect since its appearance rather than a holding icon (in this example, a black circle holding icon). (H) B-bird effect) is performed, but when the hold icon in the certain aspect becomes a change icon, the hold effect or the same hold effect or another hold effect ( In this example, the same hold effect B bird effect (FIGS. 174 (u ′) to (z ′)), but it may be possible to generate another hold effect such as a WUFO effect, etc.). Configured It can have. However, there is a case where the hold icon (the changing icon) is a target in the symbol change display that starts after the hold corresponding to the hold icon having a certain aspect is not changed as a result of the other hold effect. Also good.

Becomes a target ... When a certain effect is performed in the symbol variation display, the changing icon tends to be the target of the variation effect.
As illustrated, a certain aspect that is not changed by a hold effect (in this example, a fail effect by W bird) different from a hold effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173h). A certain holding effect (for example, FIGS. 173 (c) to (h) in FIG. 173) is intended for the holding icon (in this example, the black circle holding icon) that has been in a certain form from the appearance than the holding icon (in this example, the black circle holding icon). ) B-bird effect)) is performed, but when the hold icon in the certain aspect becomes a change icon, the hold effect for the change icon or the same hold effect or Another hold effect (in this example, a B bird effect (FIG. 173 (u ′) to (z ′) of the same hold effect), but another hold effect such as WUFO may be generated) may be performed. Easy to break It may be composed of sea urchin. However, the hold effect for the hold icon (the changing icon) is performed in the symbol variation display that starts after the hold corresponding to the hold icon in a certain form is digested without changing as a result of the other hold effect. May be.

The changing effect of the changing icon is likely to be successful in the symbol change display started by the holding digest corresponding to the target holding icon.
As illustrated, the hold icon that was not changed by a hold effect (in this example, a failure effect due to the W bird effect) different from a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173h). A certain reserved effect (for example, B bird in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h) in FIG. 173) targeting a reserved icon (in this example, a black circle reserved icon) that has been in a certain form from the appearance (in this example, a black circle reserved icon). When a hold icon having a certain aspect is changed to a variable icon even though the effect is performed, the hold effect for the variable icon, the same hold effect, or another hold effect (In this example, the B-bird effect (FIG. 173 (u ′) to (z ′) of the same hold effect in this example), but may be another hold effect such as the WUFO effect, etc.) Aspect Ri successfully change to reliable read-ahead warning aspect or button press changes the held icon, etc.) it may be configured so as to be easily performed. However, the hold effect for the hold icon (fluctuating icon) is successful in the symbol variation display that starts after the hold corresponding to the hold icon in a certain form is not changed as a result of the other hold effect. There may be cases.

A certain effect is likely to occur in the symbol variation display that is started by the on-hold digestion corresponding to the target on-hold icon.
As illustrated, there is no change due to a hold effect (in this example, a failure effect due to a W bird effect) different from a hold effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173h). The hold icon (in this example, a black circle hold icon) that is in a certain form from the appearance rather than the symbol variation display that has started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon (in this example, the black circle hold icon) has started. In spite of a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect shown in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) being performed, the change corresponding to the hold icon having the certain form is digested and started. The display is a certain effect (in this example, the normal reach effect (FIG. 173 (b)), but the occurrence of a super reach with a higher hit reliability than the normal reach, the occurrence of a certain notice display, the occurrence of a pseudo-continuous effect, etc. May be generated or may be configured to occur, but the hold corresponding to the hold icon having a certain form is not changed as a result of the other hold effect. An effect may be performed in the symbol variation display that is started.

A certain effect is likely to occur due to the change effect of the changing icon in the symbol change display corresponding to the target hold icon.
As illustrated, the hold icon (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173h) that is different from the hold effect (in this example, the failure effect due to W bird) is not changed. In this example, a certain reserved effect (for example, the B bird effects shown in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h) in FIG. 173 (c) to (h)) is applied to the reserved icon (in this example, the black circle reserved icon) that is in a certain form from the appearance. ) Has been performed, but when the hold icon in the certain aspect becomes the change icon, the hold effect for the change icon, the same hold effect, or another hold effect ( In this example, a B-bird effect (FIG. 173 (u ′) to (z ′)) having the same hold effect may be generated or another hold effect such as a WUFO effect may be generated) or succeeded. Do A certain production (in this example, a normal reach production (FIG. 173 (i ')), but there may be cases where super reach with higher hit reliability than normal reach, occurrence of a preliminary announcement display, occurrence of pseudo-continuous production, etc. May be easily generated or may be configured to occur. However, when a certain effect is not performed even if the hold effect is performed again in the symbol variation display that is started after digestion of the hold corresponding to the hold icon having a certain form without changing as a result of the other hold effect. There may be.

(Example 34)
A pachinko machine 100 according to a thirty-fourth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 (a) to 175 (p) show an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 175, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 175 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 175 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. A hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

  In FIG. 175 (b), during the special figure 1 variable game, one game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is 2. This shows the state. The hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area at the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b2 is a white circle hold icon.

  FIG. 175 (c) shows a state in which the W bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which W bird k1 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. A mode when W bird k1 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of W Bird k1 is the start of W Bird production. The W bird effect in this example is an effect for the hold icon b2.

  FIG. 175 (d) shows a state where the W bird effect is being performed. An animation in which W bird k1 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire W bird k1 is displayed.

  FIG. 175 (e) shows that during the W bird effect, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced, and the W bird k1 rises to the center of the display screen. In this way, the W bird effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The W bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b2, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the W bird k1 is displayed on the target hold icon b2.

  FIG. 175 (f) shows a state where the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of W bird k1 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started while the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the W bird k1 is displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon b1 and the changing icon a1 that are not the target of the hold effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 175 (g) shows a state where the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b2 changes from a white circle hold icon to a black circle hold. The W bird effect in this example is a successful effect in which the target hold icon changes.

  FIG. 175 (h) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 175 (h), the W bird k1 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears in the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the W bird effect.

  In FIG. 175 (i), after the W bird k1 is deleted and the W bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state.

  FIG. 175 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game has ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a1 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 175 (k) shows a state in which the reservation of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a2. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

  FIG. 175 (l) shows that “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and “decoration 2” is then displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, without holding effect during the special figure 1 variable game. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state. In this example, the holding effect for the holding icon b2, which is a black circle holding icon, is not performed.

  FIG. 175 (m) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a2 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 175 (n) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation between the hold / change icons is displayed. Is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a3.

  FIG. 175 (o) shows that “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and “decoration 2” is then displayed in the right symbol display area 208c without the holding effect being performed during the special figure 1 variable game. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state. In this example, the hold effect for the changing icon a3 that is the display mode of the black circle hold icon is not performed.

  FIG. 175 (p) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a3 is deleted before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  In the present embodiment, it becomes a target of the hold effect (W bird), and the black circle hold icon is not changed next time due to the success of the hold effect, and the hold corresponding to the hold icon is digested and started. This is an example in which the symbol pattern display is finally displayed in the symbol variation display.

Change effects are likely to occur due to the next fluctuation.
As illustrated, it is different from a certain holding effect (for example, B bird in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) that has been successfully changed to a holding icon having a certain form (in this example, a black circle holding icon). The hold icon having a certain aspect from the appearance than the symbol change display (FIGS. 175 (k) to (s)) next to the symbol change display after the symbol change display (in this example, the successful effect by the W bird effect) is performed. The symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display in which the failure representation of a certain retention effect (for example, B bird in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) intended for (in this example, a black circle hold icon) is performed. It may be configured such that the hold effect or the same hold effect (B bird effect in this example) or another hold effect is easily performed again. However, even if the other holding effect (success) is performed in the previous symbol variation display, the holding effect may be performed in the next symbol variation display or the like of the symbol variation display.

A certain change effect is likely to occur due to the next fluctuation.
As illustrated, a certain holding effect (for example, the B bird effect shown in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) that has been successfully changed to a holding icon having a certain form (in this example, a black circle holding icon). The hold which made the certain aspect from the appearance rather than the symbol fluctuation display (FIGS. 175 (k) to (s)) next to the symbol fluctuation display in which another holding effect (successful effect by the W bird effect in this example) was performed The symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display in which the failure rendering of a certain holding effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) for the icon (black circle holding icon in this example) is performed. It may be configured such that a certain holding effect (B bird effect in this example) is easily performed. However, even if the holding effect (success) is performed in the previous symbol variation display, the certain holding effect may be performed in the symbol variation display subsequent to the symbol variation display.

It is easy to be subject to change production by the next fluctuation.
As illustrated, a certain holding effect (for example, the B bird effect shown in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) that has been successfully changed to a holding icon having a certain form (in this example, a black circle holding icon). The hold which made the certain aspect from the appearance rather than the symbol fluctuation display (FIGS. 175 (k) to (s)) next to the symbol fluctuation display in which another holding effect (successful effect by the W bird effect in this example) was performed. The symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display in which the failure rendering of the holding effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) for the icon (in this example, the black circle holding icon) is performed. The hold icon may be configured to be a target of a hold effect, the same hold effect, or another hold effect. However, even if the other holding effect (success) is performed in the previous symbol variation display, it may be the target of the holding effect, the same holding effect, or another holding effect in the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display. There may be.

The next change is likely to be the subject of a certain change effect.
As illustrated, a certain holding effect (for example, the B bird effect shown in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) that has been successfully changed to a holding icon having a certain form (in this example, a black circle holding icon). The hold which made the certain aspect from the appearance rather than the symbol fluctuation display (FIGS. 175 (k) to (s)) next to the symbol fluctuation display in which another holding effect (successful effect by the W bird effect in this example) was performed. The symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display in which the failure rendering of a certain holding effect (for example, B bird in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) targeting the icon (in this example, the black circle holding icon) is performed. However, the hold icon may be configured to be a target of a certain hold effect (for example, the same hold effect as the hold effect that has become a failure effect). However, even if another holding effect (success) is performed in the previous symbol variation display, there may be a case where a certain variation effect is targeted in the next symbol variation display or the like of the symbol variation display.

When the next change is the target of the change effect, the change effect is likely to succeed.
As illustrated, a certain holding effect (for example, the B bird effect shown in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) that has been successfully changed to a holding icon having a certain form (in this example, a black circle holding icon). The hold which made the certain aspect from the appearance rather than the symbol fluctuation display (FIGS. 175 (k) to (s)) next to the symbol fluctuation display in which another holding effect (successful effect by the W bird effect in this example) was performed. The symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display in which the failure rendering of the holding effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) for the icon (in this example, the black circle holding icon) is performed. The hold icon is likely to be the target of the hold effect, the same hold effect, or another hold effect, and the success of the hold effect (the hold mode is changed to a prefetch notice mode or a button press change hold icon with higher reliability) Success) We easily the hold effect may be configured for ease of success. However, even if the other holding effect (success) is performed in the previous symbol variation display, there may be a case where the symbol variation display subsequent to the symbol variation display becomes a target of the holding effect and succeeds.

When a change effect is the target of the next change, the change effect is likely to succeed.
As illustrated, a certain holding effect (for example, the B bird effect shown in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) that has been successfully changed to a holding icon having a certain form (in this example, a black circle holding icon). The hold which made the certain aspect from the appearance rather than the symbol fluctuation display (FIGS. 175 (k) to (s)) next to the symbol fluctuation display in which another holding effect (successful effect by the W bird effect in this example) was performed. The symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display in which the failure rendering of the holding effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) for the icon (in this example, the black circle holding icon) is performed. The hold icon is likely to be a target of a hold effect (B bird effect in the examples so far) and the hold effect is successful (the hold mode is a more reliable look-ahead notice mode, button press change hold icon, etc.) Successful change It may be configured such that the hold effect is likely to succeed easily performed. However, even if the other holding effect (success) is performed in the previous symbol variation display, there may be a case where it becomes a target of a certain holding effect in the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display and succeeds.

It is easy to hit a symbol variation display that starts with the pending digest corresponding to the subject pending icon.
As illustrated, a certain aspect changed by a hold effect (success effect by a W bird effect in this example) different from a hold effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)). The hold icon (in this example, the black circle hold icon) that is in a certain form from the appearance rather than the symbol variation display that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon (in this example, the black circle hold icon) is digested or started The symbol change display started when the hold corresponding to the hold icon having a certain aspect is digested in spite of the hold effect (for example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) being performed. However, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is likely to be stopped and displayed finally. However, even if the symbol variation display that starts after the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has changed to a certain form as a result of the other hold effect is digested is started, the jackpot symbol form may be stopped and displayed eventually. Good.

If a certain effect is performed with a symbol variation display that starts with the hold-up corresponding to the target hold icon, it is easy to win.
As illustrated, a certain aspect changed by a holding effect (in this example, a successful effect by W Bird) different from a certain holding effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)). A certain target for a holding icon (in this example, a black circle holding icon) that has been in a certain form from the appearance rather than the symbol variation display that is started after the holding corresponding to the holding icon (in this example, a black circle holding icon) is consumed. The symbol variation display that is started when the hold corresponding to the hold icon having a certain aspect is digested in spite of the hold effect (for example, B bird in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) is performed. A certain production (in this example, a normal reach production (Fig. 173 (b ')), but may be a super reach with higher hit reliability than normal reach, a certain notice display, a pseudo-continuous production, etc. In the event of occurrence), the jackpot symbol pattern may be configured to be easily or stop-displayed finally. However, even if a certain effect is performed in the symbol variation display that starts after digestion of the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has changed to a certain form as a result of the other hold effect, the jackpot symbol is finally changed. A stop display may be displayed.

It is easy to hit a big hit if a change effect is generated in the symbol variation display that starts with the hold digest corresponding to the target hold icon.
As illustrated, a certain aspect changed by a hold effect (success effect by a W bird effect in this example) different from a hold effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)). The hold icon (in this example, the black circle hold icon) that is in a certain form from the appearance rather than the symbol variation display that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon (in this example, the black circle hold icon) is digested or started The symbol variation display started when the hold corresponding to the hold icon having a certain aspect is digested even though the hold effect (for example, B bird in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) is performed. Is a holding effect or the same holding effect or another holding effect (in this example, the B bird effect (FIG. 173 (u ′) to (z ′) of the same holding effect), but the generation of another holding effect such as a WUFO effect, etc. May be better ) Finally jackpot symbol aspect may be configured to facilitate display stops in the event of. However, even if the hold effect is performed in the symbol variation display in which the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has changed to a certain form as a result of the other hold effect is digested and started, the jackpot symbol form is finally stopped It may be displayed.

A change effect is likely to occur in the symbol variation display that is started by the on-hold digestion corresponding to the target on-hold icon.
As illustrated, a certain aspect changed by a holding effect (in this example, a successful effect by W Bird) different from a certain holding effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)). A certain target for a holding icon (in this example, a black circle holding icon) that has been in a certain form from the appearance rather than the symbol variation display that is started after the holding corresponding to the holding icon (in this example, a black circle holding icon) is consumed. The symbol variation display started when the hold corresponding to the hold icon having a certain aspect is digested even though the hold effect (for example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) is performed. Is a holding effect or the same holding effect or another holding effect (in this example, the same holding effect B bird (FIG. 175 (u ′) to (z ′)), but may be another holding effect such as a WUFO effect. May be.) It may be configured to be easy without. However, there may be a case where the hold effect is not performed in the symbol variation display that starts after the hold corresponding to the hold icon changed to a certain form as a result of the other hold effect is started.

The changing icon is likely to be the target of the change effect in the symbol change display that starts with the hold digest corresponding to the target hold icon.
As illustrated, a certain aspect changed by a hold effect (success effect by a W bird effect in this example) different from a hold effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)). A certain holding effect (for example, FIGS. 173 (c) to (h) in FIG. 173) that is intended for a holding icon (in this example, a black circle holding icon) that is in a certain form from the appearance than the holding icon (in this example, a black circle holding icon). (B Bird effect) is performed when the hold icon having a certain aspect becomes a change icon when the hold icon becomes a variable icon (in this example, a hold effect or another hold effect (in this example)). Even if it is configured to be subject to the same hold effect B bird (FIG. 173 (u ′) to (z ′)), but may be another hold effect such as WUFO). Good. However, there is a case where the hold icon (the changing icon) is targeted in the symbol variation display that starts after the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has changed to a certain form as a result of the other hold effect is digested. Also good.

When a certain effect is performed in the symbol variation display, the changing icon is likely to be the target of the variation effect.
As illustrated, a certain aspect changed by a hold effect (success effect by a W bird effect in this example) different from a hold effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)). A certain holding effect (for example, FIGS. 173 (c) to (h) in FIG. 173) that is intended for a holding icon (in this example, a black circle holding icon) that is in a certain form from the appearance than the holding icon (in this example, a black circle holding icon). (B Bird)), when the hold icon in the certain aspect becomes the change icon when the hold icon becomes the change icon, the hold effect for the change icon or the same hold effect or another A holding effect (in this example, a B bird effect (FIG. 173 (u ′) to (z ′) of the same holding effect), may be generated as another holding effect such as a WUFO effect). Easy It may be configured to. However, in the symbol variation display that starts after digestion of the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has changed to a certain form as a result of the other hold effect, the hold effect for the hold icon (the changing icon) is performed. May be.

The changing effect of the changing icon is likely to be successful in the symbol change display started by the holding digest corresponding to the target holding icon.
As illustrated, a certain aspect changed by a holding effect (in this example, a successful effect by the W bird effect) different from a certain holding effect (for example, B bird in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)). A certain holding effect (for example, FIGS. 173 (c) to (h) of FIG. 173) is intended for a holding icon (in this example, a black circle holding icon) that is in a certain form from the appearance rather than the holding icon (in this example, a black circle holding icon). When the hold icon having the certain aspect is changed to a variable icon even though the B bird effect) is performed, the hold effect for the variable icon or the same hold effect or another Successful holding effect (in this example, the B-bird effect of the same holding effect (FIGS. 173 (u ′) to (z ′), but may be another holding effect such as WUFO) may be generated) Mode (Successful change to a pre-reading notice mode with high reliability, a button press change hold icon, etc.) may be performed easily, but the result of the other hold effect changes to a certain mode. There may be a case where the holding effect for the holding icon (the changing icon) is successful in the symbol variation display that starts after the holding corresponding to the holding icon is digested.

A certain effect is likely to occur in the symbol variation display that is started by the on-hold digestion corresponding to the target on-hold icon.
As illustrated, a certain aspect changed by a hold effect (success effect by a W bird effect in this example) different from a hold effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)). The reserved icon corresponding to the held icon (in this example, the black circle held icon) is used for the held icon (in this example, the black circle held icon) that is in a certain form from the appearance rather than the symbol variation display that is started when the hold corresponding to the reserved icon is digested. The symbol change display started when the hold corresponding to the hold icon having a certain aspect is digested in spite of the hold effect (for example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) being performed. There is a certain effect (in this example, a normal reach effect (Fig. 173 (I ')), but the occurrence of a super reach with higher hit reliability than normal reach, the occurrence of a notice announcement, the occurrence of a pseudo-ream effect, etc. May be likely to occur or may be configured to occur. However, there may be a case where a certain effect is performed in the symbol variation display that starts after digestion of the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has changed to a certain form as a result of the other hold effect.

A certain effect is likely to occur due to the change effect of the changing icon in the symbol change display corresponding to the target hold icon.
As illustrated, a certain hold effect (for example, B bird in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) is changed by a hold effect (in this example, a successful effect by W bird). A certain holding effect (for example, B in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) for a holding icon (in this example, a black circle holding icon) that has been in a certain form from the appearance (in this example, a black circle holding icon). When a hold icon that is in a certain form is changed to a variable icon even though the (bird) is performed, the hold effect for the variable icon or the same hold effect or another hold effect (In this example, the same hold effect B bird (FIG. 173 (u ′) to (z ′)), but may be another hold effect such as a WUFO effect, etc.) Some Out (in this example, normal reach production (FIG. 173 (b))), it may be possible to generate a super reach having a higher hit reliability than normal reach, a certain notice display, or a pseudo-continuous production. ) Are likely to occur or may be configured to occur. However, in the case where the hold effect corresponding to the hold icon that has changed as a result of the other hold effect has been digested and the symbol variation display is started and then the hold effect is performed again, no effect is performed. There may be.

(Example 35)
A pachinko machine 100 according to Example 35 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 (A) to (P). 175 (A) to 175 (P) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 175, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 175 (A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 175 (A), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. A hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

  FIG. 175 (B) shows that one game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the special figure 1 variable game, the number of retained figures in the special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the number of retained figures in the special figure 1 is 2. This shows the state. The hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area at the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b2 is a triangle hold icon.

  FIG. 175 (C) shows a state where the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode when B bird k2 appears is “mode α” shown in FIG. The start of the appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of the B Bird production. The B bird effect in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b2.

  FIG. 175 (D) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which B bird k1 moves to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

  In FIG. 175 (E), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the W bird effect, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced, and the B bird k2 rises to the center of the display screen. After the display, the b bird effect has progressed from “mode α” to “mode β” shown in FIG. The B bird effect in this example is for the hold icon b2, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the target hold icon b2.

  FIG. 175 (F) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of B bird k2 ends, the effect image k8 is displayed. Note that the display of the effect image k8 may be started during the display of the animation of the scene irradiated with the laser beam from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 is not visible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon b1 and the changing icon a1 that are not the target of the hold effect. Note that the effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the changing icon and the hold icon that are not the target of the hold effect.

  FIG. 175 (G) shows a state in which the effect image k8 has been deleted. Since the effect image k8 is deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed so as to be visible again. The hold icon b2 remains a triangular hold icon. The B bird effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

  FIG. 175 (H) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished. In FIG. 175 (H), B bird k2 returns to the state α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears to the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the B bird effect ends.

  In FIG. 175 (I), after the B bird k2 is deleted and the B bird effect is finished, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state.

  FIG. 175 (J) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a1 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 175 (K) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. The hold reduction animation is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a2. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

  FIG. 175 (L) shows that “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and “decoration 2” is then displayed in the right symbol display area 208c without the holding effect being performed during the special figure 1 variable game. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state. In this example, the holding effect for the holding icon b2 that is a triangular holding icon is not performed.

  FIG. 175 (M) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is the off symbol pattern, is stopped (determined display, final stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is out of place. In addition, the changing icon a2 is erased before “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 175 (N) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation between the hold / change icons is displayed. Is displayed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold is changed and displayed in the changing icon display area as the changing icon a3.

  FIG. 175 (O) shows that “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a without holding effect during the special figure 1 variable game, and then “decoration 3” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates a temporarily stopped display state. This shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the normal reach effect display is started when reach is reached in the decorative symbol variation display in FIG. 175 (O). In FIG. 175 (O), after reaching the reach in the decorative symbol variation display, the super reach effect display may be started instead of the normal reach effect display. Further, in this example, the holding effect for the changing icon a3 that is the display mode of the triangular holding icon is not performed.

  FIG. 175 (P) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”, which is a jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed (determined display, main stop display), and the result of whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display is appropriate is determined. It is reported that it is a big hit. In addition, the changing icon a3 is deleted before “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. The changing icon decoration symbol may be erased during the stop display.

  In the present embodiment, the triangle hold icon that has been the target of the change effect and has not changed is compared with the black circle hold icon that has been the subject of the change effect and has not changed, and the black circle hold icon that has been the target of the change effect and has not changed is more It is likely to be subject to change effect again due to the next change, etc., or it is likely to be subject to change effect again in the symbol variation display that starts after digestion of the hold corresponding to the hold icon, or if it becomes subject to change effect again Change production is likely to be successful.

Change effects are likely to occur due to the next fluctuation.
As illustrated, a certain holding effect (in this example, FIGS. 175 (C) to (H)) that has failed to change a holding icon (in this example, a triangular holding icon) having a certain aspect to another aspect. A different type of hold icon (for example, the black circle hold icon in FIG. 173) different from the next pattern change display (FIGS. 175 (K) to (M)) of the pattern change display in which the B bird effect) is performed. The symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display after the symbol variation display in which a certain retention effect (for example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) has failed to be changed to the hold effect or the same hold effect again. (For example, a B bird effect) or another hold effect may be easily performed. However, the next symbol variation of the symbol variation display in which a certain holding effect that has failed to change the holding icon (in this example, the triangle pending icon) that has performed the certain aspect in the previous symbol variation display to another aspect has been performed. There may be a case where the hold effect or the same hold effect (for example, B bird effect) or another hold effect is performed again on the display.

A certain change effect is likely to occur due to the next fluctuation.
As illustrated, a certain holding effect (in this example, FIGS. 175 (C) to (H)) that has failed to change a holding icon (in this example, a triangular holding icon) having a certain aspect to another aspect. Next to the symbol variation display (Fig. 175 (K) to (M)) of the symbol variation display in which the B bird effect) is performed, a holding icon (for example, the black circle holding icon in Fig. 173) changed to another mode. The symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display in which the certain variation representation that has failed to be changed (for example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) is performed is a certain retained variation (in this example). (B bird effect) may be configured to be easy to perform, but failure to change the hold icon (in this example, the triangle hold icon) that took the certain form in the previous symbol variation display to another form. A certain hold effect was made In the next symbol variable display of pattern variable display may be a case where the one holding effect takes place.

It is easy to be subject to change production by the next change,
As illustrated, a certain holding effect (in this example, FIGS. 175 (C) to (H)) that has failed to change a holding icon (in this example, a triangular holding icon) having a certain aspect to another aspect. The symbol change display (for example, the black circle hold icon in FIG. 173) different from the symbol change display (for example, FIGS. The symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display after the symbol variation display in which a certain certain retention effect (for example, the B bird effect of FIGS. You may be comprised so that it may become easy to be the subject of production or another hold production, but change the hold icon (the triangle hold icon in this example) which carried out the certain mode in the previous symbol change display to another mode. Something failed Hold effect may even be subject to hold director or the same hold director or another hold effect in the next symbol variable display of symbol variation display made.

The next change is likely to be the subject of a certain change effect.
As illustrated, a certain holding effect (in this example, FIGS. 175 (C) to (H)) that has failed to change a holding icon (in this example, a triangular holding icon) having a certain aspect to another aspect. Next to the symbol variation display (Fig. 175 (K) to (M)) of the symbol variation display in which the B bird effect) is performed, a holding icon (for example, the black circle holding icon in Fig. 173) changed to another mode. The symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display after the symbol variation display in which a certain retention effect (for example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) that has failed to change is performed is a certain retention effect. (For example, the same hold effect as the hold effect that has become a failure effect) may be configured to be easy to be processed, but the hold icon (in this example, the triangle hold icon in the example) in the previous symbol variation display. ) To other aspects There may be cases where some pending production which failed to be to be subject to certain pending effect in the next symbol variable display of symbol variation display made.

When the next change is the target of the change effect, the change effect is likely to succeed.
As illustrated, a certain holding effect (in this example, FIGS. 175 (C) to (H)) that has failed to change a holding icon (in this example, a triangular holding icon) having a certain aspect to another aspect. (B Bird) is changed from the next symbol variation display (k) to (m) of the symbol variation display in which the symbol variation display is performed to a different hold icon (for example, the black circle hold icon in FIG. 173). The symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display after the symbol variation display in which a certain failed retention effect (for example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) is performed, The hold effect is likely to be the target of the hold effect, and the success of the hold effect (successful change of the hold mode to a more reliable look-ahead notice mode or button press change hold icon, etc.) is successful. Easy to configure It may be. However, the next symbol variation of the symbol variation display in which a certain holding effect that has failed to change the holding icon (in this example, the triangle pending icon) that has performed the certain aspect in the previous symbol variation display to another aspect has been performed. There may be a case where the display becomes a target of the holding effect and succeeds.

When a change effect is the target of the next change, the change effect is likely to succeed.
As illustrated, a certain holding effect (in this example, FIGS. 175 (C) to (H)) that has failed to change a holding icon (in this example, a triangular holding icon) having a certain aspect to another aspect. (B Bird) is changed from the next symbol variation display (Figs. 175 (K) to (M)) of the symbol variation display to another mode (for example, the black circle pending icon in Fig. 173). The symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display after the symbol variation display in which a certain retention effect (for example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) that has failed to change is performed is a certain retention effect. (The example up to this point is likely to be a B bird effect) and the hold effect is successful (the hold mode has succeeded in changing to a pre-reading notice mode or a button press change hold icon with higher reliability). Easy on hold production succeeded It may be configured so cheap. However, the next symbol variation of the symbol variation display in which a certain holding effect that has failed to change the holding icon (in this example, the triangle pending icon) that has performed the certain aspect in the previous symbol variation display to another aspect has been performed. There may be a case where the display is a target of a certain holding effect and succeeds.

A change effect is likely to occur in the symbol variation display that is started by the on-hold digestion corresponding to the target on-hold icon.
As illustrated, a hold icon (in this example, a triangle) that has failed to change to another form by a certain hold effect (in this example, B bird in FIGS. 175 (C) to (H)). The change corresponding to a certain hold effect (in this example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 175 (C) to (H)) is changed to a different form rather than the symbol variation display started after digestion of the hold corresponding to the hold icon). The symbol variation display started after digestion of the hold corresponding to the failed hold icon (in this example, the black circle hold icon) is a hold effect, the same hold effect, or another hold effect (the same hold effect B). Bird diagrams 173 (u ′) to (z ′) correspond to an example, but may be generated as another holding effect such as a WUFO effect). . However, in the symbol variation display in which the hold corresponding to the hold icon (in this example, the triangular hold icon) that has failed to be changed to another form by the certain hold effect is digested and started, the hold effect is displayed. It may be done.

The changing icon is likely to be the target of the change effect in the symbol change display that starts with the hold digest corresponding to the target hold icon.
As illustrated, a hold icon (in this example) having a certain form that has failed to be changed to another form by a certain hold effect (in this example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 175 (C) to (H)). A holding icon (in this example) that has failed to change to another mode by a certain holding effect (in this example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 175 (C) to (H)) rather than a triangular holding icon). In the case of the black circle hold icon), when the hold icon becomes a variable icon, the hold effect, the same hold effect, or another hold effect (same hold effect B bird 173 (u ′) to (z ′) corresponds to an example. However, there may be cases where another on-hold effect such as a WUFO effect may be generated, etc.). However, in the symbol variation display in which the hold corresponding to the hold icon having a certain form that has failed to be changed to another form by the certain hold effect (triangular hold icon in this example) is digested, the hold icon is started. (Fluctuating icon) may be the target.

When a certain effect is performed with the symbol variation display corresponding to the target hold icon, the changing icon is likely to be the target of the variation effect.
As illustrated, a hold icon (in this example) having a certain form that has failed to be changed to another form by a certain hold effect (in this example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 175 (C) to (H)). A holding icon (in this example) that has failed to change to another mode by a certain holding effect (in this example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 175 (C) to (H)) rather than a triangular holding icon). When the black circle hold icon becomes a change icon, the hold effect for the change icon or the same hold effect or another hold effect (hold effect B bird effect (FIG. 173 (u ′) ˜)) (Z ′)) corresponds to an example, but it may be possible to generate another holding effect such as a WUFO effect. However, in the symbol variation display in which the hold corresponding to the hold icon having a certain form that has failed to be changed to another form by the certain hold effect (in this example, the triangular hold icon) is digested and started, the hold icon There may be a case where an on-hold effect is performed on (the changing icon).

The changing effect of the changing icon is likely to be successful in the symbol change display started by the holding digest corresponding to the target holding icon.
As illustrated, a hold icon (in this example) having a certain form that has failed to be changed to another form by a certain hold effect (in this example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 175 (C) to (H)). A holding icon (in this example, a black circle) that has failed to be changed to another mode by a certain holding effect (in this example, B bird in FIGS. 175 (C) to (H)) rather than a triangular holding icon). When the hold icon becomes the change icon, the hold effect or the same hold effect or another hold effect (same hold effect B bird (FIG. 173 (u ′) ˜ ( z ')) is an example, but there may be cases where another hold effect such as a WUFO effect may be generated.) Successful pre-reading notice mode or button press change hold with a more reliable hold mode Eye Success in changes to the emissions, etc.) may be configured so as to be easily performed. However, in the symbol variation display in which the hold corresponding to the hold icon having a certain form that has failed to be changed to another form by the certain hold effect (triangular hold icon in this example) is digested, the hold icon is started. There may be a case where the holding effect for (the changing icon) is successful.

A certain effect is likely to occur in the symbol variation display that is started by the on-hold digestion corresponding to the target on-hold icon.
As illustrated, a hold icon (in this example) having a certain form that has failed to be changed to another form by a certain hold effect (in this example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 175 (C) to (H)). It is to be changed to another mode by a certain holding effect (in this example, B bird in FIGS. 175 (C) to (H)) rather than the symbol variation display started by digesting the holding corresponding to the triangle holding icon). An example of a certain effect (normal reach effect (FIG. 173 (I ′))) is a symbol variation display that has been started after digestion of a hold corresponding to a failed hold icon (in this example, a black circle hold icon). However, the occurrence of a super reach having a higher hit reliability than that of normal reach, the occurrence of a certain notice display, or the occurrence of a pseudo-continuous effect may occur.) It may be configured. However, a certain effect in the symbol variation display that starts after the hold corresponding to the hold icon (in this example, the triangle hold icon) that has failed to change to another form due to the certain hold effect is digested. May be performed.

A certain effect is likely to occur due to the change effect of the changing icon in the symbol change display corresponding to the target hold icon.
As illustrated, a hold icon (in this example) having a certain form that has failed to be changed to another form by a certain hold effect (in this example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 175 (C) to (H)). A holding icon (in this example) that has failed to change to another mode by a certain holding effect (in this example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 175 (C) to (H)) rather than a triangular holding icon). When the black circle hold icon) becomes a variable icon, the hold effect or the same hold effect or another hold effect (same hold effect B bird effect (FIG. 173 (u ′)) ~ (Z ′)) corresponds to an example, but may be a case where another holding effect such as a WUFO effect may be generated) or when a certain effect (in this example, a normal reach effect ( ') However, there may be cases where super-reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach, occurrence of a warning notice, occurrence of pseudo-continuous effects, etc.) is likely or likely to occur. May be. However, the hold effect is again displayed in the symbol variation display that starts after the hold corresponding to the hold icon (in this example, the triangle hold icon) that has failed to be changed to another mode by the certain hold effect is digested. There may be a case where a certain effect is not performed even if the above is performed.

  Next, a characteristic configuration of the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 175 again.

(U1)
A symbol display means (for example, left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c) capable of executing symbol variation display;
Image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying a number of hold icons corresponding to the number of holds;
A game machine equipped with
The image display means includes a plurality of types of the hold icons (for example, a white circle hold icon, a black circle hold icon, a button hold icon, a triangle hold icon, a face hold icon, and a soot hold icon shown in FIG. 104) ( (Hereinafter referred to as “multiple types of hold icons”).
One type of the hold icon of the plurality of types of hold icons is a hold icon (for example, a black circle hold icon) (hereinafter referred to as a “second hold icon”) having a second mode,
One type of the hold icon of the plurality of types of hold icons is a hold icon having a third mode (for example, a triangle hold icon, a face hold icon, or a soot hold icon) (hereinafter, “third hold icon”). And)
The second aspect and the third aspect are different aspects,
In the image display means, the hold effect that is either success or failure in the change of the hold icon mode (for example, the W bird effect, the B bird effect, the B bird effect with buttons, or the W bomber shown in FIG. 149) Production, B-bomber production, WUFO production, and BUFO production) may be performed,
In the image display means, one of a plurality of types of holding effects (hereinafter referred to as “plural types of holding effects”) may be performed.
One holding effect of the plurality of types of holding effects is a first holding effect (for example, W bird effect or W bomber effect shown in FIG. 149),
When the first hold effect is performed for the second hold icon, the second hold icon may change to the third hold icon,
Even if the first hold effect is performed for the second hold icon, the second hold icon may not change to another type of hold icon,
The variation display of the symbol that starts after digestion of the hold corresponding to the third hold icon is more final than the display of the variation of the symbol that starts after the hold corresponding to the second hold icon is digested. In general, it is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is easy to be confirmed and displayed,
The first hold effect rather than the variable display of the symbol that starts when the hold corresponding to the second hold icon that is not targeted for any hold effect of the plurality of types of hold effects is digested. The symbol variation display that starts after digestion of the hold corresponding to the second hold icon that did not change to another type of hold icon is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the end. Configured as
A game stand characterized by that.

Rather than the variable display of the symbol that starts after digestion of the hold corresponding to the second hold icon that has never been a target for any hold effect of the plurality of types of hold effects, the first display The variation display of the symbol that is started after digestion of the hold corresponding to the second hold icon that has been the target of the hold effect and did not change to another type of hold icon is finally displayed as the big hit symbol form It is configured to be easy to be.
Rather than the variable display of the symbol that starts after digestion of the hold corresponding to the second hold icon that has never been a target for any hold effect of the plurality of types of hold effects, the first display The hold corresponding to the hold icon for which the second hold icon has been displayed at least once as a result of the hold effect without changing to another type of hold icon is started. The symbol variation display is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is finally easily displayed.
One or more times than the variable display of the symbol that is started after digestion of the hold corresponding to the second hold icon that has never been targeted for any hold effect of the plurality of types of hold effects. The hold corresponding to the second hold icon that has become the object of the first hold effect and has not changed to another type of hold icon in all of the first hold effects one or more times is digested and started. The symbol variation display is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is finally easily displayed.
Rather than the change display of the symbol that starts when the hold corresponding to the second hold icon that was not the target of the first hold effect is digested, it becomes the target of the first hold effect and other types of The symbol variation display that starts after the hold corresponding to the second hold icon that has not changed to the hold icon is digested is configured so that the jackpot symbol form is finally displayed more easily.
Rather than the variable display of the symbol that starts after digestion of the hold corresponding to the second hold icon that has never been a target for any hold effect of the plurality of types of hold effects, the first display The variation display of the symbol that is started after digestion of the hold corresponding to the second hold icon that has been the target of the hold effect and did not change to another type of hold icon is finally displayed as the big hit symbol form It is configured to be easy to be.
Rather than the variable display of the symbol that starts after digestion of the hold corresponding to the second hold icon that has never been a target for any hold effect of the plurality of types of hold effects, the first display The hold corresponding to the hold icon for which the second hold icon has been displayed at least once as a result of the hold effect without changing to another type of hold icon is started. The symbol variation display is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is finally easily displayed.
One or more times than the variable display of the symbol that is started after digestion of the hold corresponding to the second hold icon that has never been targeted for any hold effect of the plurality of types of hold effects. The hold corresponding to the second hold icon that has become the object of the first hold effect and has not changed to another type of hold icon in all of the first hold effects one or more times is digested and started. The symbol variation display is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is finally easily displayed.
It is configured so that the number of holds increases when a game ball enters the starting port,
In response to the increase in the number of holds, the new hold icon is configured to appear,
There is a case where the second hold icon is newly appeared in accordance with the increase in the hold number.

(U1 ')
A symbol display means (for example, left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c) capable of executing symbol variation display;
Displayable image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of informing the number of holds;
A game machine equipped with
The image display means is configured to be capable of displaying a plurality of types of the hold icons (hereinafter referred to as “plural types of the hold icons”),
One type of the hold icon of the plurality of types of hold icons is a hold icon in the second mode (hereinafter referred to as “second hold icon”).
One type of the hold icon among the plurality of types of hold icons is a hold icon having a third aspect (hereinafter referred to as a “second product hold icon”).
The second aspect and the third aspect are different aspects,
In the image display means, there may be a hold effect that is either success or failure in the change of the mode of the hold icon,
In the image display means, one of a plurality of types of holding effects (hereinafter referred to as “plural types of holding effects”) may be performed.
One holding effect of the plurality of types of holding effects is a first holding effect,
When the first hold effect is performed for the second hold icon, the second hold icon may change to the third hold icon,
Even if the first hold effect is performed for the second hold icon, the second hold icon may not change to another type of hold icon,
The variation display of the symbol that starts after digestion of the hold corresponding to the third hold icon is more final than the display of the variation of the symbol that starts after the hold corresponding to the second hold icon is digested. In general, it is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is easy to be confirmed and displayed,
The second hold icon that is not the target of any hold effect of the plurality of types of hold effects is the target of the first hold effect rather than the probability that the second hold icon is the target of the first hold effect. The second hold icon (hold icon b3 shown in FIGS. 160 to 167) that has not changed to another type of hold icon is configured to have a higher probability of being the target of the first hold effect. ing,
A game stand characterized by that.

  The second hold icon is, for example, a black circle hold icon, but the second hold icon may be a white circle hold icon or another hold icon shown in FIG.

(U2)
A gaming machine as set forth in (U1) above,
The second hold icon that is not the target of any hold effect of the plurality of types of hold effects is the target of the first hold effect rather than the probability that the second hold icon is the target of the first hold effect. The second hold icon that has not changed to another type of hold icon is configured to have a higher probability of being the target of the first hold effect,
A game stand characterized by that.

The probability that the second hold icon that has never been the target of any one of the multiple types of hold effects is the target of the first hold effect than the first hold effect. The second hold icon that has become an object and has not changed to another type of hold icon has a higher probability of being the target of the first hold effect.
The probability that the second hold icon that has never been the target of any one of the multiple types of hold effects is the target of the first hold effect than the first hold effect. The probability that the second hold icon that has been displayed even once as a result of the hold effect without changing to another type of hold icon becomes the target of the first hold effect. It is configured to be higher.
The probability that the second hold icon that has never been the target of any of the multiple types of hold effects is the target of the first hold effect is one or more times. The probability that the second hold icon that has become a target of the hold effect and has not changed to another type of hold icon in all of the first hold effect one or more times becomes the target of the first hold effect. It is configured to be higher.
At least the second hold icon that is not the target of the first hold effect is the target of the first hold effect, and other types of hold icons than the probability of being the target of the first hold effect. The second hold icon that has not changed is configured to have a higher probability of being the target of the first hold effect.
At least the second hold icon that has never been the target of the first hold effect is the target of the first hold effect, and other types of hold than the probability of being the target of the first hold effect. The second hold icon that has not changed to an icon is configured to have a higher probability of being the target of the first hold effect.
At least the second hold icon that has never been the target of the first hold effect is the target of the first hold effect, and other types of hold than the probability of being the target of the first hold effect. The hold icon that has been displayed as a second hold icon even once as a result of the hold effect without changing to an icon is configured to have a higher probability of being the target of the first hold effect. ing.
The second hold icon that has never been the target of the first hold effect is the target of the first hold effect one or more times than the probability that the second hold icon is the target of the first hold effect. The second hold icon that has not changed to another type of hold icon in all of the first hold effects one or more times is configured to have a higher probability of being the target of the first hold effect. ing.

(U3)
The game table according to (U1) or (U2) above,
One type of the hold icon of the plurality of types of hold icons is a hold icon (for example, a white circle hold icon) (hereinafter, referred to as a “first hold icon”) having a first aspect,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
The first aspect and the third aspect are different aspects,
The first aspect is a default aspect,
The first hold icon is a default hold icon,
The variation display of the symbol that is started after the hold corresponding to the second hold icon is digested is more final than the display of the variation of the symbol that is started after the hold corresponding to the first hold icon is digested. In general, it is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is easy to confirm and display,
The variation display of the symbol that starts after digestion of the hold corresponding to the third hold icon is more final than the display of the variation of the symbol that starts after the hold corresponding to the first hold icon is digested. In general, it is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is easily displayed and confirmed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(U4)
The game stand according to (U3) above,
The image display means is configured to display a changing icon as a hold icon,
When hold is reduced, the hold icon that appears most recently is displayed as the changing icon,
The changing icon is configured to be erased at least before the hold reduction (for example, during the fluctuation change display of the decorative design),
A game stand characterized by that.

(U5)
The game table according to (U3) or (U4) above,
One holding effect among the plurality of types of holding effects is a second holding effect (for example, a B bird effect, a B bird effect with a button, or a B bomber effect shown in 149),
The first hold effect and the second hold effect are different hold effects,
When the second hold effect is performed for the second hold icon, the second hold icon may change to the third hold icon,
Even if the second hold effect is performed for the second hold icon, the second hold icon may not change to another type of hold icon,
The hold icon is more likely to be the first hold effect than the probability that the second hold icon that has been the target of the first hold effect and has not changed to another type of hold icon is the second hold effect. It is configured so that the probability of being directed is higher,
A game stand characterized by that.

(U6)
The game stand according to (U5) above,
The first hold effect (for example, W bird effect or W bomber effect) is performed for the second hold icon, and the probability that the second hold icon changes to the third hold icon, The second hold icon (for example, B bird effect or B bomber effect) is performed on the second hold icon, and the probability that the second hold icon changes to the third hold icon is greater. Configured to be higher,
A game stand characterized by that.

(U7)
The game stand according to (U5) or (U6) above,
The image display means can display a changing icon (hereinafter referred to as “second changing icon”) in the second mode (for example, a display mode of a black circle hold icon),
The image display means is a changing icon (hereinafter referred to as “third variation”) that has the third mode (for example, the display mode of the triangle hold icon, the display mode of the face hold icon, or the display mode of the Minowa hold icon). Medium icon ").
One hold effect of the plurality of types of hold effects is a third hold effect (for example, the WUFO effect shown in FIG. 149),
The first hold effect and the third hold effect are different hold effects,
The second hold effect and the third hold effect are different hold effects,
When the third hold effect is performed for the second changing icon, the second changing icon may change to the third changing icon,
Even if the third holding effect is performed for the second changing icon, the second changing icon may not change to another type of holding icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

(U8)
The game stand according to (U7) above,
The second hold icon (for example, the hold icon b3 shown in FIG. 160) that is the target of the first hold effect (for example, the B bird effect shown in FIG. 160) and has not changed to another type of hold icon fluctuates. After the middle icon (for example, the changing icon a4 shown in FIG. 160), the changing icon is more likely to be the target of the first holding effect than the third holding effect (for example, the WUFO effect, Configured to have a higher probability of being a target of BUFO production),
A game stand characterized by that.

(U8 ')
The game stand according to (U7) above,
The probability that the second holding icon that is not the target of any holding effect among the plurality of types of holding effects becomes the changing icon after the second holding icon becomes the changing icon. It is configured such that the probability of becoming the target of the hold effect becomes higher after the second hold icon that has become the target of the hold effect and has not changed to another type of hold icon becomes the changing icon. ,
A game stand characterized by that.

(U9)
The game stand according to (U7) or (U8) above,
Symbol variation started after digestion of the hold corresponding to the second hold icon (for example, the hold icon b2 shown in FIG. 160) that was not the target of any hold effect of the plurality of types of hold effects. The second hold icon (which is the object of the first hold effect and has not changed to another type of hold icon) than the probability that the third hold effect for the changing icon is performed in the display. For example, in the symbol variation display started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b3) shown in FIG. 160 is digested, the probability that the third hold effect for the changing icon is performed is higher. It is configured,
A game stand characterized by that.

Targeting the changing icon in the symbol variation display started after digestion of the hold corresponding to the second hold icon that has never been targeted for any hold effect of the plurality of types of hold effects. The hold corresponding to the second hold icon that is the target of the first hold effect and has not changed to another type of hold icon is digested and started than the probability that the third hold effect is performed. In the symbol variation display, the probability that the third holding effect for the changing icon is performed is higher.
Targeting the changing icon in the symbol variation display started after digestion of the hold corresponding to the second hold icon that has never been targeted for any hold effect of the plurality of types of hold effects. The second hold icon is displayed at least once as a result of the hold effect without changing to another type of hold icon, rather than the probability of the third hold effect being performed. There is a higher probability that the third hold effect for the changing icon is performed in the symbol variation display started after digestion of the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has been performed.
Targeting the changing icon in the symbol variation display started after digestion of the hold corresponding to the second hold icon that has never been targeted for any hold effect of the plurality of types of hold effects. Rather than the probability that the third hold effect is performed, the first hold effect becomes a target one or more times and changes to another type of hold icon in all of the first hold effects one or more times. There is a higher probability that the third hold effect for the changing icon is performed in the symbol variation display started after digestion of the hold corresponding to the second hold icon that did not exist.

(U10)
The game stand according to any one of (U7) to (U9) above,
Symbol variation started after digestion of the hold corresponding to the second hold icon (for example, the hold icon b3 shown in FIG. 160) that has been the target of the first hold effect and has not changed to another type of hold icon. The display is configured to be likely to be successful when the third holding effect for the changing icon is performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

The hold corresponding to the hold icon in which the second hold icon has been displayed at least once as a result of the hold effect without changing to another type of hold icon is the target of the first hold effect. In the symbol variation display that has been started, the success is likely to occur when the third holding effect is performed on the changing icon.
The hold corresponding to the second hold icon that has been the target of the first hold effect one or more times and did not change to another type of hold icon in all of the first hold effects one or more times is consumed. In the symbol variation display that has been started, the success is likely to occur when the third holding effect is performed on the changing icon.

(U11)
The game stand according to any one of (U7) to (U10) above,
The image display means can display a changing icon (hereinafter referred to as a “first changing icon”) in the first mode (for example, a display mode of a white circle hold icon),
The first changing icon is a default changing icon,
The variation display of the symbol in which the second variation icon is displayed is more final than the variation display of the symbol in which the first variation icon is displayed and the other types of variation icons are not displayed. Is configured so that the big win symbol pattern is easy to confirm and display,
The variation display of the symbol in which the third variation icon is displayed is more final than the variation display of the symbol in which the first variation icon is displayed and the other types of variation icons are not displayed. Is configured so that the big win symbol pattern is easy to confirm and display,
The variation display of the symbol in which the third variable icon is displayed is more final than the variation display of the symbol in which the second variation icon is displayed and the other types of variation icons are not displayed. It is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is easy to be confirmed and displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

Provided with operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
In the hold effect, the display requesting the operation of the operation means is configured to be performed,
When the hold effect is performed for the second hold icon, the second hold icon may change to the third hold icon in response to the operation means being operated.
Even if the hold effect is performed for the second hold icon, the effect proceeds according to the operation of the operation means, but the second hold icon changes to another type of hold icon. May not.
When the hold effect is performed on the second hold icon, the second hold icon is deleted, and one type of hold icon of the plurality of types of hold icons is displayed.

(U12)
The game stand according to any one of (U1) to (U11) above,
Provided with a ball storage means (for example, a lower plate 128) capable of storing game balls,
The image display means is a means capable of displaying a display prompting to discharge a game ball from the ball storage means (for example, dish full tank display k10) (hereinafter referred to as “ball discharge display”).
At least one hold effect of the plurality of types of hold effects displayed in the state where the ball discharge display is displayed is configured to be overlapped with the ball discharge display.
A game stand characterized by that.

The first hold effect may be a hold effect that is either successful or unsuccessful in the change of the hold icon for the hold icon including the changing icon. However, the first hold effect may be a hold effect that is either successful or unsuccessful in changing the state of the hold icon for the hold icon except the changing icon. However, the first hold effect may not be a hold icon except the changing icon, and may be a hold effect that is either success or failure in the change of the changing icon in the hold icon.
The second hold effect may be a hold effect that is either successful or unsuccessful in the change of the hold icon for the hold icon including the changing icon. However, the second hold effect may be a hold effect that is either successful or unsuccessful in the change of the state of the hold icon for the hold icon except the changing icon. However, the second hold effect may not be a hold icon except the changing icon, and may be a hold effect that is either success or failure in the change of the changing icon in the hold icon.
The third hold effect may be a hold effect that is either successful or unsuccessful in the change of the hold icon for the hold icon including the changing icon. However, the third hold effect may be a hold effect that is either successful or unsuccessful in changing the state of the hold icon for the hold icon excluding the changing icon. However, the third holding effect may be a holding effect that does not target the holding icons other than the changing icon, and is either successful or unsuccessful in the change of the changing icon mode among the holding icons.

“Hold” refers to “pending start of variable display of symbols”, and “digestion of hold” corresponds to “start of variable display of symbols that have been held”. “Suspension of hold” does not mean “changed icon is deleted”.
The hold icon may notify the player that the hold has occurred due to the appearance, and may notify the player of the hold number by the number.
Each time a game ball wins at the start opening, the hold information is stored, the display of the symbols is started using the hold information, and the hold information is erased. "" May correspond to the fact that the variable display of symbols is started using the hold information and the hold information is deleted. When starting the next symbol variation display, which hold information is used and erased (that is, whether the hold is digested), the hold is used in the order stored according to the game ball winning at the start opening. Special figure 2 priority fluctuations, in which the suspension of the fluctuation start of special figure 2 is first consumed over the fluctuation of the winning order and the fluctuation start of special figure 1 are generally used, but are not limited thereto. In many cases, the rules for digestion of the hold information in one special figure are used from the old hold. For this reason, a certain hold icon that appears when a certain hold appears, approaches the hold 1 display area each time another older hold is digested, that is, whenever a certain hold is approached, When the previous hold is consumed, a certain hold icon is displayed in the hold 1 display area, and when the symbol change display started by digesting the previous hold is completed, the given hold is consumed and the corresponding hold icon is deleted. Or displayed in the hold 0 display area, that is, a changing icon. Here, the hold information is not limited to the information stored in the winning order in any of the plurality of hold storage units of the main control means, and is stored in any form as long as it is information acquired at the time of winning the start opening. For example, when the start opening prize is received, sub-control is performed on information immediately before being stored in one of the plurality of holding storage units of the main control unit (for example, main control unit 300) or information extracted after storage. Is transmitted to the means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400), is used for random number lottery before transmission to the information stored in the sub-control means and to the sub-control means, and the result of the random number lottery is transmitted to the sub-control means. It may be stored in the sub-control means. Note that the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be a special figure 2 priority change machine or a start opening winning order change machine.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a label is affixed that the failure effect of the holding effect is a disadvantageous effect for the player, and that the player is awakened by just performing the effect. In some cases, it can be reduced. In the symbol variation display where the hold icon that was the target of the hold effect is digested and started, the success is the case when the failure effect is performed than when neither the success effect nor the failure effect of the hold effect is performed. Easy to connect to. The hold icon that is the target of the success effect or the failure effect of the hold effect is more likely to be the target of the hold effect again than the hold icon that is not the target of the success effect or the failure effect of the hold effect. When the hold icon that is the target of the success or failure production of the hold production becomes the changing icon rather than the hold icon that is not the target of the success or failure production of the hold production, the hold production Is easy to be done.

[Seventh Embodiment]
Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention is described with reference to FIGS. 176 to 183. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the same configuration and control system as the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, and thus the first embodiment. The description of the configuration and control system common to the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment is omitted.

Example 1
An effect example of Example 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 176 (a) to (h) show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series. 176 (a) to (h), (g '), (h') and the configuration shown in FIG. 21 (a) of Example 5 of the first embodiment are the same as those shown in FIGS. Have the same operations and effects, the same reference numerals are given only to FIG.

  FIG. 176 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination “decoration 2-” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is wrong has been lost. Decoration 3-Decoration 4 "is stopped and displayed. In the special figure 1 4th symbol display area 933 within the decoration frame f1 displayed at the upper left corner of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display mode for notifying the deviation (in this example, “−” The 4th symbol of the display mode is stopped and displayed. In the special figure 2 4th symbol display area 934 in the decoration frame f1, the 4th symbol of the display mode for notifying that the determination result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is wrong is stopped and displayed. In the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 in the decorative frame f1, "1" indicating that the special figure 1 hold number is 1 is displayed, and in the special figure 2 hold number display area 932 in the decorative frame f1. “0” indicating that the number of holds in the special figure 2 is 0 is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 in the decoration frame f2 displayed at the lower part of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a special figure 1 hold icon 951 having a default display mode displayed in a white circle is displayed. Has been. The sub display device 209 has a horizontally long rectangular image display area, and the entire image display area can be used as an effect display area 209a for displaying effect display. In the state shown in FIG. 176 (a), the sub display device 209 is located at an initial position (first position) which is a position in front of the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The sub display device 209 is mounted on the effect movable body 225, and can perform a moving operation and a rotating operation in an up / down / left / right oblique direction within a plane substantially parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 176 (b) shows a state in which the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 933, a variation display of the fourth symbol is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, “0” is displayed, and it is notified that the hold number in the special figure 1 has decreased by 1 and the hold number in the special figure 1 has become zero. When the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the variable icon display area 940 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 of the decorative symbol display device 208 are arranged between the hold / change icons. A moving animation is executed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 becomes the change icon 941 and moves to the change icon display area 940. . In FIG. 176 (b), the moving animation between the hold / change icons is finished, and the change icon 941 is displayed in the change icon display area 940. The sub display device 209 displays a variation display of the decorative symbol with the start of the special figure 1 variable game. In the figure, a downward arrow shown in the image display area of the sub display device 209 indicates that a decorative symbol variation display is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display on the sub display device 209 is executed during a part of the period in which the decorative symbol variation display is performed on the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. . In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol variation display on the sub display device 209 is started simultaneously with the decorative symbol variation display on the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left middle right symbol display. The display ends before the decorative symbol variation display in the areas 208a to 208c. The decorative symbol variation display on the sub display device 209 may be started before the decorative symbol variation display on the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, or the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208a. It may be started later than the variation display of decorative symbols at 208c.

  In FIG. 176 (c), the sub display device 209 linearly moves downward from the initial position and stops at a position in front of the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (second position). The left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 are erased during execution of the one variation game, and the decorative symbol variable display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is interrupted. In the drawing, a downward arrow shown at the upper right of the sub display device 209 indicates the moving direction of the sub display device 209. The sub display device 209 is attached to the lower end of the support bar 225a arranged to extend in the vertical direction. The upper part of the support bar 225a is attached to a drive mechanism for driving the sub display device 209 in the vertical direction. In this embodiment, the sub display device 209 can be moved in the vertical direction by driving the support bar 225a in the vertical direction.

  After the interruption of the variation display of the decoration symbol on the decoration symbol display device 208, the variation display of the fourth symbol in the special symbol display region 933 of the decoration symbol display device 208 and the decoration symbol of the sub display device 209 are displayed. The variable display is continuously displayed. In the effect display area 208d below the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of “If you stop at 3 is a big hit!” Is displayed. A character image h3 is displayed. When the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, it is notified by the character string image that “decoration 3” is displayed on the sub display device 209. The character string image and the character image h3 are displayed as a notice of the change. In this example, while the sub display device 209 is moving downward from the initial position, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are erased, and then the character string image and the character image h3 are displayed. Note that the timing at which the sub display device 209 starts moving downward, the timing at which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are erased, and the timing at which the character string image and the character image h3 are displayed are as follows. Not limited to. For example, after the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are erased, the sub display device 209 may start moving downward, and then the character string image and the character image h3 of the lord may be displayed. After the middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are erased, the character string image and the character image h3 of the lord may be displayed, and then the sub display device 209 may start moving downward, or the character string image After the character image h3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c may be erased, and then the sub display device 209 may start moving downward. These timings can be set as appropriate.

  FIG. 176 (d) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the player side. The sub display device 209 can perform a counterclockwise and clockwise rotation operation with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center. At the time point shown in FIG. 176 (d), the sub display device 209 is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture shown in FIG. 176 (c) where the upper and lower ends of the sub display device 209 are parallel to the horizontal direction. It is. While the sub display device 209 is performing the counterclockwise rotation operation, the decorative symbol display displayed on the sub display device 209 is viewed from the player side at the same speed as the sub display device 209. Displayed by a moving image that rotates clockwise. For this reason, the decorative symbol variation display displayed on the sub display device 209 is displayed so as not to rotate as viewed from the player.

  FIG. 176 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is stopped by rotating 360 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. In this embodiment, after moving from the initial position to the second position below, the sub display device 209 returns to the initial posture by executing a rotating operation that rotates once counterclockwise. The sub display device 209 moves from the initial position to the second position below and then rotates counterclockwise by an arbitrary angle of 1 ° to 359 °, and then rotates clockwise by the same angle as the arbitrary angle. The sub display device 209 may be rotated counterclockwise by an arbitrary angle of 1 ° to 359 ° after moving from the initial position to the second position below. Later, it may be rotated clockwise by an angle twice the arbitrary angle, and then rotated counterclockwise by the arbitrary angle to return to the initial posture.

  FIG. 176 (f) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved linearly upward and returned to the initial position. In the drawing, an upward arrow shown at the lower right of the sub display device 209 indicates the moving direction of the sub display device 209. In this embodiment, the sub display device 209 moves from the initial position to the second position below, and then performs a rotation operation, and then moves upward to return to the initial position.

  FIG. 176 (g) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display on the sub display device 209 is finished and “decoration 2” is stopped on the sub display device 209 (determined stop display). In this example, since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of place, for example, “decoration 2” is displayed on the sub display device 209 as a decoration symbol other than “decoration 3”.

  After “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the sub display device 209, the “decoration 2” is erased, and then the character string image “It is a big hit if it stops at 3” displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. And the character image h3 of Tono is erased, and then the variable display of decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is resumed. It should be noted that the timing at which the “decoration 2” is deleted and the timing at which the character image and the character image h3 are deleted may be simultaneous, or the character image and the character image h3 are deleted. The timing may be earlier. In addition, after the decorative symbol variation display in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c is resumed, the “decoration 2” is deleted, and then “3 stops displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The character string image of “It is a big hit!” And the character image h3 of Tono may be deleted. The timing at which the “decoration 2” and the character image and the character image h3 of the lord are erased may be the same, or the timing at which the character image and the character image h3 of the lord are erased is earlier. It may be. In addition, the timing at which the “decoration 2” is erased, the timing at which the character string image and the character image h3 of the character are erased, and the decorative symbol variation display in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are resumed. The timing may be at the same time.

  FIG. 176 (h) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. Since the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are notified of hits indicating that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. The symbol combination “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3” other than the symbol combination to be displayed is stopped (decision stop display), and the 4th symbol display area 933 displays the 4th symbol of the display mode for notifying the deviation. Stop is displayed.

  Next, an example of the effect when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit will be described with reference to FIGS. 176 (g ′) and (h ′). FIG. 176 (g ′) shows a state continued from FIG. 176 (f) in the case where the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. FIG. 176 (g ′) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display on the sub display device 209 is finished and “decoration 3” is stopped on the sub display device 209 (determined stop display). In this example, the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, so “decoration 3” is displayed on the sub display device 209.

  After the “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the sub display device 209, the “decoration 3” is erased, and then the decorative symbol variation display in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208 is displayed. Resumed. It should be noted that the timing at which the “decoration 3” is deleted and the timing at which the character image and the character image h3 are deleted may be simultaneous, or the character image and the character image h3 are deleted. The timing may be earlier. In addition, after the decorative symbol variation display in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c is resumed, the “decoration 3” is deleted, and then “3 stops displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The character string image of “It is a big hit!” And the character image h3 of Tono may be deleted. Note that the timing at which the “decoration 3” and the character image and the character image h3 are deleted may be the same, or the timing at which the character image and the character image h3 are deleted is earlier. It may be. Note that the timing at which the “decoration 3” is erased, the timing at which the character string image and the character image h3 are erased, and the decorative symbol variation display in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are resumed. The timing may be at the same time.

  FIG. 176 (h ′) subsequent to FIG. 176 (g ′) shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit (a big hit of “Special Figure A”), the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The symbol combination “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” indicating that there is a hit is stopped and displayed (determined stop display), and in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 933, a display mode for notifying the big hit is displayed. The fourth symbol of (in this example, “」 ”display mode) is stopped and displayed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a sub display device 209 configured to include an image display (for example, a liquid crystal display device). The sub display device 209 can execute an operation according to the first movement pattern. The first movement pattern in this embodiment moves downward from the initial position to the second position, then rotates 360 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial posture, and then moves upward. It is an exercise pattern that returns to the initial position. Note that the rotation operation in the first movement pattern is not limited to this. For example. The first movement pattern is rotated counterclockwise by an arbitrary angle of 1 ° to 359 °, then rotated clockwise by an angle twice the arbitrary angle, and then counterclockwise by the arbitrary angle. It may be a motion pattern that rotates around and returns to the initial posture, or rotates counterclockwise by an arbitrary angle of 1 ° to 359 °, and then rotates clockwise by the arbitrary angle. It may be a movement pattern that returns to a posture, or after rotating clockwise by an arbitrary angle of 1 ° to 359 °, rotating counterclockwise by an angle that is twice the arbitrary angle, The movement pattern may rotate clockwise by an arbitrary angle and return to the initial posture, or rotate clockwise by an arbitrary angle of 1 ° to 359 °, and then counterclockwise by the arbitrary angle. Rotate to return to the initial posture . According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, effects can be executed by various operations by the image display means.

  In the present embodiment, in FIGS. 176 (a), (h), and (h '), no effect display or the like is displayed in the image display area of the sub display device 209, and the whole is displayed in white. 176 (a), (h), and (h ′), the sub display device 209 displays the current gaming state, the current performance mode, or the pachinko as a result of the determination of whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful. A character string image representing the model name of the machine 100, a character image corresponding to the current gaming state or the current effect mode, and a character image appearing on the pachinko machine 100 are displayed as a result of the determination of whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful. May be.

(Example 2)
An effect example of Example 2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 177 (a) to (m) show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series. The configuration shown in FIGS. 177 (a) to 177 (m) and the configuration shown in FIG. 21 (a) of Example 5 of the first embodiment have the same operations and effects. Therefore, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected only to FIG. 177 (a), and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 177 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination “decoration 2-” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is wrong has been lost. Decoration 3-Decoration 4 "is stopped and displayed. In the 4th symbol display area 933 of the special figure 1 in the decorative frame f1 displayed at the upper left corner of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the 4th symbol of the display mode for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed. Yes. In the special figure 2 4th symbol display area 934 in the decoration frame f1, the 4th symbol of the display mode for notifying that the determination result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is wrong is stopped and displayed. In the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 in the decorative frame f1, "1" indicating that the special figure 1 hold number is 1 is displayed, and in the special figure 2 hold number display area 932 in the decorative frame f1. “0” indicating that the number of holds in the special figure 2 is 0 is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 in the decoration frame f2 displayed at the bottom of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a default special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in a white circle is displayed. . In the state shown in FIG. 177 (a), the sub display device 209 is located at the initial position.

  FIG. 177 (b) shows a state in which the special FIG. 1 suspension is digested and the special FIG. 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 933, a variation display of the fourth symbol is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, “0” is displayed, and it is notified that the hold number in the special figure 1 has decreased by 1 and the hold number in the special figure 1 has become zero. When the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the variable icon display area 940 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 of the decorative symbol display device 208 are arranged between the hold / change icons. A moving animation is executed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 becomes the change icon 941 and moves to the change icon display area 940. . In FIG. 177 (b), the moving animation between the hold / change icon is finished, and the change icon 941 is displayed in the change icon display area 940. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the sub display device 209 linearly moves downward from the initial position and stops at the second position, and the decorative display variable display on the sub display device 209 is displayed. Yes. In the drawing, a downward arrow illustrated on the upper right side of the sub display device 209 indicates a moving direction of the sub display device 209. The sub display device 209 may start to move before the decorative display variation display on the sub display device 209 is started, or the decoration display variation display on the sub display device 209 is started. At the same time, the movement may be started, or the movement may be started after the decorative display variation display on the sub display device 209 is started. The decorative symbol variation display on the sub display device 209 is executed during a part of the period in which the decorative symbol variation display is performed on the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. . In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol variation display on the sub display device 209 is started simultaneously with the decorative symbol variation display on the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left middle right symbol display. The display ends before the decorative display of the decorative symbols in the areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 177 (c) shows that the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 are erased during execution of the special figure 1 variable game, and the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed. This shows a state in which the fluctuation display is interrupted. After the interruption of the variation display of the decoration symbol on the decoration symbol display device 208, the variation display of the fourth symbol in the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol display area 933 of the decoration symbol display device 208 and the variation display of the decoration symbol on the sub display device 209. Will continue to be displayed. In the effect display area 208d below the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of “If you stop at 3 is a big hit!” Is displayed. A character image h3 is displayed. When the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, it is notified by the character string image that “decoration 3” is displayed on the sub display device 209. The character string image and the character image h3 are displayed as a notice of the change. In this example, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are deleted, and then the character string image and the character image h3 of the lord are displayed. The timing at which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are erased and the timing at which the character string image and the character image h3 of the character are displayed may be the same, or the character string image and the character of the character are displayed. The timing at which the character image h3 is displayed may be earlier.

  FIG. 177 (d) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the player side. In the drawing, arrows shown on the left and right of the sub display device 209 indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 209. At the time shown in FIG. 177 (d), the sub display device 209 is rotated about 30 ° (less than 30 °) counterclockwise from the initial posture shown in FIG. 177 (c). During the counterclockwise rotation operation of the sub display device 209, the decorative symbol display displayed on the sub display device 209 is the same as the rotation speed of the sub display device 209 when viewed from the player side. It is displayed by a moving image that rotates around. For this reason, the decorative symbol variation display displayed on the sub display device 209 is displayed so as not to rotate when viewed from the player.

  FIG. 177 (e) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed on the sub display device 209 when the sub display device 209 rotates about 30 ° counterclockwise. The temporary stop display is a fluctuation variation display in which any one of the decorative patterns “decoration 1” to “decoration 10” is slightly shaken up and down. Since the decoration pattern (in this example, “decoration 2”) is temporarily stopped and displayed on the sub display device 209, the condition for changing the movement pattern of the sub display device 209 is satisfied, and the operation of the sub display device 209 is changed from the rotation operation. Changed to stop operation. The rotation operation of the sub display device 209 is stopped when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on the sub display device 209.

  FIG. 177 (f) shows a state where the temporary stop display of “decoration 2” is finished and the decorative symbol variation display on the sub display device 209 is resumed. When the decorative display variation display on the sub display device 209 is resumed, the rotation operation of the sub display device 209 is resumed.

  FIG. 177 (g) shows a state in which the rotation operation is resumed in the sub display device 209. In FIG. 177 (g), the rotation operation of the sub display device 209 is resumed, and the sub display device 209 rotates counterclockwise. In the drawing, arrows shown on the left and right of the sub display device 209 indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 209. At the time shown in FIG. 177 (g), the sub display device 209 is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. In the present embodiment, the sub display device 209 performs an operation of rotating 60 ° counterclockwise after rotating 30 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture state.

  FIG. 177 (h) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotating clockwise as viewed from the player side. In the drawing, arrows shown on the left and right of the sub display device 209 indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 209. At the time shown in FIG. 177 (h), the sub display device 209 is in a state of being rotated 60 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 177 (g). During the clockwise rotation operation of the sub display device 209, the variation display of the decorative symbols displayed on the sub display device 209 is counterclockwise as viewed from the player side at the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 209. It is displayed by a moving image that rotates around. For this reason, the decorative symbol variation display displayed on the sub display device 209 is displayed so as not to rotate when viewed from the player.

  In the present embodiment, the upper portion of the support bar 225a is attached to a drive mechanism for driving the sub display device 209 in the left-right direction. In this embodiment, the sub-display device 209 can be moved in the vertical and horizontal directions by driving the support bar 225a in the vertical and horizontal directions.

  FIG. 177 (i) shows a state in which the support bar 225a to which the sub display device 209 is attached moves downward while moving to the right. By driving the support bar 225a, the sub-display device 209 is linearly moved diagonally downward to the right. In the figure, the direction in which the sub-display device 209 is combined is the combined direction of the right-pointing arrow shown above the sub-display device 209 and the down-pointing arrow shown to the left of the sub-display device 209. During the moving operation of the sub display device 209 diagonally to the lower right, the moving display of the decorative symbol displayed on the sub display device 209 moves diagonally upward to the left at the same speed as the moving operation of the sub display device 209. Displayed by image. For this reason, the decorative symbol variation display displayed on the sub display device 209 is displayed so as not to move as viewed from the player. Note that the sub display device 209 may be movable diagonally upward left, may be movable diagonally downward left, or may be movable diagonally upward right. Good. In this case, the decorative symbol variation display on the sub display device 209 is displayed by a moving image that moves in the direction opposite to the movement direction of the sub display device 209 by 180 ° at the same speed as the movement operation of the sub display device 209. It is displayed as not moving as seen from the player.

  FIG. 177 (j) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display on the sub display device 209 is finished and “decoration 3” is stopped on the sub display device 209 (determined stop display). In this example, the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, so “decoration 3” is displayed on the sub display device 209. When the decoration pattern (in this example, “decoration 3”) is stopped and displayed on the sub display device 209 (determination stop display), the condition for changing the motion pattern of the sub display device 209 is satisfied, and the operation of the sub display device 209 is performed. Is changed from the moving operation to the left diagonally downward to the stopping operation. The movement operation of the sub display device 209 is stopped when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the sub display device 209.

  After “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the sub display device 209 (determination stop display), the “decoration 3” is erased, and then the character string image of “It is a big hit if it stops at 3!” Is erased. Then, the decorative symbol variation display in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is resumed. Note that the timing at which the “decoration 3” is erased, the timing at which the character string image is erased, and the timing at which the variation display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c is resumed simultaneously. Or any one of them, or any two timings may be simultaneous.

  FIG. 177 (k) shows that “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” is temporarily displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a-208c after the fluctuating display of the ornament symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a-208c is resumed. It shows a state in which the stop display (swing fluctuation display) is displayed. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character string image of “It ’s a big hit!”. A part (lower part) of “decoration 3” displayed in the right symbol display area 208c is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the character image h3. It should be noted that the character string image of “big hit!” May be displayed immediately after the character image of “big hit if it stops at 3!” Is deleted, or “big hit if it stops at 3!” Display may be started after a predetermined time has elapsed after the character string image is erased, or displayed before “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is temporarily displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It may be started, or may be displayed at the same time as “decoration 3-decoration 3—decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, or the left middle right symbol display area The display may be started after “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in 208a to 208c.

  The stop operation of the sub display device 209 is continued during a period in which “decoration 3” is displayed on the sub display device 209, and after the “decoration 3” displayed on the sub display device 209 is erased, the sub display device The return operation to the initial position of 209 is started. Note that the timing at which “decoration 3” displayed on the sub display device 209 is erased and the timing at which the return operation of the sub display device 209 to the initial position is started may be simultaneous.

  FIG. 177 (l) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is performing the return operation to the initial position during the period in which “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed. In FIG. 177 (l), the sub display device 209 linearly moves diagonally to the upper left from the state shown in FIG. 177 (k) and then rotates counterclockwise by 30 ° as shown in FIG. 177 (c). The state returned to the same state as the state is shown. The sub display device 209 rotates counterclockwise by 30 ° and returns to the initial posture, and then moves linearly upward to the left and returns to the same state as shown in FIG. 177 (c). Also good. The sub display device 209 returns to the same state as shown in FIG. 177 (c), and then moves upward to return to the initial position.

  FIG. 177 (m) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit (a big hit of “Special Figure A”), the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The symbol combination “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” indicating that there is a hit is stopped and displayed (determined stop display), and in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 933, a display mode for notifying the big hit is displayed. The fourth symbol (“◯” in this example) is stopped and displayed. The character string image of “big hit!” And the character image h3 of Tono may be deleted before “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed, or “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”. May be erased at the same time that is stopped and displayed, or may be erased immediately after “decoration 3 -decoration 3 -decoration 3” is stopped and displayed.

  In FIG. 177 (m), the sub display device 209 has returned to the initial position. The sub display device 209 returns to the initial position before “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The sub display device 209 may return to the initial position at the same time that “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. You may return to the initial position after “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the display areas 208a to 208c.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a sub display device 209 configured to include an image display (for example, a liquid crystal display device). The sub display device 209 can execute an operation according to the first movement pattern. The first movement pattern in this embodiment is moved downward from the initial position to the second position, then rotated 30 ° counterclockwise, then rotated 60 ° clockwise, and then downward to the right. It is a movement pattern that moves, then moves to the upper left, then rotates counterclockwise by 30 ° to return to the initial posture, and then moves upward to return to the initial position. In addition, the rotation operation in the first movement pattern is not limited to this, and after rotating by an arbitrary angle of 1 ° to 359 ° counterclockwise, it is rotated clockwise by an angle twice as large as the arbitrary angle, Then, it may rotate counterclockwise by the arbitrary angle and return to the initial posture, or rotate counterclockwise by an arbitrary angle of 1 ° to 359 °, and then rotate the arbitrary angle clockwise. May be rotated to return to the initial posture, or may be rotated clockwise by an arbitrary angle of 1 ° to 359 °, and then rotated counterclockwise by the arbitrary angle to return to the initial posture. Also good. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, effects can be executed by various operations by the image display means.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the decorative display is temporarily stopped or displayed on the sub display device 209 while the sub display device 209 performs the operation according to the first motion pattern, the motion of the sub display device 209 The pattern change condition is satisfied. In the present embodiment, when the motion pattern change condition is satisfied, the sub display device 209 stops the rotation operation even during the execution of the operation according to the first motion pattern, for example, during the execution of the rotation operation. Note that the sub display device 209 may execute an operation of stopping the rotation operation or the movement operation and returning to the initial position even during the rotation operation or the movement operation when the change condition of the movement pattern is satisfied. For example, as shown in FIG. 177 (j), when “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the sub display device 209 and the motion pattern change condition is satisfied, the sub display device 209 stops moving to the left diagonally downward. Then, the operation of returning to the initial position may be executed during the stop display of “decoration 3”.

  In this embodiment, when the decorative display temporary stop display or fixed stop display on the sub display device 209 is started, the sub display device 209 is stopped. However, the decorative display variable display on the sub display device 209 is performed. The sub-display device 209 may be stopped while the sub-display device 209 is in motion, or even if the sub-display device 209 starts temporary stop display or fixed stop display of the decorative symbols, The operation of the sub display device 209 may be continuously executed without changing the pattern. It should be noted that when the decorative display temporary stop display on the sub display device 209 is started during the operation of the sub display device 209, the sub display device 209 may always be stopped. If the fixed display of the decorative symbols on the sub display device 209 is started during the operation of the device 209, the stop operation of the sub display device 209 may be surely performed.

  In the present embodiment, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped or fixedly stopped on the sub display device 209 while the sub display device 209 is rotating or moving in the oblique direction, the sub display device 209 is rotated or Although the moving operation in the oblique direction is stopped, if the decorative design is displayed on the sub display device 209 as a temporary stop display or a fixed stop display while the sub display device 209 is moving horizontally or vertically, The movement operation of the sub display device 209 in the horizontal direction or the vertical direction may be stopped. The sub display device 209 can execute an exercise pattern according to the second exercise pattern. In the second movement pattern, for example, the sub display device 209 moves from the initial position (first position) to the second position, moves in an oblique direction, and moves in an oblique direction opposite to the oblique direction. It is a movement pattern that returns to the second position and moves to the first position. The sub display device 209 performs the first operation when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped or confirmed and stopped on the sub display device 209 while the movement pattern is changed. Even in the middle of the operation according to the second movement pattern, the stop operation is performed. Note that the sub display device 209 displays the decorative pattern on the sub display device 209 while temporarily performing an operation according to the second motion pattern, or when the motion pattern change condition is satisfied. The operation may be configured to return to the initial position even in the middle of the operation according to the second motion pattern.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 may be able to perform the same movement operation and rotation operation as the sub display device 209. In this case, the pachinko machine 100 may include the sub display device 209 or may not include the sub display device 209. It should be noted that both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 209 may be capable of performing a moving operation and a rotating operation in the up / down / left / right oblique directions. In addition, when the motion pattern changing condition is satisfied while the decorative symbol display device 208 is moving or rotating, the decorative symbol display device 208 may start to stop or return to the initial position. .

  In the present embodiment, when the temporary stop display or the fixed stop display of the decorative symbol is started, the condition for changing the motion pattern of the sub display device 209 is satisfied, but the condition for changing the motion pattern of the sub display device 209 is satisfied. It is not limited to this. For example, when the chance button 136 is pressed during the operation of the sub display device 209, the condition for changing the movement pattern of the sub display device 209 may be satisfied, and either one of FIG. 1 or FIG. The condition for changing the motion pattern of the sub display device 209 may be satisfied when the number of on-holds increases, or an effect that is preferentially executed (for example, a pre-reading notice effect on the on-hold when there is a big hit hold) In addition, a condition for changing the movement pattern of the sub display device 209 may be satisfied when a mission achievement effect or the like executed when a predetermined mission is cleared is interrupted and started. The sub display device 209 may stop or return to the initial position when these change conditions are satisfied.

  In FIGS. 177 (a) and (k) to (m), the effect display or the like is not displayed in the image display area of the sub display device 209, and the whole is displayed in white. In the states of FIGS. 177 (a) and (k) to (m), the sub display device 209 displays the current gaming state, the current effect mode, or the pachinko machine as a result of the determination of whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful. A character string image representing 100 model names, a character image corresponding to the current gaming state or the current effect mode, and a character image appearing on the pachinko machine 100 are displayed as a result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful. It may be.

  Further, the sub display device 209 may temporarily stop the operation before starting the operation of returning to the initial position when the motion pattern change condition is satisfied.

(Example 3)
An effect example of Example 3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 178 (a) to (f) show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series. 178 (a)-(f), (a ')-(f') The structure shown in each figure, and the structure common to the structure shown in FIG. 21 (a) of Example 5 of the said 1st Embodiment Have the same operations and effects, the same reference numerals are attached only to FIG. 178 (a), and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 178 (a) shows a state during execution of the special figure 1 variable game. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decoration symbol is displayed. Is displayed, and the sub display device 209 displays a variable display of decorative symbols.

  In FIG. 178 (b), the sub display device 209 linearly moves downward from the initial position and stops at the second position, and the left and right of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game. This shows a state in which the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are erased and the decorative symbol variable display in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c is interrupted. In the drawing, a downward arrow shown at the upper right of the sub display device 209 indicates the moving direction of the sub display device 209. In the effect display area 208d below the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of “If you stop at 3 is a big hit!” Is displayed. A character image h3 is displayed. When the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, it is notified by the character string image that “decoration 3” is displayed on the sub display device 209. In this example, while the sub display device 209 is moving downward from the initial position, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are erased, and then the character string image and the character image h3 are displayed.

  FIG. 178 (c) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the player side. In the drawing, arrows shown on the left and right of the sub display device 209 indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 209. At the time point shown in FIG. 178 (c), the sub display device 209 is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture shown in FIG. 178 (c). During the counterclockwise rotation operation of the sub display device 209, the decorative symbol display displayed on the sub display device 209 is the same as the rotation speed of the sub display device 209 when viewed from the player side. It is displayed by a moving image that rotates around. For this reason, the decorative symbol variation display displayed on the sub display device 209 is displayed so as not to rotate when viewed from the player.

  FIG. 178 (d) shows a state where a magnetic abnormality error has occurred. The magnetic abnormality error occurs when the magnetic detection sensor included in the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 detects magnetism. When a magnetic abnormality error occurs, the game of the pachinko machine 100 is stopped, and the pachinko machine 100 notifies the magnetic abnormality error until an error canceling operation (for example, power interruption / recovery operation) is performed by a game shop clerk. The special figure 1 variable game is also stopped when the game of the pachinko machine 100 is stopped, and the variable display of the fourth symbol in the special figure 1 and 4 symbol display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is also stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The “hit if you stop at 3” and the character image h3 of Tono are also deleted. Further, since the game of the pachinko machine 100 is stopped, the decorative symbol variation display on the sub display device 209 is deleted, and a character string image of “Magnetic abnormality occurred!” Is displayed on the sub display device 209. Further, when a magnetic abnormality error occurs, a condition for changing the motion pattern of the sub display device 209 is satisfied, and an operation of returning the sub display device 209 to the initial position is executed. The rotation operation of the sub display device 209 is stopped.

  FIG. 178 (e) shows a state where the sub display device 209 is returning to the initial position due to the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality error, and the sub display device 209 is rotated 30 ° clockwise to return to the initial posture. Is shown. In the drawing, the arrows shown on the left and right of the sub display device 209 indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 209. When a magnetic abnormality error occurs, the sub display device 209 stops rotating and then rotates in the direction opposite to the rotating direction of the rotating operation to return to the initial posture.

  FIG. 178 (f) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved linearly upward and returned to the initial position. In the drawing, an upward arrow shown on the right side of the sub display device 209 indicates the moving direction of the sub display device 209. The sub display device 209 displays a character string image of “Magnetic abnormality occurred!”.

  Next, a modification of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 (a ′) to (f ′). 178 (a ') to (f') show the effects of this modification in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 178 (a ′) to (d ′) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 178 (a) to (d), description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 178 (e ′) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is returning to the initial position due to the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality error. The sub display device 209 is rotated clockwise by 30 ° and returned to the initial posture. Indicates the state. In the drawing, the arrows shown on the left and right of the sub display device 209 indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 209. When a magnetic abnormality error occurs, the sub display device 209 stops rotating and then rotates in the direction opposite to the rotating direction of the rotating operation to return to the initial posture. In FIG. 178 (e ′), the character string image “magnetic anomaly!” Displayed on the sub display device 209 is deleted, and the character string image “magnetic anomaly!” Is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. . In this way, at the beginning of the occurrence of the magnetic abnormality error, the sub display device 209 informs that the magnetic abnormality error has occurred, and after the predetermined time has elapsed from the occurrence of the magnetic abnormality error, the decorative symbol display device 208 has caused the magnetic abnormality error. It is notified that there is. At the beginning of the occurrence of the magnetic abnormality error, the decorative symbol display device 208 notifies that the magnetic abnormality error has occurred, and after the predetermined time has elapsed since the magnetic abnormality error has occurred, the sub display device 209 has caused the magnetic abnormality error. May be notified, and at the beginning of the occurrence of the magnetic abnormality error, the decoration symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 209 notify that the magnetic abnormality error has occurred, and the decoration symbol display is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the magnetic abnormality error. Either one of the device 208 or the sub display device 209 may notify that a magnetic abnormality error has occurred, or both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 209 may perform from the occurrence of the magnetic abnormality error to the cancellation. It may be notified that a magnetic abnormality error has occurred.

  FIG. 178 (f ′) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved linearly upward and returned to the initial position. In the drawing, an upward arrow shown on the right side of the sub display device 209 indicates the moving direction of the sub display device 209. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character string image of “Magnetic abnormality!”.

  In this embodiment, when a magnetic abnormality error occurs, a condition for changing the motion pattern of the sub display device 209 is satisfied. In the present embodiment, a magnetic abnormality error occurs while the sub display device 209 is performing an operation according to the first movement pattern shown in FIGS. 176 (b) to 176 (g). When the motion pattern change condition is satisfied while the motion according to the first motion pattern of the sub display device 209 is being executed, the sub display device 209 is moved to the initial position even when the motion according to the first motion pattern is being performed. The operation to return to is started. Note that the sub-display device 209 may perform a stop operation when the motion pattern change condition is satisfied due to the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality error.

  The sub display device 209 can execute an exercise pattern according to the second exercise pattern. In the second movement pattern, for example, the sub display device 209 moves from the initial position (first position) to the second position, moves in an oblique direction, and moves in an oblique direction opposite to the oblique direction. It is a movement pattern that returns to the second position and moves to the first position. The sub display device 209 follows the second motion pattern when an abnormal state such as a magnetic abnormality error occurs during execution of the motion according to the second motion pattern and the motion pattern change condition is satisfied. Even in the middle of the operation, the stop operation is performed. Note that the sub display device 209 displays the decorative pattern on the sub display device 209 while temporarily performing an operation according to the second motion pattern, or when the motion pattern change condition is satisfied. The operation may be configured to return to the initial position even in the middle of the operation according to the second motion pattern.

  In this embodiment, when a magnetic abnormality error occurs during execution of the rotation operation of the sub display device 209 and the motion pattern change condition of the sub display device 209 is satisfied, an operation of returning to the initial position of the sub display device 209 is executed. However, if a magnetic abnormality error occurs while the sub display device 209 is moving in one of the up, down, left, and right diagonal directions, and the condition for changing the motion pattern of the sub display device 209 is satisfied, the sub display device An operation of returning to the initial position of 209 may be executed, or the moving operation of the sub display device 209 may be stopped.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when it is determined that an abnormal state such as a magnetic abnormality error has occurred, a condition for changing the motion pattern of the sub display device 209 is satisfied. In addition to the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality error, the movement pattern changing condition of the sub display device 209 may be satisfied when a magnetic field abnormality error, vibration error, abnormal winning error, or door opening error occurs. . The magnetic field abnormality error occurs when radio wave detection sensors included in various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 detect radio waves. When the magnetic field abnormality error occurs, the game of the pachinko machine 100 is stopped, and the pachinko machine 100 notifies the magnetic field abnormality error until an error canceling operation (for example, power interruption / recovery operation) is performed by the game shop clerk. The vibration error occurs when the vibration detection sensor included in the various sensors 320 illustrated in FIG. 4 detects vibration. Even if a vibration error occurs, the game of the pachinko machine 100 is not stopped, and the pachinko machine 100 notifies the vibration error until a predetermined time elapses after the vibration error occurs. An abnormal winning error is caused when the variable winning opening 234, 235 or the special figure 2 starting port 232 is opened when the opening condition of the variable winning opening 234, 235 (attacker) or the special figure starting port 232 (electrical chow) is not satisfied. Occurs when a winning game ball is detected. Even if an abnormal winning error occurs, the game of the pachinko machine 100 is not stopped, and the pachinko machine 100 notifies the abnormal winning error until a predetermined time elapses after the abnormal winning error occurs. The door opening error occurs when the front frame door opening sensor detects the opening of the front frame door 106 or when the inner frame opening sensor detects the opening of the main body 104. Even if a door opening error occurs, the game of the pachinko machine 100 is not stopped, and the pachinko machine 100 notifies the door opening error until a predetermined time elapses after the door opening error occurs. Note that the condition for changing the motion pattern of the sub display device 209 may be satisfied when a lower pan full tank error occurs.

  In the present embodiment, when an abnormal state such as a magnetic abnormality error occurs, the motion pattern change condition of the sub display device 209 is satisfied, but the motion pattern change condition of the sub display device 209 is not limited to this. . For example, when the chance button 136 is pressed during the operation of the sub display device 209, the condition for changing the movement pattern of the sub display device 209 may be satisfied, and either one of FIG. 1 or FIG. The condition for changing the motion pattern of the sub display device 209 may be satisfied when the number of on-holds increases, or an effect that is preferentially executed (for example, a pre-reading notice effect on the on-hold when there is a big hit hold) In addition, a condition for changing the movement pattern of the sub display device 209 may be satisfied when a mission achievement effect or the like executed when a predetermined mission is cleared is interrupted and started. The sub display device 209 may return to the initial position or stop when these change conditions are satisfied.

  The sub display device 209 may be capable of performing an operation according to a third movement pattern different from the first movement pattern and the second movement pattern. The third movement pattern may be a movement pattern shown in FIGS. 179 to 183 described later. The exercise pattern shown in FIG. 183, which will be described later, may be used as the first exercise pattern.

Example 4
An effect example of Example 4 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 179 (a) to (f) show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series. The configuration shown in FIGS. 179 (a) to 179 (f) and the configuration shown in FIG. 21 (a) of Example 5 of the first embodiment have the same operations and effects. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given only to FIG. 179 (a), and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 179 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination “decoration 2-” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is wrong has been lost. Decoration 3-Decoration 4 "is stopped and displayed. In the 4th symbol display area 933 of the special figure 1 in the decorative frame f1 displayed at the upper left corner of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the 4th symbol of the display mode for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed. Yes. In the special figure 2 4th symbol display area 934 in the decoration frame f1, the 4th symbol of the display mode for notifying that the determination result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is wrong is stopped and displayed. In the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 in the decorative frame f1, "1" indicating that the special figure 1 hold number is 1 is displayed, and in the special figure 2 hold number display area 932 in the decorative frame f1. “0” indicating that the number of holds in the special figure 2 is 0 is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 in the decoration frame f2 displayed at the bottom of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a default special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in a white circle is displayed. . In the state shown in FIG. 179 (a), the sub display device 209 is located at the initial position, and no effect display or the like is displayed in the image display area of the sub display device 209, and the whole is displayed in white. ing.

  FIG. 179 (b) shows a state in which the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed. In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 933, a variation display of the fourth symbol is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, “0” is displayed, and it is notified that the hold number in the special figure 1 has decreased by 1 and the hold number in the special figure 1 has become zero. When the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the variable icon display area 940 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 of the decorative symbol display device 208 are arranged between the hold / change icons. A moving animation is executed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 becomes the change icon 941 and moves to the change icon display area 940. . In FIG. 179 (b), the movement animation between the hold / change icons is finished, and the change icon 941 is displayed in the change icon display area 940.

  In FIG. 179 (b), the sub display device 209 linearly moves downward from the initial position (first position) and stops at the second position. The movement start timing of the sub display device 209 may be the same as the start of the decorative display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, or after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols. May be. In addition, a character image h3 is displayed at the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209. The entire character image h3 of Tono is displayed. The character image h3 of Tono is displayed as a notice of the change. The character image h3 may be displayed before the sub display device 209 starts moving to the second position, or at the same time as the sub display device 209 starts moving to the second position. Display may be started while the sub display device 209 is moved to the second position, or display may be started after the sub display device 209 is moved to the second position.

  FIG. 179 (b-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 179 (b). The image data shown in FIG. 179 (b-1) has a character image h3 of the lord arranged at the center right side and a character image h4 of the princess arranged at the lower left corner. The princess character image h4 is a notice image of the change. The Tono character image h3 and the Princess character image h4 have a correct pattern orientation (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “positive orientation”), and no effect image is displayed around them. It is an aspect. 179 (b-2) is generated using the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 179 (b-1) in order to display the image on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 179 (b). Display data is shown. The display data is generated by cutting out the image data in a rectangular area with the center of the character image h3 of the image data shown in FIG. 179 (b-1) as the cut-out center and an aspect ratio of 9:16. Is done. Since the display data shown in FIG. 179 (b-2) does not include the princess character image h4, the princess character image h4 is not displayed on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 179 (b).

  The sub display device 209 can execute a moving operation of moving in a straight line from the position in FIG. 179 (b) to the left. The display data of the sub display device 209 during the movement operation of the sub display device 209 is such that the cut-out center of the image data read from the ROM 406 is in the same direction as the movement direction of the sub display device 209 by the same distance as the movement distance of the sub display device 209. Generated by moving. When the sub display device 209 moves to the left by a predetermined distance or more, the princess character image h4 is gradually included in the display data from the right side. Therefore, if the sub display device 209 moves to the left by a predetermined distance or more, the sub display device 209 The princess character image h4 is gradually displayed from the right side. The princess character image h4 is displayed as a moving image that moves to the right by the same distance as the movement distance of the sub display device 209 in the left direction at the same speed as the sub display device 209 moves in the left direction. The For this reason, during the movement operation of the sub display device 209, the princess character image h4 is displayed so as not to move as viewed from the player. The character image h3 at the time of the moving operation of the sub display device 209 is the same speed as the moving speed of the sub display device 209 in the left direction, and is the same distance as the moving distance of the sub display device 209 in the left direction. Displayed as a moving image moving in the direction. For this reason, during the movement operation of the sub display device 209, the character image h3 is displayed so as not to move as viewed from the player. In this way, the sub display device 209 displays an animation display including the lord character image h3 and the princess character image h4 during the moving operation.

  FIG. 179 (c) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the reach effect is started. At the start of reach production, “decoration 2” is temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, the sub display device 209 performs a leftward movement operation, and the sub display device 209 performs a lateral movement display notice effect as a reach effect. Is executed. In FIG. 179 (c), the left-pointing arrow shown at the upper right of the sub display device 209 indicates the moving direction of the sub display device 209, and the rectangle indicated by the two-dot chain line indicates the sub display device in FIG. 179 (b). The position of the image display area 209 is shown. The sub display device 209 may start a leftward movement operation before “decoration 2” is temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 2” in the left symbol display area 208a. May be started after the temporary stop is displayed and before “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 179 (c), the sub display device 209 is stopped.

  In FIG. 179 (c), the entire character image h3 is displayed. In the lower left corner of the image display area of the sub display device 209, about the right half of the princess character image h4 is displayed, and about the left half of the princess character image h4 is cut off. As the sub display device 209 moves leftward, the princess character image h4 is gradually displayed in the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the right side. During the moving operation of the sub display device 209, the character image h3 and the princess character image h4 move the sub display device 209 in the left direction at the same speed as the sub display device 209 moves in the left direction. A moving image that moves to the right by the same distance as the distance is displayed. Therefore, during the movement operation of the sub display device 209, the character image h3 of the lord and the character image h4 of the princess are displayed so as not to move as viewed from the player. A star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character image h3, and a star-shaped effect image is displayed around the princess character image h4. These star-shaped effect images are displayed as moving images. Note that the star-shaped effect image may be displayed as a still image. Moreover, the character image h3 of Tono is in a positive direction. The princess character image h4 is a mode in which the center of the princess character image h4 is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise from the normal direction with the center of rotation as the center of rotation. The princess character image h4 may be rotated during the movement operation of the sub display device 209, or may be rotated after the sub display device 209 is stopped.

  FIG. 179 (c-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 179 (c). The image data shown in FIG. 179 (c-1) has a character image h3 of the lord arranged at the center right side and a character image h4 of the princess arranged at the lower left corner. The character image h3 of Tono is in a positive direction and is an aspect with an effect image in which a star-shaped effect image is arranged around the character image h3. The princess character image h4 is a mode rotated 30 ° counterclockwise from the normal direction, and is a mode with an effect image in which a star-shaped effect image is arranged around. FIG. 179 (c-2) is generated using the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 179 (c-1) in order to display the image on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 179 (c). Display data is shown. The display data has a position shifted from the center of the display data shown in FIG. 179 (b-2) to the left by the distance that the sub display device 209 has moved leftward in FIGS. 179 (b) to (c). It is generated by cutting out the image data shown in FIG. 179 (c-1) in a rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 as a cutting center. Since the display data includes about the right half of the princess character image h4, the right half of the princess character image h4 is displayed on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 179 (c). Since the left half of the princess character image h4 is not included, the left half of the princess character image h4 is out of the image display area of the sub display device 209.

  FIG. 179 (d) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved linearly to the right and the sub display device 209 has returned to the position in FIG. 179 (b) and stopped. In FIG. 179 (d), the right-pointing arrow shown at the upper left of the sub display device 209 indicates the moving direction of the sub display device 209, and the rectangle indicated by the two-dot chain line indicates the sub display device in FIG. 179 (c). The position of the image display area 209 is shown. In FIG. 179 (d), the entire character image h3 is displayed. The princess character image h4 is not displayed on the sub display device 209. As the sub display device 209 moves to the right, the princess character image h4 is gradually erased from the left side. During the moving operation of the sub display device 209, the character image h3 and the princess character image h4 move the sub display device 209 in the right direction at the same speed as the sub display device 209 moves in the right direction. It is displayed as a moving image that moves to the left by the same distance as the distance. Therefore, during the movement operation of the sub display device 209, the character image h3 of the lord and the character image h4 of the princess are displayed so as not to move as viewed from the player.

  FIG. 179 (d-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 179 (d). The image data shown in FIG. 179 (d-1) has a character image h3 of the lord arranged at the center right side, and a character image h4 of the princess arranged at the lower left corner. The Tono character image h3 and the princess character image h4 are in a positive direction, and there is no effect image in which no effect image is displayed around them. FIG. 179 (d-2) is generated using the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 179 (d-1) in order to display the image on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 179 (d). Display data is shown. The display data is generated by cutting out the image data in a rectangular area with the center of the character image h3 of the image data shown in FIG. 179 (d-1) as the cut-out center and an aspect ratio of 9:16. Is done. Since the princess character image h4 is not included in the display data shown in FIG. 179 (d-2), the princess character image h4 is not displayed on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 179 (d).

  FIG. 179 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved linearly to the left and returned to the same position as that in FIG. 179 (c). In FIG. 179 (e), the left-pointing arrow shown at the upper right of the sub display device 209 indicates the moving direction of the sub display device 209, and the rectangle indicated by the two-dot chain line indicates the sub display device in FIG. The position of the image display area 209 is shown. In FIG. 179 (e), the whole character image h3 is displayed. In the lower left corner of the image display area of the sub display device 209, about the right half of the princess character image h4 is displayed, and about the left half of the princess character image h4 is cut off. As the sub display device 209 moves leftward, the princess character image h4 is gradually displayed in the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the right side. During the moving operation of the sub display device 209, the character image h3 and the princess character image h4 move the sub display device 209 in the left direction at the same speed as the sub display device 209 moves in the left direction. A moving image that moves to the right by the same distance as the distance is displayed. Therefore, during the movement operation of the sub display device 209, the character image h3 of the lord and the character image h4 of the princess are displayed so as not to move as viewed from the player. A star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character image h3, and a star-shaped effect image is displayed around the princess character image h4. Moreover, the character image h3 of Tono is in a positive direction. The princess character image h4 is a mode in which the princess character image h4 is rotated by 30 ° clockwise from the forward direction with the center of the princess character image h4 as the rotation center. The princess character image h <b> 4 is rotated during the movement operation of the sub display device 209. Note that the princess character image h4 may be rotated while the sub display device 209 is stopped.

  FIG. 179 (e-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 179 (e). The image data shown in FIG. 179 (e-1) has a character image h3 of the lord arranged at the center right side and a character image h4 of the princess arranged at the lower left corner. The character image h3 of Tono is in a positive direction and is an aspect with an effect image in which a star-shaped effect image is arranged around the character image h3. The princess character image h4 is a mode rotated by 30 ° clockwise from the normal direction, and is a mode with an effect image in which star-shaped effect images are arranged around. 179 (e-2) is generated using the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 179 (e-1) in order to display the image on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 179 (e). Display data is shown. The display data has a position shifted to the left by the distance that the sub display device 209 has moved leftward in FIGS. It is generated by cutting out the image data shown in FIG. 179 (e-1) in a rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 as the cutting center. Since the display data includes about the right half of the princess character image h4, the right half of the princess character image h4 is displayed on the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 179 (e). Since the left half of the princess character image h4 is not included, the left half of the princess character image h4 is out of the image display area of the sub display device 209.

  FIG. 179 (f) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has further moved to the left and linearly stopped. In FIG. 179 (f), the left-pointing arrow shown at the upper right of the sub display device 209 indicates the moving direction of the sub display device 209, and the rectangle indicated by the two-dot chain line indicates the sub display device in FIG. 179 (e). The position of the image display area 209 is shown. In FIG. 179 (f), the entire character image h3 and the princess character image h4 are displayed. During the moving operation of the sub display device 209, the character image h3 and the princess character image h4 move the sub display device 209 in the left direction at the same speed as the sub display device 209 moves in the left direction. A moving image that moves to the right by the same distance as the distance is displayed. Therefore, during the movement operation of the sub display device 209, the character image h3 of the lord and the character image h4 of the princess are displayed so as not to move as viewed from the player. A star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character image h3, and a star-shaped effect image is displayed around the princess character image h4. Further, the character image h3 of the lord is a mode rotated 30 ° counterclockwise from the normal direction with the center of the character image h3 of the lord as the center of rotation. The character image h3 of Tono may be rotated during the movement operation of the sub display device 209, or may be rotated after the sub display device 209 is stopped. The princess character image h4 is a state in which the princess character image h4 is rotated from the forward direction by 30 ° clockwise from FIG. 179 (e).

  FIG. 179 (f-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 179 (f). The image data shown in FIG. 179 (f-1) has a character image h3 of the lord arranged at the center right side, and a character image h4 of the princess arranged at the lower left corner. The character image h3 of Tono is a mode rotated 30 degrees counterclockwise from the normal direction, and is a mode with an effect image in which a star-shaped effect image is arranged around. The princess character image h4 is a mode rotated by 30 ° clockwise from the normal direction, and is a mode with an effect image in which star-shaped effect images are arranged around. FIG. 179 (f-2) is generated using the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 179 (f-1) in order to display the image on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 179 (f). Display data is shown. The display data has a position shifted to the left by the distance that the sub display device 209 has moved leftward in FIGS. 179 (e) to (f) from the cut-out center in the display data shown in FIG. 179 (d-2). It is generated by cutting out the image data shown in FIG. 179 (f-1) in a rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 as the cutting center. Since the display data includes the entire princess character image h4, the entire princess character image h4 is displayed on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 179 (f).

  In this embodiment, the princess character image h4 is gradually displayed on the sub display device 209 from the right side by the left movement of the sub display device 209. When the sub display device 209 is moved to the position shown in FIGS. 179 (c) and (e), for example, a part of the princess character image h4 arranged at the lower left corner of the image data is displayed in an incomplete manner. For example, when the sub display device 209 moves to the position shown in FIG. 179 (f), the entire princess character image h4 arranged in the lower left corner of the image data is displayed. The pachinko machine 100 can display the princess character image h4 more than the case where only a part of the princess character image h4 is displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display by the operation of the sub display device 209 (movement, movement operation, rotation operation). In the case where the whole is displayed, the jackpot symbol form is finally displayed more easily after the symbol variation display. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 can display the princess character image when the sub display device 209 is moved to the position shown in FIG. 179 (f) and the princess character image h4 is not displayed. It may be configured such that when the entire h4 is displayed, the big hit symbol form is finally easily displayed after the symbol variation display.

  Next, a modification of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 179 (a ′) to (f ′). 179 (a ') to (f') show an example of the production of this modification in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 179 (a ′) to (e) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 179 (a) to (e), description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 179 (f ′) following FIG. 179 (e ′) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved linearly to the right and the sub display device 209 has returned to the position in FIG. 179 (b ′). ing. In FIG. 179 (f ′), the right-pointing arrow shown at the upper left of the sub display device 209 indicates the moving direction of the sub display device 209, and the rectangle indicated by the two-dot chain line is the sub-device in FIG. The position of the image display area of the display device 209 is shown. In FIG. 179 (e ′), the entire character image h3 is displayed. In addition, no effect image is displayed around the character image h3. Also, the princess character image h4 is not displayed on the sub display device 209. As the sub display device 209 moves to the right, the princess character image h4 is gradually erased from the left side. During the moving operation of the sub display device 209, the character image h3 and the princess character image h4 move the sub display device 209 in the right direction at the same speed as the sub display device 209 moves in the right direction. It is displayed as a moving image that moves to the left by the same distance as the distance. Therefore, during the movement operation of the sub display device 209, the character image h3 of the lord and the character image h4 of the princess are displayed so as not to move as viewed from the player. In this modification, the sub display device 209 does not move to the position shown in FIG. 179 (f) during execution of the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 179 (b ′) to (f ′), and the princess character image h4. Is not displayed on the sub display device 209.

  The pachinko machine 100 displays only a part of the princess character image h4 on the sub display device 209 due to the operation of the sub display device 209 during the execution of the symbol variation display (FIGS. 179 (a ′) to (f ′ ) In the case where the entire princess character image h4 is displayed on the sub display device 209 (in the case shown in FIGS. 179 (a) to (f)), the final display after the symbol variation display is performed. Therefore, it is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is easy to be confirmed and displayed. In the pachinko machine 100, at least a part of the princess character image h4 is displayed more than when the princess character image h4 is not displayed on the sub display device 209 due to the operation of the sub display device 209 during the symbol variation display. When it is displayed on the sub display device 209 (when shown in FIGS. 179 (c), (e), (f), (c ′), (e ′)), it is finally after the symbol variation display. You may be comprised so that a big hit symbol aspect may be confirmed and displayed easily. Note that the pachinko machine 100 displays the entire princess character image h4 as a sub display rather than the case where the princess character image h4 is not displayed on the sub display device 209 due to the operation of the sub display device 209 during the execution of the symbol variation display. When displayed on the device 209 (in the case shown in FIG. 179 (f)), it may be configured so that the big hit symbol form is finally easily displayed after the symbol variation display.

  Further, a character image combined with the big hit reliability may be displayed. For example, the big hit reliability may be set higher in the order of the enemy character image, the princess character image, and the ninja character image. The pachinko machine 100 can display the princess character image h4 or the ninja character more than the case where the enemy character image is displayed on the sub display device 209 by the operation of the sub display device 209 during the symbol variation display. Even when at least a part of any one of the character images is displayed on the sub-display device 209, it may be configured that the big hit symbol pattern is finally displayed more easily after the symbol variation display. It is good that at least a part of the ninja character image is displayed more than the case where at least a part of the princess character image h4 is displayed on the sub display apparatus 209 by the moving operation of the sub display apparatus 209 during the symbol variation display. When displayed on the sub-display device 209, it is configured so that the final jackpot symbol mode is easier to be finally displayed after the symbol variation display. It may be.

  In this embodiment, when the sub display device 209 moves to the left, the princess character image h4 is displayed on the sub display device 209. However, the sub display device 209 moves to the right, up, down, or diagonally. The princess character image h <b> 4 may be displayed when moving in the direction or when performing a rotation operation. Even in this case, the entire princess character image h4 is sub-displayed as compared with the case where only a part of the princess character image h4 is displayed on the sub display device 209 by the operation of the sub display device 209 during the execution of the symbol variation display. When displayed on the device 209, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol form is finally displayed after the symbol variation display, and the princess character image h4 is displayed on the sub display device 209. In the case where at least a part of the princess character image h4 is displayed on the sub display device 209, the jackpot symbol form is finally displayed more easily after the symbol variation display than when it is not performed. Or at least a part of the ninja character image h4 than when the princess character image h4 is displayed on the sub display device 209. Part is may be configured to finally big hit symbol manner after the symbol variable display is easily determined display direction of the case that is displayed on the sub display device 209. Also, for example, when the sub display device 209 rotates counterclockwise, the princess character image h4 is displayed on the sub display device 209, and when the sub display device 209 rotates clockwise, the sub display device 209 An enemy character image may be displayed.

  The character images having different jackpot reliability are not limited to the three types of the enemy character image, the princess character image, and the ninja character image, and four or more types may be provided.

  In the production according to the present embodiment, the princess character image h4 is used. However, an image other than the character image (for example, an image of an object such as one character, one symbol, a character string image, an oval or a thousand box, Item images, effect images, conversation notice images, etc.) may be used. Even in an image other than the character image, a plurality of images having different jackpot reliability may be provided.

  In the effect according to the present embodiment, the princess character image h4 is displayed as a notice of the change, but the princess character image h4 may be displayed as a prefetch notice. In this case, when the entire princess character image h4 is displayed by the operation of the sub display device 209, the pattern variation display of the prefetch notice target is displayed when the entire princess character image h4 is displayed. After that, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is finally confirmed and displayed, or the princess character image h4 is displayed more than when the princess character image h4 is not displayed by the operation of the sub display device 209. When at least a part is displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol pattern is finally finally easily displayed after the symbol variation display subject to prefetching notice. Even in the case of the pre-reading notice, four or more types of character images with different jackpot reliability and images other than the character images may be provided.

(Example 5)
An effect example of Example 5 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 180 (a) to 180 (f) show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series. The configuration shown in FIGS. 180A to 180F and the configuration common to the configuration shown in FIG. 21A of Example 5 of the first embodiment have the same operations and effects. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given only to FIG.

  FIG. 180 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, which is the same as the state shown in FIG. 179 (a).

  FIG. 180 (b) shows a state in which the special FIG. 1 suspension is consumed and the special FIG. 1 variable game is started, which is the same state as FIG. 179 (b). FIG. 180 (b-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display the image on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 180 (b). The image data shown in FIG. 180 (b-1) is a character image h3 of the lord arranged at the center, a character string image h7 of “hits” arranged at the lower left corner, and “ ?! "Character string image h8. The character image h3, the character string image h7, and the character string image h8 have a correct pattern orientation and no effect image with no effect image displayed around them. Tono character image h3, character string image h7, and character string image h8 are notice images of the change. FIG. 180 (b-2) is generated using the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 180 (b-1) in order to display the image on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 180 (b). Display data is shown. The display data is generated by cutting out the image data in a rectangular region with the center of the image data shown in FIG. 180 (b-1) as the cut-out center and an aspect ratio of 9:16. Since the display data does not include the character string images h7 and h8, the character string images h7 and h8 are not displayed on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 180 (b).

  The sub display device 209 can perform a moving operation that moves linearly in the left-right direction with the position from the position in FIG. The display data of the sub display device 209 during the movement operation of the sub display device 209 is such that the cut-out center of the image data read from the ROM 406 is in the same direction as the movement direction of the sub display device 209 by the same distance as the movement distance of the sub display device 209. Generated by moving. When the sub display device 209 moves to the left by a predetermined distance or more, the character string image h7 is gradually included in the display data from the right side. The column image h7 is gradually displayed from the right side. The character string image h7 is displayed as a moving image that moves in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the sub display device 209 by the same distance as the moving distance of the sub display device 209 at the same speed as the moving speed of the sub display device 209. . For this reason, during the movement operation of the sub display device 209, the character string image h7 is displayed so as not to move as viewed from the player. Similarly, when the sub display device 209 moves to the right by a predetermined distance or more, the character string image h8 is gradually included in the display data from the left side. Therefore, if the sub display device 209 moves to the right by the predetermined distance or more, the sub display device In 209, the character string image h8 is gradually displayed from the left side. The character string image h8 is displayed as a moving image that moves in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the sub display device 209 by the same distance as the moving distance of the sub display device 209 at the same speed as the moving speed of the sub display device 209. . For this reason, during the movement operation of the sub display device 209, the character string image h8 is displayed so as not to move as viewed from the player. As described above, the sub display device 209 displays an animation display including the character image h3, the character string image h7, and the character string image h8 during the moving operation.

  FIG. 180 (c) shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the reach effect is started. At the start of reach production, “decoration 2” is temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, an operation of moving in a straight line to the left of the sub display device 209 is executed, and lateral movement by the sub display device 209 as a reach effect is performed. A display notice effect is executed. In FIG. 180 (c), the left-pointing arrow shown at the upper right of the sub display device 209 indicates the moving direction of the sub display device 209, and the rectangle indicated by the two-dot chain line indicates the sub display device in FIG. 180 (b). The position of the image display area 209 is shown. In FIG. 180 (c), the sub display device 209 is stopped.

  In FIG. 180 (c), the whole character image h3 is displayed. In the lower left corner of the image display area of the sub display device 209, about the right half of the character string image h7 (in this example, a part of “to” and the whole of “ri”) is displayed, and the character string image h7. About the left half of this (in this example, the other part of "this") is out of view. As the sub display device 209 moves in the left direction, the character string image h7 is gradually displayed on the sub display device 209 from the right side. During the moving operation of the sub display device 209, the character image h3 and the character string image h7 have the same moving speed as the left direction of the sub display device 209, and the moving distance of the sub display device 209 in the left direction. Is displayed as a moving image that moves to the right by the same distance. Therefore, during the movement operation of the sub display device 209, the character image h3 and the character string image h7 are displayed so as not to move as viewed from the player. A star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character image h3, and a star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character string image h7. These star-shaped effect images are displayed as moving images. Note that the star-shaped effect image may be displayed as a still image. Moreover, the character image h3 of Tono is in a positive direction. The character string image h7 is a mode in which the center of the character string image h7 is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise from the positive direction with the center of rotation as the center of rotation. The character string image h7 may be rotated during the movement operation of the sub display device 209, or may be rotated after the sub display device 209 is stopped.

  FIG. 180 (c-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 180 (c). The image data shown in FIG. 180 (c-1) includes a character image h3 of the lord arranged at the center, a character string image h7 of “hit” arranged at the lower left corner, and “ ?! "Character string image h8. The character image h3 of Tono is in a positive direction and is an aspect with an effect image in which a star-shaped effect image is arranged around the character image h3. The character string image h7 is a mode rotated by 30 ° counterclockwise from the normal direction, and is a mode with an effect image in which a star-shaped effect image is arranged around. The character string image h8 is a forward-facing aspect, and is an aspect without an effect image in which a star-shaped effect image is not arranged around the character string image h8. FIG. 180 (c-2) is generated using the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 180 (c-1) in order to display the image on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 180 (c). Display data is shown. The display data is leftward from the center of the image data shown in FIG. 180 (c-1) by the distance that the sub display device 209 has moved leftward from the center position in FIG. 180 (b) in FIG. 180 (c). The image data is generated by cutting out the image data in a rectangular region having an aspect ratio of 9:16 with the position shifted to the center as the cutting center. Since the display data includes about the right half of the character string image h7, the right half of the character string image h7 is displayed on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 180 (c), and the character string is included in the display data. Since the left half of the image h7 is not included, the left half of the character string image h7 is out of the image display area of the sub display device 209. Further, since the display data does not include the entire character string image h8, the character string image h8 is not displayed on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 180 (c).

  FIG. 180 (d) shows a state where the sub display device 209 is linearly moving in the right direction. The position of the sub display device 209 in FIG. 180 (d) is shown in FIG. 180 (c), with the virtual axis passing through the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 at the center position in FIG. 180 (b) as the target axis. The position of the sub display device 209 is bilaterally symmetrical (line symmetric). In FIG. 180 (d), the right-pointing arrow shown at the upper left of the sub display device 209 indicates the moving direction of the sub display device 209, and the rectangle indicated by the two-dot chain line indicates the sub display device in FIG. 180 (c). The position of the image display area 209 is shown. In FIG. 180 (d), the entire character image h3 is displayed. The sub display device 209 does not display the character string image h7. As the sub display device 209 moves to the right, the character string image h7 is gradually deleted from the left side. The lower left corner of the image display area of the sub display device 209 displays about the left half of the character string image h8 (in this example, the whole “?”), And about the right half of the character string image h8 (this example). Then, the other part of "!" As the sub display device 209 moves to the right, the character string image h8 is gradually displayed from the right side. The character image h3, the character string image h7, and the character string image h8 during the movement operation of the sub display device 209 are performed at the same speed as the sub display device 209 moves rightward. A moving image that moves to the left by the same distance as the moving distance in the direction is displayed. For this reason, during the movement operation of the sub display device 209, the character image h3, the character string image h7, and the character string image h8 are displayed so as not to move as viewed from the player. A star-shaped effect image is not displayed around the character image h3, and a star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character string image h8. A star-shaped effect image is displayed as a moving image. Note that the star-shaped effect image may be displayed as a still image. Moreover, the character image h3 of Tono is in a positive direction. The character string image h8 is a mode in which the center of the character string image h8 is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise from the positive direction with the center of rotation as the center of rotation. The character string image h8 is rotated during the movement operation of the sub display device 209. The character string image h8 may be rotated after the sub display device 209 is stopped.

  FIG. 180 (d-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 180 (d). The image data shown in FIG. 180 (d-1) includes a character image h3 of the lord arranged at the center, a character string image h7 of “hits” arranged at the lower left corner, and “ ?! "Character string image h8. The character image h3 of Tono is in a positive direction and has no effect image in which no star-shaped effect image is arranged around it. The character string image h7 is a forward-facing aspect, and is an aspect without an effect image in which a star-shaped effect image is not arranged around. The character string image h8 is a mode rotated by 30 ° counterclockwise from the normal direction, and is a mode with an effect image in which a star-shaped effect image is arranged around the character string image h8. FIG. 180 (d-2) is generated using the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 180 (d-1) in order to display the image on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 180 (d). Display data is shown. The display data is rightward from the center of the image data shown in FIG. 180 (d-1) by the distance that the sub display device 209 has moved rightward from the center position in FIG. 180 (b) in FIG. 180 (d). The image data is generated by cutting out the image data in a rectangular region having an aspect ratio of 9:16 with the position shifted to the center as the cutting center. Since the display data includes approximately the left half of the character string image h8, the left half of the character string image h8 is displayed on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 180 (d), and the character string is included in the display data. Since the right half of the image h8 is not included, the right half of the character string image h8 is out of view from the sub display device 209. Further, the display data does not include the entire character string image h7, and the character string image h8 is not displayed on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 180 (d).

  FIG. 180 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 further moves to the right in a straight line and stops. In FIG. 180 (e), the right-pointing arrow shown at the upper left of the sub display device 209 indicates the moving direction of the sub display device 209, and the rectangle indicated by the two-dot chain line indicates the sub display device in FIG. 180 (d). The position of the image display area 209 is shown. In FIG. 180 (e), the whole character image h3 is displayed. The entire character string image h8 is displayed in the lower right corner of the image display area of the sub display device 209. The character image h3 and the character string image h8 at the time of the moving operation of the sub display device 209 are the same as the moving speed of the sub display device 209 in the right direction and the moving distance of the sub display device 209 in the right direction. Is displayed as a moving image that moves to the left by the same distance. Therefore, when the sub display device 209 is moved, the character image h3 and the character string image h8 are displayed so as not to move as viewed from the player. A star-shaped effect image is not displayed around the character image h3, and a star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character string image h8. Moreover, the character image h3 of Tono is in a positive direction. The character string image h8 is a mode in which the center of the character string image h8 is rotated 30 ° clockwise from the normal direction (rotated 60 ° clockwise from FIG. 180 (d)) with the center of rotation as the rotation center. The character string image h8 may be rotated during the movement operation of the sub display device 209, or may be rotated after the sub display device 209 is stopped.

  FIG. 180 (e-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 180 (e). The image data shown in FIG. 180 (e-1) includes a character image h3 of the lord arranged at the center, a character string image h7 of “hits” arranged at the lower left corner, and “ ?! "Character string image h8. The character image h3 of Tono is in a positive direction and has no effect image in which no star-shaped effect image is arranged around it. The character string image h7 is a forward-facing aspect, and is an aspect without an effect image in which a star-shaped effect image is not arranged around. The character string image h8 is an aspect with an effect image in which a star-shaped effect image is arranged around the character string image h8 rotated clockwise by 30 ° from the normal direction. 180 (e-2) is generated using the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 180 (e-1) in order to display the image on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 180 (e). Display data is shown. The display data is in the right direction from the center of the image data shown in FIG. 180 (e-1) by the distance that the sub display device 209 has moved in the right direction from the center position in FIG. 180 (b) in FIG. The image data is generated by cutting out the image data in a rectangular region having an aspect ratio of 9:16 with the position shifted to the center as the cutting center. Since the entire character string image h8 is included in the display data, the entire character string image h8 is displayed on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 180 (e).

  FIG. 180 (f) shows a state where the sub display device 209 has moved linearly in the left direction and stopped. The position of the sub display device 209 in FIG. 180 (f) is shown in FIG. 180 (e) with the virtual axis passing through the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 at the center position in FIG. 180 (b) as the target axis. The position of the sub display device 209 is bilaterally symmetrical (line symmetric). In FIG. 180 (f), the left-pointing arrow shown at the upper right of the sub display device 209 indicates the moving direction of the sub display device 209, and the rectangle indicated by the two-dot chain line indicates the sub display device in FIG. 180 (e). The position of the image display area 209 is shown. In FIG. 180 (f), the whole character image h3 is displayed. The sub display device 209 does not display the character string image h8. As the sub display device 209 moves leftward, the character string image h8 is gradually erased from the right side. The entire character string image h7 is displayed in the lower left corner of the image display area of the sub display device 209. As the sub display device 209 moves leftward, the character string image h7 is gradually displayed from the right side. The character image h3, the character string image h7, and the character string image h8 during the movement operation of the sub display device 209 are performed at the same speed as the sub display device 209 moves leftward. A moving image that moves to the right by the same distance as the moving distance in the direction is displayed. For this reason, during the movement operation of the sub display device 209, the character image h3, the character string image h7, and the character string image h8 are displayed so as not to move as viewed from the player. A star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character image h3, and a star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character string image h7. Further, the character image h3 of the lord is a mode rotated 30 ° counterclockwise from the normal direction with the center of the character image h3 of the lord as the center of rotation. The character string image h7 is a mode in which the center of the character string image h7 is rotated 30 ° clockwise from the forward direction with the center of rotation as the center of rotation. The character image h3 and the character string image h7 may be rotated during the movement operation of the sub display device 209, or may be rotated after the sub display device 209 is stopped.

  FIG. 180 (f-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 180 (f). The image data shown in FIG. 180 (f-1) is a character image h3 of the lord arranged at the center, a character string image h7 of “hits” arranged at the lower left corner, and “ ?! "Character string image h8. The character image h3 of Tono is a mode rotated 30 ° counterclockwise from the normal direction, and is a mode with an effect image in which a star-shaped effect image is arranged around. The character string image h7 is a mode rotated by 30 ° clockwise from the normal direction, and is a mode with an effect image in which a star-shaped effect image is arranged around. The character string image h7 is a mode rotated by 30 ° clockwise from the normal direction, and is a mode with an effect image in which a star-shaped effect image is arranged around. The character string image h8 is a forward-facing aspect, and is an aspect without an effect image in which no star-shaped effect image is arranged around the character string image h8. FIG. 180 (f-2) is generated using the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 180 (f-1) in order to display the image on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 180 (f). Display data is shown. The display data is cut out from the center of the image data shown in FIG. 180 (f-1) by cutting a position shifted to the left by the distance that the sub display device 209 has moved leftward from the center position in FIG. 180 (f). The image data is generated by cutting out the image data in a rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16. Since the entire character string image h7 is included in the display data, the entire character string image h7 is displayed on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 180 (f).

In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the entire character string image h7 (hits) and character string image h8 (?!) Are displayed by the operation of the sub display device 209 during the execution of the symbol variation display. Note that the entire character string image h7 may be displayed and the character string image h8 may not be displayed by the operations shown in FIGS. 180 (b) to 180 (f) of the sub display device 209 during execution of the symbol variation display. However, the character string image h7 may not be displayed and the entire character string image h8 may be displayed by the operation shown in FIGS. 180 (b) to 180 (f) of the sub display device 209 during execution of the symbol variation display. Alternatively, only a part of the character string image h7 is displayed by the operation shown in FIGS. 180B to 180F of the sub display device 209 during execution of the symbol variation display, and the entire character string image h8 is displayed. In some cases, the entire character string image h7 is displayed by the operation shown in FIGS. 180B to 180F of the sub display device 209 during the execution of the symbol variation display, and a part of the character string image h8 is displayed. You may only see When only a part of the character string image h7 is displayed and only a part of the character string image h8 is displayed by the operation shown in FIGS. 180 (b) to 180 (f) of the sub display device 209 during the symbol variation display. In addition, only a part of the character string image h7 is displayed by the operation shown in FIGS. 180B to 180F of the sub display device 209 that is executing the symbol variation display, and the character string image h8 is displayed. The character string image h7 may not be displayed by the operations shown in FIGS. 180 (b) to 180 (f) of the sub display device 209 during execution of the symbol variation display. Only the part may be displayed.
When the pachinko machine 100 displays the entire character string image h7 (per hit) than when the entire character string image h8 (?!) Is displayed by the operation of the sub display device 209 during the execution of the symbol variation display. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol form is finally finally displayed after the symbol variation display. It should be noted that when the entire character string image h7 is displayed by the operation of the sub display device 209 during execution of the symbol variation display, the case where the entire character string image h7 is displayed is after the symbol variation display. Finally, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol pattern is easily displayed in a definite manner. It should be noted that when the entire character string image h8 is displayed rather than when the entire character string image h8 is not displayed due to the operation of the sub display device 209 during the execution of the symbol variation display, the symbol variation display is later performed. Finally, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol pattern is easily displayed in a definite manner. It should be noted that when the entire character string image h8 is displayed rather than when the entire character string image h8 is not displayed due to the operation of the sub display device 209 during the execution of the symbol variation display, the symbol variation display is later performed. Finally, the big hit symbol mode may be configured so that it is difficult to be confirmed and displayed. In addition, when at least a part of the character string image h7 is displayed rather than when the character string image h7 is not displayed by the operation of the sub display device 209 during the execution of the symbol variation display, the symbol variation image is displayed after the symbol variation display. Finally, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol pattern is easily displayed in a definite manner. When the entire character string image h7 is displayed rather than when only a part of the character string image h7 is displayed by the operation of the sub display device 209 during the execution of the symbol variation display, after the symbol variation display. Eventually, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is easily displayed. The character string image h7 may be displayed in a plurality of sizes, and the character string image h7 is displayed only in a size less than a certain size by the operation of the sub display device 209 during the execution of the symbol variation display. Even when the character string image h7 is displayed in a size larger than the certain size, the big hit symbol form is finally displayed more easily after the symbol variation display. Good. Similarly, the character string image h8 may be displayed in a plurality of sizes, and the character string image h8 is displayed only in a size less than a certain size due to the operation of the sub display device 209 during execution of the symbol variation display. In the case where the character string image h8 is displayed in a size larger than the certain size, the big hit symbol pattern is finally displayed more easily after the symbol variation display than when the character string image h8 is displayed. Also good.

  In the production according to this embodiment, the character string images h7 and h8 are displayed as a notice of the change, but the character string images h7 and h8 may be displayed as a prefetch notice.

  In this embodiment, the character string image h7 is displayed on the sub display device 209 when the sub display device 209 moves leftward by a predetermined distance or more, and the character string image h8 is displayed when the sub display device 209 moves more than a predetermined distance in the right direction. It is displayed on the display device 209. For example, when the sub display device 209 moves upward by a predetermined distance from the position shown in FIG. 180 (b), a character string image of “reach” is displayed on the sub display device 209, and the sub display device 209 moves downward by a predetermined distance. When the movement is performed as described above, the character string image of “big hit” may be displayed on the sub display device 209. A plurality of character string images are provided for each jackpot reliability. For example, the jackpot reliability includes a character string image h8 of “!?”, A character string image of “reach”, a character string image h7 of “hit”, “ It is set so as to increase in the order of “big hit” character string images.

  Further, for example, when the sub display device 209 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle or more, the character string image h7 is displayed on the sub display device 209, and when the sub display device 209 rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle or more, the character string is displayed. The image h8 may be displayed on the sub display device 209. Further, the character string image h7 is displayed on the sub display device 209 when the sub display device 209 moves to the left diagonally upward direction by a predetermined angle or more, and the character string image h7 is displayed when the sub display device 209 moves to the right diagonal upward direction by the predetermined angle or more. When the column image h8 is displayed on the sub display device 209, and the sub display device 209 moves more than a predetermined angle in the diagonally downward left direction, the character string image of “big hit” is displayed on the sub display device 209, and the sub display device 209 A character string image of “reach” may be displayed on the sub display device 209 when the image is moved by a predetermined angle or more in a right oblique direction.

(Example 6)
An effect example of Example 6 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 181 (a) to 181 (f) show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series. The configurations shown in FIGS. 181 (a) to 181 (f) and the configuration shown in FIG. 21 (a) of Example 5 of the first embodiment have the same operations and effects. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given only to FIG. In FIGS. 181 (a) to (f), the same effects as the effects shown in FIGS. 180 (a) to (f) are executed.

  As shown in FIG. 181 (a), the effect movable body 225 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a frame fa1. The frame fa1 has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape (frame shape) having the same aspect ratio as that of the image display area of the sub display device 209, and is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the image display area of the sub display device 209. ing. Lamps are arranged at the four corners of the frame fa1. The lamp r1 is disposed at the upper left corner of the frame fa1, the lamp r2 is disposed at the lower left corner of the frame fa1, the lamp r3 is disposed at the upper right corner of the frame fa1, and the lower right corner of the frame fa1. Is provided with a lamp r4. An effect is performed by turning off, blinking, and turning on the lamps r1 to r4. Full-color LEDs are used as the light sources of the lamps r1 to r4. Note that monochromatic LEDs may be used as the light sources of the lamps r1 to r4. The lamps r <b> 1 to r <b> 4 are included in various lamps 418 shown in FIG. 4 and are controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. The lamps r1 to r4 may be controlled by the second sub control unit 500.

  FIG. 181 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game has ended, and shows a state in which the same effect as the effect shown in FIG. 180 (a) is being executed. The lamps r1 to r4 are in the off state.

  FIG. 181 (b) shows a state in which the special FIG. 1 suspension is digested and the special FIG. 1 variable game is started, and the same effect as the effect shown in FIG. 180 (b) is being executed. Yes. The lamps r1 to r4 are in the off state.

  FIG. 181 (c) shows a state where the same effect as the effect shown in FIG. 180 (c) is being executed. In FIG. 181 (c), the lamps r1 and r2 emit light in a predetermined color. In this example, before the sub display device 209 starts moving leftward, the lamps r1 and r2 start to emit light. Note that the lamps r1 and r2 may start to emit light simultaneously with the start of movement of the sub display device 209 in the left direction, or the lamps r1 and r2 start to emit light while the sub display device 209 is moved in the left direction. Alternatively, the light emission of the lamps r1 and r2 may be started when the sub display device 209 completes the leftward movement, or the light emission of the lamps r1 and r2 may occur after the subdisplay device 209 has completed the leftward movement. May be started. Note that either one of the lamps r1 and r2 may start to emit light first.

  FIG. 181 (d) shows a state where the same effect as the effect shown in FIG. 180 (d) is being executed. In FIG. 181 (d), the lamps r1 and r2 are turned off, and the lamps r3 and r4 emit light in a predetermined color. In this example, the lamps r1 and r2 are turned off before the sub display device 209 starts moving in the right direction, and the lamps r3 and r4 start to emit light. Note that the lamps r1 and r2 may be turned off and the lamps r3 and r4 may be turned on simultaneously with the start of the movement of the sub display device 209 in the right direction, or the lamp r1 while the sub display device 209 is moved in the right direction. , R2 may be turned off and the lamps r3 and r4 may be turned on, or the lamps r1 and r2 may be turned off and the lamps r3 and r4 may be turned on when the sub display device 209 is moved to the right. The lamps r1 and r2 may be turned off and the lamps r3 and r4 may be turned on after the sub display device 209 is moved to the right. Note that one of the lamps r1 and r2 may be turned off first, or one of the lamps r3 and r4 may start to emit light first, or the lamps r1 and r2 are turned off. Either of the lamps r3 and r4 may emit light first. These timings can be set as appropriate.

  FIG. 181 (e) shows a state in which the same effect as the effect shown in FIG. 180 (d) is being executed. The lamps r3 and r4 continue to emit light of a predetermined color.

  FIG. 181 (f) shows a state where the same effect as the effect shown in FIG. 180 (f) is being executed. In FIG. 181 (f), the lamps r1 and r2 emit light in a predetermined color, and the lamps r3 and r4 continue to emit light in a predetermined color. In this example, the lamps r1 and r2 are turned off before the sub display device 209 starts moving leftward, and the lamps r3 and r4 start to emit light. Note that the lamps r1 and r2 may be turned off and the lamps r3 and r4 may be turned on simultaneously with the start of the leftward movement of the sub display device 209, or the lamp r1 while the subdisplay device 209 is moved leftward. , R2 may be turned off and the lamps r3 and r4 may be turned on, or the lamps r1 and r2 may be turned off and the lamps r3 and r4 may be turned on when the sub display device 209 is moved leftward. The lamps r1 and r2 may be turned off and the lamps r3 and r4 may be turned on after the sub display device 209 is moved to the left. Note that one of the lamps r1 and r2 may be turned off first, or one of the lamps r3 and r4 may start to emit light first, or the lamps r1 and r2 are turned off. Either of the lamps r3 and r4 may emit light first. These timings can be set as appropriate.

  In the present embodiment, the character string image h7 for “win” is displayed only when the result of the determination as to whether or not the symbol variation display being executed is a big hit. When the character string image h7 is displayed on the sub display device 209, all the lamps r1 to r4 are turned on. The lamps r <b> 1 to r <b> 4 may all be turned on only when the success / failure determination result relating to the symbol variation display being executed is a big hit. After the symbol variation display, the lamps r1 to r4 are turned on and the number of times of lighting is relatively smaller than the case where the number of lighting and the number of times of lighting of the lamps r1 to r4 is relatively small. Finally, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol pattern is easily displayed in a definite manner.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a frame fa1 is provided as a structure at the edge of the sub display device 209. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment shown in FIGS. 28 to 180, the frame fa1 may be provided at the edge of the sub display device 209 as a structure. Note that the structure may be provided only on one side of the edge of the sub display device 209, or the structure may be provided only on two sides of the edge of the sub display device 209. The structure may be provided only on the three sides of the edge of the sub display device 209. Note that a decorative portion may be provided in the structure. The structure may be provided with a light emitter (for example, an LED, one or a plurality of LEDs, and lamps r1 to r4).

(Example 7)
An effect example of Example 7 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 182 (a) to 182 (h) show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series. 182 (a) to (h), (d '), (f'), (g ') to (j'), (d '') the configuration shown in each figure and the first embodiment described above. Since the configuration common to the configuration shown in FIG. 21A of the fifth embodiment has the same operation and effect, the same reference numeral is attached only to FIG. 182A, and the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 182 (a), the effect movable body 225 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is arranged at the four corners of the frame fa1 and the frame fa1, similarly to the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment shown in FIG. It has the lamp | ramp r1-r4 arrange | positioned.

  FIG. 182 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, which is the same as the state shown in FIG. 181 (a). The lamps r1 to r4 are in the off state.

  FIG. 182 (b) shows a state in which the special FIG. 1 suspension is digested and the special FIG. 1 variable game is started, which is the same state as FIG. 181 (b). The lamps r1 to r4 are in the off state.

  FIG. 182 (c) shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the reach effect is started. At the start of reach production, “decoration 2” is temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, an operation of moving in a straight line to the left of the sub display device 209 is executed, and lateral movement by the sub display device 209 as a reach effect is performed. A display notice effect is executed. In FIG. 182 (c), the left-pointing arrow shown at the upper right of the sub display device 209 indicates the moving direction of the sub display device 209, and the rectangle indicated by the two-dot chain line indicates the sub display device in FIG. 182 (b). The position of the image display area 209 is shown. In FIG. 182 (c), the sub display device 209 is stopped.

  In FIG. 182 (c), the entire character image h3 is displayed. In the lower left corner of the image display area of the sub display device 209, about the right half of the “chance” character string image h9 (in this example, the portion of “su”) is displayed. The left half (in this example, the “cha” part) is completely out of view. As the sub display device 209 moves to the left, the character string image h9 is gradually displayed on the sub display device 209 from the right side. During the moving operation of the sub display device 209, the character image h3 and the character string image h9 are moved at the same speed as the sub display device 209 in the left direction, and the sub display device 209 is moved in the left direction. Is displayed as a moving image that moves to the right by the same distance. Therefore, during the movement operation of the sub display device 209, the character image h3 and the character string image h9 are displayed so as not to move as viewed from the player. Further, a star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character image h3, and a star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character string image h9. In addition, the character image h3 of Tono is in a positive direction, and the character string image h9 is in a positive direction.

  In FIG. 182 (c), the lamps r1 and r2 emit light in a predetermined color. In this example, before the sub display device 209 starts moving leftward, the lamps r1 and r2 start to emit light. Note that the lamps r1 and r2 may start to emit light simultaneously with the start of movement of the sub display device 209 in the left direction, or the lamps r1 and r2 start to emit light while the sub display device 209 is moved in the left direction. Alternatively, the light emission of the lamps r1 and r2 may be started when the sub display device 209 completes the leftward movement, or the light emission of the lamps r1 and r2 may occur after the subdisplay device 209 has completed the leftward movement. May be started. Note that either one of the lamps r1 and r2 may start to emit light first.

  FIG. 182 (d) shows a state where the sub display device 209 has moved linearly to the right and stopped at the center position. The entire character image h3 is displayed. The sub display device 209 does not display the character string image h9. As the sub display device 209 moves to the right, the character string image h9 is gradually erased from the left side. During the moving operation of the sub display device 209, the character image h3 and the character string image h9 are moved at the same speed as the sub display device 209 moving in the right direction, and the sub display device 209 moves in the right direction. Is displayed as a moving image that moves to the left by the same distance. Therefore, during the movement operation of the sub display device 209, the character image h3 and the character string image h9 are displayed so as not to move as viewed from the player. Further, no star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character image h3 of the lord, and the character image h3 of the lord is in a positive direction.

  In FIG. 182 (d), the lamps r1 and r2 are turned off. In this example, the lamps r1 and r2 are turned off before the sub display device 209 starts moving in the right direction. Note that the lamps r1 and r2 may be turned off simultaneously with the start of the movement of the sub display device 209 in the right direction, or the lamps r1 and r2 may be turned off while the sub display device 209 is moved in the right direction. The lamps r1 and r2 may be turned off when the sub display device 209 is stopped, or the lamps r1 and r2 may be turned off after the sub display device 209 is stopped. Note that either one of the lamps r1 and r2 may be turned off first.

  FIG. 182 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved linearly to the left and stopped. The entire character image h3 is displayed. In the lower left corner of the image display area of the sub display device 209, the right third of the “reach” character string image h10 (in this example, the “--ch” portion) is displayed. One-third of the left side of h9 (in this example, the “li” part) is completely overlooked. By moving the sub display device 209 in the left direction, the character string image h10 is gradually displayed on the sub display device 209 from the right side. During the moving operation of the sub display device 209, the character image h3 and the character string image h10 are moved at the same speed as the left display device 209 in the left direction, and the sub display device 209 is moved in the left direction. Is displayed as a moving image that moves to the right by the same distance. For this reason, during the movement operation of the sub display device 209, the character image h3 and the character string image h10 are displayed so as not to move as viewed from the player. Further, a star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character image h3, and a star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character string image h10. In addition, the character image h3 of Tono is in a positive direction, and the character string image h9 is in a positive direction. The lamps r1 and r2 emit light in a predetermined color.

  FIG. 182 (f) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved to the right and stopped at the center position. The entire character image h3 is displayed. The sub-display device 209 does not display the character string image h10. As the sub display device 209 moves to the right, the character string image h10 is gradually erased from the left side. During the moving operation of the sub display device 209, the character image h3 and the character string image h10 move at the same speed as the sub display device 209 moves in the right direction, and the distance the sub display device 209 moves in the right direction. Is displayed as a moving image that moves to the left by the same distance. For this reason, during the movement operation of the sub display device 209, the character image h3 and the character string image h10 are displayed so as not to move as viewed from the player. Further, no star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character image h3 of the lord, and the character image h3 of the lord is in a positive direction. Further, the lamps r1 and r2 are turned off.

  FIG. 182 (g) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is moving linearly in the left direction. The entire character image h3 is displayed. In the lower left corner of the image display area of the sub-display device 209, about the right half of the “win” character string image h7 (in this example, the “ri” portion) is displayed, and about the character string image h9. The left half (in this example, the “to” part) is out of view. As the sub display device 209 moves in the left direction, the character string image h7 is gradually displayed on the sub display device 209 from the right side. During the moving operation of the sub display device 209, the character image h3 and the character string image h7 have the same moving speed as the left direction of the sub display device 209, and the moving distance of the sub display device 209 in the left direction. Is displayed as a moving image that moves to the right by the same distance. Therefore, during the movement operation of the sub display device 209, the character image h3 and the character string image h7 are displayed so as not to move as viewed from the player. Further, a star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character image h3, and a star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character string image h7. In addition, the character image h3 of Tono is in a positive direction, and the character string image h7 is in a positive direction. The lamps r1 and r2 emit light in a predetermined color.

  FIG. 182 (h) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has further moved to the left and linearly stopped. During the movement of the sub display device 209 in the left direction, the character image h3 and the character string image h7 are moved to the left of the sub display device 209 at the same speed as the sub display device 209 moves in the left direction. A moving image that moves to the right by the same distance as the moving distance in the direction is displayed. For this reason, the character image h3 and the character string image h7 are displayed so as not to move as viewed from the player. In FIG. 182 (h), the left end portion (left side lift and left ear portion) of the character image h3 of the Tono is completely out of the image display area of the sub display device 209. In the lower left corner of the image display area of the sub display device 209, the entire “hit” character string image h7 is displayed. As the sub display device 209 moves leftward, the character string image h7 is gradually displayed from the right side. Further, a star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character image h3, and a star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character string image h7. In addition, the character image h3 of Tono is in a positive direction, and the character string image h10 is in a positive direction. Also, the lamps r1 and r2 continue to emit light of a predetermined color.

  After the effects shown in FIGS. 182 (a) to 182 (d) are performed, all the displays displayed in the image display area of the sub display device 209 are erased as shown in FIG. 182 (a). The entire image display area of the display device 209 may be displayed in white, or after the effects shown in FIGS. 182 (a) to (f) are performed, the sub-display as shown in FIG. 182 (a) is performed. There may be a case where all the displays displayed in the image display area of the device 209 are erased and the entire image display area of the sub display device 209 is displayed in white.

  In this embodiment, a part of the character string image h9 of “chance” is displayed in FIG. 182 (c), a part of the character string image h10 of “reach” is displayed in FIG. 182 (e), and FIG. In h), the entire character string image h7 of “hit” is displayed.

  Next, a first modification of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (d ′). FIG. 182 (d ′) shows a state continued from FIG. 182 (c). FIG. 182 (d ′) shows a state where the sub display device 209 has moved to the left and stopped, except that a character string image h9 of “chance” is displayed on the sub display device 209. This shows the same state as shown in 182 (h). As shown in FIG. 182 (d ′), the entire character string image h 9 of “chance” is displayed in the lower left corner of the image display area of the sub display device 209. As the sub display device 209 moves to the left, the character string image h9 is gradually displayed from the right side. The character string image h9 is displayed as a moving image that moves to the right by the same distance as the movement distance of the sub display device 209 in the left direction at the same speed as the movement speed of the sub display device 209 in the left direction. Therefore, it is displayed as not moving as seen from the player. In the first modification, a part of the “chance” character string image h9 is displayed in FIG. 182 (c), and the entire “chance” character string image h9 is displayed in FIG. 182 (d ′).

  Next, a second modification of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (f ′). FIG. 182 (f ′) shows a state continued from FIG. 182 (e). FIG. 182 (f ′) shows a state where the sub display device 209 has moved to the left and stopped, except that the character string image h10 of “reach” is displayed on the sub display device 209. This shows the same state as shown in 182 (h). As shown in FIG. 182 (f ′), the entire “reach” character string image h 10 is displayed in the lower left corner of the image display area of the sub display device 209. The character string image h10 is gradually displayed from the right side by the leftward movement of the sub display device 209. In the second modification, a part of the character string image h9 “chance” is displayed in FIG. 182 (c), a part of the character string image h10 “reach” is displayed in FIG. 182 (e), and FIG. In f ′), the entire character string image h10 of “reach” is displayed.

  When the sub display device 209 moves to a position where the entire “chance” character string image h9 is displayed during execution of the symbol variation display (in the case of the first modification shown in FIG. 182 (d ′)). ), The case where the sub display device 209 has moved to the position where the entire character string image h10 of “reach” is displayed (the second modification shown in FIG. 182 (f ′)) is after the symbol variation display. The big hit symbol pattern is configured to be easily displayed. Further, the pachinko machine 100 has a case where the sub display device 209 moves to a position where the entire “reach” character string image h10 is displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display (Modification 2 shown in FIG. 182 (f ′)). In the case where the sub display device 209 is moved to a position where the entire “hit” character string image h7 is displayed (in this embodiment shown in FIG. 182 (g)), after the symbol variation display. The big hit symbol pattern is configured to be easily displayed. When the sub display device 209 moves to the position where the entire “hit” character string image h7 is displayed during execution of the symbol variation display, the big hit symbol mode is surely displayed after the symbol variation display. You may be comprised so that.

  Next, a third modification of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 (g ′) to (j ′). FIGS. 182 (g ′) to (j ′) show an example of effects according to the modification 3 in time series. FIG. 182 (g ′) shows a state continued from FIG. 182 (f). FIG. 182 (g ′) shows the two-thirds on the right side of the character string image h10 of “Leach” (in this example, “−H”) as in FIG. 182 (e). This shows a state in which the left third of the image h10 (in this example, the “li” portion) is completely overlooked. The character string image h10 is gradually displayed from the right side by the leftward movement of the sub display device 209. FIG. 182 (h ′) shows the same state as that shown in FIG. 182 (f). FIG. 182 (i ′) shows the same state as FIGS. 182 (e) and (g ′).

  FIG. 182 (j ′) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has stopped moving linearly to the left, and the character string image h10 of “reach” is displayed on the sub display device 209. Except for this, the same state as that shown in FIG. 182 (h) is shown. As shown in FIG. 182 (j ′), the entire “reach” character string image h10 is displayed in the lower left corner of the image display area of the sub display device 209. The character string image h10 is gradually displayed from the right side by the leftward movement of the sub display device 209. In the third modification, a part of the character string image h9 of “chance” is displayed in FIG. 182 (c), a part of the character string image h10 of “reach” is displayed in FIG. 182 (e), and FIG. g ′) displays a part of the character string image h10 “reach”, FIG. 182 (i ′) displays a part of the character string image h10 “reach”, and FIG. 182 (j) “reach”. The entire character string image h10 is displayed.

  Next, a fourth modification of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (d ″). FIG. 182 (d ″) shows a state continued from FIG. 182 (c). The entire character image h3 of the lord is displayed on the sub display device 209, and a part of the character string image h9 of “chance” (part of “su” in this example) is part of the character image h3 of the lord. The same state as that shown in FIG. 182 (d ′) is shown except for overlapping. While the sub display device 209 is stopped, the character string image h9 is displayed as a moving image that moves in the right direction, and the whole is gradually displayed from the right side. In FIG. 182 (d ″), the character string image h9 is stopped. In Modification 4, a part of the “chance” character string image h9 is displayed in FIG. 182 (c), and the entire “chance” character string image h9 is displayed in FIG. 182 (d ″). A part of the character string image h9 of “chance” (in this example, a part of “su”) is overlapped with a part of the character image h3. As described above, after the sub display device 209 moves to a position where a part of an image (a character string image in this example) is displayed, the certain image is moved and displayed while the sub display device 209 is stopped. An entire image may be displayed on the sub display device 209.

  For example, the effect operation of the third modification shown in FIGS. 182 (d) to 182 (f) and (g ′) to (i ′) may be an effect of resentment. For example, whether the sub display device 209 moves to a position where the entire “reach” character string image h10 is displayed, or a part or all of another character string image (for example, the character string image “h7” for “win”). It is good also as an effect of making the player expect two patterns of whether the sub display device 209 moves to the displayed position. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 182 (b), (d), (f), and (h ′) may also be the effects of indignation. Instead of a character string image, a plurality of character images having different jackpot reliability (for example, a character image A instead of the character string image h7, a character image B instead of the character string image h9, and a character string image h10). Character image C) may be used.

  In the effect example according to the present embodiment shown in FIGS. 182 (a) to 182 (h), the character string images that are partially displayed are displayed in the order of “chance” character string image h7 and “reach” character string. The order of the character string image to be displayed may be determined in advance in the order of the image h9 and the character string image h7 of “hits”. Note that the order of the displayed character string images can be arbitrarily set.

  In the example of the movement effect of the sub display device 209 according to the present embodiment shown in FIGS. 182 (a) to (h), the probability that (part) of the character string image appears is the sub display device 209 according to the first to fourth modifications. It may be configured to be greater than the probability that (part) of the character string image appears in the movement effect example (for example, the effect example according to Modification 3).

(Example 8)
An effect example of Example 8 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 183 (a) to (j) show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series. The configurations shown in FIGS. 183 (a) to (j) and the configuration shown in FIG. 21 (a) in Example 5 of the first embodiment have the same operations and effects. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given only to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 183 (a), the effect movable body 225 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a frame fa2. The frame fa2 has a rectangular shape and is arranged so that the longitudinal direction is the horizontal direction. The length of the frame fa2 in the longitudinal direction is the same as the horizontal length of the image display area of the sub display device 209. The frame fa2 is arranged so that the upper end side of the frame fa2 is along the lower end side of the image display area of the sub display device 209. Lamps are arranged on the left and right ends of the frame fa2. A lamp r5 is disposed at the left end of the frame fa2, and a lamp r6 is disposed at the right end of the frame fa2. An effect is executed by turning off the lamps r5, r6, blinking, and turning on. Full-color LEDs are used as the light sources of the lamps r5 and r6. Note that monochromatic LEDs may be used as the light sources of the lamps r5 and r6. The lamps r5 and r6 are included in various lamps 418 shown in FIG. 4 and are controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. The lamps r5 and r6 may be controlled by the second sub-control unit 500.

  FIG. 183 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, which is the same as the state shown in FIG. 179 (a). Also, the lamps r5 and r6 are off.

  FIG. 183 (b) shows a state in which the special FIG. 1 suspension is digested and the special FIG. 1 variable game is started, which is the same state as FIG. 179 (b). Further, the lamps r5 to r6 are in the off state.

  FIG. 183 (c) shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the reach effect is started. At the start of reach production, “decoration 2” is temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, after “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, the sub display device 209 performs a moving operation while drawing a curved trajectory in a diagonally downward left direction, and the sub display device 209 as a reach effect. The movement display notice effect by is executed. In FIG. 183 (c), the arrow shown at the upper right of the sub display device 209 indicates the moving direction of the sub display device 209, and the rectangle indicated by the two-dot chain line indicates the sub display device 209 in FIG. 183 (b). The position of the image display area is shown.

  During the moving operation of drawing the curved trajectory in the lower left diagonal direction of the sub display device 209, the character image h3 of the lord is at the same speed as the moving speed in the lower left diagonal direction of the sub display device 209. The character image h3 is displayed as a moving image moving in the direction of drawing a curved trajectory opposite to the moving direction, and the character image h3 is displayed so as not to move as viewed from the player. In FIG. 183 (c), the character image h3 of Tono is completely cut off at the lower right corner. In the lower left corner of the image display area of the sub display device 209, about the right half of the character string image h7 (in this example, the entire “ri”) is displayed, and about the left half of the character string image h7 (this example). Then, “the whole” is over. A star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character image h3, and a star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character string image h7. Moreover, the character image h3 of Tono is in a positive direction. The character string image h7 is in a positive direction.

  In FIG. 183 (c), the lamp r5 emits light in a predetermined color. In this example, the light emission of the lamp r5 is started prior to the start of the movement of the sub display device 209. Note that the light emission of the lamp r5 may be started simultaneously with the start of the movement of the sub display device 209, or the light emission of the lamp r5 may be started while the sub display device 209 is moving leftward.

  FIG. 183 (d) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 performs a moving operation while drawing a curved trajectory in the diagonally downward left direction. In FIG. 183 (d), the arrow shown at the upper right of the sub display device 209 indicates the moving direction of the sub display device 209, and the rectangle indicated by the two-dot chain line indicates the sub display device 209 in FIG. 183 (c). The position of the image display area is shown. In FIG. 183 (d), in the character image h3 of Tono, the right end (in this example, the entire left ear and a part of the left head) is completely cut out. In the lower left corner of the image display area of the sub display device 209, the right half of the character string image h7 (in this example, the entire “ri”) is displayed, and about the left half (in this example) of the character string image h7. , “The whole” is out of place. A star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character image h3 in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The star-shaped effect image is displayed in place of the effect image that has been cut off from the sub display device 209 by the moving operation of the sub display device 209 in FIGS. 183 (c) to 183 (d). In this way, an image that has been cut off from the sub display device 209 by the moving operation of the sub display device 209 may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, a part of the character image h3 that has been cut off from the sub display device 209 (the entire left ear and a part of the left head in FIG. 183 (d)) is displayed on the sub display device 209 when viewed from the player side. It may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 so as to be continuous with the character image h3 of the character. In this example, the part of the character image h3 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It should be noted that a part of the image that has been seen off from the sub display device 209 is displayed on the decorative design display device rather than the case where a part of the image that has been seen off from the sub display device 209 is not displayed on the decorative design display device 208 during the execution of the symbol variation display. It may be configured such that the jackpot symbol pattern is more easily displayed after the symbol variation display when the symbol is displayed at 208. Moreover, the character image h3 of Tono is in a positive direction. The character string image h7 is in a positive direction. The entire character string image h7 is displayed in the upper left corner of the image display area of the sub display device 209. During the moving operation of drawing the curved trajectory in the lower left diagonal direction of the sub display device 209, the character string image h7 is moved at the same speed as the moving speed in the lower left diagonal direction to the sub display device 209. A moving image is displayed that moves in a direction in which a curved trajectory in the opposite direction of the direction is drawn and a direction vertically below. The character string image h7 is gradually displayed from the right side.

  FIG. 183 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has stopped after completing the moving operation for drawing a curved trajectory in the diagonally downward left direction. In FIG. 183 (e), in the character image h3 of Tono, the right end (in this example, the entire left ear and a part of the left head) is completely cut out. A star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character image h3 in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The star-shaped effect image is displayed in place of the effect image that has been cut off from the sub display device 209 by the moving operation of the sub display device 209 in FIGS. 183 (c) to 183 (d). In the lower left corner of the image display area of the sub display device 209, the portion excluding the left side of the character string image h7 is displayed. After the sub display device 209 is stopped, the character string image h7 is displayed as a moving image that moves downward. In FIG. 183 (e), the downward arrow shown on the right side of the character string image h7 of “win” indicates the moving direction of the character string image h7. In addition, the upper left corner of the image display area of the sub display device 209 displays a portion of the character string image h11 “probability change” except for the upper left part of “probability”. The character string image h11 is displayed as a moving image that moves downward, and is gradually displayed from the lower side. In FIG. 183 (e), the downward arrow shown on the right side of the character string image h11 of “probability change” indicates the moving direction of the character string image h11.

  FIG. 183 (f) shows a state in which the character string image h7 is erased while the sub display device 209 is stopped. The character string image h7 is displayed as a moving image that moves downward, and is gradually deleted from the lower side. In addition, the entire character string image h11 of “probability change” is displayed in the upper left corner of the image display area of the sub display device 209. The character string image h11 is displayed as a moving image that moves downward, and is gradually displayed from the lower side. In FIG. 183 (f), the downward arrow shown on the right side of the character string image h11 of “probability change” indicates the moving direction of the character string image h11. A star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character image h3 in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The star-shaped effect image is displayed in place of the effect image that has been cut off from the sub display device 209 by the moving operation of the sub display device 209 in FIGS. 183 (c) to 183 (d).

  FIG. 183 (g) shows a state where “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in place of “decoration 2” in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208. The character string image h11 of “probability change” displayed on the sub display device 209 is stopped and displayed. In this example, since the special figure 1 variable game is a probable big hit (15R special big hit), the character image h11 of “probable change” is stopped on the sub display device 209, and it is predicted that the probable big hit. Thereafter, the symbol combination “decoration 3” in the case of a probable big hit is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. A star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character image h3 in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The star-shaped effect image is displayed in place of the effect image that has been cut off from the sub display device 209 by the moving operation of the sub display device 209 in FIGS. 183 (c) to 183 (d).

  FIG. 183 (h) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 returns to the second position in FIG. 183 (b) by executing a moving operation that draws a curved trajectory in the upper right diagonal direction. In FIG. 183 (h), an arrow shown above the sub display device 209 indicates the moving direction of the sub display device 209. Further, the lamp r5 is turned off. In this example, the lamp r5 is turned off prior to the start of movement of the sub display device 209 to return to the second position. Note that the lamp r5 may be turned off simultaneously with the start of the movement of the sub display device 209, the lamp r5 may be turned off while the sub display device 209 is moving, or the sub display device 209 at the second position. The lamp r5 may be turned off at the time of stop, or the lamp r5 may be turned off after the sub display device 209 is stopped at the second position.

  FIG. 183 (i) shows a state where the sub display device 209 has moved upward and stopped at the initial position. All displays in the image display area of the sub display device 209 are erased.

  FIG. 183 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit ("Special figure A" big hit, probable big hit), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c include the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game. The symbol combination “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” notifying that the hit is a probable big hit is stopped (decision stopped display), and the special symbol 1 in the fourth symbol display area 933 receives a big hit. The fourth symbol of the display mode to be notified (in this example, the display mode of “◯”) is stopped and displayed.

  In this manner, the sub display device 209 may be able to execute a moving operation for drawing a curved trajectory. Further, the sub display device 209 may execute a moving operation for drawing a curved trajectory in the middle of moving in an up / down / left / right diagonal direction.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 176 to 183 again.

(V1)
A game machine including image display means (for example, a sub display device 209) configured to include an image display,
The image display means includes a first motion pattern (for example, the motion pattern of the sub display device 209 shown in FIGS. 176 (b) to (f), the motion of the sub display device 209 shown in FIGS. 177 (a) to (m)). Operation according to the pattern) (hereinafter referred to as “first operation” (for example, movement from the initial position to the second position, rotation, return to the first position, or from the initial position to the second position). Move, rotate, move diagonally, rotate and return to the first position)))
During the execution of the first operation by the image display means (for example, occurrence of magnetic abnormality error, magnetic field abnormality error, abnormal winning error, vibration error, door opening error) In the case where the start of the decorative symbol fluctuation display or the start of the decorative symbol fixed stop display is established, the fourth motion (for example, the stop motion or the , To return to the initial position)
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, it may be possible to produce effects by various operations by the image display means.

(V2)
The gaming machine according to (V1) above,
The first movement pattern is an initial position (hereinafter referred to as “first position” (for example, FIGS. 176 (a), (f), FIGS. 177 (a), (m), FIGS. 178 (a), ( f), (a ′), and (f ′) the position of the sub display device 209).) The image display means at least at a position different from the first position (hereinafter referred to as “second position”). ”(For example, the position of the sub display device 209 in FIG. 176 (c), FIG. 177 (c), FIG. 178 (b), (b ′)). It is a movement pattern that moves to a position.
A game stand characterized by that.

(V3)
The gaming machine according to (V2) above,
The fourth operation is an operation including an operation of returning to the first position (for example, an operation of returning to the initial position).
A game stand characterized by that.

(V4)
The game stand according to any one of (V1) to (V3) above,
The fourth operation is an operation including a stop operation (for example, an operation for stopping the rotational motion shown in FIGS. 176 (e) and (f), an operation for stopping the linear motion),
A game stand characterized by that.

(V5)
The game stand according to any one of (V1) to (V4) above,
The image display means is moved to a second movement pattern (for example, moved from a first position to a second position, moved in an oblique direction, moved in an oblique direction opposite to the oblique direction, and moved to a second position. The movement according to the movement pattern (hereinafter referred to as “second movement”) can be executed.
When the change condition is satisfied during the execution of the second operation by the image display means, the fourth operation is performed even in the middle of the second movement pattern. ,
The game machine characterized in that the second movement pattern is a movement pattern different from the first movement pattern.

(V6)
The game stand according to any one of (V1) to (V5) above,
A symbol display means (for example, left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c and fourth symbol display areas 933 and 934),
The image display means can execute an operation (hereinafter referred to as “third operation”) according to a third exercise pattern (for example, the exercise pattern shown in FIGS. 179 (a) to (f)).
The third movement pattern is a movement pattern different from the first movement pattern,
The third operation is an operation including an operation that moves in a first direction (for example, left direction),
During the execution of the third action, the images of the images (for example, the character image h3 of the lord and the character image h4 of the princess moved in the second direction (for example, the right direction) opposite to the first direction). Can be shown to the player so that the pattern does not move in the first direction by displaying the image on the image display means.
In a state before the image display means performs the third operation, an image of a part of the picture (hereinafter referred to as “first picture”) does not fit within the display area of the image display means. (See, for example, FIG. 179 (b))
By the third operation of the image display means, a first display in which the first image as the image of the first pattern is within the display area of the image display means (for example, the entire princess character image h4) (For example, see FIG. 179 (f)),
During the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, the case where the first display is performed is greater than the case where the first display is not performed after the symbol variation display. Is easy to confirm.
A game stand characterized by that.

(V7)
The game stand according to any one of (V1) to (V6) above,
A first image display means (for example, a decorative design display device 208) different from the image display means (hereinafter referred to as "second image display means");
The first image display means includes a first image display different from the image display (hereinafter referred to as “second image display”),
The position of the second image display means is a position closer to the player than the position of the first image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(V8)
The game table according to any one of (V1) to (V7) above,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.

(V9)
The game table according to any one of (V1) to (V7) above,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000).
A game stand characterized by that.

(V10)
The gaming machine according to any one of (V1) to (V9) above,
The change condition is satisfied when it is determined that an abnormal state (for example, a magnetic abnormality error, a magnetic field abnormality error, an abnormal winning error, a vibration error, a door opening error) has occurred,
A game stand characterized by that.

(V11)
The game stand according to any one of (V1) to (V10) above,
The image display means can display a design (for example, a decorative design),
The change condition may be satisfied according to arrival of the stop timing of the symbol,
A game stand characterized by that.

(V12)
The game stand according to any one of (V1) to (V10) above,
The image display means can display a design (for example, a decorative design),
The change condition is satisfied according to arrival of the stop timing of the symbol,
A game stand characterized by that.

(V13)
The game table according to (V11) or (V12) above,
The game stand characterized in that the symbol stop timing is the symbol fixed stop display timing.

(V14)
The game table according to (V11) or (V12) above,
The symbol stop timing is a start timing of the symbol fluctuation display (for example, temporary stop display).
A game stand characterized by that.

(V15)
The game table according to any one of (V1) to (V14) above,
During execution of the first operation by the image display means, a second change condition (for example, pressing a chance button) different from the change condition (hereinafter referred to as “first change condition”) is established. If there is, it is configured to perform the fourth operation even in the middle of the first movement pattern,
A game stand characterized by that.

(V16)
The game stand according to any one of (V1) to (V15) above,
When the third change condition (for example, either one of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is increased) during execution of the first operation by the image display means, the first movement is performed. It is configured to perform the fourth operation even in the middle of the pattern,
The third change condition is a condition different from the first change condition,
The third change condition is a condition different from the second change condition.
A game stand characterized by that.

(V17)
The game stand according to any one of (V1) to (V16) above,
If the fourth change condition (for example, the start of a preferential execution) is established during execution of the first operation by the image display means, the first movement pattern may be in the middle. Is configured to perform the fourth operation,
The fourth change condition is a condition different from the first change condition,
The fourth change condition is a condition different from the second change condition,
The fourth change condition is a condition different from the third change condition.
A game stand characterized by that.

(W1)
A game machine including image display means (for example, a sub display device 209) configured to include an image display,
The image display means includes a first motion pattern (for example, the motion pattern of the sub display device 209 shown in FIGS. 176 (b) to 176) and the motion of the sub display device 209 shown in FIGS. (Hereinafter referred to as “first operation” (for example, an operation that moves from the initial position to the second position, rotates, and returns to the first position)) can be executed,
During the execution of the first operation by the image display means (for example, occurrence of magnetic abnormality error, magnetic field abnormality error, abnormal winning error, vibration error, door opening error) When the decoration pattern fluctuation display is started or the decoration symbol confirmation stop display is started), the fourth operation is performed even during the first movement pattern. And
The change condition is satisfied when it is determined that an abnormal state (for example, a magnetic abnormality error, a magnetic field abnormality error, an abnormal winning error, a vibration error, a door opening error) has occurred,
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, it may be possible to produce effects by various operations by the image display means.

(W2)
The game stand according to (W1) above,
The first movement pattern is an initial position (hereinafter referred to as “first position” (for example, FIGS. 176 (a), (f), FIGS. 177 (a), (m), FIGS. 178 (a), ( f), (a ′), and (f ′) the position of the sub display device 209).) The image display means at least at a position different from the first position (hereinafter referred to as “second position”). ”(For example, the position of the sub display device 209 in FIG. 176 (c), FIG. 177 (c), FIG. 178 (b), (b ′)). It is a movement pattern that moves to a position.
A game stand characterized by that.

(W3)
The game stand according to (W2) above,
The fourth operation is an operation including an operation of returning to the first position (for example, an operation of returning to the initial position).
A game stand characterized by that.

(W4)
The game stand according to any one of (W1) to (W3) above,
The fourth operation is an operation including a stop operation (for example, an operation for stopping the rotational motion shown in FIGS. 176 (e) and (f), an operation for stopping the linear motion),
A game stand characterized by that.

(W5)
The game stand according to any one of (W1) to (W4) above,
The image display means operates according to a second motion pattern (for example, a motion pattern that moves from a first position to a second position, moves in an oblique direction, and moves to a second position) (hereinafter, referred to as a motion pattern). "Second action") can be performed,
When the change condition is satisfied during the execution of the second operation by the image display means, the fourth operation is performed even in the middle of the second movement pattern. ,
The game machine characterized in that the second movement pattern is a movement pattern different from the first movement pattern.

(W6)
The game stand according to any one of (W1) to (W5) above,
A symbol display means (for example, left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c and fourth symbol display areas 933 and 934),
The image display means can execute an operation (hereinafter referred to as “third operation”) according to a third exercise pattern (for example, the exercise pattern shown in FIGS. 179 (a) to (f)).
The third movement pattern is a movement pattern different from the first movement pattern,
The third operation is an operation including an operation that moves in a first direction (for example, left direction),
During the execution of the third action, the images of the images (for example, the character image h3 of the lord and the character image h4 of the princess moved in the second direction (for example, the right direction) opposite to the first direction). Can be shown to the player so that the pattern does not move in the first direction by displaying the image on the image display means.
In a state before the image display means performs the third operation, an image of a part of the picture (hereinafter referred to as “first picture”) does not fit within the display area of the image display means. (See, for example, FIG. 179 (b))
By the third operation of the image display means, a first display in which the first image as the image of the first pattern is within the display area of the image display means (for example, the entire princess character image h4) (For example, see FIG. 179 (f)),
During the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, the case where the first display is performed is greater than the case where the first display is not performed after the symbol variation display. Is easy to confirm.
A game stand characterized by that.

(W7)
The game stand according to any one of (W1) to (W6) above,
A first image display means (for example, a decorative design display device 208) different from the image display means (hereinafter referred to as "second image display means");
The first image display means includes a first image display different from the image display (hereinafter referred to as “second image display”),
The position of the second image display means is a position closer to the player than the position of the first image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(W8)
The game stand according to any one of (W1) to (W7),
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.

(W9)
The game stand according to any one of (W1) to (W7),
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000).
A game stand characterized by that.

(X1)
Image display means including an image display (for example, the sub display device 209);
Symbol display means (for example, left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, fourth symbol display areas 933 and 934),
A game machine equipped with
The image display means can perform a first movement (for example, a linear movement in the left direction),
The first movement is an action that moves in a first direction (for example, left direction),
During the execution of the first movement, an image of a pattern (for example, shown in FIGS. 179 (b) to 179 (f)) moved in a second direction (for example, the right direction) opposite to the first direction. By displaying the character image h3 of Yoshimune and the image of the princess character image h4 shown in FIGS. 179 (c), (e) and (f) on the image display means, the pattern is in the first direction. It can be shown to the player as if it is not moving,
In a state before the image display means performs the first exercise, an image (for example, a princess character image h4) of a part of the pattern (hereinafter referred to as “first pattern”) is displayed in the image display. It is configured not to fit within the display area of the means (for example, within the image display area of the sub display device 209),
Due to the first movement of the image display means, a first display in which a first image (for example, a princess character image h4) is contained within the display area of the image display means as an image of the first pattern ( For example, there is a case where a display including the entire princess character image h4 shown in FIG.
During the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, the case where the first display is performed is greater than the case where the first display is not performed after the symbol variation display. Is easy to confirm.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the display displayed on the image display unit can be made different for each jackpot reliability by the movement of the image display unit, so that the player can pay attention to the movement and display of the image display unit. There are cases where it is possible.

(X2)
The game stand according to (X1) above,
Due to the first movement of the image display means, a second display (for example, a ninja character image) as the image of the first pattern is within the display area of the image display means (for example, , A display that includes the entire ninja character image)
The first image and the second image are different images,
During execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, the case where the second display is performed rather than the case where the second display is performed is a jackpot symbol aspect after the symbol variation display. Is easy to confirm.
A game stand characterized by that.

(X3)
The game stand according to (X2) above,
During the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, the second display is more effective than the case where the first display (for example, the display including the entire princess character image h4 shown in FIG. 179 (f)) is performed. When the display (for example, the display including the entire character image of the ninja) is performed, the big hit symbol mode is more easily displayed after the symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(X4)
The game stand according to any one of (X1) to (X3) above,
The image display means is capable of executing a second movement (for example, a movement moving in the right direction),
The second movement is an action that moves in the second direction,
During the execution of the second motion, the image of the pattern moved in the first direction (for example, the image of the pattern including the character image h3 of Tono and the character string image h8 of “?!”) Is displayed as the image. By displaying on the means, it is possible to show the player that the pattern does not move in the second direction,
A game stand characterized by that.

(X5)
The game stand according to any one of (X1) to (X4) above,
During the execution of the first exercise, a moving image of the pattern (for example, the character image h3 of Yoshimune shown in FIGS. 179 (b) to (f) and FIGS. 179 (c), (e), and (f) A moving image in which the princess character image h4 shown moves in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the sub display device 209) is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(X6)
The game stand according to any one of (X1) to (X5) above,
A first image display means (for example, a decorative design display device 208) different from the image display means (hereinafter referred to as "second image display means");
The first image display means includes a first image display different from the image display (hereinafter referred to as “second image display”),
The position where the first exercise is performed is a position closer to the player than the position of the first image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(X7)
The gaming machine according to (X6) above,
The height and width of the first image display are different (for example, the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a horizontally long rectangle),
The height and width of the second image display are different (for example, the image display area of the sub display device 209 has a horizontally long rectangular shape),
A game stand characterized by that.

(X8)
The game stand according to any one of (X1) to (X7) above,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.

(X9)
The game stand according to any one of (X1) to (X7) above,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000).
A game stand characterized by that.

(Y1)
Image display means including an image display (for example, the sub display device 209);
Symbol display means (for example, left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, fourth symbol display areas 933 and 934),
A game machine equipped with
The image display means can perform a first movement (for example, a linear movement in the left direction),
The first movement is an action that moves in a first direction (for example, left direction),
During the execution of the first movement, an image of a pattern (for example, shown in FIGS. 179 (b) to 179 (f)) moved in a second direction (for example, the right direction) opposite to the first direction. By displaying the character image h3 of Yoshimune and the image of the princess character image h4 shown in FIGS. 179 (c), (e) and (f) on the image display means, the pattern is in the first direction. It can be shown to the player as if it is not moving,
In a state before the image display means performs the first exercise, an image (for example, a princess character image h4) of a part of the pattern (hereinafter referred to as “first pattern”) is displayed in the image display. It is configured not to fit within the display area of the means (for example, within the image display area of the sub display device 209),
Due to the first movement of the image display means, a first display in which a first image (for example, a princess character image h4) is contained within the display area of the image display means as an image of the first pattern ( For example, there is a case where a display including the entire princess character image h4 shown in FIG.
During the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, the case where the first display is performed is greater than the case where the first display is not performed after the symbol variation display. Is easy to confirm,
The first motion is a motion including a linear movement (for example, a moving operation in an up / down / left / right oblique direction, including a case of moving in a curved orbit before, during or after the moving operation),
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the display displayed on the image display unit can be made different for each jackpot reliability by the movement of the image display unit, so that the player can pay attention to the movement and display of the image display unit. There are cases where it is possible. The first motion may be a motion including at least a linear movement. The first movement may be a linear movement movement. The image display means may be able to execute only linear movement and stop depending on the first movement.

(Y2)
The game stand according to (Y1) above,
Due to the first movement of the image display means, a second display (for example, a ninja character image) as the image of the first pattern is within the display area of the image display means (for example, , A display that includes the entire ninja character image)
The first image and the second image are different images,
During execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, the case where the second display is performed rather than the case where the second display is performed is a jackpot symbol aspect after the symbol variation display. Is easy to confirm.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Y3)
The game stand according to (Y2) above,
During the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, the second display is more effective than the case where the first display (for example, the display including the entire princess character image h4 shown in FIG. 179 (f)) is performed. When the display (for example, the display including the entire character image of the ninja) is performed, the big hit symbol mode is more easily displayed after the symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Y4)
The gaming machine according to any one of (Y1) to (Y3),
The image display means is capable of executing a second movement (for example, a movement moving in the right direction),
The second movement is an action that moves in the second direction,
During the execution of the second motion, the image of the pattern moved in the first direction (for example, the image of the pattern including the character image h3 of Tono and the character string image h8 of “?!”) Is displayed as the image. By displaying on the means, it is possible to show the player that the pattern does not move in the second direction,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Y5)
The game table according to any one of (Y1) to (Y4),
During the execution of the first exercise, a moving image of the pattern (for example, the character image h3 of Yoshimune shown in FIGS. 179 (b) to (f) and FIGS. 179 (c), (e), and (f) A moving image in which the princess character image h4 shown moves in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the sub display device 209) is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Y6)
The game stand according to any one of (Y1) to (Y5) above,
A first image display means (for example, a decorative design display device 208) different from the image display means (hereinafter referred to as "second image display means");
The first image display means includes a first image display different from the image display (hereinafter referred to as “second image display”),
The position where the first exercise is performed is a position closer to the player than the position of the first image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Y7)
The game stand according to (Y6) above,
The height and width of the first image display are different (for example, the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a horizontally long rectangle),
The height and width of the second image display are different (for example, the image display area of the sub display device 209 has a horizontally long rectangular shape),
A game stand characterized by that.

(Y8)
The game stand according to any one of (Y1) to (Y7) above,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.

(Y9)
The game stand according to any one of (Y1) to (Y7) above,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000).
A game stand characterized by that.

(Z1)
Image display means including an image display (for example, the sub display device 209);
Symbol display means (for example, left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, fourth symbol display areas 933 and 934),
A game machine equipped with
The image display means can perform a first movement (for example, a linear movement in the left direction),
The first movement is an action that moves in a first direction (for example, left direction),
During the execution of the first movement, an image of a pattern (for example, shown in FIGS. 179 (b) to 179 (f)) moved in a second direction (for example, the right direction) opposite to the first direction. By displaying the character image h3 of Yoshimune and the image of the princess character image h4 shown in FIGS. 179 (c), (e) and (f) on the image display means, the pattern is in the first direction. It can be shown to the player as if it is not moving,
In a state before the image display means performs the first exercise, an image (for example, a princess character image h4) of a part of the pattern (hereinafter referred to as “first pattern”) is displayed in the image display. It is configured not to fit within the display area of the means (for example, within the image display area of the sub display device 209),
Due to the first movement of the image display means, a first display in which a first image (for example, a princess character image h4) is contained within the display area of the image display means as an image of the first pattern ( For example, there is a case where a display including the entire princess character image h4 shown in FIG.
During the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, the case where the first display is performed is greater than the case where the first display is not performed after the symbol variation display. Is easy to confirm,
Structures (for example, frames fa1 and fa2) are provided at the edge of the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the display displayed on the image display unit can be made different for each jackpot reliability by the movement of the image display unit, so that the player can pay attention to the movement and display of the image display unit. There are cases where it is possible.

(Z2)
The game stand according to (Z1) above,
Due to the first movement of the image display means, a second display (for example, a ninja character image) as the image of the first pattern is within the display area of the image display means (for example, , A display that includes the entire ninja character image)
The first image and the second image are different images,
During execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, the case where the second display is performed rather than the case where the second display is performed is a jackpot symbol aspect after the symbol variation display. Is easy to confirm.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Z3)
The game stand according to (Z2) above,
During the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, the second display is more effective than the case where the first display (for example, the display including the entire princess character image h4 shown in FIG. 179 (f)) is performed. When the display (for example, the display including the entire character image of the ninja) is performed, the big hit symbol mode is more easily displayed after the symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Z4)
The game stand according to any one of (Z1) to (Z3) above,
The image display means is capable of executing a second movement (for example, a movement moving in the right direction),
The second movement is an action that moves in the second direction,
During the execution of the second motion, the image of the pattern moved in the first direction (for example, the image of the pattern including the character image h3 of Tono and the character string image h8 of “?!”) Is displayed as the image. By displaying on the means, it is possible to show the player that the pattern does not move in the second direction,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Z5)
The game stand according to any one of (Z1) to (Z4) above,
During the execution of the first exercise, a moving image of the pattern (for example, the character image h3 of Yoshimune shown in FIGS. 179 (b) to (f) and FIGS. 179 (c), (e), and (f) A moving image in which the princess character image h4 shown moves in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the sub display device 209) is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Z6)
The game stand according to any one of (Z1) to (Z5) above,
A first image display means (for example, a decorative design display device 208) different from the image display means (hereinafter referred to as "second image display means");
The first image display means includes a first image display different from the image display (hereinafter referred to as “second image display”),
The position where the first exercise is performed is a position closer to the player than the position of the first image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Z7)
The game stand according to (Z6) above,
The height and width of the first image display are different (for example, the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a horizontally long rectangle),
The height and width of the second image display are different (for example, the image display area of the sub display device 209 has a horizontally long rectangular shape),
A game stand characterized by that.

(Z8)
The game stand according to any one of (Z1) to (Z7) above,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.

(Z9)
The game stand according to any one of (Z1) to (Z7) above,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000).
A game stand characterized by that.

  In FIGS. 23 to 26 of the first embodiment and FIGS. 176 to 183 of the present embodiment, the sub display device 209 moves an image that is moved in a direction opposite to the direction in which the sub display device 209 moves or rotates. Although examples of effects to be displayed are shown, these are examples of effects, and the sub display device 209 may be moved upward, may be moved downward, or may be inclined diagonally upward to the left. It may be moved toward the left, may be moved toward the lower left, may be moved toward the upper right, or may be moved toward the lower right. May rotate in a clockwise direction, may rotate in a counterclockwise direction, or may be rotated after one of these operations. May be performed.

  In FIGS. 23 to 26 of the first embodiment and FIGS. 176 to 183 of the present embodiment, the sub display device 209 moves an image that is moved in a direction opposite to the direction in which the sub display device 209 moves or rotates. Although the example of the effect to be displayed is shown, when the sub display device 209 is moved or rotated, the player is displayed such that the image displayed on the sub display device 209 is moved or rotated in the same direction as the sub display device 209. The image may be displayed so as to be visible (for example, see the embodiment shown in FIG. 22). For example, when an image (for example, any one of a hold icon, a change icon, a decorative design, or other image) is displayed on the sub display device 209 and the sub display device 209 moves, the image appears to move due to the movement. You may make it show to a player. The initial operation of the sub-display device 209 and the initial display of the sub-display device 209 when the pachinko machine 100 is turned on will appear to move as the sub-display device 209 moves as shown in FIG. You may comprise.

  In addition, what was called a lamp | ramp and illumination until now is an example of a light emission means, and if a lamp | ramp emits light, such as LED and a cold cathode tube, it can replace.

  For example, the above embodiment can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in a game machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine, and this enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The ball payout may be executed by electronic display.

  Note that the items described in the above detailed description, in particular, the items described in the examples and modifications shown in the first to seventh embodiments can be combined.

In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine 2000 as shown in FIG.
The gaming table according to the present invention corresponds to each reel shown in FIG. 184, “a plurality of types of reels 2002, which are driven to rotate, a start lever 2004 for instructing the rotation of the reels”. A stop button 2006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means for determining whether or not an internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is won by lottery (winning prize internal lottery), and based on the lottery result of the lottery means The combination of symbols displayed by the reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) that performs stop control for stopping the rotation of the reels and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination. And determining means (winning determination process) for determining whether or not the symbol combination is predetermined, and when the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, In addition to payout control means (medal payout process 2008) for performing game medium payout processing for paying out game media to be played, the effect means 2010 for executing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means is provided. A launching device 2014 that launches a ball into the game area 2012, a winning port 2016 configured to be able to enter a ball launched from the launching device, a detection means 2018 that detects a ball that has entered the winning port 2016, A payout means 2020 for paying out a ball when the detection means 2018 detects a ball, a variable display device 2022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 2024 movable to a position where the variable display device 2022 is shielded. And a movable body 2026 that operates in a predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device 2022 is designed to be triggered by a game ball entering the winning opening. And in is stopped and displayed after the change, it is also suitable to the slot machine 2000 ", which is the effect device 2010, such as to produce a game.

  The game stand according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 185 (a). “Insert a bill into the bill insertion slot 3002, execute the lottery based on the bet 3004 and the start 3006 operation, and display the lottery result on the lottery result display device 3008. Then, at the time of winning, the number of bonus coins is added to the remaining credit number, and when cashout 3009 is selected, a casino machine 3000 that issues a receipt with a code corresponding to the remaining credit number from the receipt issuing machine 3010. It may be.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5B, the cellular phone 4000 having a storage unit for storing the electronic data for realizing the present invention, and the electronic data for realizing the present invention as shown in FIG. The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 5000 provided with a storage unit for storing the image data and a home video game machine 6000 provided with a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the cellular phone 4000 in FIG. 6B includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires game-related data via a mobile phone line, and acquired game-related data (this book And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 5000 in FIG. 6C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data related to the game (the present invention). And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game machine 6000 in FIG. 6D includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data about the game ( And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 7000 that stores electronic data for realizing the present invention. In some cases, the electronic data for realizing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 7000 to the home video game machine 6000 shown in FIG.

  In addition, a game can be executed by applying the present invention to a game program that simulates the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine. In that case, a DVD-ROM, CD-ROM, FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used as a recording medium for recording the game program.

  Furthermore, the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as examples of game machines, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball ball game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

The present invention according to the above embodiment can be summarized as follows.
(Appendix a1)
A game machine with image display means,
The image display means may perform a rotation display of the first image,
When the rotation display is performed, the aspect ratio of the first image may change.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a2)
A game machine according to appendix a1,
When the rotation display is performed, the second image may not rotate.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a3)
A game machine according to appendix a2,
The second image does not rotate when the rotation display is performed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a3,
When the rotation display is performed, there is a case where an image that has been cut off by the image display unit before the rotation display is performed is displayed on the image display unit by the rotation display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a4,
When the rotation display is performed, the image displayed on the image display unit before the rotation display is performed may be cut off on the image display unit by performing the rotation display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a5,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a5,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix b1)
Directing movable body,
Image display means;
A game machine equipped with
When the production movable body is operated in front of the image display means, there may be a first state in which a first image is displayed at a first position.
The first position is a position behind the effect movable body in the image display means,
The first image is an effect image,
When operating the movable body for production in front of the image display means, there may be a second state in which the first image is displayed at a second position,
The second position is a position different from the back of the effect movable body in the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b2)
A game machine according to appendix b1,
In the first state, the first image may be displayed across the first position and the third position,
The third position is a position different from the back of the effect movable body in the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b3)
A gaming table as set forth in appendix b1 or b2,
The size of the first image in the first state is a first size,
The size of the first image in the second state is a third size,
The third size is smaller than the first size.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b3,
In the first state, the second image may be displayed in the first direction,
In the second state, the second image may be displayed in a second orientation,
The first image is an image different from the second image,
The second direction is a direction different from the first direction.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b5)
The game stand according to appendix b4,
The size of the second image in the first state is a second size,
The size of the second image in the second state is a fourth size,
The fourth size is smaller than the second size.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices b1 to b5,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices b1 to b5,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix c1)
An image display unit capable of displaying an effect image for directing a game;
Drive means for driving the image display unit;
A game machine equipped with
The image display unit may move by driving the driving means,
During the period in which the image display unit is moving in the first direction (hereinafter referred to as “first period”), the first moving image may be displayed on the image display unit.
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which a first image moves in the first direction.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c2)
The game stand according to appendix c1,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode using the first image.
(Appendix c3)
The game stand according to appendix c1 or c2,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in a first direction;
In the first period, the first image is configured to move in a second direction;
The first direction and the second direction are opposite directions.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c4)
A game machine according to appendix c3,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move at a first speed in the first direction;
In the first period, the first image is configured to move at a second speed in the second direction;
The first speed and the second speed are the same speed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c1 to c4,
The first video is a video including a mode in which a second image is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c6)
The game stand according to appendix c5,
In the first period, the second image is configured not to move in the first direction.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c7)
A gaming table according to appendix c5 or c6,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode by the second image.
(Appendix c8)
A gaming table according to appendix c3 or c4,
“Moving by driving of the driving means” described in Appendix c1 means “rotating by driving of the driving means”
“The first image moves in the first direction” described in the appendix c1 means “the first image rotates in the first direction”;
The first direction is a rotation direction around the rotation axis of the image display unit.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c9)
The game stand according to appendix c8,
The first orientation is one of clockwise and counterclockwise.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c1 to c7,
“Moving by driving of the driving means” described in Appendix c1 means “moving linearly by driving of the driving means”
“The first image moves in the first direction” described in the supplementary note c1 means “the first image linearly moves in the first direction”.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d1)
A game machine having a first movable body capable of performing a production operation to produce a game,
The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,
When the power is turned off, the first movable body is configured to move from the second position to the first position,
When the power is turned on, the first movable body is configured to move from the first position to the second position;
The second position and the first position are different positions,
The production operation is configured to start from the second position and end at the second position.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d2)
A game machine according to appendix d1,
The first movable body is configured to move to the first position even when the power is turned off while the first movable body is located at a position different from the second position. Yes,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d3)
A game machine as set forth in appendix d1 or d2,
The production operation includes an operation of moving to a third position,
The third position and the first position are different positions;
The third position and the second position are different positions.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d4)
A game machine according to appendix d3,
Image display means,
The first movable body is a movable body provided in front of the image display means,
The third position is a position in front of the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d5)
A game machine according to appendix d4,
Can perform a big hit
The first movable body is a movable body provided in front of the image display means,
When the first movable body is located at the third position, the first movable body may overlap at least a part of the preview image displayed on the image display means,
The preview image is the jackpot notification image.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d5,
The first movable body is capable of executing an initial operation on condition that a power source is turned on.
“The first movable body moves from the first position to the second position” described in the appendix d1 means “the first movable body starts the initial operation from the first position. And move to the second position at the end of the initial operation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d5,
The first movable body is capable of executing an initial operation on condition that a power source is turned on.
“The first movable body moves from the first position to the second position” described in appendix d1 means “the first movable body moves from the first position to the second position. The game machine is to start the initial operation after moving to, and move to the second position again at the end of the initial operation ".
(Appendix d8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d7,
“When the power is turned off” described in the appendix d1 means “when the main power of the game machine is turned off”
“When the power is turned on” described in the supplementary note d1 means “when the main power of the game machine is turned on”.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d8,
The first movable body is a movable body whose posture can be changed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d9,
Provided with a second movable body capable of performing a production operation to produce a game,
The second movable body is a movable body that starts operation from a position when the power is turned off when the power is turned on.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d1 to d10,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d12)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d1 to d10,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e1)
An image display unit capable of displaying an effect image for directing a game;
Drive means for driving the image display unit;
A game machine equipped with
The image display unit may move by driving the driving means,
During the period in which the image display unit is moving in the first direction (hereinafter referred to as “first period”), the first moving image may be displayed on the image display unit.
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which a first image moves in the first direction.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix e2)
A gaming machine according to appendix e1,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode using the first image.
(Appendix e3)
A gaming machine according to appendix e1 or e2,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in a first direction;
In the first period, the first image is configured to move in a second direction;
The first direction and the second direction are opposite directions.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix e4)
A gaming machine according to appendix e3,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move at a first speed in the first direction;
In the first period, the first image is configured to move at a second speed in the second direction;
The first speed and the second speed are the same speed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix e5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e1 to e4,
The first video is a video including a mode in which a second image is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix e6)
A gaming machine according to appendix e5,
In the first period, the second image is configured not to move in the first direction.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix e7)
A gaming machine according to appendix e5 or e6,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode by the second image.
(Appendix e8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e1 to e7,
“Moving by driving of the driving means” described in appendix e1 means “rotating by driving of the driving means”
“The first image moves in the first direction” described in appendix e1 means “the first image rotates in the first direction”;
The first direction is a rotation direction around the rotation axis of the image display unit.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix e9)
A gaming machine according to appendix e3 or e4,
The first orientation is one of clockwise and counterclockwise.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix e10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e1 to e7,
“Moving by driving of the driving means” described in Appendix e1 means “moving linearly by driving of the driving means”
“The first image moves in the first direction” described in the appendix e1 means “the first image linearly moves in the first direction”.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix f1)
A direction movable body capable of performing a movable operation for directing a game,
A decorative body provided with a window,
A game machine equipped with
The stage movable body may perform an operation behind the decorative body.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix f2)
A game machine according to appendix f1,
The production movable body is a movable body capable of displaying an image,
It is configured to allow the player to visually recognize the image of the effect movable body through the window portion.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix f3)
A game machine according to appendix f2,
Depending on the operation of the effect movable body, the image of the effect movable body visually recognized by the player through the window may change.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix f4)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices f1 to f3,
The decorative body is operable;
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix f5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices f1 to f4,
Provided with a symbol display means capable of executing a variable display of symbols,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix f6)
A gaming machine according to appendix f5,
In the variation display of the symbol by the symbol display means, when the player can visually recognize a part of the image in the effect movable body through the window portion of the decorative body by the operation of the decorative body, The jackpot symbol form is more easily displayed as a final result of the symbol variation display than when the player cannot visually recognize a part of the image on the effect movable body through the window portion of the ornament. Is configured to be
A part of the image in the effect movable body is an image of at least a part of the preview image.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix f7)
A gaming machine according to appendix f5 or f6,
When the player can visually recognize a part of the hold icon image that has been pre-read in the effect movable body through the window portion of the decorative body by the operation of the decorative body, The hold corresponding to the hold icon has been digested and started compared to the case where the player cannot visually recognize a part of the hold icon image that has been pre-read in the effect movable body through the window portion. As a final result of the symbol variation display, it is configured so that the big hit symbol mode is easily displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix f8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices f1 to f7,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g1)
A game machine with image display means,
The image display means can execute a rotation operation,
The image display means on which the rotation operation is performed may display a first image,
When the rotation operation is performed, the aspect ratio of the first image may change.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix g2)
The game stand according to appendix g1,
The image display means on which the rotation operation is performed may display a second image,
When the rotation operation is performed, the second image may not rotate.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix g3)
A gaming machine according to appendix g2,
When the rotation operation is performed, the second image is not rotated.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix g4)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices g1 to g3,
When the rotation operation is performed, an image that has been cut off in the image display unit before the rotation operation is performed may be displayed on the image display unit by performing the rotation operation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix g5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g1 to g4,
When the rotation operation is performed, an image displayed on the image display unit before the rotation operation is performed may be cut off on the image display unit by performing the rotation operation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix g6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g1 to g5,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix g7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g1 to g5,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h1)
A directing movable body capable of performing directing operations to produce a game,
A base body capable of supporting the production movable body;
A game machine equipped with
The production movable body is capable of executing a rotation operation,
One of the effect movable body and the base body is provided with a slip ring,
A conductive portion is provided on the other of the effect movable body and the base body,
When the slip ring and the conductive portion are in contact with each other, power is supplied from the base body side to the rendering movable body side.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix h2)
A game machine according to appendix h1,
The base body is provided with a first communication means,
The production movable body is provided with a second communication means,
The second communication means is means capable of receiving a signal transmitted from the first communication means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix h3)
A gaming machine according to appendix h1 or h2,
Both the first communication means and the second communication means are means capable of optical wireless communication.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix h4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h1 to h3,
Both the first communication means and the second communication means are means capable of laser communication.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix h5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h1 to h4,
The slip ring is provided on the effect movable body,
The conductive portion is provided on the base body.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix h6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h1 to h5,
The effect movable body is provided with image display means,
The second communication means is means capable of receiving an image information signal transmitted from the first communication means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix i1)
A symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display;
Image display means capable of displaying an image;
A first operating means provided at a position operable by the player;
A second operating means provided at a position operable by the player;
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a third type of operation waiting display,
The third type operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for an operation of the first operation means,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a third type of operation response display,
The image display means is display means capable of displaying a fourth type of operation response display,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a fifth type of operation response display,
The third type of operation response display is a display performed in response to the operation of the first operation means,
The third type of operation response display is a display configured without including a part of the display performed when waiting for operation of the second operation means,
The fourth type operation response display is a display performed in response to the operation of the first operation means,
The fourth type of operation response display is a display configured to include the part of the display performed when waiting for operation of the second operation means,
The fifth type of operation response display is a display performed in response to the operation of the second operation means,
The symbol variation display in which the fifth type of operation response display is performed rather than the symbol variation display in which the third type of operation response display is performed without performing the fifth type of operation response display. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix i2)
The game stand according to appendix i1,
Any type of the third type operation response display and the fourth type operation response display in response to the operation of the first operation means during the display of the third operation waiting display Is displayed before the third operation waiting display is displayed on the image display means,
The third operation waiting display is an operation waiting display of the third type operation waiting display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix i3)
A game machine according to appendix i1 or i2,
The image display means can display a fourth type of operation waiting display,
The fourth type operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for an operation of the first operation means,
The fourth type operation response display is configured to be displayed on the image display means when the first operation means is operated while the fourth type operation waiting display is displayed. ,
The symbol variation display in which the fourth type operation waiting display is performed rather than the symbol variation display in which the third type operation waiting display is performed without performing the fourth type operation waiting display. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix i4)
The game stand according to appendix i3,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a first type operation waiting display,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a first type of operation response display,
The first type operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for an operation of the first operation means,
The first type of operation response display is a display configured without including a display performed when waiting for an operation of the second operation means,
The first type operation response display is displayed on the image display means when the first operation means is operated while the first type operation waiting display is displayed. ,
The first operation response display is configured to be displayed only when the first operation means is operated during display of the first operation waiting display,
The fourth operation response display is configured to be displayed when the first operation means is operated during display of the fourth operation waiting display,
The fourth operation response display is configured to be displayed even when the first operation means is not operated during the display of the fourth operation waiting display,
The first operation waiting display is an operation waiting display of the first type operation waiting display,
The first operation response display is an operation response display of the first type of operation response display,
The fourth operation waiting display is an operation waiting display of the fourth type operation waiting display,
The fourth operation response display is an operation response display of the fourth type of operation response display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix i5)
The game stand according to appendix i4,
The symbol variation display in which the fifth type operation response display is performed rather than the symbol variation display in which the first type operation response display is performed without performing the fifth type operation response display. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix i6)
The game stand according to appendix i4 or i5,
The symbol variation display in which the first type of operation response display is performed rather than the symbol variation display in which the third type of operation response display is performed without performing the first type of operation response display. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix i7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices i1 to i6,
The fourth type operation response display when the time from when the third type operation waiting display is displayed until the first operation means is operated is the first time is the first type Display,
The fourth type operation response display when the time from when the third type operation waiting display is displayed until the first operation means is operated is the second time is the second type Display,
The second time is longer than the first time,
The initial display of the first display and the initial display of the second display are the same,
The end display of the first display and the end display of the second display are the same,
A gaming table, wherein at least a part of the middle of the first display is not displayed in the second display.
(Appendix i8)
The game stand according to appendix i7,
When the first operation means is operated between the time when the third type operation waiting display is displayed and before the expiration of the operation valid period defined before the start of the third type operation waiting display. The display according to the operation of the first operation means is performed,
The first time is the time from when the third type operation waiting display is started until the first operation means is operated at the shortest timing,
The second time is a time when the first operation means is operated at a timing immediately before the end of the operation valid period after the third type operation waiting display is started. A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix i9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices i1 to i8,
The image display means can display a second type of operation waiting display,
The second type operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for an operation of the second operation means,
The second type operation response display is displayed on the image display means when the second operation means is operated while the second type operation waiting display is being displayed. ,
The symbol variation display in which the fifth type operation response display is performed rather than the symbol variation display in which the second type operation response display is performed without performing the fifth type operation response display. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix i10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices i1 to i9,
The character displayed on the fourth type operation response display is configured to be displayed on the fourth type operation waiting display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix i11)
The game stand according to any one of appendices i1 to i10,
The character displayed on the fourth type operation response display is configured to be displayed on the third type operation waiting display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix i12)
The game stand according to any one of appendices i1 to i11,
The second operating means is configured to be determined to be operated when pressed by a player.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix i13)
The game stand according to any one of appendices i1 to i12,
The first operating means is configured to be determined to be operated when rotated by a player.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix j1)
A game machine equipped with an effect display means capable of executing an effect display,
The effect display means is display means capable of executing symbol variation display,
The effect display means is a display means capable of executing a plurality of types of reach effects,
The effect display means is a display means composed of a plurality of image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a first image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means,
One reach production of the plurality of types of reach production is a first reach production,
One reach production of the plurality of types of reach production is a second reach production,
The symbol variation display in which the second reach effect is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is more easily confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the first reach effect is performed,
It is possible to perform a first wipe effect display in the first image display means after a display suggesting a shift is performed in the second reach effect.
It is possible to perform a second wipe effect display in the second image display means after a display suggesting a shift is performed in the second reach effect.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix j2)
A game machine according to appendix j1,
According to the first wipe effect display, the image in the first image display means is configured to be wiped out,
By the second wipe effect display, the image in the second image display means is configured to be wiped out.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix j3)
A gaming machine according to appendix j1 or j2,
The pre-reading notice is configured to be performed by at least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix j4)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices j1 to j3,
The image display means constituting the first image display means and the image display means constituting the second image display means are different.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix j5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices j1 to j4,
In the second reach production, multiple types of symbols can be variably displayed,
At least one of the plurality of types of symbols is erased by displaying at least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display, and the wipe effect is displayed. It is configured to redisplay when the display ends,
The one symbol is configured to change from the first display mode to the second display mode,
The first display mode is a display mode of the one symbol before the one wipe effect display is performed,
The second display mode is a display mode of the one symbol after the one wipe effect display is performed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix j6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices j1 to j5,
In the second reach production, it is configured to be able to display a plurality of characters,
One of the plurality of character displays is a display of the first character,
The display of the first character is erased when the wipe effect display of at least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display is displayed. .
(Appendix j7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices j1 to j6,
The background display changes before and after at least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display is performed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix j8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices j1 to j7,
Provided with a ball storage means capable of storing game balls,
The first image display means can display a display (hereinafter referred to as “ball removal display”) for notifying that a game ball is removed from the ball storage means.
The ball removal display is a display that is displayed overlapping the first wipe effect display,
The ball removal display is configured to be visible from the player during the display of the first wipe effect display,
The ball removal display is configured to be visible from the player even during the display of the second wipe effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix j9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices j1 to j8,
The first wipe effect display includes an appearance display of the first wipe display,
The first wipe effect display includes a withdrawal display of the first wipe display,
The second wipe effect display includes an appearance display of the second wipe display,
The second wipe effect display includes a withdrawal display of the second wipe display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix j10)
A game machine according to appendix j9,
The pattern of the first wipe display and the pattern of the second wipe display are different.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix j11)
A gaming machine according to appendix j9 or j10,
The start timing of the appearance display of the first wipe display and the start timing of the appearance display of the second wipe display are different.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix j12)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices j1 to j11,
The second image display means is means capable of executing a movement operation,
In the second image display means performing the moving operation, at least a part of the second wipe effect display is performed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix j13)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices j1 to j12,
The first image display means is means capable of executing a movement operation,
In the first image display means performing the moving operation, at least a part of the first wipe effect display is performed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix j14)
The game stand according to any one of appendices j1 to j13,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix k1)
A gaming machine comprising first image display means capable of displaying an image display,
The first image display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a first reach effect display,
In the first reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift is displayed, the first wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means,
In the first reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift is displayed, a third wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix k2)
A gaming machine according to appendix k1,
According to the first wipe effect display, the image in the first image display means is configured to be wiped out,
By the third wipe effect display, the image in the first image display means is configured to be wiped out.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix k3)
The game stand according to appendix k1 or k2,
In the first reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means after the display suggesting the shift is displayed until the dismissed symbol form is confirmed and displayed. Is configured to be
In the first reach effect display, the third wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means after the display suggesting the shift is displayed until the deviated symbol form is confirmed and displayed. Configured to be the case,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix k4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices k1 to k3,
It is provided with a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix k5)
The game stand according to appendix k4,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a third reach effect display,
In the third reach effect display, the first wipe effect is displayed in the first image display means after the display indicating the shift is displayed until the shift symbol mode is displayed on the symbol display means. The display is configured not to be displayed,
In the third reach effect display, the third wipe effect is displayed in the first image display means after the display indicating the shift is displayed and until the symbol display means is definitely displayed. The display is configured not to be displayed,
The symbol variation display on which the first reach effect display is performed is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means than the symbol variation display on which the third reach effect display is performed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix k6)
A gaming machine according to appendix k5,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a second reach effect display,
In the second reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means after the display suggesting the shift is displayed until the dismissed symbol form is confirmed and displayed. It is configured so that there is no
In the second reach effect display, the third wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means after the display suggesting the shift is displayed until the deviated symbol form is confirmed and displayed. It is configured so that there is no
The symbol variation display on which the second reach effect display is performed is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means than the symbol variation display on which the third reach effect display is performed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix k7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices k1 to k6,
A second image display means capable of displaying an image display;
The first image display means includes a first image display,
The second image display means includes a second image display,
The first image display means is configured without including the second image display,
The second image display means is configured without including the first image display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix k8)
The game stand according to appendix k7,
In the first reach effect display, the second wipe effect display is displayed on the second image display means after the display indicating the shift is displayed until the deviated symbol form is displayed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix k9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices k1 to k8,
In the first reach effect display, the display of the first wipe effect and the third in the first image display means is performed after the display indicating the shift is displayed until the deviated symbol form is displayed. The player can select whether or not to display the wipe effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix k10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices k1 to k9,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix m1)
A gaming machine comprising first image display means capable of displaying an image display,
The first image display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a first reach effect display,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a first look-ahead notice effect display,
In the first reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift is displayed, the first wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means,
At the end of the first wipe effect display, the first prefetch notice effect display may be started,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix m2)
The game stand according to appendix m1,
By the first wipe effect display, the image in the first image display means is configured to be wiped out.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix m3)
A game machine according to appendix m1 or m2,
In the first reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means after the display suggesting the shift is displayed until the dismissed symbol form is confirmed and displayed. Configured to be the case,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix m4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 3,
It is provided with a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix m5)
The game stand according to appendix m4,
In the first reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift is displayed, a third wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means,
At the end of the third wipe effect display, the first prefetch notice effect display may be started,
By the third wipe effect display, the image in the first image display means is configured to be wiped out.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix m6)
The game stand according to appendix m5,
In the first reach effect display, the third wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means after the display suggesting the shift is displayed until the deviated symbol form is confirmed and displayed. Configured to be the case,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix m7)
A gaming machine according to appendix m5 or m6,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a third reach effect display,
In the third reach effect display, the first wipe effect is displayed in the first image display means after the display indicating the shift is displayed until the shift symbol mode is displayed on the symbol display means. The display is configured not to be displayed,
In the third reach effect display, the third wipe effect is displayed in the first image display means after the display indicating the shift is displayed and until the symbol display means is definitely displayed. The display is configured not to be displayed,
The symbol variation display on which the first reach effect display is performed is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means than the symbol variation display on which the third reach effect display is performed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix m8)
The game stand according to appendix m7,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a second reach effect display,
In the second reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means after the display suggesting the shift is displayed until the dismissed symbol form is confirmed and displayed. It is configured so that there is no
In the second reach effect display, the third wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means after the display suggesting the shift is displayed until the deviated symbol form is confirmed and displayed. It is configured so that there is no
The symbol variation display on which the second reach effect display is performed is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means than the symbol variation display on which the third reach effect display is performed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix m9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices m1 to m8,
A second image display means capable of displaying an image display;
The first image display means includes a first image display,
The second image display means includes a second image display,
The first image display means is configured without including the second image display,
The second image display means is configured without including the first image display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix m10)
The game stand according to appendix m9,
In the first reach effect display, the second wipe effect display is displayed on the second image display means after the display indicating the shift is displayed until the deviated symbol form is displayed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix n1)
A gaming machine comprising first image display means capable of displaying an image display,
The first image display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a first reach effect display,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a first jackpot notice effect display,
In the first reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift is displayed, the first wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means,
At the end of the first wipe effect display, the first jackpot notice effect display may be started,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix n2)
A game machine according to appendix n1,
By the first wipe effect display, the image in the first image display means is configured to be wiped out.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix n3)
The game stand according to appendix n1 or n2,
In the first reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means after the display suggesting the shift is displayed until the dismissed symbol form is confirmed and displayed. Configured to be the case,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix n4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices n1 to n3,
It is provided with a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix n5)
A game machine according to appendix n4,
In the first reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift is displayed, a third wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means,
At the end of the third wipe effect display, the first jackpot notice effect display may be started,
By the third wipe effect display, the image in the first image display means is configured to be wiped out.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix n6)
A game machine according to appendix n5,
In the first reach effect display, the third wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means after the display suggesting the shift is displayed until the deviated symbol form is confirmed and displayed. Configured to be the case,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix n7)
A gaming machine according to appendix n5 or n6,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a third reach effect display,
In the third reach effect display, the first wipe effect is displayed in the first image display means after the display indicating the shift is displayed until the shift symbol mode is displayed on the symbol display means. The display is configured not to be displayed,
In the third reach effect display, the third wipe effect is displayed in the first image display means after the display indicating the shift is displayed and until the symbol display means is definitely displayed. The display is configured not to be displayed,
The symbol variation display on which the first reach effect display is performed is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means than the symbol variation display on which the third reach effect display is performed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix n8)
A game machine according to appendix n7,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a second reach effect display,
In the second reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means after the display suggesting the shift is displayed until the dismissed symbol form is confirmed and displayed. It is configured so that there is no
In the second reach effect display, the third wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means after the display suggesting the shift is displayed until the deviated symbol form is confirmed and displayed. It is configured so that there is no
The symbol variation display on which the second reach effect display is performed is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means than the symbol variation display on which the third reach effect display is performed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix n9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices n1 to n8,
A second image display means capable of displaying an image display;
The first image display means includes a first image display,
The second image display means includes a second image display,
The first image display means is configured without including the second image display,
The second image display means is configured without including the first image display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix n10)
A game machine according to appendix n9,
In the first reach effect display, the second wipe effect display is displayed on the second image display means after the display indicating the shift is displayed until the deviated symbol form is displayed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix o1)
A gaming machine comprising first image display means capable of displaying an image display,
The first image display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a first reach effect display,
The first image display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect adjustment screens,
In the first reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift is displayed, the first wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means,
In the first wipe effect display, the effect adjustment screen may start to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix o2)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
By the first wipe effect display, the image in the first image display means is configured to be wiped out.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix o3)
A gaming machine according to appendix o1 or o2,
In the first reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means after the display suggesting the shift is displayed until the dismissed symbol form is confirmed and displayed. Configured to be the case,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix o4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices o1 to o3,
It is provided with a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix o5)
A game machine according to appendix o4
In the first reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift is displayed, a third wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means,
By the third wipe effect display, the image in the first image display means is configured to be wiped out.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix o6)
A game machine according to appendix o5
In the first reach effect display, the third wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means after the display suggesting the shift is displayed until the deviated symbol form is confirmed and displayed. Configured to be the case,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix o7)
A game machine according to appendix o5 or o6,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a third reach effect display,
In the third reach effect display, the first wipe effect is displayed in the first image display means after the display indicating the shift is displayed until the shift symbol mode is displayed on the symbol display means. The display is configured not to be displayed,
In the third reach effect display, the third wipe effect is displayed in the first image display means after the display indicating the shift is displayed and until the symbol display means is definitely displayed. The display is configured not to be displayed,
The symbol variation display on which the first reach effect display is performed is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means than the symbol variation display on which the third reach effect display is performed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix o8)
A game machine according to appendix o7,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a second reach effect display,
In the second reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means after the display suggesting the shift is displayed until the dismissed symbol form is confirmed and displayed. It is configured so that there is no
In the second reach effect display, the third wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means after the display suggesting the shift is displayed until the deviated symbol form is confirmed and displayed. It is configured so that there is no
The symbol variation display on which the second reach effect display is performed is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means than the symbol variation display on which the third reach effect display is performed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix o9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices o1 to o8,
A second image display means capable of displaying an image display;
The first image display means includes a first image display,
The second image display means includes a second image display,
The first image display means is configured without including the second image display,
The second image display means is configured without including the first image display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix o10)
A gaming machine according to appendix o9,
In the first reach effect display, the second wipe effect display is displayed on the second image display means after the display indicating the shift is displayed until the deviated symbol form is displayed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix o11)
The game stand according to any one of appendices o1 to o10,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix p1)
A gaming machine comprising first image display means capable of displaying an image display,
The first image display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a first reach effect display,
The first image display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect adjustment screens,
One display of the plurality of types of effect adjustment screen is a first effect adjustment screen,
One display of the plurality of types of effect adjustment screen is a second effect adjustment screen,
In the first reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift is displayed, the first wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means,
In the first wipe effect display, the first effect adjustment screen may be displayed.
In the first wipe effect display, the second effect adjustment screen is not started to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix p2)
A gaming machine according to appendix p1,
By the first wipe effect display, the image in the first image display means is configured to be wiped out.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix p3)
A gaming machine according to appendix p1 or p2,
In the first reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means after the display suggesting the shift is displayed until the dismissed symbol form is confirmed and displayed. Configured to be the case,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix p4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices p1 to p3,
It is provided with a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix p5)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix p4,
In the first reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift is displayed, a third wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means,
By the third wipe effect display, the image in the first image display means is configured to be wiped out.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix p6)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix p5
In the first reach effect display, the third wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means after the display suggesting the shift is displayed until the deviated symbol form is confirmed and displayed. Configured to be the case,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix p7)
A gaming table according to appendix p5 or p6,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a third reach effect display,
In the third reach effect display, the first wipe effect is displayed in the first image display means after the display indicating the shift is displayed until the shift symbol mode is displayed on the symbol display means. The display is configured not to be displayed,
In the third reach effect display, the third wipe effect is displayed in the first image display means after the display indicating the shift is displayed and until the symbol display means is definitely displayed. The display is configured not to be displayed,
The symbol variation display on which the first reach effect display is performed is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means than the symbol variation display on which the third reach effect display is performed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix p8)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix p7
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a second reach effect display,
In the second reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means after the display suggesting the shift is displayed until the dismissed symbol form is confirmed and displayed. It is configured so that there is no
In the second reach effect display, the third wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means after the display suggesting the shift is displayed until the deviated symbol form is confirmed and displayed. It is configured so that there is no
The symbol variation display on which the second reach effect display is performed is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means than the symbol variation display on which the third reach effect display is performed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix p9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices p1 to p8,
A second image display means capable of displaying an image display;
The first image display means includes a first image display,
The second image display means includes a second image display,
The first image display means is configured without including the second image display,
The second image display means is configured without including the first image display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix p10)
A gaming machine according to appendix 9, wherein
In the first reach effect display, the second wipe effect display is displayed on the second image display means after the display indicating the shift is displayed until the deviated symbol form is displayed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix q1)
Operation means;
A first image display means capable of displaying an image display;
A game machine equipped with
The first image display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a first reach effect display,
When the operation means is operated during display of a screen requesting operation of the operation means, a response display can be displayed on the first image display means,
In the first reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift is displayed, the first wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means,
The response display may be performed during the display of the first wipe effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix q2)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
By the first wipe effect display, the image in the first image display means is configured to be wiped out.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix q3)
A game machine according to appendix q1 or q2,
In the first reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means after the display suggesting the shift is displayed until the dismissed symbol form is confirmed and displayed. Configured to be the case,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix q4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices q1 to q3,
It is provided with a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix q5)
A game machine as set forth in appendix q4,
In the first reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift is displayed, a third wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means,
By the third wipe effect display, the image in the first image display means is configured to be wiped out.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix q6)
A game machine according to appendix 5,
In the first reach effect display, the third wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means after the display suggesting the shift is displayed until the deviated symbol form is confirmed and displayed. Configured to be the case,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix q7)
A game machine according to appendix q5 or q6,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a third reach effect display,
In the third reach effect display, the first wipe effect is displayed in the first image display means after the display indicating the shift is displayed until the shift symbol mode is displayed on the symbol display means. The display is configured not to be displayed,
In the third reach effect display, the third wipe effect is displayed in the first image display means after the display indicating the shift is displayed and until the symbol display means is definitely displayed. The display is configured not to be displayed,
The symbol variation display on which the first reach effect display is performed is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means than the symbol variation display on which the third reach effect display is performed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix q8)
A game machine as set forth in appendix q7,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a second reach effect display,
In the second reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means after the display suggesting the shift is displayed until the dismissed symbol form is confirmed and displayed. It is configured so that there is no
In the second reach effect display, the third wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means after the display suggesting the shift is displayed until the deviated symbol form is confirmed and displayed. It is configured so that there is no
The symbol variation display on which the second reach effect display is performed is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means than the symbol variation display on which the third reach effect display is performed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix q9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices q1 to q8,
A second image display means capable of displaying an image display;
The first image display means includes a first image display,
The second image display means includes a second image display,
The first image display means is configured without including the second image display,
The second image display means is configured without including the first image display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix q10)
A game machine as set forth in appendix q9,
In the first reach effect display, the second wipe effect display is displayed on the second image display means after the display indicating the shift is displayed until the deviated symbol form is displayed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix r1)
A first image display means capable of displaying an image display;
Directing movable body,
A game machine equipped with
The first image display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a first reach effect display,
In the first reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift is displayed, the first wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means,
At least a part of the first wipe effect display may be overlapped with the effect movable body,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix r2)
A gaming machine according to appendix r1,
In the first reach effect display, the effect movable body is configured to operate.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix r3)
A gaming machine according to appendix r1 or r2,
By the first wipe effect display, the image in the first image display means is configured to be wiped out.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix r4)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices r1 to r3,
In the first reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means after the display suggesting the shift is displayed until the dismissed symbol form is confirmed and displayed. Configured to be the case,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix r5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices r1 to r4,
It is provided with a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix r6)
A gaming machine according to appendix r5,
In the first reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift is displayed, a third wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means,
By the third wipe effect display, the image in the first image display means is configured to be wiped out.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix r7)
A gaming machine according to appendix r6,
In the first reach effect display, the third wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means after the display suggesting the shift is displayed until the deviated symbol form is confirmed and displayed. Configured to be the case,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix r8)
A gaming machine according to appendix r6 or r7,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a third reach effect display,
In the third reach effect display, the first wipe effect is displayed in the first image display means after the display indicating the shift is displayed until the shift symbol mode is displayed on the symbol display means. The display is configured not to be displayed,
In the third reach effect display, the third wipe effect is displayed in the first image display means after the display indicating the shift is displayed and until the symbol display means is definitely displayed. The display is configured not to be displayed,
The symbol variation display on which the first reach effect display is performed is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means than the symbol variation display on which the third reach effect display is performed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix r9)
A gaming machine according to appendix r8,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a second reach effect display,
In the second reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means after the display suggesting the shift is displayed until the dismissed symbol form is confirmed and displayed. It is configured so that there is no
In the second reach effect display, the third wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means after the display suggesting the shift is displayed until the deviated symbol form is confirmed and displayed. It is configured so that there is no
The symbol variation display on which the second reach effect display is performed is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means than the symbol variation display on which the third reach effect display is performed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix r10)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices r1 to r9,
A second image display means capable of displaying an image display;
The first image display means includes a first image display,
The second image display means includes a second image display,
The first image display means is configured without including the second image display,
The second image display means is configured without including the first image display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix s1)
A gaming machine comprising first image display means capable of displaying an image display,
The first image display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
In the first timing, the display of the first wipe effect display may be started in the first image display means,
The first timing is a timing after the big hit is started,
The first timing is a timing before the symbol variation display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix s2)
A gaming machine according to attachment s1,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a first reach effect display,
The first wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means after the display indicating the shift is displayed in the first reach effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix s3)
A gaming machine according to appendix s2,
In the first reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means after the display suggesting the shift is displayed until the dismissed symbol form is confirmed and displayed. Configured to be the case,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix s4)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices s1 to s3,
By the first wipe effect display, the image in the first image display means is configured to be wiped out.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix s5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices s1 to s4,
In the first timing, the display of the third wipe effect display may be started in the first image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix s6)
A gaming machine according to appendix s5,
By the third wipe effect display, the image in the first image display means is configured to be wiped out.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix s7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices s1 to s6,
A second image display means capable of displaying an image display;
The first image display means includes a first image display,
The second image display means includes a second image display,
The first image display means is configured without including the second image display,
The second image display means is configured without including the first image display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix s8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices s1 to s7,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix t1)
A gaming machine comprising first image display means capable of displaying an image display,
The first image display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
The first image display means is means provided with a hold display means capable of informing the number of holds,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a first reach effect display,
In the first reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift is displayed, the first wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means,
After the first wipe effect display is ended, the display of the hold display means that was not displayed may be started.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix t2)
A gaming machine according to appendix t1,
By the first wipe effect display, the image in the first image display means is configured to be wiped out.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix t3)
A gaming machine as set forth in appendix t1 or t2,
In the first reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means after the display suggesting the shift is displayed until the dismissed symbol form is confirmed and displayed. Configured to be the case,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix t4)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices t1 to t3,
It is provided with a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix t5)
A gaming machine according to attachment t4,
In the first reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift is displayed, a third wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means,
By the third wipe effect display, the image in the first image display means is configured to be wiped out.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix t6)
A gaming machine as set forth in appendix t5,
In the first reach effect display, the third wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means after the display suggesting the shift is displayed until the deviated symbol form is confirmed and displayed. Configured to be the case,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix t7)
A gaming table according to appendix t5 or t6,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a third reach effect display,
In the third reach effect display, the first wipe effect is displayed in the first image display means after the display indicating the shift is displayed until the shift symbol mode is displayed on the symbol display means. The display is configured not to be displayed,
In the third reach effect display, the third wipe effect is displayed in the first image display means after the display indicating the shift is displayed and until the symbol display means is definitely displayed. The display is configured not to be displayed,
The symbol variation display on which the first reach effect display is performed is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means than the symbol variation display on which the third reach effect display is performed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix t8)
A gaming machine according to appendix t7,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a second reach effect display,
In the second reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means after the display suggesting the shift is displayed until the dismissed symbol form is confirmed and displayed. It is configured so that there is no
In the second reach effect display, the third wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means after the display suggesting the shift is displayed until the deviated symbol form is confirmed and displayed. It is configured so that there is no
The symbol variation display on which the second reach effect display is performed is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means than the symbol variation display on which the third reach effect display is performed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix t9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices t1 to t8,
A second image display means capable of displaying an image display;
The first image display means includes a first image display,
The second image display means includes a second image display,
The first image display means is configured without including the second image display,
The second image display means is configured without including the first image display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix t10)
A gaming machine as set forth in appendix t9,
In the first reach effect display, the second wipe effect display is displayed on the second image display means after the display indicating the shift is displayed until the deviated symbol form is displayed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix u1)
A symbol display means capable of executing a variable display of symbols;
Image display means capable of displaying a number of hold icons corresponding to the number of holds;
A game machine equipped with
The image display means is configured to be capable of displaying a plurality of types of the hold icons (hereinafter referred to as “plural types of hold icons”),
One type of the hold icon of the plurality of types of hold icons is a hold icon in the second mode (hereinafter referred to as “second hold icon”).
One type of the hold icon among the plurality of types of hold icons is a hold icon having a third aspect (hereinafter referred to as “third hold icon”).
The second aspect and the third aspect are different aspects,
In the image display means, there may be a hold effect that is either success or failure in the change of the mode of the hold icon,
In the image display means, one of a plurality of types of holding effects (hereinafter referred to as “plural types of holding effects”) may be performed.
One holding effect of the plurality of types of holding effects is a first holding effect,
When the first hold effect is performed for the second hold icon, the second hold icon may change to the third hold icon,
Even if the first hold effect is performed for the second hold icon, the second hold icon may not change to another type of hold icon,
The variation display of the symbol that starts after digestion of the hold corresponding to the third hold icon is more final than the display of the variation of the symbol that starts after the hold corresponding to the second hold icon is digested. In general, it is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is easy to be confirmed and displayed,
The first hold effect rather than the variable display of the symbol that starts when the hold corresponding to the second hold icon that is not targeted for any hold effect of the plurality of types of hold effects is digested. The symbol variation display that starts after digestion of the hold corresponding to the second hold icon that did not change to another type of hold icon is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the end. Configured as
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix u2)
A game machine according to appendix u1,
The second hold icon that is not the target of any hold effect of the plurality of types of hold effects is the target of the first hold effect rather than the probability that the second hold icon is the target of the first hold effect. The second hold icon that has not changed to another type of hold icon is configured to have a higher probability of being the target of the first hold effect,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix u3)
A game machine according to appendix u1 or u2,
One type of the hold icon of the plurality of types of hold icons is a hold icon having a first aspect (hereinafter referred to as “first hold icon”).
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
The first aspect and the third aspect are different aspects,
The first aspect is a default aspect,
The first hold icon is a default hold icon,
The variation display of the symbol that is started after the hold corresponding to the second hold icon is digested is more final than the display of the variation of the symbol that is started after the hold corresponding to the first hold icon is digested. In general, it is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is easy to confirm and display,
The variation display of the symbol that starts after digestion of the hold corresponding to the third hold icon is more final than the display of the variation of the symbol that starts after the hold corresponding to the first hold icon is digested. In general, it is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is easily displayed and confirmed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix u4)
A gaming machine according to appendix u3,
The image display means is configured to display a changing icon as a hold icon,
When hold is reduced, the hold icon that appears most recently is displayed as the changing icon,
The changing icon is configured to be erased at least before the pending decrease,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix u5)
A game machine according to appendix u3 or u4,
One holding effect of the plurality of types of holding effects is a second holding effect,
The first hold effect and the second hold effect are different hold effects,
When the second hold effect is performed for the second hold icon, the second hold icon may change to the third hold icon,
Even if the second hold effect is performed for the second hold icon, the second hold icon may not change to another type of hold icon,
The hold icon is more likely to be the first hold effect than the probability that the second hold icon that has been the target of the first hold effect and has not changed to another type of hold icon is the second hold effect. It is configured so that the probability of being directed is higher,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix u6)
A gaming machine according to appendix u5,
Rather than the probability that the first hold effect is performed for the second hold icon and the second hold icon changes to the third hold icon, the second hold icon is used for the second hold icon. Is configured to have a higher probability that the second hold icon is changed to the third hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix u7)
A gaming machine according to appendix u5 or u6,
The image display means can display a changing icon (hereinafter referred to as a “second changing icon”) according to the second aspect,
The image display means can display a changing icon (hereinafter referred to as “third changing icon”) according to the third aspect,
One holding effect of the plurality of types of holding effects is a third holding effect,
The first hold effect and the third hold effect are different hold effects,
The second hold effect and the third hold effect are different hold effects,
When the third hold effect is performed for the second changing icon, the second changing icon may change to the third changing icon,
Even if the third holding effect is performed for the second changing icon, the second changing icon may not change to another type of holding icon.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix u8)
A game machine according to appendix u7,
Rather than the probability that the second hold icon, which is the target of the first hold effect and has not changed to another type of hold icon, becomes the changing icon, becomes the target of the first hold effect. It is configured such that the probability that the changing icon is the target of the third holding effect is higher,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix u9)
A gaming machine according to appendix u7 or u8,
In the symbol variation display that is started after digestion of the hold corresponding to the second hold icon that was not the target of any hold effect among the plurality of types of hold effects, The symbol that is the target of the first hold effect and has started after the hold corresponding to the second hold icon that has not been changed to another type of hold icon is digested rather than the probability that the third hold effect is performed. It is configured such that the probability that the third holding effect for the changing icon is performed in the variable display is higher.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix u10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices u7 to u9,
The first target for the changing icon in the symbol change display started after the holding corresponding to the second holding icon that has been the target of the first holding effect and did not change to another type of holding icon has been digested. When the third hold effect is made, it is configured to be likely to be the success.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix u11)
The game stand according to any one of appendices u7 to u10,
The image display means can display a changing icon (hereinafter referred to as “first changing icon”) according to the first aspect,
The first changing icon is a default changing icon,
The variation display of the symbol in which the second variation icon is displayed is more final than the variation display of the symbol in which the first variation icon is displayed and the other types of variation icons are not displayed. Is configured so that the big win symbol pattern is easy to confirm and display,
The variation display of the symbol in which the third variation icon is displayed is more final than the variation display of the symbol in which the first variation icon is displayed and the other types of variation icons are not displayed. Is configured so that the big win symbol pattern is easy to confirm and display,
The variation display of the symbol in which the third variable icon is displayed is more final than the variation display of the symbol in which the second variation icon is displayed and the other types of variation icons are not displayed. It is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is easy to be confirmed and displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix u12)
The game stand according to any one of appendices u1 to u11,
Provided with a ball storage means capable of storing game balls,
The image display means is a means capable of displaying a display prompting to discharge a game ball from the ball storage means (hereinafter referred to as “ball discharge display”),
At least one hold effect of the plurality of types of hold effects displayed in the state where the ball discharge display is displayed is configured to be overlapped with the ball discharge display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix v1)
A game machine comprising image display means including an image display,
The image display means can execute an operation according to a first movement pattern (hereinafter referred to as “first operation”),
When a change condition is satisfied during the execution of the first operation by the image display means, the fourth operation is performed even in the middle of the first movement pattern.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix v2)
A gaming machine as set forth in appendix v1,
The first movement pattern refers to at least a position different from the first position (hereinafter referred to as “second position”) of the image display means in the initial position (hereinafter referred to as “first position”). The movement pattern is moved to the first position after being moved to.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix v3)
A gaming machine as set forth in appendix v2,
The fourth operation is an operation including an operation of returning to the first position.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix v4)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices v1 to v3,
The fourth operation is an operation including a stop operation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix v5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices v1 to v4,
The image display means can execute an operation according to a second movement pattern (hereinafter referred to as “second operation”),
When the change condition is satisfied during the execution of the second operation by the image display means, the fourth operation is performed even in the middle of the second movement pattern. ,
The game machine characterized in that the second movement pattern is a movement pattern different from the first movement pattern.
(Appendix v6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices v1 to v5,
It has a symbol display means,
The image display means can execute an operation according to a third movement pattern (hereinafter referred to as “third operation”),
The third movement pattern is a movement pattern different from the first movement pattern,
The third operation is an operation including an operation that moves in a first direction,
During execution of the third operation, an image of the pattern moved in the second direction opposite to the first direction is displayed on the image display means, so that the pattern is in the first direction. It can be shown to the player as if it is not moving,
In a state before the image display means performs the third operation, an image of a part of the picture (hereinafter referred to as “first picture”) does not fit within the display area of the image display means. Is composed of
By the third operation of the image display means, a first display in which the first image is within the display area of the image display means may be performed as the image of the first pattern.
During the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, the case where the first display is performed is greater than the case where the first display is not performed after the symbol variation display. Is easy to confirm.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix v7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices v1 to v6,
A first image display means different from the image display means (hereinafter referred to as "second image display means");
The first image display means includes a first image display different from the image display (hereinafter referred to as “second image display”),
The position of the second image display means is a position closer to the player than the position of the first image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix v8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices v1 to v7,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix v9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices v1 to v7,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix w1)
A game machine comprising image display means including an image display,
The image display means can execute an operation according to a first movement pattern (hereinafter referred to as “first operation”),
When a change condition is established during execution of the first operation by the image display means, the fourth operation is configured to perform the fourth operation even in the middle of the first movement pattern,
The change condition is satisfied when it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix w2)
The game stand according to appendix w1,
The first movement pattern refers to at least a position different from the first position (hereinafter referred to as “second position”) of the image display means in the initial position (hereinafter referred to as “first position”). The movement pattern is moved to the first position after being moved to.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix w3)
A game machine according to appendix w2,
The fourth operation is an operation including an operation of returning to the first position.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix w4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices w1 to w3,
The fourth operation is an operation including a stop operation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix w5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices w1 to w4,
The image display means can execute an operation according to a second movement pattern (hereinafter referred to as “second operation”),
When the change condition is satisfied during the execution of the second operation by the image display means, the fourth operation is performed even in the middle of the second movement pattern. ,
The game machine characterized in that the second movement pattern is a movement pattern different from the first movement pattern.
(Appendix w6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices w1 to w5,
It has a symbol display means,
The image display means can execute an operation according to a third movement pattern (hereinafter referred to as “third operation”),
The third movement pattern is a movement pattern different from the first movement pattern,
The third operation is an operation including an operation that moves in a first direction,
During execution of the third operation, an image of the pattern moved in the second direction opposite to the first direction is displayed on the image display means, so that the pattern is in the first direction. It can be shown to the player as if it is not moving,
In a state before the image display means performs the third operation, an image of a part of the picture (hereinafter referred to as “first picture”) does not fit within the display area of the image display means. Is composed of
By the third operation of the image display means, a first display in which the first image is within the display area of the image display means may be performed as the image of the first pattern.
During the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, the case where the first display is performed is greater than the case where the first display is not performed after the symbol variation display. Is easy to confirm.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix w7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices w1 to w6,
A first image display means different from the image display means (hereinafter referred to as "second image display means");
The first image display means includes a first image display different from the image display (hereinafter referred to as “second image display”),
The position of the second image display means is a position closer to the player than the position of the first image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix w8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices w1 to w7,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix w9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices w1 to w7,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix x1)
Image display means comprising an image display;
Design display means;
A game machine equipped with
The image display means is capable of performing a first movement;
The first motion is a motion that moves in a first direction,
During execution of the first movement, an image of the pattern moved in the second direction opposite to the first direction is displayed on the image display means, so that the pattern is in the first direction. It can be shown to the player as if it is not moving,
In a state before the image display means performs the first movement, an image of a part of the picture (hereinafter referred to as “first picture”) does not fit within the display area of the image display means. Is composed of
The first movement of the image display means may cause a first display in which the first image is within the display area of the image display means as the image of the first pattern.
During the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, the case where the first display is performed is greater than the case where the first display is not performed after the symbol variation display. Is easy to confirm.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix x2)
The game stand according to appendix x1,
Due to the first movement of the image display means, a second display in which the second image is within the display area of the image display means may be performed as the image of the first pattern.
The first image and the second image are different images,
During execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, the case where the second display is performed rather than the case where the second display is performed is a jackpot symbol aspect after the symbol variation display. Is easy to confirm.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix x3)
A game machine according to appendix x2,
During the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, when the second display is performed rather than the case where the first display is performed, the jackpot symbol aspect after the symbol variation display is Easy to confirm,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix x4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices x1 to x3,
The image display means is capable of performing a second movement;
The second movement is an action that moves in the second direction,
By displaying the image of the pattern moved in the first direction on the image display means during the execution of the second exercise, the player can be sure that the pattern does not move in the second direction. Can be shown,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix x5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices x1 to x4,
During the execution of the first exercise, a moving image of the pattern is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix x6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices x1 to x5,
A first image display means different from the image display means (hereinafter referred to as "second image display means");
The first image display means includes a first image display different from the image display (hereinafter referred to as “second image display”),
The position where the first exercise is performed is a position closer to the player than the position of the first image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix x7)
The game stand according to appendix x6,
The height and width of the first image display are different,
The height and width of the second image display are different,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix x8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices x1 to x7,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix x9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices x1 to x7,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix y1)
Image display means comprising an image display;
Design display means;
A game machine equipped with
The image display means is capable of performing a first movement;
The first motion is a motion that moves in a first direction,
During execution of the first movement, an image of the pattern moved in the second direction opposite to the first direction is displayed on the image display means, so that the pattern is in the first direction. It can be shown to the player as if it is not moving,
In a state before the image display means performs the first movement, an image of a part of the picture (hereinafter referred to as “first picture”) does not fit within the display area of the image display means. Is composed of
The first movement of the image display means may cause a first display in which the first image is within the display area of the image display means as the image of the first pattern.
During the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, the case where the first display is performed is greater than the case where the first display is not performed after the symbol variation display. Is easy to confirm,
The first movement is a movement including a linear movement.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix y2)
A game machine according to appendix y1,
Due to the first movement of the image display means, a second display in which the second image is within the display area of the image display means may be performed as the image of the first pattern.
The first image and the second image are different images,
During execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, the case where the second display is performed rather than the case where the second display is performed is a jackpot symbol aspect after the symbol variation display. Is easy to confirm.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix y3)
A game machine according to appendix y2,
During the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, when the second display is performed rather than the case where the first display is performed, the jackpot symbol aspect after the symbol variation display is Easy to confirm,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix y4)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices y1 to y3,
The image display means is capable of performing a second movement;
The second movement is an action that moves in the second direction,
By displaying the image of the pattern moved in the first direction on the image display means during the execution of the second exercise, the player can be sure that the pattern does not move in the second direction. Can be shown,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix y5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices y1 to y4,
During the execution of the first exercise, a moving image of the pattern is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix y6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices y1 to y5,
A first image display means different from the image display means (hereinafter referred to as "second image display means");
The first image display means includes a first image display different from the image display (hereinafter referred to as “second image display”),
The position where the first exercise is performed is a position closer to the player than the position of the first image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix y7)
A gaming machine according to appendix y6,
The height and width of the first image display are different,
The height and width of the second image display are different,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix y8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices y1 to y7,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix y9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices y1 to y7,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix z1)
Image display means comprising an image display;
Design display means;
A game machine equipped with
The image display means is capable of performing a first movement;
The first motion is a motion that moves in a first direction,
During execution of the first movement, an image of the pattern moved in the second direction opposite to the first direction is displayed on the image display means, so that the pattern is in the first direction. It can be shown to the player as if it is not moving,
In a state before the image display means performs the first movement, an image of a part of the picture (hereinafter referred to as “first picture”) does not fit within the display area of the image display means. Is composed of
The first movement of the image display means may cause a first display in which the first image is within the display area of the image display means as the image of the first pattern.
During the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, the case where the first display is performed is greater than the case where the first display is not performed after the symbol variation display. Is easy to confirm,
A structure is provided at an edge of the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix z2)
A gaming machine according to appendix z1,
Due to the first movement of the image display means, a second display in which the second image is within the display area of the image display means may be performed as the image of the first pattern.
The first image and the second image are different images,
During execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, the case where the second display is performed rather than the case where the second display is performed is a jackpot symbol aspect after the symbol variation display. Is easy to confirm.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix z3)
A game machine according to appendix z2,
During the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, when the second display is performed rather than the case where the first display is performed, the jackpot symbol aspect after the symbol variation display is Easy to confirm,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix z4)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices z1 to z3,
The image display means is capable of performing a second movement;
The second movement is an action that moves in the second direction,
By displaying the image of the pattern moved in the first direction on the image display means during the execution of the second exercise, the player can be sure that the pattern does not move in the second direction. Can be shown,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix z5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices z1 to z4,
During the execution of the first exercise, a moving image of the pattern is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix z6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices z1 to z5,
A first image display means different from the image display means (hereinafter referred to as "second image display means");
The first image display means includes a first image display different from the image display (hereinafter referred to as “second image display”),
The position where the first exercise is performed is a position closer to the player than the position of the first image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix z7)
A game machine according to appendix z6,
The height and width of the first image display are different,
The height and width of the second image display are different,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix z8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices z1 to z7,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix z9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices z1 to z7,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

100 Pachinko machine 136 Chance button 208 Decorative symbol display device 224 Production movable body 226 General winning opening 228, 229 General drawing starting opening 230 Special drawing 1 starting opening 232 Special drawing 2 starting opening 232a Blade member 234 Variable winning opening 234a Door member 300 main Control unit 400 First sub control unit 500 Second sub control unit 2000 Slot machine

Claims (10)

A gaming machine comprising first image display means capable of displaying an image display,
The first image display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a first reach effect display,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a first look-ahead notice effect display,
In the first reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift is displayed, the first wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means,
At the end of the first wipe effect display, the first prefetch notice effect display may be started,
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
By the first wipe effect display, the image in the first image display means is configured to be wiped out.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1 or 2,
In the first reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means after the display suggesting the shift is displayed until the dismissed symbol form is confirmed and displayed. Configured to be the case,
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 3,
It is provided with a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 4,
In the first reach effect display, after a display suggesting a shift is displayed, a third wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means,
At the end of the third wipe effect display, the first prefetch notice effect display may be started,
By the third wipe effect display, the image in the first image display means is configured to be wiped out.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 5,
In the first reach effect display, the third wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means after the display suggesting the shift is displayed until the deviated symbol form is confirmed and displayed. Configured to be the case,
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 5 or 6,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a third reach effect display,
In the third reach effect display, the first wipe effect is displayed in the first image display means after the display indicating the shift is displayed until the shift symbol mode is displayed on the symbol display means. The display is configured not to be displayed,
In the third reach effect display, the third wipe effect is displayed in the first image display means after the display indicating the shift is displayed and until the symbol display means is definitely displayed. The display is configured not to be displayed,
The symbol variation display on which the first reach effect display is performed is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means than the symbol variation display on which the third reach effect display is performed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 7,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect display is a second reach effect display,
In the second reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means after the display suggesting the shift is displayed until the dismissed symbol form is confirmed and displayed. It is configured so that there is no
In the second reach effect display, the third wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means after the display suggesting the shift is displayed until the deviated symbol form is confirmed and displayed. It is configured so that there is no
The symbol variation display on which the second reach effect display is performed is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means than the symbol variation display on which the third reach effect display is performed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 8,
A second image display means capable of displaying an image display;
The first image display means includes a first image display,
The second image display means includes a second image display,
The first image display means is configured without including the second image display,
The second image display means is configured without including the first image display.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 9,
In the first reach effect display, the second wipe effect display is displayed on the second image display means after the display indicating the shift is displayed until the deviated symbol form is displayed. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.

Images